Throughout this manual, products from Rohde & Schwarz are indicated without the symbol , e.g. R&S SMA100B is indicated as. R&S SMAB. Linux is ...
R&S®SMA100B RF Signal Generator User Manual
(;ÜVR2)
1178383402 Version 07
This document describes the R&S®SMA100B models, stock no. 1419.8888.02/.04 and its options: R&S®SMAB-B1H R&S®SMAB-B28 R&S®SMAB-B29 R&S®SMAB-B32/-B34/-B35/-B37/-B39 R&S®SMAB-B80/-B85 R&S®SMAB-B81/-B82 R&S®SMAB-B86 R&S®SMAB-B92/-B93 R&S®SMAB-B103/-B106/-B112/-B120/-B131/-B140(N)/-B150(N)/-B167(N) R&S®SMAB-B709/-B710(N)/-B711(N) R&S®SMAB-K22/-K23/-K24/-K27 R&S®SMAB-K25 R&S®SMAB-K31/-K33 R&S®SMAB-K40 R&S®SMAB-K703 R&S®SMAB-K704 R&S®SMAB-K720/-K721 R&S®SMAB-K722 R&S®SMAB-K723 R&S®SMAB-K724 R&S®SMAB-K725 This manual describes firmware version FW 4.70.205.xx and later of the R&S®SMA100B.
© 2021 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0 Email: info@rohde-schwarz.com Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com Subject to change data without tolerance limits is not binding. R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG. Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
1178.3834.02 | Version 07 | R&S®SMA100B
Throughout this manual, products from Rohde & Schwarz are indicated without the ® symbol , e.g. R&S®SMA100B is indicated as R&S SMAB. Linux® is abbreviated as Linux.
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
Contents
1 Preface.................................................................................................. 19
1.1 Key Features................................................................................................................19 1.2 About this Manual....................................................................................................... 19 1.3 Documentation Overview........................................................................................... 20 1.3.1 Getting Started Manual................................................................................................. 21 1.3.2 User Manuals and Help.................................................................................................21 1.3.3 Service Manual............................................................................................................. 21 1.3.4 Instrument Security Procedures....................................................................................21 1.3.5 Printed Safety Instructions............................................................................................ 21 1.3.6 Data Sheets and Brochures.......................................................................................... 21 1.3.7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment (OSA).......................................... 22 1.3.8 Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc..............................................22
2 Safety and Regulatory Information.................................................... 23
2.1 Safety Instructions......................................................................................................23 2.2 Labels on R&S SMA100B........................................................................................... 25 2.3 Korea Certification Class A........................................................................................26
3 Getting Started..................................................................................... 27
3.1 Preparing for Use........................................................................................................ 27 3.1.1 Lifting and Carrying....................................................................................................... 27 3.1.2 Unpacking and Checking.............................................................................................. 27 3.1.3 Choosing the Operating Site......................................................................................... 27 3.1.4 Setting Up the R&S SMA100B......................................................................................28 3.1.4.1 Placing the R&S SMA100B on a Bench Top.................................................................28 3.1.4.2 Mounting the R&S SMA100B in a Rack........................................................................29 3.1.5 Important Aspects for Test Setup.................................................................................. 30 3.1.6 Connecting to Power.....................................................................................................31 3.1.7 Connecting to LAN........................................................................................................ 31 3.1.8 Connecting USB Devices..............................................................................................32 3.1.9 Connecting to RF.......................................................................................................... 32 3.1.10 Connecting to Ref In/Ref Out........................................................................................ 34 3.1.11 Switching On or Off....................................................................................................... 35
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
3
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
3.2 Instrument Tour........................................................................................................... 36 3.2.1 Front Panel Tour............................................................................................................37 3.2.1.1 Touchscreen..................................................................................................................38 3.2.1.2 Utility Keys.................................................................................................................... 38 3.2.1.3 On/Standby................................................................................................................... 39 3.2.1.4 Function Keys............................................................................................................... 39 3.2.1.5 Keypad.......................................................................................................................... 39 3.2.1.6 Navigation Controls.......................................................................................................40
Rotary Knob.................................................................................................................. 40 Editing Keys.................................................................................................................. 40 Navigation Keys............................................................................................................ 40 3.2.1.7 Display Keys................................................................................................................. 41 3.2.1.8 USB Connector............................................................................................................. 41 3.2.1.9 SD card slot...................................................................................................................41 3.2.1.10 Sensor...........................................................................................................................42 3.2.1.11 RF 50 .........................................................................................................................42 3.2.1.12 Pulse Signal Connectors...............................................................................................43 3.2.1.13 LF Modulation Connectors............................................................................................ 43 3.2.1.14 Clock Synthesizer Connectors...................................................................................... 43 3.2.2 Rear Panel Tour............................................................................................................ 44 3.2.2.1 Connectors....................................................................................................................45 3.3 Trying Out the Instrument.......................................................................................... 47 3.3.1 Generating an Unmodulated Carrier............................................................................. 48 3.3.2 Generating an RF Frequency Sweep Signal.................................................................50 3.3.3 Saving and Recalling Settings...................................................................................... 52 3.4 Instrument Control......................................................................................................55 3.4.1 Possible Ways to Operate the Instrument.....................................................................56 3.4.2 Means of Manual Interaction.........................................................................................56 3.4.3 Understanding the Display Information......................................................................... 57 3.4.3.1 Status Bar..................................................................................................................... 57 3.4.3.2 Tile Diagram.................................................................................................................. 57 3.4.3.3 Taskbar..........................................................................................................................58 3.4.3.4 Additional Display Characteristics.................................................................................59
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
4
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
3.4.4 Accessing the Functionality...........................................................................................60 3.4.5 Entering Data................................................................................................................ 61 3.4.5.1 Entering Numeric Parameters.......................................................................................62 3.4.5.2 Entering Alphanumeric Parameters.............................................................................. 62 3.4.5.3 Undo and Redo Actions................................................................................................ 62 3.4.6 Getting Information and Help........................................................................................ 62 3.4.7 Remote Control............................................................................................................. 64 3.4.8 Remote Operation over VNC........................................................................................ 65
4 RF Signal Configuration...................................................................... 66
4.1 Activating RF Signal Output...................................................................................... 67 4.2 How to Set the Frequency and Level........................................................................ 67 4.3 RF Connector Settings............................................................................................... 69 4.4 RF Frequency Settings............................................................................................... 71 4.5 RF Level Settings........................................................................................................ 74 4.6 RF Phase Settings.......................................................................................................78
5 Analog Modulations.............................................................................80
5.1 Required Options........................................................................................................ 80 5.2 Modulation Types and Signal Sources......................................................................80 5.3 Activating Analog Modulations................................................................................. 82 5.4 Modulation Settings....................................................................................................83 5.4.1 Pulse Modulation...........................................................................................................83 5.4.2 FM, PhiM and AM Modulation Settings.........................................................................85 5.4.3 Chirp Modulation........................................................................................................... 92 5.4.3.1 Chirp Modulation Settings............................................................................................. 94
Chirp Modulation........................................................................................................... 94 Pulse External / Trigger ................................................................................................97 5.4.4 Pulse Generator............................................................................................................ 97 5.4.4.1 Pulse Generator > General Settings............................................................................. 98 5.4.4.2 Pulse Generator > Pulse Train Settings......................................................................103 5.4.4.3 Import/Export List Files............................................................................................... 107 5.4.5 Pulse Graph.................................................................................................................110 5.4.6 Pulse External / Trigger Settings................................................................................. 111 5.4.7 FM, PhiM and AM Modulation Sources....................................................................... 112
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
5
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
5.4.7.1 Source > LF Generator Settings..................................................................................112 5.4.7.2 Source > External Settings..........................................................................................116 5.4.7.3 Source > Noise Generator Settings.............................................................................118
5.4.8 LF Signal Output Settings............................................................................................119 5.4.9 Overview..................................................................................................................... 121
5.5 How to Generate an Amplitude Modulated Signal................................................. 123 5.6 How to Generate a Pulse Modulated Signal........................................................... 123 5.7 How to Generate a Pulse Train Modulated Signal..................................................124
6 Avionic Standards..............................................................................126
6.1 Required Options...................................................................................................... 126 6.2 About the Avionics Options..................................................................................... 126 6.2.1 VHF Omni Directional Radio Range (VOR)................................................................ 127 6.2.2 Instrument Landing System (ILS)................................................................................128 6.2.3 Automatic Direction Finder (ADF)............................................................................... 131 6.3 VOR Configuration and Settings............................................................................. 132 6.3.1 General Settings......................................................................................................... 132 6.3.2 Signal Settings............................................................................................................ 135 6.3.3 Position Settings......................................................................................................... 137 6.3.4 COM/ID Settings......................................................................................................... 138 6.4 ILS Configuration and Settings............................................................................... 140 6.4.1 General Settings......................................................................................................... 140 6.4.2 ILS Glide Slope Settings............................................................................................. 143 6.4.2.1 General Settings......................................................................................................... 143 6.4.2.2 Signal Settings............................................................................................................ 145 6.4.2.3 Amplitude Settings...................................................................................................... 147 6.4.3 ILS Localizer Settings................................................................................................. 149 6.4.3.1 General Settings ........................................................................................................ 150 6.4.3.2 Signal Settings............................................................................................................ 152 6.4.3.3 Amplitude Settings...................................................................................................... 153 6.4.3.4 COM/ID Settings......................................................................................................... 156 6.4.4 ILS Marker Beacons Settings......................................................................................158 6.4.4.1 General Settings......................................................................................................... 159 6.4.4.2 Signal Settings............................................................................................................ 160
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
6
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
6.4.4.3 COM/ID Settings......................................................................................................... 161 6.5 ADF Configuration and Settings..............................................................................163
6.5.1 General Settings......................................................................................................... 164 6.5.2 COM/ID Settings......................................................................................................... 166
7 List and Sweep Mode.........................................................................169
7.1 Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes......................... 171 7.2 About Sweep Mode................................................................................................... 178 7.2.1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode..................................................................... 179 7.2.2 Sweep Signal Shapes................................................................................................. 181 7.3 About List Mode........................................................................................................ 182 7.4 Significant Parameters and Functions....................................................................183 7.5 Sweep Mode Settings............................................................................................... 185 7.5.1 General Sweep Settings............................................................................................. 185 7.5.2 Frequency Range Settings..........................................................................................192 7.5.3 Level Range Settings.................................................................................................. 194 7.5.4 Output Settings........................................................................................................... 196 7.5.5 Edit Marker Settings....................................................................................................197 7.6 List Mode Settings.................................................................................................... 199 7.6.1 General Settings......................................................................................................... 200 7.6.2 List Mode Data Settings.............................................................................................. 202 7.6.3 Import/Export Settings.................................................................................................203 7.7 List Editor.................................................................................................................. 205 7.8 How to Generate a Signal in List or Sweep Mode..................................................209
8 Improving Level Performance...........................................................211
8.1 Attenuator.................................................................................................................. 211 8.1.1 Attenuator Settings......................................................................................................212 8.1.2 Reverse Power Protection.......................................................................................... 214
8.2 Automatic Level Control (ALC)................................................................................214 8.2.1 ALC Settings............................................................................................................... 215
8.3 User Correction......................................................................................................... 216 8.3.1 User Correction Settings............................................................................................. 219 8.3.2 List Editor.................................................................................................................... 221 8.3.3 Fill with Sensor............................................................................................................224
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
7
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
8.3.4 Import/Export List Files............................................................................................... 226 8.4 Using Power Sensors............................................................................................... 228
8.4.1 Connecting R&S NRP Power Sensors to the R&S SMA100B.................................... 229 8.4.2 NRP Sensor Mapping................................................................................................. 230 8.4.3 NRP Power Viewer......................................................................................................233 8.4.3.1 About...........................................................................................................................233 8.4.3.2 NRP Power Viewer Settings........................................................................................235 8.4.4 NRP-Z Power Analysis................................................................................................240 8.4.4.1 Required Options........................................................................................................ 240 8.4.4.2 About...........................................................................................................................241 8.4.4.3 Accessing the NRP-Z Power Analysis Functionality................................................... 243 8.4.4.4 Test Setup Example.................................................................................................... 245 8.4.4.5 NRP-Z Traces/Markers Settings................................................................................. 245
Traces Settings........................................................................................................... 247 Markers Settings......................................................................................................... 249 8.4.4.6 NRP-Z Configure Settings...........................................................................................250 Configure Measurement Settings................................................................................250 Configure Sensors Settings........................................................................................ 254 Configure Diagram...................................................................................................... 257 Configure Time Mode Settings....................................................................................259 Trace Settings............................................................................................................. 259 Pulse Data Notifications Settings................................................................................ 261 Trigger Settings........................................................................................................... 266 Gate Mode Settings.................................................................................................... 268 Next Window List........................................................................................................ 270 8.4.4.7 Creating Screenshots of Power Analysis Settings ..................................................... 274 Save (Power Analysis) Settings.................................................................................. 274 How to Save a Hardcopy of the Power Analysis Window........................................... 279 8.4.4.8 How to Setup a Frequency Sweep Measurement.......................................................281 8.4.4.9 How to Setup a Power Sweep Measurement............................................................. 282 8.4.4.10 How to Setup a Pulse Measurement...........................................................................282 8.4.4.11 How to Configure the Power Analysis Diagram.......................................................... 283 8.5 How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor.................... 284
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
8
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
9 Reference Oscillator.......................................................................... 288
9.1 Required Options...................................................................................................... 288 9.2 Reference Frequency Settings................................................................................ 288 9.3 Reference Output Settings.......................................................................................292 9.4 Adjustment Settings................................................................................................. 293 9.5 Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization...................... 294
10 Clock Synthesis................................................................................. 298
11 File and Data Management................................................................302
11.1 About the File System.............................................................................................. 302 11.2 Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration................................................. 305 11.2.1 Preset, Set to Default and Factory Preset Settings.....................................................307 11.2.2 How to Identify Parameters Which Are Not in a Preset State..................................... 308 11.2.3 How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset............................................. 309 11.2.4 Reference....................................................................................................................309 11.3 Protecting Data..........................................................................................................310 11.4 Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings............................................................. 311 11.4.1 Save/Recall Settings................................................................................................... 311 11.4.2 How to Save and Recall Instrument Settings..............................................................314 11.5 Accessing Files with User Data............................................................................... 315 11.5.1 File Select Settings..................................................................................................... 315 11.6 Exporting and Importing Remote Command Lists................................................ 317 11.7 Loading, Importing and Exporting Lists................................................................. 318 11.8 Using the File Manager.............................................................................................318 11.8.1 File Manager Settings................................................................................................. 319 11.8.2 Map Network Share Settings...................................................................................... 320 11.8.3 How to Display All Saved Files................................................................................... 322 11.8.4 How to Map a Network Folder.....................................................................................322 11.9 How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument................................................. 325 11.9.1 Removing File System Protection............................................................................... 325 11.9.2 Accessing the File System of the R&S SMA100B via ftp............................................327 11.9.3 Accessing the R&S SMA100B File System via SMB (Samba)................................... 328 11.9.4 Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer............................................................330 11.9.5 Using a File Server for Test Files Exchange............................................................... 330
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
9
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
11.10 Creating Screenshots of Current Settings............................................................. 331 11.10.1 Hardcopy Settings.......................................................................................................331 11.10.2 How to Save a Hardcopy of the Display......................................................................335
12 General Instrument Functions.......................................................... 337
12.1 Customizing the User Interface............................................................................... 337 12.1.1 Display and Keyboard Settings................................................................................... 338 12.1.2 Display Update Settings..............................................................................................339 12.1.3 Defining the RF Signal State On Power On ............................................................... 340 12.1.4 How to Set the Initial Instrument Settings................................................................... 341 12.1.4.1 Setting the Keyboard Language..................................................................................341 12.1.4.2 Setting the Screen Saver............................................................................................ 341
12.2 Organizing Frequently Used Settings as Favorites............................................... 342 12.2.1 User Menu Settings.....................................................................................................343 12.2.2 How To Use the User Menu for Fast Adjustments...................................................... 344 12.2.3 Define User Key Actions Settings............................................................................... 346 12.2.4 How to Assign Actions to the [ (User)] Key.............................................................. 348
12.3 Managing Licenses and License Keys....................................................................349 12.3.1 Manage License Keys Settings...................................................................................349 12.3.2 How to Move a Portable License................................................................................ 352
12.4 Using the Security Settings..................................................................................... 353 12.4.1 Protection Level Settings............................................................................................ 354 12.4.2 Setting Security Parameters....................................................................................... 355 12.4.2.1 Update Policy Security Settings.................................................................................. 356 12.4.2.2 Disk & Memory Security Settings................................................................................357 12.4.2.3 Manual Operation Security Settings............................................................................358 12.4.3 Configuring LAN Services........................................................................................... 361 12.4.4 Password Management.............................................................................................. 363 12.4.5 How to Prevent Unauthorized Access.........................................................................365
12.5 Undoing or Restoring Actions................................................................................. 368 12.6 Shutting Down and Rebooting the Instrument.......................................................370
13 Network Operation and Remote Control..........................................371
13.1 Overview of Remote Access Modes........................................................................371 13.2 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols.............................................................. 373
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
10
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
13.2.1 LAN Interface.............................................................................................................. 374 13.2.1.1 VISA Resource Strings............................................................................................... 374 13.2.1.2 HiSLIP Protocol...........................................................................................................376 13.2.1.3 VXI-11 Protocol........................................................................................................... 376 13.2.1.4 Socket Communication............................................................................................... 376
13.2.2 USB Interface..............................................................................................................377 13.2.2.1 USB Resource String.................................................................................................. 377
13.2.3 GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)....................................................................377 13.2.4 LXI Browser Interface..................................................................................................378
13.3 Remote Control Programs and Libraries................................................................379 13.3.1 VISA Library................................................................................................................ 379 13.3.2 Possible Setups and Access Functions...................................................................... 380
13.4 Remote Access Settings.......................................................................................... 382 13.4.1 Network Settings......................................................................................................... 383 13.4.2 VISA Resource Strings............................................................................................... 385 13.4.3 GPIB Address Settings............................................................................................... 386 13.4.4 RS232 Settings........................................................................................................... 387 13.4.5 Instrument Emulations Settings.................................................................................. 388 13.4.6 Remote Connections Settings.....................................................................................389 13.4.6.1 Active Connections..................................................................................................... 389 13.4.6.2 Closed Connections.................................................................................................... 390 13.4.7 QR Code..................................................................................................................... 391
13.5 LXI Settings............................................................................................................... 392 13.5.1 LXI Status Settings......................................................................................................392 13.5.2 LXI Browser Settings...................................................................................................394 13.5.2.1 LAN Configuration.......................................................................................................395
IP Configuration.......................................................................................................... 395 Advanced Config.........................................................................................................396 Ping Client...................................................................................................................397 SCPI Remote Trace.................................................................................................... 397 Data Sheet.................................................................................................................. 399 13.6 Connecting the Instrument to the Network (LAN)..................................................399 13.6.1 How To Enable Access via LAN..................................................................................400
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
11
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
13.6.2 How To Activate LAN Services....................................................................................400 13.6.3 How To Connect to LAN..............................................................................................400 13.6.4 How to Assign the IP Address.....................................................................................400 13.6.5 How to Use Computer Names (Hostnames)...............................................................401
13.7 Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely............................................................... 402 13.7.1 How to Find the VISA Resource String....................................................................... 403 13.7.2 How to Change the GPIB Instrument Address............................................................404 13.7.3 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over the LXI Browser Interface...............404 13.7.4 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using VXI-11 Protocol............ 405 13.7.5 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using Socket Communication
.................................................................................................................................... 410 13.7.6 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over GPIB..................................................411 13.7.7 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over USB...................................................412 13.7.8 How to Trace Messages with the LXI Web Browser Interface.................................... 413 13.7.9 How to Return to Manual Operation............................................................................413
13.8 Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts............................................... 414 13.8.1 Show SCPI Command................................................................................................ 417 13.8.2 Displaying an SCPI List...............................................................................................417 13.8.3 SCPI Recording Export Settings................................................................................. 418 13.8.4 How to Record / Create SCPI Lists.............................................................................419 13.8.5 How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists......................................................................... 422 13.8.6 How to Find Out the SCPI Commands for GUI Functions.......................................... 423
13.9 Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC...................................................424 13.9.1 How To Enable the VNC Service................................................................................ 424 13.9.2 How To Set Up a Remote Operation from a Desktop System.................................... 425 13.9.2.1 Using a Web Browser..................................................................................................425 13.9.2.2 Using a VNC Client Software...................................................................................... 425 13.9.3 How To Set Up a Remote Operation from a Smart Device......................................... 427 13.9.3.1 Using a VNC App........................................................................................................ 428 13.9.3.2 Using a Web Browser with HTML5............................................................................. 428 13.9.3.3 Special Mode QR Code ............................................................................................. 429 13.10 References.................................................................................................................430 13.10.1 LXI Functionality..........................................................................................................430 13.10.2 Code Generator Templates......................................................................................... 430
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
12
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
13.10.3 Remote Control States ...............................................................................................432
14 Remote Control Commands..............................................................434
14.1 Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions..............................................434 14.2 Programming Examples........................................................................................... 435 14.3 Common Commands................................................................................................ 435 14.4 Preset Commands.....................................................................................................440 14.5 MMEMory Subsystem............................................................................................... 441 14.5.1 File Naming Conventions............................................................................................ 442 14.5.2 Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory...........................................443 14.5.3 Programming Examples..............................................................................................444 14.5.4 Remote Control Commands........................................................................................446 14.6 CALibration Subsystem........................................................................................... 452 14.7 CSYNthesis Subsystem............................................................................................454 14.8 DIAGnostic Subsystem............................................................................................ 459 14.9 DISPlay Subsystem...................................................................................................462 14.10 FORMat Subsystem.................................................................................................. 467 14.11 HCOPy Subsystem....................................................................................................468 14.11.1 Hard Copy Settings..................................................................................................... 469 14.11.2 Automatic Naming.......................................................................................................471 14.12 KBOard Subsystem.................................................................................................. 473 14.13 OUTPut Subsystem...................................................................................................474 14.14 Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems..............................................................478 14.14.1 CALCulate Subsystem................................................................................................ 479 14.14.2 DISPlay Subsystem.................................................................................................... 483 14.14.3 INITiate Command...................................................................................................... 484 14.14.4 SENSe SWEep Subsystem........................................................................................ 484 14.14.5 TRACe Subsystem......................................................................................................517 14.15 SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems......................................................527 14.16 SOURce Subsystem..................................................................................................542 14.16.1 Analog Modulation Subsystems..................................................................................543 14.16.1.1 SOURce:MODulation Subsystem............................................................................... 543 14.16.1.2 SOURce:AM Subsystem.............................................................................................544 14.16.1.3 SOURce:CHIRp Subsystem....................................................................................... 550
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
13
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
14.16.1.4 SOURce:FM Subsystem............................................................................................. 554 14.16.1.5 SOURce:PM Subsystem.............................................................................................559 14.16.1.6 SOURce:PULM Subsystem........................................................................................ 563
Pulse Modulation Settings...........................................................................................563 Pulse Train Settings.................................................................................................... 569 Pulse Train Data Exchange.........................................................................................571 14.16.2 Avionic Standards Subsystems...................................................................................574 14.16.2.1 Programming Examples..............................................................................................575 14.16.2.2 General Commands.................................................................................................... 579 14.16.2.3 SOURce:ADF Subsystem........................................................................................... 582 14.16.2.4 SOURce:ILS Subsystem.............................................................................................585 14.16.2.5 SOURce:VOR Subsystem.......................................................................................... 607 14.16.3 SOURce:CORRection Subsystem.............................................................................. 616 14.16.3.1 Correction Settings......................................................................................................619 14.16.3.2 Correction Data Exchange.......................................................................................... 622 14.16.4 SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem...............................................................................624 14.16.5 SOURce:INPut Subsystem......................................................................................... 631 14.16.6 SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem................................................................................... 632 14.16.6.1 LF Generator Settings.................................................................................................634 14.16.6.2 LF Sweep Settings...................................................................................................... 641 14.16.7 SOURce:LIST Subsystem...........................................................................................645 14.16.7.1 List Mode Settings.......................................................................................................648 14.16.7.2 List Mode File Operation............................................................................................. 653 14.16.7.3 List Mode Data Exchange........................................................................................... 655 14.16.8 SOURce:NOISe Subsystem....................................................................................... 657 14.16.8.1 Noise Generator..........................................................................................................658 14.16.9 SOURce:PGEN Subsystem........................................................................................ 659 14.16.10 SOURce:PHASe Subsystem...................................................................................... 661 14.16.11 SOURce:POWer Subsystem.......................................................................................662 14.16.12 SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem............................................................................... 671 14.16.13 SOURce:SWEep Subsystem...................................................................................... 676 14.17 SYSTem Subsystem..................................................................................................690 14.18 STATus Subsystem................................................................................................... 715
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
14
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
14.19 TEST Subsystem.......................................................................................................718 14.20 TRIGger Subsystem..................................................................................................719 14.21 UNIT Subsystem........................................................................................................723
15 Troubleshooting and Error Messages..............................................724
15.1 Error Messages......................................................................................................... 724 15.1.1 Volatile Messages....................................................................................................... 724 15.1.2 Permanent Messages................................................................................................. 724
15.2 SCPI-Error Messages................................................................................................725 15.3 Device-Specific Error Messages..............................................................................725 15.4 Querying Error Messages........................................................................................ 727 15.5 Resolving Network Connection Failures................................................................ 729 15.6 Measuring USB cable quality...................................................................................730 15.7 Requesting Instrument Configuration and Specifications....................................730 15.7.1 Hardware Configuration Settings................................................................................ 730 15.7.2 Versions/Options Settings........................................................................................... 732 15.7.3 How to Query Instrument Configuration......................................................................733 15.7.4 How to Request the Data Sheet..................................................................................735 15.8 Collecting Information for Technical Support........................................................ 735 15.9 Contacting Customer Support.................................................................................736
16 Transporting....................................................................................... 738
17 Maintenance, Storage and Disposal.................................................739
17.1 Cleaning..................................................................................................................... 739 17.2 Storage.......................................................................................................................739 17.3 Performing Maintenance Tasks............................................................................... 739 17.3.1 Date and Time.............................................................................................................739 17.3.1.1 Data and Time Settings...............................................................................................740 17.3.1.2 How To Set Data and Time......................................................................................... 741 17.3.2 Check Front Panel...................................................................................................... 742 17.3.2.1 Check Front Panel Settings........................................................................................ 742 17.3.2.2 How to Test the Front Panel........................................................................................742 17.3.3 Internal Adjustments................................................................................................... 744 17.3.3.1 Internal Adjustments Settings..................................................................................... 745
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
15
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
17.3.3.2 How to Use the Internal Adjustments..........................................................................746 17.3.4 FPGA/uC Update Settings.......................................................................................... 748 17.3.5 Exchanging the RF Adapter Port................................................................................ 749 17.4 Disposal..................................................................................................................... 749
Annex.................................................................................................. 751
A Reference Information for Remote Control..................................... 751
A.1 Additional Basics on Remote Control.....................................................................751 A.1.1 Messages....................................................................................................................751 A.1.2 LAN Interface Messages.............................................................................................752 A.1.3 SCPI Command Structure...........................................................................................752 A.1.3.1 Syntax for Common Commands................................................................................. 753 A.1.3.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands.......................................................................753
Long and short form.................................................................................................... 753 Numeric Suffixes......................................................................................................... 754 Optional Mnemonics................................................................................................... 754 A.1.3.3 SCPI Parameters........................................................................................................ 755 Numeric Values........................................................................................................... 755 Special Numeric Values.............................................................................................. 756 Boolean Parameters................................................................................................... 756 Text Parameters.......................................................................................................... 757 Character Strings........................................................................................................ 757 Block Data...................................................................................................................757 A.1.3.4 Overview of Syntax Elements..................................................................................... 757 A.1.3.5 Structure of a Command Line..................................................................................... 759 A.1.3.6 Responses to Queries.................................................................................................759 A.1.4 Command Sequence and Synchronization.................................................................760 A.1.4.1 Preventing Overlapping Execution..............................................................................760 A.1.4.2 Examples to Command Sequence and Synchronization............................................ 762 A.1.5 Status Reporting System............................................................................................ 763 A.1.5.1 Hierarchy of the Status Registers............................................................................... 764 A.1.5.2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register............................................................................765 A.1.5.3 Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)................................767 A.1.5.4 Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)..................... 768
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
16
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
A.1.5.5 Questionable Status Register (STATus:QUEStionable).............................................. 769 A.1.5.6 Operation Status Register (STATus:OPERation)........................................................ 769 A.1.5.7 Application of the Status Reporting System................................................................769
Service Request..........................................................................................................770 Serial Poll.................................................................................................................... 770 Query of an instrument status..................................................................................... 770 Error Queue................................................................................................................ 771 A.1.5.8 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System............................................................ 771 A.1.6 General Programming Recommendations..................................................................772 A.2 Telnet program examples......................................................................................... 772 A.3 Extensions for User Files......................................................................................... 777
B Hardware Interfaces...........................................................................779
B.1 GPIB-Bus Interface................................................................................................... 779
C Morse Code Settings......................................................................... 781
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations.......... 782
List of Commands..............................................................................786
Index....................................................................................................802
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
17
R&S®SMA100B
Contents
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
18
R&S®SMA100B
Preface About this Manual
1 Preface
The R&S SMA100B is a new high-performance signal generator developed to meet demanding customer requirements. Offering excellent signal characteristic and straightforward and intuitive operation, the signal generator makes signal generation fast and easy.
1.1 Key Features
Outstanding key features of the R&S SMA100B are: Frequency range from 8 kHz to up to 20 GHz (overrange 72 GHz) Excellent signal quality Excellent single sideband (SSB) phase noise Nearly no wideband noise Very high output power Low harmonics Unique pulse train generation High-stability reference oscillator Intuitive operation via touchscreen with the tile diagram as key element
For more information, see data sheet.
1.2 About this Manual
This user manual describes general instrument functions, the manual operation of the instrument and remote control.
The main focus of this manual is on the signal generation capabilities of the instrument and the tasks required to achieve them. The following topics are included:
Welcome to the R&S SMA100B Introduction to and getting familiar with the instrument, including introduction to the signal generation principles.
Getting Started Information that you have received as a printed book together with your instrument
Configuration of the RF Signal Descriptions of the individual operation modes, including configuration settings and task descriptions
File and Data Management Description of general functions to handle data files and work with the file system of the instrument
System and General Instrument Configuration Description of the general instrument settings and functions
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
19
R&S®SMA100B
Preface Documentation Overview
Network and Remote Control Operation Information on setting up the instrument in a network and operating it remotely.
Remote Commands Remote commands required to configure and perform measurements in a remote environment, sorted by tasks. Remote commands required to set up the environment and to perform common tasks on the instrument, sorted by tasks. Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes.
Maintenance Information on tasks required to maintain the operability of the instrument
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Hints and tips on how to handle errors
Appendix Extensive reference information on remote control, hardware interfaces, etc.
Glossary List of often used terms and abbreviations
List of Commands Alphabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual
Index
Contents and scope
This help system describes the full functionality of an R&S SMA100B. Depending on your model and the installed options, some of the functions may not be available on your instrument.
Notes on screenshots
When describing the functions of the product, we use sample screenshots. These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters. The shown values may not represent realistic usage scenarios.
The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product, that is: with all options installed. Thus, some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your particular product configuration.
1.3 Documentation Overview
This section provides an overview of the R&S SMA100B user documentation. Unless specified otherwise, you find the documents on the R&S SMA100B product page at: www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/sma100b
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
20
R&S®SMA100B
Preface Documentation Overview
1.3.1 Getting Started Manual
Introduces the R&S SMA100B and describes how to set up and start working with the product. Includes basic operations, typical measurement examples, and general information, e.g. safety instructions, etc. A printed version is delivered with the instrument.
1.3.2 User Manuals and Help
Contains the description of all instrument modes and functions. It also provides an introduction to remote control, a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples, and information on maintenance, instrument interfaces and error messages. Includes the contents of the getting started manual.
The contents of the user manuals are available as help in the R&S SMA100B. The help offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information.
All user manuals are also available for download or for immediate display on the Internet.
1.3.3 Service Manual
Describes the performance test for checking compliance with rated specifications, firmware update, troubleshooting, adjustments, installing options and maintenance. The service manual is available for registered users on the global Rohde & Schwarz information system (GLORIS): https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com
1.3.4 Instrument Security Procedures
Deals with security issues when working with the R&S SMA100B in secure areas. It is available for download on the Internet.
1.3.5 Printed Safety Instructions
Provides safety information in many languages. The printed document is delivered with the product.
1.3.6 Data Sheets and Brochures
The data sheet contains the technical specifications of the R&S SMA100B. It also lists the options and their order numbers and optional accessories.
The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific characteristics.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
21
R&S®SMA100B
Preface Documentation Overview
See www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/sma100b
1.3.7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment (OSA)
The release notes list new features, improvements and known issues of the current firmware version, and describe the firmware installation. The open-source acknowledgment document provides verbatim license texts of the used open source software. See www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/sma100b
1.3.8 Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc.
These documents deal with special applications or background information on particular topics. See www.rohde-schwarz.com/application/sma100b
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
22
R&S®SMA100B
Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Instructions
2 Safety and Regulatory Information
The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the Chapter 2.1, "Safety Instructions", on page 23.
Intended use
The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments. Use the product only for its designated purpose. Observe the operating conditions and performance limits stated in the data sheet.
Where do I find safety information?
Safety information is part of the product documentation. It warns you of potential dangers and gives instructions on how to prevent personal injury or damage caused by dangerous situations. Safety information is provided as follows: In Chapter 2.1, "Safety Instructions", on page 23. The same information is provi-
ded in many languages as printed "Safety Instructions". The printed "Safety Instructions" are delivered with the product. Throughout the documentation, safety instructions are provided when you need to take care during setup or operation.
2.1 Safety Instructions
Products from the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according to the highest technical standards. To use the products safely, follow the instructions provided here and in the product documentation. Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users.
Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits. Intended use and limits are described in the product documentation such as the data sheet, manuals and the printed safety instructions. If you are unsure about the appropriate use, contact Rohde & Schwarz customer service.
Using the product requires specialists or specially trained personnel. These users also need sound knowledge of at least one of the languages in which the user interfaces and the product documentation are available.
If any part of the product is damaged or broken, stop using the product. Never open the casing of the product. Only service personnel authorized by Rohde & Schwarz are allowed to repair the product. Contact Rohde & Schwarz customer service at http:// www.customersupport.rohde-schwarz.com.
Lifting and carrying the product
The product is heavy. Do not move or carry the product by yourself. A single person can only carry a maximum of 18 kg safely depending on age, gender and physical condition. Look up the maximum weight in the data sheet. Use the product handles to
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
23
R&S®SMA100B
Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Instructions
move or carry the product. Do not lift by the accessories mounted on the product. Accessories are not designed to carry the weight of the product.
To move the product safely, you can use lifting or transporting equipment such as lift trucks and forklifts. Follow the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Choosing the operating site
Only use the product indoors. The product casing is not waterproof. Water that enters can electrically connect the casing with live parts, which can lead to electric shock, serious personal injury or death if you touch the casing. If Rohde & Schwarz provides a carrying bag designed for your product, you can use the product outdoors.
Unless otherwise specified, you can operate the product up to an altitude of 2000 m above sea level. The product is suitable for pollution degree 2 environments where nonconductive contamination can occur. For more information on environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and humidity, see the data sheet.
Setting up the product
Always place the product on a stable, flat and level surface with the bottom of the product facing down. If the product is designed for different positions, secure the product so that it cannot fall over.
If the product has foldable feet, always fold the feet completely in or out to ensure stability. The feet can collapse if they are not folded out completely or if the product is moved without lifting it. The foldable feet are designed to carry the weight of the product, but not an extra load.
If stacking is possible, keep in mind that a stack of products can fall over and cause injury.
If you mount products in a rack, ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and stability. Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer. Always install the products from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely. Secure the product so that it cannot fall off the rack.
Connecting to power
The product is an overvoltage category II product and has to be connected to a fixed installation used to supply energy-consuming equipment such as household appliances and similar loads. Be aware that electrically powered products have risks, such as electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death.
Take the following measures for your safety: Before switching on the product, ensure that the voltage and frequency indicated
on the product match the available power source. If the power adapter does not adjust automatically, set the correct value and check the rating of the fuse. If a product has an exchangeable fuse, its type and characteristics are indicated next to the fuse holder. Before changing the fuse, switch off the instrument and disconnect it from the power source. How to change the fuse is described in the product documentation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
24
R&S®SMA100B
Safety and Regulatory Information Labels on R&S SMA100B
Only use the power cable delivered with the product. It complies with country-specific safety requirements. Only insert the plug into an outlet with protective conductor terminal.
Only use intact cables and route them carefully so that they cannot be damaged. Check the power cables regularly to ensure that they are undamaged. Also ensure that nobody can trip over loose cables.
If the product needs an external power supply, use the power supply that is delivered with the product or that is recommended in the product documentation or a power supply that conforms to the country-specific regulations.
Only connect the product to a power source with a fuse protection of maximum 20 A.
Ensure that you can disconnect the product from the power source at any time. Pull the power plug to disconnect the product. The power plug must be easily accessible. If the product is integrated into a system that does not meet these requirements, provide an easily accessible circuit breaker at the system level.
Cleaning the product
Use a dry, lint-free cloth to clean the product. When cleaning, keep in mind that the casing is not waterproof. Do not use liquid cleaning agents.
Meaning of safety labels
Safety labels on the product warn against potential hazards.
Potential hazard Read the product documentation to avoid personal injury or product damage.
Heavy product Be careful when lifting, moving or carrying the product. Carrying the product requires at least two people or transport equipment.
Electrical hazard Indicates live parts. Risk of electric shock, fire, personal injury or even death.
Hot surface Do not touch. Risk of skin burns. Risk of fire.
Protective conductor terminal Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground. This protects you against electric shock should an electric problem occur.
2.2 Labels on R&S SMA100B
Labels on the casing inform about: Personal safety, see "Connecting to power" on page 24. Product and environment safety, see Table 2-1.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
25
R&S®SMA100B
Safety and Regulatory Information Korea Certification Class A
Identification of the product, see the serial number on the rear panel.
Table 2-1: Labels regarding R&S SMA100B and environment safety
Labeling in line with EN 50419 for disposal of electrical and electronic equipment after the product has come to the end of its service life. For more information, see Chapter 17.4, "Disposal", on page 749.
2.3 Korea Certification Class A
(A) , .
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
26
R&S®SMA100B
3 Getting Started
Getting Started Preparing for Use
3.1 Preparing for Use
This chapter describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the product for the first time.
3.1.1 Lifting and Carrying
See also "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 23.
WARNING! The R&S SMA100B can be heavy, e.g., if fully equipped. Use a lifting equipment, see also "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 23. Use the carrying handles at the side for lifting and carrying the R&S SMA100B. The handles at the front are only for pushing and pulling the instrument when mounting in a rack, see Chapter 3.1.4.2, "Mounting the R&S SMA100B in a Rack", on page 29.
3.1.2 Unpacking and Checking
1. Unpack the R&S SMA100B carefully. 2. Retain the original packing material. Use it to protect the control elements and con-
nectors when transporting or shipping the R&S SMA100B later. See also Chapter 16, "Transporting", on page 738. 3. Using the delivery notes, check the equipment for completeness. 4. Check the equipment for damage. If the delivery is incomplete or equipment is damaged, contact Rohde & Schwarz.
3.1.3 Choosing the Operating Site
Specific operating conditions ensure accurate measurements and avoid damage to the product and connected devices. For information on environmental conditions such as ambient temperature and humidity, see the data sheet. See also "Choosing the operating site" on page 24.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
27
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Preparing for Use
Electromagnetic compatibility classes
The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) class indicates where you can operate the product. The EMC class of the product is given in the data sheet under "General data".
Class B equipment is suitable for use in:
Residential environments
Environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Class A equipment is intended for use in industrial environments. It can cause radio disturbances in residential environments due to possible conducted and radiated disturbances. It is therefore not suitable for class B environments. If class A equipment causes radio disturbances, take appropriate measures to eliminate them.
3.1.4 Setting Up the R&S SMA100B
See also: "Setting up the product" on page 24. "Intended use" on page 23.
3.1.4.1 Placing the R&S SMA100B on a Bench Top
To place the product on a bench top
1. Place the product on a stable, flat and level surface. Ensure that the surface can support the weight of the product. For information on the weight, see the data sheet.
2. CAUTION! Foldable feet can collapse. See "Setting up the product" on page 24. Always fold the feet completely in or out. With folded-out feet, do not place anything on top or underneath the product.
3. WARNING! A stack of products can fall over and cause injury. Never stack more than three products on top of each other. Instead, mount them in a rack. Stack as follows:
It is best if all products have the same dimensions (width and length). The overall load on the lowest product must not exceed 500 N. With smaller products on top of the lowest product, the overall load on the low-
est product must not exceed 250 N.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
28
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Preparing for Use
max. 500 N
max. 250 N
Correct
Different dimensions
Too many instruments
4. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product. Prevent overheating as follows:
Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product and any object in the vicinity.
Do not place the product next to heat-generating equipment such as radiators or other products.
3.1.4.2 Mounting the R&S SMA100B in a Rack
To prepare the rack
1. Observe the requirements and instructions in "Setting up the product" on page 24.
2. NOTICE! Insufficient airflow can cause overheating and damage the product. Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack.
To mount the R&S SMA100B in a rack
1. Use an adapter kit that fits the dimensions of the R&S SMA100B to prepare the instrument for rack mounting. For information on the dimensions, see data sheet. a) Order the rack adapter kit designed for the R&S SMA100B. For the order number, see data sheet. b) Mount the adapter kit. Follow the assembly instructions provided with the adapter kit.
2. WARNING! The R&S SMA100B can be heavy, e.g., if fully equipped. Use a lifting equipment, see also "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 23. Lift the R&S SMA100B to shelf height.
3. Grab the handles at the front and push the R&S SMA100B onto the shelf until the rack brackets fit closely to the rack.
4. Tighten all screws at the rack brackets with a tightening torque of 1.2 Nm to secure the R&S SMA100B at the rack.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
29
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Preparing for Use
To unmount the R&S SMA100B from a rack
1. Loosen the screws at the rack brackets.
2. WARNING! The R&S SMA100B can be heavy, e.g., if fully equipped. Use a lifting equipment, see also "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 23. Bring the lifting equipment to shelf height.
3. Remove the R&S SMA100B from the rack.
4. If placing the R&S SMA100B on a bench top again, unmount the adapter kit from the R&S SMA100B. Follow the instructions provided with the adapter kit.
3.1.5 Important Aspects for Test Setup
Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI)
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results.
To suppress electromagnetic radiation during operation: Use high-quality shielded cables, especially for the following connector types:
BNC Double-shielded BNC cables.
USB Double-shielded USB cables. How to: Chapter 3.1.8, "Connecting USB Devices", on page 32. See also Chapter 15.6, "Measuring USB cable quality", on page 730.
LAN At least CAT6 STP cables. How to: Chapter 3.1.7, "Connecting to LAN", on page 31
Always terminate open cable ends. Ensure that connected external devices comply with EMC regulations.
Signal input and output levels
Information on signal levels is provided in the data sheet. Keep the signal levels within the specified ranges to avoid damage to the R&S SMA100B and connected devices.
Preventing electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT.
NOTICE! Risk of electrostatic discharge. Electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic components of the product and the device under test (DUT). Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic discharge damage: a) Use a wrist strap and cord to connect yourself to ground. b) Use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
30
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Preparing for Use
3.1.6 Connecting to Power
For safety information, see "Connecting to power" on page 24.
1. Plug the AC power cable into the AC power connector on the rear panel of the instrument. Only use the AC power cable delivered with the R&S SMA100B.
2. Plug the AC power cable into a power outlet with ground contact. The required ratings are listed next to the AC power connector and in the data sheet.
3.1.7 Connecting to LAN
Network environment
The product is designed to operate at local workplaces or in secured local area networks (LAN). Products accessible from the internet constitute a potential security risk. For example, attackers can misuse or damage the product. To reduce security risks, install the latest firmware and always keep secure remote connections, if possible. E.g., use https instead of http. We highly recommend that you work closely with your IT department or system administrator to ensure compliance with your company policies, when connecting the product to your company's network.
To connect to LAN
The connector is located on the rear panel.
Connect the LAN socket via an RJ-45 cable to the LAN.
By default, the R&S SMA100B is configured to use DHCP (dynamic host configuration protocol) and no static IP address is configured. If switched on and connected to the LAN, the R&S SMA100B displays the address information on the screen.
Figure 3-1: IP address indication on the screen (example)
See Chapter 13.6, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network (LAN)", on page 399
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
31
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Preparing for Use
3.1.8 Connecting USB Devices
USB connectors are located on the front panel and rear panel. You can connect or disconnect all USB devices from the R&S SMA100B during operation.
To connect USB storage devices USB storage devices, such as memory sticks, allow easy data transfer from/to the R&S SMA100B. You can also use them for firmware updates. Connect the USB storage device to any of the USB connectors.
To connect USB devices with external power supply 1. NOTICE! Connected devices with external power supply can feed back current into
the 5 V power supply of the USB interface and thus damage the R&S SMA100B. Ensure that there is no connection between the positive pole of the power supply and the +5 V power pin of the USB interface (VBUS). 2. Connect the USB storage device to any of the USB connectors.
To connect a keyboard Connect the keyboard to any of the USB connectors.
When connected, the R&S SMA100B detects the keyboard automatically. A detected keyboard has the default layout English US.
To connect a mouse Connect the mouse to any of the USB connectors.
When connected, the R&S SMA100B detects the mouse automatically.
To connect power sensors You can connect power sensors of the R&S NRP families to any of the USB connectors. See Chapter 8.4, "Using Power Sensors", on page 228.
3.1.9 Connecting to RF
The connector is located on the front panel. If you have the instrument equipped with an option for rear panel connectors, the RF output connector is on the rear panel.
To prepare for connecting to "RF" 1. NOTICE! Damaged or not clean connections can lead to RF insertion loss and mis-
match, and even premature wear of the connectors.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
32
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Preparing for Use
Before connecting to the port, inspect the RF connector visually to check that it is clean, undamaged and mechanically compatible. See the application note 1MA99 for information on how to handle and maintain the RF port, to minimize measurement deviations and ensure its longevity.
2. NOTICE! Risk of instrument damage. Excessive reverse power or DC voltage at the RF connector can damage the instrument. Make sure that the values do not exceed the reverse power and DC limits as given in the data sheet.
3. If the R&S SMA100B is switched on, deactivate the RF output, before connecting an RF cable to the RF connector. In the home screen, select the block "Level" > "RF ON > Off".
4. Use a high-quality RF cable that matches the RF connector type. See "Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI)" on page 30.
To connect to screwable connectors
1. Use a high-quality cable that matches the connector type. See "Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI)" on page 30.
2. NOTICE! Risk of instrument damage and connector damage. Excessive tightening can damage the cables and the connectors. However, if you do not tighten the connectors enough, the measurement results can be inaccurate. To connect the cable with the connector, proceed as follows:
a) Carefully align the connector of the cable and the connector along a common axis.
b) Mate the connectors along the common axis until the male pin of the inner connector engages with the female socket of the outer connector.
c) Turn the nut of the outer connector until the connectors are firmly coupled. d) Torque the nut to the specified limit using a calibrated torque wrench. Hold the
opposite connector part stationary with a spanner. For torque limits of the most relevant connector types, see Table 3-1.
3. Torque the nut to the specified limit using a calibrated torque wrench. Hold the opposite connector part stationary with a spanner.
For more information, see chapter "Handling" of the application note 1MA99.
If your instrument is equipped with a test port adapter, see the application note 1MA100.
The connector types listed in this table represent the common connectors provided by Rohde & Schwarz. It is considered as general information and therefore can contain connector types that do not apply to your instrument.
See Chapter 3.2.1.11, "RF 50 ", on page 42.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
33
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Preparing for Use
Table 3-1: Connector types and torque limits
Type
Torque limit
lb-Inch
Nm
N
13.3
1.5
SMA
5
0.56
3.5 mm
8
0.9
2.92 mm
8
0.9
2.4 mm
8
0.9
1.85 mm
8
0.9
1.0 mm
3
0.34
Nut opening
Inch
mm
3/4
20
5/16
8
5/16
8
5/16
8
5/16
8
5/16
8
0.236
6
To prevent RF output switch-off
NOTICE! If you set a too high output level without a load connected to the instrument, the reverse power can exceed a limit forcing the R&S SMA100B to switch off the RF output.
Connect a load with sufficient return loss as given in the data sheet.
3.1.10 Connecting to Ref In/Ref Out
The connector is located on the rear panel.
To connect to "Ref In"/"Ref Out" (reference < 1 GHz) For connection, the R&S SMA100B provides BNC connectors. To connect the cable with the "Ref In"/"Ref Out" connector, proceed as follows:
a) Carefully align the connector of the cable and the "Ref In"/"Ref Out" connector along a common axis.
b) Mate the connectors along the common axis until the male pin of the connector of the cable engages with the female socket of the "Ref In"/"Ref Out" connector.
To connect to Ref In/Ref Out (reference = 1 GHz)
For connection, the R&S SMA100B provides SMA connectors.
1. Use a high-quality cable that matches the connector type. See "Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI)" on page 30.
2. NOTICE! Risk of instrument damage and connector damage. Excessive tightening can damage the cables and the connectors. However, if you do not tighten the connectors enough, the measurement results can be inaccurate. To connect the cable with the connector, proceed as follows:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
34
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Preparing for Use
a) Carefully align the connector of the cable and the connector along a common axis.
b) Mate the connectors along the common axis until the male pin of the inner connector engages with the female socket of the outer connector.
c) Turn the nut of the outer connector until the connectors are firmly coupled. d) Torque the nut to the specified limit using a calibrated torque wrench. Hold the
opposite connector part stationary with a spanner. For torque limits of the most relevant connector types, see Table 3-1.
3. Torque the nut to the specified limit using a calibrated torque wrench. Hold the opposite connector part stationary with a spanner.
For more information, see chapter "Handling" of the application note 1MA99.
Table 3-2: Connector types and torque limits
Type
Torque limit
Nut opening
lb-Inch
Nm
Inch
mm
N
13.3
1.5
3/4
20
SMA
5
0.56
5/16
8
3.5 mm
8
0.9
5/16
8
2.92 mm
8
0.9
5/16
8
2.4 mm
8
0.9
5/16
8
1.85 mm
8
0.9
5/16
8
1.0 mm
3
0.34
0.236
6
3.1.11 Switching On or Off
The following table provides an overview of power states, LEDs and power switch positions.
Table 3-3: Overview of power states
State
LED
Position of power switch
Off
gray
[0]
Standby
orange
[I]
Ready
green
[I]
To switch on the R&S SMA100B
The R&S SMA100B is off but connected to power. See Chapter 3.1.6, "Connecting to Power", on page 31.
1. Set the switch on the power supply to position [I]. The switch is located on the rear panel. The LED of the [On/Standby] key is orange.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
35
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
2. Press the [On/Standby] key. Key and LED are located on the front panel. The LED changes to green. The R&S SMA100B boots.
When starting for the first time, the R&S SMA100B starts with the default settings. When restarting the instrument, the settings depend on the instrument configuration before shut-down. See Chapter 11.4, "Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings", on page 311.
When the instrument is switched on, it automatically monitors main functions. You can query erroneous functions. In addition to automatic monitoring, you can perform maintenance tasks. See: Chapter 15.4, "Querying Error Messages", on page 727 Chapter 17.3, "Performing Maintenance Tasks", on page 739
To shut down the product The product is in the ready state.
Press the On/Standby key. The operating system shuts down. The LED changes to orange.
In the standby state, the power switch circuits are active. To deactivate them, disconnect the instrument from the power supply.
To disconnect from power The R&S SMA100B is in the standby state.
1. NOTICE! Risk of data loss. If you disconnect the product from power when it is in the ready state, you can lose settings and data. Shut it down first. Set the toggle switch on the power supply to position [0]. The LED of the [On/Standby] key is switched off.
2. Disconnect the R&S SMA100B from the power source.
3.2 Instrument Tour
The following topics help you get familiar with the instrument and perform the first steps: Front Panel Tour Rear Panel Tour
This section explains the control elements and the connectors of the R&S SMA100B with the aid of the front and rear views. For specifications of the interfaces, refer to the data sheet.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
36
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
The meanings of the labels on the R&S SMA100B are described in Chapter 2.2, "Labels on R&S SMA100B", on page 25.
3.2.1 Front Panel Tour
This section provides an overview of the control elements at the front panel of the R&S SMA100B. Most of the connectors are at the rear panel and are described in Chapter 3.2.2, "Rear Panel Tour", on page 44.
Figure 3-2: Front panel view of the R&S SMA100B RF Signal Generator with height unit 2HU (option R&S SMAB-B92)
1 = Touchscreen 2 = Utility keys 3 = [On/Standby] 4 = Function keys 5 = Keypad 6 = Navigation controls 7 = Display keys 8 = USB connector 9 = SD card slot 10 = Sensor connector 11 = RF output connector
Figure 3-3: Front panel view of the R&S SMA100B RF Signal Generator with height unit 3HU (option R&S SMAB-B93)
1 = Touchscreen 2 = Utility keys 3 = [On/Standby] 4 = Function keys
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
37
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
5 = Keypad 6 = Navigation controls 7 = Display keys 8 = USB connector 9 = SD card slot 10 = Sensor connector 11 = RF output connector 12 = Pulse signal input and output connectors 13 = LF output connector 14 = Ext1/2 input connectors 15 = Clk Syn and Clk Syn N output connectors (SMA)
3.2.1.1 Touchscreen
The screen at the front panel is the graphical user interface. It shows the settings dialogs and parameters, and the current configuration at a glance, see Chapter 3.4.3, "Understanding the Display Information", on page 57.
Figure 3-4: Touchscreen
The touch-sensitive panel provides an alternative means of user interaction for quick and easy handling of the instrument, see Chapter 3.4.2, "Means of Manual Interaction", on page 56. See also: Chapter 3.4, "Instrument Control", on page 55, for operating the touchscreen. Chapter 17.1, "Cleaning", on page 739, for instructions on cleaning the screen.
3.2.1.2 Utility Keys
The utility keys set the R&S SMA100B to a defined state, and provide access to basic settings and information on assistance.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
38
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
Table 3-4: Utility keys Utility Key [Preset] [Local] [Setup] [Help]
Assigned functions Sets the instrument to a defined state Switches from remote control to local (manual) control Accesses the general instrument settings Displays context-sensitive help text
3.2.1.3 On/Standby
The [On/Standby] key switches the instrument from the standby to the ready state or vice versa. The LED above the [On/Standby] key indicates the instrument state, see Chapter 3.1.11, "Switching On or Off", on page 35.
3.2.1.4 Function Keys
Function keys provide access to the most common generator settings and functions. You can find a detailed description of the corresponding functions in the user manual.
Table 3-5: Function keys
Function key
Assigned functions
[Freq]
Activates frequency entry.
[Level]
Activates level entry.
[Mod on/off]
Switches the modulation on and off.
[RF on/off]
Switches the RF output on and off.
3.2.1.5 Keypad
The keypad enables you to enter alphanumeric parameters, including the corresponding units. It contains the following keys:
Table 3-6: Keys on the keypad
Type of key
Description
Alphanumeric keys
Enter numbers and (special) characters in edit dialog boxes.
Decimal point
Inserts a decimal point "." at the cursor position.
Sign key
Changes the sign of a numeric parameter. In the case of an alphanumeric parameter, inserts a "-" at the cursor position.
Unit keys
(G/n dBV, M/ V, k/m mV and x1 dB(m))
These keys add the selected unit to the entered numeric value and complete the entry.
In the case of level entries (e.g. in dB) or dimensionless values, all units have the value "1" as multiplying factor. Thus, they have the same function as an [Enter] key.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
39
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
3.2.1.6 Navigation Controls
The navigation controls include a rotary knob, navigation keys, and the display keys. They allow you to navigate within the display or within dialog boxes.
Rotary Knob
The rotary knob has several functions:
Increments (clockwise direction) or decrements (counterclockwise direction) the instrument parameter at a defined step width in the case of a numeric entry.
Moves the selection, e.g. to a function block in the block diagram Shifts the selection bar within focused areas (e.g. lists). Acts like the [Enter] key, when it is pressed. Opens a context-sensitive menu, when it is pressed and held.
Editing Keys
Editing keys enable you to confirm an entry, delete individual characters, or exit the current operation.
Table 3-7: Editing keys
Type of key
Description
[Esc] key
Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active. Quits the edit mode, if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Cancel" button it activates that button.
For "Edit" dialog boxes the following mechanism is used: If data entry has been started, it retains the original value and
closes the dialog box. If data entry has not been started or has been completed, it closes
the dialog box.
[Enter] key
Has the same effect as pressing the rotary knob
Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries. The new value is accepted.
With other entries, this key can be used instead of the default unit key.
In a dialog box, selects the default or focused element. Calls the next dialog level. Confirms and closes open input windows.
[Backspace] key
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor in editing mode.
Navigation Keys
As an alternative to the rotary knob or the touchscreen, you can use the navigation keys to navigate through dialog boxes, diagrams, or tables.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
40
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
Table 3-8: Navigation keys Type of key [Up/Down] Key
[Left/Right] Key
Description
The [Up] and the [Down] key does the following: In a numeric edit dialog box, increase or decrease the instrument
parameter. In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries. In a table, move the selection bar vertically. In windows or dialog boxes with vertical scrollbar, move the scroll-
bar.
The [Left] and the [Right] key does the following: In an alphanumeric edit dialog box, move the cursor. In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries. In a table, move the selection bar horizontally. In windows or dialog boxes with horizontal scrollbar, move the
scrollbar.
3.2.1.7 Display Keys
The display keys arrange different windows on the display.
Table 3-9: Display keys
Display key
Assigned functions
[Home]
Returns to the initial feature screen.
[Next window]
Toggles between the entry fields in the taskbar.
[On/Off]
Switches highlighted elements or a function block on and off. Switches between two or more settings, e.g. items of selection lists.
At the end of a list, the cursor is set on the first entry again.
[Undo]
Reverts the last operation.
[ (User)]
Adds a parameter to the user menu for quick access.
3.2.1.8 USB Connector
Female USB type A connector, to connect devices like a keyboard, a mouse, a memory stick, or the R&S NRP-Z3/Z4 cable for the R&S NRP power sensors. How to: Chapter 3.1.8, "Connecting USB Devices", on page 32
3.2.1.9 SD card slot
Option: R&S SMAB-B85 Slot for removable mass storage. To prevent from unauthorized removal, the SD card holder includes wholes that provide the opportunity of sealing the SD card. We recommend that you seal the SD card crosswise.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
41
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
3.2.1.10 Sensor
Connector for R&S NRP sensors.
A power sensor is connected to the R&S SMA100B by inserting the male connector. To disconnect, pull the connector by its sleeve. You cannot disconnect the sensor simply by pulling at the cable or the rear part of the connector.
The R&S SMA100B supports the use of R&S NRP power sensors in various ways including the use as a power viewer.
The female connector allows the mechanical connection of 6-pole and 8-pole male connectors. It mates with the interface cables R&S NRP-ZK8 and R&S NRP-ZK6, used for connecting R&S NRPxx power sensors, and also with the six-pole push-pull plugs of the R&S NRP-Zxx series. However, the signal pair of the common time base clock assigned to the two pins in the center of the male connectors is not available. These pins are used by Rohde & Schwarz power meters to synchronize several power sensors.
Further information on connecting and using power sensors, see Chapter 8.4.1, "Connecting R&S NRP Power Sensors to the R&S SMA100B", on page 229, Chapter 8.4.4, "NRP-Z Power Analysis", on page 240, Chapter 8.4.2, "NRP Sensor Mapping", on page 230, Chapter 8.4.4, "NRP-Z Power Analysis", on page 240 and Chapter 8.3, "User Correction", on page 216.
3.2.1.11 RF 50
Output of the RF signal.
The connector type depends on the installed frequency option.
Table 3-10: RF connector types of the frequency options
Installed RF frequency option
Connector type
Frequnecy range
R&S SMAB-B103 R&S SMAB-B106
N female
fmax 6 GHz
R&S SMAB-B112 R&S SMAB-B120 R&S SMAB-B131
PC 2.92 mm female
Instrument equipped with interchangeable PC 2.92 mm test port adapter.
fmax 40 GHz
R&S SMAB-B140(N)
R&S SMAB-B150(N) R&S SMAB-B167(N)
PC 1.85 mm female
Instrument equipped with PC 1.85 mm interchangeable female/female wear and tear adapter.
fmax 67 GHz
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
42
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
The PC 1.85 mm male connector for up to 67 GHz comes with a protective 1.85 mm female adapter to prevent the sensitive connector from damage. It is available as a spare part, and can be replaced if damaged. Contact your Rohde & Schwarz support center or www.customersupport.rohdeschwarz.com for information.
How to: Chapter 3.1.9, "Connecting to RF", on page 32
3.2.1.12 Pulse Signal Connectors
Pulse Sync Output signal for synchronizing the pulse generator signal. The synchronization signal is generated at the beginning of each pulse. For double-pulse generation, the synchronization signal is generated at the beginning of the first pulse.
Pulse Video Output of the internal pulse generator signal or the looped through pulse signal from Pulse Ext connector (video signal). See Chapter 5.4.1, "Pulse Modulation", on page 83.
Pulse Ext Input for an external pulse modulation signal or an external trigger/gate signal for the pulse generator.
3.2.1.13 LF Modulation Connectors
LF Output for internal LF generator signal. See the data sheet and in the user manual, section Chapter 5, "Analog Modulations", on page 80.
Ext Input for external analog modulation signals. See Chapter 5, "Analog Modulations", on page 80.
3.2.1.14 Clock Synthesizer Connectors
Clk Syn/Clk Syn N Connectors for output of the clock synthesizer signal, or the inverted signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
43
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
3.2.2 Rear Panel Tour
This section provides an overview of the connectors at the rear panel of the instrument. For technical data of the connectors, refer to the data sheet.
Figure 3-5: Rear panel view of the R&S SMA100B RF Signal Generator with height unit 2HU (option R&S SMAB-B92)
1 = IEC 625/IEEE 488 connector 2 = USB In connector (type micro-B) 3 = LAN connector 4 = USB connector (type A) 5 = V/GHz X-Axis and Z-Axis output connectors (BNC) 6 = Stop input and output connector (BNC) 7 = Marker User1 output connector (BNC) 8 = Ref In 1GHz and Ref Out 1GHz connectors (SMA) 9 = Ref In and Ref Out connectors (BNC) 10 = EFC input connector (BNC) 11 = Inst Trig input connector (BNC) 12 = Signal Valid output connector (BNC) 13 = Clk Syn and Clk Syn N output connectors (SMA) 14 = Pulse Sync, Pulse Video and Pulse Ext connectors (BNC) 15 = LF output connector (BNC) 16 = Ext 1/2 input connectors (BNC) 17 = AC power supply connection and main power switch 18 = RF output connector 19 = Serial number (six digits in the string 1419.8888.02-<serial number>-<checksum>)
Figure 3-6: Rear panel view of the R&S SMA100B RF Signal Generator with height unit 3HU (option R&S SMAB-B93)
1 = IEC 625/IEEE 488 connector 2 = USB In connector (type micro-B) 3 = LAN connector 4 = USB connector (type A) 5 = V/GHz X-Axis and Z-Axis output connectors (BNC)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
44
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
6 = Stop input and output connector (BNC) 7 = Marker User1 output connector (BNC) 8 = Ref In 1GHz and Ref Out 1GHz connectors (SMA) 9 = Ref In and Ref Out connectors (BNC) 10 = EFC input connector (BNC) 11 = Inst Trig input connector (BNC) 12 = Signal Valid output connector (BNC) 13 = Clk Syn and Clk Syn N output connectors (SMA) 14 = Pulse Sync, Pulse Video and Pulse Ext connectors (BNC) 15 = LF output connector (BNC) 16 = Ext 1/2 input connectors (BNC) 17 = AC power supply connection and main power switch 18 = RF output connector 19 = Serial number (six digits in the string 1419.8888.02-<serial number>-<checksum>)
3.2.2.1 Connectors
IEC 625/IEEE 488 Option: R&S SMAB-B86
General purpose interface bus (GPIB) interface for remote control of the instrument. The interface is in compliance with the standards IEC 625, IEEE 488 and SCPI.
Use this interface to connect a computer for remote control of the R&S SMA100B. To set up the connection, use high-quality shielded cables. See "Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI)" on page 30.
See also Chapter B.1, "GPIB-Bus Interface", on page 779 and Chapter 13, "Network Operation and Remote Control", on page 371.
USB/USB In Female USB type A connector, to connect devices like a keyboard, a mouse, a
memory stick, or the R&S NRP-Z3/Z4 cable for the R&S NRP power sensors Option: R&S SMAB-B86
Female USB In connector (USB type B), for example for remote control. How to: Chapter 3.1.8, "Connecting USB Devices", on page 32
LAN RJ-45 connector to connect the R&S SMA100B to a LAN for remote control, remote operation, and data transfer.
How to: Chapter 3.1.7, "Connecting to LAN", on page 31
V/GHz X-Axis Output of a voltage ramp: "V / GHz": the voltage is proportional to the frequency. "X-Axis": output of a voltage ramp for the X deflection of an oscilloscope or an XY
recorder.
Z-Axis Output of a voltage pulse, e.g. for the combined blanking and marker generation of network analyzers.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
45
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Tour
Stop Input and output for stopping the sweep in all modes. This connector is bidirectional. Used as: "Input": enables you to stop a sweep triggered by an external network analyzer. "Output": enables the R&S SMA100B to stop the sweep of an external network
analyzer.
Marker User1 Output signal for marker or trigger signal.
Signal Valid Output signal that marks the valid signal times (valid level and frequency) for all analog modulations. Alternatively, you can use this connector to synchronize pulse signals by activating the "Pulse Sync" in the dialog Chapter 5.4.4, "Pulse Generator", on page 97.
Inst Trig BNC connector for input of external trigger signals. The signals trigger sweeps and list mode. See Chapter 7.1, "Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes", on page 171.
EFC BNC connector for input of an EFC (external frequency control) signal for electronic tuning of the internal reference frequency. See Chapter 9, "Reference Oscillator", on page 288.
Ref In/Ref Out Input/output for external reference signal. BNC connectors for reference signals from 1 MHz to 100 MHz. SMA connectors for 1 GHz reference signals. How to: Chapter 3.1.10, "Connecting to Ref In/Ref Out", on page 34
Clk Syn/Clk Syn N Connectors for output of the clock synthesizer signal, or the inverted signal.
Pulse Ext Input for an external pulse modulation signal or an external trigger/gate signal for the pulse generator.
Pulse Video Output of the internal pulse generator signal or the looped through pulse signal from Pulse Ext connector (video signal). See Chapter 5.4.1, "Pulse Modulation", on page 83.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
46
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Pulse Sync Output signal for synchronizing the pulse generator signal. The synchronization signal is generated at the beginning of each pulse. For double-pulse generation, the synchronization signal is generated at the beginning of the first pulse.
LF Output for internal LF generator signal. See the data sheet and in the user manual, section Chapter 5, "Analog Modulations", on page 80.
Ext 1/2 Inputs for external analog modulation signal. See Chapter 5, "Analog Modulations", on page 80.
AC power supply connector and switch Mains power switch for performing the following tasks: Connecting the internal power supply to the power source Disconnecting the internal power supply from the power source How to: Chapter 3.1.6, "Connecting to Power", on page 31.
RF Rear panel connector for the RF signal. This connector is for use of the instrument in a 19" rack. How to: Chapter 3.1.4.2, "Mounting the R&S SMA100B in a Rack", on page 29 Chapter 3.1.9, "Connecting to RF", on page 32
3.3 Trying Out the Instrument
This chapter introduces the first steps with the R&S SMA100B. It shows how to operate and configure the instrument using simple examples. The complete description of the functionality and its usage is given in the R&S SMA100B user manual. Basic instrument operation is described in Chapter 3.4, "Instrument Control", on page 55.
Prerequisites
The instrument is set up, connected to the power supply, and started up as described in Chapter 3.1, "Preparing for Use", on page 27.
The first signal generation tasks explain how to generate an unmodulated signal, to configure the RF signal output, and how you can vary the RF frequency and level in sweep mode.
The instrument is manually operated via the touchscreen. Try out the following:
Generating an Unmodulated Carrier....................................................................... 48 Generating an RF Frequency Sweep Signal...........................................................50 Saving and Recalling Settings................................................................................ 52
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
47
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
3.3.1 Generating an Unmodulated Carrier
We start to generate a simple unmodulated signal. In this example, the R&S SMA100B can be in its minimal configuration.
1. On the R&S SMA100B front panel, press the [Preset] key to set a defined initial instrument state.
2. Set the frequency: a) In the "Status Bar", tap the "Frequency" field. b) On the on-screen keypad, enter "6" and press the "GHz" key.
The on-screen key pad closes and the frequency value is displayed. 3. To set the signal level, tap the "Level" field and enter the level in the same way. 4. To activate RF signal output, select "Level" > "RF On" in the tile diagram.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
48
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
The blue colored "RF On" icon indicates that the RF output is activated.
The R&S SMA100B provides the 6 GHz signal at the RF A connector at the front panel.
Figure 3-7: Generating an unmodulated signal
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
49
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
Alternative ways to access the instrument functions To fulfill the same task, you can also use the front panel keys or the setting parameters provided in the frequency and level dialogs.
Try out the settings dialogs 1. In the "Frequency" tile, select "Frequency...".
a) In the "RF Frequency" tab, tap the "Frequency" field. b) Set the frequency via the on-screen keypad. 2. Access the "RF Level" dialog via the "Level" tile. a) In the "RF Level" tab, select "Amplitude". b) Set the amplitude (level) via the on-screen keypad. 3. Select "RF State > On" to activate the RF signal generation.
See Chapter 4, "RF Signal Configuration", on page 66.
Try out the front panel keys Use the [Freq], [Level], and [RF on/off] key on the front panel.
Connect RF of the R&S SMA100B to a signal analyzer, for example R&S®FSW, to display the generated signal. For the required settings of the signal analyzer, refer to its user manual or its online help.
3.3.2 Generating an RF Frequency Sweep Signal
The "Sweep" operating mode allows you to generate an RF signal with periodically varying frequencies or amplitudes. This example deals with an RF signal with varying frequency and constant level. To configure the sweep, you need to determine a defined start and end frequency with constant time intervals between the frequency steps. The sweep function does not require specific options.
1. On the front panel, press the [Preset] key to set a defined initial instrument state. 2. Set the signal output level, if required, e.g. set "Level > -25 dBm". 3. In the tile diagram, select "Sweep" > "Frequency Sweep". 4. In the "General" tab:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
50
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
a) Select "Mode > Auto" to run the sweep continuously. b) Select "Shape > Sawtooth" to set the waveform shape of the sweep signal. c) Select "Spacing > Linear", to determine the calculation method for the fre-
quency shift of a step. d) Set "Dwell Time > 15.0 ms", to determine the time interval of the sweep steps.
5. Select the "Frequency Range" tab.
a) Set "Start Freq > 200 MHz" and "Stop Freq > 600 MHz" to determine the frequency sweep range.
b) Set the step width "Step Lin > 10.0 MHz" to determine the width for a frequency step.
6. In the "General" tab, activate the frequency sweep with "State > On".
7. Close the sweep dialog. (Alternatively, tap the "Home" button to minimize the dialog. The R&S SMA100B indicates the "Sweep" dialog as active dialog in the task bar.)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
51
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
8. To activate the RF signal output, select "Level" > "RF On".
Figure 3-8: Generating a frequency sweep signal
The frequency field in the status bar indicates the continuously changing frequency, i.e. the running sweep.
3.3.3 Saving and Recalling Settings
To restore the results of our measurements later, we save the instrument settings in a file.
To save the instrument settings in a file We assume, a test configuration as described in Chapter 3.3.2, "Generating an RF Frequency Sweep Signal", on page 50. 1. Press the [Setup] key on the front panel. 2. In the "Setup" menu, select "Settings > Save/Recall". 3. In the "Save/Recall" dialog, select "Operation Mode > Save".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
52
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
4. Tap the "Filename", use the on-screen keyboard, and enter MyTestSignal. 5. Tap the "Save" button.
The file MyTestSignal.savrcltxt is stored in the default directory /var/user/.
To load saved instrument settings You can restore the settings to the instrument at any time using the settings file. 1. Press the [Preset] button to restore the default instrument settings so you can
check that the stored user settings are restored afterwards. 2. Press the [Setup] key on the front panel. 3. In the "Setup" menu, select "Settings > Save/Recall". 4. In the "Save/Recall" dialog, select "Operation Mode > Recall".
Navigate to the directory the file is saved in and select the MyTestSignal file.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
53
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Trying Out the Instrument
5. Tap the "Recall" button.
All instrument settings are restored and the display resembles Chapter 3.3.2, "Generating an RF Frequency Sweep Signal", on page 50, which shows the instrument display right before the settings were saved.
How to display all parameters with values different to their preset values When you load a file to your instrument, you do not have enough information on the changed settings. In such case, it is useful to visualize all parameters that have been changed from their default state.
Try out the following: Touch and hold a spot in the tile diagram for at least 1 second to access the con-
text-sensitive menu. Select "Mark All Parameters Changed from Preset".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
54
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
All changed parameters are highlighted.
See also Chapter 11, "File and Data Management", on page 302.
3.4 Instrument Control
This chapter provides an overview on how to work with the R&S SMA100B. It covers the following topics:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
55
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
Possible Ways to Operate the Instrument...............................................................56 Means of Manual Interaction...................................................................................56 Understanding the Display Information................................................................... 57 Accessing the Functionality.....................................................................................60 Entering Data.......................................................................................................... 61 Getting Information and Help.................................................................................. 62 Remote Control....................................................................................................... 64 Remote Operation over VNC.................................................................................. 65
3.4.1 Possible Ways to Operate the Instrument
There are three ways to operate the R&S SMA100B:
Manual operation: Use the touchscreen, hard keys and rotary knob, or an optional mouse and/or keyboard. The description under Chapter 3.4, "Instrument Control", on page 55 shows how to operate the instrument manually.
Remote control: Create programs to automatize repeating settings, tests and measurements. The instrument is connected to a computer running the program. This way of operation is described in Chapter 13, "Network Operation and Remote Control", on page 371.
Remote operation from a computer: Remote monitoring and control of the instrument from a connected computer is based on the common cross-platform technology VNC (Virtual Network Computing). On the remote computer, any standard web browser (supporting Java) or a dedicated VNC client (like Ultr@VNC) can be used. See also Chapter 3.4.8, "Remote Operation over VNC", on page 65.
3.4.2 Means of Manual Interaction
For the manual interaction with the R&S SMA100B, you have several methods that you can use as an alternative to perform a task:
Touchscreen: Touchscreen operation is the most direct way to interact. Almost all control elements and actions on the screen are based on the standard operating system concept. You can tap any user interface element to set parameters in dialog boxes, enter data, scroll within a dialog etc., as if you work with a mouse pointer.
Tapping the screen works like clicking mouse buttons:
Touch quickly = click: Selects a parameter or provokes an action.
Touch and hold = right-click: Opens a context-sensitive menu.
Touch and swipe = drag: Scrolls through the contents of a display element larger than the screen, e.g. a list or a table.
Function keys and rotary knob: The front panel provides nearly all functions and controls to operate the instrument in the classic way, without touchscreen.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
56
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
Optional mouse and/or keyboard: These devices work like known from PCs. The navigation keys on the front panel correspond to the keys on the keyboard.
This manual describes the manual interaction with the instrument via the touchscreen. It mentions the alternative methods using the keys on the instrument or the on-screen keypads if it deviates from the standard operating procedures. The usage of the touchscreen and navigation keys is described in Chapter 3.4.4, "Accessing the Functionality", on page 60.
Throughout the manual, the term "select" refers to any of the described methods, i.e. using a finger on the touchscreen, a mouse pointer in the display, or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard.
3.4.3 Understanding the Display Information
The home screen of the R&S SMA100B displays all main settings and generator states, divided into three main operation areas.
Figure 3-9: Home screen 1 = Taskbar/softkey bar with "Home" and "System Config" key 2 = Status bar 3 = Tile diagram
Status Bar............................................................................................................... 57 Tile Diagram............................................................................................................57 Taskbar....................................................................................................................58 Additional Display Characteristics...........................................................................59
3.4.3.1 Status Bar
The status bar at the top of the screen indicates the RF frequency and the level of the output signal provided to the DUT. You can set both parameters directly here.
3.4.3.2 Tile Diagram
The tile diagram is the main entry to the settings of the R&S SMA100B.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
57
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
Tile
Access to:
"Modulation"
Analog and stereo1), and pulse1) modulation settings Built in LF generator
"System Config"
"Save/Recall": settings for saving and loading instrument configurations "Remote access": Network and emulation settings. "Setup": general system configuration
"Sweep"
Frequency and level sweeps List mode
"Frequency"
RF frequency and phase Reference frequency
"Level"
RF level Attenuator Automatic level control User correction
"Clk Syn / Pow Sens"
Clock synthesis1) Power sensors
1) requires additional options
3.4.3.3 Taskbar
The "Taskbar" shows a home and an info button, and assigns a labeled button whenever you open a dialog. If more dialogs are open than the taskbar can display, touch and swipe the taskbar to scroll up and down. The buttons shown in the following example represent the variants.
Table 3-11: Example of buttons in the taskbar "Home" button Returns to the home screen.
"Busy" indicator Indicates a running process.
"User Menu" Lists parameters that can be defined for quick access.
Shows the current remote access connections when the instrument is remotely controlled. Tip: An indicator in the "System Config" tile shows the current remote control status.
R&S NRP power sensors Shows a connected external power sensor. The button displays the current readings when the sensor is active.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
58
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
Active dialogs Indicates the dialog name of each active dialog in a separate button.
"Info" key
Provides access to status and error messages.
Note: The warning symbol signifies a permanent error message.
3.4.3.4 Additional Display Characteristics
The following section provides a short insight on the indication of the screen in general, and significant elements that you see under specific operating modes, in dialogs or settings.
Appearance of active elements Active elements like On/Off switches, state buttons have a blue background. Selected elements are framed or highlighted orange. Inactive elements are gray.
On-Screen keypads As additional means of interacting with the instrument without having to connect an external keyboard, either a numerical or alphanumerical on-screen keypad appears when you activate an entry field (see Chapter 3.4.5, "Entering Data", on page 61).
Info line The "Info line" shows brief status information and error messages. It appears when an event generates a message.
Key parameters indicated in tab labels Most dialogs are divided into tabs with logically grouped parameters. The tab label expresses the content and can also contain status indicators or the set value of a key parameter.
Scroll bar handle An arrow icon that appears when you touch a scroll bar helps you to scroll in a dialog or list. If no scrollbar handle appears, you can touch and swipe an element to scroll up and down.
Progress indicators A busy icon indicates a currently running process. If a process takes some time, a progress bar shows the current state.
Context-sensitive menus Within the entire screen display, including single parameters, you can access context-sensitive menus that provide some additional functions.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
59
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
3.4.4 Accessing the Functionality
All functionalities are provided in dialog boxes as known from computer programs. You can control the instrument intuitively with the touchscreen. This section provides an overview of the accessing methods.
The instrument's functions and settings can be accessed by selecting one of the following elements: System and function keys on the front panel of the instrument Taskbar/softkeys on the touchscreen Context-sensitive menus for specific elements on the touchscreen, or with the
rotary knob (press and hold). Elements on the status bar in the touchscreen Displayed setting on the touchscreen, that means block diagram and all settings
available in dialogs.
To open a dialog box
Perform one of the following actions: Tap the required tile, and then the menu entry. Tap the minimized view (button) on the taskbar.
Some of the utility keys access a dedicated dialog, too.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
60
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
To minimize a dialog box 1. To return to the home screen, tap the "Home" button. 2. To switch to another dialog, press the [Next Window] button.
To close a dialog box To close a dialog box, you have the same controls as you know from computers or devices with touchscreen. Perform one of the following actions:
Tap the "Close" icon in the upper right corner. Press the [Esc] key on the front panel. Drag and drop a minimized dialog from the taskbar to the tile diagram.
To select an option in a dialog box Tap the required option.
3.4.5 Entering Data
Some parameters have their own key on the front panel. For data input in dialog boxes, the instrument provides on-screen keypads for entering numeric and alphanumeric values. Thus, you can always set the parameters via the touchscreen, the front panel, or an external keyboard.
Correcting an entry
1. Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to the right of the entry you want to delete. 2. Press the [Backspace] key. 3. Deletes the entry to the left of the cursor. 4. Enter your correction.
Completing the entry
Press the [Enter] key or the rotary knob.
Aborting the entry
Press the [Esc] key. The dialog box closes without changing the settings.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
61
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
3.4.5.1 Entering Numeric Parameters
To enter values with the on-screen keypad For numeric settings, the instrument displays the numeric keypad. The units specified correspond to the units of the parameter. 1. Enter the numeric value. 2. Tap the unit button to complete the entry.
The unit is added to the entry. 3. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing
"Enter".
To enter values by using the front panel controls 1. Change the currently used parameter value by using the rotary knob or the [Up/
Down] keys. 2. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing the
[Enter] key or any of the unit keys. The instrument highlights the editing line to confirm the entry.
If you edit numeric data in tables, the entry field must be in edit mode: Press [Enter], or the rotary knob to activate the edit mode.
3.4.5.2 Entering Alphanumeric Parameters
If a field requires alphanumeric input, you can use the on-screen keyboard to enter letters and (special) characters.
3.4.5.3 Undo and Redo Actions
Accessed via the context-sensitive menus, "Undo" allows you to restore one or more actions on the instrument. Depending on the available memory, the "Undo" steps can restore all actions.
"Redo" restores a previously undone action.
3.4.6 Getting Information and Help
In some dialog boxes, graphics are included to explain the way a setting works.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
62
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
For further information, you can use the following sources: Tooltips give the value range of the parameter. The context help provides functional description on a setting. The general help explains a dialog box, provides instructions, and general informa-
tion.
To display context help
To access a help topic, perform one of the following: a) Tap and hold the parameter for which you need information and tap "Help" in the context menu. b) Tap the parameter and press the [Help] key. The "Help" dialog opens. You can browse the help for further information.
Contents of the help dialog box
The help dialog box covers two main areas: "Contents" - contains a table of help contents "Topic" - contains a specific help topic The help system also provides an "Index" and a "Find" area, and "Zoom" functions that are accessed via the corresponding buttons.
To open general help
Press the yellow [Help] key on the front panel. If a dialog box is opened, the help topic for the current tab is shown. Otherwise the "Contents" page appears.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
63
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
Navigating in the table of contents and in the help topics 1. To move through the displayed contents entries, tap on an entry and scroll or use a
connected mouse or the [Up/Down] keys. Entries with a plus sign contain further entries. 2. To display a help topic, tap on the topic name or double-click the topic name or press the [Enter] key. 3. To follow a cross-reference, tap on the link text. 4. To return to the previous page, select "Back". This function scrolls back all steps you have performed before. 5. Use the "scroll bars" to shift the visible section of content shown. 6. To maximize the "Topics" area, tap the "Hide Contents Tree" button to hide the contents tree.
Using the index 1. Select the "Index" button. 2. Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in.
The entries starting with these characters are displayed. 3. Tap on the index entry.
The corresponding help topic is displayed.
3.4.7 Remote Control
In addition to working with the R&S SMA100B interactively, located directly at the instrument, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. The R&S SMA100B supports various methods for remote control: Connecting the instrument to a LAN (see Chapter 3.1.7, "Connecting to LAN",
on page 31) Using the LXI browser interface in a LAN Connecting a PC via the IEC-bus (IEEE 488) interface Remote control via the USB interface
For remote control over LAN or USB, you can use the R&S VISA (Virtual Instrument Software Architecture) library provided for download at the Rohde & Schwarz website http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/rsvisa.
How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in Chapter 13, "Network Operation and Remote Control", on page 371.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
64
R&S®SMA100B
Getting Started Instrument Control
3.4.8 Remote Operation over VNC
The VNC is an application which can be used to access and control the instrument from a remote computer through a LAN connection. While the instrument is in operation, the instrument screen contents are displayed on the remote computer, and VNC provides access to all applications, files, and network resources of the instrument. Thus, remote operation of the instrument is possible.
Instrument control from a remote computer To access the basic utility functions of the R&S SMA100B, perform a right mouse click the block diagram and select "Key Emulation". A key panel to the right of the block diagram gives access to the utility functions provided by the front panel keys.
The VNC is an add-on program, included in operating system Linux/Unix, and available as a free-of-charge download on the internet.
For more information, refer to Chapter 13.9, "Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC", on page 424.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
65
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration
4 RF Signal Configuration
The R&S SMA100B signal generator generates RF signals with outstanding spectral purity within the frequency range from 8 kHz up to 20 GHz and with adjustable signal level over a wide range.
In addition to these real-time CW signals, you can generate RF signals from predefined lists and sweep signals that vary according to the frequency or amplitude curves.
You can also apply versatile analog modulation types with definable characteristics.
The variably adjustable output level due to the built-in attenuator, allows you to vary the RF signal level over the full level range. There are different methods to improve signal performance and to optimize the signal quality for the particular application, or to increase the accuracy and reliability of the generated RF signal.
The R&S SMA100B supports R&S NRP power sensors, e.g. to monitor the output level of the generator or to determine the level correction values for user correction lists.
Signal modes and characteristics
The R&S SMA100B generates unmodulated or analog modulated RF signals. You can output the signal in fixed mode or as a signal having periodically varying frequencies or amplitudes.
Signal modes for RF signal generation: Unmodulated signal
Generates an unmodulated continuous wave (CW) of constant frequency and amplitude. For information on the signal frequency and level settings and an example on how to configure a simple CW signal, see: Chapter 4.4, "RF Frequency Settings", on page 71 Chapter 4.5, "RF Level Settings", on page 74 Chapter 3.3.1, "Generating an Unmodulated Carrier", on page 48 Analog modulated signal Modulates the signal with an analog signal and generates amplitude, phase, frequency and pulse modulation. See Chapter 5, "Analog Modulations", on page 80.
The R&S SMA100B allows you to provide the RF signal with constant or varying frequencies and/or amplitudes at the output: Constant frequency and level (CW/Fixed mode)
The RF output signal has the set frequency and level. Varying frequency and/or level
Sweep mode An RF or LF frequency and RF level sweep signal, processed continuously, step-by-step or individually and with selectable trigger modes. You can only run one sweep at a time.
List mode
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
66
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration How to Set the Frequency and Level
The RF signal is based on a list of predefined frequency and level values pairs and step widths.
See Chapter 7, "List and Sweep Mode", on page 169.
4.1 Activating RF Signal Output
Per default, the RF output signal is deactivated.
To activate the RF output 1. Configure the RF signal as required.
Set, for example, the frequency and level values.
2. Activate the RF output in one of the following ways: a) Select "Level > RF ON > On" b) Press the [RF on/off] key at the front panel.
3. In the "Level" tile, observe the color of the "RF On" icon. The blue color indicates that the RF output is activated.
RF State/RF ON............................................................................................................67 RF output impedance....................................................................................................67
RF State/RF ON Activates or deactivates the RF output. Acts as the [RF on/off] key. Remote command: :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] on page 475
RF output impedance You can query the impedance of the RF output. Remote command: :OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance? on page 476
4.2 How to Set the Frequency and Level
The simplest form of the RF signal is a continuous wave (CW) of constant frequency and amplitude. The RF signal is defined by its frequency, level and phase.
Use one of the following: "Status Bar > Frequency and Level" "Frequency panel > Frequency" "Level panel > Level" "Frequency panel > Frequency > Phase"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
67
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration How to Set the Frequency and Level
On the front panel, press the [Freq] or the [Level] key.
Current frequency and level values are indicated in the "Status bar" so that you can see them at a glance. Values displayed in the status bar and in the "Frequency/Level" dialogs can deviate from each other.
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 68.
RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument
If your test setup includes a downstream instrument, you can enter the parameter of the downstream instrument in the frequency or level settings dialog of the R&S SMA100B. Examples of downstream instruments are mixers, frequency multipliers, amplifiers or attenuators and of their corresponding major parameters offset, multiplier, amplitude. The R&S SMA100B generates the signal without the downstream parameters, but considers all additional parameters concerning the frequency and level.
Example parameters that affect the frequency and level: Frequency offset Multiplication factor User correction
Any of these cases are indicated by a dedicated icon, displayed in the "Frequency" or "Level" tile, depending on the affected parameter.
Figure 4-1 illustrates the calculation of the "Frequency" and "Level" values, displayed in the status bar.
Figure 4-1: Frequency and Level display vs frequency and level at the RF output
fRF, LevelRF
fRF Out, LevelRF
Out
n*f f Level
= Frequency and level ("Status bar > Frequency and Level") at the output of the downstream instrument, see also Calculation of fRF and LevelRF)
= Frequency and level at the output connector [RF] ("RF > RF Frequency > Frequency" and "RF > RF Level > Amplitude")
= Multiplication factor ("RF > RF Frequency > Multiplier") = Frequency offset ("RF > RF Frequency > Offset") = Power offset ("RF > RF Level > Offset")
Calculation of fRF and LevelRF
fRF =n*fRF Out + f LevelRF = LevelRF Out + Level
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
68
R&S®SMA100B
4.3 RF Connector Settings
Access: 1. Select "Frequency" > "RF Connectors".
RF Signal Configuration RF Connector Settings
The "RF Connectors" dialog shows the assignment of the logical signals to the connectors. The connectors displayed depend on the options installed.
2. Select a "Signal" to access the corresponding settings dialog or directly set signal characteristics.
3. Use the built-in Show Connector function to display the physical location of the selected connector.
The eye icon in the tab header indicates the panel (front, rear or both) the selected connector is at.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
69
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration RF Connector Settings
Settings:
Signal............................................................................................................................ 70 Connector......................................................................................................................71 Show Connector............................................................................................................71
Signal Displays the signal that is assigned to the connector.
Selecting a signal accesses the settings dialog for configuring the signal, or setting signal characteristics directly.
For additional information on the connectors, see: Chapter 3.2.2.1, "Connectors", on page 45 "Signal output" on page 81 for the assignment of the input and output connectors
used for analog modulation signals.
"Instr. Trigger"
Input of an external trigger signal for sweep and list modes, see Chapter 7.1, "Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes", on page 171.
"External Mod..."
Input of an external modulation signal, see "Signal sources" on page 80.
"LF Output"
Output of the internal LF gennerator signal, Chapter 5.4.8, "LF Signal Output Settings", on page 119.
"Ref. Freq. Input"
Input of an external reference signal, see Chapter 9.2, "Reference Frequency Settings", on page 288 .
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
70
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration RF Frequency Settings
"Ref. Freq. Output" Output of the internal reference signal, see Chapter 9.3, "Reference Output Settings", on page 292 .
"Signal Valid" / "Signal Valid Neg." Automatically generated output signal that identifies a valid signal time (level and frequency) for all analog modulation signals. For "Signal Valid Neg." (inverted), the output signal is low during the valid signal time.
"Pulse In"
Input of an external pulse signal or input of external trigger/gate signal for the internal pulse generator (see Chapter 5.4.4, "Pulse Generator", on page 97).
"Pulse Video"
Output of the internal pulse generator signal or the looped through "Pulse Ext" pulse signal (video signal), see Chapter 5.4.1, "Pulse Modulation", on page 83.
Connector Displays the assigned connector.
Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
4.4 RF Frequency Settings
Access: 1. Select "Frequency" > "RF Frequency".
2. Observe the information on the home screen, "Frequency" tile.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
71
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration RF Frequency Settings
The "Frequency" tile indicates the reference frequency, current frequency offset and multiplier values, and phase offset value.
In the "RF Frequency" dialog, you can configure: RF frequency, incl. an offset or multiplication factor of a downstream instrument The step size for varying the frequency with the rotary knob. The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chapter 14.16.4, "SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem", on page 624.
Settings
Frequency..................................................................................................................... 72 Main PLL Bandwidth..................................................................................................... 73 Offset.............................................................................................................................73 Multiplier........................................................................................................................ 73 User Variation................................................................................................................73
Variation Active............................................................................................... 73 Variation Step..................................................................................................73
Frequency Sets the RF frequency. This frequency is output at the RF connector. It does not consider an Offset or multiplication factor (Multiplier). See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 68. Note: Suppressed values in the status bar For security concerns or certain operating modes, you can hide the frequency and level display in the status bar.
The display has been disabled for security reasons. See: Annotation Frequency Annotation Amplitude
The display is disabled when list mode is running, see Chapter 7, "List and Sweep Mode", on page 169. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] on page 626
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
72
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration RF Frequency Settings
Main PLL Bandwidth Selects the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) bandwidth of the main synthesizer.
"Normal"
Default main PLL bandwidth. The instrument provides the maximum modulation bandwidth and FM/PhiM deviation.
"Narrow"
Sets the narrow PLL bandwidth.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PLL:MODE on page 631
Offset Sets the frequency offset.
This value represents the frequency shift of a downstream instrument, like for example a mixer.
The "Frequency" value displayed in the status bar is the resulting frequency, as it is at the output of the downstream instrument. The frequency at the R&S SMA100B RF output is not changed.
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 68.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:OFFSet on page 628
Multiplier Sets the multiplication factor for the RF frequency.
This value represents the multiplication factor of a downstream instrument, as for example a multiplier. You can also assign a negative multiplication factor, for example -1.0 to support frequency converters working in the reverse frequency position.
The "Frequency" value displayed in the status bar is the resulting frequency, as it is at the output of the downstream instrument. The frequency at the R&S SMA100B RF output is not changed.
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 68.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MULTiplier on page 628
User Variation Defines and activates a user-defined step width for varying the RF frequency or RF level with the rotary knob.
If disabled, the step width varies in steps of one unit at the cursor position.
Variation Active User Variation Activates the set user-defined step width.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE on page 630 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE on page 667
Variation Step User Variation Sets the user-defined step width.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
73
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration RF Level Settings
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement] on page 630 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] on page 668
4.5 RF Level Settings
Access: 1. Select "Level" > "RF Level".
In the "RF Level" dialog, you can configure the offset-free level, the level limit, and the step width for varying the level with the rotary knob.
2. Select "User Variation" to set the step width to be used when .setting the RF level using the rotary knob.
3. Observe the information on the home screen, "Level" tile.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
74
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration RF Level Settings
The "Level" tile indicates the level limit, the user correction status and current correction value, current setting characteristics incl. mode.
The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chapter 14.16.11, "SOURce:POWer Subsystem", on page 662.
Settings
RF State/RF ON............................................................................................................75 Amplitude...................................................................................................................... 75 Limit ..............................................................................................................................76 Offset ............................................................................................................................76 Setting Characteristics ................................................................................................. 76 Harmonic Filter .............................................................................................................77 Level Range ................................................................................................................. 77 Readjust........................................................................................................................ 78 User Variation................................................................................................................78
Variation Active............................................................................................... 78 Variation Step..................................................................................................78
RF State/RF ON Activates or deactivates the RF output. Acts as the [RF on/off] key. Remote command: :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] on page 475
Amplitude Sets the level of the RF signal. The value is offset-free and corresponds to the level at the RF connector. See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 68. Note: Suppressed values in the status bar For security concerns or certain operating modes, you can hide the frequency and level display in the status bar.
The display has been disabled for security reasons. See: Annotation Frequency Annotation Amplitude
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
75
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration RF Level Settings
The display is disabled when list mode is running, see Chapter 7, "List and Sweep Mode", on page 169.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:POWer on page 666 Note: The SCPI command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][: AMPLitude] sets the level of the "Level" display. This means, the level containing offset.
Limit Sets an upper limit for the RF output power.
You can use this value to protect your DUT from damage due to high input power. If you enter an RF level above this value, the instrument limits the output power to this specified value, and generates the warning message:
"Pep value greater than the defined limit." However, the level indication in the status bar is not affected.
The setting is not affected by an instrument preset ([Preset] key or *RST) and the "Save/Recall" function. It is reset only by factory preset.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude] on page 665
Offset Sets a level offset.
This value represents the level shift of a downstream instrument, like, for example, an attenuator or an amplifier.
The "Level" value displayed in the status bar is the resulting level, as it is at the output of the downstream instrument. The level at the R&S SMA100B RF output is not changed.
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 68.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet on page 668
Setting Characteristics Selects additional quality characteristics to optimize the behavior of the RF signal level for the specific application.
"Auto"
Sets the RF output level automatically according to the selected mode. In this mode, the instrument provides the highest dynamic range and fastest setting times, as specified in the data sheet. The RF signal is shortly blanked when the step attenuator is switching.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
76
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration RF Level Settings
"Uninterrupted" Suppresses blanking at level transitions. Frequency transitions can lead to an RF level blanking due to hardware specific switching points. This mode reduces the dynamic range of the instrument. The step attenuator is fixed.
"Strictly Monotone" Executes signal level changes monotonically increasing or decreasing. The setting makes sure that increasing the level value exclusively results in an increased output level, and vice versa. All electronic switches, which might affect the monotonicity are fixed. The operation mode is useful for applications using level searching algorithms which rely on a strictly monotonous behavior.
"Constant-VSWR" Suppresses output impedance variations at the RF output connector, due to changed level settings.
"High Dyn. Uninterrupted" R&S SMAB-K724 Provides a linear output power that is uninterrupted over a wide dynamic range. Note: The R&S SMA100B supports this characteristic at frequencies above 52 MHz. If you select the setting at lower frequencies (52 MHz), the instrument reports a settings conflict.
"User"
Indicates that a setting has been modified in the expert mode. The expert mode is a protected function, that requires protection level 2 password.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LBEHaviour on page 665
Harmonic Filter Activates low harmonic filter or enables its automatic switching.
"On"
Ensures best low harmonics performance but decreases the level range.
"Auto"
Applies an automatically selected harmonic filter that fits to the current level setting.
Remote command: :OUTPut<hw>:FILTer:MODE on page 476
Level Range Shows the interruption-free range of the level that you can use in the currently selected mode.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:LOWer? on page 670 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:UPPer? on page 670
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
77
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration RF Phase Settings
Readjust Recalculates and adjusts the internal switch positions of the RF chain according to the current level. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SONCe on page 664
User Variation Defines and activates a user-defined step width for varying the RF frequency or RF level with the rotary knob. If disabled, the step width varies in steps of one unit at the cursor position.
Variation Active User Variation Activates the set user-defined step width. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE on page 630 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE on page 667
Variation Step User Variation Sets the user-defined step width. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement] on page 630 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] on page 668
4.6 RF Phase Settings
The phase in sinusoidal signals defines the initial angle at its origin. Access: 1. Select "Frequency" > "Phase".
In the "Phase" tab, you can determine the delta phase value and reset the phase to this reference.
2. Observe the information on the home screen, "Frequency" tile.
The "Frequency" tile indicates used reference frequency, current frequency offset and multiplier values, and the delta phase value.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
78
R&S®SMA100B
RF Signal Configuration RF Phase Settings
The remote commands required to define the settings are described in Chapter 14.16.10, "SOURce:PHASe Subsystem", on page 661.
Settings
Delta Phase...................................................................................................................79 Reset Delta Phase Display........................................................................................... 79
Delta Phase Sets the phase of the RF signal. The current phase of the signal is used as the reference. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe on page 661
Reset Delta Phase Display Adopts the selected "Delta Phase" value as the current value, and resets delta phase to 0 degrees. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe:REFerence on page 661
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
79
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Types and Signal Sources
5 Analog Modulations
The R&S SMA100B supports AM (amplitude modulation), FM (frequency modulation), M (phase modulation (PhiM)), and also PULM (pulse modulation). It generates low frequency signals (LF) as sine, triangle, trapezoidal or square (pulse) waveform, that can be output and further processed by a downstream instrument.
5.1 Required Options
R&S SMA100B base unit equipped with the following options: Option frequency (R&S SMAB-B10x) Option pulse modulator (R&S SMAB-K22) Option pulse generator (R&S SMAB-K23)
(supports generation of single and double pulse signals) Option multi-function generator (R&S SMAB-K24) Option pulse train generator (R&S SMAB-K27)
(requires R&S SMAB-K23) Option AM/FM/PhiM (R&S SMAB-K720) Option Scan AM (R&S SMAB-K720 and R&S SMAB-K721) Option Chirp Signal Generation (R&S SMAB-K725
(requires R&S SMAB-K22 R&S SMAB-K23, providing extended ranges for resolution, pulse width and pulse period R&S SMAB-K720)
For more information, see data sheet.
5.2 Modulation Types and Signal Sources
Radio transmitters do not transmit an audio signal directly. Instead, they modulate the audio signal onto a continuous wave (CW) carrier with much higher frequency.
A CW carrier has a sinusoidal waveform with constant amplitude and constant frequency. Modulating a signal onto the carrier means varying a property of the carrier according to the modulating signal. The three basic modulation types FM, AM and PhiM for example, vary one property of the carrier proportional to the instantaneous amplitude of the modulating signal.
Signal sources
If fully equipped, the R&S SMA100B modulates signals from the following sources: Internal modulation source
Two LF generators
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
80
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Types and Signal Sources
Direction Output
Input
Each of the LF generators provides a modulation signal with sine, pulse, triangle or trapezoid shape.
Noise generator The noise generator supplies white noise with selectable bandwidth and distribution.
High-performance pulse generator Generates single and double pulse, or pulse train signals.
External modulation source
Amplitude, frequency or phase modulation signals are input at the Ext connector.
Pulse modulation signals, at the Pulse Ext connector.
Signal output
You can perform AM, FM and PhiM with the signal of any of the provided sources. Moreover, you can combine two modulation signals and generate a two-tone signal. Regardless of the signal source, the generated signal can be output for further processing in a downstream instrument.
Current configuration is indicated in the "Analog Modulations > Overview" dialog; the output signal routing can be changed, too.
Input and output connectors
Modulation
Connector
Pulse modulation from internal signal Loop through of pulse signal from Pulse Ext
Pulse Video
All analog modulations
Marks the valid level and frequency
Inverted version; the output signal is low during the valid signal times.
Signal Valid Signal Valid Neg.
Chirp Modulation
Pulse Video Pulse Sync
Pulse generator
Pulse Sync
LF generator
LF
AM, FM, PhiM
Ext **)
Pulse modulation from external source*) Or External trigger or gate signal*)
Pulse Ext**)
Required option R&S SMAB-K22/-K23
R&S SMAB-K22/-K23
R&S SMAB-K720 R&S SMAB-K22
*) External trigger signal and external signal for the pulse modulation cannot be used simultaneously, because these signals are expected at the same connector Pulse Ext. Signal polarity and impedance are the same for both signals.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
81
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Activating Analog Modulations
**) The external modulation signal must have a voltage of US = 1 V (UEFF = 0.707 V) to achieve the displayed modulation depth and range. Note that the input voltage does not exceed 1 V, otherwise modulation distortions can occur.
For more information, see data sheet.
Interactions and characteristics
FM and PhiM modulations exclude each other and cannot be performed simultaneously.
In sweep mode, LF frequency sweep is possible.
The settings of the modulation signal affect all analog modulations that use an internal modulation source.
You can feed an external LF signal in each of the two paths.
Using exponential amplitude modulation with an external source, sets the coupling of the corresponding input automatically to DC. See also Chapter 5.4.7.2, "Source > External Settings", on page 116.
If you use Scan AM with an external modulation input signal, the voltage range is adjusted to +/- 6 V (usually +/-1 V). Therefore, we recommend that you do not use the external modulation signal for FM or PhiM in parallel, since the voltage will affect the modulations.
The amplitude modulation types linear and exponential derive the carrier signal either linear in percent / volt, or as complex exponential in dB / volt.
Scan AM provides the scan mode, i.e. an amplitude modulation depth with an extended dynamic range that automatically uses the exponential amplitude modulation type.
For pulse modulated signals, you can select between fast or smoothed transitions, see "Transition Type" on page 84. This setting is available over the entire frequency range for all instruments with frequency options up to 6 GHz. For higher frequency options, the frequency range for the smoothed setting is limited.
For more information, see data sheet.
5.3 Activating Analog Modulations
Use one of the following: Select "Modulation > Amplitude Modulation/Frequency Modulation/Phase Modulation > State > ON". Select "Modulation > MOD ON". Press the [Mod on/off] key.
[Mod on/off] Activate one or more analog modulations and press the [Mod on/off] key to toggle the state of them all.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
82
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Pressing the key again restores the status that was active before the last switch-off.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:MODulation[:ALL][:STATe] on page 543
5.4 Modulation Settings
Access: Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Sources".
The "Modulation" dialog contains all functions and settings to configure the analog modulations, the LF signal sources for performing a modulation, and the LF signal output. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in: Chapter 14.16.1.2, "SOURce:AM Subsystem", on page 544 Chapter 14.16.1.4, "SOURce:FM Subsystem", on page 554 Chapter 14.16.1.5, "SOURce:PM Subsystem", on page 559 Chapter 14.16.1.6, "SOURce:PULM Subsystem", on page 563 Chapter 14.16.1.3, "SOURce:CHIRp Subsystem", on page 550 Chapter 14.16.6, "SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 632
5.4.1 Pulse Modulation
Option: see Chapter 5.1, "Required Options", on page 80.
Access: Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modulation".
The "Pulse Modulation" dialog contains all parameters required to configure the pulse modulator and the pulse generator. It also displays the pulse signal graphically.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
83
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
For an overview of the supported signals sources and related connectors, see Chapter 5.2, "Modulation Types and Signal Sources", on page 80.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.16.1.6, "SOURce:PULM Subsystem", on page 563.
Settings:
State.............................................................................................................................. 84 Source........................................................................................................................... 84 Transition Type..............................................................................................................84
State Activates pulse modulation and triggers the following automatic settings:
Pulse generator is activated. The signal is output at the Pulse Video connector. To deactivate the signal output, set "Pulse Generator" > Pulse Output State > "Off".
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:STATe on page 567
Source Selects between the internal "Pulse Generator" or an "External" pulse signal for the modulation.
"Pulse Generator" Selects the internal generator.
See Pulse Generator.
"External"
Modulation source is fed to the input connector.
See "Signal sources" on page 80.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:SOURce on page 567
Transition Type Selects between "Fast" or "Smoothed" slew rate (slope).
"Fast"
Enables fast transitions with shortest rise and fall times.
"Smoothed"
Flattens the slew rate, resulting in longer rise / fall times. Use this mode if you are working with devices that are sensitive to steep slopes.
Note: The R&S SMA100B supports this functionality up to a certain frequency, depending on the installed frequency options, see also "Interactions and characteristics" on page 82. For more information, see data sheet.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TTYPe on page 567
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
84
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
5.4.2 FM, PhiM and AM Modulation Settings
Option: R&S SMAB-K720
Access: Select "Modulation" > "Amplitude Modulation/Frequency Modulation/Phase Modu-
lation".
The "FM", "M" and "AM" tabs contain the parameters per modulation type.
Source
State.............................................................................................................................. 86 Source........................................................................................................................... 86 FM settings....................................................................................................................86
Deviation......................................................................................................... 86 Deviation Mode............................................................................................... 87 Total Deviation................................................................................................ 87 Ratio Path2/Path1...........................................................................................87 Mode............................................................................................................... 87 PhiM settings.................................................................................................................88 Deviation......................................................................................................... 88 Deviation Mode............................................................................................... 88 Total Deviation................................................................................................ 88 Ratio Path2/Path1...........................................................................................89 Mode............................................................................................................... 89 AM settings................................................................................................................... 89 Mode............................................................................................................... 90
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
85
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Type................................................................................................................ 90 Depth.............................................................................................................. 91 Sensitivity........................................................................................................91 Deviation Mode............................................................................................... 91 Total Depth......................................................................................................91 Ratio Path2/Path1...........................................................................................92
State Activates a modulation.
Note: Some modulations exclude each other and cannot be performed simultaneously. For more information, see data sheet.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:STATe on page 546 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:STATe on page 556 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:STATe on page 560
Source Selects the LF signal source.
You can vary the signal sources for each of the modulations.
"LF Generator 1/2" Selects one or both of the internally generated LF signals.
See Chapter 5.4.7.1, "Source > LF Generator Settings", on page 112.
"External 1/2" Selects an externally supplied LF signal.
"Noise Generator" Selects the internally generated noise signal.
See Chapter 5.4.7.3, "Source > Noise Generator Settings", on page 118.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SOURce on page 547 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:SOURce on page 556 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:SOURce on page 561
FM settings The following settings are dedicated to FM.
Deviation FM settings Sets the frequency modulation deviation in Hz.
The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency and the selected modulation mode (see data sheet).
Maximal possible deviation is selected automatically, if one of the following applies: The selected deviation is too high for the particular frequency The selected frequency is outside of the range where deviation is possible. A warning message indicates this situation, too.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
86
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>[:DEViation] on page 556
Deviation Mode FM settings Enables you to couple the LF signal of both paths and determines the mode for fixing the total deviation.
The total deviation is the sum of both paths. When the sum is exceeded, the R&S SMA100B reports a settings conflict, but does not change the settings.
"Uncoupled" Enables you to adjust the deviation for each path independently.
"Fixed Total"
Couples the deviation of both paths in per Hz. If you change the deviation of any path, the R&S SMA100B automatically adjusts the value of the other path. The sum always results in the set Total Deviation.
"Fixed Ratio" Couples the deviation ratio of both paths. If you change the deviation of any path, the R&S SMA100B adjusts the value of the other path.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:DEViation:MODE on page 557
Total Deviation FM settings Sets the sum of the signal deviation for path 1 and path 2 in Hz when using combined sources in Deviation Mode > Fixed Total.
Deviation of both paths always sum up to the value of the total deviation.
Behavior when changing any depth settings: Changing the total deviation adjusts the deviation of both paths proportionally. Changing the deviation of one path adjusts the deviation of the other path. The
sum always results in the set total deviation.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:DEViation:SUM on page 557
Ratio Path2/Path1 FM settings Sets the deviation ratio (path2 to path1) in percent.
Example:
If the deviation in path1 is 10 kHz and the ratio is 50%, the deviation in path 2 is automatically set to 5 kHz.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:RATio on page 558
Mode FM settings Selects the mode of the frequency modulation.
"High Bandwidth" The maximum range for modulation bandwidth is available.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
87
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
"Low Noise"
Phase modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode. The range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is reduced (see data sheet). To reduce the phase noise further, set the Main PLL Bandwidth = "Narrow"
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:MODE on page 558
PhiM settings The following settings are dedicated to PhiM.
Deviation PhiM settings Sets the phase modulation deviation in radians or degrees.
The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency and the selected modulation mode (see data sheet).
Maximal possible deviation is selected automatically, if one of the following applies: The selected deviation is too high for the particular frequency The selected frequency is outside of the range where deviation is possible.
A warning message indicates this situation, too.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:PM<ch>[:DEViation] on page 563
Deviation Mode PhiM settings Enables you to couple the LF signal of both paths and determines the mode for fixing the total deviation.
The deviation sum 2 rad at a maximum. When the sum is exceeded, the R&S SMA100B adjusts the settings automatically.
"Uncoupled" Enables you to adjust the deviation for each path independently.
"Fixed Total"
Couples the deviation of both paths. If you change the deviation of any path, the R&S SMA100B automatically adjusts the value of the other path. The sum always results in the setTotal Deviation.
"Fixed Ratio" Couples the deviation ratio of both paths. If you change the deviation of any path, the R&S SMA100B adjusts the value of the other path.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:DEViation:MODE on page 562
Total Deviation PhiM settings In Deviation Mode = Fixed Total, sets the sum of the signal deviation for path 1 and path 2.
Deviation of both paths always sum up to the value of the total deviation.
Behavior when changing any depth settings: Changing the total deviation adjusts the deviations of both paths proportionally. Changing the deviation of one path adjusts the deviation of the other path. The
sum always results in the set total deviation.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:DEViation:SUM on page 562
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
88
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Ratio Path2/Path1 PhiM settings Sets the deviation ratio (path2 to path1) in per cent.
Example:
If the deviation in path1 is 10 rad and the ratio is 50%, the deviation in path 2 is automatically set to 5 rad.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:RATio on page 562
Mode PhiM settings Selects the mode of the phase modulation.
"High Bandwidth" The maximum range for modulation bandwidth and PhiM deviation is available. However, phase noise increases at low frequencies, and the range of PhiM deviation is limited. This mode is suitable if you process high frequencies.
"High Deviation" The maximum range for PhiM deviation is available. Phase noise is improved for low frequencies compared to the default mode. The range for modulation frequency is limited (see data sheet). This mode is suitable for low modulation frequencies and/or high PhiM deviation.
"Low Noise"
Frequency modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode. The range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is reduced (see data sheet).
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:MODE on page 561
AM settings The following settings are dedicated to AM.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
89
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Mode AM settings Selects the mode to derive the carrier signal for amplitude modulation.
"Normal"
Performs the standard amplitude modulation with a single sinusoidal carrier signal.
"Scan"
(Option: R&S SMAB-K721) Performs amplitude modulation with a higher dynamic range. The R&S SMA100B provides a special exponential amplitude modulation system optimized for highest dynamic range. You can use the scan mode to emulate level behaviors of transmitter/receiver systems with rotating antennas. Selecting "Mode > Scan" sets the modulation type to "Exponential". Note: Using exponential AM with an external source affects other operating modes as described in "Interactions and characteristics" on page 82.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:MODE on page 548
Type AM settings Selects the type of the amplitude modulation for both paths.
Using exponential AM with an external source affects the coupling mode and the external modulation input, see "Interactions and characteristics" on page 82.
"Linear"
Sets linear amplitude modulation with depths specified in percent / volt.
"Exponential" Sets ethe exponential AM type with depths in dB / volt.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
90
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:TYPE on page 550
Depth AM settings Determines the depth of the modulation signal in percent.
For "Type = Exponential", the unit of "AM Depth" changes to dB.
The depth is limited by the maximum peak envelope power (PEP).
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:DEPTh:LINear on page 547 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:DEPTh:EXPonential on page 548
Sensitivity AM settings Sets the input sensitivity of the external modulation signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SENSitivity[:LINear] on page 550 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SENSitivity:EXPonential on page 549
Deviation Mode AM settings Enables you to couple the LF signal of both paths and determines the mode for fixing the total deviation.
The deviation sum of both paths is 100% in total. When the sum is exceeded, the R&S SMA100B reports a settings conflict, but does not change the settings.
"Uncoupled"
Enables you to adjust the deviation depth for each path independently.
"Fixed Total"
Couples the deviation depth of both paths in per cent. If you change the depth of any path, the R&S SMA100B automatically adjusts the value of the other path. The sum always results in the set Total Depth.
"Fixed Ratio" Couples the deviation ratio of both paths. If you change the depth of any path, the R&S SMA100B adjusts the value of the other path.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:DEViation:MODE on page 549
Total Depth AM settings Sets the sum of the signal Depth for path 1 and path 2 in per cent when using combined sources and Deviation Mode > Fixed Total.
Using external LF signals, the R&S SMA100B indicates the Sensitivity per Volts for the input signal.
Provided both signal paths are turned on, the depth of both paths always sum up to the value of the total depth.
Behavior when changing any depth settings: Changing the total depth adjusts the depths of both paths proportionally. Changing the depth of one path adjusts the depth of the other path. The sum
always results in the set total depth.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
91
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:DEPTh:SUM on page 548
Ratio Path2/Path1 AM settings Sets the deviaton ratio of the signal depth for path 2 to path 1 in per cent when using combined sources.
Using external LF signals, the R&S SMA100B indicates the Sensitivity per Volts for the input signal.
In conjunction with the deviation mode, you can set the depth of both paths independently or coupled. Deviation Mode > Uncoupled
Enables you to set the Depth or Sensitivity of both paths independently. Deviation Mode > Fixed Ratio
Couples the ratio of the two paths as follows. Changing the ratio path2/path1 adjusts the depth of both path2. The depth of
path1 remains the same Changing the depth of one path adjusts the depth of the other accordingly. The
ratio path2/path1 remains the same.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:RATio on page 549
5.4.3 Chirp Modulation
Option: see Chapter 5.1, "Required Options", on page 80.
About chirp modulation
Chirp modulation is used in radar technique to achieve pulse compression. Pulse compression increases the sensitivity and resolution of radar systems by modifying transmitted pulses to improve their auto-correlation properties. To chirp the radar signal is one way of accomplishing pulse compression. A chirp is a signal with increasing or decreasing frequency over time.
The R&S SMA100B always couples the chirp modulation with the pulse modulation. It generates the modulation signals for FM and pulse modulator, and synchronizes the signals internally. The internal pulse generator signal is the modulation source for the pulse modulator, and the internal LF generator signal is the signal source for the frequency modulation. Normal FM mode is used. Using external modulation signals is not possible for chirp modulation.
The following graph shows the FM demodulated signal of chirped pulses with a chirp bandwidth of 80 MHz and a pulse width of 80 µs. Chirp direction is up.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
92
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Dependencies and their effects between chirp modulation and other operating modes
Some modulations exclude each other and cannot be performed simultaneously.
When pulse modulation is activated, the R&S SMA100B deactivates ALC automatically ("ALC OFF", i.e. switches to "Sample & Hold" state).
The "Sample & Hold" state opens the ALC loop, and disables the automatic control of the output level. The level modulator is set directly.
However, to correct the output level, the R&S SMA100B executes a "Sample & Hold" measurement after each change of frequency or level settings.
The nominal level is used for typically 3 ms to 5 ms after level or frequency setting, if: No attenuator is fitted. "High Power" mode is enabled. "Auto" mode is enabled, and if the level is in the range of the high power, i.e. the
mechanical relay bypass is switched.
The level is decreased by 30 dB during "Sample & Hold" measurement.
For more information, see data sheet.
The Sample&Hold measurement for the ALC is performed at the chirp center frequency. Therefore, the frequency response of the RF path can result in level errors for the FM modulated carrier especially with high chirp bandwidths.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
93
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
5.4.3.1 Chirp Modulation Settings
Option: see Chapter 5.1, "Required Options", on page 80. Chirp Modulation..................................................................................................... 94 Pulse External / Trigger ..........................................................................................97
Chirp Modulation
Access: Select "Modulation" > "Chirp Modulation".
The "Chirp Modulation" dialog contains the parameters for configuring the modulation and trigger settings.
State.............................................................................................................................. 94 Direction........................................................................................................................ 95 Pulse Period..................................................................................................................95 Bandwidth..................................................................................................................... 95 Trigger Mode................................................................................................................. 96 Pulse Width................................................................................................................... 96 Compression Ratio........................................................................................................96 Show Connector............................................................................................................96 Execute Single Trigger.................................................................................................. 96
State Activates chirp modulation.
Note: Some modulations exclude each other and cannot be performed simultaneously. For more information, see data sheet.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
94
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:STATe on page 553
Direction Selects the direction of the chirp modulation.
"Up"
The chirp starts with the lower frequency.
"Down"
The chirp starts with the higher frequency.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:DIRection on page 552
Pulse Period Sets the period of the generated chirp. Option R&S SMA100B-K23 provides higher resolution. For more information, see data sheet. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:PULSe:PERiod on page 552
Bandwidth Sets the modulation bandwidth in Hz. The modulation bandwidth is the difference between the maximum and minimum frequency. E.g. a bandwidth of 10 MHz at a center frequency of 1 GHz leads to a frequency modulation between 995 MHz and 1005 MHz.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
95
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
The maximum bandwidth depends on the installed frequency option and the RF frequency. If the bandwidth exceeds the RF frequency, or the frequency is out of the bandwidth range, the R&S SMA100B sets the maximum bandwidth and generates an error message.
For more information, see data sheet.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:BANDwidth on page 552
Trigger Mode Selects the trigger mode for chirp modulation signals.
To supply the external trigger signal, use the Pulse Ext connector.
"Auto"
Generates the chirp modulation signal continuously.
"Single"
Generates the chirp modulation signal once, triggered internally with "Execute Single Trigger" on page 96.
"Ext Single" Generates a single chirp pulse, triggered by an external signal.
"Ext Triggered" Generates the chirp pulse each time an external trigger event occurs.
"Extern Gated" Generates the chirp pulse signal triggered by an external gate signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:TRIGger:MODE on page 553
Pulse Width Sets the width of the generated pulse. The pulse width must be at least 1 us less than the set pulse period. Option R&S SMA100B-K23 provides a higher resolution.
For more information, see data sheet.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:PULSe:WIDTh on page 553
Compression Ratio Indicates the pulse compression ratio, i.e. the product of the pulse width in (s) and the bandwidth (Hz). Pulse compression increases the range resolution and the signal to noise ratio of pulsed signals.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:COMPression:RATio? on page 552
Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
Execute Single Trigger If[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:TRIGger:MODE > SINGle "Trigger Mode = Single", initiates a single pulse sequence manually.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:TRIGger:IMMediate on page 553
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
96
R&S®SMA100B
Pulse External / Trigger Access: 1. Select "Modulation" > "Chirp Modulation". 2. Select "Pulse External / Trigger".
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
The "Pulse External / Trigger" dialog contains the parameters for configuring the externally applied pulse and trigger signals.
Show Connector............................................................................................................97
Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
5.4.4 Pulse Generator
Option: see Chapter 5.1, "Required Options", on page 80.
Access: Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modulation > Pulse Generator".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
97
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
The "Pulse Generator" tab contains the settings for creating the pulse modulation signal internally.
Pulse Generator > General Settings....................................................................... 98 Pulse Generator > Pulse Train Settings................................................................103 Import/Export List Files......................................................................................... 107
5.4.4.1 Pulse Generator > General Settings
Access:
Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modulation > Pulse Generator".
Settings
Pulse Mode................................................................................................................... 99 Trigger Mode............................................................................................................... 100 Pulse Period................................................................................................................102 Pulse Width................................................................................................................. 102 Double Pulse Width.....................................................................................................103 Pulse Delay................................................................................................................. 103 Double Pulse Delay.....................................................................................................103 Pulse Repetition Frequency........................................................................................ 103 Pulse Output State...................................................................................................... 103 Show Connector..........................................................................................................103 Pulse Output Polarity.................................................................................................. 103 Execute Single Trigger................................................................................................ 103
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
98
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Pulse Mode Sets the operating mode of the pulse generator. Depending on the selection, the instrument displays the associated parameters.
"Single"
Generates a single pulse in one pulse period.
"Double"
1 = Pulse delay 2 = Pulse width 3 = Pulse period
Generates two pulses in one pulse period.
1 = Pulse width 2 = Double pulse delay 3 = Double pulse width 4 = Pulse period
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
99
R&S®SMA100B "Train"
Option: R&S SMAB-K27 Generates a user-defined pulse train.
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
1 = 1st pulse: On-time 2 = 1st pulse: Off-time 3 = 1st pulse: pulse period 4 = 2nd pulse: repeated 3 times 5 = 3rd pulse 6 = 4th pulse
See Chapter 5.4.4.2, "Pulse Generator > Pulse Train Settings", on page 103.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:MODE on page 565
Trigger Mode Selects between continuous triggering or triggering initiated by a trigger event from an external signal.
See also "Input and output connectors" on page 81.
"Auto"
Generates the internal modulation signal continuously.
"Single"
The pulse generator is triggered by an internal trigger event, initiated with Execute Single Trigger. The pulse signal is generated once.
"Ext Single" Generates a single pulse signal, triggered by an external signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
100
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
"Ext Triggered" Generates the pulse signal each time an external trigger event occurs.
Example: Generation of single pulse signal ("Pulse Mode = Single") using "Trigger Mode = Ext Triggered"
1 = External trigger signal input with "Trigger Input Polarity = Normal" (the positive slope is active)
2 = Sync signal 3 = Pulse signal t = Trigger delay between the trigger and the sync signal start; see data sheet delay = "Pulse Delay = 100 ns" PW = "Pulse Width = 100 ns"
Example: Generation of double pulse signal ("Pulse Mode = Double") using "Trigger Mode = Ext Triggered"
1 = External trigger signal input with "Trigger Input Polarity = Normal" (the positive slope is active)
2 = Sync signal
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
101
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
"Ext Gated"
3 = Pulse signal a = Trigger signal during double pulse generation is without effect t = Trigger delay between the trigger and the sync signal start; see data sheet delay = "Double Pulse Delay = 200 ns"; the first pulse starts without a delay PW = "Double Pulse Width = 100 ns"
Generates the signal triggered by an external gate signal.
Example: Generation of single pulse signal ("Pulse Mode = Single") using "Trigger Mode = Ext Gated"
1
= External trigger signal input with "Trigger Input Polarity = Normal" (the positive
slope is active)
2
= Sync signal
3
= Pulse signal
t = Trigger delay between the trigger and the sync signal start; see data sheet
delay = "Pulse Delay = 100 ns"
PW = "Pulse Width = 100 ns"
period = "Pulse Period = 300 ns" (time between the pulse start of two consecutive pul-
ses)
a
= Gate active duration (pulses are generated during the gate active part)
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:MODE on page 565
Pulse Period Sets the repetition rate of the generated pulse signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:PERiod on page 565
Pulse Width Sets the pulse duration of the generated pulse signal.
Note: The pulse width must be at least 20 ns less than the set pulse period.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:WIDTh on page 566
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
102
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Double Pulse Width Sets the width of the second pulse. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh on page 567
Pulse Delay Sets the pulse delay. The pulse delay determines the time that elapses after a trigger event before pulse modulation starts. The pulse delay is not effective for double pulse generation. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DELay on page 566
Double Pulse Delay Sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second pulse. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:DELay on page 566
Pulse Repetition Frequency Indicates the number of pulses of the repeating signal in a specific time unit. The parameter is commonly expressed in Hz or in pulses per second (pps). Remote command: n.a.
Pulse Output State Activates the output of the pulse modulation signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut[:STATe] on page 660
Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
Pulse Output Polarity Sets the polarity of the pulse output signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity on page 660
Execute Single Trigger If "Trigger Mode = Single", initiates a single pulse sequence manually. Remote command: [:SOURce]:PULM[:INTernal][:TRAin]:TRIGger:IMMediate on page 565
5.4.4.2 Pulse Generator > Pulse Train Settings
Option: see Chapter 5.1, "Required Options", on page 80.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
103
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Access:
1. Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modulation > Pulse Generator" > "Pulse Mode = Train".
2. Select "Pulse Train Data".
3. Select an existing file or select "New" to create one.
4. Define the filename. Select "Edit Pulse Train Data", if the file is empty or to control and change the values.
5. In the "Edit Pulse Train Data" dialog, enter the pulse on/off times and pulse repetition values.
6. Select "Save".
A pulse train is a sequence of pulses with user-defined repetition, and pulse on and off times. Once defined, pulse train settings can be saved in a file. The filename is user-definable; the file extension (*.pulstrn) is assigned automatically. When a file is selected, the filename is indicated.
Possible ways to configure a pulse train
You can configure a pulse train in the following ways: Internally
Use the built-in editor table editor, see in the "Pulse Generator > Pulse Train" dialog. Once defined, pulse train settings can be saved in a file. For example, to exchange configuration between instruments or to modify the file content with an external program and reload them again. The filename is user-definable; the file extension is *.pulstrn.
Using the corresponding remote-control commands.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
104
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Note that you have to create a pulse train file first. Externally
Create a pulse train sequence as a CSV file with Microsoft Excel, with a Notepad or a similar tool, save it with the predefined extension. Transfer the file to and load it into the instrument.
Pulse train ASCII file format
Files describing pulse trains are simple files in text or comma-separated value (CSV) file format. The filename is user-definable; the file extension is *.csv or *.txt.
The file contains a list of pulse definition values, one row per pulse; a new line indicator separates the pulses. Pulses are defined with their pulse on time, pulse off time given in us and number of repetitions.
Example: Pulse train file content (*.txt file)
0.0001,0.0005,2 0.00025,0.0005,1 0.0001,0.0003,3
For file handling, use the standard functions in the "File Manager", see Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318.
Settings
Pulse Train Data..........................................................................................................105 Edit Pulse Train Data.................................................................................................. 106 Data handling keys .....................................................................................................106
Go To............................................................................................................ 106 Edit................................................................................................................106 Save As/Save............................................................................................... 106 Fill... ............................................................................................................................106
Pulse Train Data Accesses the standard "File Select" function of the instrument. The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog are self-explanatory.
Pulse train files are files with predefined file extension *.pulstrn. When a file is selected, the dialog indicates the filename.
You can create the file internally in the table editor or externally. To select an existing file, select "Select List > navigate to the file *.pulstrn > Select" Use the general editor function to create internally new file or to edit an existing
one. Use the standard file manager function to load externally created files to the instru-
ment.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:CATalog? on page 570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect on page 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DELete on page 570
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
105
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Edit Pulse Train Data Accesses the build-in table editor to define a new pulse train file or edit an existing one.
"On-Time, µs/Off-Time,µs" Sets the pulse on and pulse off time.
"Count"
Sets the number of repetitions of an "On-/ Off-Time" value pair. Pulses with "Count = 0" are ignored. Use this method to skip value pairs temporarily, without deleting them from the table.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime on page 570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime on page 570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition on page 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DELete on page 570
Data handling keys Standard functions for file and data handling.
Note: Save a list only after filling both columns (frequency and level), otherwise the entries are lost.
Go To Data handling keys Selects a row for editing.
Edit Data handling keys Enables you to insert, or delete a row or ranges within a list, and provides access to a dialog for automatic filling. See " Fill... " on page 106.
Save As/Save Data handling keys Saves the list in a file with user-defined name and predefined file extension. To save a copy or create a file, use the "Save as" function.
Fill... Provides parameters for filling a table automatically with user-defined values.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
106
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
To fill the table, select "Fill".
Note: Once you enter a value or fill a column, the editor automatically adds preset values in the other columns. This functionality protects against data loss, otherwise incomplete rows will be lost when saving. You can simply override these values.
"From / Range" Defines the start line and number of lines to be filled.
"Column To Fill" Selects, if the column is filled up with frequencies in Hz, levels in dBm or dwell times in s.
"Start Value / End Value" Sets the start value for frequency, level or dwell time. The end value is read only and depends on the increment value and the range.
"Increment Value" Determines the step size.
"Fill"
Fills the column specified in "Column To fill".
5.4.4.3 Import/Export List Files
Access:
1. Select one of the following:
"Sweep" > "List mode". "Level" > "User Correction". "Modulation > Pulse Modulation > Pulse Generator > Pulse Mode = Train".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
107
R&S®SMA100B 2. Select "Import/Export".
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Figure 5-1: Im-/Export dialog (example with UCOR settings)
The "Import/Export" dialog contains all functions and settings to import externally created list data or to export it accordingly. You can process and store a list in the formats *.txt (ASCII), or *.csv (plain text with identical sequence of fields). The table separators and the decimal floating point numbers are customizable.
Settings
Mode .......................................................................................................................... 108 ASCII File Settings...................................................................................................... 108 Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination...................................................... 109 Select Source/Select ASCII Destination..................................................................... 109 Import / Export.............................................................................................................109
Mode Selects import or export of a data list file. The provided parameters vary according to the selected mode.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE on page 657 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE on page 624 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE on page 572
ASCII File Settings Defines the format and the separators of the associated data file.
"Extension"
Selects *.csv or *.txt format.
"Decimal Point"
Sets "Point" (dot) or "Comma" as the decimal separator used in the ASCII data with floating-point numerals.
"Column Separator" Sets the separator between the columns in an ASCII table. Available are: "Tab", "Semicolon", "Comma" or "Space".
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 656
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
108
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 622 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 572 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 573
Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination In "Mode > Import", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling functions.
Where: "Select ASCII Source": defines the file to be loaded (imported) "Select ASCII Destination": selects the filename under that the loaded file is saved
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 655 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 622 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 573
Select Source/Select ASCII Destination In "Mode > Export", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling functions.
Where: "Select Source": selects the file to be exported "Select ASCII Destination": defines the filename and the file path for the exported
file
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect on page 657 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect on page 624 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect on page 574
Import / Export Imports or exports the selected data list file, depending on the current mode.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute on page 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute on page 574
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
109
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
5.4.5 Pulse Graph
Option: see Chapter 5.1, "Required Options", on page 80. Access: Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modulation > Pulse Graph". The pulse graph is the graphical representation of the current pulse signal.
The height of the bars corresponds to the selected amplitude of the pulse signal.
File Name Indicates the name of the pulse train data file. To create or select a file, see "Pulse Train Data" on page 105. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect on page 571
Zooming You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the graph in more detail: "Zoom Position": Sets the focus on the time axis where to enlarge the graph. "Zoom In": Enlarges the graph at the selected position. "Zoom Out" for the reverse operation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
110
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
5.4.6 Pulse External / Trigger Settings
Access: Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Modulation > Pulse External / Trigger".
The dialog specifies some characteristics of the Pulse Ext connector. This connector is common for the pulse generator and the pulse modulator. For an overview, see "Input and output connectors" on page 81.
Settings
Polarity.........................................................................................................................111 Impedance................................................................................................................... 111 Threshold.....................................................................................................................111 Show Connector..........................................................................................................112
Polarity Sets the polarity of the active slope of a pulse input signal, that is the external pulse modulation signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:POLarity on page 568
Impedance Sets the input impedance. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:IMPedance on page 568
Threshold Sets the high/low threshold in volts for the signal at the [Pulse Ext] connector. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:THReshold on page 568
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
111
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
5.4.7 FM, PhiM and AM Modulation Sources
Access: Select "Modulation > Modulation Sources".
In the "Sources" tab, you can configure an LF modulation signal for performing analog modulations. It includes the setting parameters of the internal LF-and multifunction generators, the noise generator, and an external signal source.
Source > LF Generator Settings........................................................................... 112 Source > External Settings....................................................................................116 Source > Noise Generator Settings...................................................................... 118
5.4.7.1 Source > LF Generator Settings
Access: Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Sources > LF Generator".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
112
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
The internal LF signal can the modulation signal source for any of the analog modulations. The LF signal applies to all modulations which use the internal modulation signal. Therefore, any modification of the LF signal immediately affects all currently active modulations.
Settings
State (LF frequency sweep)........................................................................................ 113 Shape.......................................................................................................................... 113 Frequency....................................................................................................................115 Period.......................................................................................................................... 115 Pulse Width................................................................................................................. 115 Pulse Duty Cycle......................................................................................................... 115 Triangle Rise............................................................................................................... 116 Trapezoid Rise / Fall....................................................................................................116 Trapezoid High............................................................................................................ 116
State (LF frequency sweep) Status of the LF frequency sweep signal.
You find this parameter in two dialogs: "LF Frequency Sweep" turns on/off the signal generation.
See Sweep Mode Settings for access. "Analog Modulation Sources" displays the current state (read-only). If it is turned
on, this dialog provides the varying sweep frequency, see Current Frequency. Note: Active RF frequency, RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice versa.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE on page 636
Shape Selects the waveform shape of the LF generator signal.
The "Triangle" and "Trapezoid" waveforms require option R&S SMAB-K24.
"Sine"
1 = Period
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
113
R&S®SMA100B "Square"
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
"Pulse"
1 = Period
"Triangle"
1 = Pulse width 2 = Pulse period
1 = Triangle rise 2 = Triangle period
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
114
R&S®SMA100B "Trapezoid"
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
1 = Trapezoid rise 2 = Trapezoid high 3 = Trapezoid period 4 = Trapezoid fall
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe on page 639
Frequency Sets the frequency of the LF generator for sine signals. Set the signal shape with the parameter Shape. Remote command: [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:FREQuency on page 635
Period Sets the repetition rate of the generated LF signal for triangle, trapezoid or pulse shapes, see Shape. The period of sine signals is calculated from the selected Frequency Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:PERiod on page 640 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:PERiod on page 641 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod on page 639
Pulse Width Sets the pulse duration of the generated pulse signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:WIDTh on page 640
Pulse Duty Cycle Sets the ratio between the pulse duration and the pulse period in percent. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:DCYCle on page 639
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
115
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Triangle Rise Sets the time required for the triangle signal to change from low level to high level. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:RISE on page 641
Trapezoid Rise / Fall Sets the time required for the trapezoid signal to change from low level to high level, and vice versa. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:RISE on page 641 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL on page 640
Trapezoid High Sets how long the trapezoid signal is at high level. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:HIGH on page 640
5.4.7.2 Source > External Settings
Access: Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Sources > External".
The "External" settings section contains all parameters required to configure the signal of an externally supplied LF signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
116
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Settings
Coupling (AC/DC)........................................................................................................117 Impedance...................................................................................................................117 Bandwidth....................................................................................................................117 Show Connector..........................................................................................................117
Coupling (AC/DC) Selects the coupling mode (AC or DC) for the external signal.
"AC"
Disconnects the DC voltage component and uses only the AC component of the modulation signal.
"DC"
Uses the modulation signal with both components, AC and DC. For active external exponential AM, sets the coupling of the corresponding input automatically to DC.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:COUPling<ch> on page 631
Impedance Sets the impedance for the externally supplied signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance<ch> on page 632
Bandwidth Displays the maximum bandwidth of the external LF signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:BANDwidth? on page 635
Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
117
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
5.4.7.3 Source > Noise Generator Settings
Access: Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Sources > Noise Generator".
The "Noise Generator" settings contain all parameters to configure the signal of the internal noise generator.
Settings
Distribution...................................................................................................................118 Bandwidth....................................................................................................................118
Distribution Selects the distribution of the noise power density.
"Gauss"
Generates the noise power according to a Gaussian distribution.
"Equal"
Generates an evenly distributed noise.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:DISTribution on page 659
Bandwidth Sets the noise bandwidth as distinct value.
You can set the bandwidth between 100 kHz and 10 MHz in 100 KHz steps.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BANDwidth|BWIDth on page 658 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BWIDth:STATe on page 658
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
118
R&S®SMA100B
5.4.8 LF Signal Output Settings
Access: Select "Modulation" > "LF Output".
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
In the "LF Output" tab, you can configure the signal at the LF outputs, determine the output voltage or add a DC offset. Activate both paths to output the sum signal of the two sources.
Settings:
State............................................................................................................................ 119 Source......................................................................................................................... 120 Show Connector..........................................................................................................120 Output Voltage............................................................................................................ 120 DC-Offset.................................................................................................................... 120 Load Impedance......................................................................................................... 120 Noise Level................................................................................................................. 121
Noise Density................................................................................................121 Noise Level................................................................................................... 121
State Activates the output of the LF signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>[:STATe] on page 637
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
119
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Source Select the sources for the signal output at the LF connector. If you activate path 1 and 2, those sources are added.
Use the "Show Connector" function to find out where this connector is located.
"LF Generator 1/2" Selects one of internally generated LF signals.
"AM"
Option: R&S SMAB-K720 Selects the AM signal.
"FM/PhiM"
Option: R&S SMAB-K720 Selects the signal also used by the frequency or phase modulations.
"Noise Generator" Selects the internally generated noise signal.
"External 1/2" Selects one of the externally supplied LF signals.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:SOURce on page 638
Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
Output Voltage Sets the peak to peak voltage of the selected LF output source.
This value, e.g. +1 V to -1 V refers to 50 Ohm at the RF output with high termination impedance at the LF output.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:INTernal:VOLTage on page 637
DC-Offset Adds a DC offset to the LF output signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:LFOutput:OFFSet on page 638
Load Impedance Sets the specification of the load impedance interconnected to the LF generator output.
This parameter is available in case of activated R&S SML0x emulations only, see "Remote Access Settings" > "Instrument Emulations" > "Language" on page 388.
These signal generators come with an LF generator source impedance of 10 Ohm which is not available with the R&S SMA100B.
The set LF generator load impedance enables the R&S SMA100B to emulate the 10 Ohm LF generator source impedance of these generators by a corresponding increase of the open circuit LF generator output voltage.
The load impedance setting is not affected by an instrument preset ([Preset] key or *RST), restart or the "Save/Recall" function. It is reset to the default value of 1 MOhm by a factory preset only.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
120
R&S®SMA100B
Remote command: n.a. Noise Level Access: Select "Modulation" > "Output > Noise Level".
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Noise Density Noise Level Indicates the level of the noise signal for a bandwidth of 1 Hz (relative). Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel:RELative? on page 659
Noise Level Noise Level Indicates the level of the noise signal per Hz within the total bandwidth (absolute). Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel[:ABSolute]? on page 659
5.4.9 Overview
Option: AM and FM/PM require R&S SMAB-K720
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
121
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations Modulation Settings
Access: Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Sources > Overview".
Blue color
= Active output signal (AM and FM)
Gray color
= Inactive output signal (LF Out)
Miniature graph = Indicates an active source
Connectors = Indicate a connector (e.g. external signal) is involved in the path of the signal
The "Overview" tab is an interactive diagram that indicates the active modulations and the signal being output.
Here you can: Select the output signal ("LF Out") in one or two paths; the setting acts as the
parameter "LF Output Source" Select the source for each modulation and modulation path; the setting acts as
the parameter "Source" Activate modulation in one or two paths; the setting acts as the parameter
"State" To generate a two-tone signal composed form the two paths of the same modulation type, activate both paths. The "FM" box allows switching to "PhiM", but those modulations are mutually exclusive.
LFOut Label for the LF output settings in the overview.
Remote command: n.a.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
122
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations How to Generate a Pulse Modulated Signal
AM Label for the amplitude modulation settings in the overview.
Remote command: n.a.
FM/PhiM Selects the modulation signal to be assigned to the output. You can assign the frequency or phase modulated signal.
Remote command: n.a.
5.5 How to Generate an Amplitude Modulated Signal
The following examples use the internal LF generator.
To set the frequency and level of the RF signal 1. Press [Preset] to start from a defined state. 2. In the status bar, set "Frequency = 2 GHz". 3. Set "Level = -20 dBm".
To configure the modulation signal (LF generator) 1. Select "Modulation" > "Modulation Source". 2. In the "Sources" tab, select "Shape > Sine". 3. Set "Frequency = 20 kHz".
The period is calculated automatically and indicates "Period = 50.00 µs".
To configure the amplitude modulation settings 1. In "Modulation" dialog, select the "AM" tab. 2. Set "Source = LF Generator1" 3. Set "Depth = 30%" 4. Select "State = I" to activate the modulation. 5. Set "Level > RF ON" to enable signal output.
5.6 How to Generate a Pulse Modulated Signal
The following example uses the internal pulse generator.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
123
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations How to Generate a Pulse Train Modulated Signal
To set the frequency and level of the RF signal 1. Press [Preset]. 2. In the status bar, set "Frequency = 4 GHz". 3. Set "Level = -25 dBm".
To configure the pulse generator 1. Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Generator". 2. Select "Pulse Mode = Double". 3. Set "Pulse Period = 10 us". 4. Set "Pulse Width = 2 us". 5. Set "Double Pulse Width = 1.2 us". 6. Set "Double Pulse Delay = 4.5 us". 7. Activate "Pulse Output State". 8. Set "Trigger Mode = Auto".
In the "Pulse Graph" tab, you can view the generated pulse signal graphically.
To enable pulse modulation 1. Select the "Pulse Modulation" tab. 2. Set "State = I" to activate pulse modulation. 3. Set "Level > RF ON" to enable signal output.
5.7 How to Generate a Pulse Train Modulated Signal
The following example uses the internal pulse generator.
To set the frequency and level of the RF signal 1. Press [Preset]. 2. In the status bar, set "Frequency = 6 GHz". 3. Set "Level = -25 dBm".
To configure the pulse generator 1. Select "Modulation" > "Pulse Generator". 2. Select "Pulse Mode = Train". 3. Select "Pulse Train Data".
Accesses the standard function for file handling.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
124
R&S®SMA100B
Analog Modulations How to Generate a Pulse Train Modulated Signal
4. Select an existing file or select "New" to create one.
5. Define the filename. Select "Edit Pulse Train Data", if the file is empty or to control and change the values.
6. In the "Edit Pulse Train Data" dialog, enter the pulse on/off times and pulse repetition values. For example: "On-Time = 500 us", "OFF-Time = 2 ms", "Count = 2" "On-Time = 100 us", "OFF-Time = 2.5 ms", "Count = 1" "On-Time = 10 us", "OFF-Time = 50 us", "Count = 10"
7. "Save" the file and close the dialog. The instrument returns to the /var/user/ where it has saved the file.
8. Select the file in the directory.
9. Confirm with "Select".
10. In the "Pulse Generator" dialog, select "Pulse Output State = On".
11. Set "Trigger Mode = Auto". In the "Pulse Graph" tab, you can view the generated pulse signal graphically.
To enable pulse train modulation 1. Select the "Pulse Modulation" tab.
2. Set "State = I".
3. Set "Level > RF ON" to enable signal output.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
125
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards About the Avionics Options
6 Avionic Standards
The R&S SMA100B supports avionic standards VOR, ILS and ADF.
Contents
Required Options.................................................................................................. 126 About the Avionics Options................................................................................... 126 VOR Configuration and Settings........................................................................... 132 ILS Configuration and Settings............................................................................. 140 ADF Configuration and Settings............................................................................163
6.1 Required Options
The R&S SMA100B base unit equipped with the following options: Option frequency (R&S SMAB-B10x) Option signal generation for VOR, ILS and ADF (R&S SMAB-K25)
6.2 About the Avionics Options
The following topics summarize some background information on the related avionics standards. The provided overview information is intended as explanation of the used terms and does not aim to be comprehensive.
Brief overview of the avionics standards
Landing systems: ILS (Instrument Landing System), MLS (Microwave Landing System) Landing systems are ground-based approach systems that provide precision guidance to an aircraft approaching and (blind) landing on a runway.
Radio/Flight navigation systems: VOR (VHF Omnidirectional Radio), DME (Distance measuring equipment), TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation), ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) The radio navigation systems are aircraft systems that support the pilots to determine the aircraft positions and stay on course. These systems are more and more obsolete. However, due to security reasons, these flight navigation systems are still in use.
Radar systems: RSR (En Route Surveillance Radar), ASR (Airport Surveillance Radar), PAR (Precision Approach Radar), ASDE (Airport Surface Detection Equipment), SSR (Secondary Surveillance Radar) Radar systems are divided into two groups, primary (RSR, ASR, PAR and ASDE) and secondary (SSR). The radar systems are used in air traffic control to mainly detects and measures the position of aircraft, i.e. its range and bearing.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
126
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards About the Avionics Options
6.2.1 VHF Omni Directional Radio Range (VOR)
Very high frequency (VHF) omnidirectional radio range (VOR) is used for radio navigation and helps aircraft to determine their position and stay on course.
A VOR system consists of a ground transmission station and a VOR receiver on the board of the aircraft.
The transmitter stations operate at VHF frequencies of 108 MHz to 118 MHz (see Table 6-1), with the code identification (COM/ID) transmitting on a modulation tone of 1.020 kHz. It emits two types of signals:
An omnidirectional reference signal (REF) that can consist of two parts: 30 Hz frequency modulated (FM) sine wave on subcarrier 9.96 kHz from amplitude modulation (AM) carrier 1020 Hz AM modulated sine wave morse code
A directional positioning signal, variable (VAR): 30 Hz AM modulated sine waves with variable phase shift
The position of the aircraft is determined by measuring azimuth as the difference in phase of those two signals. The magnetic north is defined as the reference point, for which both signals are exactly in phase.
VOR ICAO Frequencies
The individual values in the table below are: Chan. = ICAO channel number VOR Freq. = VOR Interrogation frequency (MHz)
Table 6-1: VOR ICAO standard frequencies (MHz) and channels
Chan. VOR Freq. Chan. VOR Freq. Chan. VOR Freq. Chan. VOR Freq. Chan. VOR Freq. Chan. VOR Freq.
17X 108.00 17Y 108.05
45X 110.80 45Y 110.85
75X 112.80 75Y 112.85
89X 114.20 89Y 114.25
103X 115.60 103Y 115.65
117X 117.00 117Y 117.05
19X 108.20 19Y 108.25
47X 111.00 47Y 111.05
76X 112.90 76Y 112.95
90X 114.30 90Y 114.35
104X 115.70 104Y 115.75
118X 117.10 118Y 117.15
21X 108.40 21Y 108.45
49X 111.20 49Y 111.25
77X 113.00 77Y 113.05
91X 114.40 91Y 114.45
105X 115.80 105Y 115.85
119X 117.20 119Y 117.25
23X 108.60 23Y 108.65
51X 111.40 51Y 111.45
78X 113.10 78Y 113.15
92X 114.50 92Y 114.55
106X 115.90 106Y 115.95
120X 117.30 120Y 117.35
25X 108.80 25Y 108.85
53X 111.60 53Y 111.65
79X 113.20 79Y 113.25
93X 114.60 93Y 114.65
107X 116.00 107Y 116.05
121X 117.40 121Y 117.45
27X 109.00 27Y 109.05
55X 111.80 55Y 111.85
80X 113.30 80Y 113.35
94X 114.70 94Y 114.75
108X 116.10 108Y 116.15
122X 117.50 122Y 117.55
29X 109.20 29Y 109.25
57X 112.00 57Y 112.05
81X 113.40 81Y 113.45
95X 114.80 95Y 114.85
109X 116.20 109Y 116.25
123X 117.60 123Y 117.65
31X 109.40 31Y 109.45
58X 112.10 58Y 112.15
82X 113.50 82Y 113.55
96X 114.90 96Y 114.95
110X 116.30 110Y 116.35
124X 117.70 124Y 117.75
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
127
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards About the Avionics Options
Chan. VOR Freq. Chan. VOR Freq. Chan. VOR Freq. Chan. VOR Freq. Chan. VOR Freq. Chan. VOR Freq.
33X 109.60 33Y 109.65
59X 112.20 59Y 112.25
83X 113.60 83Y 113.65
97X 115.00 97Y 115.05
111X 116.40 111Y 116.45
125X 117.80 125Y 117.85
35X 109.80 35Y 109.85
70X 112.30 70Y 112.35
84X 113.70 84Y 113.75
98X 115.10 98Y 115.15
112X 116.50 112Y 116.55
126X 117.90 126Y 117.95
37X 110.00 37Y 110.05
71X 112.40 71Y 112.45
85X 113.80 85Y 113.85
99X 115.20 99Y 115.25
113X 116.60 113Y 116.65
39X 110.20 39Y 110.25
72X 112.50 72Y 112.55
86X 113.90 86Y 113.95
100X 115.30 100Y 115.35
114X 116.75 114Y 116.75
41X 110.40 41Y 110.45
73X 112.60 73Y 112.65
87Y 114.00 87Y 114.05
101X 115.40 101Y 115.45
115X 116.80 115Y 116.85
43X 110.60 43Y 110.65
74X 112.70 74Y 112.75
88X 114.10 88Y 114.15
102X 115.50 102Y 115.55
116X 116.90 116Y 116.95
Related Settings
For VOR settings at the R&S SMA100B, see Chapter 6.3, "VOR Configuration and Settings", on page 132.
6.2.2 Instrument Landing System (ILS)
The instrument landing system is used during the landing approach and monitors the correct approach path to the runway.
Figure 6-1: Approach navigation using instrument landing system (ILS) [1MA193]
An ILS system consists of three independent subsystems: A glide slope for vertical guidance. A localizer for horizontal guidance. (optional) marker beacons
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
128
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards About the Avionics Options
Glide Slope
The glide slope transmitter is located near the end of the runway (nearest to the start of the aircraft approach).
Typically, vertically aligned antennas transmit two intersecting main beams on top of one another at carrier frequencies between 329 MHz and 335 MHz (see Table 6-2). The top beam is usually modulated at 90 Hz and the beam below at 150 Hz [1MA193].
The information on position is provided after demodulation of the beam signals by evaluating the difference in depth of modulation (DDM). The following scenarios are possible:
Predominance of the 90 Hz beam: the aircraft is too high and must descend Predominance of the 150 Hz beam: the aircraft is too low and needs to climb The signal strength from both beams is equal: the aircraft is in the center, on the
right course.
If there is a predominance of the 90 Hz beam, then the aircraft is too high and must descend. A predominant 150 Hz means that the aircraft is too low and needs to climb.
Localizer
The localizer transmitter is located near the end of the runway (nearest to the start of the aircraft approach). Typically, horizontally aligned antennas transmit two intersecting main beams beside one another at carrier frequencies between 108 MHz and 112 MHz (see Table 6-2). As seen from the approaching aircraft coming in for a landing, the left beam is usually modulated at 90 Hz and the right beam at 150 Hz [1MA193].
The information on position is provided after demodulation of the beam signals by evaluating the difference in depth of modulation (DDM). The following scenarios are possible:
Predominance of the 90 Hz beam: the aircraft is too far to the left and must turn to the right
Predominance of the 150 Hz beam: the aircraft is too far to the right and must turn to the left
The signal strength from both beams is equal: the aircraft is in the center, on the right course.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
129
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards About the Avionics Options
ILS ICAO Frequencies
The individual values in the table below are: Chan. = ICAO channel number LOC Freq. = ILS localizer frequency (MHz) GS Freq. = ILS glide slope frequency (MHz)
Table 6-2: ILS glide slope and localizer ICAO standard frequencies (MHz) and channels
Chan. LOC Freq. GS Freq. Chan. LOC Freq. GS Freq. Chan. LOC Freq. GS Freq.
18X
108.10
18Y
108.15
334.70 334.55
32X 109.50 32Y 109.55
332.60 332.45
46X 110.90 46Y 110.95
330.80 330.65
20X
108.30
20Y
108.35
334.10 333.95
34X 109.70 34Y 109.75
333.20 333.05
48X 111.10 48Y 111.15
331.70 331.55
22X
108.50
22Y
108.55
329.90 329.75
36X 109.90 36Y 109.95
333.80 333.65
50X 111.30 50Y 111.35
332.30 332.15
24X
108.70
24Y
108.75
330.50 330.35
38X 110.10 38Y 110.15
334.40 334.25
52X 111.50 52Y 111.55
332.90 332.75
26X
108.90
26Y
108.95
329.30 329.15
40X 110.30 40Y 110.35
335.00 334.85
54X 111.70 54Y 111.75
333.50 333.35
28X
109.10
28Y
109.15
331.40 331.25
42X 110.50 42Y 110.55
329.60 329.45
56X 111.90 56Y 111.95
331.10 330.95
30X
109.30
30Y
109.35
332.00 331.85
44X 110.70 44Y 110.75
330.20 330.05
Marker Beacons
Marker beacon receivers are used for a rough distance measurement. They are available only for some ILS installations [1MA193].
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
130
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards About the Avionics Options
Figure 6-2: Marker beacon placement and distance to runway
Marker beacon receivers decode audio and provide signaling output to identify one of three marker beacons installed near the runway. They transmit a narrow beam width at 75 MHz carrier frequency in a vertical direction. Each of them has a different distinct modulation code to allow the receiver to identify which one it is flying over [1MA193].
Both visual (color of the marker beacon) and audio tone identification is supported for determining which marker has been flown over. The audio/visual pairing of marker beacons is as follows:
Outer marker flashes BLUE in the cockpit at 400 Hz ("relaxed" tone). Middle marker flashes AMBER in the cockpit at 1300 Hz ("hurried" tone). Inner marker flashes WHITE in the cockpit at 3000 Hz ("urgent" tone).
Related Settings
For ILS settings at the R&S SMA100B, see the following sections: Chapter 6.4.2, "ILS Glide Slope Settings", on page 143 Chapter 6.4.3, "ILS Localizer Settings", on page 149 Chapter 6.4.4, "ILS Marker Beacons Settings", on page 158
6.2.3 Automatic Direction Finder (ADF)
ADF receivers provide the relative bearing of a basic ground-based Non-Directional Beacon (NDB) to the fore/aft axis of the aircraft. The beacon signal is generated by a directional antenna assembly in the aircraft.
The ADF determines the direction to the NDB station relative to the aircraft and is used for instrument approaches (autopilot). It provides additional information to other navigation equipment, e.g. VOR.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
131
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards VOR Configuration and Settings
Related Settings
For ADF settings at the R&S SMA100B, see Chapter 6.5, "ADF Configuration and Settings", on page 163.
6.3 VOR Configuration and Settings
Option: R&S SMAB-K25
Access: Select "Modulation > Avionic Standards > VOR".
The remote commands required to define VOR settings are described in Chapter 14.16.2.5, "SOURce:VOR Subsystem", on page 607.
Settings General Settings................................................................................................... 132 Signal Settings...................................................................................................... 135 Position Settings................................................................................................... 137 COM/ID Settings................................................................................................... 138
6.3.1 General Settings
Access: Select "VOR > General"
This dialog comprises general settings of the VOR standard, the default and the "Save/Recall" settings.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
132
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards VOR Configuration and Settings
By default, a VOR modulation signal is set on an RF carrier with a frequency of 108 MHz or ICAO channel 17X. The 9.96 kHz subcarrier signal is frequency modulated with a 30.00 Hz reference signal. The COM/ID signal has 1.02 kHz frequency, the variable phase signal 30.00 Hz frequency.
If enabled, the avionic standard modulation is displayed in the "Modulation" tile as follows: "Avionic: VOR" for enabled VOR modulation "Avionic ILS: Glide Slope/Localizer/Marker Bcn" for enabled ILS glide slope/
localizer/marker beacons modulation "Avionic: ADF" for enabled ADF modulation
Changing a parameter in the avionic standards causes an instant signal change in the R&S SMA100B. There is no extra measurement cycle to calculate the RMS value of the baseband signal to set the correct RF level.
If the avionics standard is activated for the first time, or after every subsequent on/off sequence, the measurement cycle will take place to determine the correct RF level. Every subsequent parameter change in the avionic standard is performed without another measurement cycle to provide a continuous signal output.
Settings
State............................................................................................................................ 133 Set To Default..............................................................................................................133 Save/Recall................................................................................................................. 134 Carrier Frequency Mode............................................................................................. 134 Carrier Frequency....................................................................................................... 134 ICAO Channel............................................................................................................. 134 EXT AM.......................................................................................................................135
State Activates the avionic standard.
Activation of the standard deactivates a previously active avionic standard. The "VOR/ILS > Carrier Frequency" setting is applied automatically to the RF Frequency and displayed in the status bar.
Remote command: <subsystem>:STATe on page 581
Set To Default Calls the default settings. The values of the main parameters are listed in the following table.
Standard VOR/ILS/ADF VOR
ILS
Parameter State Carrier Frequency Mode Carrier Frequency ILS Component ILS GS > Carrier Frequency Mode
Value Not affected by "Set to default" User Defined 108.000000 MHz Glide Slope (GS) User Defined
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
133
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards VOR Configuration and Settings
Standard ADF
Parameter ILS GS > Carrier Frequency Carrier Frequency
Value 334.700000 MHz 190.000 kHz
Remote command: <subsystem>:PRESet on page 579
Save/Recall Accesses the "Save/Recall" dialog, that is the standard instrument function for saving and recalling the complete dialog-related settings in a file. The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog are self-explanatory.
The filename and the directory, in that the settings are stored, are user-definable; the file extension is however predefined.
Remote command: <subsystem>:SETTing:CATalog on page 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:DELete on page 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:LOAD on page 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:STORe on page 581
Carrier Frequency Mode Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal.
"User Defined" Activates user-defined variation of the carrier frequency.
"ICAO"
Activates variation in predefined steps according to standard VOR transmitting frequencies (see Table 6-1). The start value can be selected in the field "ICAO Channel".
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:FREQuency:MODE on page 613
Carrier Frequency Requires "Carrier Frequency Mode > User Defined".
Sets the carrier frequency of the signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:FREQuency on page 612
ICAO Channel Requires "Carrier Frequency Mode > ICAO".
Sets the ICAO channel and the corresponding transmitting frequency.
If avionic standard modulation is activated and you change the "RF Frequency", the frequency value of the closest ICAO channel is applied automatically. The "ICAO Channel" is also updated.
For an overview of the VOR ICAO channel frequencies, see Table 6-1.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:ICAO:CHANnel on page 613
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
134
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards VOR Configuration and Settings
EXT AM Enables/disables additional modulation from an external source. The external signal is input via the Ext connector.
"Off"
Selects the internal modulation source for the avionic standard modulation.
"EXT (MOD AM)" Selects the external source. The external signal is added to the internal signal. Switching off the internal source is not possible. The external signal is input via the Ext connector. The sensitivity is 10 mV per percent modulation depth.
Note: There can be an overmodulation as a function of the level of the external signal without a corresponding caution message being generated. To avoid an overmodulation, the peak value of the external signal is to be delimited corresponding to the sum of the modulation depths of the remaining VOR signal components.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SOURce on page 608
6.3.2 Signal Settings
Access: Select "VOR > Signal".
This dialog provides access to signal settings of the VOR modulation signal.
Settings
Mode........................................................................................................................... 136 VAR/REF Frequency...................................................................................................136 VAR Depth...................................................................................................................136
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
135
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards VOR Configuration and Settings
Subcarrier Frequency..................................................................................................136 Subcarrier Depth ........................................................................................................ 136 REF Deviation............................................................................................................. 137
Mode Selects the operating mode for the VOR modulation signal.
"Norm"
VOR modulation is active.
"Var"
Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the VAR signal component (30Hz signal content) of the VOR signal. The modulation depth corresponds to the value set under VAR Depth.
"Subcarrier"
Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the unmodulated FM carrier (9960Hz) of the VOR signal. The modulation depth corresponds to the value set under Subcarrier Depth .
"Subcarrier + FM"
Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the frequency-modulated FM carrier (9960Hz) of the VOR signal. The frequency deviation corresponds to the value set under REF Deviation, the modulation depth corresponds to the value set under "Subcarrier Depth".
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:MODE on page 614
VAR/REF Frequency Sets the frequency of the VAR signal and the REF signal. As the two signals must have the same frequency, the setting is valid for both signals.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:VAR:FREQuency on page 616
VAR Depth Sets the AM modulation depth of the 30Hz VAR signal.
Note: The sum of "Subcarrier depth", "VAR depth" and "COM/ID > Depth" must be smaller than 100 %.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:VAR[:DEPTh] on page 616
Subcarrier Frequency Sets the frequency of the FM carrier.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SUBCarrier[:FREQuency] on page 615
Subcarrier Depth Sets the AM modulation depth of the FM carrier.
Note: The sum of "Subcarrier depth", "VAR depth" and "COM/ID > Depth" must be smaller than 100 %.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh on page 615
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
136
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards VOR Configuration and Settings
REF Deviation Sets the frequency deviation of the reference signal on the FM carrier.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:REFerence[:DEViation] on page 615
6.3.3 Position Settings
Access: Select "VOR > Position".
This dialog provides access to position settings related to the VOR modulation signal.
Settings
Bearing Angle..............................................................................................................137 Direction...................................................................................................................... 137
Bearing Angle Sets the phase angle between the 30 Hz VAR signal and the 30 Hz reference signal. The orientation of the angle depends on the set Direction.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR[:BANGle] on page 608
Direction Sets the reference position of the phase information.
The angle set under "Bearing Angle" corresponds to the angle between the geographic north and the connection line from beacon to airplane.
"From"
Selection of the beacon as a reference position.
"To"
Selection of the airplane position as a reference position.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
137
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards VOR Configuration and Settings
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR[:BANGle]:DIRection on page 609
6.3.4 COM/ID Settings
Access: Select "VOR > COM/ID"
This dialog comprises COM/ID signal settings related to the VOR signal.
Settings
COM/ID State..............................................................................................................138 Code............................................................................................................................139 Period.......................................................................................................................... 139 Frequency................................................................................................................... 139 Depth...........................................................................................................................139 Time Schema.............................................................................................................. 139 Dot Length...................................................................................................................139 Dash Length................................................................................................................139 Symbol Space ............................................................................................................ 140 Letter Space ...............................................................................................................140
COM/ID State Enables/disables the COM/ID signal.
See also Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid[:STATe] on page 612
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
138
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards VOR Configuration and Settings
Code Sets the coding of the COM/ID signal by the international short name of the airport (e.g. MUC for the Munich airport). The COM/ID tone is sent according to the selected code, see Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781. If no coding is set, the COM/ID tone is sent uncoded (key down). Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:CODE on page 609
Period Sets the period of the COM/ID signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:PERiod on page 611
Frequency Sets the frequency of the COM/ID signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:FREQuency on page 610
Depth Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal. Note: The sum of Subcarrier Depth , VAR Depth and COM/ID > Depth must be smaller than 100 %. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DEPTh on page 610
Time Schema Sets the time schema of the Morse code for the COM/ID signal. "Standard"
The set dot length determines the length of the dash, the symbol space and letter space of the Morse code. "User" You can set each length value separately. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:TSCHema on page 612
Dot Length Sets the length of a Morse code dot. If "Time Schema > Standard", the dot length value determines also the length of the dash (= 3 times the dot length), symbol space (= dot length) and letter space (= 3 times the dot length). Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DOT on page 610
Dash Length Requires "Time Schema > User".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
139
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
Sets the length of a Morse code dash. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DASH on page 610
Symbol Space Requires "Time Schema > User". Sets the length of the Morse code symbol space. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:SYMBol on page 611
Letter Space Requires "Time Schema > User". Sets the length of a Morse code letter space. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:LETTer on page 611
6.4 ILS Configuration and Settings
Option: R&S SMAB-K25
Access: Select "Modulation > Avionic Standards > ILS".
The remote commands required to define ILS settings are described in Chapter 14.16.2.4, "SOURce:ILS Subsystem", on page 585.
Settings General Settings................................................................................................... 140 ILS Glide Slope Settings....................................................................................... 143 ILS Localizer Settings........................................................................................... 149 ILS Marker Beacons Settings................................................................................158
6.4.1 General Settings
This chapter comprises general settings, which are common for all ILS components.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
140
R&S®SMA100B
Access: Select "ILS > General".
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
This dialog comprises general settings of the ILS standard, the default and the "Save/Recall" settings. By default, an ILS glide slope modulation signal on an RF carrier with a frequency of 344.7 MHz or ICAO channel 18X. The dual-tone LF signal with frequencies 90 Hz and 150 Hz and a balanced modulation at SDM of 80 %.
If enabled, the avionic standard modulation is displayed in the "Modulation" tile as follows: "Avionic: VOR" for enabled VOR modulation "Avionic ILS: Glide Slope/Localizer/Marker Bcn" for enabled ILS glide slope/local-
izer/marker beacons modulation "Avionic: ADF" for enabled ADF modulation
Changing a parameter in the avionic standards causes an instant signal change in the R&S SMA100B. There is no extra measurement cycle to calculate the RMS value of the baseband signal to set the correct RF level.
If the avionics standard is activated for the first time, or after every subsequent on/off sequence, the measurement cycle will take place to determine the correct RF level. Every subsequent parameter change in the avionic standard is performed without another measurement cycle to provide a continuous signal output.
Settings
State............................................................................................................................ 142 Set To Default..............................................................................................................142 Save/Recall................................................................................................................. 142 ILS Component........................................................................................................... 142
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
141
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
State Activates the avionic standard.
Activation of the standard deactivates a previously active avionic standard. The "VOR/ILS > Carrier Frequency" setting is applied automatically to the RF Frequency and displayed in the status bar.
Remote command: <subsystem>:STATe on page 581
Set To Default Calls the default settings. The values of the main parameters are listed in the following table.
Standard VOR/ILS/ADF VOR ILS
ADF
Parameter State Carrier Frequency Mode Carrier Frequency ILS Component ILS GS > Carrier Frequency Mode ILS GS > Carrier Frequency Carrier Frequency
Value Not affected by "Set to default" User Defined 108.000000 MHz Glide Slope (GS) User Defined 334.700000 MHz 190.000 kHz
Remote command: <subsystem>:PRESet on page 579
Save/Recall Accesses the "Save/Recall" dialog, that is the standard instrument function for saving and recalling the complete dialog-related settings in a file. The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog are self-explanatory.
The filename and the directory, in that the settings are stored, are user-definable; the file extension is however predefined.
Remote command: <subsystem>:SETTing:CATalog on page 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:DELete on page 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:LOAD on page 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:STORe on page 581
ILS Component Sets the ILS component.
"Glide slope" Enables the glide slope.
"Localizer"
Enables the localizer.
"Marker Beacons" Enables the marker beacons.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:TYPE on page 586
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
142
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
6.4.2 ILS Glide Slope Settings
Access: 1. Select "ILS > General". 2. Select "ILS Component > Glide Slope".
Settings General Settings................................................................................................... 143 Signal Settings...................................................................................................... 145 Amplitude Settings................................................................................................ 147
6.4.2.1 General Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS Component > Glide Slope", see Chapter 6.4.2, "ILS Glide Slope Settings", on page 143.
2. Select "ILS > General".
This dialog comprises carrier frequency settings related to the ILS glide slope component of the ILS signal.
Settings
Carrier Frequency Mode............................................................................................. 144 Carrier Frequency....................................................................................................... 144 ICAO Channel............................................................................................................. 144 Sync with Glide Slope/ Sync with Localizer................................................................ 144 EXT AM.......................................................................................................................144
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
143
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
Carrier Frequency Mode Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal.
Select "Carrier Frequency Mode > ICAO" to set a standard ILS frequency channel. If you want to couple carrier frequencies of ILS glide slope and localizer components, enable Sync with Glide Slope/ Sync with Localizer.
"User Defined" Activates user-defined variation of the carrier frequency.
"ICAO"
Activates variation in predefined steps according to standard ILS transmitting frequencies (see Table 6-2).
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency:MODE on page 590
Carrier Frequency Requires "Carrier Frequency Mode > User Defined".
Sets the carrier frequency of the signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency on page 589
ICAO Channel Requires "Carrier Frequency Mode > ICAO".
Sets the ICAO channel and the corresponding transmitting frequency.
If avionic standard modulation is activated and you change the "RF Frequency", the frequency value of the closest ICAO channel is applied automatically. The "ICAO Channel" is also updated.
For an overview of the ILS ICAO channel frequencies, see Table 6-2.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ICAO:CHANnel on page 590
Sync with Glide Slope/ Sync with Localizer Activates synchronization of the ILS glide slope with the ILS localizer carrier frequency or vice versa.
If "Carrier Frequency Mode > User", the ILS glide slope carrier frequency is applied to the ILS localizer carrier frequency or vice versa.
If "Carrier Frequency Mode > ICAO", the ILS glide slope ICAO channel is applied to the ILS localizer ICAO channel or vice versa. The ILS glide slope/localizer frequency of the ICAO channel (Table 6-2) is set automatically.
Remote command: <subsystem>:FREQuency:SYNChronize:STATe on page 581
EXT AM Enables/disables additional modulation from an external source. The external signal is input via the Ext connector.
"Off"
Selects the internal modulation source for the avionic standard modulation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
144
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
"EXT (MOD AM)" Selects the external source. The external signal is added to the internal signal. Switching off the internal source is not possible. The external signal is input via the Ext connector. The sensitivity is 10 mV per percent modulation depth.
Note: There can be an overmodulation as a function of the level of the external signal without a corresponding caution message being generated. To avoid an overmodulation, the peak value of the external signal is to be delimited corresponding to the sum of the modulation depths of the remaining VOR signal components.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SOURce on page 592
6.4.2.2 Signal Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS Component > Glide Slope", see Chapter 6.4.2, "ILS Glide Slope Settings", on page 143.
2. Select "ILS > Signal".
This dialog comprises modulation signal settings related to the ILS glide slope component of the ILS signal.
Settings
Operating Mode.......................................................................................................... 145 DDM Polarity............................................................................................................... 146 Up Frequency..............................................................................................................146 Down Frequency......................................................................................................... 146 Up/Down Phase.......................................................................................................... 146
Operating Mode Selects the operating mode for the ILS glide slope modulation signal.
"Norm"
ILS glide slope modulation is active.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
145
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
"90 Hz"
Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the upper lobe signal component (90 Hz signal content) of the ILS glide slope signal.
The modulation depth of the 90 Hz signal results from the settings of the parameters Sum of Depth and DDM Depth according to: "Fly > Down"
AM (90 Hz) = 0.5 × (SDM + DDM × 100 %) "Fly > Up"
AM (90 Hz) = 0.5 × (SDM - DDM × 100 %)
"150 Hz"
Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the lower lobe signal component (150 Hz signal content) of the ILS glide slope signal.
The modulation depth of the 150 Hz signal results from the settings of parameters Sum of Depth and DDM Depth according to: "Fly > Down"
AM (150 Hz) = 0.5 × (SDM + DDM × 100 %) "Fly > Up"
AM (150 Hz) = 0.5 × (SDM - DDM × 100 %)
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:MODE on page 591
DDM Polarity Defines the polarity for DDM calculation (see "DDM Depth" on page 148).
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:POLarity on page 588
Up Frequency Sets the modulation frequency of the upper antenna lobe.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ULOBe[:FREQuency] on page 593
Down Frequency Sets the modulation frequency of the lower antenna lobe.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:LLOBe[:FREQuency] on page 591
Up/Down Phase Sets the phase between the modulation signals of the upper and lower antenna lobe.
The zero crossing of the lower lobe (150Hz) signal serves as a reference. The angle refers to the period of the signal of the lower antenna lobe.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:PHASe on page 591
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
146
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
6.4.2.3 Amplitude Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS Component > Glide Slope", see Chapter 6.4.2, "ILS Glide Slope Settings", on page 143.
2. Select "ILS > Amplitude".
This dialog comprises amplitude settings related to the ILS glide slope component of the ILS signal.
Settings
Sum of Depth.............................................................................................................. 147 FlyMode...................................................................................................................... 148 DDM Step....................................................................................................................148 DDM Current............................................................................................................... 148 DDM Depth................................................................................................................. 148 DDM Logarithmic........................................................................................................ 148 DDM Percent...............................................................................................................149 DDM - SDM Coupling..................................................................................................149
Sum of Depth Sets the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of the upper lobe (90 Hz) and lower lobe (150 Hz) ILS glide slope signal contents.
The RMS modulation depth of the sum signal depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SDM on page 592
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
147
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
FlyMode Selects the simulation mode for the ILS glide slope modulation signal. A change of the setting automatically changes the sign of the DDM value.
This setting simulates the direction in which the pilot has to correct the course.
"Up"
The 150 Hz modulation signal is predominant, the DDM value is negative (the airplane is too low, it must climb).
"Down"
The 90 Hz modulation signal is predominant, the DDM value is positive (the airplane is too high, it must descend).
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:DIRection on page 587
DDM Step Selects the variation of the DDM values.
"Decimal"
Decimal variation according to the current cursor position.
"Predifined"
Variation in predefined steps according to the standardized DDM values.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:STEP on page 589
DDM Current Sets the current of the ILS indicating the instrument corresponding to the DDM value. The instrument current is calculated according to:
DDM Current µA = DDM Depth [%] × 857,125 µA
A variation of the instrument current automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the DDM value in dB.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:CURRent on page 587
DDM Depth Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the upper lobe (90 Hz) and the lower lobe (150 Hz) tone of the ILS glide slope modulation signal.
The DDM value is calculated with the formula: "DDM Polarity > 90 Hz - 150 Hz":
DDM = [ AM (90 Hz) - AM (150 Hz) ] / 100% "DDM Polarity > 150 Hz - 90 Hz":
DDM = [ AM (150 Hz) - AM (90 Hz) ] / 100%
A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the value of the instrument current and the DDM value in dB.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM[:DEPTh] on page 589
DDM Logarithmic Sets the DDM value in dB. The dB value is calculated according to:
DDM dB = 20 × LOG [(SDM+DDM×100%) / (SDM-DDM×100%)]
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
148
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
A variation of the value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the instrument current.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:LOGarithmic on page 588
DDM Percent Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the upper lobe (90 Hz) and the lower lobe (150 Hz) tone of the ILS glide slope modulation signal.
The DDM value in percent is calculated as follows: "DDM Polarity > 90 Hz - 150 Hz":
DDM = [ AM (90 Hz) - AM (150 Hz) ] "DDM Polarity > 150 Hz - 90 Hz":
DDM = [ AM (150 Hz) - AM (90 Hz) ]
A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the value of the instrument current and the DDM value in dB.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:PCT on page 588
DDM - SDM Coupling Selects if the DDM value is fixed or is changed with a change of sum of modulation depths (SDM, see below).
"Fixed DDM" The absolute DDM value stays constant, if the SDM is changed.
"Coupled to SDM" The absolute DDM value changes, if the SDM is changed. The DDM value expressed in dB stays constant.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:COUPling on page 587
6.4.3 ILS Localizer Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS > General".
2. Select "ILS Component > Localizer".
Settings
General Settings .................................................................................................. 150 Signal Settings...................................................................................................... 152 Amplitude Settings................................................................................................ 153 COM/ID Settings................................................................................................... 156
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
149
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
6.4.3.1 General Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS Component > Localizer", see Chapter 6.4.3, "ILS Localizer Settings", on page 149.
2. Select "ILS > General".
This dialog comprises carrier frequency settings related to the ILS localizer component of the ILS signal.
Settings
Carrier Frequency Mode............................................................................................. 150 Carrier Frequency....................................................................................................... 150 ICAO Channel............................................................................................................. 151 Sync with Glide Slope/ Sync with Localizer................................................................ 151 EXT AM.......................................................................................................................151
Carrier Frequency Mode Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal.
"User Defined" Activates user-defined variation of the carrier frequency.
"ICAO"
Activates variation in predefined steps according to standard ILS transmitting frequencies (see Table 6-2). Select the ICAO Channel to set a standard ILS frequency channel. If you want to couple carrier frequencies of ILS glide slope and localizer components, enable General Settings .
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:MODE on page 599
Carrier Frequency Requires "Carrier Frequency Mode > User Defined".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
150
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
Sets the carrier frequency of the signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency on page 599
ICAO Channel Requires "Carrier Frequency Mode > ICAO".
Sets the ICAO channel and the corresponding transmitting frequency.
If avionic standard modulation is activated and you change the "RF Frequency", the frequency value of the closest ICAO channel is applied automatically. The "ICAO Channel" is also updated.
For an overview of the ILS ICAO channel frequencies, see Table 6-2.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:ICAO:CHANnel on page 600
Sync with Glide Slope/ Sync with Localizer Activates synchronization of the ILS glide slope with the ILS localizer carrier frequency or vice versa.
If "Carrier Frequency Mode > User", the ILS glide slope carrier frequency is applied to the ILS localizer carrier frequency or vice versa.
If "Carrier Frequency Mode > ICAO", the ILS glide slope ICAO channel is applied to the ILS localizer ICAO channel or vice versa. The ILS glide slope/localizer frequency of the ICAO channel (Table 6-2) is set automatically.
Remote command: <subsystem>:FREQuency:SYNChronize:STATe on page 581
EXT AM Enables/disables additional modulation from an external source. The external signal is input via the Ext connector.
"Off"
Selects the internal modulation source for the avionic standard modulation.
"EXT (MOD AM)" Selects the external source. The external signal is added to the internal signal. Switching off the internal source is not possible. The external signal is input via the Ext connector. The sensitivity is 10 mV per percent modulation depth.
Note: There can be an overmodulation as a function of the level of the external signal without a corresponding caution message being generated. To avoid an overmodulation, the peak value of the external signal is to be delimited corresponding to the sum of the modulation depths of the remaining VOR signal components.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:SOURce on page 602
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
151
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
6.4.3.2 Signal Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS Component > Localizer", see Chapter 6.4.3, "ILS Localizer Settings", on page 149.
2. Select "ILS > Signal".
This dialog comprises audio signal and modulation settings related to the ILS localizer component of the ILS signal.
Settings
Operating Mode.......................................................................................................... 152 DDM polarity............................................................................................................... 153 Left Frequency............................................................................................................ 153 Right Frequency..........................................................................................................153 Left/Right Phase..........................................................................................................153
Operating Mode Selects the operating mode for the ILS localizer modulation signal.
"Norm"
ILS localizer modulation is active.
"90 Hz"
Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the left lobe (90 Hz) signal component of the ILS localizer signal.
The modulation depth of the 90 Hz signal results from the settings of parameters Sum of Depth and DDM Depth according to: "Fly > Right"
AM (90 Hz) = 0.5 × (SDM + DDM × 100 %) "Fly > Left"
AM (90 Hz) = 0.5 × (SDM - DDM × 100 %)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
152
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
"150 Hz"
Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the right lobe (150 Hz) signal component of the ILS localizer signal.
The modulation depth of the 150 Hz signal results from the settings of parameters Sum of Depth and DDM Depth according to: "Fly" = "Right"
AM (150 Hz) = 0.5 × (SDM + DDM × 100 %) "Fly" = "Left"
AM (150 Hz) = 0.5 × (SDM - DDM × 100 %)
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:MODE on page 601
DDM polarity Defines the polarity for DDM calculation (see "DDM Depth" on page 155).
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:POLarity on page 598
Left Frequency Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the left viewed from the air plane.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:LLOBe[:FREQuency] on page 600
Right Frequency Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the right viewed from the air plane.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:RLOBe[:FREQuency] on page 602
Left/Right Phase Sets the phase between the modulation signals of the left and right antenna lobe. The zero crossing of the right lobe (150 Hz) signal serves as a reference. The angle refers to the period of the signal of the right antenna lobe.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:PHASe on page 601
6.4.3.3 Amplitude Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS Component > Localizer", see Chapter 6.4.3, "ILS Localizer Settings", on page 149.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
153
R&S®SMA100B 2. Select "ILS > Amplitude".
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
This dialog comprises amplitude settings related to the ILS localizer component of the ILS signal.
Settings
FlyMode...................................................................................................................... 154 Sum of Depth.............................................................................................................. 154 DDM - SDM Coupling..................................................................................................155 DDM Step....................................................................................................................155 DDM Current............................................................................................................... 155 DDM Depth................................................................................................................. 155 DDM Logarithmic........................................................................................................ 156 DDM Percent...............................................................................................................156
FlyMode Selects the simulation mode for the ILS localizer modulation signal. A change of the setting automatically changes the sign of the DDM value.
This setting simulates the direction in which the pilot has to correct the course.
"Left"
The 150 Hz modulation signal is predominant, the DDM value is negative (the airplane is too far to the right, it must turn to the left).
"Right"
The 90 Hz modulation signal is predominant, the DDM value is positive (the airplane is too far to the left, it must turn to the right).
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:DIRection on page 597
Sum of Depth Sets the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of the left lobe (90 Hz) and right lobe (150 Hz) ILS localizer signal contents.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
154
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
The RMS modulation depth of the sum signal depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones.
The "Sum of Depth" and "COM/ID > Depth" must be smaller than 100 %.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:SDM on page 602
DDM - SDM Coupling Selects if the DDM value is fixed or is changed with a change of sum of modulation depths (SDM, see below).
"Fixed DDM" The absolute DDM value stays constant, if the SDM is changed.
"Coupled to SDM"
The absolute DDM value changes, if the SDM is changed. The DDM value expressed in dB stays constant.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:COUPling on page 596
DDM Step Selects the variation step of the DDM values.
"Decimal"
Decimal variation according to the current cursor position.
"Predifined"
Variation in predefined steps according to the standardized DDM values.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:STEP on page 598
DDM Current Sets the current of the ILS indicating instrument corresponding to the DDM value. The instrument current is calculated according to:
DDM µA = DDM × 967.75 µA
A variation of the instrument current automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the DDM value in dB.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:CURRent on page 596
DDM Depth Sets the difference in depth of modulation (DDM) between the signal of the left lobe (90 Hz) and the right lobe (150 Hz) of the ILS localizer modulation signal.
The DDM value in percent is calculated as follows: "DDM Polarity > 90 Hz - 150 Hz" (default setting):
DDM = [ AM (90 Hz) - AM (150 Hz) ] / 100 % "DDM Polarity > 150 Hz - 90 Hz":
DDM = [ AM (150 Hz) - AM (90 Hz) ] / 100 %
A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value in dB and the value of the instrument current.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM[:DEPTh] on page 599
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
155
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
DDM Logarithmic Sets the DDM value in dB. The dB value is calculated according to:
DDM dB = 20 × LOG [(SDM + DDM × 100 %) / (SDM - DDM × 100 %)]
A variation of the value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the instrument current.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:LOGarithmic on page 597
DDM Percent Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the signal of the left lobe (90 Hz) and the right lobe (150 Hz).
The DDM value in percent is calculated by the following formulas: "DDM Polarity > 90 Hz - 150 Hz" (default setting):
DDM = [ AM(90 Hz) - AM (150 Hz) ] "DDM Polarity > 150 Hz - 90 Hz":
DDM = [ AM(150 Hz) - AM (90 Hz) ] A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value in dB and the value of the instrument current.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:PCT on page 598
6.4.3.4 COM/ID Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS Component > Localizer", see Chapter 6.4.3, "ILS Localizer Settings", on page 149.
2. Select "ILS > COM/ID".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
156
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
This dialog comprises COM/ID settings related to the ILS localizer component of the ILS signal.
Settings
COM/ID State..............................................................................................................157 Code............................................................................................................................157 Frequency................................................................................................................... 157 Period.......................................................................................................................... 157 Depth...........................................................................................................................157 Time Schema.............................................................................................................. 158 Dot Length...................................................................................................................158 Dash Length ...............................................................................................................158 Symbol Space ............................................................................................................ 158 Letter Space ...............................................................................................................158
COM/ID State Enables/disables the COM/ID signal. See also Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid[:STATe] on page 596
Code Sets the coding of the COM/ID signal by the international short name of the airport (e.g. MUC for the Munich airport). The COM/ID tone is sent according to the selected code, see Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781. If no coding is set, the COM/ID tone is sent uncoded (key down). Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:CODE on page 593
Frequency Sets the frequency of the COM/ID signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:FREQuency on page 594
Period Sets the period of the COM/ID signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:PERiod on page 595
Depth Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal. Note: The sum of Sum of Depth and COM/ID > Depth must be smaller than 100 %. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DEPTh on page 594
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
157
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
Time Schema Sets the time schema of the Morse code for the COM/ID signal. "Standard"
The set dot length determines the length of the dash, the symbol space and letter space of the Morse code. "User" You can set each length value separately. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:TSCHema on page 595
Dot Length Sets the length of a Morse code dot. If "Time Schema > Standard", the dot length value determines also the length of the dash (= 3 times the dot length), symbol space (= dot length) and letter space (= 3 times the dot length). Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DOT on page 594
Dash Length Requires "Time Schema > User". Sets the length of a Morse code dash. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DASH on page 593
Symbol Space Requires "Time Schema > User". Sets the length of the Morse code symbol space. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:SYMBol on page 595
Letter Space Requires "Time Schema > User". Sets the length of a Morse code letter space. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:LETTer on page 595
6.4.4 ILS Marker Beacons Settings
Access: 1. Select "ILS > General". 2. Select "ILS Component > Marker Beacons".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
158
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
Settings General Settings................................................................................................... 159 Signal Settings...................................................................................................... 160 COM/ID Settings................................................................................................... 161
6.4.4.1 General Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS Component > Marker Beacons", see Chapter 6.4.4, "ILS Marker Beacons Settings", on page 158.
2. Select "ILS > General".
This dialog comprises carrier frequency and signal settings related to the ILS marker beacons component of the ILS signal.
Settings
Carrier Frequency Mode............................................................................................. 159 Carrier Frequency....................................................................................................... 159
Carrier Frequency Mode Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal. "User Defined" Activates user-defined variation of the carrier frequency. "Predefined" Activates variation of the carrier frequency by integer 25 kHz steps. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:FREQuency:MODE on page 606
Carrier Frequency Requires "Carrier Frequency Mode > User Defined". Sets the carrier frequency of the signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:FREQuency on page 606
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
159
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
6.4.4.2 Signal Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS Component > Marker Beacons", see Chapter 6.4.4, "ILS Marker Beacons Settings", on page 158.
2. Select "ILS > Signal".
This dialog comprises signal settings related to the ILS marker beacons component of the ILS signal.
Settings
Marker Frequency....................................................................................................... 160 Marker Depth.............................................................................................................. 160 Pulsed Marker............................................................................................................. 160
Marker Frequency Sets the modulation frequency of the marker signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:MARKer:FREQuency on page 606
Marker Depth Sets the modulation depth of the marker signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:DEPTh on page 607
Pulsed Marker Activates the modulation of a pulsed marker signal (morse coding).
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
160
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
"On"
Modulation of pulsed marker signals (morse coding). The duty cycle, i.e. the marker on- and off-times, depend on the marker signal frequency (Table 6-3).
Table 6-3: Morse coding for ILS marker beacons marker signals
Marker signal On
Off
Rate
Duty cycle
Outer Marker (400 Hz)
375 ms
125 ms
2 dots/s
75 %
Middle Marker (1300 Hz)
First: 375 ms Second: 83 ms
First: 125 ms Second: 83 ms
1.5 dots/s
68.8 %
Inner Marker (3000 Hz)
83 ms
83 ms
6 dots/s
50 %
"Off"
Modulation of a continuous non-coded marker signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:PULSed on page 607
6.4.4.3 COM/ID Settings
Access:
1. Select "ILS Component > Marker Beacons", see Chapter 6.4.4, "ILS Marker Beacons Settings", on page 158.
2. Select "ILS > COM/ID".
This dialog provides access to general, signal and COM/ID settings of the marker beacons component of the ILS signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
161
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ILS Configuration and Settings
Settings
COM/ID State..............................................................................................................162 Code............................................................................................................................162 Period.......................................................................................................................... 162 Frequency................................................................................................................... 162 Depth...........................................................................................................................162 Time Schema.............................................................................................................. 162 Dot Length...................................................................................................................163 Dash Length................................................................................................................163 Symbol Space............................................................................................................. 163 Letter Space................................................................................................................163
COM/ID State Enables/disables the COM/ID signal. See also Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid[:STATe] on page 606
Code Sets the coding of the COM/ID signal by the international short name of the airport (e.g. MUC for the Munich airport). The COM/ID tone is sent according to the selected code, see Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781. If no coding is set, the COM/ID tone is sent uncoded (key down). Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:CODE on page 603
Period Sets the period of the COM/ID signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:PERiod on page 605
Frequency Sets the frequency of the COM/ID signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:FREQuency on page 604
Depth Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DEPTh on page 603
Time Schema Sets the time schema of the Morse code for the COM/ID signal. "Standard"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
162
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ADF Configuration and Settings
The set dot length determines the length of the dash, the symbol space and letter space of the Morse code. "User" You can set each length value separately. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:TSCHema on page 605
Dot Length Sets the length of a Morse code dot. If "Time Schema > Standard", the dot length value determines also the length of the dash (= 3 times the dot length), symbol space (= dot length) and letter space (= 3 times the dot length). Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DOT on page 604
Dash Length Requires "Time Schema > User". Sets the length of a Morse code dash. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DASH on page 603
Symbol Space Requires "Time Schema > User". Sets the length of the Morse code symbol space. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:SYMBol on page 605
Letter Space Requires "Time Schema > User". Sets the length of a Morse code letter space. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:LETTer on page 604
6.5 ADF Configuration and Settings
Option: R&S SMAB-K25
Access: Select "Modulation > Avionic Standards > ADF".
The remote commands required to define ADF settings are described in Chapter 14.16.2.3, "SOURce:ADF Subsystem", on page 582.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
163
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ADF Configuration and Settings
Settings
General Settings................................................................................................... 164 COM/ID Settings................................................................................................... 166
6.5.1 General Settings
Access: Select "ADF > General".
This dialog comprises general settings of the ADF standard, the default and the "Save/Recall" settings. By default, an ADF signal modulation is set on an RF carrier with a frequency of 190 kHz. The COM/ID signal has 1.02 kHz frequency.
If enabled, the avionic standard modulation is displayed in the "Modulation" tile as follows: "Avionic: VOR" for enabled VOR modulation "Avionic ILS: Glide Slope/Localizer/Marker Bcn" for enabled ILS glide slope/
localizer/marker beacons modulation "Avionic: ADF" for enabled ADF modulation
ADF state and carrier frequency range
If the R&S SMA100B carrier frequency is outside the specified ADF frequency range from 190 kHz to 1750 kHz, a settings conflict is displayed. Activating ADF is not possible.
Change the carrier frequency to a value within the specified frequency range.
Changing a parameter in the avionic standards causes an instant signal change in the R&S SMA100B. There is no extra measurement cycle to calculate the RMS value of the baseband signal to set the correct RF level.
If the avionics standard is activated for the first time, or after every subsequent on/off sequence, the measurement cycle will take place to determine the correct RF level. Every subsequent parameter change in the avionic standard is performed without another measurement cycle to provide a continuous signal output.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
164
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ADF Configuration and Settings
Settings
State............................................................................................................................ 165 Set To Default..............................................................................................................165 Save/Recall................................................................................................................. 165
State Activates the avionic standard.
Activation of the standard deactivates a previously active avionic standard. The "VOR/ILS > Carrier Frequency" setting is applied automatically to the RF Frequency and displayed in the status bar.
Remote command: <subsystem>:STATe on page 581
Set To Default Calls the default settings. The values of the main parameters are listed in the following table.
Standard VOR/ILS/ADF VOR ILS
ADF
Parameter State Carrier Frequency Mode Carrier Frequency ILS Component ILS GS > Carrier Frequency Mode ILS GS > Carrier Frequency Carrier Frequency
Value Not affected by "Set to default" User Defined 108.000000 MHz Glide Slope (GS) User Defined 334.700000 MHz 190.000 kHz
Remote command: <subsystem>:PRESet on page 579
Save/Recall Accesses the "Save/Recall" dialog, that is the standard instrument function for saving and recalling the complete dialog-related settings in a file. The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog are self-explanatory.
The filename and the directory, in that the settings are stored, are user-definable; the file extension is however predefined.
Remote command: <subsystem>:SETTing:CATalog on page 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:DELete on page 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:LOAD on page 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:STORe on page 581
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
165
R&S®SMA100B
6.5.2 COM/ID Settings
Access: Select "ADF > COM/ID".
Avionic Standards ADF Configuration and Settings
This dialog comprises COM/ID signal settings related to the ADF signal.
Settings
COM/ID State..............................................................................................................166 Code............................................................................................................................166 Period.......................................................................................................................... 167 Frequency................................................................................................................... 167 Depth...........................................................................................................................167 Time Schema.............................................................................................................. 167 Dot Length...................................................................................................................167 Dash Length ...............................................................................................................167 Symbol Space ............................................................................................................ 167 Letter Space ...............................................................................................................168
COM/ID State Enables/disables the COM/ID signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid[:STATe] on page 585
Code Sets the coding of the COM/ID signal by the international short name of the airport (e.g. MUC for the Munich airport).
The COM/ID tone is sent according to the selected code, see Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
166
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ADF Configuration and Settings
If no coding is set, the COM/ID tone is sent uncoded (key down).
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:CODE on page 582
Period Sets the period of the COM/ID signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:PERiod on page 584
Frequency Sets the frequency of the COM/ID signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:FREQuency on page 583
Depth Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DEPTh on page 583
Time Schema Sets the time schema of the Morse code for the COM/ID signal.
"Standard"
The set dot length determines the length of the dash, the symbol space and letter space of the Morse code.
"User"
You can set each length value separately.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:TSCHema on page 584
Dot Length Sets the length of a Morse code dot.
If "Time Schema > Standard", the dot length value determines also the length of the dash (= 3 times the dot length), symbol space (= dot length) and letter space (= 3 times the dot length).
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DOT on page 583
Dash Length Requires "Time Schema > User".
Sets the length of a Morse code dash.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DASH on page 582
Symbol Space Requires "Time Schema > User".
Sets the length of the Morse code symbol space.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
167
R&S®SMA100B
Avionic Standards ADF Configuration and Settings
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:SYMBol on page 584
Letter Space Requires "Time Schema > User". Sets the length of a Morse code letter space. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:LETTer on page 583
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
168
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode
7 List and Sweep Mode
The operating modes "List" and "Sweep" allow you to generate an RF signal having periodically varying frequencies or amplitudes.
A signal generated with varying parameters scans a certain range of varying values of a parameter, with defined start and end points, and can be repeated cyclically.
The R&S SMA100B supports two basic methods: Sweep mode
The instrument generates an RF signal which varies its frequency or level values in discrete steps between the start and end values. The values change according to a specific shape like sawtooth or triangle. The spacing is linear or logarithmmic.
Figure 7-1: Schematic representation of a signal generated in sweep mode
The main application field of the "Sweep" mode is to determine the frequency response a DUT.
List mode The instrument generates a varying output signal, based on a previously saved list with frequency, amplitude and step width values. While in sweep mode the frequency or the level values change, in list mode you can vary both parameters simultaneously. The frequency and level values do not need to have ascending or descending order, they can vary arbitrarily. You can use a global dwell time, which means that the time interval is constant for all steps of the list, or different dwell times for each value pair. Figure 7-2 represents the frequency and power value pairs, in this case with the dwell time set the same for all steps (global dwell time).
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
169
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode
Figure 7-2: Schematic representation of a signal generated in list mode (global dwell time)
The list mode is especially useful in high-speed measurements with fast changing frequency and level settings.
Note that the shown diagrams represent the behaviour in theory. In real signal generation, the instruments usually have a blank time when the frequency or level changes.
Interactions and characteristics of list and sweep mode Activating the list mode automatically deactivates all RF and LF sweeps and vice
versa. In list processing mode, the frequency and level display in the status bar is dis-
abled.
The sweep modes only work with a global dwell time, that means the time intervals are constant during signal generation.
If you want to hold a running sweep at a specific frequency or level value, enter the value in the status bar. The sweep stops immediately.
We recommend that you switch off the display update for optimum sweep performance, especially with short dwell times See Chapter 12.1.2, "Display Update Settings", on page 339.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
170
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
7.1 Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
In both operating modes "List" and "Sweep", triggering and signal generation follow the same principle. The instrument generates the signal continuously (that means triggered automatically) or in individual steps (controlled manually by an internal or external trigger signal).
The instrument expects the trigger signal at the Inst Trig connector.
If the dwell time in sweep or list mode is too short or external trigger signals come too fast, the signal generation delays. As the delay increases, the R&S SMA100B signals an overrun, or even stops sweep or list mode signal generation, if the delay gets too long. The instrument diplays corresponding error messages.
The figures in this section give an overview on the signal generation in the sweep and list modes and the appropriate triggering. The figures show the signal state after activating the mode and the generation of the signal when a trigger event occurs. For each mode, the relevant parameters and settings are briefly explained.
Each "Sweep" and "List" mode dialog provides also a "Reset" function that sets the signal to the initial value or the beginning of the list. Depending on the selected trigger mode, the signal generation proceeds accordingly.
The naming of the selection parameters in manual control (GUI) sometimes deviates from the naming in the remote-control commands. In addition, the value names of the selection parameters used in the signal generator partly differ from the SCPI syntax. The instrument accepts all value names. The correlation between the manual control and the corresponding remote control commands, including the SCPI conform syntax are explained for each mode (see the cross-reference tables). See also the following programming examples on the sweep and list modes in remote control: Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676 Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632 Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
171
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
Auto mode (Sweep/List)
Figure 7-3: Auto mode (Sweep/List)
The instrument generates the signal continuously. Trigger mode "Auto" is prerequisite (default). It causes the continuous generation
of the sweep signal. Starts signal generation immediately with "State = On". Switches automatically to the next step when the Dwell time has elapsed. Stops signal generation with "State = Off".
Table 7-1: Cross-reference between manual and remote control in Auto mode (Sweep/List)
Manual control mode: "Auto"
Remote commands Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name
RF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce AUTO [IMMediate] :SOURce<hw>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
RF level sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce AUTO [IMMediate] :SOURce<hw>:SWEep:POWer:MODE AUTO
LF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce AUTO [IMMediate] :SOURce<hw>:LFOutput<ch>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
List
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:MODE AUTO
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce AUTO
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
172
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
Single / Extern Single mode (Sweep/List)
Figure 7-4: Single / Extern Single mode (sweep / list )
In single mode, you can specify, that the signal returns to the start value when a sweep cycle has been completed. See "The Retrace function" on page 178 for details.
The instrument generates a single sweep cycle. Trigger mode "Manual". A trigger event initiates one sweep from the start value to
the end value. "State = On" sets the signal to the start value: the sweep start frequency, the
sweep start power or the frequency-power value pair of the selected index in the list. Starts signal generation with a trigger event. Switches automatically to the next step when the Dwell time has elapsed. Stops signal generation at the set end value and waits for the subsequent trigger event. Trigger sources: The "Execute Single Sweep" function. The corresponding remote control command. An externally applied trigger signal. "State = Off" stops the signal generation in sweep or list mode.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
173
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
Table 7-2: Cross-reference between manual and remote control in Single / Extern Single modes (Sweep/List)
Manual control mode: Remote commands "Single / Extern Single" Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name
RF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] "Single" or :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTernal] "Extern Single" :SOURce<hw>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
RF level sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] for "Single" or
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTernal] for "Extern Single"
:SOURce<hw>:SWEep:POWer:MODE AUTO
LF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] "Single" or
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTernal] "Extern Single"
:SOURce<hw>:LFOutput<ch>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
List
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce SINGle "Single" or
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal "Extern Single"
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:MODE AUTO
Step / Extern Step mode (Sweep/List)
Figure 7-5: Step / Extern Step mode (sweep / list )
The instrument generates the signal step-by-step. Starts signal generation with "State = On". Switches to the next step with a manual action.
If the end value is reached, signal generation starts again from the beginning. Stops signal generation with "State = Off".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
174
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
Trigger sources: The rotary knob at the front panel. The [Arrow] keys at the front panel. The corresponding remote control commands. An externally applied trigger signal.
To step through the sweep frequencies or levels: In manual mode:
Set the Current Frequency or Current Level values Use the [Up] and [Down] keys or the rotary knob In remote control mode: Use the commands [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual or
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual with the UP or DOWN parameter
Steps that would exceed the sweep range are ignored.
Table 7-3: Cross-reference between manual and remote control in Step / Extern Step modes (Sweep/ List)
Manual control mode: "Step / Extern Step"
Remote commands Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name
RF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] "Step" or
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTernal] for "Extern Step"
:SOURce<hw>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE STEP
RF level sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] "Step" or :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTenal] "Extern Step" :SOURce<hw>:SWEep:POWer:MODE STEP
LF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce SINGle [BUS] "Step" or :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce EXTernal [EXTenal] "Extern Step" :SOURce<hw>:LFOutput<ch>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE STEP
List
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce SINGle "Step" or
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal "Extern Step"
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:MODE STEP
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
175
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
Extern Start/Stop mode (sweep)
Figure 7-6: Extern Start/Stop mode (sweep)
The instrument generates the signal continuously. Trigger mode "Auto" and "Sweep > State = On" are prerequisite. State "On" sets the signal to the start value, that is one of the following:
Sweep start frequency Sweep start power Frequency-power value pair of the selected index in the list Starts signal generation with a trigger event. Switches automatically to the next sweep step when the Dwell time has elapsed. If the end value is reached, signal generation continues with the next sweep cycle. Stops signal generation with the next external trigger event. Starts the signal generation again with the next trigger event, beginning at the start value. "State = Off" stops the signal generation in sweep or list mode. Trigger source: An externally applied trigger signal.
Table 7-4: Cross-reference between manual and remote control in Extern Start/Stop modes (sweep)
Manual control mode: "Extern Start/Stop"
Remote commands Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name
RF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce EAUTo [-] :SOURce<hw>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
RF level sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce EAUTo [-] :SOURce<hw>:SWEep:POWer:MODE AUTO
LF frequency sweep
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce EAUTo [-] :SOURce<hw>:LFOutput<ch>:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
176
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes
Manual mode (Sweep/List)
The manual mode only applies to remote control. It is not visible in the graphical user interface of the instrument and is described here for completeness.
Figure 7-7: Manual mode in remote control (sweep / list )
The instrument generates the signal in steps. Starts signal generation with "State = On". Switches to the next step with a user defined setting via remote control.
You can arbitrarily select a value within the range of the start and stop values by setting the frequency, power or index using the corresponding remote control command. There is no ascending or descending order.
Stops signal generation with "State = Off".
Table 7-5: Remote control commands in manual mode (Sweep/List)
Remote control mode: Manual
Remote commands Rohde & Schwarz proprietary and [SCPI conform] value name
RF frequency sweep
:SOURce<hw>:FREQuency:MANUal <Manual>
RF level sweep
:SOURce<hw>:POWer:MANual <Manual>
LF frequency sweep
:SOURce<hw>:LFOUTput:FREQuency:MANual <Manual>
List
:SOURce<hw>:LIST:INDex <Index>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
177
R&S®SMA100B The Retrace function
List and Sweep Mode About Sweep Mode
Retrace is a function especially designed for "Single" sweep modes, when the sweep signal follows a sawtooth shape. Working in this mode, the instrument performs a single sweep cycle when a trigger event occurs. The signal generation stops at the set end point (stop frequency or stop level), and waits for the next trigger event.
In this state, the upper value of the signal remains at the output until the next cycle starts. In particular, if you generate a level sweep signal, the high amplitude of the signal is output for a certain time. To protect the DUT from overload, the retrace function immediately resets the signal value to the start value at the end of a sweep cycle. It returns to the start level or start frequency until the next trigger is applied.
You can use the "Retrace" function if "Sweep > Mode = Single/External Single" and "Shape = Sawtooth", see: " Shape" on page 189 "Mode" on page 187
7.2 About Sweep Mode
In sweep mode, the signal generator scans the sweep range gradually from one point to another, using a defined step size and following a triangle or sawtooth shape. This mode also enables you to change direction, that means, it is possible to step backwards.
See Chapter 7.2.2, "Sweep Signal Shapes", on page 181.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
178
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode About Sweep Mode
Configuration and operation of sweep mode signals
The R&S SMA100B generates a sweep signal by varying the following parameters: either the RF frequency, the RF level or both, the RF frequency and the RF level in combined RF sweep mode, or the LF frequency.
In all sweep modes, you can perform a complete sweep cycle once, repeat the cycle continuously or step through it gradually.
The instrument generates the sweep signal according to the sweep settings. The "Reset Sweep" function, provided in the sweep settings dialogs enables you to
reset the sweep to its initial value and restart it.
Impact of changing the sweep mode during performance If you change the sweep mode during the execution, the signal generator stops the sweep and starts with the next trigger event at the initial value.
Combined RF frequency / level sweep processing mode
The combined RF sweep functionality processes the signal similar to the Live list mode. The R&S SMA100B sets the frequency and level values simultaneously in the hardware. The difference to the list mode is that the values are not taken from a previously created list, but are calculated using the selected frequency and level ranges, the dwell time and the number of steps.
7.2.1 Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode
A sweep signal is a periodic signal that changes its frequency or level, or both, from a starting value to an ending value in a defined time.
The R&S SMA100B provides various possibilities to configure a sweep signal. For example, you can determine the sweep range by the start and end values, or based on the start value and span. In any case, related parameters are adjusted accordingly.
The formulas below show how the sweep parameters correlate and the corresponding calculation basis, by the frequency and offset settings. Apart from "Center Frequency", "Span" and "Step_lin", the values apply accordingly to the level settings.
Table 7-6: Variables that are used in the following formulas
Variable
Description
Sweep range
Defined frequency or level value range
fCENTer
Defined center frequency
fSPAN
Defined extend of the sweep range
fOFFSet
Frequency offset
fSTARt
Start frequency of the sweep range
fSTOP
End frequency of the sweep range
f1
Current sweep frequency
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
179
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode About Sweep Mode
Variable f2 step_lin step_log POINts
Description Next, subsequent sweep frequency Step size in linear scaling Step size in logarithmic scaling Number of steps within the sweep range
Sweep range
The sweep range is defined by a start and an end value. How the remaining parameters correlate is shown below. Offset = 0 Sweep Range = fSTARt to fSTOP fCENTer = (fSTARt + fSTOP)/2 fSPAN = (fSTOP - fSTARt) Where: fSTARt = fCENTer - (fSPAN/2) fSTOP = fCENTer + (fSPAN/2) Offset0 A defined offset also affects the sweep range and the center frequency. Therefore, the set frequencies are only absolute values, if the Offset = 0. Offset 0 shifts the frequencies with the offset value: Sweep Range = fSTARt + fOFFSet to fSTOP + fOFFSet fCENTer = fCENTer+ fOFFSet fSPAN = fSPAN + fOFFSet The value range of the instrument is calculated as follows: RFmin + fOFFSet to RFmax + fOFFSet
It is possible to set fSTARt > fSTOP and fSTARt < fSTOP, so that even a negative value is permitted for the "Span".
If you change the start and/or stop frequency, the span and center frequency change accordingly, and vice versa.
Sweep steps
In the following, you see how the sweep steps are calculated depending on the defined spacing mode. The formulas show a frequency sweep, but apply to the level settings in the same way.
The step size is added to the current value, to get the subsequent sweep step.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
180
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode About Sweep Mode
With linear scaling, the next frequency is calculated according to:
f2 = f1 + step_lin
In the logarithmic scaling, the step size is determined in per cent, as a constant fraction of the current frequency.
Successive frequencies are calculated as follows: For fSTARt < fSTOP
f2 = f1*(1 + step_log/100) If f2 > fSTOP, then f2 = fSTOP For fSTARt > fSTOP f2 = f1/(1 + step_log/100) If f2 < fSTOP, then f2 = fSTOP
With "Shape = Triangle", the frequency values on the slope from fSTOP to fSTARt are the same as on the slope from fSTARt to fSTOP.
If you specify the number of steps within the sweep range, the step size is adjusted according to the following correlation: For linear sweeps and fSTARt < fSTOP
POINtsfrequency = ((fSTARt - fSTOP)/step_lin) +1 = (fSPAN/step_lin) + 1 For logarithmic sweeps and fSTARt < fSTOP
POINtsfrequency = ((log fSTOP - log fSTARt)/log step_log) +1
If step_log changes, the value of POINts is adjusted. The fSTARt and fSTOP values are retained.
7.2.2 Sweep Signal Shapes
The R&S SMA100B supports the following sweep shapes: Sawtooth
The sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth. One sweep runs from start to stop frequency, or level value respectively. Each subsequent sweep starts again at the start value.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
181
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode About List Mode
Figure 7-8: Sweep signal sawtooth shape
1 = Start value 2 = Stop value 3 = Step size
Triangle The sweep sequence resembles a triangle. One sweep runs from start to stop value frequency and back. Each subsequent sweep starts at the start value.
Figure 7-9: Sweep signal triangle shape 1 = Start value 2 = Stop value 3 = Step size
The current frequency or level of an RF frequency, level or LF frequency sweep is determined by the shape (e.g. sawtooth or triangle) and the spacing (linear or logarithmic), and the step size.
7.3 About List Mode
The list mode is used to generate the RF signal based on a set of predefined frequency and amplitude value pairs, with individual step times. You can define the values
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
182
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Significant Parameters and Functions
arbitrarily, in any order and varying step sizes, within the entire configurable value range of the instrument.
Configuration and operation of list mode signals
The parameters configuring the RF signal are defined in a list (table) and stored in a file.
Creating and handling lists
List files can be created in the following ways: Internally
Use the build-in table editor with columns for the frequency-level values pairs and the dwell time. Define the values manually (row by row) or automatically, based on value range and step size. (See Chapter 7.7, "List Editor", on page 205) Lists are saved as files with user-definable filename and the predefined file extension *.lsw. To load a saved file, use the "File Manager". (See Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318) Lists can be exported, too. For example, to exchange configuration between instruments or to modify the file content with an external program and reload them again. Externally Create a list file as a CSV file with Microsoft Excel, with a Notepad or a similar tool and save it with the predefined extension. Transfer the file to and load it into the instrument.
Dwell time mode
You can choose whether you want to use different dwell times or a fixed value for all steps in the list mode: "From List"
This mode uses the values from the data table. See Edit List Mode Data "Global" This mode processes the list with a fixed time interval you can set with Global Dwell Time.
List processing mode
See: "Live list processing mode" on page 185
7.4 Significant Parameters and Functions
This section provides some basic parameters, settings and functions that affect the operating modes CW, list and sweep, that means at all frequency and level transitions of the RF signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
183
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Significant Parameters and Functions
Dwell time
Dwell time is the length of time that elapses from the beginning until the end of a step in list or sweep mode.
Figure 7-10: Dwell Time vs. settling time
1 = "Dwell Time" (as set with the parameter) 2 = Settling time 3 = Dwell time (effective)
However, the time the instrument requires for the signal to settle reduces the set dwell time:
tdwell(effective) = tdwell - tsetlting
If the dwell time in sweep or list mode is too short or external trigger signals come too fast, the signal generation delays. As the delay increases, the R&S SMA100B signals an overrun, or even stops sweep or list mode signal generation, if the delay gets too long. The instrument diplays corresponding error messages.
Hardware adjustments
The first time a list (new or modified) is processed, the instrument automatically calculates the necessary hardware settings. It can be performed during list processing, but delays the first cycle, especially with short dwell times.
With long dwell times, you can perform this calculation while the list is being processed; the entered dwell times are observed. With short dwell times, calculation of the hardware settings increases the dwell time for the initial processing cycle; the entered value is only observed from the second processing cycle onwards. In this case, a message indicates that there is a deviation between the current and set dwell times. After the first cycle, you do not need to perform additional calculations. The current dwell times do not deviate from the set dwell times.
Blanking
The instrument applies blanking, which temporarily turns off the RF signal when the frequency or level changes, until the signal has settled to a stable state.
Temporary blanking applies to all operating modes.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
184
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
Live list processing mode
The R&S SMA100B generates the signal directly from the value pairs in the database, and adjusts the hardware settings accordingly. The current instrument state and thus any change during the signal generation directly affects the RF signal. The temporary memory is not used.
You can conveniently modify parameters like modulation settings during run-time. Learning list mode data is not required. Impacts like temperature drift are also considered immediately.
This mode is optimized for maximum signal quality, and is useful if dwell times higher than 2 ms are sufficient.
7.5 Sweep Mode Settings
This section lists the settings of all available sweep modes.
Access: 1. Select "Sweep" > "RF Frequency Sweep" 2. Select "Sweep" > "RF Level Sweep" 3. Select "Sweep" > "RF Combined Sweep" 4. Select "Sweep" > "LF Frequency Sweep"
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in: Chapter 14.16.13, "SOURce:SWEep Subsystem", on page 676 Chapter 14.16.4, "SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem", on page 624 Chapter 14.16.11, "SOURce:POWer Subsystem", on page 662 Chapter 14.16.6, "SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 632
Settings General Sweep Settings....................................................................................... 185 Frequency Range Settings....................................................................................192 Level Range Settings............................................................................................194 Output Settings..................................................................................................... 196 Edit Marker Settings..............................................................................................197
7.5.1 General Sweep Settings
Access: Select for example "Sweep" > "RF Frequency Sweep".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
185
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
Table 7-7: General settings dialog: Examples of RF Frequency and RF Combined Sweep dialogs
> "RF Frequency Sweep"
> "RF Combined Sweep"
Settings
Sweep Type ............................................................................................................... 186 State (RF frequency sweep)....................................................................................... 186 State (RF level sweep)................................................................................................187 State (RF frequency / level sweep)............................................................................. 187 State (LF frequency sweep)........................................................................................ 187 Current Frequency...................................................................................................... 187 Current Level...............................................................................................................187 Mode........................................................................................................................... 187 Retrace........................................................................................................................188 Shape.......................................................................................................................... 189 Spacing....................................................................................................................... 190 Sweep Time ............................................................................................................... 190 Dwell Time ..................................................................................................................190 Trigger Slope...............................................................................................................191 Show Connector..........................................................................................................191 Reset Sweep ..............................................................................................................191 Execute Single Sweep ............................................................................................... 191
Sweep Type Selects the kind of the frequency sweep.
"Step"
Increases or decreases the frequency at each step. To determine the frequency intervals, see Spacing.
"Ramp"
Provides a synthesized continuous analog frequency sweep with the set Sweep Time .
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:GENeration on page 679
State (RF frequency sweep) Activates RF frequency sweep signal generation.
Note: Active RF frequency, RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice versa.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
186
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE on page 625
State (RF level sweep) Activates RF level sweep signal generation. Note: Active RF frequency, RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice versa. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MODE on page 666
State (RF frequency / level sweep) Activates the RF frequency / level sweep signal generation. Note: Active RF frequency, RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice versa. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE on page 625 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MODE on page 666
State (LF frequency sweep) Status of the LF frequency sweep signal. You find this parameter in two dialogs: "LF Frequency Sweep" turns on/off the signal generation.
See Sweep Mode Settings for access. "Analog Modulation Sources" displays the current state (read-only). If it is turned
on, this dialog provides the varying sweep frequency, see Current Frequency. Note: Active RF frequency, RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice versa. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE on page 636
Current Frequency Displays the current frequency sweep value for all sweep Modes, except of Mode > Step. In this mode, you can enter the next frequency setting manually. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual on page 627 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual on page 636
Current Level Displays the current level sweep value for all sweep Modes, except of Mode > Step. In this mode, you can enter the next level setting manually. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual on page 665
Mode Selects the sweep mode.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
187
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
See Chapter 7.1, "Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes", on page 171.
"Auto"
Generates a continuously repeating sweep signal directly after activating the sweep mode. The sweep steps are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell time.
"Single / Extern Single" Generates a single sweep cycle after a trigger event. The sweep steps within the cycle are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell time. If one cycle is completed, the instrument waits for the next trigger event.
"Step / Extern Step" Generates the sweep signal step-by-step, manually triggered.
"Extern Start/Stop" Generates a continuously repeating sweep signal that is started, stopped, and restarted by subsequent external trigger events. The sweep steps are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell time.
Remote command: RF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE on page 681 :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce on page 720 RF level sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODE on page 680 :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce on page 720 RF combined sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:MODE on page 687 :TRIGger<hw>:FPSWeep:SOURce on page 721 LF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE on page 642 :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce on page 720
Retrace For "Shape = Sawtooth" and "Mode = Single/External Single", enables changing the signal to the start value while it is waiting for the next trigger event. It returns to the start level or start frequency until the next trigger is applied.
Remote command: RF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace on page 683 RF level sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RETRace on page 683 RF combined sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:RETRace on page 687 LF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace on page 643
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
188
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
Shape Selects the waveform shape of the sweep signal.
"Sawtooth"
The sweep runs from start to stop frequency. The subsequent sweep starts at the start value, i.e. the shape of the sweep sequence resembles a sawtooth.
"Triangle"
Figure 7-11: Sweep signal sawtooth shape
1 = Start value 2 = Stop value 3 = Step width
The sweep runs from start to stop value and back, i.e. the shape of the sweep resembles a triangle. Each subsequent sweep starts at the start frequency. The triangle shape is only available for Sweep Type > Step.
Figure 7-12: Sweep signal triangle shape
1 = Start value 2 = Stop value 3 = Step width
Remote command: RF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe on page 683 RF level sweep:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
189
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SHAPe on page 683 RF combined sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:SHAPe on page 688 LF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe on page 644
Spacing In "RF and LF Frequency Sweep" mode, "Spacing " selects the mode for calculating the frequency interval, which increases or decreases the current frequency at each step.
In "RF Frequency Sweep" mode and Sweep Type > Ramp, the parameter automatically distributes the step intervals linearly.
To determine the step size, select the parameter Step Linear/Step Logarithmic .
In "RF Combined Sweep" mode, the parameter indicates that the step intervals are linearly (straight proportional) distributed, i.e. the intervals have the same size. The frequency / level range and the Dwell Time time determine the calculated step size.
"Linear"
The spacing depends on the selected sweep type. Sweep Type > Step
Takes the frequency value entered as absolute value in Hz. Option: R&S SMAB-B28
Sweep Type > Ramp Generates a synthesized continuous analog frequency sweep for the duration set with the parameter Sweep Time .
"Logarithmic"
( Sweep Type > Step only) Takes the value entered as a logarithmic value, i.e. as a constant fraction of the current frequency in %.
Remote command: RF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing on page 682 RF combined sweep: n.a. LF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing on page 644
Sweep Time Option: R&S SMAB-B28
For "RF Frequency Sweep" with Sweep Type > Ramp, the parameter sets the duration of a ramp sweep step.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:TIME on page 688
Dwell Time Defines the duration of the individual sweep steps.
Note: In case of considerable overrun conditions, the R&S SMA100B turns off the sweep mode.
See also Chapter 7.4, "Significant Parameters and Functions", on page 183.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
190
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
Remote command: RF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl on page 681 RF level sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl on page 679 RF combined sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:DWELl on page 686 LF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl on page 642
Trigger Slope For "Mode = Extern Step/Single", selects the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.
Trigger signal is expected at the Inst Trig connector.
"Positive"
The rising edge of the trigger signal triggers the instrument.
"Negative"
The falling edge of the trigger signal triggers the instrument.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe on page 632
Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
Reset Sweep Resets a sweep.
With the next trigger event, the sweep starts at the initial value.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:RESet[:ALL] on page 688
Execute Single Sweep In "Mode = Single", starts a sweep manually.
Remote command: RF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute on page 683 :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:IMMediate] on page 722 RF level sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:EXECute on page 683 :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep[:IMMediate] on page 722 RF combined sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:EXECute on page 686 LF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute on page 642 :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:IMMediate on page 722 General: :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate] on page 722
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
191
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
7.5.2 Frequency Range Settings
Access:
1. Select for example "Sweep" > "RF Frequency Sweep"
2. Select for example "Frequency Range".
Table 7-8: Range settings dialog: Examples of RF Frequency and RF Combined Sweep dialogs
> "Frequency Range"
> "Frequency / Level Range"
Settings
Start Frequency/Stop Frequency ............................................................................... 192 Center Frequency ...................................................................................................... 192 Span............................................................................................................................ 193 Spacing....................................................................................................................... 193 Step Linear/Step Logarithmic .....................................................................................193
Start Frequency/Stop Frequency Defines the frequency sweep range by setting the start and end values.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Remote command: RF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt on page 629 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP on page 630 RF combined sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:FREQuency:STARt on page 685 [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:FREQuency:STOP on page 685 LF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt on page 637 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP on page 637
Center Frequency In "RF Frequency Sweep" mode, sets the RF center frequency.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer on page 629
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
192
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
Span In "RF Frequency Sweep" mode, sets the span of the frequency sweep range.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN on page 629
Spacing In "RF and LF Frequency Sweep" mode, "Spacing " selects the mode for calculating the frequency interval, which increases or decreases the current frequency at each step.
In "RF Frequency Sweep" mode and Sweep Type > Ramp, the parameter automatically distributes the step intervals linearly.
To determine the step size, select the parameter Step Linear/Step Logarithmic .
In "RF Combined Sweep" mode, the parameter indicates that the step intervals are linearly (straight proportional) distributed, i.e. the intervals have the same size. The frequency / level range and the Dwell Time time determine the calculated step size.
"Linear"
The spacing depends on the selected sweep type. Sweep Type > Step
Takes the frequency value entered as absolute value in Hz. Option: R&S SMAB-B28
Sweep Type > Ramp Generates a synthesized continuous analog frequency sweep for the duration set with the parameter Sweep Time .
"Logarithmic"
( Sweep Type > Step only) Takes the value entered as a logarithmic value, i.e. as a constant fraction of the current frequency in %.
Remote command: RF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing on page 682 RF combined sweep: n.a. LF frequency sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing on page 644
Step Linear/Step Logarithmic In "RF/LF Frequency Sweep" mode, sets the step width for the individual frequency sweep steps. The value is added at each sweep step to the current frequency.
Depending on the current Spacing, you can enter either an absolute or logarithmic step width.
This parameter is only available for Sweep Type > Step.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
"Step Linear" The step width is a constant value in Hz.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
193
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
"Step Logarithmic" The step width is determined logarithmically in %, i.e. as a constant fraction of the current frequency.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] on page 684 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic on page 684 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] on page 645 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic on page 644
7.5.3 Level Range Settings
Access:
1. Select "Sweep" > "RF Level Sweep"
2. Select for example "Level Range".
Table 7-9: Range settings dialog: Examples of RF Level and RF Combined Sweep dialogs
> "Level Range"
> "Frequency / Level Range"
Settings
Start Level / Stop Level .............................................................................................. 194 Step Count.................................................................................................................. 195 Spacing....................................................................................................................... 195 Step ............................................................................................................................195 Setting Characteristics ............................................................................................... 195 Sweep Level Range ................................................................................................... 196
Start Level / Stop Level Defines the RF level sweep range by setting the start and end values.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Remote command: RF level sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt on page 667 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP on page 667 RF combined sweep: [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:POWer:STARt on page 685 [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:POWer:STOP on page 686
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
194
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
Step Count In "RF Combined Mode", defines the number of sweeps to be executed in Mode > Single.
To start the sweep cycles, select Execute Single.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:COUNt on page 686
Spacing Indicates that the instrument distributes the level steps linearly (straight proportional), i.e. the level steps have the same size.
To determine the step size, use the parameter Step .
Remote command: n.a.
Step Sets the step width for the RF level sweep in dB.
The "RF level sweep" mode increases or decreases the level value linearly by the set value.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic] on page 681
Setting Characteristics Selects additional quality characteristics to optimize the behavior of the RF signal level for the specific application.
"Auto"
Sets the RF output level automatically according to the selected mode. In this mode, the instrument provides the highest dynamic range and fastest setting times, as specified in the data sheet. The RF signal is shortly blanked when the step attenuator is switching.
"Uninterrupted" Suppresses blanking at level transitions. Frequency transitions can lead to an RF level blanking due to hardware specific switching points. This mode reduces the dynamic range of the instrument. The step attenuator is fixed.
"Strictly Monotone" Executes signal level changes monotonically increasing or decreasing. The setting makes sure that increasing the level value exclusively results in an increased output level, and vice versa. All electronic switches, which might affect the monotonicity are fixed. The operation mode is useful for applications using level searching algorithms which rely on a strictly monotonous behavior.
"Constant-VSWR" Suppresses output impedance variations at the RF output connector, due to changed level settings.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
195
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
"High Dyn. Uninterrupted" R&S SMAB-K724 Provides a linear output power that is uninterrupted over a wide dynamic range. Note: The R&S SMA100B supports this characteristic at frequencies above 52 MHz. If you select the setting at lower frequencies (52 MHz), the instrument reports a settings conflict.
"User"
Indicates that a setting has been modified in the expert mode. The expert mode is a protected function, that requires protection level 2 password.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LBEHaviour on page 665
Sweep Level Range Displays the RF level sweep range.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:MIN? on page 670 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:MAX? on page 670
7.5.4 Output Settings
Option: R&S SMAB-B28
Access: 1. Select "Sweep" > "RF Frequency Sweep". 2. Select "Output".
Settings
V/GHz / X-Axis ........................................................................................................... 196 Marker / User ............................................................................................................. 197
V/GHz / X-Axis Option: R&S SMAB-B28 Selects the mode the voltage is supplied depending on the frequency.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
196
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
The R&S SMA100B supplies the signal at the V/GHz X-Axis connector.
"0,25 V/GHz" / "0,5 V/GHz" / "1 V/GHz"
Supplies the voltage proportional to the set frequency, derived from the selected setting.
"X-Axis"
Supplies a voltage range from 0 V to 10 V proportional to the frequency sweep range, set with Start Frequency/Stop Frequency .
Remote command: :OUTPut:FPRoportional:SCALe on page 476
Marker / User Option: R&S SMAB-B28
Selects the signal to be supplied at the Marker User1 connector.
"Marker"
Assigns a marker signal to the output. To configure and assign the marker signals, see Chapter 7.5.5, "Edit Marker Settings", on page 197.
"User"
Intended for future use.
Remote command: :OUTPut:USER:MARKer on page 477
7.5.5 Edit Marker Settings
Option: R&S SMAB-B28
Access: 1. Select "Sweep" > "RF Frequency Sweep" 2. Select "Edit Marker".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
197
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode Sweep Mode Settings
You can define up to 10 markers, and assign one of them to the output at a time. When the sweep run has reached the marker frequency, the R&S SMA100B activates the marker signal and supplis it at the Marker User1 connector. The duration of the active signal corresponds to the dwell time of a step.
Settings
Frequency x ............................................................................................................... 198 State ...........................................................................................................................198 Marker Polarity............................................................................................................ 199 Active Marker ............................................................................................................. 199
Frequency x Sets the frequency that the selected marker indicates. When the specified value is used, the polarity of the marker signal changes, as selected with the parameter . Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>:FREQuency on page 689
State Enables the selected marker. A marker signal at the output connector marks the moment the specified frequency values is used. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>:FSTate on page 689
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
198
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode List Mode Settings
Marker Polarity Sets the polarity of the marker signal.
The duration of the active signal is equal to the dwell time of a step.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:MARKer:OUTPut:POLarity on page 688
Active Marker Boosts a specific marker signal so that it is output with higher voltage than all other markers.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer:ACTive on page 689
7.6 List Mode Settings
The "List Mode" dialog contains all the functions and settings for creating and handling lists with RF frequency/level pairs including the corresponding dwell times for generating the RF signal based on these values.
Access:
Select "Sweep" > "List mode".
The dialog contains parameters for configuring the list mode processing, entering list mode data and transferring data files from or to the instrument. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.16.7, "SOURce:LIST Subsystem", on page 645.
General Settings................................................................................................... 200 List Mode Data Settings........................................................................................ 202 Import/Export Settings...........................................................................................203
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
199
R&S®SMA100B
7.6.1 General Settings
Access: Select "Sweep" > "List mode".
List and Sweep Mode List Mode Settings
In the "General" tab, you can configure the trigger and dwell time modes for list processing and activate signal generation.
Settings
State ...........................................................................................................................200 Current Index ............................................................................................................. 200 Mode........................................................................................................................... 201 Dwell Time Mode.........................................................................................................201 Global Dwell Time....................................................................................................... 201 Trigger Slope...............................................................................................................201 Reset ..........................................................................................................................202 Execute Single............................................................................................................ 202
State Activates the list mode and processes the currently selected list.
Note: Active RF frequency, RF level or RF combined sweep modes deactivate the LF sweep or List mode and vice versa.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE on page 625
Current Index Sets the list index for list processing in "Step" mode. In the other modes, the index indicates the current step.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex on page 650
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
200
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode List Mode Settings
Mode Selects the mode for list processing.
See Chapter 7.1, "Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes", on page 171.
"Auto"
Generates the signal by processing the frequency/level value pairs of the list from the beginning to the end. The list steps are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell time. If you switch from any mode to "Auto", signal generation always starts at the top of the list.
"Single / Extern Single" Generates the signal by processing the frequency/level value pairs of the list once from the beginning to the end after a trigger event. The list steps are performed automatically, controlled by the dwell time. If one cycle is completed, the instrument waits for the next trigger event.
"Step / Extern Step" Generates the signal by processing the frequency/level value pairs of the list step-by-step, manually triggered.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce on page 652 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE on page 651
Dwell Time Mode Selects either variable dwell times or a fixed dwell time to perform signal generation in list mode.
"Global"
Uses the same dwell time for all lists steps, set with Global Dwell Time.
"From List"
Uses the dwell times from the list. You can define the dwell time for each frequency/level value pair individually, see Chapter 7.7, "List Editor", on page 205.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:MODE on page 648
Global Dwell Time Sets the dwell time for Dwell Time Mode > "Global".
Note: In case of considerable overrun conditions, the R&S SMA100B turns off the list mode.
See also "Dwell time" on page 184.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl on page 648
Trigger Slope For "Mode = Extern Step/Single", selects the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.
Trigger signal is expected at the Inst Trig connector.
"Positive"
The rising edge of the trigger signal triggers the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
201
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode List Mode Settings
"Negative"
The falling edge of the trigger signal triggers the instrument.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe on page 632
Reset Resets the list to the starting point.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RESet on page 654
Execute Single Manually starts list processing in "Single" mode.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:EXECute on page 652
7.6.2 List Mode Data Settings
Access: 1. Select "Sweep" > "List mode". 2. Select "List Mode Data".
This dialog contains the parameters required for creating and editing lists, activating the learning function and selecting the list processing mode.
Settings
List Mode Data ........................................................................................................... 202 Edit List Mode Data ....................................................................................................203 List Range from/to ......................................................................................................203
List Mode Data Accesses the standard "Select List" dialog for selecting, creating and editing a list file. The currently loaded file is indicated.
You can create data lists with the internal editor or import externally created files, see "Creating and handling lists" on page 183.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:CATalog? on page 653 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect on page 655 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete on page 653 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL on page 654
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
202
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode List Mode Settings
Edit List Mode Data Opens the editor to insert and save data lists with RF frequency, power and dwell time values, see Chapter 7.7, "List Editor", on page 205.
You find this function also in standard file select dialog, accessed via List Mode Data .
List Range from/to Defines an index range in the current list by setting the start and stop index.
The instrument generates the signal with the values of the selected index range and ignores all other list entries.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STARt on page 650 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STOP on page 650
7.6.3 Import/Export Settings
Access: 1. Select "Sweep" > "List Mode". 2. Select "List Mode Data" > "Im-/Export".
The "Im-/Export" dialog provides the parameters for importing or exporting files with user data in standard ASCII *.txt or *.csv file format. The table separators and the decimal floating point numbers are customizable.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
203
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode List Mode Settings
Settings
Mode .......................................................................................................................... 204 ASCII File Settings...................................................................................................... 204 Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination...................................................... 204 Select Source/Select ASCII Destination..................................................................... 205 Import / Export.............................................................................................................205
Mode Selects import or export of a data list file. The provided parameters vary according to the selected mode.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE on page 657 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE on page 624 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE on page 572
ASCII File Settings Defines the format and the separators of the associated data file.
"Extension"
Selects *.csv or *.txt format.
"Decimal Point"
Sets "Point" (dot) or "Comma" as the decimal separator used in the ASCII data with floating-point numerals.
"Column Separator" Sets the separator between the columns in an ASCII table. Available are: "Tab", "Semicolon", "Comma" or "Space".
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 622
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 623
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 572
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 573
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 573
Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination In "Mode > Import", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling functions.
Where: "Select ASCII Source": defines the file to be loaded (imported) "Select ASCII Destination": selects the filename under that the loaded file is saved
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
204
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode List Editor
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 655 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 622 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 573
Select Source/Select ASCII Destination In "Mode > Export", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling functions.
Where: "Select Source": selects the file to be exported "Select ASCII Destination": defines the filename and the file path for the exported
file
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect on page 657 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect on page 624 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect on page 574
Import / Export Imports or exports the selected data list file, depending on the current mode.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute on page 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute on page 574
7.7 List Editor
The "User Correction" and "List Mode" dialogs provide a build-in list editor for defining the corresponding value pairs. The table and navigation functions of the UCOR and list mode editors have the same structure and are therefore summarized below. The access is specified for both modes, the fields and functions are explained using the example of the list mode.
Access to "Edit List Mode Data":
"Sweep" > "List Mode" > "List Mode Data" > "Edit List Mode Data"
The editor for list mode provides a table with RF frequency and power values, an extra column for defining variable dwell times, and standard navigation functions.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
205
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode List Editor
The remote commands required to define the list mode data are described in Chapter 14.16.7, "SOURce:LIST Subsystem", on page 645.
Access to "Edit User Correction Data": "Level" > "User Correction" > "Edit User Cor. Data"
The editor for user correction data provides a table with RF frequency and power values and standard navigation functions. The remote commands required to define the user correction data are described in Chapter 14.16.3, "SOURce:CORRection Subsystem", on page 616.
All columns in a row must contain values. Cells with missing values are therefore filled automatically, using the value of the previous row. If you use global dwell time in list mode, consider also that the instrument uses the value set with Global Dwell Time for all list steps and not the values from the list.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
206
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode List Editor
Since the table and navigation functions can be assumed to be known, the following description contains a brief overview, shown by the example of the "Edit List Mdoe Data" dialog. If a function relates to a particular dialog, it is explicitly stated.
Settings
Edit List Mode Data.....................................................................................................207 Data handling keys .....................................................................................................207
Go To............................................................................................................ 207 Edit................................................................................................................208 Fill with Sensor..............................................................................................208 Save As/Save............................................................................................... 208 Fill... ............................................................................................................................208
Edit List Mode Data Table with values for list or user correction processing.
Note: Once you enter a value, the editor automatically adds preset values in the other columns. This functionality protects against data loss, otherwise incomplete rows are lost when saving. You can simply override these values.
"Frequency /Hz" Sets the frequency values.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency on page 649 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency on page 619
"Power /dBm" (list mode data table) Sets the level values.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer on page 651
"Correction Value /dBm" (user correction data table) Sets the level values.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer on page 619
"Dwell /s"
In list mode, sets the dwell time values.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST on page 649
Data handling keys Standard functions for file and data handling.
Go To Data handling keys Selects a row for editing.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
207
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode List Editor
Edit Data handling keys Enables you to insert, or delete a row or ranges within a list, and provides access to a dialog for automatic filling, see " Fill... " on page 106.
Fill with Sensor Data handling keys Opens a dialog to configure the automatic filling of user correction data with an R&S NRP power sensor. Available in UCOR mode only. See Chapter 8.3.3, "Fill with Sensor", on page 224
Save As/Save Data handling keys Stores the list in a file with user-defined name and predefined file extension. To save a copy or create a file, use the "Save as" function.
Fill... Provides parameters for filling a table automatically with user-defined values.
To fill the table, select "Fill".
Note: Once you enter a value or fill a column, the editor automatically adds preset values in the other columns. This functionality protects against data loss, otherwise incomplete rows will be lost when saving. You can simply override these values.
"From / Range" Defines the start line and number of lines to be filled.
"Column To Fill" Selects, if the column is filled up with frequencies in Hz, levels in dBm or dwell times in s.
"Start Value / End Value" Sets the start value for frequency, level or dwell time. The end value is read only and depends on the increment value and the range.
"Increment Value" Determines the step size.
"Fill"
Fills the column specified in "Column To fill".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
208
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode How to Generate a Signal in List or Sweep Mode
7.8 How to Generate a Signal in List or Sweep Mode
This section shows you how to configure a varying RF output signal for both, the list and sweep modes.
To configure the frequency sweep signal For a step-by-step description, see Chapter 3.3.2, "Generating an RF Frequency
Sweep Signal", on page 50.
Example: Fast changing frequency and level settings in list mode The following example shows you how to generate an amplitude modulated RF signal based on list mode data.
General workflow Since any change of the hardware settings or list entries can affect the RF signal characteristics directly, we recommend that you proceed as follows: 1. Configure the modulation settings.
Activate the RF signal. 2. Wait until the hardware settings have settled. 3. Create a list file. 4. Configure the list mode. 5. Activate list mode.
To configure amplitude modulation and switch RF on 1. Press [Preset] to start from an initial state. 2. Select "Modulation" > "Amplitude Modulation > On". 3. Select "Level" > "RF ON" to activate RF signal generation.
To create list mode data 1. Select "Sweep" > "List Mode". 2. In the "List Mode Data" tab, select "List Mode Data > New" 3. Enter the filename ListMode_Test for the data list and confirm with "Ok".
The instrument creates a file and stores it in the /var/user/ directory. 4. Select "Edit List Mode Data". 5. Enter the first values "Frequency > 2", "Power > 0" and "Dwell > 2". 6. Enter further frequency, power and dwell time values in the same way. 7. Select "Save" and close the dialog.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
209
R&S®SMA100B
List and Sweep Mode How to Generate a Signal in List or Sweep Mode
To configure the list mode and start signal generation
1. In the "General" tab, select "List Mode > Auto".
2. Select "Dwell Time Mode > From List".
3. Switch state to "On".
4. Select "General > State > On".
The instrument continuously generates an amplitude-modulated RF signal whose frequency and level values change according to the dwell times, as defined in the list.
With active list mode, the generator displays no frequency and level values in the status bar, but you can check the following parameters. In the list mode dialog, the current index indicates the steps of the signal gener-
ation. In remote control mode, you can query:
The current state with [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RUNNing? Current parameters with the commands FREQ?, POW? and LIST:DWEL?.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
210
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Attenuator
8 Improving Level Performance
To adjust the RF output signal to specific needs in your application, the R&S SMA100B offers different functions:
Attenuator The R&S SMA100B is equipped with a step attenuator that enables you to vary the amplitude of the RF signal in a wide range. It is characterized by low VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) over the full level and frequency range, and provides highest level accuracy and noise suppression. See "About the attenuator" on page 211.
Automatic Level Control (ALC) The automatic level control system ensures stable RF signals with highest absolute level accuracy over temperature and time. See "About ALC" on page 214.
User correction (UCOR) The user correction function allows you to compensate frequency responses of external setups (e.g. losses of cables) and achieve a stable input signal over frequency directly at the DUT. See "About UCOR" on page 217.
Power sensors The R&S SMA100B has excellent absolute level accuracy. Since a DUT is rarely connected directly to the generator, but with cables or other components, the reference level shifts from the RF output to the DUT. To calibrate this level with high accuracy, i.e. in the tenth dB range, you can connect an R&S NRP power sensor to the generator. The power sensor transmits its readings to the generator, which indicates these measurement results in the display. Thus you can adjust the RF output power of the generator until you reach the target level at the DUT. See Chapter 8.4, "Using Power Sensors", on page 228
8.1 Attenuator
About the attenuator
The step attenuator is either an electronic or a mechanical device. Instruments with frequency options up to 20 GHz use an electronic step attenuator, providing fast and wear free level settings. Instruments capable to generate higher frequency signals use mechanical step attenuators. Depending on the frequency range and the installed highpower option, both types of step attenuators can be built in, and you can select the type to be used below 20 GHz.
To achieve a consistent level setting behavior for all frequencies, the mechanical step attenuator is used even for lower frequencies while the electronic one is disregarded. Especially in frequency ramp sweep mode, which requires a consistent level adjustment behavior, the R&S SMA100B automatically activates the mechanical step attenuator and disables the selection of the electronic step attenuator.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
211
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Attenuator
According to the requirements of your application, you can select different attenuator characteristics.
The following are examples of test requirements and the corresponding configuration:
Automatic configuration Select standard operation mode ("Auto"), in which the generator adjusts the attenuation of the RF output signal automatically.
DUT tests under low signal to noise conditions Low output power is suitable to test the behavior of a DUT under low signal to noise conditions.
Uninterrupted level settings with constant VSWR A fix attenuation value is required for obtaining uninterrupted level settings with constant VSWR. The configuration "RF Off Mode > Unchanged" ensures that constant VSWR is maintained if you turn the signal off and on again.
Noise sensitive applications The parameter "RF OFF Mode > Full Attenuation" sets maximum attenuation and thus suppresses noise when you turn off the RF signal.
8.1.1 Attenuator Settings
Access: Select "Level" > "Level > Attenuator".
In the "Attenuator" dialog, you can select the operating mode of the electronic step attenuator.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.13, "OUTPut Subsystem", on page 474 and Chapter 14.16.11, "SOURce:POWer Subsystem", on page 662.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
212
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Attenuator
Settings
Mode .......................................................................................................................... 213 Step Attenuator below 20 GHz....................................................................................213 Level Range ............................................................................................................... 213 RF OFF Mode ............................................................................................................ 213
Mode Determines the operating mode of the step attenuator.
"Auto"
Adjusts the attenuator settings automatically.
"Fixed"
Fixes the attenuator and amplifier paths for the current RF level and provides signal output with constant output VSWR. The resulting level range is indicated under " Level Range " on page 213.
Remote command: :OUTPut<hw>:AMODe on page 475
Step Attenuator below 20 GHz Selects the type of the step attenuator for frequencies up to 20 GHz.
This setting depends on the frequency range and the installed high power options, see "About the attenuator" on page 211.
"Mechanical"
Selects that the R&S SMA100B uses the mechanical step attenuator over the whole frequency range. The mechanical attenuator is used even for lower frequencies, to achieve a consistent level setting behavior for all frequencies. The electronic step attenuator is disregarded. Sweep Type > Ramp also requires a consistent level adjustment behavior. Therefore, the R&S SMA100B automatically activates the mechanical step attenuator and disables the selection of the electronic step attenuator.
"Electronic"
Selects that the R&S SMA100B uses the electronic attenuator as long as the frequency is below 20 GHz, providing benefits regarding setting time and wear.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:PATTenuator on page 664
Level Range Shows the interruption-free range of the level that you can use in the selected mode.
Remote command: :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer? on page 477 :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer? on page 477
RF OFF Mode Determines the state of the step attenuator, when the RF signal is switched off.
The setting is not affected by an instrument preset ([Preset] key or *RST) and the "Save/Recall" function. It is reset only by factory preset.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
213
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Automatic Level Control (ALC)
"Unchanged"
Freezes the setting of the step attenuator. Use this mode if a constant VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio) is required.
"Full Attenuation" Switches to the maximum attenuation. Use this mode for applications that require a high level of noise suppression.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:RFOFf:MODE on page 664
8.1.2 Reverse Power Protection
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with a reverse power protection circuit.
The reverse power protection is tripped when the power of signals reflected from the load or external signals applied to the RF output get too high. A relay opens and interrupts the internal connection to the RF output. This condition is indicated in the status bar by the "Overload" status message.
Overload If an "Overload" status message is indicated in the status bar, perform the following: Remove the cause for the overload Press the [RF on/off] key to reset the overload protection The RF input is activated when the overload protection is reset. Remote command: :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped? on page 478 :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:CLEar on page 477
8.2 Automatic Level Control (ALC)
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with an automatic level control (ALC) unit to obtain best RF level accuracy.
About ALC
ALC is an adaptive control system to stabilize the RF output level. It continuously monitors the current level and adjusts it to keep a steady state over temperature and time.
ALC is active in almost all applications by default. However, when pulse modulation with short pulses is used, the ALC uses table-based level settings with table values depending on the pulse width.
Also note that ALC can detect incorrect values in multi-transmitter test setups. If multiple generators are coupled, reverse power can affect the ALC readings, which leads to an incorrect RF output power.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
214
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Automatic Level Control (ALC)
ALC states and their effects
The following description basically explains the ALC states and their principle of operation:
"Auto" Adjusts the output level to the operating conditions automatically. ALC is active in almost all operating modes.
"On" Activates the internal level control permanently, regardless of the operating conditions. Note: This mode is not useful for pulse modulation with narrow pulses and low repetition rates, since the automatic level control can not settle in time. Set ALC "Table & On" instead.
"Off (Table)" Deactivates internal level control loop. The instrument calculates every level setting using the attenuation values from the internal (ALC) table. Level attenuation between two table values is done with linear interpolation. This mode enables you to perform a fast and strictly monotonic, but not quite as precise level adjustment.
"Table & On" Starts with the associated value of the internal level table and then activates the automatic level control. This mode achieves maximum level accuracy and fast setting times. If pulse modulation is applied, this mode ensures fast level settings even with narrow pulses at low repetition rate.
The R&S SMA100B displays the level control setting as a status message in the info line.
8.2.1 ALC Settings
Access: Select "Level" > "Automatic Level Control".
In the "ALC" dialog, you can configure the settings for the automatic level control of the RF signal to achieve optimal accuracy.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.16.11, "SOURce:POWer Subsystem", on page 662.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
215
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
Settings
State............................................................................................................................ 216 Detector Sensitivity..................................................................................................... 216
State Selects the internal level control mode.
"Auto"
Selects the most appropriate ALC mode automatically.
"On"
Activates ALC permanently.
"Off (Table)"
Controls the level using the attenuation values of the internal ALC table.
"Table & On"
Starts with the attenuation setting from the internal ALC table and continues with automatic level control.
For further details on the individual settings, an overview of the functionality and details on what is to be considered, see "ALC states and their effects" on page 215.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] on page 663
Detector Sensitivity Determines the path of the internal level detector.
The level detector of the ALC has multiple paths distinguished by their sensitivity.
"Auto"
Selects the detector path automatically, according to the given level. This mode is the recommended operation mode.
"Fix"
Fixes the last set sensitivity setting.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:DSENsitivity on page 663
8.3 User Correction
The R&S SMA100B supports a correction function to compensate external losses, caused, for example, by the RF cable, to achieve a precise target input level at the DUT.
The signal at the RF outputs of the R&S SMA100B is flat. However, the DUT is usually not connected directly to the outputs of the instrument but rather via connecting cables. Components like cables, power combiners, switches or mixers can affect the signal flatness at the DUT input.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
216
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
Figure 8-1: Effect of external losses on the signal flatness at the DUT input
DUT
= Device under test
Components = Designation of all components between the measurement equipment and the DUT, e.g.
cables
1
= Flat signal at the outputs of the R&S SMA100B
2
= Signal received at the DUT, incl. the external losses
About UCOR
User correction (UCOR) is a method that determines the external level loss over a frequency range in advance, see Figure 8-2.
The difference between the generator output level and the level at the DUT determines the correction value at the respective frequency. Alternatively, the attenuation characteristics over a certain frequency range of, for example, RF cables are also specified in the associated data sheet.
Figure 8-2: Understanding the principle of user correction
DUT Components PS
1
= Device under test = Designation of all components between the measurement equipment and the DUT, e.g.
cables = Power sensor, e.g. R&S NRP, connected at the DUT's input and the USB connector of the
R&S SMA100B = Power sensor measures the level over a frequency range, where the collected values corre-
spond to the losses caused by the components between the R&S SMA100B and the DUT
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
217
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
2
= Obtain the correction data by inverting the collected data; load the correction parameters in
the R&S SMA100B
3
= In the R&S SMA100B, the RF signal is pre-processed with the correction values so that the
signal at the outputs is the inverted version of the external losses
4
= Received at the DUT input, the pre-processed signal if flat
With active UCOR, the generator adds the correction value internally and thus increases the output level by exactly the amount of the loss between its output and the DUT. For frequencies which are not contained in the list, the level correction is calculated by interpolation of the closest correction values.
Possible ways for configuring the user correction values
You can configure correction values in the following ways:
Internally
Use the built-in table editor in the "UCOR > Edit User Correction Data" dialog. Once defined, user correction values can be saved in a file. Files with correction data can be exported, for example, to exchange configuration between instruments or to modify the file content with an external program and reload them again.
Using the corresponding remote-control commands. Note that you have to create a user correction file first.
Externally Create a file with correction values as a CSV file with Microsoft Excel, with a Notepad or a similar tool and save it with the predefined extension. Transfer the file to and load it into the instrument.
UCOR file format
Files containing correction data are simple files in text or comma-separated value (CSV) file format. The filename is user-definable; the file extension is *.ucor.
The file contains a list of correction values, one row per frequency and correction value pair; a new line indicator separates the correction values.
For file handling, use the standard functions in the "File Manager", see Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318.
Collecting correction data
To fill the frequency and power values in the correction table, use one of the following options: Manually, row by row. Fill the table automatically with linearly interpolated values, calculated from value
range and step size. Acquire the real frequency response characteristics of the used component with
the R&S NRP power sensor, see Understanding the principle of user correction.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
218
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
Using a power sensor for frequency response measurements
Consider the following when using R&S NRP power sensors to measure the correction values: Measure the level directly at the input of the DUT. Use the internal correction functions of an R&S NRP power sensor to increase the
measurement accuracy. Use S-parameter to consider the impact of any two-port device like an adapter
between the signal generator and the sensor input.
Interactions and characteristics Activated user correction is effective in all operating modes. The RF output level (LevelRF) is the sum of the level value and the correction for the particular frequency: LevelRF = "Status bar > Level" + "UCOR" Activated user correction is indicated by the status indication "Lev Ucor" in the "Level" tile.
8.3.1 User Correction Settings
Access: 1. Select "Level" > "User Correction".
2. If you already have created a file with user correction data: a) Select "UCOR Data > navigate to the file *.uco > Select". b) Proceed with step 4.
3. If you need to create a file: a) Select "UCOR Data > New". b) Enter the filename UCOR_Data and confirm with "Ok". c) Choose the file and confirm with "Select". d) Select "Edit UCOR Data". e) To fill the user correction data table, proceed as described in Chapter 7.7, "List Editor", on page 205.
4. Select "RF Level > RF State > On".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
219
R&S®SMA100B 5. Select "User Cor. Data > State > On".
Improving Level Performance User Correction
The "UCOR" dialog contains all settings for creating and handling files with userdefined level correction values.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.16.3, "SOURce:CORRection Subsystem", on page 616.
Settings
State............................................................................................................................ 220 User Correction........................................................................................................... 220 UCOR Data................................................................................................................. 220 Edit UCOR Data..........................................................................................................221
State Activates user correction. The R&S SMA100B displays the status icon "Lev Ucor" in the "Level" panel. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection[:STATe] on page 621
User Correction Indicates the corrected level value for a specific frequency point. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:VALue? on page 620
UCOR Data Accesses the standard "File Select" function of the instrument. The provided navigation possibilities in the dialog are self-explanatory. Files with user correction values are files with predefined file extension *.uco. When a file is selected, the dialog indicates the filename. You can create the file internally in the table editor or externally. To select an existing file, select "Select List > navigate to the file *.uco > Select" Use the general editor function to create internally new file or to edit an existing
one.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
220
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
Use the standard file manager function to load externally created files to the instrument.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? on page 621 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] on page 620 [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete on page 622
Edit UCOR Data Opens the build-in table editor to define a new correction table or edit an existing one.
See also: Chapter 7.7, "List Editor", on page 205 " Fill... " on page 106 Chapter 8.3.3, "Fill with Sensor", on page 224
8.3.2 List Editor
The "User Correction" and "List Mode" dialogs provide a build-in list editor for defining the corresponding value pairs. The table and navigation functions of the UCOR and list mode editors have the same structure and are therefore summarized below. The access is specified for both modes, the fields and functions are explained using the example of the list mode.
Access to "Edit List Mode Data":
"Sweep" > "List Mode" > "List Mode Data" > "Edit List Mode Data"
The editor for list mode provides a table with RF frequency and power values, an extra column for defining variable dwell times, and standard navigation functions.
The remote commands required to define the list mode data are described in Chapter 14.16.7, "SOURce:LIST Subsystem", on page 645.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
221
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
Access to "Edit User Correction Data": "Level" > "User Correction" > "Edit User Cor. Data"
The editor for user correction data provides a table with RF frequency and power values and standard navigation functions. The remote commands required to define the user correction data are described in Chapter 14.16.3, "SOURce:CORRection Subsystem", on page 616.
All columns in a row must contain values. Cells with missing values are therefore filled automatically, using the value of the previous row. If you use global dwell time in list mode, consider also that the instrument uses the value set with Global Dwell Time for all list steps and not the values from the list.
Since the table and navigation functions can be assumed to be known, the following description contains a brief overview, shown by the example of the "Edit List Mdoe Data" dialog. If a function relates to a particular dialog, it is explicitly stated.
Settings
Edit List Mode Data.....................................................................................................222 Data handling keys .....................................................................................................223
Go To............................................................................................................ 223 Edit................................................................................................................223 Fill with Sensor..............................................................................................223 Save As/Save............................................................................................... 223 Fill... ............................................................................................................................223
Edit List Mode Data Table with values for list or user correction processing. Note: Once you enter a value, the editor automatically adds preset values in the other columns. This functionality protects against data loss, otherwise incomplete rows are lost when saving. You can simply override these values.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
222
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
"Frequency /Hz" Sets the frequency values.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency on page 649 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency on page 619
"Power /dBm" (list mode data table) Sets the level values.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer on page 651
"Correction Value /dBm" (user correction data table) Sets the level values.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer on page 619
"Dwell /s"
In list mode, sets the dwell time values.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST on page 649
Data handling keys Standard functions for file and data handling.
Go To Data handling keys Selects a row for editing.
Edit Data handling keys Enables you to insert, or delete a row or ranges within a list, and provides access to a dialog for automatic filling, see " Fill... " on page 106.
Fill with Sensor Data handling keys Opens a dialog to configure the automatic filling of user correction data with an R&S NRP power sensor. Available in UCOR mode only. See Chapter 8.3.3, "Fill with Sensor", on page 224
Save As/Save Data handling keys Stores the list in a file with user-defined name and predefined file extension. To save a copy or create a file, use the "Save as" function.
Fill... Provides parameters for filling a table automatically with user-defined values.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
223
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
To fill the table, select "Fill".
Note: Once you enter a value or fill a column, the editor automatically adds preset values in the other columns. This functionality protects against data loss, otherwise incomplete rows will be lost when saving. You can simply override these values.
"From / Range" Defines the start line and number of lines to be filled.
"Column To Fill" Selects, if the column is filled up with frequencies in Hz, levels in dBm or dwell times in s.
"Start Value / End Value" Sets the start value for frequency, level or dwell time. The end value is read only and depends on the increment value and the range.
"Increment Value" Determines the step size.
"Fill"
Fills the column specified in "Column To fill".
8.3.3 Fill with Sensor
Access: 1. Select "Level" > "User Correction". 2. Select "UCOR Data > navigate to the file *.ucor > Select".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
224
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
3. Select "Edit UCOR Data > Fill With Sensor...".
This dialog contains parameters for filling a table automatically with sensor readings.
To fill the table, select "Execute". For information on power sensors an how to use them, see Chapter 8.5, "How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor", on page 284.
Settings
Fill User Correction Data with Sensor......................................................................... 225 Used SMAB Settings For Measurement..................................................................... 226
Fill User Correction Data with Sensor "Sensor"
Displays connected sensors for selection. "List To Fill"
Indicates the used list. "Use SParameter"
Indicates whether SParameter correction in the R&S NRP power sensor is used. "Include Zeroing"
Performs a zeroing procedure before acquiring the user correction data to improve precision. No signal is applied to the sensor during zeroing. RF output is temporarily switched off during that time. When unchecked, the zeroing procedure is skipped. However, the RF signal level might be blanked shortly. This setting is useful if blanking of RF is undesirable or the absence of power at the sensor cannot be guaranteed. "Execute" The "Execute" button is only enabled if a sensor is detected and the user correction list contains at least one frequency value.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
225
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:ZERoing:STATe on page 621
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe on page 620
Used SMAB Settings For Measurement Displays the settings relevant for the measurement.
"Modulation" Indicates the modulation state
"Amplitude"
Shows the currently set level.
Remote command: n.a.
8.3.4 Import/Export List Files
Access:
1. Select one of the following: "Sweep" > "List mode". "Level" > "User Correction". "Modulation > Pulse Modulation > Pulse Generator > Pulse Mode = Train".
2. Select "Import/Export".
Figure 8-3: Im-/Export dialog (example with UCOR settings)
The "Import/Export" dialog contains all functions and settings to import externally created list data or to export it accordingly. You can process and store a list in the formats *.txt (ASCII), or *.csv (plain text with identical sequence of fields). The table separators and the decimal floating point numbers are customizable.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
226
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance User Correction
Settings
Mode .......................................................................................................................... 227 ASCII File Settings...................................................................................................... 227 Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination...................................................... 227 Select Source/Select ASCII Destination..................................................................... 228 Import / Export.............................................................................................................228
Mode Selects import or export of a data list file. The provided parameters vary according to the selected mode.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE on page 657 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE on page 624 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE on page 572
ASCII File Settings Defines the format and the separators of the associated data file.
"Extension"
Selects *.csv or *.txt format.
"Decimal Point"
Sets "Point" (dot) or "Comma" as the decimal separator used in the ASCII data with floating-point numerals.
"Column Separator" Sets the separator between the columns in an ASCII table. Available are: "Tab", "Semicolon", "Comma" or "Space".
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 622
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 623
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension on page 572
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal on page 573
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn on page 573
Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination In "Mode > Import", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling functions.
Where: "Select ASCII Source": defines the file to be loaded (imported) "Select ASCII Destination": selects the filename under that the loaded file is saved
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
227
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 655 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 622 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? on page 573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect on page 573
Select Source/Select ASCII Destination In "Mode > Export", access the file select dialog that provides standard file handling functions.
Where: "Select Source": selects the file to be exported "Select ASCII Destination": defines the filename and the file path for the exported
file
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect on page 657 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect on page 624 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect on page 574
Import / Export Imports or exports the selected data list file, depending on the current mode.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute on page 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute on page 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute on page 574
8.4 Using Power Sensors
The R&S SMA100B works with most of the R&S NRP power sensors and thus supports various application tasks. Using power sensors, you can for example determine attenuation characteristics of downstream equipment or cables. You can use the measured values to compensate the losses with internal control functions or with an external control circuit in real time.
R&S NRP sensors are highly accurate standalone measuring devices, suitable for a wide range of applications. The devices communicate directly with the signal generator, calculate the average or peak power internally, include S-parameter correction and return the measurement results to the generator.
The R&S SMA100B works with any sensor of the R&S NRP series and can perform up to four power measurements simultaneously.
Only for the NRP-Z power analysis function, you have to use R&S NRP power sensors that support power analysis in frequency, power and time domain, see Chapter 8.4.4.1, "Required Options", on page 240
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
228
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Check the firmware version of the R&S NRP sensors regularly. Update the firmware, if necessary. For updates, see the Rohde & Schwarz website http://www.rohde-schwarz.com in section "Power Meters & Voltmeters".
Connecting R&S NRP Power Sensors to the R&S SMA100B.............................. 229 NRP Sensor Mapping........................................................................................... 230 NRP Power Viewer............................................................................................... 233 NRP-Z Power Analysis..........................................................................................240
8.4.1 Connecting R&S NRP Power Sensors to the R&S SMA100B
R&S NRP sensors are connected to the R&S SMA100B in the following ways: Connection to the Sensor connector
R&S NRP-ZK8 (eight-pole interface cable) for R&S NRPxx power sensors R&S NRP-ZK6 (six-pole interface cable) for R&S NRPxx power sensors No additional cable for R&S NRP-Zxx power sensors (cable is fixed on the sen-
sor) Connection to the USB connector
Requires the following cables, depending on the used sensor type: R&S NRP-ZKU (USB interface cable) for R&S NRPxx power sensors R&S NRP-Z3 or R&S NRP-Z4 (USB adapter cables) for sensors of the R&S
NRP-Zxx family Connection via R&S NRP-Z5 sensor hub
The R&S NRP-Z5 USB sensor hub (high-speed USB 2.0) can host up to 4 R&S NRP sensors. It provides simultaneous internal and external triggering of all connected sensors. Requires additional cables, depending on the used output connector of the hub. Choose one of the following: Short extension cable R&S NRP-Z2 for connection to the sensor connector.
This six-pole connection provides the external trigger capability. Standard USB cable (USB type A to USB type B) to any USB type A connector
of the R&S SMA100B. This connection does not support external triggering. Connection via USB hub with external power supply unit
Requires the following cables, depending on the used sensor type: R&S NRP-ZKU (USB interface cable) for R&S NRPxx power sensors R&S NRP-Z3 or R&S NRP-Z4 (USB adapter cables) for sensors of the R&S
NRP-Zxx family Connection via LAN for R&S NRPxxxSN/xxxTN/xxxAN power sensors
Using the Ethernet interface requires PoE (Power over Ethernet) to provide the electrical power. To establish the connection, you can use: A PoE Ethernet switch, e.g. R&S NRP-ZAP1 and an RJ-45 Ethernet cable.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
229
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
A PoE injector and an RJ-45 Ethernet cable.
For details, see the description R&S®NRP®Series Power Sensors Getting Started.
Detection and mapping
The R&S SMA100B automatically detects a connected R&S NRP power sensor and indicates it in the "NRP Power Viewer" and "NRP Sensor Mapping" dialogs.
By default, detected sensors are indicated as follows: A sensor connected at the Sensor socket is assigned as "Sensor 1".
If no sensor is connected to this socket, channel 1 remains unassigned. Sensors 2 to 4 are assigned to the sensors at the USB connectors, according to
their sequence of connection.
You can change the default mapping in the NRP Sensor Mapping dialog.
On connection, the R&S SMA100B immediately starts the measurement of a detected R&S NRP power sensor. If you perform an instrument preset ([Preset] key or *RST), the R&S SMA100B stops the measurements. The connection and the mapping of the power sensors remain, the measurements must be restarted.
8.4.2 NRP Sensor Mapping
The "NRP Sensor Mapping" lists all R&S NRP sensors detected by the instrument.
Any R&S NRP sensor that supports the USB legacy protocol and is connected to one of the USB interfaces, is detected automatically and added to the list. Vice versa, the R&S SMA100B removes a sensor from the list, when it is disconnected.
R&S NRP sensors that are connected via LAN or use the USBTMC protocol are not automatically detected. They are detected by the scan search function.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
230
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Access: Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Sensor Mapping".
The dialog lists all detected R&S NRP sensors for selection and mapping. You can also browse the network for sensors. The detected sensors are characterized by the used protocol and the corresponding connector icon. In the "Mapping" column, you can assign the sensor to one of the available sensor channels. The list can contain several entries but the R&S SMA100B can only use up to four sensors simultaneously. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.15, "SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems", on page 527.
Settings
Sensor Mapping List .................................................................................................. 231 Scan ........................................................................................................................... 232 Clear............................................................................................................................232 Add Sensor/Hide 'Add Sensor'....................................................................................232 Add Sensor settings.................................................................................................... 232
Add LAN Sensor settings..............................................................................232 Add USB Sensor settings ............................................................................ 232
Sensor Mapping List Displays a list of all sensor entries with information on the sensor name, the used protocol, the connector and the assigned mapping.
If a sensor is connected via LAN or uses the USBTMC protocol, its protocol is indicated as "Visa".
Remote command: :SLISt[:LIST]? on page 531 :SLISt:ELEMent<ch>:MAPPing on page 533 :SLISt:SENSor:MAP on page 533
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
231
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Scan Scans the network and the USB connections for sensors connected using the VISA communication protocol, i.e. sensors that are addressed over LAN or USBTMC.
The instrument detects sensors communicating over the USB legacy protocol automatically.
Remote command: :SLISt:SCAN[:STATe] on page 531
Clear Adds the ID parameter of a detected sensor to the list of sensors.
Add Sensor/Hide 'Add Sensor' Shows or hides the "Add Sensor" settings.
Add Sensor settings Configures settings to add sensors connected to the R&S SMA100B via USB or LAN.
Add LAN Sensor settings Add Sensor settings Configures settings to add sensors connected to the R&S SMA100B via LAN.
"IP Address or Host Name"
Displays the host name or the IP address of a R&S NRP power sensor. If the R&S SMA100B does not detect a connected R&S NRP sensor, you can assign the address information manually.
"Add LAN Sen- Adds a detected R&S NRP sensor connected in the LAN to the list of
sor"
sensors, including its device ID or name and its serial number.
Remote command: :SLISt:SCAN:LSENsor on page 531
Add USB Sensor settings Add Sensor settings Configures settings to add sensors connected to the R&S SMA100B via USB.
"Device ID or Sensor Name"
Displays the device identifier or the name of the R&S NRP power sensor. If the R&S SMA100B does not detect a connected R&S NRP sensor, you can assign the ID or name manually.
"Serial Number"
Displays the serial number of the R&S NRP power sensor. If the R&S SMA100B does not detect a connected R&S NRPsensor, you can assign the serial number manually.
"Add USBTMC Adds a detected R&S NRP sensor connected at the USB interface to
Sensor"
the list of sensors, including its device ID or name and its serial num-
ber.
Remote command: :SLISt:SCAN:USENsor on page 532
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
232
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
8.4.3 NRP Power Viewer
The R&S SMA100B features the power viewer function for measuring or monitoring signals with R&S NRP power sensors.
8.4.3.1 About
The R&S SMA100B can perform up to four power measurements simultaneously.
Depending on the signal characteristic (CW, AM, pulsed, etc.) or the parameter to be measured (average, peak, etc...) a suitable R&S power sensor must be used.
About the measuring principle, averaging filter, filter length, and achieving stable results
A sensor measures the average or peak RF power of the source continuously. The measurement results are displayed in the "NRP Power Viewer" dialog.
The power viewer function uses averaging filters for getting a stable readout.
Measurement results could be interfered for instance by to much noise in your setup, by a bad supression of harmonics or non harmonics or when you reach the sensitivity level of your power sensor.
Measurements are continuously repeated in a predefined time window. The measurement result is obtained by averaging the measured values for the last 2N time windows. This approach is referred as a two-step averaging process.
The factor of 2 in the formula arises because the output signals from the microwave detector are chopped at the same rate as the time windows to suppress low-frequency noise. An independent measured value can only be obtained from two consecutive values.
The variable N in the formula indicates the filter length. The filter length then directly influences the measurement time. The filter length can be selected automatically or it can be manually set to a fixed value.
Depending on the R&S NRP power sensor type, the manual setting of the filter length varies in resolution: Resolution = 1 for the R&S NRPxx power sensor family Resolution = 2n for R&S NRP-Zxx power sensors, with n = 1 to 16
Follow the following general recommendation to find out the optimum filter length: Always start a measurement in auto mode ("Filter > Auto").
Check if the measurement results are sufficient. If the power is not constant, select the filter length manually ("Filter > User").
Trigger the "Auto Once" function to search for the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions. The estimated value is indicated as filter length. If the target measurement accuracy value is known, select "Filter > Fixed Noise". The averaging factor is selected automatically and so that the sensor's intrinsic noise (two standard deviations) does not exceed the specified noise content.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
233
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Different sensor types achieve the same filtering result with different filter and time window lengths. The time window length depends on the sensor type: For most sensors, it is fixed to 20 ms. For the R&S NRP-Z81 sensor, it is 10 s. The R&S NRP-Z81 uses filter length that is 1000 times larger than the filter length for other sensors.
About zeroing
Activates the auto zero function.
Zeroing calibrates the external power sensor by adjusting its reading at zero signal power. For this purpose, the RF power source must be switched off or disconnected from the sensor. If a Rohde & Schwarz power sensor receives an input power during the zeroing process, it aborts zeroing and generates an error message. Zeroing takes a few seconds, depending on the sensor model. Refer to the documentation of your power sensor for more information.
Tips for zeroing
When to perform zeroing: During warm up after switching on or connecting the instrument After a substantial change of the ambient temperature After fastening the power sensor module to an RF connector at high temperature After several hours of operation When low-power signals are to be measured, e.g. less than 10 dB above the lower
measurement limit. Switch off the RF power source for zeroing, but do not disconnect it from the power
sensor. This proceeding keeps the thermal equilibrium, and the zeroing process also compensates the noise that superimposes the measured signal (e.g. from a broadband amplifier).
Related settings and functions
Measurements-related settings, like results, filter, filter length: Chapter 8.4.3.2, "NRP Power Viewer Settings", on page 235
Software version of the connected power sensor: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE? on page 542
Acquisition of level correction data: Chapter 8.3, "User Correction", on page 216
Additional information
See Rohde & Schwarz website http://www.rohde-schwarz.com in section "Power Meters & Voltmeters" for: R&S NRP power sensor manual. Information on the R&S NRP-Z5 sensor hub and the available accessories. Sensor software updates.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
234
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
8.4.3.2 NRP Power Viewer Settings
Access: Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Viewer".
The "Overview" tab shows the list of detected sensors, and provides a separate tab per sensor.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
235
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
A sensor tab contains all parameters for configuring the sensor settings, like average or peak display, reference source, filter and level offset. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.15, "SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems", on page 527, including the triggering of the measurement and the retrieval of measurement results. See also Chapter 8.5, "How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor", on page 284.
Settings
Sensor type and serial number................................................................................... 236 Level (Peak) / Level (Average) ...................................................................................236 Sensor Mapping.......................................................................................................... 237 Sensor settings........................................................................................................... 237
State .............................................................................................................237 Zero ..............................................................................................................237 Display.......................................................................................................... 237
Permanent ......................................................................................... 237 Display ............................................................................................... 237 Use Frequency Of.........................................................................................237 Frequency .................................................................................................... 238 Level Offset State,Level Offset..................................................................... 238 Filter.............................................................................................................. 238 Filter Length.................................................................................................. 239 Noise/Signal Ratio........................................................................................ 239 Auto Once..................................................................................................... 239 Timeout......................................................................................................... 239 Default Aperture Time...................................................................................239 Aperture Time............................................................................................... 239 S-Parameter .................................................................................................240 Enable Logging............................................................................................. 240
Sensor type and serial number Indicates the type and the serial number of a selected R&S NRP power sensor, and the channel the sensor is assigned to.
The displayed Level (Peak) / Level (Average) values correspond to the particular sensor.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE? on page 542 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber? on page 540
Level (Peak) / Level (Average) Indicates the measured peak or average level value.
You can also change the unit for the results display: Watt, dBm or dBV.
Note: Peak level measurements are provided if the power sensor supports this feature.
Remote command: :READ<ch>[:POWer]? on page 534 :SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer] on page 534
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
236
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Sensor Mapping Accesses the NRP Sensor Mapping dialog.
Sensor settings One tab per sensor provides the corresponding settings.
State Sensor settings Activates level measurement.
Remote command: :INITiate<hw>[:POWer]:CONTinuous on page 484 To query the availability of a sensor at a given connector, use the command : SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice]? on page 541.
Zero Sensor settings Activates the auto zeroing.
For details, see "About zeroing" on page 234.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO on page 542
Display Sensor settings Sets the display mode for power readings.
Permanent Display Sensor settings Activates the permanent indication of the power measurement result on the left side of the home screen.
You can activate the permanent display for several sensors.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe on page 536
Display Display Sensor settings Sets the display of results on mean or peak power.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority on page 536
Use Frequency Of Sensor settings Selects the source for measurement.
"RF"
The R&S SMA100B transfers the RF frequency and level settings to the R&S power sensor automatically. Thus you achieve power readings of high accuracy, irrespective from the connected sensor type.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
237
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
"User"
Sets a user defined frequency.
Example:
If you have a frequency converting device between the generator and the DUT. If the frequency converter doubles the frequency, you can set twice the frequency in the R&S SMA100B. The R&S power sensor considers this RF frequency setting.
Set the parameter Frequency to the measurement's frequency.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce on page 541
Frequency Sensor settings Defines the frequency value if "Source > User" is used.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency on page 539
Level Offset State,Level Offset Sensor settings Activates and defines a level offset which is considered in the power meassurement result. The level offset value is always expressed in dB, irrespective of the display of the measurement result.
This function allows you to consider, for example, an attenuator in the signal path.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet on page 540 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe on page 540
Filter Sensor settings Selects the way the length of the used filter is defined.
See also "About the measuring principle, averaging filter, filter length, and achieving stable results" on page 233.
"Auto"
Selects the filter length automatically and adjusts it to the measured value. The value is indicated with the parameter Filter Length. When high output power is applied, the filter length and therefore the measurement time can be short. When low output power is applied, the filter length and therefore the measurement time is increased which reduces the considered noise content in your measurement.
"User"
The filter length is defined manually, with the parameter Filter Length. As the filter length works as a multiplier for the time window, constant filter length results in a constant measurement time. Values 1 and 2N are allowed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
238
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
"Fixed Noise"
The averaging factor is taken automatically in accordance to the value Noise/Signal Ratio. Thus, the sensor's intrinsic noise (2 standard deviations) does not exceed the specified noise content. To avoid long measurement times when the power is too low, set a Timeout. Timeout is the maximum acceptable measurement time which limits the averaging factor and therefore leads to a more unstable readout.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE on page 539
Filter Length Sensor settings Sets or indicates the filter length, depending on the selected filter mode. "Filter > Auto" indicates the automatically adjusted filter length. "Filter > User" enables you to set the filter length manually. "Filter > Fixed Noise" hides the setting parameter.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO? on page 537 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER] on page 537
Noise/Signal Ratio Sensor settings For Filter > Fixed Noise, sets the noise content.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio on page 538
Auto Once Sensor settings Searches the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions. The result is indicated with the parameter Filter Length.
See also "About the measuring principle, averaging filter, filter length, and achieving stable results" on page 233.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe on page 538
Timeout Sensor settings For "Filter > Fixed Noise", sets a time limit for the averaging process.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe on page 538
Default Aperture Time Sensor settings The sensor default setting is sufficient. Disable this parameter to specify a user-defined aperture time per sensor, if, for example, the readings vary.
To obtain stable readings, set the Aperture Time exactly to one modulation period.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:DEFault:STATe on page 535
Aperture Time Sensor settings If "Use Default Aperture Time > Off", defines the acquisition time per sensor.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
239
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
For example, to obtain a sufficient low average value, set the aperture time exactly to one modulation period.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:TIMe on page 535
S-Parameter Sensor settings Lists the S-Parameter correction data files retrieved for the connected power sensor. To activate the correction data, select the corresponding file.
S-Parameter correction is used to mathematically shift the reference plane to the DUT by considering the S-parameters for any components connected upstream of the sensor.
The S-Parameter table can be changed with the S-Parameters tool, provided as part of the free R&S NRP Toolkit software. For more information, refer to the manual of the connected R&S NRP power sensor.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe on page 536 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:LIST? on page 536 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:SELect on page 535
Enable Logging Sensor settings Activates recording of R&S NRP power sensor readings in a log file.
There is 1 log file per sensor. The log files are created automatically and filled in continuously. They are text files with predefined filename SensLog<n>.txt, where <n> indicates the connected sensor. Log files are stored on the internal memory, in the directory /var/user/SensorLogging.
Each log file contains the measured value (2 readings when you work with peak sensors), the sensor type, and the measurement time (timestamp). Logged data is not overwritten. When a new measurement is started, the collected logging data is appended in the log file.
Check the used disc space regularly and remove log files to maintain storage capacity.
Note: The logging function is intended for measurements with long time intervals. It is suitable source for data reconstructions if the connection to the sensor was interrupted.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:LOGGing:STATe on page 540
8.4.4 NRP-Z Power Analysis
The "NRP-Z Power Analysis" functionality enables you to analyze the measured power of a DUT under frequency, power and time aspects, while the instrument supports you with marker, graphic and reference value functions.
8.4.4.1 Required Options
The "NRP-Z Power Analysis" requires the power analysis option installed on your instrument, and a sensor that supports power analysis.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
240
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
R&S SMA100B base unit equipped with the following option: Power Analysis (R&S SMAB-K28) R&S NRP power sensors: R&S NRP-Z8x, referred to in the following description R&S NRP-Z91 R&S NRP-Z211 For more information, see data sheet.
8.4.4.2 About
Characteristics and features of the NRP-Z power analysis function
The NRP-Z power analysis displays the measurement data graphically. The measurement diagram covers up to four traces you can manually or automatically assign to one or more connected power sensors. For evaluation of the readings, you can save a defined reference trace or even freeze a reading temporarily on the screen. Markers and mathematic functions enable you to compare particular values.
The NRP-Z power analysis supports three measurement modes: Power versus frequency (frequency response).
For this mode, all required generator settings are automatically configured except for the power level. The power level setting of the generator is used for the frequency sweep measurements. The frequency sweep settings are transferred to the sensor to automatically calculate the correct measurement value for each frequency point. Power versus power (power sweep, AM/AM) Power sweep measurements are executed using the frequency settings of the generator. Alternatively, the sensor can be adjusted to a frequency different from the generator, see Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis . This frequency is transmitted to the sensor to automatically calculate the correct measurement value. Power versus time (power measurement in the time domain, e.g. R&S NRP-Z8x trace mode). In the time mode, you can analyze the signal of the generator but also externally supplied signals. This mode requires an additional trigger event, with selectable level, hysteresis and drop time. Provided the sensor used supports the power measurement of pulse signals, you can also analyze pulse data in time domain.
Characteristics of pulse data
For R&S NRP-Z8x power sensors that support time domain analysis and automatic pulse analysis.
The power sensors enable pulse data analysis in measurement mode time. All important pulse parameters are measured after setting the threshold levels. The following graph shows most of these parameters:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
241
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
The sensor calculates the pulse parameters from each measurement and delivers the results to the R&S SMA100B.
The indication state of the parameters also affects the save function. Storing the measurement diagram as hardcopy includes the parameters selected in this dialog.
A total of 6 parameters can be indicated at one time. Structured hierarchically, trace 1 features top priority and trace 4 is addressed with the lowest weighting. This means that only the first 6 checked parameters are indicated, starting with the settings of trace 1. The pulse data is only visible for certain zoom levels of the diagram.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
242
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
8.4.4.3 Accessing the NRP-Z Power Analysis Functionality
Access: Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis".
Figure 8-4: Power analysis window
1 = Buttons for accessing the "NRP Power Viewer" settings 2 = Power analysis diagram 3 = Buttons for accessing the traces/marker dialogs 4 = Buttons for accessing the configuration dialogs with measurement and sensor parameters 5 = "Start" button to trigger/stop the measurement 6 = "Progress bar" indicated during measurement
The start screen of the NRP-Z power analysis contains the measurement diagram and labelled buttons indicating connected power sensors. These buttons and a configuration button provide access to the dialogs for setting up the measurement and sensor parameters, for configuring the diagram and for the trace display. You can start or stop your measurement directly. During the measurement, the R&S SMA100B shows the progress of the measurement in the progress bar at the bottom of the diagram.
Context-sensitive menu
A context sensitive menu also provides access to the configuration dialogs and some additional functions.
Access:
Touch and hold a spot in the power analysis diagram for at least 1 second to access the context- sensitive menu.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
243
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Figure 8-5: Power analysis context-sensitive menu
In the context-sensitive menu you can access: "Start Continuous/Stop": Triggers / stops the power analysis measurement
Note: During a measurement in the frequency domain, or the power domain respectively, the displayed frequency/power value in the status bar (home screen) does not correspond to the value applied at the output. Therefore, the R&S SMA100B displays asterisks instead of the frequency or power value during the measurement and indicates the original value again when the measurement is completed or aborted. "Next Window (Hardkey)": Switches between the measurement views that are enabled in the following order: "Standard View" "Marker View" "Pulse Data View" "Full Screen"
At least one viewing mode has to be selected. For details on the different view modes, see "Next Window List" on page 270. "Configure...": opens a dialog for configuring the power analysis measurement. See Chapter 8.4.4.6, "NRP-Z Configure Settings", on page 250. "Trace/Markers...": opens a dialog for configuring the traces/marker. See Chapter 8.4.4.5, "NRP-Z Traces/Markers Settings", on page 245. "Save...(Power Analysis)": opens a dialog to save a hardcopy of the measurement. See Chapter 8.4.4.7, "Creating Screenshots of Power Analysis Settings ", on page 274.
Power Analysis Diagram Indicates the measurement results graghically, including configured markers, functions, etc.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
244
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Off / NRP-Zxx Accesses the dialogs for configuring the traces and markers, see Chapter 8.4.4.5, "NRP-Z Traces/Markers Settings", on page 245
Configure... Accesses the dialog for configuring the power analysis measurement, see Chapter 8.4.4.6, "NRP-Z Configure Settings", on page 250.
Start / Stop measurement Starts and stops the power analysis measurement. Depending on the selected measurement mode, the label varies.
8.4.4.4 Test Setup Example
As a power meter has no built-in selection, it is measuring all signal components from nearly DC to 40 GHz and higher. Therefore, the DUT's signal must be rather pure or subjected to external filtering (harmonics, spurious) before measured.
The test setup for the power analysis in the power versus frequency or power versus power is as follows:
Figure 8-6: DUT = Device under test PS = Power sensor, e.g. R&S NRP-Z8x, connected at the DUT's input and the USB connector of the
R&S SMA100B
1. Connect the DUT RF input to the RF output of the instrument. 2. Connect the DUT RF output to the power sensor. 3. Connect the power sensor to the signal generator. 4. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis". 5. Select "Configure..." to open a dialog for setting up the measurement. 6. Select the power sensor, indicated at the bottom of the dialog to set the trace. 7. Select "Start Cont." to trigger the measurement.
8.4.4.5 NRP-Z Traces/Markers Settings
Access: 1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis". 2. Select power sensor indication located at the bottom of the dialog.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
245
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
3. To access the trace settings, select the respective "Trace x" tab.
The measurement data can be current (sensor trace) or stored trace data. You can store data either in a file (reference trace) or in a temporary memory (hold trace). Up to four traces can be indicated at one time. On connection, the sensors are automatically detected and assigned to a trace. By default, connected sensors are assigned to the traces in ascending order, that means sensor 1 to trace 1, sensor 2 to trace 2, etc. If the default trace is already used, the sensor has to be assigned manually in the trace dialog.
Using the reference and hold traces, you can compare traces. Assign a reference curve to one trace and your measured values to a second one, and switch on the display. With this feature you can compare results directly in the graph, or show the deviations in a graph by using the " Mathematics - Trace Power Analysis " on page 248 function.
Example
The current single measurement of sensor 2 which is assigned to trace 2 is used as reference trace.
1. Select "Trace 2" with "Indication" = "2 - NRP-Z81".
2. Select "Save To Ref".
3. Select "Trace 1" > "Indication > Ref".
4. Select "Diagram".
The R&S SMA100B indicates two identical traces.
5. Select "Start single".
Triggers a new measurement cycle with sensor 2. You can compare the resulting measurement trace with the former measurement, which is displayed as reference trace.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
246
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Traces Settings
Indication - Trace Power Analysis Selects the source for the trace data.
The selection is indicated on the trace button in the measurement diagram.
"Off"
No source is selected, the trace is not indicated.
"2 - NRP-Zxx"
The current measurement results of the selected power sensor are the source for the trace data. The index at the beginning of the sensor name indicates the used connector, for example "2" indicates that the sensor is connected via a USB interface. The data is either continuously updated (continuous measurement) or represents a single measurement cycle (single measurement).
"Ref"
Selects the reference trace. The reference trace is a static trace that was stored in a file and can be recalled. It is possible to store one reference trace at a time.
"Hold"
Freezes the current trace data. The hold trace is a temporary trace that is available until the power analysis is finished. Freezing the trace of a sensor in one trace and displaying the measurement values of the same sensor in another trace allows fast comparison between measurements.
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:STATe on page 525 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:COPY on page 519 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FEED on page 520
Color - Trace Power Analysis Selects the color of the trace.
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:COLor on page 518
Save to Ref - Trace Power Analysis Saves the selected trace as reference trace. Only one reference trace is available at a time.
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:COLor on page 518
Define Reference - Trace Power Analysis Opens a dialog for defining a linear reference curve.
Freq (X) / Pow (Y) Define Reference - Trace Power Analysis For Configure Measurement Settings > "Frequency", determines the parameters of the frequency reference curve.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:XVALues on page 495 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:YVALues on page 496
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
247
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Pow (X) / Pow (Y) Define Reference - Trace Power Analysis For Configure Measurement Settings > "Power", sets the x- and y-axis values of the points A and B.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:XVALues on page 508 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:YVALues on page 508
Time (X) / Pow (Y) Define Reference - Trace Power Analysis For Configure Measurement Settings > "Time", sets the time values for the x-axis and the corresponding y-axis power values.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:XVALues on page 513 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:YVALues on page 513
Save To Ref Define Reference - Trace Power Analysis Saves the selected trace as reference trace. One reference trace is available at a time.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:COPY on page 495 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:COPY on page 508 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:COPY on page 513
Mathematics - Trace Power Analysis Activates the mathematic function.
The function enables you to determine the deviation of two test series, either of measurement traces, or also of traces that contain math results or stored reference curves. That means you can also assign a math result to an operand for further calculation. Various nested computation steps are possible.
The math operation follows the formula:
T<ch>result = T<ch> Operand1 - T<ch>Operand2
How to proceed:
Determine T<ch> Operand1 in the entry field next to "Tx", and then select T<ch>Operand2 in the second entry field right to it.
The result ("T<ch>result") is assigned to the above selected "Trace". If switched on, the graph shows the resulting curve.
Note:
Depending on the type of trace, the instrument automatically sets the appropriate unit on the y-axis: "dBm" if it shows only measurement traces. "dB" for purely mathematical curves. "dB/dBm" ratio scale for mixed display, that means measurements and mathemati-
cal curves.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
248
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Example: Example of a nested calculation. T1 shows the result of the subtraction of the trace ("Trace 1"), and the reference
curve. Trace2 subtracts Ref from T1.
That illustrates the nested calculation, since T1 covers already a math operation. Note: "(Ind.)" denotes the currently selected trace.
Remote command: :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:MATH<ch>:STATe on page 479 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:MATH<ch>:SUBTract on page 480 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:MATH<ch>:STATe on page 480 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:MATH<ch>:SUBTract on page 480 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:MATH<ch>:STATe on page 483 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:MATH<ch>:SUBTract on page 483
Markers Settings
Access:
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis".
2. Select power sensor indication located at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Select the "Markers" tab.
This dialog comprises the markers settings display on the respective trace diagram.
Marker x Visible - Power Analysis Selects if the respective marker and the marker list are shown in the diagram. Remote command: n.a.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
249
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Trace - Power Analysis Selects the trace the marker is assigned to. Remote command: n.a.
8.4.4.6 NRP-Z Configure Settings
The "Configure" dialog allows you to set measurement and sensor parameters. Configure Measurement Settings..........................................................................250 Configure Sensors Settings.................................................................................. 254 Configure Diagram................................................................................................ 257 Configure Time Mode Settings..............................................................................259 Trace Settings....................................................................................................... 259 Pulse Data Notifications Settings.......................................................................... 261 Trigger Settings.....................................................................................................266 Gate Mode Settings.............................................................................................. 268 Next Window List.................................................................................................. 270
Configure Measurement Settings
Access:
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis".
2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Measurement".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
250
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
The measurement section provides the parameters for configuring the measurement either in frequency, power or time domain. Depending on the measurement domain, the settings vary.
Mode - Power Analysis Selects the measurement mode.
"Frequency" Power versus frequency measurement (frequency response).
"Power"
Power versus power measurement (power sweep, AM/AM).
"Time"
Power versus time measurement (envelope power measurement as a function of time, NRP trace mode). The R&S SMA100B samples power over a time interval and assigns the internal power values that have been determined to several points. This mode also provides gated measurement and pulse data analysis, e.g. with a connected R&S NRP-Z81, and the corresponding graphical display "Gate View" and "Pulse Data View".
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:MODE on page 507
Min - Power Analysis Sets the minimum frequency/power/time of the measurement.
The available frequency/power range depends on the frequency/power range of the generator and the used power sensor.
The range for the start time is -1s to +1s. Value 0 defines the trigger point. By choosing a negative time value, the trace can be shifted in the diagram.
It is possible, that the measurement cannot be performed over the complete time range because of limitations due to sensor settings. In this case, the R&S SMA100B generates an error message.
If you change this value for a finished single measurement, only the scaling of the xaxis changes. This way, you can zoom the trace. However, for subsequent measurements, the measurement range is changed according to the new setting.
If you change this value during a continuous measurement, only the scaling of the xaxis changes for measurement cycles that have been triggered before the change. For subsequent measurement cycles, the measurement range changes according to the new setting.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STARt on page 496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STARt on page 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STARt on page 514
Max - Power Analysis Sets the maximum frequency/power/time of the measurement.
The available frequency/power range depends on the frequency/power range of the instrument and the used power sensor.
The range for the stop time is 0 s to 2 s. Value 0 defines the trigger point.
It is possible, that the measurement cannot be performed over the complete time range because of limitations due to sensor settings. In this case, an error message is output.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
251
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
If you change this value for a finished single measurement, only the scaling of the xaxis changes. This way, you can zoom the trace. However, for subsequent measurements the measurement range is changed according to the new setting.
If you change this value during a continuous measurement, only the scaling of the xaxis changes for measurement cycles that have been triggered before the change. For subsequent measurement cycles, the measurement range changes according to the new setting.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STOP on page 497 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STARt on page 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STOP on page 515
Steps - Power Analysis Sets the number of steps for the sweep. The number of measured points is steps + 1. The number of steps is one of the parameters that define the measurement speed. The higher the number of steps, the longer the measurement takes (frequency and power mode).
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STEPs on page 497 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STEPs on page 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STEPs on page 514
Timing - Power Analysis Selects the timing mode in frequency or power domain.
This parameter is only available for Configure Measurement Settings > "Frequency"/"Power".
"Fast"
Fast measurement with an integration time of 2 ms for each measurement step.
"Normal"
A longer but more precise measurement (integration time is 20 ms/ step).
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:TIMing[:MODE] on page 497 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:TIMing[:MODE] on page 510
Average - Power Analysis Selects the averaging factor in time domain.
The factor determines how many measurement cycles are used to form a measurement result. Higher averaging counts reduce noise but increase the measurement time. Averaging requires a stable trigger event so that the measurement cycles have the same timing. If factor 1 is selected, no averaging is performed.
This parameter is only available for Configure Measurement Settings > "Time".
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:AVERage[:COUNt] on page 512
Spacing - Power Analysis Sets the mode for calculating the sweep steps.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
252
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
In power versus frequency mode, selection between linear and logarithmic spacing is possible.
"Linear"
Power versus frequency In a linear sweep, the frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range. The x-axis is a linear frequency axis.
Power versus power The sweeps are performed at constant frequency but with variable generator power that is swept in linear, equidistant steps over a continuous range. The x-axis is a dB-linear power axis.
Power versus time The sweeps are performed at constant frequency and stimulus power. The measurement is repeated over a specified period of time at constant time intervals.
"Logarithmic"
Power versus frequency In a logarithmic sweep, the frequency is swept in equidistant steps on a logarithmic scale. The x-axis is a logarithmic frequency axis.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing[:MODE] on page 496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing[:MODE] on page 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:SPACing[:MODE] on page 514
Execution - Power Analysis Selects single or continuous mode in power analysis.
The measurement is started in the diagram using the "Start" button. During measurement, the "Start" button is replaced by a "Stop" button which can be used to abort the measurement. The progress bar indicates the status of the measurement.
"Single"
Selects single measurement.
"Cont."
Selects continuous measurements.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:RMODe on page 512 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:RMODe on page 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:RMODe on page 496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:RMODe on page 514
All Trigger Events - Power Analysis Selects the trigger mode for measurements in the time domain.
The measurement data processing starts with a trigger event in one of the sensors (Logical OR), or when all channels are triggered (logical AND). Each sensor evaluates a trigger event according to its setting independently.
This function supports the internal or external trigger modes with multi-channel time measurements.
"Wired AND" The measurement starts when all channels are triggered.
"Wired OR"
The measurement starts when a trigger event occurs.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:TEVents on page 515
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
253
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Configure Sensors Settings
Access: 1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis". 2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Sensors"
The "Configure Sensors" dialog provides specific parameters for the power sensor. This part of the dialog can differ from the following description depending on the sensor used. Refer to the manual of the power sensor in this case.
Power Sensor - Power Analysis Selects the power sensor to be set if more than one sensor is connected to the instrument.
Remote command: n.a. In remote control, the sensor is selected via the numeric suffix in the sense key word of the command, for example SENSe2:POWer:SWEep:....
Zero - Power Analysis Activates the auto zero function.
Zeroing calibrates the external power sensor by adjusting its reading at zero signal power. For this purpose, the RF power source must be switched off or disconnected from the sensor. If a Rohde & Schwarz power sensor receives an input power during the zeroing process, it aborts zeroing and generates an error message. Zeroing takes a few seconds, depending on the sensor model. Refer to the documentation of your power sensor for more information.
Tips for zeroing
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
254
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
When to perform zeroing: During warm up after switching on or connecting the instrument After a substantial change of the ambient temperature After fastening the power sensor module to an RF connector at high temperature After several hours of operation When low-power signals are to be measured, e.g. less than 10 dB above the lower
measurement limit. Switch off the RF power source for zeroing, but do not disconnect it from the power
sensor. This proceeding keeps the thermal equilibrium, and the zeroing process also compensates the noise that superimposes the measured signal (e.g. from a broadband amplifier).
Pulse Data Accesses the dialog for configuring the settings for pulse data analysis.
See "Trace Settings" on page 259.
Trigger.. Accesses the dialog for configuring the trigger settings.
See "Trigger Settings" on page 266
Level Offset State- Power Analysis Activates a level offset at the sensor input. Set the offset value in the entry field on the right.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe on page 487 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe on page 490 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe on page 490
Level Offset - Power Analysis Sets the level offset at the sensor input. To consider the value, activate the offset.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:OFFSet on page 486 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:OFFSet on page 488 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet on page 490
Use S-Parameter - Power Analysis Activates the use of the S-parameters correction data of the connected power sensor. For sensors with attenuator, this checkbox is automatically checked.
Refer also to the manual of the connected R&S power sensor for a description on how to use the S-parameters table.
Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis This setting is offered for measurements with DUTs that change the measurement frequency (like modulators), thus changing the input frequency of the sensor.
The parameters vary depending on the measurement modes: Power versus frequency measurement
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
255
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Activates the use of a different frequency range other than the set signal generator frequency range for the measurement. The separate minimum and maximum frequency values are set below. The x-scale of the diagram can be adjusted to the separate frequency range with functions "Use as X Scale" and "Map to X Scale". Power versus power measurement / Power versus time measurement Activates the use of a different frequency other than the set signal generator frequency for the measurement. The separate frequency value is set in the entry window below.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge[:STATe] on page 488 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:SFRequency:STATe on page 489 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:SFRequency on page 489 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:SFRequency:STATe on page 492 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:SFRequency on page 492
Min Frequency - Power Analysis This parameter is only available for Configure Measurement Settings > "Frequency" and Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis > "Active".
Sets the minimum frequency of the measurement.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge:STARt on page 487
Max Frequency - Power Analysis This parameter is only available for Configure Measurement Settings > "Frequency" and Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis > "Active".
Sets the maximum frequency of the measurement.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge:STOP on page 487
Use as X Scale - Power Analysis This parameter is only available for Configure Measurement Settings > "Frequency" and Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis > "Active".
Activates the use of the separate frequency min and max values for the scaling of the x-axis. Thus, the trace for this sensor is visible in the diagram , especially for frequency ranges that differ substantially from the generator settings.
If more than one sensor is active, which use separate frequencies, the option is only available for one sensor. To indicate the traces of the other sensors, use function "Map to X Scale".
Remote command: n.a.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
256
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Map to X Scale - Power Analysis This parameter is only available for Configure Measurement Settings > "Frequency" and Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis > "Active". Maps the trace of a sensor that uses separate frequency to the current scaling of the diagram. Usually the scale is determined by the set frequency range of the generator. If more than one sensor is active, which use separate frequencies, the scale can also be determined by the separate frequency range of one of the other sensors. Remote command: n.a.
Configure Diagram
Access:
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis".
2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Diagram"
The "Configure Diagram" covers the parameters for scaling the y-axis and the appearance of the diagram.
Min - Max Level - Power Analysis Selects the minimum and maximum value of the y-axis.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:MAXimum on page 498 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:MINimum on page 499 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:MAXimum on page 511 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:MINimum on page 512 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:MAXimum on page 516 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:MINimum on page 517
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
257
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Auto Scale - Power Analysis Activates autoscaling of the y-axis of the diagram. The "Auto Scale" function adjusts the scale divisions so that the entire trace fits into the diagram area.
"Off"
Auto scale is deactivated. Switching from activated to deactivated, the scaling is maintained.
"Expand Only (Coarse/Fine)" Auto scale is activated. Automatically selects the appropriate scaling of the y-axis so that the trace is always visible. The range is expanded when a value is out of the right or the left end-of-scale value. The step width is 5 dB for selection "Exp. (Coarse)" and variable in the range of 0.2 db to 5 dB for selection "Exp. (Fine)".
"Float (Coarse/Fine)" Auto scale is activated, that means this parameter automatically selects the appropriate scaling of the y-axis so that the trace is always visible. The range is either expanded, when a value is out of the right/left end-of-scale value or it is reduced when the trace fits into a smaller scale area. The step width is 5 dB for selection "Flt. (Coarse)" and variable in the range of 0.2 db to 5 dB for selection "Flt. (Fine)".
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:AUTO on page 498 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:AUTO on page 510 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:AUTO on page 515
Reset Auto Scale - Power Analysis Resets the scaling of the y-axis to suitable values after the use of auto scaling in the expanding mode. For this mode, the Y scale can get too expanded because of temporary high-power values. The reset function resets the diagram again, to indicate smaller power values.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:AUTO:RESet on page 498 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:AUTO:RESet on page 511 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:AUTO:RESet on page 516
Show Grid - Power Analysis Activates the indication of a grid in the diagram area.
Remote command: :DISPlay[:WINDow][:POWer]:SWEep:GRID:STATe on page 484
Background Color - Power Analysis Sets the background color of the diagram to black or white. The background color is also effective for the hardcopy of the diagram.
Remote command: :DISPlay[:WINDow][:POWer]:SWEep:BACKground:COLor on page 483
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
258
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Configure Time Mode Settings The time measurment mode enables you to analyze internally generated or externally supplied signals. I time mode, the measurement requires an additional trigger event, with selectable level, hysteresis and drop time. In time domain, you can also analyze measured pulse data.
Trace Settings
Access: 1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis". 2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Measurement". 3. Set "Mode" > "Time". 4. Select "Configure Time Mode" 5. Select the "Trace" tab.
The "Trace" tab contains the parameters for the evaluation of important pulse parameters, provided the used power sensor supports automatic pulse analysis.
Trace Selects the trace the sensor is assigned to. To assign a sensor to a trace, use the trace buttons, see Off / NRP-Zxx.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
259
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Indication Indicates the type of power sensor assigned to the selected trace. This field is automatically updated if the sensor is connected or disconnected. Also, this sensor is indicated on the trace button in the measurement diagram.
This parameter is only available for Configure Measurement Settings > "Time".
Remote command: n.a.
Pulse Analysis Activates pulse data analysis.
To start the automatic pulse analysis, select "Start Cont." button in the main measurement diagram.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:STATe on page 490
All Annotations Off Indicates the state of the annotations.
Remote command: n.a.
Base Selects the calculation basis for the threshold parameters.
"Voltage related" Calculates the pulse parameters rise/fall time and pulse width by the voltage over time U(t). Voltage-related parameters represent the usual case.
"Power related" Represents the pulse parameters as power values. To obtain equivalent power-dependent values, the voltage-dependent threshold values are converted (squared), (see example in table below).
Voltage related: Power related:
Distal 90% 81%
Mesial 50% 25%
Proximal 10% 1 %
log. Scale (for example):
(approximately, difference between top- base power > 30 dB )
-0.9dB
-6dB
-20dB
Remote command:
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:BASE on page 491 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:BASE? on page 523
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
260
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Distal Sets the upper reference level in terms of percentage of the overall pulse level (power or voltage related). The distal power defines the end of the rising edge and the start of the falling edge of the pulse. Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer: HREFerence on page 491 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:HREFerence on page 524
Mesial Sets the medial reference level in terms of percentage of the overall pulse level (power or voltage related). This level is used to define the pulse width () and pulse period. Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer: REFerence on page 492 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:REFerence on page 524
Proximal Sets the lower reference level in terms of percentage of the overall pulse level (power or voltage related). The proximal power defines the start of the rising edge and the end of the falling edge of the pulse. Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer: LREFerence on page 491 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:LREFerence on page 524
Pulse Data Notifications Settings
Access:
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis".
2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Measurement".
3. Set "Mode" > "Time".
4. Select "Configure Time Mode"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
261
R&S®SMA100B 5. Select the "Pulse Data notifications" tab.
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
In the "Pulse Data Notification" tab, you can determine the parameter values to be indicated on bottom of the diagram.
Notifications - Pulse Data Analysis Selects the pulse parameters to be indicated below the measurement diagram.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
262
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Duty Cycle Notifications - Pulse Data Analysis Indicates the ratio between the pulse duration () and the pulse period (T) of the measured pulse signal in per cent:
Duty Cycle = (pulse duration / pulse period) * 100
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DCYCle? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DCYCle:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522
Pulse Width Notifications - Pulse Data Analysis Indicates the pulse duration of the pulse data measurement in seconds.
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DURation? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DURation:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522
Pulse Period Notifications - Pulse Data Analysis Indicates the time the pulse signal needs to complete one cycle.
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:PERiod? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:PERiod:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522
Pulse Off Time Notifications - Pulse Data Analysis Determines the time the pulse signal is low, that means as long as the signal level is below the proximal value.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
263
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:SEParation? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:PERiod:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522
Transition Times - Pulse Data Analysis Selects the transition parameters of the pulse signal to be indicated below the measurement diagram.
The R&S NRP-Z sensor searches for the first rising edge and the first falling edge in the trace.
Rise Time / Fall Time Transition Times - Pulse Data Analysis Displays the time the signal requires from crossing low reference until it reaches high reference level and vice versa.
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative: DURation? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative: DURation:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive: DURation? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive: DURation:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522
Pulse Start Time / Pulse Stop Time Transition Times - Pulse Data Analysis Displays the time when the pulse signal crosses the medial reference level.
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative: OCCurrence? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative: OCCurrence:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive: OCCurrence? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive: OCCurrence:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] on page 523
Overshoot (Rising Edge / Falling Edge) Transition Times - Pulse Data Analysis Display the maximum value of the pulse signal following a rising transition and the minimum value of the signal after a falling transition, respectively.
Overshoot values are given in per cent of the pulse amplitude as shown below: Overshoot(pos) = 100* (maximum - top level ) / (top level - base level) Overshoot(neg) = 100* (base level - minimum) / (top level - base level)
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive: OVERshoot? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive: OVERshoot:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] on page 523
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
264
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative: OVERshoot? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative: OVERshoot:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522
Signal Power - Pulse Data Analysis Selects the power parameters of the pulse signal to be indicated below the measurement diagram.
Minimal / Peak / Average Power Signal Power - Pulse Data Analysis Display the minimum, the maximum and the average power of the pulse signal in dBm.
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MINimum? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MINimum:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MAXimum? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MAXimum:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:AVERage? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:AVERage:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522
Pulse Power - Pulse Data Analysis Selects which pulse power parameters are indicated in the diagram (pulse data view only).
Top / Base Power Pulse Power - Pulse Data Analysis Indicate the pulse top and base level of the analyzed signal in dBm.
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:BASE? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:BASE:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:TOP? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:TOP:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522
Distal / Mesial / Proximal Power Pulse Power - Pulse Data Analysis Display the absolute power values of the medial, low and high reference level in dBm.
Remote command: :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:LREFerence? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:LREFerence:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:HREFerence? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:HREFerence:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
265
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:REFerence? on page 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:REFerence:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] on page 522
Trigger Settings
Access: 1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis". 2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Measurement". 3. Set "Mode" > "Time". 4. Select "Configure Time Mode" 5. Select the "Trigger" tab.
Sensor - Power Analysis Selects the power sensor to be set if more than one sensor is connected to the instrument.
Remote command: n.a. In remote control the sensor is selected via the numeric suffix in the sense key word of the command, for example SENSe2:POWer:SWEep:....
Mode - Power Analysis Selects if the measurement is free running, or starts only after an internal or external trigger event.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:SOURce on page 494
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
266
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Level - Power Analysis Sets the trigger threshold. This setting is also possible by the trigger marker on the left side of the diagram.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:LEVel on page 494
Slope - Power Analysis Sets the polarity of the active slope of the trigger signals.
"Positive"
The rising edge of a trigger signal is active.
"Negative"
The falling edge of a trigger signal is active.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:SLOPe on page 494
Hysteresis - Power Analysis Sets the hysteresis of the internal trigger threshold. Hysteresis is the magnitude (in dB) the trigger signal level must drop below the trigger threshold (positive trigger slope) before triggering can occur again.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:HYSTeresis on page 493
Drop out Time - Power Analysis Determines the minimum time for which the signal must be below (above) the power level defined by Level - Power Analysis and Hysteresis - Power Analysis before triggering can occur again. This prevents the trigger system from being activated too early if the trigger threshold is briefly underranged or exceeded.
The dropout time parameter is useful when dealing with, for example, GSM signals with several active slots. When performing a measurement in sync with the signal, a trigger event is to be produced at A, but not at B or C. As the RF power between the slots is below the threshold defined by Level - Power Analysis and Hysteresis - Power Analysis , the trigger hysteresis alone cannot prevent triggering at B or at C. This is why the dropout time parameter is selected to be greater than the time elapsed between points E and B and between F and C, but less than the time elapsed between G and A. This ensures that triggering takes place at A.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
267
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
As the mechanism associated with the dropout time parameter is reactivated whenever the trigger threshold is crossed, unambiguous triggering can also be obtained for many complex signals. By contrast, all triggering is suppressed during the hold-off time. For the example described, this would mean that although stable triggering conditions could be obtained with a suitable hold-off time (regular triggering at the same point), it would not be possible to set exclusive triggering at A.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:DTIMe on page 493
Auto Set - Power Analysis Sets the trigger level, the hysteresis and the drop out time to default values.
Remote command: :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:AUTO on page 493
Gate Mode Settings
For "Time" measurement mode only.
Access: 1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis". 2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Measurement". 3. Set "Mode" > "Time". 4. Select "Configure Time Mode"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
268
R&S®SMA100B 5. Select the "Gate Mode" tab.
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
The "Gate Mode" tab contains the parameters for defining the time gates for the measurement.
Almost all R&S NRP sensors also support time gated measurements of peak and average power (see the data sheet or operating manual of the respective sensor). Two user-configurable gates can be assigned to one of the traces. Both gates are active at the same time. The values are calculated from the trace data, the time resolution is determined by the resolution of the sensor. An external trigger signal or signal triggering is required for synchronization.
The start and stop time of the gates are indicated as gate markers, a bar between the start and stop marker shows the gate length. The indication state of the gate borders and measurement values is only available for certain diagram views which are switched with the "Next Window List" key. The "Next Window List" dialog provides a selection of views, between which is toggled (see "Next Window List" on page 270 ).
Trace - Gate Selects the trace of the sensor assigned for the gate measurement. Both gates are assigned to the same trace.
To assign the sensor to a trace, use the trace buttons, see Off / NRP-Zxx.
Remote command: :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:FEED on page 481
Indication Indicates the type of power sensor assigned to the selected trace. This field is automatically updated if the sensor is connected or disconnected. Also, this sensor is indicated on the trace button in the measurement diagram.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
269
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
This parameter is only available for Configure Measurement Settings > "Time". Remote command: n.a.
State - Gate Enables time gated measurement. The measurement is started with the "Start" button in the main measurement diagram. Both gates are active at one time. The gate borders and the measurement values (average and peak power) are indicated in/below the measurement diagram. The indication is only available for certain diagram views which are switched with the "Rearrange" key. Remote command: :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STATe on page 482 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:AVERage? on page 481 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:MAXimum? on page 481 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:GATE:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] on page 526
Start / Stop - Gate Sets the start and the stop times for the respective gate. Remote command: :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STARt on page 482 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STOP on page 482
Next Window List
Access:
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP-Z Power Analysis".
2. Select "Configure" > "Next Window List"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
270
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
The "Next Window List" dialog provides functions to activate only the required "Views" on the checkboxes to the right.
Standard View Shows the graph and the button bar at the left for frequency power and level sweep measurement.
Remote command: :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:STANdard:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe] on page 527
Marker View Shows the graph and the corresponding marker values at the bottom for frequency power and level sweep measurement.
Up to four markers can be used to display the current power according to the position of the marker. The value(s) are displayed at the bottom of the window below the graph.
To move the marker lines you can select them and drag them with your finger. Alternatively you can move them with the rotary knob.
For details on configuring the markers, see "Markers Settings" on page 249.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
271
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Remote command: :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:MARKer:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe] on page 526
Gate View Shows the graph with the corresponding gate data for time trace and pulse data measurements.
Remote command: :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:GATE:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] on page 526
Pulse Data View Shows the graph and the corresponding pulse data for time trace and pulse data measurements.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
272
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Remote command: :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe] on page 526
Full Screen Shows the graph in fullscreen, and fades out buttons and list values for frequency power and level sweep measurement.
Remote command: :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:FULLscreen:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe] on page 525
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
273
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
8.4.4.7 Creating Screenshots of Power Analysis Settings
The power analysis save function enables you to save current settings in a file. To document the most important settings for a performed signal generation, you can also save a hardcopy of the current display.
Save (Power Analysis) Settings In the "Save ..." dialog you can find the settings to store a screenshot of the current measurement diagram. The current screen shot is stored as indicated, that means with or without marker indication.
Main Settings
Access: 1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Analysis". 2. In the diagram window, open the context-sensitive menu. 3. In the menu, select "Save... (Power Analysis)".
File name - Power Analysis Indicates the file name and directory.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy[:EXECute] on page 507 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME] on page 503
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
274
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe on page 504 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE? on page 504
Format - Power Analysis Selects the file format. Several bitmap graphic formats are offered. In addition, format *.csv is available which stores the measurement values as ASCII data. You can refine the csv settings further, see "CSV Options" on page 277. Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 501
Options Opens a dialog to select the screenshot format and also to activate and select the automatic naming settings.
Common Settings
Access: 1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Analysis". 2. In the diagram window, open the context-sensitive menu. 3. In the menu, select "Save... (Power Analysis)". 4. Select "Options".
Automatic Naming If enabled, the file names are created by selected rules. The filename includes at least one number and optionally additional information.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe on page 504
Format - Power Analysis Selects the file format.
Several bitmap graphic formats are offered. In addition, format *.csv is available which stores the measurement values as ASCII data.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
275
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
You can refine the csv settings further, see "CSV Options" on page 277. Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 501
Automatic Naming Settings
Access: 1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Analysis". 2. In the diagram window, open the context-sensitive menu. 3. In the menu, select "Save... (Power Analysis)". 4. Select "Options". 5. In the "Save NRP-Z Analysis Options" dialog, enable "Automatic Naming."
Path Sets the directory for saving the files.
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory on page 503
Clear Parth Deletes all image files with extensions "bmp", "img", "png", "xpm" and "csv" in the directory set for automatic naming.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
276
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar on page 503
Prefix, Year, Month, Day, Instrument Name A selection of the prefix, year, month, day and instrument name are included in the file name. Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe on page 506 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix on page 506 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe on page 505 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY? on page 504 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe on page 505 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh? on page 505 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe on page 507 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR? on page 506
Current Auto Number Indicates the number which is used in the automatically generated file name. Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer? on page 506
Resulting File Name Indicates the automatically generated file name. Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE? on page 504
CSV Options
Access:
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Analysis".
2. In the diagram window, open the context-sensitive menu.
3. In the menu, select "Save... (Power Analysis)".
4. Set "Format" > "CSV".
5. Select "Options".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
277
R&S®SMA100B 6. Select the "CSV Options" tab.
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
If file format *.csv is selected, the trace data is saved as an ASCII file with separated values. CSV files can be imported into the program MS Excel and then processed further. Adjust the value separator and the decimal point according to the language version, to import the data correctly.
Orientation Defines the orientation of the X/Y value pairs: Horizontal:
X/Y values of trace 1 in rows 1 and 2, X/Y values of trace 2 in rows 3 and 4, X/Y values of trace 3 in rows 5 and 6, X/Y values of trace 4 in rows 7 and 8.
Example: Trace1,X[Hz]: 10000.0; 10010.0; 10020.0; 10030.0; ... Trace1,Y[dBm]: -20.09; -19.17; -18.19; -15.43; ... Trace2,X[Hz]: 10000.0; 10010.0; 10020.0; 10030.0; ... Trace2,Y[dBm]: -19.09; -18.17; -17.19; -14.43; ... Trace3,X[Hz]: 10000.0; 10010.0; 10020.0; 10030.0; ... Trace3,Y[dBm]: -21.09; -20.17; -19.19; -16.43; ... Trace4,X[Hz]: 10000.0; 10010.0; 10020.0; 10030.0; ... Trace4,Y[dBm]: -22.07; -20.14; -21.56; -17.67; ...
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
278
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
Vertical: X/Y values of trace 1 in column 1 and 2, X/Y values of trace 2 in column 3 and 4, X/Y values of trace 3 in column 5 and 6, X/Y values of trace 4 in column 7 and 8.
Example: Trace1,X[Hz]; Trace1,Y[dBm]; Trace2,X[Hz]; Trace2,Y[dBm]; Trace3,X[Hz]; Trace3,Y[dBm]; Trace4,X[Hz]; Trace4,Y[dBm]; 10000.0;-20.09;10000.0; -19.09;10000.0;21.09;10000.0;22.07; 10010.0;-19.17;10010.0;-18.17;10010.0; -20.17;10010.0; -20.14; 10020.0;-18.19;10020.0;-17.19;10020.0;-19.19;10020.0;-21.56; 10030.0; -15.43;10030.0; -14.43;10030.0;-16.43;10030.0;-17.67;...
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:ORIentation on page 502
Separator Defines the character to be used to separate the values: tabulator, semicolon, comma or blank. Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV[:COLumn]: SEParator on page 502
Decimal Point Defines the character to be used as the decimal point of the values: dot or comma. Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:DPOint on page 501
Row Header Defines a header for each row or column, depending on the orientation. A header contains information on the trace, e.g. the trace index, or frequency, power or time values.
Example: Trace=2;Source=detecting..;X[Hz]";"Trace=2;Source=detecting..;Y[dBm]"
Remote command: :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:HEADer on page 501
How to Save a Hardcopy of the Power Analysis Window
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Analysis".
2. In the diagram window, open the context-sensitive menu.
3. In the menu, select "Save... (Power Analysis)".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
279
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
4. To define the output format, select "Format > JPG". 5. Select "Options...". 6. To enable the instrument to create output filenames, select "Automatic Naming >
On". 7.
In the "Automatic Naming" tab:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
280
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
a) To change the default directory the file is saved in, select "Path" and define a path and a filename. For example, select the default directory /var/user.
b) If necessary, disable or change some of the parameters in the "Automatic Naming Settings".
c) Close the "Save NRP-Z Analysis Options" dialog.
8. In the "Save NRP-Z Analysis" dialog, select "Save". The instrument saves a hardcopy of the current instrument display as a *.jpg file. The filename is automatically created.
9. To print the hardcopy, connect the instrument to a LAN and: a) Transfer the file to a remote computer as described in Chapter 11.9, "How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument", on page 325. b) On the remote computer, navigate through the file system. c) Print the selected file. For more information, refer to the online help of the operating system.
8.4.4.8 How to Setup a Frequency Sweep Measurement
Prerequisites: the sensor is connected to the instrument and configured, see Chapter 8.4, "Using Power Sensors", on page 228.
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Analysis".
2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Measurement".
3. Set "Mode" > "Frequency".
4. Configure the measurement: a) Set "Min = 8 KHz". b) Set "Max = 6 GHz". c) Set "Steps = 200".
5. Select the "Configure Diagram" tab. Configure the diagram, see Chapter 8.4.4.11, "How to Configure the Power Analysis Diagram", on page 283.
6. Select the "Configure Sensors" tab.
7. Select the connected sensor, e.g. "2-NRP-Z81".
8. If you want that the frequency settings of the sensor are configured differently than the generator settings, enable "Use Separate Frequ.". a) Set "Min = 1 MHz". b) Set "Max =10 MHz".
9. In the "Next Window List" tab, enable the "Standard View".
10. Close the "Configure" dialog.
11. Press "Start Cont" to start the measurement.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
281
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
8.4.4.9 How to Setup a Power Sweep Measurement
Prerequisites: the sensor is connected to the instrument and configured, see Chapter 8.4, "Using Power Sensors", on page 228. 1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Analysis". 2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Measurement". 3. Set "Mode" > "Power". 4. Configure the measurement:
a) Set "Min = -20 dBm". b) Set "Max = 30 dBm". c) Set "Steps = 200". 5. Select the "Configure Diagram" tab. Configure the diagram, see Chapter 8.4.4.11, "How to Configure the Power Analysis Diagram", on page 283. 6. Select the "Configure Sensors" tab. 7. Select the connected sensor, e.g. "2-NRP-Z81". 8. If you want that the frequency settings of the sensor are configured differently than the generator settings, enable "Use Separate Frequ.". a) Set "1 MHz". 9. In the "Next Window List" tab, enable the "Standard View". 10. Close the "Configure" dialog. 11. Press "Start Cont" to start the measurement.
8.4.4.10 How to Setup a Pulse Measurement
Prerequisites: the sensor is connected to the instrument and configured, see Chapter 8.4, "Using Power Sensors", on page 228.
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Analysis".
2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Measurement".
3. Set "Mode" > "Time".
4. Configure the measurement: a) Set "Min = -5 us". b) Set "Max = 45 us". c) Set "Steps = 200".
5. Select the "Configure Diagram" tab. Configure the diagram, see Chapter 8.4.4.11, "How to Configure the Power Analysis Diagram", on page 283.
6. Select the "Configure Sensors" tab.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
282
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance Using Power Sensors
7. Select the connected sensor, e.g. "2-NRP-Z81". 8. In the "Next Window List" tab, enable the "Pulse Data View". 9. Close the "Configure" dialog. 10. In the diagram window, open the context-sensitive menu. 11. Select "Trace/Pulse Data Notifications/ Trigger". 12. Select the "Trace" tab. 13. Set "State > On". 14. Set the thresholds:
a) Set "Base > Voltage Related". b) Set "Distal = 90%". c) "Mesial = 50%". d) "Proximal = 10%". 15. Select the "Pulse Data Notifications" tab. 16. Enable up to six parameters, for example: "Duty Cycle" "Pulse Width" "Pulse Period" "Off Time" "Start Time" 17. Close the "Trace/Pulse Data Notifications/ Trigger" dialog. 18. Press "Start Cont" to start the measurement.
8.4.4.11 How to Configure the Power Analysis Diagram
1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Analysis". 2. Select "Configure" > "Configure Diagram". 3. Set "Max Level = 30 dBm". 4. Set "Min Level = -40 dBm". 5. Select "Auto Scale > Expand Only (Coarse)". 6. Enable "Show Grid". 7. Set "Background Color > Black."
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
283
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor
8.5 How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor
Using a R&S NRP power sensor and the user correction function of the instrument, you can compensate external frequency responses. The R&S SMA100B utilizes the readings of the power sensor and creates a correction value table for controlling the output level during operation.
To connect the R&S NRP to the R&S SMA100B
1. Connect the power sensor. See Chapter 8.4.1, "Connecting R&S NRP Power Sensors to the R&S SMA100B", on page 229.
2. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Sensor Mapping".
3. If the sensor is not detected automatically, select "Scan > Start". The instrument scans the network and the USB connections for connected sensors and lists all detected R&S NRP sensors in the mapping table.
4. In the "Mapping" column, assign the sensor to a sensor channel, see Chapter 8.4.2, "NRP Sensor Mapping", on page 230.
5. Close the dialog.
To configure and calibrate the R&S NRP in the R&S SMA100B
Provided the power sensor is connected to the R&S SMA100B and is assigned to a sensor channel, we recommend that you calibrate and configure the power sensor in the "NRP Power Viewer" dialog.
1. Select "Level" > "RF ON > Off"
2. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens" > "NRP Power Viewer".
3. If the R&S SMA100B has detected several connected power sensors, select the tab of the sensor you want to use.
4. Select "Zero" to start zeroing of the sensor. Note: Always turn the RF power off or disconnect the sensor from RF before zeroing, since the function calibrates the power sensor at zero signal power. The zeroing process takes a few seconds, depending on the power sensor type.
5. Configure additional parameters for the selected sensor as required.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
284
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor
6. Select "State > On". 7. Close the dialog.
To create user correction data with an R&S NRP and the R&S SMA100B We assume, that the power sensor is connected, assigned and ready for operation. 1. Select "Level" > "User Correction".
2. Select "UCOR Data" > "UCOR Data...." 3. Create a file: "New" > Filename and confirm with "OK". 4. Select the new file with "Select". 5. Select "Edit UCOR Data...". 6. Select "Edit" > "Fill".
The "Fill Table" dialog enables you to fill in the values of the columns automatically. 7. To fill in the frequency column:
a) Select "Select Column To Fill > Frequency / Hz". b) Select "Range > e.g. 15" to determine the number of values. c) Select "Start Value > e.g. 1.56 GHz". d) Select "Increment Value > e.g. 1 MHz", to determine the frequency steps. e) Select "Fill", to insert the frequency values.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
285
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor
The "Fill" function also fills the column of the "Correction Value / dB" values with a predefined value, since empty cells lead to the data loss of the entire line. If you need different values, you can change them manually, or you can use the automatic function "Fill with Sensor" as described in the next steps.
8. Select "Fill with Sensor".
The "Fill User Correction Data With Sensor" dialog provides an overview of the sensor configuration.
9. Select "Execute".
The R&S SMA100B successively sets each frequency point, reads the measured power of the sensor and fills in the value in the correction table.
10. Select "Save" to save the data in the file.
11. Close the dialog.
To perform power leveling calibration with user correction data We assume that a user correction file is available in the user directory of the R&S SMA100B or on a memory stick or in a shared directory. If you have created and saved the file immediately before this step, the file is loaded in the "User Correction" dialog automatically. Otherwise you can load a previously saved file. 1. Select "Level" > "User Correction".
2. Select "UCOR Data" > "UCOR Data...", if there is no file loaded already.
3. Select the directory and file you want to use.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
286
R&S®SMA100B
Improving Level Performance How to Calibrate the Power Level with an R&S NRP Power Sensor
4. Load the file with "Select".
5. To view the file content, select "Edit UCOR Data...".
6. Select "UCOR Data" > "State" > "On" to apply the user correction values.
When you activate the RF output, the R&S SMA100B considers the user correction data and adjusts the signal level accordingly to compensate external frequency responses.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
287
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator Reference Frequency Settings
9 Reference Oscillator
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with an internal reference oscillator that generates a reference frequency of 10 MHz. It is used as internal reference source for the synthesizer.
Alternatively, you can apply an external reference signal. If equipped with the required options, the R&S SMA100B can process external reference frequency in the range 1 MHz to 100 MHz and the 1 GHz reference frequency.
Regardless of the used reference source (internal or external), the R&S SMA100B always provides the configured reference frequency at the output. You can use it, for example to synchronize several interconnected instruments, see Chapter 9.5, "Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization", on page 294, for an overview of typical test situations.
The reference oscillator settings are not affected by an instrument preset ([Preset] key or *RST) and the "Save/Recall" function. They are reset only by factory preset.
9.1 Required Options
R&S SMA100B base unit equipped with the following options: 100 MHz, 1 GHz ultra low noise reference input and output (R&S SMAB-K703) 1 MHz to 100 MHz flexible reference input (R&S SMAB-K704) For more information, see data sheet.
9.2 Reference Frequency Settings
Access: 1. Select ""Frequency" > Reference Frequency".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
288
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator Reference Frequency Settings
In the "Reference Frequency" tab, you can select the reference frequency signal source and the frequency and synchronization bandwidth mode of an external reference signal.
2. Observe the information on the home screen, "Frequency" tile.
The "Frequency" tile indicates the current reference oscillator configuration, incl. the reference oscillator source, external reference frequency (rounded value) and output connector. A warning symbol in the "Frequency" tile indicates a missing external source.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.16.12, "SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem", on page 671.
Settings:
Set to Default.............................................................................................................. 290 Source......................................................................................................................... 290 Show Connector..........................................................................................................290 Deactivate RF Output (if external reference is missing)..............................................290
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
289
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator Reference Frequency Settings
External Reference Frequency................................................................................... 290 Variable Reference Frequency....................................................................................291 Synchronization Bandwidth.........................................................................................291 Nominal Synchronization Bandwidth...........................................................................291 Minimum Locking Range.............................................................................................291 External Tuning Active................................................................................................ 292 External Tuning Slope................................................................................................. 292
Set to Default Calls the default settings.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:PRESet on page 672
Source Selects the reference frequency source.
"Internal"
Uses the internal reference oscillator, either with calibrated or a userdefined Adjustment Value.
"External"
Uses an external reference signal.
Note: If the external reference is missing, the R&S SMA100B issues a warning message and indicates the icon (external reference missing).
To set the frequency of the external reference, see "External Reference Frequency" on page 290.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce on page 672
Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
Deactivate RF Output (if external reference is missing) Turns off the RF output when the external reference signal is selected, but no signal is supplied.
This function prevents that no improper RF signal due to the missing external reference signal is used for measurements. A message indicates that the RF output is deactivated.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf[:STATe] on page 673
External Reference Frequency Selects the frequency of the external reference signal.
Set the reference output frequency with the parameters in the Reference Output Settings dialog.
"10 MHz"
Selects 10 MHz for the external reference frequency signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
290
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator Reference Frequency Settings
"100 MHz, 1 GHz" Option: R&S SMAB-K703/-K704 Selects the external reference frequency.
"Variable"
Option: R&S SMAB-K704 The external reference signal has an arbitrary frequency, within the permissible range from 1 MHz to 100 MHz.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency on page 673
Variable Reference Frequency Option: R&S SMAB-K704
Sets the variably settable external reference frequency.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency:VARiable on page 673
Synchronization Bandwidth Selects the synchronization bandwidth for an external reference signal.
The resulting bandwidth is indicated by the parameter Nominal Synchronization Bandwidth.
"Narrow"
The internal reference oscillator is synchronized to the external signal with narrow bandwidth. This setting is recommended if the phase noise of the external signal is worse than the phase noise of the internal OCXO.
"Wide"
Synchronizes the internal oscillator to the external signal with the maximum possible bandwidth. This mode is the recommended standard mode and for precise reference sources of high spectral purity.
Note: If the frequency of the external reference signal is outside the locking range of the internal reference oscillator, spurs due to the difference of the internal and external reference frequency are generated in the reference PLL. The R&S SMA100B issues an error message.
For more information, see data sheet.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth on page 673
Nominal Synchronization Bandwidth Indicates the nominal synchronization bandwidth for the selected External Reference Frequency and the Synchronization Bandwidth.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:NSBandwidth? on page 674
Minimum Locking Range Indicates the minimum locking range for the selected External Reference Frequency and the Synchronization Bandwidth.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
291
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator Reference Output Settings
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:MLRange? on page 674
External Tuning Active For "Source > Internal", activates the EFC (external frequency control). EFC is a function that transforms an external tuning voltage into frequency shift, where the value range of the resulting frequency is a technical characteristic listed in the data sheet. See the data sheet also for information on the sensitivity, input voltage range, impedance and maximum bandwidth for external tuning signal. Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing[:STATe] on page 672
External Tuning Slope Sets the sensitivity of the external tuning voltage. Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:SLOPe on page 672
9.3 Reference Output Settings
Access: 1. Select ""Frequency" > Reference Frequency". 2. Select "Reference Output".
In the "Reference Output" tab, you can set the reference frequency value at the output connectors. As a result of parameter dependencies, "Preset This Parameter" sometimes does not affect output dialogs. The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.16.12, "SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem", on page 671.
Settings:
Reference Output/1 GHz Reference Output............................................................... 292 Show Connector..........................................................................................................293
Reference Output/1 GHz Reference Output Selects frequency reference output signal for downstream instruments.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
292
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator Adjustment Settings
"Off"
Deactivates the reference signal output.
"10 MHz"
Derives a signal with 10 MHz frequency from the internal reference oscillator and provides this signal at the output.
"100 MHz"
Option: R&S SMAB-K703/-K704 Derives a signal with 100 MHz frequency from the internal reference oscillator and provides this signal at the output.
"1 GHz"
Provides the 1 GHz reference frequency signal at the output.
"Input Signal (loop through)" Option: R&S SMAB-K703/-K704 Passes the external reference frequency to the output directly.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE on page 674 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE on page 675
Show Connector Accesses a dialog that displays the physical location of the selected connector on the front/rear panel of the instrument.
9.4 Adjustment Settings
Access: 1. Select "Frequency" > "Reference Frequency". 2. Select "Adjustment".
Settings:
Adjustment Active....................................................................................................... 293 Adjustment Value........................................................................................................ 294
Adjustment Active Selects the adjustment mode.
"Off"
Uses the calibrated internal reference frequency.
"On"
Allows you to apply a deviation to the internal reference frequency, according to your requirements. Enter the value in the Adjustment Value field.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe] on page 676
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
293
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization
Adjustment Value Sets a user-defined adjustment value for the internal reference frequency. This value takes effect when it is activated with Adjustment Active.
"0" represents the calibrated state. The setting range depends on the reference oscillator type and its factory calibra-
tion value.
Note: The setting is not affected by an instrument preset ([Preset] key or *RST) and the "Save/Recall" function. It is reset only by factory preset.
Remote command: [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue on page 675
9.5 Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization
Test setups with two or more instruments often require that the instruments use a common reference frequency. Depending on the availability of external reference frequency source and its quality, the instruments are connected and configured in different ways.
This section gives an overview of the possible test setups and the related settings. The following situations are considered: External reference source is not available or the built-in reference oscillator is of
better quality than the external source (see "Distributing the internal 10 MHz reference signal to further instruments" on page 294) Clean external reference source with quality exceeding the quality of the built-in reference oscillator (see "Using external reference source" on page 296) Interfered or noisy external reference signal (see "Deriving 10 MHz from the external reference frequency" on page 296) 1 GHz reference coupling for phase coherence of the RF signals with enhanced long-term phase stability (see "Sharing the 1 GHz reference frequency to obtain phase-coherent signals" on page 295)
Connectors overview
Use the "Show Connector" function to indicate the connector on the front/real panel: "Ref In/Ref Out" on page 46 1GHz "Ref In/Ref Out" on page 46 "EFC" on page 46
Distributing the internal 10 MHz reference signal to further instruments
The internal reference oscillator provides the reference frequency: Internal fref = 10 MHz (10 MHz at connector Ref Out)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
294
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization
Source = "Internal" Reference Output/1 GHz Reference Output = "10 MHz" Optional:
External Tuning Active = "On" External Tuning Slope = "Low"
Figure 9-1: Synchronizing instruments using the internal 10 MHz reference signal of the R&S SMA100B
EFC
= External frequency control
EFC,Ref In,Ref Out = Connectors
In phase noise measurement systems, for example, you can also use the EFC (external frequency control) function and shift the frequency. EFC is a function that transforms an external tuning voltage into frequency shift, where the value range of the resulting frequency is a technical characteristic listed in the data sheet. See the data sheet also for information on the sensitivity, input voltage range, impedance and maximum bandwidth for external tuning signal.
Consider the following interdependency:
EFC in combination with an external PLL If the EFC is applied in combination with an external PLL (phase locked loop), the PLL bandwidth must be smaller than the bandwidth of the external tuning signal.
FM-DC mode If the measurement requires higher PLL bandwidth, we recommend that you use the external FM modulation (DC coupling) in low noise mode. The FM-DC mode yields a fixed tuning sensitivity that is independent of the RF output frequency and corresponds to the selected FM deviation.
Sharing the 1 GHz reference frequency to obtain phase-coherent signals
Compared to 10 MHz, a 1 GHz reference signal significantly improves the achievable phase stability between two signal sources. Because the synchronization frequency increases by a factor of 100, the relative phase fluctuations between the sources can be reduced.
1 GHz at connector Ref In 1GHz and 1 GHz at Ref Out 1GHz External fRef = 1 GHz Source = "External" External Reference Frequency = "1 GHz" 1GHz Reference Output = "1 GHz"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
295
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization
Using external reference source
If you have a clean external reference signal with 10 MHz or 100 MHz frequency, for example, you can directly pass it to the output. The signal quality remains the same.
10 MHz, 100 MHz at connector Ref Out and Ref In External fRef = 10 MHz or 100 MHz
(earlier RF hardware versions: 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 13 MHz) Source = "External" Reference Output = "10 MHz, 100 MHz" or "Input Signal (loop through)"
(earlier RF hardware versions: 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 13 MHz) Set the synchronization bandwidth according to the requirements of the applica-
tion.
Figure 9-2: Synchronizing instruments with a 10 MHz external reference signal
Ref. Frequency Source = e.g., Rohde & Schwarz signal analyzer
fRef
= 10 MHz, 100 MHz, 1 MHz to 100 MHz external reference frequency
Ref In, Ref Out
= Connectors
You can forward reference frequency between 1 MHz and 100 MHz directly to the output in the same way.
External fRef = 1 MHz to 100 MHz (1 MHz to 100 MHz at connector Ref In and Ref Out)
Source = "External" Variable Reference Frequency = "Variable" External Reference Frequency = current external frequency Reference Output = "Input Signal (loop through)" or specify the reference fre-
quency the synchronized instrument supports
Set the synchronization bandwidth according to the requirements of the application.
Deriving 10 MHz from the external reference frequency
10 MHz reference frequency can be derived from the following external reference signals: 10 MHz from internal oscillator locked to external input 100 MHz and 1 GHz external reference signals External reference signal between 1 MHz and 100 MHz If the external reference signal is interfered (noisy)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
296
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Oscillator Using the Reference Frequency for Instruments Synchronization
Figure 9-3: Synchronizing instruments with 10 MHz (derived from an external reference frequency)
Ref. Frequency Source = e.g., Rohde & Schwarz signal analyzer
fRef
= 10 MHz, 100 MHz, 1 MHz to 100 MHz, 1 GHz** external reference frequency
**
= 1 GHz uses Ref In 1 GHz connector
Ref In, Ref Out
= Connectors
1 GHz, 1 MHz to 100 MHz at connector Ref In 1 GHz/Ref In and 10 MHz at Ref Out E.g., external Ref. fref = 100 MHz Source = "External" External Reference Frequency = "100 MHz" Reference Output/1 GHz Reference Output = "10 MHz" Synchronization Bandwidth = "Narrow"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
297
R&S®SMA100B
Clock Synthesis
10 Clock Synthesis
The clock synthesis provides a separate system clock with a freely selectable frequency for test setups that require an additional clock reference. For example, in a test setup that uses an A/D converter, the required system clock for data sampling can be provided without the need of additional signal generator.
Output connectors The generated clock reference is synchronized to the selected reference clock of the signal generator (internal or external). The differential signal is output at the [Clk Syn] and [Clk Syn N] connectors.
Required options Option frequency R&S SMAB-B10x Option differential clock synthesis up to 3 GHz R&S SMAB-B29 Option clock synthesis extension 6 GHz R&S SMAB-K722
(requires at least R&S SMAB-B106) For more information, see data sheet.
Settings
Access: 1. Select "Clk Syn/Power Sens > Clock Synthesis".
2. Select "User Variation" to set the step width to be used when setting the clock frequency using the rotary knob.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
298
R&S®SMA100B
Clock Synthesis
3. Observe the information on the home screen, "Clk Syn/Power Sens" tile.
The "Clk Syn/Power Sens" tile indicates that clock synthesis is activated and gives an overview of the key parameters.
Settings
State ...........................................................................................................................299 Output Type.................................................................................................................299 Frequency .................................................................................................................. 300 Level ...........................................................................................................................300 DC Offset State .......................................................................................................... 300 DC Offset ....................................................................................................................301 Voltage........................................................................................................................ 301 Delta Phase.................................................................................................................301 Reset Delta Phase Display......................................................................................... 301 User Variation..............................................................................................................301
Variation Active............................................................................................. 301 Variation Step................................................................................................301
State Activates/deactivates generation of a system clock.
The signal is output at the [Clk Syn] connector.
Remote command: :CSYNthesis:STATe on page 455
Output Type Defines the shape of the generated clock signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
299
R&S®SMA100B
Clock Synthesis
"Single-Ended/Differential Sine" Sine signals with user-definable amplitude.
"Differential Square" Squared signal with fixed amplitude.
"CMOS"
CMOS-like signal with user-definable amplitude and limited frequency range.
Remote command: :CSYNthesis:OTYPe on page 456
Frequency Sets the frequency of the generated clock signal.
Output Type Single-ended sinus Differential sinus Differential square CMOS
Min. frequency 100 kHz
10 MHz 100 kHz
Max. frequency 6 GHz
6 GHz 200 MHz
Remote command: :CSYNthesis:FREQuency on page 456
Level For Output Type = "Single-Ended/Differential Sine", sets the amplitude of the generated clock signal. Remote command: :CSYNthesis:POWer on page 456
DC Offset State Activates a DC offset for both clock synthesis signal outputs. The DC offset can be used e.g. to shift the clock synthesis output signal into the trigger threshold of some logic elements.
Figure 10-1: Example: DC offset = 1.65V and Output Type = Differential Square
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
300
R&S®SMA100B
Clock Synthesis
Remote command: :CSYNthesis:OFFSet:STATe on page 457
DC Offset Sets the value of the DC offset for both clock synthesis signal outputs. Remote command: :CSYNthesis:OFFSet on page 457
Voltage For Output Type = "CMOS", sets the high-level of the output signal. Remote command: :CSYNthesis:VOLTage on page 457
Delta Phase Shifts the phase of the generated clock signal. Remote command: :CSYNthesis:PHASe on page 457
Reset Delta Phase Display Resets the parameter Delta Phase.
User Variation Defines and activates a user-defined step width for varying the frequency or level with the rotary knob. If disabled, the step width varies in steps of one unit at the cursor position.
Variation Active User Variation Activates the set user-defined step width. Remote command: :CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE on page 458 :CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE on page 458
Variation Step User Variation Sets the user-defined step width. Remote command: :CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP on page 459 :CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] on page 458
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
301
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management About the File System
11 File and Data Management
The R&S SMA100B uses files to save all instrument data. The instrument allows you to store and to load instrument settings, and to import and to export user data for processing in another instrument or later. Finally, you can create a screenshot of the current settings displayed on the screen and save it as a file.
This section focuses on the functions provided for managing of user data files and covers the topics listed below.
For information on the related remote control commands, refer to Chapter 14.5, "MMEMory Subsystem", on page 441.
For information on how to save the displayed setting in a file, refer to Chapter 11.10, "Creating Screenshots of Current Settings", on page 331.
About the File System........................................................................................... 302 Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration..................................................305 Protecting Data..................................................................................................... 310 Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings.............................................................311 Accessing Files with User Data.............................................................................315 Exporting and Importing Remote Command Lists................................................ 317 Loading, Importing and Exporting Lists.................................................................318 Using the File Manager......................................................................................... 318 How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument.................................................325 Creating Screenshots of Current Settings.............................................................331
11.1 About the File System
Depending on the contained information, two file groups can be distinguished: system and user files.
Due to security reasons, system files and the system directory are protected and therefore not accessible. The scope of this section is only the files with user data.
This section is an overview of the R&S SMA100B file system and covers the following topics: "Types of user data" on page 303 "File storage location" on page 303 "File handling" on page 304 "File naming conventions" on page 304 "File extensions" on page 304 "File contents" on page 305
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
302
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management About the File System
Types of user data
Depending on the content, the user data can be roughly divided into the following data types: Settings, e.g. the current instrument settings, can be saved and loaded later or
used in other instrument of the same kind. See Chapter 11.4, "Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings", on page 311 SCPI scripts, a series of commands that can be run to perform a task. See Chapter 11.6, "Exporting and Importing Remote Command Lists", on page 317 Externally or internally generated lists, e.g. user correction lists, or data lists can be loaded in the instrument. See Chapter 11.7, "Loading, Importing and Exporting Lists", on page 318 and Chapter 11.5, "Accessing Files with User Data", on page 315
Depending on the data storage method, user data can be: Persistent, i.e. user files that are recorded on the data storage.
Data is preserved when instrument is powered off and can be accessed and modified subsequently. Temporary, i.e. volatile data that the instrument retains while it is powered on. Volatile data is immediately lost when the R&S SMA100B is switched off.
File storage location
Without any additional measures, the R&S SMA100B stores user files on the internal memory, the removable memory, or if connected, on a memory stick.
Both, the user directory /var/user/ on the internal memory or the /usb/ directory on the memory stick, can be used to preserve user-defined data. Any directory structure can be created.
The /var/volatile directory serves as a RAM drive and can be used to protect sensitive information. The data is available temporarily.
If option R&S SMAB-B85 is installed, the R&S SMA100B maps the user directory to the removable memory. If a memory is mounted, user data is saved there. Otherwise user data is redirected to the volatile memory.
Default storage location
The R&S SMA100B stores user data in the user directory.
Depending on the installed options, the user directory is physically located on the internal memory or on the removable memory.
In the file system, user directory is always indicated as /var/user/.
In manual control, you access this directory via the "File Manager", see Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318. In remote control, you can query it with the command :SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER?.
To query and change the default directory used for mass storage, use the command : MMEMory:CDIRectory.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
303
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management About the File System
File handling
To access files and the file system of the instrument or to use the general file management functions such as copying and moving data, use the standard "File Manager" dialog.
See Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318.
To transfer files from and to the instruments or to exchange files, use one of the following alternatives: Connect a memory stick to one of the USB interfaces.
The instrument recognizes automatically a connected memory stick and assigns the /usb/ drive to it. Connect the instrument to a LAN. An instrument connected to a LAN supports two standard file transfer methods from a remote client: FTP (file transfer protocol) File sharing according to the SAMBA/SMB (server message block) protocol.
Both file transfer methods access the folder /user, that is the /var/user/ folder on the instrument. For step-by-step description, see Chapter 11.9, "How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument", on page 325. Map a network folder or a computer to an instrument connected to a LAN. A mapped network folder is indicated as /shares/<"Local Folder">. For step-by-step description, see Chapter 11.8.4, "How to Map a Network Folder", on page 322.
File naming conventions
To enable files to be used in different file systems, consider the following file naming conventions: The filename can be of any length and is case-sensitive, i.e it is distinguished
between uppercase and lowercase letters. All letters and numbers are permitted (numbers are, however, not permitted at the
beginning of the filename). Avoid using special characters. Do not use slashes "\" and "/". These symbols are used in file paths. Avoid using the following filenames: CLOCK$, CON, COM1 to COM4,
LPT1 to LPT3, NUL or PRN They are reserved by the operating system.
File extensions
The R&S SMA100B distinguishes the files according to their extensions; each type of file is assigned a specific file content and also a specific file extension. The extension is usually of no consequence to you since access to the files occurs in the individual dialogs where only the relevant type of file is available. For example, files with user correction data can only be saved and loaded in the "UCOR" dialog.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
304
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
See Chapter A.3, "Extensions for User Files", on page 777 for an overview of the supported file extensions.
File contents
To maintain the file size and to accelerate the loading and processing times, not all instrument settings but rather the settings in state different than the preset one are stored. Considered is also configuration data for the operating elements and lists with user data, e.g. dialog positions and a list of user correction data. However, if a list data is part of the instrument settings, a reference to this list is stored, not the list itself.
This approach ensures that the created files contain only relevant information and allows you to transfer instrument settings even between different equipped signal generators. During the recall process, the instrument interprets only the relevant settings; all non-referenced parameters are set to their preset values. Error messages indicate the settings which cannot be implemented, like referencing non-existing lists or the attempt to activate settings which are not supported by the instrument.
Network settings and remote settings cannot be saved and restored.
11.2 Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
The R&S SMA100B has various options to set default settings. You can preset the R&S SMA100B to an initial state at any time as a known starting point for configurations. It is often useful as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual results arise. The graph on Figure 11-1 shows the impact of the particular reset functions.
Figure 11-1: Parameter and operating modes, reset by the respective preset functions
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
305
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
Overview of the characteristics of the preset functions
Select the preset option that most fits to your particular application:
[Preset] It is the most frequently used function. A Preset executes a defined instrument setup to provide an initial instrument state as a basis for a new configuration. It resets all parameters and switching states, including also the states of inactive operating modes. Network, remote access or system settings are retained.
To execute a preset, press the [Preset] key at the front panel.
"Set to Default" Set To Default relates to individual dialogs or tabs and resets the associated settings of the corresponding dialog. All other settings are retained.
To reset the grouped settings, click "Set To Default".
"Preset this parameter" Sets a single parameter to its default value.
To reset an individual parameter: Open its context-sensitive menu and select "Preset this parameter...".
"Factory Preset" A factory preset is the most profound preset function that resets almost all instrument settings, including reference oscillator, network and remote access settings. Retained are the following settings: Security, password, and settings protected by these passwords User-defined data, like setups or data lists Settings that relate to an integration of the instrument in a measurement setup.
To restore the factory defaults, select System Config > Setup > Settings > Factory Preset. Note: Perform a "Factory Preset" only if it is necessary. After a "Factory Preset", the network connection to the instrument no longer exists.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
306
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
Presetting the instrument to a user-defined instrument state
The reset functions set the parameters and operating modes to default values predefined by the factory. Alternatively to these default settings, you can:
Define user-specific recall settings to be restored after a preset (see Chapter 11.2.3, "How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset", on page 309)
Store and reload user-defined instrument states (see Chapter 11.4.2, "How to Save and Recall Instrument Settings", on page 314)
Mark / Do not mark parameters changed from preset
To survey the current state of the settings concerning default values, the R&S SMA100B offers a feature that visually identifies deviations from the default values.
For more information, see Chapter 11.2.2, "How to Identify Parameters Which Are Not in a Preset State", on page 308.
11.2.1 Preset, Set to Default and Factory Preset Settings
Preset.......................................................................................................................... 307 Set To Default..............................................................................................................307 Preset this Parameter................................................................................................. 307 Execute Factory Preset...............................................................................................308
Preset Resets all parameters and switching states, and closes all opened dialogs.
Note: In contrast to the [Preset] key, the SCPI commands *RST and :SYSTem:PRESet do not close open dialogs in the GUI. Consider also the following possibilities: You can define the settings that are restored when you preset the instrument
(see Chapter 11.2.3, "How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset", on page 309) You can reset the instrument to the factory state (see "Execute Factory Preset" on page 308) See also Table 11-1 that contains the key parameters that are reset by the corresponding preset functions.
Remote command: *RST on page 438
Set To Default Resets the associated settings of the corresponding dialog or tab.
Preset this Parameter Restores the default value of a single parameter.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
307
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
Execute Factory Preset Resets the instrument to its factory settings.
Note: "Factory Preset" retains all security settings and does not delete any user files like setups or user data. See also Table 11-1 that contains the key parameters that are reset by the corresponding preset functions.
Remote command: :SYSTem:FPReset on page 441
11.2.2 How to Identify Parameters Which Are Not in a Preset State
To recognize the current state of the settings related to their default values at the first glance, enable a function that visually identifies parameters in states different than preset.
To activate this display: 1. Open the context-sensitive menu (touch and hold the screen anywhere in the GUI
of the R&S SMA100B).
2. Select "Mark all parameters changed from preset".
If enabled, the corresponding settings are marked. Example:
Figure 11-2: Labeled parameters show that the value deviates from its default
Frequency = changed (default = 1 GHz)
Offset
= changed (default = 0 kHz)
Multiplier
= unchanged
Variation active = changed (default = disabled)
Variation step = unchanged
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
308
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration
11.2.3 How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset
You can define the settings that are restored when you preset the instrument.
1. Configure the settings as required. Save them as described in Chapter 11.4.2, "How to Save and Recall Instrument Settings", on page 314.
2. Save the settings as a file with the predefined filename UserPreset.savrcltxt. Save this file in the directory /var/user/.
The filename UserPreset.savrcltxt and the directory /var/user/ are mandatory.
Now when you press the [Preset] key or send the *RST command to the instrument, the defined settings are restored. An "Info" message appears and confirms, that a file with user-defined preset setting is loaded.
11.2.4 Reference
See Table 11-1 for an overview of the main generator settings that are affected by the corresponding preset functions. While the regular [Preset] key primarily resets the signal relevant parameters of the instrument, the "Factory Preset" affects almost all instrument settings.
For information on the default values of further parameters, refer to the description of the corresponding remote commands.
Table 11-1: Key parameters affected by preset and factory preset
Parameter
Preset value
Preset
Factory Preset
RF frequency
1 GHz
x
x
RF level (RF output)
off
x
x
RF OFF mode
-
-
x
Offsets
0
x
x
Modulation state
off
x
x
Uninterrupted level settings
off
x
x
Level attenuator mode
auto
x
x
Level ALC (internal level control)
auto
x
x
Level UCOR (user correction)
off
x
x
LF output state
off
x
x
Sweep state
off
x
x
List mode state
off
x
x
Reference frequency settings (reference oscillator)
-
-
x
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
309
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Protecting Data
Parameter
Preset value
Power on settings (Level/EMF)
-
Network settings
-
Hostname
-
GPIB address
-
Start/Stop display update
-
Display and keyboard settings
-
Password and settings protected by passwords (e.g. dis- abled LAN or USB)
Security settings
-
User files (setups2), data lists, etc.)
-
Preset
-
-
Factory Preset
x x x x x x -
-
2) UserPreset.savrcltxt is renamed as UserPresetInactive.savrcltxt; an existing file with the same name is overwritten.
If the default values in the "Remote Access" dialog had been changed, a factory preset via remote control (:SYSTem:FPReset) terminates the connection to the instrument.
Security settings are never reset.
Resets all parameters and switching states, and closes all opened dialogs.
11.3 Protecting Data
During operation, the R&S SMA100B saves user data permanently in the user directory, see "File storage location" on page 303.
To protect any classified data and to avoid saving any sensitive data on the R&S SMA100B permanently, you have the following options: Activate the volatile mode. This mode redirects user data to the volatile memory.
The internal memory and the removable memory are write-protected. Instead, you can redirect the user data to an external storage medium, as, e.g., a USB stick. See also: "Default storage location" on page 303 "Volatile Mode" on page 358 Chapter 11.9.4, "Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer", on page 330 If the R&S SMA100B is equipped with the removable memory R&S SMAB-B85 and an SD card is inserted: If the volatile mode is disabled(default setting) the R&S SMA100B saves user
data permanently and only on this storage medium.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
310
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings
You can access data saved on the removable memory just as data stored in the /var/user/.
If the volatile mode is enabled, the R&S SMA100B redirects user data to the volatile memory (SDRAM). The data gets lost when you turn off the instrument.
Save user files temporarily in the /var/volatile directory, which remains available only until the instrument is turned off. You can access data in the volatile memory just as data that is saved permanently in the /var/user/. See also Chapter 11.8.3, "How to Display All Saved Files", on page 322.
11.4 Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings
Possibly you would like to restore or repeat a signal generation you performed under specific conditions on the instrument. Or, in a test setup with more than one signal generator, you want to transfer the used settings to another R&S SMA100B. In these cases, you can save and recall instrument and user settings, and possibly other related data.
Save/Recall the complete instrument settings
Two different methods are available for managing complete instrument settings: Immediate (quick) Save/Recall
A defined set of instrument settings are saved or recalled quickly in just one step, without defining a filename or storage location. This function enables a fast switching between different instrument settings. Save/Recall in files with user-defined names The defined set of instrument settings are stored to a definable storage location. The file extension is *.savrcltxt. Settings files created in this way are visible in the file system and accessible with the supported methods for file handling.
In the general case, a recall process replaces the instruments settings with the saved values. An exception is the frequency and level settings. During recall of the instrument settings, it is possible to retain the current settings or to overwrite them with the stored values.
11.4.1 Save/Recall Settings
To access the dialog for storing and loading the complete instrument settings
1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall".
2. Select "Operation Mode > Save or Recall" to access the corresponding settings.
The provided settings for both operations are similar and closely related.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
311
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings
Settings:
Operation Mode.......................................................................................................... 312 Directory, File List and Filename................................................................................. 312 Recent files................................................................................................................. 313 Show SCPI List........................................................................................................... 313 SCPI List..................................................................................................................... 313 Save............................................................................................................................ 313 Save Immediate x....................................................................................................... 313 Exclude Frequency..................................................................................................... 313 Exclude Level..............................................................................................................314 Recall.......................................................................................................................... 314 Recall Immediate x......................................................................................................314 File Manager............................................................................................................... 314
Operation Mode Accesses the settings for storing ("Save") and loading ("Recall") of the instrument settings. Also, you can import SCPI-Files ("SCPI-Import") or export SCPI files ("SCPIExport").
See Chapter 11.6, "Exporting and Importing Remote Command Lists", on page 317.
Directory, File List and Filename Note: You access this generic standard function each time you perform one of the following: Save or load (settings) files Define a folder in that these files are saved Navigate through the file system.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
312
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings
The dialog name changes depending on the context. The provided functions are selfexplanatory and similar. Use the settings for example as follows: To navigate through the file system, use the directory tree. To create a file, load and save files, use the dedicated functions "New", "Select",
Save, and Recent files. To access the general data list editor, use the"Edit" button
(see also Chapter 7.7, "List Editor", on page 205). To perform standard file management functions, like create directories, move, copy,
delete files and/or directories, use the standard "File Manager" function (see Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318).
Remote command: To list all files in a directory: :MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 447 :MMEMory:CATalog? on page 446 [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? on page 621
Recent files Displays the files last used.
Show SCPI List Opens the "SCPI List", which lists the current settings of the R&S SMA100B as SCPI commands.
The R&S SMA100B provides this function for Operation Mode > SCPI-Export.
SCPI List Contains a list of all SCPI commands corresponding to the current instrument settings.
See also "How to create a SCPI list with the current instrument settings in one step" on page 420
Save Saves the current instrument settings under the defined filename.
Remote command: :MMEMory:STORe:STATe on page 451
Save Immediate x Stores the current instrument setting in one of the intermediate memories.
These instrument settings are retained until a different instrument setting is stored in the intermediate memory. When the instrument is switched off, the contents of the intermediate memories are retained.
Remote command: *SAV on page 438
Exclude Frequency The current frequency is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]:RCL on page 627
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
313
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings
Exclude Level The current level is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded. Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:RCL on page 669
Recall Restores the selected configuration. During recall, the instrument considers all related settings, for example sweeps in active state or lists. An error message indicates the settings which cannot be implemented. Remote command: :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe on page 449
Recall Immediate x Loads the selected configuration from one of the intermediate memories. A message appears if no instrument configuration is stored in this memory. Remote command: *RCL on page 438
File Manager Accesses the "File Manager" dialog, see Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318.
11.4.2 How to Save and Recall Instrument Settings
Instrument settings can be saved to a file and loaded again later, so that you can repeat the tests with the same settings.
To access and recall instrument setups quickly Assign the appropriate action to the [ (User)] key.
See Chapter 12.2.4, "How to Assign Actions to the [ (User)] Key", on page 348.
To save and recall instrument settings 1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "Operation Mode > Save". 2. Select "Save Immediate 1".
The instrument saves its settings in the intermediate memory 1. The filename and the storage location cannot be changed. 3. Adapt the instrument settings as required. Select "Save Immediate 2" 4. To restore the settings, select the "Operation Mode > Recall" 5. Select "Recall Immediate 1" The instrument is restored to the previous state. 6. Select "Recall Immediate 2" to switch to the settings stored in the second file.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
314
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Accessing Files with User Data
To save complete instrument settings
1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "Operation Mode > Save".
2. In the file selection dialog, select a filename and storage location for the settings file.
3. Select "Save".
A file with the defined name and path and the extension *.savrcltxt is created.
To restore instrument's configuration
Save the configuration as described in "To save complete instrument settings" on page 315.
1. To restore settings, select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "Operation Mode > Recall".
2. To retain the current frequency and level settings, enable "Save/Recall > Exclude Frequency/Level"
3. In the file selection dialog, select the filename and storage location of the settings file.
The settings are restored, but the frequency and level settings are retained; you can repeat the signal generation with the same settings. See also Chapter 11.2.3, "How to Recall User Settings Automatically after Preset", on page 309.
11.5 Accessing Files with User Data
Signal generation in list mode, the generation of pulse train signals or applying user correction values use data from list files. Whenever a list file is required as a data source, the instrument provides direct access to the standard "File Select" function. This function enables you to select, create and edit the list files.
11.5.1 File Select Settings
The "File Select" dialog opens automatically each time the signal generation requires list file as data source.
To access a loadable data list file 1. Select ""Sweep" > List Mode Data > List Mode = Data".
A "File Select" dialog for loading, creating and modifying a file is displayed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
315
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Accessing Files with User Data
Tip: The name of the dialog is context-sensitive and differs depending on the particular function this dialog is from. However, the provided functions are similar.
2. To load an existing file: Navigate through the file system. Select the file and confirm with "Select".
3. To create a file, for example if there is no data list file specified: Navigate through the file system. Select "New" and specify the filename.
A new empty file is created and saved in the selected folder.
4. To edit an existing or newly created file: Navigate through the file system. Select the file and select "Edit".
The standard "Data List Editor" dialog opens
5. Edit the file content. Confirm with "Save".
Settings:
Directory, File List and Filename................................................................................. 316 Functions for handling of data lists..............................................................................317 Recent files................................................................................................................. 317 File Manager............................................................................................................... 317
Directory, File List and Filename Note: You access this generic standard function each time you perform one of the following: Save or load (settings) files
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
316
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Exporting and Importing Remote Command Lists
Define a folder in that these files are saved Navigate through the file system.
The dialog name changes depending on the context. The provided functions are selfexplanatory and similar.
Use the settings for example as follows: To navigate through the file system, use the directory tree. To create a file, load and save files, use the dedicated functions "New", "Select",
Save, and Recent files. To access the general data list editor, use the"Edit" button
(see also Chapter 7.7, "List Editor", on page 205). To perform standard file management functions, like create directories, move, copy,
delete files and/or directories, use the standard "File Manager" function (see Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318).
Remote command: To list all files in a directory: :MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 447 :MMEMory:CATalog? on page 446 [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? on page 621
Functions for handling of data lists Provided are the following standard functions for file handling:
"Select"
Select and load the file.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect on page 655 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect on page 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] on page 620
"New"
Creates file with the specified "Filename". To confirm, select "OK"; use "Cancel" to undo the operation. To edit the file content, select "File Select > Edit".
"Edit"
Accesses the "Data List Editor" and loads the selected file for editing
Recent files Displays the files last used.
File Manager Accesses the "File Manager" dialog, see Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318.
11.6 Exporting and Importing Remote Command Lists
To set specific instrument settings or perform tasks automatically, you can create scripts or import scripts that contain the settings in the form of remote control command sequences.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
317
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Using the File Manager
The R&S SMA100B also offers a SCPI macro recorder with code generator that is used to record manual settings and create an executable script, see Chapter 13.8.4, "How to Record / Create SCPI Lists", on page 419.
Completed scripts are stored in files and possibly converted to different formats, depending on the used language of the source code.
The R&S SMA100B supports the following commonly used languages: Plain SCPI: *.txt MATLAB: *.m NICVI: *.c Python: *.py
It is also possible to convert the SCPI command list to a user-specific language, see Chapter 13.8.5, "How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists", on page 422.
11.7 Loading, Importing and Exporting Lists
The R&S SMA100B provides built-in editors for creating list files, for example for the list mode or lists with user correction data. You can also create or evaluate them with an external application. The instrument provides interfaces with the following functionality: Import and export list files in a standard ASCII format file
Lists are saved and loaded in the corresponding dialogs. For example, the user correction data list is created and stored in the "User Correction" dialog.
11.8 Using the File Manager
The "File Manager" is a tool similar to a standard Windows Explorer. It helps you manage mass storage media and files stored on the R&S SMA100B.
You can perform the following tasks: Copying multiple files from disk to other media
See Chapter 11.9, "How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument", on page 325 Copying files into another directory See Cut, Copy&Paste and Delete Renaming and deleting files Creating directories See Create New Directory Mapping shared network folders See Chapter 11.8.4, "How to Map a Network Folder", on page 322 Displaying saved files See Chapter 11.8.3, "How to Display All Saved Files", on page 322
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
318
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Using the File Manager
Access:
Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager".
Tip: Each "Save/Recall" dialog and each "File Select" dialog provides a quick access to the "File Manger", i.e. whenever you select data lists or files with user data.
The "File Manager" dialog provides all standard functions required for file management. It displays the contents of the selected folder on the R&S SMA100B and provides functions to rename, delete, copy, or move individual files.
11.8.1 File Manager Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager".
Settings: Map Network Share.................................................................................................... 320 File Type......................................................................................................................320 Directory and Filename............................................................................................... 320 Cut, Copy&Paste and Delete...................................................................................... 320 Rename ......................................................................................................................320 Create New Directory..................................................................................................320
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
319
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Using the File Manager
Map Network Share Accesses the Map Network Share Settings dialog where you can map one or more network folders. See also Chapter 11.8.4, "How to Map a Network Folder", on page 322.
File Type Selects the file type to be listed. If a file type with a specific file extension is selected, only files with this extension are listed. See Chapter A.3, "Extensions for User Files", on page 777 for an overview of the supported file extensions.
Directory and Filename Selects the directory in which the file to be deleted or copied is located. The dialog lists all files in this directory. Selected files are highlighted. The path is indicated above the directory tree. Unlike the "Save/Recall" and "File Select" dialogs, the "File Manager" displays the full filenames including extensions. Remote command: :MMEMory:CDIRectory on page 447
Cut, Copy&Paste and Delete Standard file management functions. Before a file is deleted, you have to confirm the delete operation. Remote command: :MMEMory:DELete on page 449 :MMEMory:COPY on page 447
Rename Renames the selected file or directory. Remote command: :MMEMory:MOVE on page 450
Create New Directory Creates a folder and opens an edit dialog box to enter name and path (absolute or relative to the current directory) of the new folder. Remote command: :MMEMory:MDIRectory on page 450
11.8.2 Map Network Share Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager > Map Network Share".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
320
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Using the File Manager
The "Map Network Share" dialog provides settings that are similar to the standard Windows Explorer function "Map network drive". These settings help you to create up to 10 "shortcuts" to shared folders or computers in the network.
The dialog displays a list of current mapped network folders. The directory tree of the "File Manager", "Save/Recall", and "File Select" dialogs indicate a mapped network folder as /shares/<"Local Folder">.
See also Chapter 11.8.4, "How to Map a Network Folder", on page 322.
Settings:
Network Folder............................................................................................................321 Local Folder................................................................................................................ 321 User Name.................................................................................................................. 322 Password.................................................................................................................... 322 Reconnect at Startup.................................................................................................. 322 Connect....................................................................................................................... 322 Change........................................................................................................................322 Disconnect.................................................................................................................. 322
Network Folder Enter the path of the folder or computer, e.g. //<IP Address>/user or //<server name>/user.
Local Folder Enter a letter or an alias name to describe the folder.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
321
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Using the File Manager
In the directory tree, a mapped network folder is indicated as /shares/ <"Local Folder">.
User Name Enter a user name of a user that has the permission to access the selected network folder.
Password Enter the password of the selected user.
Reconnect at Startup Enables reconnecting every time you start up the instrument.
Connect Triggers the instrument to prove the credential and to map (i.e. connect) the selected network folder or computer to the instrument. You can map up to 10 network folders.
Change Applies the changes.
Disconnect Disconnects the network drive.
11.8.3 How to Display All Saved Files
To display all files on the internal memory 1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager". 2. Navigate to /var/user/.
To display all files on a connected USB flash drive 1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager". 2. Navigate to /usb/.
To display all files in the volatile memory 1. Select "System Config > Save/Recall" > "File Manager". 2. Navigate to /var/volatile/.
11.8.4 How to Map a Network Folder
Possibly you would like to transfer instrument or user settings to another R&S SMA100B, distribute waveform files to several instruments or you have to access
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
322
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Using the File Manager
frequently the same network drive. In these cases, on a R&S SMA100B connected to a LAN you can create a shortcut to this network folder or this computer.
How to: see Chapter 13.6.3, "How To Connect to LAN", on page 400.
To map a network folder, proceed as follows:
1. On the computer or the network folder you want to map, enable remote access. You can specify a list of users allowed for remote access. The remote access settings depend on the operating system the remote computer is using. For step-by-step instructions, refer to the documentation of the particular operating system.
2. On the R&S SMA100B, enable file transfer via SMB (samba).
3. Select "System Config > Setup > Remote Access > Network". Select:
a) "Address Mode > Auto (DHCP)" b) Check that the "DNS Suffix" and "DNS Server" are correct.
4. In the "Save/Recall" dialog, select "File Manager > Map Network Share".
5. In the "Map Network Share" dialog, select:
a) In the "Network Folder" field, enter //<IP Address>/user or // <Server Name>/user.
b) In the "Local Folder" field, enter an alias name, e.g. setups. c) Enter the "User Name" and "Password" of a user with a remote access permis-
sion to the selected network folder. d) If necessary, enable "Reconnect at Startup". e) Select "Connect".
The selected network folder is mapped to your instrument. The list of mapped network folders is updated.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
323
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Using the File Manager
6. Close the "Map Network Share" dialog.
The navigation tree in the "File Manager" dialog displays the mapped network folder as /shares/Setups.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
324
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
If the connection does not succeed, consider to check the following: Is the network folder or computer you try to map turned on? Is the network folder or computer enabled for remote access? Does the selected user name have the necessary permissions?
See also Chapter 11.9.5, "Using a File Server for Test Files Exchange", on page 330.
11.9 How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
As explained in "File handling" on page 304, you access the file system of the R&S SMA100B via one of the following ways: Via the built-in "File Manager"
See Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318. On an instrument connected to a LAN:
Via one of the standard functions ftp or SMB (samba) See Chapter 11.9.2, "Accessing the File System of the R&S SMA100B via ftp", on page 327 and Chapter 11.9.3, "Accessing the R&S SMA100B File System via SMB (Samba)", on page 328
Via mapped network drives See Chapter 11.8.4, "How to Map a Network Folder", on page 322.
Via a connected USB storage device See Chapter 11.9.4, "Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer", on page 330
Mainly because of security reasons, the access to the file system of your R&S SMA100B can be denied, because one or all these access methods are deliberately disabled. Access to the file system via LAN and/or USB requires that the corresponding service is enabled and a write access to the file system is enabled. Refer to Chapter 11.9.1, "Removing File System Protection", on page 325 for description of the required steps.
This section provides an introduction to the topic. For comprehensive information, refer to the application note 1GP72: Connectivity of Rohde&Schwarz Signal Generators.
Removing File System Protection......................................................................... 325 Accessing the File System of the R&S SMA100B via ftp......................................327 Accessing the R&S SMA100B File System via SMB (Samba)............................. 328 Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer......................................................330 Using a File Server for Test Files Exchange......................................................... 330
11.9.1 Removing File System Protection
Before you try to access the file system via ftp, SMB (samba) or USB, fulfill the following: Disable write protection on the file system
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
325
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
Enable the corresponding service or interface
To enable write permission on the file system 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > General" 2. Enable "Volatile Mode" 3. Enter the "Security Password".
The default password is 123456. For more information, see Chapter 12.4, "Using the Security Settings", on page 353. 4. Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Shut Down" 5. Select "Reboot". The system reboots. The enabled settings are active.
To enable file transfer via ftp 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services". 2. Enable "LAN Interface" 3. Enable "FTP" 4. Enter the "Security Password".
The default password is 123456. For more information, refer to Chapter 12.4, "Using the Security Settings", on page 353. 5. Select "Accept".
To enable file transfer via SMB (samba) 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services" 2. Enable "LAN Interface" 3. Enable "SMB (Samba)" 4. Enter the "Security Password".
The default password is 123456. For more information, refer to Chapter 12.4, "Using the Security Settings", on page 353. 5. Select "Accept".
To enable file transfer via USB 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > General" 2. Enable "USB Storage" 3. Enter the "Security Password".
The default password is 123456. For more information, refer to Chapter 12.4, "Using the Security Settings", on page 353. 4. Select "Accept".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
326
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
11.9.2 Accessing the File System of the R&S SMA100B via ftp
If the R&S SMA100B is connected to a LAN, you can use file transfer protocol (ftp) to access the file system and to transfer files from and to the instrument.
How to: see Chapter 13.6.3, "How To Connect to LAN", on page 400.
To access the file system via ftp
We assume that the instrument and the remote PC are connected to a LAN.
1. Enable file transfer via ftp
2. Enable write permission on the file system
3. On the remote PC, start the Windows Explorer.
4. In the address field, enter ftp://<"IP Address" of the Instrument>, e.g. ftp://10.124.0.166. Tip: The R&S SMA100B indicates its IP address on the home screen. A log-on dialog opens and requests a password. The default user name and password is instrument. Tip: Default password The FTP and SAMBA file access use the user "instrument" with default password "instrument". We recommend that you change this password in the "Setup > Security > Password Management > Change User Password" dialog before connecting the instrument to the network. See Chapter 12.4.4, "Password Management", on page 363.
5. Enter the password to access the user directory. The user directory corresponds to the /var/user/ directory of the instrument.
There, you can perform standard functions like creating directory, or saving files. 6. In the user directory, create a directory, e.g. test ftp. 7. Select "System Config > Save/Recall".
Open the /var/user/ directory. The dialog displays the /var/user/test ftp directory.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
327
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
11.9.3 Accessing the R&S SMA100B File System via SMB (Samba)
The SMB (Samba) protocol is an alternative way to access the file system of the instrument from a remote PC. This protocol works if both the instrument and the PC are connected to a LAN. How to: see Chapter 13.6.3, "How To Connect to LAN", on page 400.
To access the file system via SMB We assume that the instrument and the remote PC are connected to a LAN. 1. Enable file transfer via ftp 2. Enable write permission on the file system 3. On the remote PC, start the Windows Explorer. 4. In the address field, enter //<"IP Address" of the Instrument>, e.g. ftp://
10.124.0.166.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
328
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
Tip: The R&S SMA100B indicates its IP address on the home screen.
The user directory corresponds to the /var/user/ directory of the instrument; the volatile directory - to the /var/volatile directory.
To map the R&S SMA100B as a network drive to the remote PC
We assume that the instrument and the remote PC are connected to a LAN.
1. Enable file transfer via SMB (Samba)
2. Enable write permission on the file system
3. On the remote PC, start the Windows Explorer. Open the "Map Network Drive" dialog.
a) Select a valid "Drive", e.g. W. b) In the "Folder" field, enter //<"IP Address" of the Instrument>/user
or //<"Hostname" of the Instrument>/user For example: //10.124.0.166/user or //SMA100B-102030/user. Tip: The R&S SMA100B indicates its IP address on the screen. c) Select "Finish".
A log-on dialog opens and requests a user name and a password.
The default user name and password is instrument. Tip: Default password The FTP and SAMBA file access use the user "instrument" with default password "instrument". We recommend that you change this password in the "Setup > Security > Password Management > Change User Password" dialog before connecting the instrument to the network. See Chapter 12.4.4, "Password Management", on page 363.
4. Enter the user name and the password of your instrument.
The /var/user/ directory of the instrument is mapped to and displayed as a network drive of the remote PC.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
329
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument
You can access the files in the /var/user/ directory, perform standard function like creating directory, or storing files.
11.9.4 Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer
Alternatively to the file transfer possibility via LAN, you can use a USB storage device for direct file transfer from and to the instrument. We recommend that you transfer files with user data (like lists or instrument setup files) to the instrument, rather than load and play them from a connected USB storage device.
To transfer a file with user data to the instrument 1. Connect a USB storage device, for example a USB memory stick to one of the
USB interfaces of the instrument. The R&S SMA100B recognizes the connected USB storage device automatically.
2. Enable file transfer via USB
3. Enable write permission on the file system
4. Select "System Config > Save/Recall". The dialog displays the /var/user/ directory and the /usb/ drive.
5. In the "Save/Recall" dialog, select "File Manager".
6. In the directory tree, navigate to the /usb/ drive. Select the required file with user data.
7. Select "Copy".
8. In the directory tree, navigate to the /var/user/ directory. Select "Paste". The file with user data is transferred to the instrument.
11.9.5 Using a File Server for Test Files Exchange
You can use a central file storage location like a file server in your company network to store setup files, SCPI scripts, application programs, or waveform files on it. Usually, you would like to distribute the files to several instruments. If the R&S SMA100Bs are connected to a LAN, you can create a shortcut on the instruments to the file server.
To access the file server
1. On each R&S SMA100B, map the required directory of the file server to the instrument. Perform the steps described in Chapter 11.8.4, "How to Map a Network Folder", on page 322.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
330
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
2. On each R&S SMA100B, use the same alias name for the directory of the file server, i.e. enter the same "Local Folder" (in this example Setups).
On any of the R&S SMA100B, you access the file server directly from the "File Manager" and under the same name, e.g. /shares/Setups. An extra advantage in remote control is that the same application program would control the instruments. For example, use the remote control command MMEMory:CDIRectory "/shares/Setups" to set the default directory for mass storage.
11.10 Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
The save/recall function enables you to save current settings in a file. To document the most important settings for a performed signal generation, you can also save a hardcopy of the current display. Hardcopy Settings.................................................................................................331 How to Save a Hardcopy of the Display................................................................335
11.10.1 Hardcopy Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > User Interface > Hardcopy".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
331
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.11, "HCOPy Subsystem", on page 468.
Settings:
File.............................................................................................................................. 332 Format......................................................................................................................... 332 Options........................................................................................................................ 332 Save............................................................................................................................ 332 Hardcopy Options > Common.....................................................................................332
Automatic Naming.........................................................................................333 Format...........................................................................................................333 Region...........................................................................................................333 Hardcopy Options > Automatic Naming...................................................................... 333 Path...............................................................................................................334 Clear Path..................................................................................................... 334 Prefix, Year, Month, Day............................................................................... 334 Current Auto Number....................................................................................334
File... In "Automatic Naming > Off" mode, accesses the standard file select dialog for selecting the filename and folder the hardcopy is stored in.
If you have enabled "Automatic Naming", the instrument displays the automatically generated filename.
Remote command: :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME] on page 470
Format Selects the output file format, for example *.bmp, *.jpg*.xpm and *.png. Remote command: :HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat on page 470 :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 470
Options... Accesses Hardcopy Options dialog.
Save Saves a hardcopy of the current display as a file.
Remote command: :HCOPy[:EXECute] on page 471
Hardcopy Options > Common Access: select "Hardcopy > Options... > Common".
With the provided settings, you can customize the file format and the syntax of the automatically assigned filename.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
332
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
Automatic Naming Hardcopy Options > Common If enabled, creates the output filenames automatically according to the rules set with the Hardcopy Options > Automatic Naming settings. Remote command: :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe on page 472
Format Hardcopy Options > Common Selects the output file format, for example *.bmp, *.jpg*.xpm and *.png. Remote command: :HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat on page 470 :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage on page 470
Region Hardcopy Options > Common Displays the snapshot area. Remote command: :HCOPy:REGion on page 470
Hardcopy Options > Automatic Naming Access: select "Hardcopy > Options... > Automatic Naming".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
333
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
Provided are the following settings:
Path... Hardcopy Options > Automatic Naming Selects the directory.
Note: To select the destination path, specify also a filename. Otherwise an error message is displayed and selection is canceled.
Remote command: :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory on page 471
Clear Path Hardcopy Options > Automatic Naming Deletes all image files with extensions *.bmp, *.jpg, *.png and *.xmp in the directory set for automatic naming.
Before the command is executed, a warning message prompts you to confirm the deletion of the files.
Remote command: :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar on page 472
Prefix, Year, Month, Day Hardcopy Options > Automatic Naming Determines the rules for "Automatic Naming".
Per default, the automatically generated filename is composed of:
<Path>/<Prefix><YYYY><MM><DD><Number>.<Format>, where Y, M and D mean year, month, Day; Number is the Current Auto Number.
You can activate or deactivate each component separately.
The "Resulting filename" indicates the current filename syntax.
Remote command: :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix on page 473 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe on page 473 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe on page 472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe on page 472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe on page 472
Current Auto Number Hardcopy Options > Automatic Naming Indicates the number which is used in the automatically generated filename.
Note: When initially switching on the instrument, the number is reset to the lowest possible value. Starting with number 0 the output directory is scanned for existing files. As long as files with the same name are existing, the number is increased by 1. The number is automatically set so that the resulting filename is unique within the selected path. The current number is not in the save/recall file but is temporarily stored within the database. At the following save operation, the number is increased.
Remote command: :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer? on page 473
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
334
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
11.10.2 How to Save a Hardcopy of the Display
1. Select "System Config > Setup > User Interface > Hardcopy".
2. To define the output format, select "Format > JPG".
3. To enable the instrument to create output filenames, select "Automatic Naming > On".
4. Select "Options...".
5. In the "Hardcopy Options" dialog:
a) To change the default directory the file is saved in, select "Automatic Naming Settings > Path" and define a path and a filename. For example, select the default directory /var/user.
b) If necessary, disable or change some of the parameters in the "Automatic Naming Settings".
c) Close the "Hardcopy Options" dialog.
6. In the "Hardcopy" dialog, select "Save".
The instrument saves a hardcopy of the current instrument display as a *.jpg file. The filename is automatically created.
7. To print the hardcopy, connect the instrument to a LAN and:
a) Transfer the file to a remote computer as described in Chapter 11.9, "How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument", on page 325.
b) On the remote computer, navigate through the file system.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
335
R&S®SMA100B
File and Data Management Creating Screenshots of Current Settings
c) Print the selected file. For more information, refer to the online help of the operating system.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
336
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Customizing the User Interface
12 General Instrument Functions
The general instrument functions include basic instrument settings, regardless of the selected operating mode and measurement. Some of these settings like screen display and peripherals are initially configured at the setup of the instrument, according to personal preferences and requirements. However, you can individually adjust the settings at any time, for example, if necessary for specific applications.
The following special functions help you in service and basic system configuration:
Chapter 12.1, "Customizing the User Interface", on page 337 Allows you to adjust the display and keyboard language settings.
Chapter 12.2, "Organizing Frequently Used Settings as Favorites", on page 342 Enables you to group user defined settings in a favorites list or to assign actions to the [ (User)] as quick access for later retrieval.
Chapter 12.3, "Managing Licenses and License Keys", on page 349 If you have purchased an additional option for the R&S SMA100B, you can enable it using a license key.
Chapter 11.2, "Restoring the (Default) Instrument Configuration", on page 305 At any time, you can restore a default configuration to start a measurement at a defined instrument state, or set the instrument to factory preset.
Chapter 17.3, "Performing Maintenance Tasks", on page 739 Special functions like calibration routines and self-tests put your instrument to an initial state.
Chapter 12.4, "Using the Security Settings", on page 353 Special security and protection functions protect your instrument from unauthorized use or activate specific test routines.
12.1 Customizing the User Interface
The R&S SMA100B provides basic alignments of instrument settings regarding the user interface, that means the touch panel (screen), the appearance of the displayed dialogs and graphics, and an external keyboard.
Start / stop display update
The operating system of the R&S SMA100B refreshes the displayed settings by default in almost real-time, to keep the display updated with the internally used values. However, you can turn off this function to reduce settling times when the instrument is remote controlled.
We recommend that you switch off the display update for optimum sweep performance with short dwell times and for fast settling times. Consider that in this case the displayed values can differ from the operated values.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
337
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Customizing the User Interface
In detail described in the following paragraphs, you can:
Set display and keyboard language, see Chapter 12.1.1, "Display and Keyboard Settings", on page 338
Set date and time for the system clock, see Chapter 17.3.1, "Date and Time", on page 739
Configure and activate a Screen Saver
Deactivate display update to improve performance, see Chapter 12.1.2, "Display Update Settings", on page 339
Determine the state of the RF signal, and the level display in the status bar when you turn on the R&S SMA100B, see Chapter 12.1.3, "Defining the RF Signal State On Power On ", on page 340.
12.1.1 Display and Keyboard Settings
Access: 1. Select "System Config > Setup > User Interface > Display/Keyboard > Display".
2. Select "Display/Keyboard > USB Keyboard".
In the "Display/Keyboard" dialog, you can change regional and language options for the GUI and an external keyboard, and define the screen saver settings.
The remote commands required to configure the display and keyboard are described in Chapter 14.9, "DISPlay Subsystem", on page 462 and Chapter 14.12, "KBOard Subsystem", on page 473.
Screen Saver.............................................................................................................. 339 Wait Time.................................................................................................................... 339 Display........................................................................................................................ 339 RF Hardkey................................................................................................................. 339 USB Keyboard > Layout..............................................................................................339
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
338
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Customizing the User Interface
Screen Saver Activates the screensaver. If activated, the display including backlight is switched off after the selected Wait Time elapses and if no entries via touch panel, front panel, external mouse, or external keyboard are made Remote command: :DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] on page 464
Wait Time Enters the idle time that must elapse before the display lamp is shut off when no entries are made. Remote command: :DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff on page 463
Display Adjusts the brightness of the display. Increase the value to turn up the display brightness. Remote command: :DISPlay:BRIGhtness on page 464
RF Hardkey Adjusts the brightness of the [RF on/off] key. Increase the value to change the contrast between the key and the front panel background color. Remote command: :DISPlay:BUTTon:BRIGhtness on page 464
USB Keyboard > Layout Selects the language of an externally connected keyboard via USB. The function assigns the corresponding keys automatically. Remote command: :KBOard:LAYout on page 474
12.1.2 Display Update Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > User Interface > Start/Stop Display Update".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
339
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Customizing the User Interface
This dialog enables you, to deactivate updating the display.
The remote command to switch off the display update is described in Chapter 14.9, "DISPlay Subsystem", on page 462.
Display Update is Disables the automatic refreshing of the displayed values. Remote command: :DISPlay:UPDate on page 464
12.1.3 Defining the RF Signal State On Power On
As additional functions for the level settings, you can determine the state of the RF signal, and the level display in the status bar when you turn on the R&S SMA100B.
Power-On/EMF settings
Access: Select "Level" > "Power-On / EMF".
The "Power-On/EMF" dialog contains all settings for configuring the power-on behavior and the level display.
Settings:
Power-On State ..........................................................................................................340 Display Level as Voltage of EMF ............................................................................... 340
Power-On State Determines the RF signal output state when the instrument is switched on. You can disable the RF output signal in general, or start it in the same state as it had been when it was switched off. Remote command: :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON on page 475
Display Level as Voltage of EMF Activates display of the signal level as voltage of the EMF (no-load voltage). If disabled, the level is displayed as a voltage over a 50 Ohm load. Note:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
340
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Customizing the User Interface
The setting is not affected by an instrument preset ([Preset] key or *RST) and the "Save/Recall" function. It is reset only by factory preset.
Remote command: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:EMF:STATe on page 664
12.1.4 How to Set the Initial Instrument Settings
This section describes how to set up the R&S SMA100B initially.
12.1.4.1 Setting the Keyboard Language You can select the language of the external keyboard connected to the instrument. To adjust the keyboard settings 1. Press the [Setup] key. 2. Select "User Interface > Keyboard".
3. Select the "Layout". The dialog closes and the changes take effect immediately.
12.1.4.2 Setting the Screen Saver
You can enable a screen saver that automatically turns off the display after a userdefined period of time. The screen saver is activated if no settings are made on the touch screen, or via keys or the rotary knob during the selected wait time.
To activate the screen saver 1. Press the [Setup] key. 2. Select "User Interface > Display" 3. Activate the "Screen Saver".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
341
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Organizing Frequently Used Settings as Favorites
4. Define the "Wait Time" in minutes. The instrument turns off the display after the defined period of time.
5. To reactivate the display, tap the screen or press any key on the front panel.
To deactivate the screen saver 1. Press the [Setup] key. 2. Select "User Interface > Display" 3. Disable the "Screen Saver" state.
12.2 Organizing Frequently Used Settings as Favorites
The R&S SMA100B provides two possibilities to define frequently used settings and procedures for later retrieval individually.
User menu and [ (User)] key These two functions work similar to the favorites function of a browser or other programs. They allow you to create a list of frequently used actions or to group frequently used settings in one dialog. You can collect the parameters of your configuration in a favorites list, i.e. in the "User Menu", or define settings and actions with the [ (User)] key: "User Menu" to group settings of specific tasks.
Similar to a favorites function, you can use this menu for: Grouping the settings required for a task in one dialog. Saving and recalling the settings of a task. Transferring the settings for use on multiple instruments. [ (User)] key, with customizable function. You can perform the following steps using this key: Open the "User Menu" (default functionality). Add or remove settings and functions. Execute actions and access functions.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
342
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Organizing Frequently Used Settings as Favorites
Possible applications
The (User) key and the "User Menu" are useful for the following situations: There are functions or tasks you have to perform in a defined order but the setting
parameters are distributed across several dialogs. There are functions or tasks you have to perform frequently but they are not acces-
sible via the front panel keys. The required functions are grouped in a dialog that is not directly accessible from
the home screen. Your task involves the frequently loading and executing of certain SCPI scripts.
Refer to Chapter 13.8.4, "How to Record / Create SCPI Lists", on page 419 for information on how to create an SCPI script. A quick access to saved setups is required. There are functions and tasks you have to perform on several instruments.
Dialog identification
To identify each dialog, the instrument uses a dedicated dialog ID. The dialog ID contains the dialog position on the display and the current active tab. The action that triggers the instrument to open a dialog uses this identification.
Save/Recall vs. recall setup
If you need to restore a specific signal generation setup and perform further configurations based on this particular instrument state, the R&S SMA100B provides two options: "Save/Recall" function
For a detailed description, refer to Chapter 11.4, "Saving and Recalling Instrument Settings", on page 311. "Recall Setup" function If the "Recall Setup" is the only user action assigned to the [ (User)] key, pressing this key triggers the R&S SMA100B to load the user-defined preset file immediately.
12.2.1 User Menu Settings
The "User Menu" dialog contains function keys to organize, save and load a favorites list. You can also modify, add or delete list entries directly in the dialog.
Clear User Menu Removes all entries from the "User Menu" at once.
Save User Menu Saves the current "User Menu" under the defined filename.
Recall User Menu Loads the selected "User Menu" file.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
343
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Organizing Frequently Used Settings as Favorites
This function enables you to use the user specific favorites file on another instrument. However, if functions or parameters are not provided due to varying configuration of the instrument, the settings of these particular parameters take no effect.
12.2.2 How To Use the User Menu for Fast Adjustments
Access: 1. Press the [ (User)] key.
The "User Menu" dialog opens.
If you execute this action for the first time, the dialog displays instructions on how to use the "User Menu". 2. If you already have a saved user menu file on the instrument, you can load with "Recall User Menu".
Creating a "User Menu" To create your own user dialog with settings: 1. Open a dialog with settings you frequently use. 2. Select a parameter. 3. Open the context menu and select "Add to User Menu".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
344
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Organizing Frequently Used Settings as Favorites
A favorites icon indicates that the parameter is used in the "User Menu".
The "User Menu" button in the taskbar confirms that you have created a "User Menu" with at least one entry. 4. Press the [ (User)] key. The "User Menu" dialog shows all parameters that you have added to the list.
You can modify the parameter settings directly in this dialog, e.g .change a state or set values, as you do in the particular dialog the parameter originally belongs to.
5. To remove an entry, select the parameter either in the "User Menu" or in the dialog where it originally belongs to.
a) Open the context menu and select "Remove from User Menu".
6. To remove all entries at once, select "Clear User Menu".
7. To save your individual favorites list, select "Save User Menu", and follow the file managing instructions. The file system automatically assigns the file extension *.user_menu.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
345
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Organizing Frequently Used Settings as Favorites
8. To recall a previously saved user menu, select "Recall User Menu" and proceed accordingly.
Providing a user menu favorites list for several instruments To transfer files from or to an instrument: 1. Create the favorites list, as described in "Creating a "User Menu"" on page 344. 2. Save the favorites list. 3. To tansfer a file from or to an instrument, the R&S SMA100B provides several
options, see "File handling" on page 304.
12.2.3 Define User Key Actions Settings
Access: Select "System Configuration > Setup > User Interface > Define User Key".
The dialog displays a list of the currently enabled actions and provides functions to define new, edit or remove existing actions. If no actions have been defined, the list is empty. See Chapter 12.2.4, "How to Assign Actions to the [ (User)] Key", on page 348.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.9, "DISPlay Subsystem", on page 462.
Name Enters a user-defined name for the action.
Wizard Defines the action to be executed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
346
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Organizing Frequently Used Settings as Favorites
"Load SCPI Script" Selecting the action load and executes the SCPI script.
"Recall Setup" Load a setup for quick access to the user-defined settings. "Open Dialog"
Quick access to the selected dialog.
Select Depending on the selected "Wizard", provides access to: The standard "File Select" function for loading of an SCPI script or setup file A list of the dialog IDs of all currently opened dialogs. The dialog ID is used for dia-
log identification in the remote control. See SCPI.
SCPI For the currently selected action, displays the corresponding SCPI command with the associated parameter for dialog identification (dialog ID). The automatically displayed SCPIs are enabled for subsequent modification. Remote command: :DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN on page 466 See also :DISPlay:DIALog:ID? on page 465
Add, Change, Remove Standard functions for managing of the actions.
Back to Execute Mode Opens the "Select Action to Execute" dialog. Select an Action form the list to execute it. To return to the "Define User Key Actions" dialogs, select Select Action to Execute > Define Actions.
Select Action to Execute > Define Actions
Accesses the "Define User Key Actions" dialog.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
347
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Organizing Frequently Used Settings as Favorites
12.2.4 How to Assign Actions to the [ (User)] Key
The customizable [ (User)] key has no predefined function assigned. You can individually define actions to be executed or functions to be accessed when pressing this key.
To assign a frequently used dialog to the [ (User)] key:
1. Open the dialog you want to quickly access. For example, select "Level > UCOR > Import/Export"
2. Select "System Configuration > Setup > User Interface > Define User Key".
3. To create an action: a) Specify the "Name". E.g. OpenUcorImportExportList. b) Select "Wizard > Open Dialog" c) Select "Select" and select the dialog ID from the list The corresponding SCPI command is automatically displayed and can be later modified.
4. Select "Add" to store the new action in the list of user key actions.
5. To execute the created action, press (User). In the list of actions ("Select Action to Execute" dialog), navigate to the required action. In this example, this is "OpenUCORImportExportList".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
348
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Managing Licenses and License Keys
The R&S SMA100B executes the action and opens the dialog.
12.3 Managing Licenses and License Keys
An option is ready to operate after it is enabled with a license keycode supplied with the option. The license key is delivered as a file or on paper. Unregistered licenses must be registered for a particular instrument before the corresponding option can be enabled for operation.
For reliable operation, a software option usually requires the latest firmware version. The required version is specified in the delivery. If your instrument works with a former firmware version, update the firmware before enabling the software option. The firmware update is described in the R&S SMA100B service manual.
12.3.1 Manage License Keys Settings
This dialog is the central dialog for licenses registration and performing the required instrument-related steps during the process of unregistration.
Access: 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys >
Manage License Keys".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
349
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Managing Licenses and License Keys
2. Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > Installed License Keys".
In the "New License" tab, you can activate licenses for newly purchased or newly registered options. The "Installed License Keys" tab enables you to cancel already registered options, or move licenses.
Settings
Device ID.....................................................................................................................350 Enter License Key....................................................................................................... 351 Import License Key from File...................................................................................... 351 Export Deactivation Response to File......................................................................... 351 License Installation Info...............................................................................................351 Installed License Keys................................................................................................ 351
Show Inactive................................................................................................351 Show Deactivated......................................................................................... 351 Installed License Keys Table.........................................................................351
Device ID Displays the instrument-specific identification number. The device ID is a unique string with the following structure:
<stock number>-<serial number>-<checksum>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
350
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Managing Licenses and License Keys
Enter License Key Type here the license key provided with the option.
For license keys delivered as a file, use Import License Key from File....
Import License Key from File... Opens a dialog for selecting the file with the license key.
Use this function also to import the deactivation key file generated by the R&S License Manager online tool (see How to Move a Portable License).
Export Deactivation Response to File... Exports the generated deactivation response key to a file and opens a file management dialog to save the file.
This key is required during the unregistration process, e.g. when you want to deinstall an option or have a portable option, which you want to register later on another instrument (see How to Move a Portable License).
License Installation Info Indicates status information on the performed actions.
Installed License Keys Access: select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > Installed License Keys".
Comprises information on the installed options.
Show Inactive Installed License Keys Enables the display of the inactive (expired) licenses in the Installed License Keys Table.
Show Deactivated Installed License Keys Enables the display of the deactivated licenses in the Installed License Keys Table.
See How to Move a Portable License for information on how to activate deactivated licenses.
Installed License Keys Table Installed License Keys Shows information on the currently installed options.
"Export License Key to File" Opens a dialog to save the generated license key file. This file is required during the unregistration process. If you have a portable unregistered option, you can register it later on another instrument (see How to Move a Portable License).
"Option"
Displays the option short designation. Tip: Open the Hardware Options/Software Options dialog to retrieve more information about the installed options.
"License Count" Displays the number of the licenses for the selected option key.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
351
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Managing Licenses and License Keys
"License Type" "Registrations"
Displays the type of license. A license type determines the common qualification application duration and the portability of a license. The following license types are provided: evaluation, permanent, portable, quantified, time-controlled with a duration of 1, 3, 6 or 12 months. A license can also be deactivated or expired. For time limited licenses, the left time of applicability is displayed too.
(reserved for future use)
12.3.2 How to Move a Portable License
This example is intended to explain how to perform the required steps at the instrument. Use a USB flash drive to transfer the license key files between the instruments and the browser.
We assume knowledge about the handling of the R&S License Manager online tool and the description of the whole process.
1. Open your browser. Enter https://extranet.rohde-schwarz.com/service. Select "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License". The first step requires the Device IDs of the source and target instruments.
2. To find out the Device IDs, proceed as follows: a) On the source instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > Manage License Keys > Device ID".
b) On the target instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > New License > Device ID".
c) In the browser, select "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License > Select Devices" and enter the Device IDs.
3. On the source instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > Installed License Keys > License Keys Table". Navigate to the portable license you want to move. Select the "Export License to File" column.
A standard file manager dialog opens.
4. Enter a filename. Save the exported license key, e.g. k123_portable_key_to_move.xml.
5. In the browser, select "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License > Select License (from file)" and select the exported license key.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
352
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
Check the selection. Create the deactivation key. Save it to file.
6. On the source instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > Manage License Keys > Import License Keys from File". Select the transferred deactivation key.
7. On the source instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > Manage License Keys > Export Deactivation Response to File".
8. In the browser, go to "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License > Install Deactivation Key (from file)". Enter the deactivation response of the instrument.
The license is deactivated for the source instrument.
9. In the "Manage Licenses > Move Portable License", go to step "Create License" to generate a license key for this portable option and the selected target instrument. Download the license key as a file. Transfer it to the target instrument.
10. In the target instrument, select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Manage License Keys > New License > Import License Keys from File". Select the created license key file.
The portable option is installed on the target instrument.
12.4 Using the Security Settings
The protection function of the R&S SMA100B offers several levels to activate particular functions like self-test or tests for service purposes specifically.
Protection The five protection levels are automatically active on startup, the protection levels, that means all protected functions are locked.
To unlock a protection level: In the "System Config > Setup > Security > Protection", enter the correct password.
To lock a protection level: Clear the corresponding checkbox.
Protection levels The following functions are protected in the respective levels: Protection level 1
Protects against accidental changes, like, for example, the clock and date, several internal adjustments functions and the self-test, as well as network settings or the instrument hostname. You can access this level with the password 123456.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
353
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
Protection level 2 Unlocks protected service functions. It is accessible to authorized personnel of Rohde & Schwarz service department only.
Protection level 3 to 5 Are reserved for internal use.
Security
The security concept of the R&S SMA100B helps you to protect your instrument against uncontrolled access and changes. All provided security services require that you enter the security password.
Provided security services are:
General security parameters, such as:
USB storage that secures controlled access to the mass memory of the instrument
Volatile mode that prevents information to be written to the internal memory permanently.
Sanitizing that prevents the instrument from leaving a secure environment with stored user information.
Annotation frequency and amplitude prevent reading the display.
Secure Update Policy check that verifies the integrity and origin of the firmware package to be installed. To access the settings of these topics, see Setting Security Parameters > "Secure Update Policy" on page 356.
Password management secures controlled user access to the instrument With the two-step password concept, you can assign a user-defined password for the operating system, and a security password for accessing the mass storage of the instrument. See also Chapter 12.4.4, "Password Management", on page 363.
LAN services secure controlled network access You can individually lock and unlock supported LAN interface services. Also you can activate and deactivate SMB client and SMB server, that use versions 1.0 and 2.0 of the SMB protocol. See Chapter 12.4.3, "Configuring LAN Services", on page 361. Remote control via LAN interface requires that the interface is activated, but you can enable the required services specifically.
User interface prevents front panel operation and/or reading the display.
For more information, see the document R&S SMA100B Instrument Security Procedures.
12.4.1 Protection Level Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Protection".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
354
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
The "Protection" dialog provides access to the unlocking of different protection levels. Several functions in the instrument are password-protected to prevent for example accidental changes, "Protection" on page 353.
The remote commands required to unlock a protected stage are described in Chapter 14.17, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 690.
Protection Level/Password Unlocks the selected level of protection, if you enter the correct password. The default protection level 1 password is 123456. To lock the protection level again, clear the checkbox. Remote command: :SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe] on page 698
12.4.2 Setting Security Parameters
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > General".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
355
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
In the "General" tab, you can determine the security level for firmware updates, and configure the security settings for the mass memory and manual operation.
All modified settings in this dialog are not applied until you enter the Security Password and confirm with Accept.
12.4.2.1 Update Policy Security Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > General > SW Update".
The SW Update tab enables you to select the security mode for firmware updates.
The remote commands available to control security settings are described in Chapter 14.17, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 690.
Secure Update Policy Allows you to configure the automatic signature verification for firmware installation. To apply the change: enter the security password and confirm with "Accept". Otherwise the change has no effect.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
356
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
See also: Chapter 12.4, "Using the Security Settings", on page 353 for more information on
the security concept. The release notes for details on signature verification when installing new or former
firmware versions, available at www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/sma100b.
"Confirm Unsigned" Performs the signature verification. If the check detects any discrepancies, the instrument issues a warning message. You can still update the firmware or reject updating. This setting also enables you to downgrade the firmware version.
"All Packages" Accepts all packages without signature verification.
"R&S Signed Packages" Performs the signature check. If the check detects any discrepancies, the instrument issues a warning message and locks the update to this firmware.
Remote command: :SYSTem:SECurity:SUPolicy on page 707
12.4.2.2 Disk & Memory Security Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > General > Disk & Memory".
The "Disk & Memory" tab secures controlled access to the mass memory and prevents information from leaving a secure environment.
The remote commands available to control security settings are described in Chapter 14.17, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 690.
USB Storage Activates the access to external USB storage media. To apply the change: enter the security password and confirm with "Accept". Otherwise the change has no effect. See also Chapter 11.9.4, "Using a USB Storage Device for File Transfer", on page 330.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
357
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
Note: Remove all USB memory devices before disabling the USB storage. If any USB memory device remains connected, disabling is blocked, and the instrument returns a warning message. The microSD card is also considered a USB memory device and must be removed. If you have sealed the SD card slot, you can not disable the USB storage.
Volatile Mode Activates volatile mode, so that no user data can be written on the internal memory permanently.
In volatile mode: Data that the instrument normally stores on the internal memory is redirected to
volatile memory. The user directory is mapped to the volatile memory. You access the temporary
data just as data stored in the /var/user/, see Chapter 11.3, "Protecting Data", on page 310. Data on the internal memory cannot be changed. It is protected against modification or erasure. You can only save data: Temporarily in the volatile memory On a connected external storage device, such as a memory stick
To activate volatile mode: enter the security password, confirm with "Accept" and reboot the instrument. Otherwise the change has no effect.
Activated volatile mode is indicated by the icon .
Remote command: :SYSTem:SECurity:VOLMode[:STATe] on page 699
Sanitize Executes the erase procedure that sanitizes the internal memory.
If the instrument is subject to high security, and you have not enabled the volatile mode, the internal flash memory holds user-data, i.e. it poses a security risk. The sanitizing function makes sure that no user information is stored on the instrument when it leaves the secure environment.
To apply the change: enter the security password and confirm with "Accept". Otherwise the change has no effect.
See also Chapter 12.4, "Using the Security Settings", on page 353 for more information on the security concept.
Remote command: :SYSTem:SECurity:SANitize[:STATe] on page 707
12.4.2.3 Manual Operation Security Settings
Access:
Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > General > Manual Operation".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
358
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
The "SW Update" tab enables you to lock front panel operation and/or reading the display.
The remote commands available to control security settings are described in: Chapter 14.9, "DISPlay Subsystem", on page 462 Chapter 14.17, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 690.
Annotation Frequency Enables the display of the currently used frequency in the status bar.
How to: see "Disabling the frequency and level indication in the status bar" on page 367.
Remote command: :DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency on page 465
Annotation Amplitude Enables the display of the currently selected level in the status bar.
How to: see "Disabling the frequency and level indication in the status bar" on page 367.
Remote command: :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude on page 465
User Interface Allows you to lock the controls for manual operation and the display individually.
How to: see "Deactivating the user interface" on page 367.
See also Chapter 12.4, "Using the Security Settings", on page 353.
"Enabled"
Enables the display and all controls for the manual operation of the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
359
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
"Touchscreen Off" Locks the touch sensitivity of the screen. This security feature protects the instrument against unintentional change of settings by accidentally touching of the screen.
Still available controls for manual operation are: The keys at the front panel, including the rotary knob The external mouse and keyboard Remote operation over VNC
The instrument indicates the locked touchscreen by an icon . Unlocking is possible via VNC, external controls or remote control.
"VNC Only"
Locks the keys at the front panel, the touchscreen and externally connected keyboard and mouse. The display on the screen remains and shows the current settings and changes. The instrument indicates the activated "VNC only" feature by the icon
. Unlocking is possible via VNC or turning off and on again.
"Display Only"
Locks the manual operation of the instrument. The display on the screen remains and shows the current settings and changes. This security feature protects the instrument against unauthorized access, but still shows the current settings and processes, for example when you operate the instrument via remote control.
The function disables: The touchscreen functionality of the display The keys at the front panel of the instrument The external mouse and keyboard
The instrument indicates the locked controls by a padlock softkey. How to unlock: see "Unlocking (reactivating) the user interface for manual operation" on page 367.
"Disabled"
Locks the display and all controls for the manual operation of the instrument. This security feature protects the instrument against unauthorized reading and access, for example when you operate the instrument via remote control.
The function disables: The display The touchscreen The keys at the front panel of the instrument The external mouse and keyboard
The screen shuts off and displays a padlock symbol instead. How to unlock: see "Unlocking (reactivating) the user interface for manual operation" on page 367.
Remote command: :SYSTem:ULOCk on page 696 :SYSTem:DLOCk on page 696 :SYSTem:KLOCk on page 696
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
360
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
Enabling a locked user interface for manual operation Follow the instructions listed in "Unlocking (reactivating) the user interface for manual operation" on page 367.
Remote command: :SYSTem:ULOCk on page 696 :SYSTem:DLOCk on page 696 :SYSTem:KLOCk on page 696
12.4.3 Configuring LAN Services
Access:
1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services > Main Services".
In the "Main Services" side tab, you can individually enable or disable the supported LAN interface services.
2. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services > Samba Services".
In the "Samba Services" side tab, you can activate older versions of the SMB client and SMB server.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
361
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
How to: "Disabling the LAN interface" on page 366 "Disabling LAN services" on page 367 "Activating SMB version 1.0/2.0 client and server" on page 367
Common Services Enable or disable the LAN interface and supported LAN interface services.
LAN Common Services Enables the LAN interface in general, and thus provides remote access via all unlocked services.
Enable LAN Services individually Common Services Enables or disables the following interface services individually.
"SCPI over LAN" Activates access over LAN to control the instrument remotely, by using SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands. See also "Starting a remote control session over LAN with R&S VISA" on page 408.
"VNC"
Activates access via VNC (Virtual Network Computing) interface, a graphical desktop sharing system that uses RFB protocol to control the instrument remotely. See also Chapter 13.9, "Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC", on page 424.
"SSH"
Activates access via SSH (Secure Shell), a network protocol for secure data communication.
"HTTP"
Activates access via HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol), the application protocol for hypermedia information systems.
"FTP"
Activates access via FTP (File Transfer Protocol), used to transfer files from a host to the instrument and vice versa. See also Chapter 11.9.2, "Accessing the File System of the R&S SMA100B via ftp", on page 327.
"SMB (Samba)" Activates access to SMB (Server Message Block), used for providing shared access to files, printers and serial ports of a network. See also Chapter 11.9.3, "Accessing the R&S SMA100B File System via SMB (Samba)", on page 328.
"Avahi (Zeroconf)" Activates Avahi, a service for automatic configuration of the instrument in a network environment.
"Software Update" Allows updating the software.
Samba Services Activate or deactivate support of SMB client and SMB server version 1.0 and 2.0 of the SMB protocol.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
362
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
Support of version 1.0 and 2.0 is additional to the current SMB protocol version supported in the firmware. This firmware supports SMB protocol versions up to version 4.
SMB 1.0/2.0 Client Samba Services Activates support of the SMB client compatible with SMB protocol versions 1.0 and 2.0.
SMB 1.0/2.0 Server Samba Services Activates support of the SMB server compatible with SMB protocol versions 1.0 and 2.0.
Security Password Enters the password that is required to enable or to disable the settings protected by a security password. Default is 123456. How to: "Disabling the LAN interface" on page 366 "Disabling LAN services" on page 367 "Changing the default security password" on page 366.
Accept Applies the modified settings, provided the security password is entered and correct.
12.4.4 Password Management
Access:
1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management > User Password".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
363
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
In this tab, you can assign the security and a user-defined password.
2. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management > Security Password".
How to: "Changing the default user password of the instrument" on page 366. "Changing the default security password" on page 366.
User Name Indicates the user name used for access to the Linux operating system and valid for VNC, FTP and SMB (Samba) access.
User Password Access: select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management > User Password". Allows you to change and confirm the user password.
Old Password User Password Enters the current user password. The default password is "instrument". Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the instrument to a network. How to: "Changing the default user password of the instrument" on page 366. "Changing the default security password" on page 366.
New Password User Password Enters the new user password. The security password can contain decimal characters only.
Confirm Password User Password Confirms the new user password by repeating.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
364
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
How to: "Changing the default user password of the instrument" on page 366. "Changing the default security password" on page 366.
Change Password User Password Changes the user password accordingly.
Security Password Access: select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management > Security Password". Enables you to change and confirm the security password.
Old Password Security Password Enters the currently used security password. The default password is '123456'. Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the instrument to a network. How to: "Changing the default user password of the instrument" on page 366. "Changing the default security password" on page 366. The security password is required when changing the status of the USB and LAN interface.
New Password Security Password Enters the new security password. The security password can contain decimal characters only.
Confirm Password Security Password Confirms the new security password by repeating. How to: "Changing the default user password of the instrument" on page 366. "Changing the default security password" on page 366.
Change Password Security Password Changes the password accordingly.
12.4.5 How to Prevent Unauthorized Access
The default computer name and user password are instrument. The user password is the password required for VNC, FTP and SMB (samba) connections. If, for example, the VNC service or FTP are enabled, anyone in the network who knows the computer name and user password of the instrument can access it.
The default security password is 123456. The security password is required when changing the status of the USB and LAN interface.
To prevent unauthorized access, use the following configurations exclusively or complementary: "Changing the default user password of the instrument" on page 366
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
365
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
"Changing the default security password" on page 366 "Disabling the LAN interface" on page 366 "Disabling LAN services" on page 367 "Activating SMB version 1.0/2.0 client and server" on page 367 "Disabling the frequency and level indication in the status bar" on page 367 "Deactivating the user interface" on page 367
If security is a concern, see the document instrument security procedures for comprehensive description.
Changing the default user password of the instrument
Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the instrument to a network. How to: "Changing the default user password of the instrument" on page 366. "Changing the default security password" on page 366. a) Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management > User Password". b) Enter the current password in the "Old Password" field. c) Enter the new password in the "New Password" and "Confirm Password" fields. d) Select "Change Password".
The user password is changed; the user name is displayed ("Security > Password Management > User Password > User Name").
Changing the default security password
Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the instrument to a network. How to: "Changing the default user password of the instrument" on page 366. "Changing the default security password" on page 366. a) Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > Password Management > Security Password". b) Enter the current password in the "Old Password" field. The default password is 123456. c) Enter the new password in the "New Password" and "Confirm Password" fields. d) Select "Change Password".
Disabling the LAN interface
1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services > Main Services".
2. Select "LAN > Off".
All LAN connections and hence all LAN services are disabled.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
366
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Using the Security Settings
Disabling LAN services 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services > Main Ser-
vices". 2. Select, for example, "FTP > Off" or "VNC > Off". 3. Enter the Security Password. 4. Select "Accept".
Activating SMB version 1.0/2.0 client and server By default, support of SMB client and SMB server of the SMB protocol versions 1.0 and 2.0 is deactivated. Activate support only, if needed: 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services > Samba Ser-
vices". 2. Select "SMB 1.0/2.0 Client > On" and "SMB 1.0/2.0 Server > On". 3. Enter the Security Password. 4. Select "Accept".
Disabling the frequency and level indication in the status bar These settings are useful to prevent unauthorized personnel from reading the display, when you remotely control the instrument from a different location. 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > General > Manual Operation". 2. Select "Annotation Frequency > Off" or "Annotation Amplitude > Off". 3. Enter the Security Password. 4. Select "Accept".
Deactivating the user interface 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > General > Manual Operation". 2. Select "User Interface > Disabled". 3. Enter the Security Password. 4. Select "Accept".
The screen shuts off and displays a padlock symbol instead. There are further possible configurations. For details, see "User Interface" on page 359.
Unlocking (reactivating) the user interface for manual operation 1. In manual operation:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
367
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Undoing or Restoring Actions
a) On the instrument's keypad or external keyboard, press any key. The instrument prompts you to enter the security password for unlocking.
If you press the character of the first key, the input field accepts the character immediately. b) Delete the entry before inserting the password. Enter the security password 123456.
2. In remote control mode: a) Send the command SYST:ULOC ENABled to release all locks at once. b) Send the command SYST:KLOC OFF to unlock the keyboard and touchscreen. c) Send the command SYST:DLOC OFF to release all locks. Via remote control, there is no password required.
12.5 Undoing or Restoring Actions
"Undo" is a function that removes the effect of the last action on the instrument and reverts it to an older state. Conversely, "Redo" restores a previously undone action.
You can "Undo/Redo" actions according to two criteria: Step by step
Gradually undo/redo the actions in reverse order as previously performed. Depending on the available memory the "Undo/Redo" steps may restore all actions. Multiple steps at once Select any specific action in the history list to "Undo/Redo" multiple actions in a single step. Note: This mode requires a system restoration file on the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
368
R&S®SMA100B
Access: Select "Setup > Settings > Undo/Redo".
General Instrument Functions Undoing or Restoring Actions
The dialog contains all functions for enabling the "Undo/Redo" functionality.
Settings:
State............................................................................................................................ 369 History List.................................................................................................................. 369 Clear History............................................................................................................... 369 Apply........................................................................................................................... 369
State Enables the recording of the performed actions.
History List Lists the performed actions, provided "Undo/Redo" state is "On".
Clear History Deletes the recorded list of the performed steps.
Apply Performs the "Undo/Redo". If you select a previously performed action of the list, all subsequent actions are undone. The list entries remain. If you select a subsequently executed action, you can restore all the actions undone up to this state.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
369
R&S®SMA100B
General Instrument Functions Shutting Down and Rebooting the Instrument
12.6 Shutting Down and Rebooting the Instrument
The [Power On/Standby] front panel key switches the instrument from the standby to the ready state or vice versa. In remote operation from a remote computer or in manual control, there is another possibility to shut down the instrument or to reboot the system.
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Shut Down".
Remote command: :SYSTem:REBoot on page 714 :SYSTem:SHUTdown on page 714
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
370
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Overview of Remote Access Modes
13 Network Operation and Remote Control
The description in this section requires basic knowledge of the remote control operation. Definitions specified in the SCPI standard are not provided. You find some basic information to the SCPI syntax, command lists, and general programming recommendations in Chapter A.1, "Additional Basics on Remote Control", on page 751. See also Chapter A.1.5, "Status Reporting System", on page 763.
As an alternative to the interactive operation directly at the instrument, you can operate the R&S SMA100B also from a remote location.
The Figure 13-1 shows the possibilities of the physical connection (interfaces) for the remote access.
Figure 13-1: Supported remote connections
The various interfaces provide flexible access to the instrument, such as remote control, remote operation or remote file access. These remote access modes are fundamentally different, although they are often considered interchangeable. See: Overview of Remote Access Modes 1GP72: Connectivity of Rohde&Schwarz Signal Generators Chapter 3.1.7, "Connecting to LAN", on page 31
13.1 Overview of Remote Access Modes
This section outlines the possible access modes and their major characteristics.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
371
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Overview of Remote Access Modes
Remote control (SCPI)
A remote PC controls the instrument, usually via VISA (Virtual Instrument Software Architecture) interfaces.
Remote control disables the manual operation of the instrument; you can set different lock states.
The GUI is not visible. Remote control commands (SCPI) perform the settings, either individually or in
sequences (SCPI programs).
Using SCPI programs is faster than the manual operation, since they automate repeating applications.
Remote operation (VNC)
A remote device accesses the instrument via the common platform technology VNC (Virtual Network Computing).
The protocol allows simultaneous operation from several remote devices and the instrument nevertheless remains locally operable.
The GUI is visible.
To perform the settings, you can operate the instrument as with the manual control.
During remote operation via VNC, the direct control of the instrument is not disabled. You can control the instrument from the front panel and via the remote computer alternately.
Clients supporting remote operation depend on the used remote device, see Table 13-1.
How to: see Chapter 13.9, "Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC", on page 424.
Table 13-1: Supported VNC operation modes
Remote device
VNC client
Requirements
Characteristics
Desktop
(Windows, Linux, MacTMOS)
Ultr@VNC Other dedicated client soft-
ware
Ultr@VNC or Client Software must be installed.
Fast, supports several options like full screen mode or auto-login.
Any web browser
Java Runtime must be installed and activated in the browser settings.
Fast and convenient - only the instrument address required.
Java runtime is sometimes considered as security concern.
Web browser with HTML5
Web sockets must be supported.
Slower than the other modes.
No additional installation or activation required.
No security concern.
Smart device
Dedicated client App
(Tablet/ smartphone)
App must be installed.
Fast, supports several options like full screen mode or auto-login.
Web browser with HTML5
Web sockets must be supported. Support of QR code scanning Slower than a dedicated App.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
372
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
Remote file access (FTP, SAMBA/SMB)
A remote client accesses the instrument's file system, using the protocols FTP (file transfer protocol) and SAMBA/SMB (server message block).
The protocols enable you to transfer files from or to the instrument and to get direct access to its file sharing directory share.
How to:
Chapter 11.9, "How to Transfer Files from and to the Instrument", on page 325.
"Activating SMB version 1.0/2.0 client and server" on page 367
13.2 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
The instrument supports various interfaces for remote control. The table gives an overview on the connectivity:
Table 13-2: Remote control interfaces and protocols
Interface
Protocols, VISA*) address string and library
Remarks
Local area network (LAN)
HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol
The LAN connector is on the rear panel of the
(IVI-6.1)
instrument.
TCPIP::host address::hislip0[::INSTR] VISA VXI-11
The interface is based on TCP/IP and supports various protocols.
TCPIP::host address[::
For a description of the protocols, refer to:
LAN device name][::INSTR]
Chapter 13.2.1.2, "HiSLIP Protocol",
VISA
on page 376
Socket communication (Raw Ethernet, simple
Chapter 13.2.1.3, "VXI-11 Protocol",
Telnet)
on page 376
TCPIP::host address[::
Chapter 13.2.1.4, "Socket Communica-
LAN device name]::<port>::SOCKET
tion", on page 376
VISA or socket controller
USB
USBTMC USB::<vendor ID>::<product ID>:: <serial number>[::INSTR] VISA
The USB In connector is at the rear panel of the instrument.
For a description of the interface, refer to Chapter 13.2.2, "USB Interface", on page 377
GPIB (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)
GPIB::<address>[::INSTR] (no secondary address) VISA
Optional GPIB bus interfaces according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.1 are on the rear panel of the instrument.
For a description of the interface, refer to Chapter 13.2.3, "GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)", on page 377.
*) VISA (Virtual Instrument Software Architecture) is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments. A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control over LAN (when using VXI-11 or HiSLIP protocol), USB and serial interface. For remote control via socket communication VISA installation is optional. For more information, see Chapter 13.3.1, "VISA Library", on page 379.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
373
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
Rohde & Schwarz provides the standardized I/O software library R&S VISA for communication with the instruments via TCP/IP (LAN: HiSLIP, VXI-11 and raw socket) or USB (USBTMC) interfaces. R&S VISA is available for download at the Rohde & Schwarz website http:// www.rohde-schwarz.com/rsvisa.
How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in Chapter 13.7, "Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely", on page 402.
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
SCPI commands - messages - are used for remote control. Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules. The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers. The tutorial "Automatic Measurement Control - A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488.2" from John M. Pieper (Rohde & Schwarz order number 0002.3536.00) offers detailed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI.
Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers.
For more information, see also Chapter A.1, "Additional Basics on Remote Control", on page 751.
13.2.1 LAN Interface
To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface, consisting of a connector, a network interface card and protocols.
For remote control via a network, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP/IP network protocol. The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the instrument. Software for instrument control and (for specified protocols only) the VISA program library must be installed on the controller.
If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource string. The controller identifies these instruments by the resource string.
13.2.1.1 VISA Resource Strings
The VISA resource string is required to establish a communication session between the controller and the instrument in a LAN. The resource string is a unique identifier, composed of the specific IP address of the instrument and some network and VISAspecific keywords.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
374
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
TCPIP
= designates the network protocol
host address
= designates the IP address or hostname of the instrument
[::LAN device name] = defines the protocol and the instance number of a subinstrument
[::INSTR]
= indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
The IP address (host address/computer name) is used by the programs to identify and control the instrument. It is automatically assigned by the DHCP server the first time the device is registered on the network. Alternatively, you can also assign its LAN device name.
If assigned, the IP address is displayed on home screen. You can adjust it manually with the parameter the "System Config > Remote Access > Network" > IP AddressEnabling a locked user interface for manual operation.
The following section lists the characteristics of the VISA resource strings for the corresponding interface protocols. The highlighted characters are crucial.
HiSLIP
hislip0 = HiSLIP device name, designates that the interface protocol HiSLIP is used (mandatory)
hislip0 is composed of [::HiSLIP device name[,HiSLIP port]] and must be assigned. For details of the HiSLIP protocol, refer to Chapter 13.2.1.2, "HiSLIP Protocol", on page 376.
VXI-11
[::inst0] = LAN device name, indicates that the VXI-11 protocol is used (optional)
inst0 currently selects the VXI-11 protocol by default and can be omitted. For details of the VXI-11 protocol, refer to Chapter 13.2.1.2, "HiSLIP Protocol", on page 376.
Socket communication
port
= determines the used port number
SOCKET = indicates the raw network socket resource class
Socket communication requires the specification of the port (commonly referred to as port number) and of "SOCKET" to complete the VISA resource string with the associated protocol used.
The registered port for socket communication is port 5025.
See also Chapter 13.2.1.4, "Socket Communication", on page 376.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
375
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
13.2.1.2 HiSLIP Protocol
The HiSLIP (High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol) is the successor protocol for VXI-11 for TCP-based instruments specified by the IVI foundation. The protocol uses two TCP sockets for a single connection - one for fast data transfer, the other for nonsequential control commands (e.g. Device Clear or SRQ).
HiSLIP has the following characteristics:
High performance as with raw socket network connections Compatible IEEE 488.2 support for Message Exchange Protocol, Device Clear,
Serial Poll, Remote/Local, Trigger, and Service Request Uses a single IANA registered port (4880), which simplifies the configuration of fire-
walls Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking
mechanisms Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks
Using VXI-11, each operation is blocked until a VXI-11 device handshake returns. However, using HiSLIP, data is sent to the device using the "fire and forget" method with immediate return. Thus, a successful return of a VISA operation such as viWrite() does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the requested command, but is delivered to the TCP/IP buffers.
For more information see also the application note:
1MA208: Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP
13.2.1.3 VXI-11 Protocol
The VXI-11 standard is based on the ONC RPC (Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call) protocol which in turn relies on TCP/IP as the network/transport layer. The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured. TCP/IP ensures connection-oriented communication, where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified. With this protocol, messages cannot be lost.
13.2.1.4 Socket Communication
An alternative way for remote control of the software is to establish a simple network communication using sockets. The socket communication, also referred to as "Raw Ethernet communication", does not necessarily require a VISA installation on the remote controller side. It is available by default on all operating systems.
The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built-in telnet program. The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communication with the software on a command-by-command basis. For more convenience and to enable automation by means of programs, user-defined sockets can be programmed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
376
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
Socket connections are established on a specially defined port. The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of the port configured for remote-control. All R&S SMA100B use port number 5025 for this purpose. The port is configured for communication on a command-to-command basis and for remote control from a program.
13.2.2 USB Interface
Option: R&S SMAB-B86
For remote control via the USB connection, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface. A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed. VISA detects and configures the R&S instrument automatically when the USB connection is established. You do not have to install a separate driver.
USBTMC (USB Test & Measurement Class Specification) is a protocol that is built on top of USB for communication with USB devices. It defines class code information of the instrument, that identifies its functionality to load the respective device driver. Using VISA library, it supports service request, triggers, and other specific operations.
13.2.2.1 USB Resource String
The resource string represents an addressing scheme that is used to establish a communication session with the instrument. It is based on the instrument address and some instrument- and vendor-specific information.
The USB resource string syntax is as follows:
USB
= denotes the used interface
<vendor ID> = is the manufacturer ID for Rohde & Schwarz
<product ID> = is the product identification of the instrument
<serial number> = is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument
[::INSTR]
= indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
To set the USB resource string, see Remote Access Settings.
Example: USB::0x0AAD::0x01DD::100001 0x0AAD is the vendor ID for Rohde & Schwarz. 0x01DD is the product ID for the R&S SMA100B 100001 is the serial number of the particular instrument.
13.2.3 GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)
Option: R&S SMAB-B86
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
377
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
To be able to control the instrument via the GPIB bus, the instrument and the controller must be linked by a GPIB bus cable. A GPIB bus card, the card drivers and the program libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller.
GPIB address
The controller must address the instrument with the GPIB bus channel (see Chapter 13.4.3, "GPIB Address Settings", on page 386). GPIB provides channel addresses from 0 to 30.
The GPIB resource string syntax is as follows:
GPIB
= denotes the used interface
<channel address> = the used channel
[::INSTR]
= indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
Note: If the VISA implementation supports the GPIB interface, you can optionally define the VISA Instrument Control Resource (INSTR). It is used to define the basic operations and attributes for a device, such as reading, writing, or triggering.
Notes and characteristics
In connection with the GPIB interface, note the following: Up to 15 instruments can be connected. The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m, or 2 m times the number
of devices, whichever is less. The maximum recommended cable length between two instruments is 2 m. A wired "OR"-connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel, since the slowest instrument determines the speed. Any connected IEC bus cable must be terminated by an instrument or controller.
13.2.4 LXI Browser Interface
The LXI browser interface allows easy configuration of the LAN and remote control of the R&S SMA100B without additional installation requirements. The instrument's LXI browser interface works correctly with all W3C compliant browsers.
See Chapter 13.10.1, "LXI Functionality", on page 430 for more about LXI.
The LAN settings are configured using the instrument's LXI browser interface described in Chapter 13.5.2.1, "LAN Configuration", on page 395. The LXI status settings in the R&S SMA100B are described in Chapter 13.5.1, "LXI Status Settings", on page 392.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
378
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Control Programs and Libraries
13.3 Remote Control Programs and Libraries
This section shows how the remote-control programs access the instrument, and the libraries they require for the appropriate interface protocols.
Figure 13-2: Overview of remote control interfaces, protocols and libraries
13.3.1 VISA Library
VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments. Thus, you can configure the interface without having to adjust the application program to the used interface.
The I/O channel (LAN or TCP/IP, USB, GPIB, etc.) is selected at initialization time with the channelspecific address string ("VISA resource string"), or by an appropriately defined VISA alias (short name). See also Table 13-2 for an overview.
Instrument access via VXI-11 or HiSLIP protocols is achieved from high level programming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer. VISA encapsulates the low-level VXI or GPIB function calls and thus makes the transport interface transparent for the user.
A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the following interfaces: LAN interface using HiSLIP Protocol LAN interface using VXI-11 Protocol USB Interface
Instrument access via the LAN socket protocol or GPIB connections can be operated both, with or without the VISA library. See also Chapter 13.2.1.4, "Socket Communication", on page 376 and Chapter 13.2.3, "GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)", on page 377.
For more information about VISA library, refer to the user documentation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
379
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Control Programs and Libraries
13.3.2 Possible Setups and Access Functions
The following examples give an overview of dependencies between the available libraries, the possible interfaces and protocols, and whether an instrument driver is provided. The involved parts are highlighted. For more information, see the application note 1GP72: Connectivity of Rohde&Schwarz Signal Generators.
Remote control (application) program using VISA
Figure 13-3: Application program using VISA
Protocol Socket VXI-11 HiSLIP USBTMC GPIB
Remote control program
viOpen (..., "TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::5025::SOCKET", ...) viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
viOpen (..., "TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::inst0::INSTR", ...) viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
viOpen (..., "TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::hislip0::INSTR", ...) viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
viOpen (..., "USB::0x0AAD::0x01DD::100001::INSTR", ...) viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
viOpen (..., "GPIB::28::INSTR", ...) viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
Remote control program using instrument driver (VISA available)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
380
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Control Programs and Libraries
Figure 13-4: Application using instrument driver (VISA available)
Protocol Socket VXI-11 HiSLIP USBTMC GPIB
Remote control program
rssma_init ("TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::5025::SOCKET", ...) rssma_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
rssma_init ("TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::inst0::INSTR", ...) rssma_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
rssma_init ("TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::hislip0::INSTR", ...) rssma_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
rssma_init ("USB::0x0AAD::0x01DD::100001::INSTR", ...) rssma_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
rssma_init ("GPIB::28::INSTR", ...) rssma_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
Remote control program using instrument driver (VISA not available)
Figure 13-5: Remote control program using instrument driver (VISA not available)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
381
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Access Settings
Protocol Socket
GPIB
Remote control program
rssma_init ("TCPIP:SMA100B-102030::5025::SOCKET", ...) rssma_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
rssma_init ("GPIB::28::INSTR", ...) rssma_SetFrequency (..., 2e9)
13.4 Remote Access Settings
This section outlines the settings required for accessing and configuring the provided remote control interfaces. It includes network settings, access addresses, emulation settings for using the command sets of other generators, and the access via smart devices.
About instrument emulations
You can also remotely control the R&S SMA100B via the command set of another signal generator. With this function you can, for example, replace a signal generator with an R&S SMA100B in an automated test setup, without adjusting the command scripts used.
The R&S SMA100B also covers command sets of Rohde & Schwarz signal generators. To achieve optimal compatibility when replacing an instrument, we recommend that you select the emulation command set for the corresponding signal generator.
You find all the remote control command sets supported by the R&S SMA100B in a selection list.
For more information, see the application note:
1GP120: Remote Emulation with the R&S SMA100B Signal Generator.
The selected instrument also defines the identification string that is retrieved with query *IDN?. If necessary, use the parameter Mode and IDN String to change this string.
As any other parameter, the remote control command set can also be changed remotely by the command :SYSTem:LANGuage.
While working in an emulation mode, the R&S SMA100B specific command set is disabled and the SCPI command :SYSTem:LANGuage is discarded.
To return to the SCPI command set of the R&S SMA100B, use the appropriate command of the selected command set.
If for example an HP generator is emulated, the HP command EX returns to the instrument-specific GPIB command set.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
382
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Access Settings
13.4.1 Network Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Remote Access > Network".
In the "Network" dialog, you can configure the settings of the general network environment and specific identification parameters of the instrument in the network.
The remote commands required to configure the network remotely are described in Chapter 14.17, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 690.
How to: see Chapter 13.6.3, "How To Connect to LAN", on page 400.
Network Status Indicates that the instrument is connected to the network. Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:STATus? on page 702
Restart Network Terminates the network connection of the instrument and subsequently sets it up again. You can use this function to fix network problems. Note: This function restarts only the connection of the instrument to the network. It does not impact the network itself. Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESTart on page 702
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
383
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Access Settings
Hostname Displays the hostname.
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned hostname, a logical name which can be used instead of the IP address. With the default network settings, the IP address is allocated by the DHCP server. This address can change each time the instrument is reconnected. Unlike the IP address, the hostname name does not change.
Note: This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it.
We recommend that you do not change the default network settings or the hostname to avoid problems with the network connection. If you change the hostname, be sure to use a unique name.
Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:HOSTname on page 702
Workgroup Sets the individual windows workgroup name of the R&S SMA100B. This parameter is required in case the instrument is integrated in a windows network.
This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it.
Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:WORKgroup on page 703
Address Mode Selects the mode for assigning the IP address.
How to: see Chapter 13.6.4, "How to Assign the IP Address", on page 400.
"Auto (DCHP)" Assigns the IP address automatically, provided the network supports DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
"Static"
Enables you to assign the IP address manually.
Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE on page 701
IP Address Displays the IP address of the instrument in the network.
By default, the R&S SMA100B is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and to obtain the whole address information automatically.
If the network does not support DHCP or the attempt does not succeed, the instrument tries to obtain the IP address via Zeroconf (APIPA) protocol. IP addresses assigned via Zeroconf start with the number blocks 169.254.*.*.
Note: An IP address that is assigned via the Zeroconf protocol although the network requires an IP address assigned via the DHCP server can cause network connection failures. See Chapter 15.5, "Resolving Network Connection Failures", on page 729.
How to: "To assign the IP address manually on the instrument" on page 401. Chapter 13.6.2, "How To Activate LAN Services", on page 400.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
384
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Access Settings
Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress on page 700
Subnet Mask Displays the bit group of the subnet in the host identifier. To assign the subnet mask manually, select Address Mode > "Static". Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:SUBNet:MASK on page 703
Default Gateway Displays the gateway address. This address identifies the router on the same network as the instrument that is used to forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network. To assign the gateway address manually, select Address Mode > "Static". Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:GATeway on page 703
DNS Suffix Displays the primary DNS (Domain Name System) suffix, that means the DNS name without the hostname part. The DNS system uses the suffix for registration and name resolution for unique identification of the instrument in the entire network. To assign the DNS suffix manually, select Address Mode > "Static". Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:DOMain on page 702
DNS Server Determines the preferred server for name resolution. The DNS server contains the underlying numerical values that are required for name resolution of the hostname as part of the IP address. To select the DNS server manually, select Address Mode > "Static". Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:DNS on page 703
MAC Address Indicates the MAC (Media Access Control) address, a unique identifier of the network adapter in the R&S SMA100B. Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:MACaddress on page 701
13.4.2 VISA Resource Strings
Access: Select "System Config > Remote Access > Visa Resource Strings".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
385
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Access Settings
The "Visa Resource String" dialog displays the VISA resource strings provided for remote control via the different interfaces.
Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:HISLip:RESource? on page 700 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource? on page 701 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource? on page 704 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource? on page 700 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:RESource? on page 705 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RESource? on page 704
13.4.3 GPIB Address Settings
Access: 1. Select "System Config > Remote Access > GPIB Address".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
386
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Access Settings
2. Set the GPIB channel address of the connected instrument.
Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess on page 700
13.4.4 RS232 Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Remote Access > RS232".
The "RS232" dialog enables you to control the instrument over a serial interface using a USB adapter. The controller and the instrument must be connected with the external USB/serial-adapter R&S TS1-USB (see recommended extras in the data sheet) and a serial crossover (null modem) cable. The USB connection requires the Visa library to be installed on the controller. Visa detects and configures the R&S SMA100B automatically when the USB connection is established.
The remote commands required to configure the emulation settings remotely are described in Chapter 14.17, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 690.
Baud Rate Sets the baudrate for the serial remote control interface. Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD on page 703
Parity Sets the parity for the serial remote control interface. Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity on page 704
Stop Bits Sets the number of stop bits for the serial remote control interface. Remote command: :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs on page 704
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
387
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Access Settings
13.4.5 Instrument Emulations Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Remote Access > Instrument Emulations".
The "Instrument Emulations" dialog enables you to emulate a remote control command set of another signal generator.
The remote commands required to configure the emulation settings remotely are described in Chapter 14.17, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 690.
Language Selects the instrument whose remote command set is emulated by the R&S SMA100B.
Remote command: :SYSTem:LANGuage on page 707
Mode Selects the way the instrument identification is performed.
"Automatic"
Sets the "IDN String" and the "OPT String" automatically for the instrument selected with the parameter Language.
"User Defined" Enables you to define the "IDN String" and the "OPT String".
Remote command: :SYSTem:IDENtification on page 705
Set to Default In "Mode > User Defined", resets the *IDN and *OPT strings.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
388
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Access Settings
Remote command: :SYSTem:IDENtification:PRESet on page 706
IDN String Indicates the identification string of the instrument when queried with the common command *IDN?.
In addition to the preset values, you can define your own identification string so that each generator uses an individual identification, like My_SigGen for instance, see Mode .
Remote command: *IDN? on page 436 :SYSTem:IRESponse on page 706
OPT String Indicates the option string of the instrument as queried with common command *OPT?.
In Mode > "User Defined", you can define your own option string, additionally to the automatically created one.
Remote command: *OPT? on page 437 :SYSTem:ORESponse on page 706
13.4.6 Remote Connections Settings
The "Remote Connections" dialog covers the active SCPI and TCP/IP connections, and a history list of the connections that have accessed the instrument before.
13.4.6.1 Active Connections
Access: Select "System Config > Remote Access > Remote Connections > Active".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
389
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Access Settings
The "Active " tab shows the currently active remote connections, and you can enable the display of the active connections in the task bar.
Show Remote Connections in Taskbar Displays the currently active connections in the taskbar.
SCPI Connections Displays the VISA resources strings of the remote connections currently controlling the instrument via the LAN interface. Remote command: n.a.
TCP/IP Connections Displays the types and client addresses of the remote connections curently controlling the instrument via the LAN interface. Remote command: n.a.
13.4.6.2 Closed Connections
Access: Select "System Config > Remote Access > Remote Connections > Closed".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
390
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Remote Access Settings
The "Closed" tab shows the currently active remote connections, and you can enable the display of the active connections in the task bar.
SCPI Connections Lists the VISA resource strings of the last remote connections that have accessed the instrument via the LAN interface before. Remote command: n.a.
TCP/IP Connections Lists the types and client addresses of the last remote connections that had accessed the instrument via the LAN interface before. Remote command: n.a.
13.4.7 QR Code
Access: Select "System Config > Remote Access > QR Code".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
391
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control LXI Settings
The "QR Code" dialog shows the current instrument address (IP address) in quick response (QR) format.
This functionality provides fast access to the instrument via VNC with, for example, a smartphone or a tablet. See Chapter 13.9.3, "How To Set Up a Remote Operation from a Smart Device", on page 427.
13.5 LXI Settings
On the R&S SMA100B the LXI functionality is already installed and enabled, see LXI Status Settings. Thus, the instrument can be accessed via any web browser (like the Microsoft Internet Explorer) to perform the following tasks: Modifying network configurations Remote control the instrument Performing SCPI remote diagnostics The LAN settings are configured using the instrument's LXI browser interface described in Chapter 13.5.2.1, "LAN Configuration", on page 395.
13.5.1 LXI Status Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Remote Access > LXI Status...".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
392
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control LXI Settings
The "LXI - Status" dialog shows the parameters of the LAN connection.
Alternatively, you can change the LAN settings using the LXI web browser interface, see Chapter 13.5.2.1, "LAN Configuration", on page 395.
LAN Status The LED indicates the LXI status.
"green"
Normal operation
"green (flashing)" Device identification
"red"
LAN fault
Hostname / MAC Address / IP Address See "Hostname" on page 384.
LAN Reset Initiates the network configuration reset mechanism for the instrument and resets the hostname, MAC address, and IP address.
According to the LXI standard, a LAN reset must place the following network settings to a default state:
Parameter TCP/IP mode Dynamic DNS ICMP ping Password for LAN configuration
Value DHCP + Auto IP address Enabled Enabled LxiWebIfc
The LAN reset also resets the following parameters for the Signal Generator:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
393
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control LXI Settings
Parameter Hostname Description Negotiation VXI-11 discovery
Instrument-specific hostname Vector signal generator Auto detect Enabled
13.5.2 LXI Browser Settings
To access the instrument via the web browser:
In the address field of the browser on your PC, type the instrument's host name or IP address, for example http://10.113.1.151. Note: Do not add the missing zeros in the IP address, while opening the instrument homepage.
The instrument homepage (welcome page) opens.
The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following elements: "LXI"
"Home" opens the instrument homepage. The homepage displays the device information required by the LXI standard, including the VISA resource string in read-only format.
"Device Indicator" activates or deactivates the LXI status indication. When activated, the LXI LEDs flash, both in the browser dialog and in the LXI dialog of the connected instrument, see LAN Status. A green LXI status symbol indicates that a LAN connection has been established; a red symbol indicates that no LAN cable is connected.
"Lan Configuration" allows you to configure LAN parameters and to initiate a ping, see "Ping Client" on page 397.
"Status" displays information about the LXI status of the instrument. "Utilities" provides access to the LXI event log functionality required by the
LXI standard. "Instrument Control"
"Web Control" provides remote access to the instrument, see "Starting a remote control via the LXI web browser" on page 404.
"Diagnostics" "SCPI Remote Trace" records messages exchanged via the remote control interface, see "SCPI Remote Trace" on page 397.
"Help" "Glossary" explains terms related to the LXI standard. www.rohde-schwarz.com opens the Rohde & Schwarz homepage.
"Data Sheet" Provides the data sheet with the specification data of the instrument at the time of delivery, see "Data Sheet" on page 399.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
394
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control LXI Settings
13.5.2.1 LAN Configuration
The "LAN Configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows their modification.
It comprises the following navigation entries.
IP Configuration.................................................................................................... 395 Advanced Config...................................................................................................396 Ping Client.............................................................................................................397 SCPI Remote Trace.............................................................................................. 397 Data Sheet............................................................................................................ 399
IP Configuration
The "IP configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows their modification.
The "IP Address Mode" selects a configuration mode for the IP address of the instrument. With static configuration, the entered IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are used. With dynamic configuration, DHCP or dynamic link local addressing (automatic IP) is used to obtain the instrument IP address.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
395
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control LXI Settings
Changing the LAN configuration This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it. Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the instrument to a network. How to: "Changing the default user password of the instrument" on page 366. "Changing the default security password" on page 366.
See Chapter 12.4.4, "Password Management", on page 363.
Advanced Config
The "Advanced Config" web page provides LAN settings that are not declared mandatory by the LXI standard.
The following advanced parameters are available:
"mDNS and DNS-SD": The additional protocols "multicast DNS" and "DNS service discovery" are used for device communication in zero configuration networks, working without DNS and DHCP.
"ICMP Ping": Must be enabled to use the ping utility. If you disable this setting, the instrument does not answer ping requests. The setting does not affect the LXI ping client. You can ping other hosts from the instrument, even if the setting is disabled.
"VXI-11 Discovery": Must be enabled to detect the instrument in the LAN. If you disable this setting, the instrument cannot be detected by the VXI-11 discovery protocol mechanism. The setting does not affect other detection mechanisms. Setting up a VXI-11 connection via the IP address or the host name is independent of this setting.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
396
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control LXI Settings
Changing the LAN configuration This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it. Note: We recommend that you change the default password before connecting the instrument to a network. How to: "Changing the default user password of the instrument" on page 366. "Changing the default security password" on page 366. See Chapter 12.4.4, "Password Management", on page 363.
Ping Client
The "Ping Client" page provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the LXI-compliant instrument and another device.
The ping is initiated from the instrument. Using the ICMP echo request and echo reply packets, this function checks whether the communication with a device via LAN is working. Ping is useful for the diagnosis of IP network or router failures.
To initiate a ping at the instrument:
1. On the "Ping Client" page, enter the IP address of the host in the "Destination Address" field (for example 10.113.1.151).
2. Select "Submit".
SCPI Remote Trace
The remote trace functionality allows you to trace input and output strings at the remote control interface of the R&S SMA100B, see Chapter 13.7.8, "How to Trace Messages with the LXI Web Browser Interface", on page 413.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
397
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control LXI Settings
A recorded trace (message log) can be evaluated directly in the dialog. Use the highlighting and navigation functions provided by the lower toolbar to locate error messages and messages containing arbitrary search strings. You can also export the message log to a *.csv file and evaluate the file using a suitable program.
To trace and display messages, switch on "logging" and "live mode" in the toolbar.
Toolbars
The toolbar at the top of the dialog provides basic settings and functions.
"Live mode" / "logging": If logging is switched on, messages are traced. They are stored in an internal database and can be displayed upon request, using the refresh button (live mode off) or they can be displayed automatically (live mode on).
"Filter": applies a filter to columns and/or rows when working (live mode off) "Refresh": reads the message log from the internal database and displays it "Download": stores the SCPI trace log to a *.csv file "Clear": deletes all message log entries in the database and at the screen "Details": displays details of the selected message, for example an SCPI command
in hex format (also possible by double\-clicking a message)
Columns
The following columns are available if no column filter is applied:
"Rec": record number of the message within the message log I: number of the subinstrument "MT": indicates the type of the message. Possible values and related message
contents are: > = incoming command < = outgoing response to a query E = error message, highlighted by red color T = execution time, i.e. time required by the instrument to process the com-
mand internally. "message": indicates the type of the message. Possible values and related mes-
sage contents are: > = incoming command < = outgoing response to a query E = error message, denoted in red T = execution time, i.e. time required by the instrument to process the com-
mand internally
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
398
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Connecting the Instrument to the Network (LAN)
Data Sheet
The data sheet functionality allows you to retrieve the specification data of the instrument at the time of delivery.
The document contains all specified value ranges and information of the data sheet, for example important as reference values for recalibration.
13.6 Connecting the Instrument to the Network (LAN)
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN (local area network).
There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument: A non-dedicated network (Ethernet) connection from the instrument to an existing
network A dedicated network connection (Point-to-point connection) between the instru-
ment and a single computer
For addressing, both the instrument and the computer require an IP address. The address information is usually assigned to the devices automatically, see Chapter 13.6.4, "How to Assign the IP Address", on page 400.
How To Enable Access via LAN............................................................................400 How To Activate LAN Services..............................................................................400 How To Connect to LAN........................................................................................400 How to Assign the IP Address...............................................................................400 How to Use Computer Names (Hostnames).........................................................401
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
399
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Connecting the Instrument to the Network (LAN)
13.6.1 How To Enable Access via LAN
Per default, the LAN interfaces on the instrument are enabled. If they have been disabled because of security reasons, enable them as follows: 1. Select "Setup > Security > LAN Services > LAN Interface = On". 2. Enter the Security Password. 3. Select "Accept".
13.6.2 How To Activate LAN Services
Per default, the LAN interfaces and all LAN services are enabled. If they have been disabled because of security reasons, enable them as follows: 1. Select "Setup > Security > LAN Services". 2. Enable the required service, e.g. "LAN Services > FTP > On". 3. Enter the Security Password. 4. Select "Accept".
See Chapter 12.4.5, "How to Prevent Unauthorized Access", on page 365.
13.6.3 How To Connect to LAN
1. NOTICE! Connecting to the network can cause network failure. Errors can affect the entire network. Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks: Connecting the instrument to the network Configuring the network Changing IP addresses
2. Connect the LAN socket on the rear panel via an RJ-45 cable to the LAN.
The R&S SMA100B displays its IP address on the screen.
13.6.4 How to Assign the IP Address
Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instrument can be obtained in different ways. If the network supports DHCP (dynamic host configuration protocol), the address
information is assigned automatically.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
400
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Connecting the Instrument to the Network (LAN)
If the network does not support DHCP, the instrument tries to obtain the IP address via Zeroconf (APIPA) protocol. If this attempt does not succeed or if the instrument is set to use alternate TCP/IP configuration, the addresses must be set manually.
Since the dynamic TCP/IP configuration assigns the address information automatically, it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.
To assign the IP address manually on the instrument
1. NOTICE! Connecting to the network can cause network failure. Errors can affect the entire network. Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks: Connecting the instrument to the network Configuring the network Changing IP addresses
2. Select "System Config > Remote Access > Network".
3. Select "Address Mode > Static".
4. Select the "IP Address".
5. Enter the IP address, for example 192.168.0.1. The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains 3 numbers in maximum.
6. Select the "Subnet Mask" and enter the subnet mask, for example 255.255.255.0. The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains 3 numbers in maximum.
To assign the IP address manually on the computer
Obtain the necessary information from your network administrator. If you use more than one LAN connector, you need separate address information for each connector. For information on how to perform the configurations, refer to the documentation of the operating system the computer uses.
13.6.5 How to Use Computer Names (Hostnames)
In a LAN that uses a DNS server, each PC or instrument connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name (hostname) instead of the IP address. The DNS server translates the hostname to the IP address. It is especially useful when a DHCP server is used, as a new IP address can be assigned each time the instrument is restarted.
Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, that remains permanent as long as it is not explicitly changed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
401
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
The default computer name follows the syntax <INST>-<Serial Number>, where:
<INST> is the short name of your instrument, as stated on the front panel.
<Serial Number> is the individual serial number of the instrument. You can find the serial number at the rear panel of instrument. It is the third part of the device ID printed on the barcode sticker .
Example: The default hostname of an R&S SMA100B with a serial number 102030 is SMA100B-102030.
To query and change a computer name 1. Select "System Config > Remote Access > Network".
The computer name is displayed under "Hostname".
2. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Protection".
3. Enable the "Protection Level 1". The default password is 123456. The parameter "Hostname" in the "Network" tab is now enabled for configuration.
4. Change the "Hostname".
13.7 Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
This section shows you how to set up remote control connections over the available interfaces. The following general prerequisites must be fulfilled: The instrument and the controller have to be connected with the suitable cable and
switched on. See Chapter 13.6, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network (LAN)", on page 399. To operate the instrument via remote control, it must be addressed using the defined interface address. See: Chapter 13.2.1, "LAN Interface", on page 374 Chapter 13.2.2, "USB Interface", on page 377 Chapter 13.2.3, "GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)", on page 377 Chapter 13.7.1, "How to Find the VISA Resource String", on page 403
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
402
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
A remote control program must open a connection to the instrument, before it can send commands to and receive device responses from the instrument.
If security is a concern, see:
Document instrument security procedures.
Chapter 12.4.5, "How to Prevent Unauthorized Access", on page 365.
How to Find the VISA Resource String................................................................. 403 How to Change the GPIB Instrument Address......................................................404 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over the LXI Browser Interface.........404 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using VXI-11 Protocol...... 405 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using Socket Communication
.............................................................................................................................. 410 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over GPIB............................................411 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over USB.............................................412 How to Trace Messages with the LXI Web Browser Interface.............................. 413 How to Return to Manual Operation......................................................................413
13.7.1 How to Find the VISA Resource String
Select "System Config > Remote Access > VISA Resource Strings".
The dialog shows all specified resource strings of the supported remote control interfaces.
Note: Using the RS232 serial interface via USB requires the USB serial adapter R&S TS-USB1.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
403
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
13.7.2 How to Change the GPIB Instrument Address
Option: R&S SMAB-B86 To control the instrument remotely via the GPIB bus, it must be addressed using the GPIB address. The remote control address is factory-set to 28, but it can be changed if it does not fit in the network environment. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30 are allowed. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings.
To set the GPIB address: 1. Select "System Config > Remote Access > GPIB Address".
2. Select "GPIB Channel Address" and enter a value between 0 and 30.
Risk of losing remote connection If the remote access and network settings had been configured to values different to the default, executing a factory preset via remote control terminates the connection to the instrument.
13.7.3 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over the LXI Browser Interface
Via the LXI browser interface to the R&S SMA100B one or more users can control the instrument remotely from another PC without additional installation. Most instrument controls are available via the front panel simulation. File upload and download between the instrument and the remote PC is also available.
Starting a remote control via the LXI web browser
1. On the instrument, enable the LAN interface. See Chapter 13.6.1, "How To Enable Access via LAN", on page 400.
2. Connect the remote PC and the instrument in the same network. See Chapter 13.6.3, "How To Connect to LAN", on page 400.
3. On the remote PC, start a web browser that supports HTML5 (W3C compliant).
4. Enter the IP address of the R&S SMA100B in the browser's address bar. The R&S SMA100B's welcome page is displayed.
5. In the navigation pane, select "Instrument Control" > "Web Control". Remote access to the instrument requires the password. The default password is instrument.
6. Enter the password and confirm with the [Enter] key. After the connection is established, the current screen of the R&S SMA100B is displayed in the browser window.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
404
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
7. Use the mouse cursor and keyboard to access the functionality of the instrument as you would directly perform on the instruments touchscreen and front panel.
13.7.4 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using VXI-11 Protocol
In this example, the I/O software library R&S VISA from Rohde & Schwarz is used to set up a LAN remote control link and remotely control the R&S SMA100B. R&S VISA is running on a controller PC with Windows operating system. When the connection is set up, you can send commands to the instrument and receive the responses.
The remote control connection requires a VISA installation but no additional hardware on the controller PC. The LAN I/O channel is selected at initialization time using the VISA resource string (also referred to as "address string"). A VISA alias (short name) is used to replace the complete resource string. The host address is the R&S SMA100B's hostname or its IP address.
See also Chapter 13.2.1, "LAN Interface", on page 374.
Setting up the controller with R&S VISA
To remote control the R&S SMA100B, we use the R&S VISA Tester application. The application communicates via TCP/IP protocol.
The instrument is preconfigured for networks using DHCP (dynamic host configuration protocol). If this configuration is used, enter the computer name in the position of the IP address.
1. On the instrument: a) Enable the LAN interface. See Chapter 13.6.1, "How To Enable Access via LAN", on page 400. b) Enable "SCPI over LAN". See Chapter 13.6.2, "How To Activate LAN Services", on page 400.
2. On the controller (remote PC), install the R&S VISA program. See http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/rsvisa > "RS VISA Release Notes".
3. Connect the controller and the instrument in the same network (network cable). Switch them on. See also Chapter 13.6.3, "How To Connect to LAN", on page 400.
4. On the controller, start "R&S VISA > Tester 32bit" or "R&S VISA > Tester 64bit".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
405
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
5. In the menu bar, select "Choose VISA Implementation > Rohde & Schwarz Visa" and confirm with "OK".
6. In the menu bar, select "Find Resource" to search for the instrument in the LAN.
7. Select "VXI-11" and "Find Resources". R&S VISA scans the network for connected instruments and lists all detected instruments in the "Resource" list. Note: The search may take some time, particularly in large networks.
8. Select the required instrument and confirm with "Select".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
406
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
The "Find and select resource" dialog closes and R&S VISA indicates the IP address in the "Resource" field of the main application window. 9. As an alternative to the IP address, you can assign an alias name to the R&S SMA100B: a) In the menu bar, select "RsVisaConfig".
b) In the toolbar, select "+" to access the "VISA Resource String Composer".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
407
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
c) Fill in the "Alias" name, the "VISA Resource String" and the "Device IP Address or host name" as shown in the figure, and confirm with "OK".
The "Alias" name is assigned.
d) Close the dialog. The R&S SMA100B is registered in the program. It can be addressed via the resource string or alias name.
10. In the main window, select "Connect". R&S VISA establishes the connection to the R&S SMA100B.
You can send settings to configure the instrument and receive its responses. Note: If the connection cannot be set up, R&S VISA displays an error in the log view. See also Chapter 15.5, "Resolving Network Connection Failures", on page 729.
For further information on the functions to read and write to an open session, and the utility applications the software provides, see the R&S VISA user manual.
Starting a remote control session over LAN with R&S VISA
To set the instrument to remote control, you can use the addressed command >R or send any command from the controller.
1. Start the R&S VISA Tester. Establish the connection to the R&S SMA100B. See "Setting up the controller with R&S VISA" on page 405.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
408
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
2. In the R&S VISA "Basics" tab, enter an SCPI command, e.g. "*IDN?". Confirm with "Query".
The instrument is switched to remote control when it receives a command from the controller.
3. Select "Read" to obtain the instrument response.
Tip: If the "Show Log" checkbox is checked, R&S VISA displays each VISA function call in the log-view on the left. If you check the "Write Log" checkbox, the logview entry is written to the log file as well. You can operate the log-view in two modes: the "Live Mode" shows only the most recent messages whereas the "View Mode" allows you to scroll the history.
4. To set, e.g. the frequency, enter SOUR1:FREQ 4 GHz and select "Write". To check the performed setting, SOUR1:FREQ? and select "Query". The instrument response is 4000000000. The value corresponds to the frequency in Hz.
While remote control is active, the "Remote" icon in the status bar indicates that the instrument is in remote control mode. Currently ongoing communication (data transfer) is indicated by green colored arrows in the icon. Operating via the front and touch panel or via mouse and keyboard are locked, allowing a remote control program to be performed without interruption. On the display, keys and entry fields are grayed out and cannot be activated or modified, but you can still open dialogs, for example to verify settings.
5. To disable the access to the dialogs, use the command SYST:KLOC ON.
6. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, use the command &LLO. See also Chapter A.1.2, "LAN Interface Messages", on page 752.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
409
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
The instrument switches to "Remote LLO" state. The [Setup] key is disabled.
7. To enable the [Setup] key, use the command >R.
8. To return to manual operation, see Chapter 13.7.9, "How to Return to Manual Operation", on page 413. Tip: Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the other instrument settings.
13.7.5 Establishing a Remote Control Connection over LAN Using Socket Communication
This section provides an example on how to establish a remote control connection over Telnet client and a simple sockets-based program example that can be further developed.
See also Chapter A.2, "Telnet program examples", on page 772.
The telnet client transmits information unencrypted. Therefore, for sensitive information we recommend that you use a client which supports secure protocols, like SSH.
In the following example, we assume basic knowledge of programming and operation of the controller. You can find information on the interface commands in the corresponding manuals.
Setting up a Telnet connection
To control the software, only a Telnet program is required. The Telnet program is part of every operating system.
1. On the instrument: a) Enable the LAN interface. See Chapter 13.6.1, "How To Enable Access via LAN", on page 400. b) Enable "SCPI over LAN". See Chapter 13.6.2, "How To Activate LAN Services", on page 400.
2. Connect the remote PC and the instrument in the same network. See also Chapter 13.6.3, "How To Connect to LAN", on page 400.
3. On the remote PC, start the Telnet program. Enter the socket address. The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the hostname of the R&S SMA100B and the number of the port configured for remote-control via Telnet. Tip: The R&S SMA100B uses the port number 5025 for remote connection via Telnet.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
410
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
The connection to the instrument is set up and you can send remote-control commands.
4. Telnet does not reflect your first entry. Insert a command, e.g. *IDN and confirm with "Enter".
5. Observe the screen. A response on the query confirms that the connection is working. The client displays all subsequent inputs and responses.
6. Even if the cursor is not visible on the screen, blindly enter a remote-control command. Confirm with Enter.
13.7.6 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over GPIB
The program example in this section is written in VISUAL BASIC. A condition for programming in VISUAL BASIC is that the modules NIGLOBAL (Niglobal.bas) and VBIB32 (Vbib_32.bas) are added to the projects.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
411
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
Drivers for instrument, for example IVI-COM and LabVIEW drivers, are available for download area on the product page at: https://www.rohde-schwarz.com/driver/sma100b/
Starting a remote control session over GPIB
1. Connect instrument and controller using a GPIB cable. Switch them on.
2. Select "System Config > Remote Access > GPIB Address " > "GPIB Channel Address = 28". The GPIB address of the instrument must be the default value of 28.
3. Execute the following commands on the controller: a) Open the port to the instrument. CALL IBFIND("DEV1", generator%) b) Inform the controller about instrument address. CALL IBPAD(generator%, 28) c) Reset the instrument. CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*RST;*CLS") d) Set the instrument to new address. CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18") e) Inform the controller about new address. CALL IBPAD(generator%, 18) The GPIB address of the instrument is changed.
4. To return to manual operation, press the Local key at the front panel.
13.7.7 Setting Up a Remote Control Connection over USB
For remote control via the USB connection, the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface. A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed. VISA detects and configures the R&S instrument automatically when the USB connection is established. You do not have to enter an address string or install a separate driver.
Starting a remote control session over USB
1. Connect instrument and controller using USB cable. Switch them on.
2. Execute the following commands on the controller: a) Open the port to the instrument. viOpen (..., "USB::0x0AAD::0x01DD::100001::INSTR", ...) b) Reset the instrument. viRST (generator%, "*RST;*CLS") c) Set 2 GHz frequency viPrintf (..., "SOUR:FREQ 2GHz\n")
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
412
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Controlling the R&S SMA100B Remotely
d) Set 20 dBm output level viPrintf (..., "SOUR:POW -20dBm\n")
The RF frequency and signal level of the instrument are changed.
3. To return to manual operation, press the [Local] key.
13.7.8 How to Trace Messages with the LXI Web Browser Interface
The remote trace functionality allows you to trace commands and messages exchanged via a remote control interface of the R&S SMA100B.
Activating the SCPI remote trace
1. On the instrument: a) Enable the LAN interface. See Chapter 13.6.1, "How To Enable Access via LAN", on page 400. b) Enable "SCPI over LAN". See Chapter 13.6.2, "How To Activate LAN Services", on page 400.
2. Connect the remote PC and the instrument in the same network. See also Chapter 13.6.3, "How To Connect to LAN", on page 400.
3. Start a web browser that supports HTML5 (W3C compliant).
4. Enter the IP address of the R&S SMA100B in the browser's address bar.
The welcome page is displayed.
5. In the navigation pane, select "Diagnostics > SCPI Remote Trace".
6. In the toolbar bar of the "SCPI Remote Trace" page, select "live mode > on" and "logging > on". "live mode > on" displays all commands and responses, and "logging > on" also traces messages.
If you now control the R&S SMA100B with SCPI commands, using an appropriate tool, the LXI function records the information sent and received. The function records all sent commands, received responses and messages, and saves them in an internal database. If "live mode" is disabled, you can display the recent traces upon request, using the "refresh" button. You can also save the log in a file. Note: The diagnostics functionality will be extended in later releases, e.g. to download or upload SCPI command files from / to the instrument.
13.7.9 How to Return to Manual Operation
Before returning to manual control, command processing must be completed. Otherwise, the instrument switches back to remote control immediately.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
413
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
1. To return from "Remote" state to manual state, perform one of the following:
On the controller, use the command >L Note: If &NREN has been set before >L is locked. Use >R instead.
In the status bar, select the "Remote" icon. On the front panel, press the [Local] key. In the block diagram, select "Context sensitive menu > Key Emulation > Local"
2. To return from "Remote LLO" state to manual or to "Remote" state, perform one of the following:
Note: In the local lockout state, the command >L and the [Local] key are locked. You can unlock this state only via remote control. On the controller, use the command &LOCS.
This command switches directly to manual operation. Send the command &REMS.
This command changes the remote control state from "Remote LLO" to "Remote". Use the Visual Basic command CALL IBLOC (generator%). The command switches directly to manual operation. VISA function viGpibControlREN() This function switches directly to manual operation.
13.8 Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
To achieve fast configuration, make complex test setups or repeating measurements reproducible, you can automate the required settings with scripts. A script contains a series of SCPI commands corresponding to the settings. When completed, it is converted to an executable format, saved in a file and can be run whenever needed.
If you frequently need to load and run a script, assign the script to the [ (User)], and you can quickly and easily perform the task. See Chapter 12.2.4, "How to Assign Actions to the [ (User)] Key", on page 348. In contrast to "Recall Setup" via the [ (User)] key, an assigned script execution does not close active dialogs and windows. On the contrary, even active window control (open / close) is possible.
Figure 13-6: Steps for performing SCPI Scripts
In the graph, you can see the main steps required to work with an SCPI script.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
414
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
Creating a SCPI list
With the SCPI record functions, you can create a SCPI command list directly in the instrument and then export the list to the controller. If you want to edit or write a script manually, use a suitable editor on the controller. Even for manually creating, the instrument supports you by showing the corresponding command syntax and the current settings value.
Directly in the instrument, you can create a SCPI list at any time of operation, in the following ways:
Recording steps Both, automatic and manual SCPI recording of settings is possible. You can start, stop and resume automatic recording, and also record individual commands manually.
Manually record the steps selectively In manual recording mode, you can deliberately record a SCPI command with the "Add CPI Command to Recording List" function, see How to record SCPI lists manually.
Automatically record all performed steps The instrument records the SCPI command and settings value of each step you perform, and then writes the commands to the file system, see How to record SCPI lists automatically. You can also add a SCPI command manually to the recording list during automatic SCPI recording.
Note: The Signal Generator clears the SCPI list after booting automatically.
Generating all settings at once Generates the SCPI commands of the current instrument settings in one step, and writes the command list in a temporary list, see How to create a SCPI list with the current instrument settings in one step. Note: This function lists all commands in alphabetical order, in contrast to the recording or manual creation, which consider the order the settings are configured. Using this function can slow down the runtime or cause errors during execution. Therefore, always check and revise a script if necessary, see "How to check an SCPI list" on page 421.
Manually create a command script with "Copy" and paste Enables you to copy the SCPI command and the current setting, see Chapter 13.8.1, "Show SCPI Command", on page 417.
Some parameters cannot be set by an SCPI command.
If so, no SCPI command found is entered instead of a command when you record or generate all settings at once.
The difference between Show SCPI Command and the provided cross-reference
If you want to enter your settings in a script, or use a remote control program, you must know the corresponding SCPI command and the exact syntax.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
415
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
If you need to look up the SCPI command, the instrument offers two ways to figure it out quickly.
"Show SCPI command" (context-sensitive menu) Displays the SCPI command syntax of a selected parameter including the current setting value, see "Findig out the SCPI command using "Show SCPI Command"" on page 423. The "Copy" function enables you to write an SCPI script conveniently by hand.
Instrument help ([Help] key) Opens a help topic that describes the selected parameter or instrument function, including a cross-reference to the corresponding SCPI command. The reference leads you to the description of the SCPI command comprising the complete SCPI syntax, all available setting values, value ranges, etc. See "Findig out the SCPI command using the online help" on page 423.
Creating and exporting a script file
When the script list is completed, a code generator translates the SCPI commands into the source code of a proprietary programming language, using a code template. Therefore, each language requires an appropriate code template. When converted, you can save the script in a file with an extension corresponding to the programming language.
The R&S SMA100B provides the following predefined code templates by default:
Plain SCPI Represents SCPI base format, that is ASCII format, saved as text file (*.txt).
MATLAB A programming environment, frequently used in signal processing and test and measurement applications (*.m). You can directly use this format with MATLAB(c) Toolkit. For comprehensive information on this topic, refer to the application note 1GP60: MATLAB Toolkit for R&S Signal Generators.
NICVI An ANSI C programming environment designed for measurements and tests (*.c). You can directly use this format with National Instruments LabWindows CVI.
Python3 A general purpose and high level programming language (*.py).
You can also convert a script to a user-specific format. In this case, you need a code template with the extension *.expcodetmpl.
For information on how to select the code template and save the script in a file, see Chapter 13.8.3, "SCPI Recording Export Settings", on page 418.
Executing an SCPI script
An SCPI script primarily runs on the controller PC. In addition, you can execute a script directly on the instrument, by assigning the script to the [ (User)] key.
See Chapter 12.2.4, "How to Assign Actions to the [ (User)] Key", on page 348.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
416
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
13.8.1 Show SCPI Command
Access: 1. Select the parameter. 2. Open the context-sensitive menu (tap and hold). 3. Select "Show SCPI Command".
This function provides the syntax of the remote command with the current setting.
Copy Copies the command and the current setting.
Close Exits the "SCPI Command" dialog.
13.8.2 Displaying an SCPI List
The instrument displays a recorded SCPI list and thus provides viewing the recorded results before exporting.
Depending on the starting point, you can access the "SCPI Recording List" dialog as follows:
During recording Select "Show SCPI Recording List" in the context-sensitive menu.
At any time outside recording Select "Show SCPI Recording List" in the context-sensitive menu. This function assumes that at least one recording has been executed after power-on.
At the end of the recording Select "Stop automatic SCPI recording". The dialog opens automatically.
After you have exported the script to a file. Select "SCPI Recording Export > Show file content" See Chapter 13.8.3, "SCPI Recording Export Settings", on page 418.
The "SCPI Recording List" shows the last recorded and exported commands.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
417
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
SCPI Recording List Lists the automatically or manually recorded recorded SCPI commands.
Export Opens the SCPI Recording Export dialog for configuring the file parameters for export.
Remove All, Remove First, Remove Last Deletes either the first, the last or all recorded SCPI commands. To remove several recorded commands, repeat the removing. For post processing, export the SCPI command list in a file, see Chapter 13.8.5, "How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists", on page 422.
13.8.3 SCPI Recording Export Settings
Scripts are configured and saved in the "SCPI Recording Export" dialog. This dialog opens automatically, when you stop recording.
Access: 1. Select "Show SCPI Recording List" in the context-sensitive menu.
The "SCPI Recording List" dialog opens. 2. Select "Export".
The "SCPI Recording Export" dialog contains all functions required for export of command lists to a file. It enables you to select the source code format, assign an individual filename and display the file content.
Format Selects the source code format for the command list.
"Plain SCPI" Uses SCPI syntax.
"Predefined Code Generator" Accesses the predefined templates for common source code generators that convert the recorded settings in the programming languages MATLAB or NICVI or Python.
"User Code Generator" Use this setting to convert a script by a user-specific code generator.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
418
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
Select Code Template Opens the standard "File Select" dialog and lists the predefined or user-defined code templates. See Chapter 11.5.1, "File Select Settings", on page 315.
File Opens the standard file select dialog "Select Output File", see Chapter 11.5.1, "File Select Settings", on page 315.
Export Executes data export. The SCPI list is saved in as file with the selected filename and in the selected directory, see File.
Reload Reloads a SCPI list from a file. You can export recorded SCPI lists to files (see File and Export), that can be modified.
File content Displays the content of the script in the selected format and code template.
13.8.4 How to Record / Create SCPI Lists
How to record SCPI lists automatically
The following example briefly explains how to proceed when you want to record SCPI lists.
For comprehensive description, see 1GP98: SCPI Recorder Test Automation on a Fingertip.
1. On the screen, open the context-sensitive menu (touch and hold, or right mouse click) and select "Start SCPI recording".
Starting from now, all steps you perform are recorded. 2. To stop SCPI recording, select "context-sensitive menu > Stop SCPI recording".
The "SCPI Recording List" dialog opens automatically. 3. Proceed with How to check an SCPI list.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
419
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
How to record SCPI lists manually
1. To retrace your settings, open the context-sensitive menu and select "Mark all Parameters Changed from Preset".
This function identifies and highlights all settings you have changed, both in the block diagram, and in the dialogs.
2. For selectively recording your steps: a) Set the parameter. b) Open the context-sensitive menu. c) Select "Add SCPI Command to Recording List"
Tip: You cannot see "Add SCPI ..." in the menu? A possible reason is opening the menu outside of a dialog or input field, for example in a block diagram. Open the context-sensitive menu within the corresponding dialog or input field, and the feature is available. d) Continue with the next setting, and repeat steps a to b whenever needed. Each time you select "Add SCPI ...", the SCPI command is appended to a temporary list. 3. To check the progress of the recording, select "Context-Sensitive > Show SCPI Recording List".
The "SCPI Recording List" dialog opens, displaying all recorded settings so far. 4. Proceed with How to check an SCPI list.
How to create a SCPI list with the current instrument settings in one step You can also generate a SCPI list from a manually created instrument state at any time, in only one step.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
420
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
To generate an SCPI list with commands for all settings performed: 1. Select "Save/Recall > SCPI Export".
The instrument opens the standard file select dialog, see Chapter 11.4.1, "Save/ Recall Settings", on page 311.
2. In the "Format" entry field, select the source code.
3. Depending on the selected format, convert the script as described in Chapter 13.8.5, "How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists", on page 422
4. Enter a filename.
5. Select "Export". The instrument writes all SCPI commands of the key parameters and the modified settings in the file. Also assigns the file extension automatically according to the source code format.
6. To preview the content of the SCPI list: a) Select "System Config > Save/Recall". b) Select "Operation Mode > SCPI-Export". c) In the /var/user/ directory, select a previously saved file. d) Select "Show SCPI List". The list of all SCPI commands is displayed, for example, for a final check.
Exporting the SCPI list of the instrument state in one step is a fast and convenient method. Nevertheless, it usually requires postprocessing on an external PC.
How to check an SCPI list
The easiest way to check a list, is to execute it. The generator returns a warning if a setting could not be performed.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
421
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
However, we recommend that you check the list and possibly rework. It can be that ... A parameter has not assigned an SCPI command or an element of the user inter-
face has not an assigned parameter. In these cases, :SYST:INF:SCPI 'SCPI command not available' is entered in the list instead. Such entries are also detected during execution. The instrument recognizes these incomplete commands and displays an error message. A preset has been executed, but several standards subsequently perform some internal settings that are also assigned to the list with "SCPI Export". After a preset still some settings are defined, which are then written to the list generated with "SCPI Export."
Some suggestions on how you can check and revise a list:
1. Search and remove missing command entries.
2. Remove unnecessary content written after a preset.
3. Rearrange the commands to a reasonable order. If you, for example, set a STATe command to the last position of a list, you can avoid intermediate calculations of the signal.
4. Preview the list for completeness by comparing it with the modified settings in the manual mode.
a) To retrace your settings in manual operation, open the context-sensitive menu and select "Mark all parameters changed from preset". The function identifies all settings you have changed, both in the block diagram, and in the dialogs. They appear orange.
b) Check whether there is a command in the list for all modified settings.
5. To perform modifications, export the list to a PC, using for example a USB flash drive.
13.8.5 How to Convert and Save SCPI Lists
After completing the recording, the "SCPI Recording Export" dialog opens.
1. Select the "Format" for the command syntax in which you want to save the list.
2. "Select Code Template" Depending on the selected format, proceed accordingly: Note: Select the code template before exporting. a) Plain SCPI Continue with the next step. b) Predefined code generator The "SCPI Recording Export - Select Predefined Code Template" dialog opens. Select one of the predefined code templates.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
422
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts
c) User code generator A file system ("SCPI Recording Export - Select User Code Template") dialog opens. Select your user-defined code template. The code template must have file extension *.expcodetmpl.
3. Select "File..." The "SCPI Recording Export - Select Output File" dialog opens.
4. Select "New" and assign a filename for saving the recorded list.
5. In the "SCPI Recording Export" dialog, select "Export". Saves the recorded data either in ASCII format (plain SCPI), or in the corresponding format of the used code template, and shows the SCPI list in the "File Content" section.
13.8.6 How to Find Out the SCPI Commands for GUI Functions
Findig out the SCPI command using "Show SCPI Command"
1. To find out the SCPI command of a parameter in manual operation, select the respective parameter.
2. Open the context-sensitive menu and select "Show SCPI command"
You get the detailed command syntax, including the currently set value.
With the "Copy" function, you can conveniently paste the command including the current setting, e.g., in a command script.
Findig out the SCPI command using the online help If you are looking for the remote command to a function in manual operation, you find it in the description of the online help.
1. To find out the SCPI command of a parameter in manual operation, select the respective parameter.
2. To open the corresponding help topic, select one of the following: In the display, select "context-sensitive menu > Help".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
423
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC
On the front panel, press the [Help] key. The help topic opens. Apart from the function description, it contains the SCPI command in detailed syntax.
How to find the corresponding GUI function to a command Conversely, if you are looking for a function in the GUI, which belongs to a SCPI, you find it via a cross-reference in the online help and in the user manual.
13.9 Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC
This section shows you some examples of the various possibilities to set up remote operation. Using a desktop system
Chapter 13.9.2.1, "Using a Web Browser", on page 425 Chapter 13.9.2.2, "Using a VNC Client Software", on page 425 Using a smart device Chapter 13.9.3.1, "Using a VNC App", on page 428 Chapter 13.9.3.2, "Using a Web Browser with HTML5", on page 428 Chapter 13.9.3.3, "Special Mode QR Code ", on page 429
13.9.1 How To Enable the VNC Service
1. NOTICE! Enabled VNC service can lead to unauthorized access. Change the computer name and password of the instrument. See Chapter 12.4.5, "How to Prevent Unauthorized Access", on page 365.
2. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Security > LAN Services". 3. Select "VNC > On". 4. Enter the Security Password. 5. Select "Accept".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
424
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC
13.9.2 How To Set Up a Remote Operation from a Desktop System
13.9.2.1 Using a Web Browser
The R&S SMA100B supports remote operation via VNC with any web browser, like Windows Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox for instance, or alternatively, an HTML5 web browser.
To operate the instrument via a web browser remotely:
1. Install the JRE (Java Runtime Environment) on the remote computer. Note: Skip this step if you are working with an HTML5 web browser.
2. Type the instruments' IP address in the address field of the web browser on your PC, e.g. http://10.113.1.151 The VNC authentication screen appears.
3. Enter the password and confirm with "OK". The default password is instrument.
After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated from the remote computer.
13.9.2.2 Using a VNC Client Software
A VNC client software is an application which can be used to access and control the instrument from a remote computer through a LAN connection. The VNC client software for setting up the connection is included in the operating system Linux/Unix per default. For Windows operating systems, a VNC client software must be installed manually. Various free-of charge programs such as Ultr@VNC or similar VNC client programs are available for download on the Internet.
Setting up the VNC connection on a Linux/Unix desktop client
1. Start a web browser on the remote computer. Enter the IP address of the instrument.
2. Enter the following address: vnc://<IP-address of the instrument>, for example vnc://10.113.1.151. A dialog opens requesting the password for the remote VNC connection.
3. Enter the password and confirm with "OK". The default password is instrument.
After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated from the remote computer.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
425
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC
Setting up the VNC connection on a Windows desktop client
1. Install the VNC viewer program component on the remote computer.
a) On the Internet, select a VNC client program and download it onto your PC. For example the free of charge software Ultr@VNC (vncviewer.exe is available, see http://www.uvnc.com/download/index.html.
b) Execute the VNC client installation. c) Select the VNC viewer program component and follow the installation instruc-
tions.
2. Start VNC viewer program component on the PC.
3. Select "VNC Server" and enter the IP address of the instrument. 4. To initialize the connection, select "Connect".
A dialog opens requesting the password.
5. Enter the password and confirm with "OK". The default password is instrument.
After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated from the remote computer.
Terminating VNC connection
Perform one of the following: a) On an external Unix/Linux PC, close the Internet browser or the signal generator window.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
426
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC
b) On an external Windows PC, close the VNC viewer program.
The connection is terminated but not disabled. It can be established again any time. In the "Active Connections" tab, the displayed TCP/IP connection disappears. See Chapter 12.4.5, "How to Prevent Unauthorized Access", on page 365.
13.9.3 How To Set Up a Remote Operation from a Smart Device
The R&S SMA100B supports remote operation via VNC from a smart device (remote client), like a tablet (tablet computer) or a smartphone. The smart device accesses the instrument via WLAN, either by a suitable App, or an HTML5 web browser, that means with embedded javascript.
There are several possibilities to establish a WLAN connection between the smart device and the R&S SMA100B. This section gives an example of how a network environment can be built up, and some essential configuration steps.
For more information, see: 1MA216: Remote Operation of Windows Based Instruments with Apple iPad 7BM82: Apple iPad Remote Control of Broadcasting T&M Instruments
Example:
Figure 13-7: Example of a network configuration for remote operation with a smart device
As shown in the figure, the R&S SMA100B and the WLAN router are connected to the LAN router. The smart device accesses the Rohde & Schwarz instrument via the WLAN router.
Prerequisites For this network configuration, the following prerequisites must be met: The required equipment is:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
427
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC
A LAN router A WLAN router (hot spot)
Required for accessing the R&S SMA100B The smart device must be known and accepted in the network of the
R&S SMA100B. The App or web browser implements the VNC functionality on the smart device for
remote operation.
It is recommended that all components in the network use DHCP, which automatically assigns the relevant address information.
With the configuration in the example, you can reach the instrument from a great distance, since the WLAN router acts as an additional access point.
13.9.3.1 Using a VNC App
Using a VNC App enables the smart device to access the R&S SMA100B via WLAN.
The VNC Apps are available from various manufacturers of the smart devices. The list of supported devices is different according to the smart device. 1. Refer to the manufacturer's website to find out whether a VNC App is available for
your device, and how it is installed. 2. In the network, establish the connection of the WLAN router to the LAN router.
We assume the connection of the LAN router and the R&S SMA100B and their configuration in the LAN. 3. Configure the WLAN router according to the manufacturer's instructions. 4. Install the required VNC App on your smart device. 5. On the smart device, start the VNC App. 6. In the address field, enter the IP address of the instrument. A log-on dialog opens and requests the password for the VNC connection. 7. Enter the password to establish the remote access. The default user name and password is instrument. See Chapter 12.4.5, "How to Prevent Unauthorized Access", on page 365. After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated.
13.9.3.2 Using a Web Browser with HTML5
The R&S SMA100B supports remote operation from a smart device via VNC with any HTML5 compliant web browser, like Internet Explorer, Firefox, Google Chrome, or Safari for instance.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
428
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control Operating the R&S SMA100B Remotely via VNC
To operate the instrument remotely via a web browser, proceed as follows: 1. In the web browser enter the IP address of the instrument, e.g. http://10.113.1.151. 2. Type the instrument IP address in the address field of the web browser on your PC,
e.g. http://10.113.1.151 The VNC authentication screen appears. 3. Enter the password and confirm with "OK". The default password is instrument. See Chapter 12.4.5, "How to Prevent Unauthorized Access", on page 365. After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated.
13.9.3.3 Special Mode QR Code
If your smart device is equipped with a camera and a QR code reader, you can scan the instrument's IP address or access the instrument with the Safari web browser.
QR code readers are available from various manufacturers of the smart devices. The list of supported devices is different according to the smart device. 1. Refer to the manufacturer's website of your smart device to find out whether a
reader is available for your device, and how it is installed. 2. Install the required QR code reader software on your device. 3. Start the reader. 4. On the R&S SMA100B, select "System Config > Remote Access". 5. In the "Remote Access" dialog, select the "QR-Code" tab. 6. Scan the QR code of the instrument with your smart device. 7. On the device, decode the scanned QR code and pass it to the web browser.
A dialog opens requesting the password for the VNC connection. 8. Enter the password and confirm with "OK".
The default password is instrument. After the connection is established, the current screen of the signal generator is displayed and the instrument can be remotely operated.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
429
R&S®SMA100B
13.10 References
Network Operation and Remote Control References
13.10.1 LXI Functionality
LAN Extensions for Instrumentation (LXI) is an instrumentation platform for measuring instruments and test systems that is based on standard Ethernet technology. LXI is intended to be the LAN-based successor to GPIB, combining the advantages of Ethernet with the simplicity and familiarity of GPIB. Like GPIB, LXI determines and standardizes the way the instrument behaves in a LAN. The LXI implementation in the R&S SMA100B allows you to change certain LAN settings, to reset the LAN connection, and to identify the instrument.
For information about the LXI standard, refer to the LXI website at http://www.lxistandard.org. See also "News from Rohde & Schwarz, article 2006/II - 190".
The LXI functionality in the R&S SMA100B is characterized by a common LAN implementation, including an ICMP ping responder for diagnostics. The instrument can be configured via a web browser. A LAN Configuration Initialize (LCI) mechanism resets the LAN configuration. The instrument also supports automatic detection in a LAN via the VXI-11 discovery protocol and programming by IVI drivers. In addition the R&S SMA100B provides the following LXI-related functionality: Integrated "LXI Status" dialog for LXI status indication and reset of the LAN config-
uration, see Chapter 13.5.1, "LXI Status Settings", on page 392. "LXI Browser Interface", as described in Chapter 13.5.2.1, "LAN Configuration",
on page 395. "SCPI Remote Trace" utility, see "SCPI Remote Trace" on page 397.
Firmware update To enable the full LXI functionality after a firmware update, shut down and restart the instrument.
13.10.2 Code Generator Templates
This section describes the main structure of the code generator templates, and shows the method by means of the NICVI template. The code generation is controlled by templates with the following blocks:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
430
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control References
Command #EXTENSION_START #EXTENSION_END #INIT_CODE_START #INIT_CODE_END
#COMMAND_CODE_START #COMMAND_CODE_END #NO_COMMAND_CODE_START #NO_COMMAND_CODE_END
#EXIT_CODE_START #EXIT_CODE_END
Function
Defines the output file extension.
Contains initial entries, such as included files and libraries, buffer size, commands for synchronization, or creating a VISA session. All entries between start and end are written once at the beginning of the output file.
Frame for an SCPI command. A command is accessed with %COMMAND.
Frame for a parameter with no SCPI command available. A parameter is accessed with %PARAMETER.
Closes the visa session. All entries between start and end are written once at the end of the output file.
Templates are created in ASCII format with file extension *.expcodetempl.
Example: Example to the code generator template NICVI.expcodetmpl:
#EXTENSION_START .c #EXTENSION_END
#INIT_CODE_START #include <ansi_c.h> #include <visa.h> #include <cvirte.h>
#define MAX_BUFFER_SIZE 200 static ViStatus status; static ViSession defaultRM, handle;
static void write_command(char *command) {
char writeBuffer[MAX_BUFFER_SIZE]; char readBuffer[MAX_BUFFER_SIZE]; int length; int readCount;
strcpy(writeBuffer, command); //append "*OPC?" to sync strcat(writeBuffer, ";*OPC?"); length = strlen (writeBuffer); writeBuffer[length]='\n';
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
431
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control References
length = length+1; viWrite (handle, writeBuffer, length, VI_NULL); //read result viRead(handle, readBuffer, 100, &readCount); } int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { if (InitCVIRTE (0, argv, 0) == 0) return -1; /* out of memory */ //create a VISA session and return a handle to it viOpenDefaultRM (&defaultRM); //create a VISA session to the serial port and return a handle to it viOpen (defaultRM, (ViRsrc)"TCPIP::localhost::INSTR", VI_NULL, VI_NULL, &handle); #INIT_CODE_END
#COMMAND_CODE_START write_command("%COMMAND");
#COMMAND_CODE_END
#NO_COMMAND_CODE_START //no SCPI command available for parameter %PARAMETER !
#NO_COMMAND_CODE_END
#EXIT_CODE_START viClose (handle); viClose (defaultRM); return 0;
} #EXIT_CODE_END
13.10.3 Remote Control States
How to recognize if there is an active remote connection to the instrument Observe the indication on the taskbar.
A softkey in the taskbar indicates if and what kind of remote connections are currently set up. See also Chapter 13.4.6, "Remote Connections Settings", on page 389.
The following table shows the different remote control states and the associated commands or actions to return to manual control.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
432
R&S®SMA100B
Network Operation and Remote Control References
Table 13-3: Remote control status icons
GUI symbol
Transition to remote control state...
Transition to manual operation...(local state)
>R (controller) Remote control, but usable front panel keys. The parameters are in read-only mode.
>L (controller) Tap the "Remote" icon (display) [Local] (front panel or key emulation)
A currently performed setting is indicated by the green arrows.
The setting must be completed (white arrows), otherwise the instrument remains in remote state.
&LLO (controller)
Remote control with locked front panel keys to prevent user interaction.
The parameters are in read-only mode.
You can unlock LLO, and thus return to manual operation only via remote control.
&LOCS (controller) CALL IBLOC (generator%) (controller)
Note: The command &REMS returns to "Remote" state.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
433
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions
14 Remote Control Commands
In the following, all remote-control commands are presented in detail with their parameters and the ranges of numerical values. For an introduction to remote control and the status registers, refer to: Chapter 13, "Network Operation and Remote Control", on page 371 Chapter A.1, "Additional Basics on Remote Control", on page 751
14.1 Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions
Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions:
Command usage If not specified otherwise, commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters. If a command can be used for setting or querying only, or if it initiates an event, the usage is stated explicitly.
Parameter usage If not specified otherwise, a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query. Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters. Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters. Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values.
Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI confirmed. All commands used by the R&S SMA100B follow the SCPI syntax rules.
Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing (overlapping command) is indicated as an Asynchronous command.
Reset values (*RST) Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument (*RST command) are indicated as *RST values, if available.
Factory preset values Default parameter values that are reset only by factory preset.
Default unit The default unit is used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parameter.
Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation, a link to the description is inserted.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
434
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Common Commands
14.2 Programming Examples
The corresponding sections of the same title provide simple programming examples for the R&S SMA100B. The purpose of the examples is to present all commands for a given task. In real applications, one would rather reduce the examples to an appropriate subset of commands.
The programming examples have been tested with a software tool which provides an environment for the development and execution of remote tests. To keep the examples as simple as possible, only the "clean" SCPI syntax elements are reported. Non-executable command lines (for example comments) start with two // characters.
At the beginning of the most remote control program, an instrument (p)reset is recommended to set the R&S SMA100B to a definite state. The commands *RST and SYSTem:PRESet are equivalent for this purpose. *CLS also resets the status registers and clears the output buffer.
In all the examples we assume that: A remote PC is connected to the instrument The remote PC and the instrument are switched on A connection between them is established The security setting "System Config > Setup > Security > SCPI over LAN" is
enabled.
14.3 Common Commands
Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many common commands are related to the Status Reporting System.
Available common commands:
*CLS.............................................................................................................................436 *ESE.............................................................................................................................436 *ESR?...........................................................................................................................436 *IDN?............................................................................................................................436 *IST?............................................................................................................................ 437 *OPC............................................................................................................................ 437 *OPT?...........................................................................................................................437 *PRE............................................................................................................................ 437 *PSC............................................................................................................................ 437 *RCL.............................................................................................................................438 *RST.............................................................................................................................438 *SAV.............................................................................................................................438 *SRE............................................................................................................................ 439 *STB?........................................................................................................................... 439
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
435
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Common Commands
*TRG............................................................................................................................ 439 *TST?........................................................................................................................... 439 *WAI............................................................................................................................. 439
*CLS
Clear status
Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
Usage:
Setting only
*ESE <Value>
Event status enable
Sets the event status enable register to the specified value. The query returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
Parameters: <Value>
Range: 0 to 255
*ESR?
Event status read
Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and then sets the register to zero.
Return values: <Contents>
Range: 0 to 255
Usage:
Query only
*IDN?
Identification
Returns the instrument identification.
Return values: <ID>
"Rohde&Schwarz,<device type>,<part number>/<serial number>,<firmware version>"
Example:
Rohde&Schwarz,SMA100B,1419.8888K02/0,4.00.033
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "IDN String" on page 389
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
436
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Common Commands
*IST?
Individual status query
Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form. The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll.
Return values:
<ISTflag>
0 | 1
Usage:
Query only
*OPC
Operation complete
Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed. This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query writes a "1" into the output buffer when all preceding commands have been executed, which is useful for command synchronization.
*OPT?
Option identification query
Queries the options included in the instrument. For a list of all available options and their description, refer to the data sheet.
Return values: <Options>
The query returns a list of options. The options are returned at fixed positions in a comma-separated string. A zero is returned for options that are not installed.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "OPT String" on page 389
*PRE <Value>
Parallel poll register enable
Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value. The query returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.
Parameters: <Value>
Range: 0 to 255
*PSC <Action> Power on status clear
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
437
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Common Commands
Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on. Thus a service request can be triggered when the instrument is switched on, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured. The query reads out the contents of the "power-on-status-clear" flag.
Parameters: <Action>
0 | 1
0 The contents of the status registers are preserved.
1 Resets the status registers.
*RCL <Number>
Recall
Loads the instrument settings from an intermediate memory identified by the specified number. The instrument settings can be stored to this memory using the command *SAV with the associated number.
It also activates the instrument settings which are stored in a file and loaded using the MMEMory:LOAD <number>, <file_name.extension> command.
Manual operation: See "Recall Immediate x" on page 314
*RST
Reset
Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the description of commands.
The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Preset" on page 307
*SAV <Number>
Save
Stores the current instrument settings under the specified number in an intermediate memory. The settings can be recalled using the command *RCL with the associated number.
To transfer the stored instrument settings in a file, use the command :MMEMory: STORe:STATe.
Manual operation: See "Save Immediate x" on page 313
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
438
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Common Commands
*SRE <Contents>
Service request enable
Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command determines under which conditions a service request is triggered.
Parameters: <Contents>
Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form. Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) is always 0.
Range: 0 to 255
*STB?
Status byte query
Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Usage:
Query only
*TRG
Trigger
Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. In particular, *TRG generates a manual trigger signal. This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem.
Usage:
Event
*TST?
Self-test query
Initiates self-tests of the instrument and returns an error code.
Return values: <ErrorCode>
integer > 0 (in decimal format) An error occurred. (For details, see the Service Manual supplied with the instrument).
0 No errors occurred.
Usage:
Query only
*WAI Wait to continue
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
439
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Preset Commands
Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and *OPC).
Usage:
Event
14.4 Preset Commands
The preset commands are not bundled in one subsystem. Therefore, they are listed separately in this section.
Four presetting actions are available: Activating the default state of all internal instrument functions (*RST on page 438).
Functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not changed, e.g. reference oscillator source settings. Activating the preset state of the parameters related to the selected signal path (: SOURce<hw>:PRESet on page 440) Activating the preset state of all parameters that are not related to the signal path (:DEVice:PRESet on page 440) Activating the original state of delivery (factory reset, :SYSTem:FPReset on page 441). Only functions that are protected by a password remain unchanged as well as the passwords themselves.
When resetting, the following deviation between remote and manual control exists:
In contrast to the [Preset] key, the SCPI commands *RST and :SYSTem:PRESet do not close open dialogs in the GUI.
:DEVice:PRESet............................................................................................................ 440 :SOURce<hw>:PRESet.................................................................................................. 440 :SYSTem:PRESet.......................................................................................................... 441 :SYSTem:FPReset......................................................................................................... 441
:DEVice:PRESet
Presets all parameters which are not related to the signal path, including the LF generator.
Example:
DEV:PRES Presets all instruments settings that are not related to the signal path.
Usage:
Event
:SOURce<hw>:PRESet Presets all parameters which are related to the selected signal path.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
440
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
Example: Usage:
SOUR:PRES Presets all settings that are related to signal path
Event
:SYSTem:PRESet
Triggers an instrument reset. It has the same effect as:
The [Preset] key. However, the command does not close open GUI dialogs like the key does.
The *RST command
For an overview of the settings affected by the preset function, see Table 11-1
Example:
SYST:PRES All instrument settings (also the settings that are not currently active) are reset to their default values.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Preset" on page 307
:SYSTem:FPReset
Triggers an instrument reset to the original state of delivery.
Example:
SYST:FPR All instrument settings (also the settings that are not currently active) are reset to the factory values.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Execute Factory Preset" on page 308
14.5 MMEMory Subsystem
The MMEMory subsystem (Mass MEMory) contains the commands for managing files and directories as well as for loading and storing complete instrument settings in files.
Mass storage location
Without any additional measures, the R&S SMA100B stores user files on the internal memory, the removable memory, or if connected, on a memory stick.
Both, the user directory /var/user/ on the internal memory or the /usb/ directory on the memory stick, can be used to preserve user-defined data. Any directory structure can be created.
The /var/volatile directory serves as a RAM drive and can be used to protect sensitive information. The data is available temporarily.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
441
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
If option R&S SMAB-B85 is installed, the R&S SMA100B maps the user directory to the removable memory. If a memory is mounted, user data is saved there. Otherwise user data is redirected to the volatile memory.
Default storage location
The R&S SMA100B stores user data in the user directory.
Depending on the installed options, the user directory is physically located on the internal memory or on the removable memory.
In the file system, user directory is always indicated as /var/user/.
In manual control, you access this directory via the "File Manager", see Chapter 11.8, "Using the File Manager", on page 318. In remote control, you can query it with the command :SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER?.
To query and change the default directory used for mass storage, use the command : MMEMory:CDIRectory.
14.5.1 File Naming Conventions
To enable files to be used in different file systems, consider the following file naming conventions: The filename can be of any length and is case-sensitive, i.e it is distinguished
between uppercase and lowercase letters. All letters and numbers are permitted (numbers are, however, not permitted at the
beginning of the filename). Avoid using special characters. Do not use slashes "\" and "/". These symbols are used in file paths. Avoid using the following filenames: CLOCK$, CON, COM1 to COM4,
LPT1 to LPT3, NUL or PRN They are reserved by the operating system.
File extension
The file and the optional file extension are separated by a period sign. The R&S SMA100B distinguishes the files according to their extensions; each type of file is assigned a specific file content and hence a specific file extension. Refer to Chapter A. 3, "Extensions for User Files", on page 777 for an overview of the supported file extensions.
Wildcards
The two characters "*" and "?" function as "wildcards", i.e. they are used for selecting several files. The "?" character represents exactly one character, while the "*" character represents all characters up to the end of the filename. "*.*" therefore represents all files in a directory.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
442
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
Filename and file path
When used in remote control commands, the parameter <filename> is specified as a string parameter with quotation marks. It can contain either the complete path including the root user directory /var/user and filename, or only the filename. The filename must include the file extension. The same applies for the directory /var/volatile and for the parameters <directory_name> and <path>.
Depending on how much information is provided, the values specified in the parameter or with the command MMEM:CDIR are used for the path and drive setting in the commands.
14.5.2 Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory
For better overview and easy file handling, you may not save all user files in the user directory /var/user but rater organize them into subdirectories.
The command syntax defines two general ways to access files with user data in a specific directory: Change the current default directory for mass memory storage and then directly
access the files in this default directory, like stored list files, files with user data or save/recall files. The subsequent commands for file handling (select, delete, read out files in the directory, etc.) require only specification of the filename. File extension can be omitted; after syntax evaluation of the used command, the R&S SMA100B filters out the relevant files. Define the absolute file path, including the user directory /var/user, created subdirectories and filename (see Example "Load file with user data from a specific directory" on page 443). As a rule, whenever an absolute file path is determined, it overwrites a previously specified default directory.
The following example explains this rule as a principle. Exceptions of this general rule are stated in the description of the corresponding command. The Chapter 14.5.3, "Programming Examples", on page 444 explains the general working principle with the commands for mass memory storage.
The same rule applies to the /var/volatile directory, see Example "Working with files in the volatile memory" on page 445.
Example: Load file with user data from a specific directory This example shows the principle of file handling in remote environment by using list commands. Working with the files of other subsystems is analogical. We assume that the directory /var/user/my_files is existing and contains the files list_test.lsw and list_2.lsw.
//Query files in the user diectory SOURce1:LIST:CATalog? // -
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
443
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
// no files
// Set the default directory MMEMory:CDIRectory "/var/user/my_files" SOURce1:LIST:CATalog? // "list_test","list_2"
// Specify the complete path to select a list file (*.lsw) // in the specific directory SOURce1:LIST:SELect "/var/user/my_files/list_test" SOURce1:LIST:DELete "/var/user/my_files/list_2"
14.5.3 Programming Examples
Example: Storing and loading current settings This example shows two ways of how to store the current instrument setting in the file settings.savrcltxt in the directory /var/user/savrcl.
Before the instrument settings can be stored in a file, they have to be stored in an intermediate memory using common command *SAV <number>. The specified number is then used in the :MMEMory:STORe:STATe command. Also, after loading a file with instrument settings with command :MMEMory:LOAD: STATe, these settings have to be activated with the common command *RCL <number>.
// Store the current settings in an intermediate memory with number 4 *SAV 4
// store the settings in a file in a specific directory; // the complete path has to be specyfied MMEMory:STORe:STATe 4,"/var/user/savrcl/settings.savrcltxt"
// store the settings in a file in the default directory; // set the default directory; specify only the file name MMEMory:CDIRectory "/var/user/savrcl" *SAV 4 MMEMory:STORe:STATe 4,"settings.savrcltxt"
// Load the stored settings in the intermediate memory 4 and activate them MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 4,"/var/user/settings.savrcltxt" *RCL 4
Example: Working with files and directories This example shows how to list files in a directory, list the subdirectories, query the number of files in a directory, create directory, rename and delete files.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
444
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
// Query the current default directory for mass storage, // change the directory to the default user directory "/var/user" // and read out the files in it MMEMory:CDIRectory? // "/var/user/temp" MMEMory:CDIRectory MMEMory:CDIRectory? // "/var/user/" MMEMory:CATalog? // 1282630,8102817792,".,DIR,4096","..,DIR,4096","Log,DIR,4096", // "settings.savrcltxt,BIN,16949","temp,DIR,4096","test,DIR,4096", // "list.lsw,BIN,1245201" // the directory "/var/user" contains the predefined directory "Log", // the subdirectories "test" and "temp" // as well as the files "settings.savrcltxt" and "list.lsw"
// query only the subdirectories of the current or specified directory MMEMory:DCATalog? "/var/user" // ".","..","Log","temp","test"
// query only number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth? "/var/user" // 5
// query number of files in the current or specified directory MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth? "/var/user" // 7
// Create a new directory for mass memory storage in the specified directory MMEMory:MDIRectory "/var/user/new"
// Copy the file "settings.savrcltxt" into the new directory MMEMory:COPY "/var/user/settings.savrcltxt","/var/user/new/settings.savrcltxt"
// Rename the file "settings.savrcltxt" into the new directory // and read out the files in this specific directory MMEMory:CDIRectory "/var/user/new" MMEMory:MOVE "settings.savrcltxt","settings_new.savrcltxt" MMEMory:CATalog? "/var/user/new" // 25141,8102789120,".,DIR,4096","..,DIR,4096","settings_new.savrcltxt,BIN,16949"
// Delete the "test" directory MMEMory:RDIRectory "/var/user/test"
Example: Working with files in the volatile memory This example shows how to work with files in the /var/volatile directory.
// Change the default directory for mass storage, // read out the files, load and play a file with the ARB
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
445
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory:CDIRectory "/var/volatile" MMEMory:CDIRectory? // "/var/volatile" MMEMory:CATalog? //13928,525352960,".,DIR,60","..,DIR,4096","list.lst,BIN,9772"
:SOURce1:LIST:SELect "/var/volatile/list" :SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE LIST :OUTPut1:STATe 1
14.5.4 Remote Control Commands
:MMEMory:CATalog?...................................................................................................... 446 :MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth?......................................................................................... 447 :MMEMory:CDIRectory................................................................................................... 447 :MMEMory:COPY...........................................................................................................447 :MMEMory:DATA............................................................................................................448 :MMEMory:DCATalog?....................................................................................................449 :MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth?....................................................................................... 449 :MMEMory:DELete......................................................................................................... 449 :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.................................................................................................449 :MMEMory:MDIRectory...................................................................................................450 :MMEMory:MOVE.......................................................................................................... 450 :MMEMory:MSIS............................................................................................................450 :MMEMory:RDIRectory................................................................................................... 451 :MMEMory:STORe:STATe............................................................................................... 451 :MEMory:HFRee?.......................................................................................................... 451
:MMEMory:CATalog? <path>
Returns the content of a particular directory.
Query parameters: <path>
string
String parameter to specify the directory. If you leave out the path, the command returns the contents of the directory selected with :MMEMory:CDIRectory. The path may be relative or absolute.
Return values: <UsedDiskSpace> Byte size of all files in the directory.
<FreeDiskSpace> Remaining disk space in bytes.
<FileInfo>
<NameFileN>,<SuffixFileN>,<SizeFileN>
List of files, separated by commas
<NameFileN> Name of the file.
<SuffixFileN> Type of the file. Possible suffixes are: ASCii, BINary, DIRectory
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
446
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
Usage: Manual operation:
<SizeFileN> Size of the file in bytes.
Query only
See "Directory, File List and Filename" on page 312
:MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth? <Path>
Returns the number of files in the current or in the specified directory.
Query parameters: <Path>
string
String parameter to specify the directory. If the directory is omitted, the command queries the content of the current directory, queried with :MMEMory:CDIRectory command.
Return values: <FileCount>
integer Number of files.
Usage:
Query only
:MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory>
Changes the default directory for mass memory storage. The directory is used for all subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them.
Parameters: <Directory>
<directory_name>
String containing the path to another directory. The path can be relative or absolute. To change to a higher directory, use two dots '..' .
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Directory, File List and Filename" on page 312
:MMEMory:COPY <SourceFile>[,<DestinationFile>]
Copies an existing file to a new file. Instead of just a file, this command can also be used to copy a complete directory together with all its files.
Setting parameters:
<SourceFile>
string
String containing the path and file name of the source file
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
447
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
<DestinationFile>
Usage: Manual operation:
string
String containing the path and name of the target file. The path can be relative or absolute. If <DestinationFile> is not specified, the <SourceFile> is copied to the current directory, queried with the :MMEMory: CDIRectory command. Note: Existing files with the same name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error message.
Setting only SCPI confirmed
See "Cut, Copy&Paste and Delete" on page 320
:MMEMory:DATA <Filename>, <BinaryBlock> :MMEMory:DATA? <Filename>
The setting command writes the block data <BinaryBlock> to the file identified by <Filename>.
Tip: Use this command to read/transfer stored instrument settings or waveforms directly from/to the instrument.
Parameters: <BinaryBlock>
#<number><length_entry><data>
#: Hash sign; always comes first in the binary block <number>: the first digit indicates how many digits the subsequent length entry has <length_entry>: indicates the number of subsequent bytes <data>: binary block data for the specified length. For files with a size with more than nine digits (gigabytes), the instrument allows the syntax #(<Length>), where <Length> is the file size in decimal format.
Parameters for setting and query:
<Filename>
string
String parameter to specify the name of the file.
Example:
MMEMory:DATA '/var/user/test.txt',#15hallo Writes the block data to the file test.txt. The digit 1 indicates a length entry of one digit; the digit 5 indicate a length of the binary data (hallo) in bytes. MMEMory:DATA? '/var/user/test.txt' Sends the data of the file test.txt from the instrument to the controller in the form of a binary block. Response: #15hallo
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
448
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
:MMEMory:DCATalog? <path>
Returns the subdirectories of a particular directory.
Query parameters: <path>
String parameter to specify the directory. If the directory is omitted, the command queries the content of the current directory, queried with :MMEMory:CDIRectory command.
Return values: <Catalog>
<file_entry>
Names of the subdirectories separated by colons. The first two strings are related to the parent directory.
Usage:
Query only
:MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth? [<Path>]
Returns the number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory.
Query parameters: <Path>
String parameter to specify the directory. If the directory is omitted, the command queries the contents of the current directory, to be queried with :MMEMory:CDIRectory command.
Return values: <DirectoryCount>
integer Number of parent and subdirectories.
Usage:
Query only
:MMEMory:DELete <Filename>
Removes a file from the specified directory.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
String parameter to specify the name and directory of the file to be removed.
Usage:
Event SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Cut, Copy&Paste and Delete" on page 320
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <SavRclStateNumb>, <file_name>
Loads the specified file stored under the specified name in an internal memory.
After the file has been loaded, the instrument setting must be activated using an *RCL command.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
449
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
Setting parameters: <SavRclStateNumb> Determines to the specific <number> to be used with the *RCL
command, e.g. *RCL 4.
<file_name>
String parameter to specify the file name with extension *.savrcltxt.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Recall" on page 314
:MMEMory:MDIRectory <Directory>
Creates a subdirectory for mass memory storage in the specified directory. If no directory is specified, a subdirectory is created in the default directory. This command can also be used to create a directory tree.
Setting parameters:
<Directory>
string
String parameter to specify the new directory.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Create New Directory" on page 320
:MMEMory:MOVE <SourceFile>, <DestinationFile>
Moves an existing file to a new location or, if no path is specified, renames an existing file.
Setting parameters:
<SourceFile>
string
String parameter to specify the name of the file to be moved.
<DestinationFile>
string String parameters to specify the name of the new file.
Usage:
Event SCPI confirmed
Manual operation: See "Rename " on page 320
:MMEMory:MSIS <Msis>
Defines the drive or network resource (in the case of networks) for instruments with windows operating system, using msis (MSIS = Mass Storage Identification String).
Note: Instruments with Linux operating system ignore this command, since Linux does not use drive letter assignment.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
450
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands MMEMory Subsystem
:MMEMory:RDIRectory <Directory>
Removes an existing directory from the mass memory storage system. If no directory is specified, the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory.
Setting parameters:
<Directory>
string
String parameter to specify the directory to be deleted.
Usage:
Event
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe <savrcl_state_nr>, <file_name>
Stores the current instrument setting in the specified file.
The instrument setting must first be stored in an internal memory with the same number using the common command *SAV.
Setting parameters: <savrcl_state_nr> Corresponds to the specific <number> defined with the *SAV
command, e.g. *SAV 4.
<file_name>
String parameter to specify the file name with extension *.savrcltxt.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Save" on page 313
:MEMory:HFRee?
Returns the used and available memory in Kb.
Return values: <TotalPhysMemKb> integer
Total physical memory.
<ApplicMemKb>
integer Application memory.
<HeapUsedKb>
integer Used heap memory.
<HeapAvailableKb> integer Available heap memory.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
451
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands CALibration Subsystem
14.6 CALibration Subsystem
The CALibration subsystem contains the commands needed for performing internal adjustments. This procedure is triggered by the query commands.
Suffix <hw>
Suffix CALibration<hw>
Value range [1]
Description Optional suffix
Understanding the query response
0: error-free execution of the adjustments
1: indicates that an error occurred; the process has been canceled
:CALibration:ALL[:MEASure]?......................................................................................... 452 :CALibration<hw>:ALL:DATE?.........................................................................................452 :CALibration<hw>:ALL:INFormation?............................................................................... 453 :CALibration<hw>:ALL:TEMP?........................................................................................ 453 :CALibration<hw>:ALL:TIME?......................................................................................... 453 :CALibration:DATA:FACTory:DATE?................................................................................. 454 :CALibration<hw>:CONTinueonerror................................................................................ 454
:CALibration:ALL[:MEASure]? [<Force>]
Starts all internal adjustments that do not need external measuring equipment.
NOTICE! High power at the RF output applied during internal adjustment can destroy a connected DUT (device under test).
How to: See "Running internal adjustments" on page 746.
Query parameters:
<Force>
string
Return values: <Measure>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
CAL:ALL:MEAS? // 0 // Executes the adjustments of all instrument functions. // When completed, it indicates that the adjustment // has been performed successfully.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Adjust All" on page 745
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:DATE? Queries the date of the most recently executed full adjustment.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
452
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands CALibration Subsystem
Suffix: <hw>
Return values: <Date> Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
. [1] Optional suffix
string
CAL:ALL:DATE? // "2016-01-01"
Query only See "Last Full Adjustment" on page 745
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:INFormation?
Queries the current state of the internal adjustment.
Return values: <CalInfoText>
string
Example:
CAL:ALL:INF? "Instrument is calibrated, no adjustment required." "UNCAL, instrument is warming up." "UNCAL, Please perform full adjustment after warming up." "UNCAL, Please perform full adjustment."
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Information" on page 746
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:TEMP?
Queries the temperature deviation compared to the calibration temperature.
Suffix: <hw>
. [1] Optional suffix
Return values: <Temperature>
string
Example:
CALibration:ALL:TEMP? // "+12.00 K"
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Temperature Offset" on page 746
:CALibration<hw>:ALL:TIME?
Queries the time elapsed since the last full adjustment.
Return values: <Time>
string
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
453
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands CSYNthesis Subsystem
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
CAL:ALL:TIME? // "22 days"
Query only See "Time" on page 745
:CALibration:DATA:FACTory:DATE?
Queries the date of the last factory calibration.
Return values: <Date>
string
Example:
CAL:DATA:FACT:DATE? // "2016-01-01"
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Last Factory Calibration" on page 732
:CALibration<hw>:CONTinueonerror <State>
Continues the calibration even though an error was detected. By default adjustments are aborted on error.
Suffix: <hw>
. [1] Optional suffix
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
CAL:CONT ON // Continues calibration after an error
Manual operation: See "Continue Adjustment on Error" on page 746
14.7 CSYNthesis Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands used to define the frequency settings for the separate clock source (clock synthesis). Option: see "Required options" on page 298.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
454
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands CSYNthesis Subsystem
Example:
CSYNthesis:OTYPe DSIN CSYNthesis:FREQuency 10000000 CSYNthesis:POWer -15 CSYNthesis:OFFSet:STATe 1 CSYNthesis:OFFSet 0.1 CSYNthesis:PHASe 180 CSYNthesis:PHASe:REFerence CSYNthesis:PHASe? // 0 CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE DEC CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE DEC // CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE USER // CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP 1000 // CSYNthesis:FREQuency UP // 10001000 // CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE USER // CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:INCRement 0.5 CSYNthesis:STATe 1
:CSYNthesis:STATe........................................................................................................455 :CSYNthesis:OTYPe...................................................................................................... 456 :CSYNthesis:FREQuency............................................................................................... 456 :CSYNthesis:POWer...................................................................................................... 456 :CSYNthesis:OFFSet:STATe............................................................................................457 :CSYNthesis:OFFSet......................................................................................................457 :CSYNthesis:VOLTage....................................................................................................457 :CSYNthesis:PHASe...................................................................................................... 457 :CSYNthesis:PHASe:REFerence..................................................................................... 458 :CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE.................................................................................. 458 :CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE........................................................................... 458 :CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]......................................................................... 458 :CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP...................................................................................... 459
:CSYNthesis:STATe <State>
Activates the clock synthesis.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
Manual operation: See " State " on page 299
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
455
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands CSYNthesis Subsystem
:CSYNthesis:OTYPe <Mode>
Defines the shape of the generated clock signal.
Parameters: <Mode>
SESine | DSQuare | CMOS | DSINe
SESine = single-ended sine DSINe = differential sine DSQuare = differential square CMOS = CMOS
*RST:
SESine
Example:
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
Manual operation: See "Output Type" on page 299
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the generated clock signal.
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Numerical value Sets the frequency
UP|DOWN Varies the frequency step by step. The frequency is increased or decreased by the value set with the command :CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP.
Range: 100E3 to 1.5E9
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
10E6
Example:
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
Manual operation: See " Frequency " on page 300
:CSYNthesis:POWer <Power>
Sets the power level of the generated clock signal.
Parameters: <Power>
float
Numerical value Sets the level
UP|DOWN Varies the level step by step. The level is increased or decreased by the value set with the command :CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement].
Range: -24 to 10 Increment: 0.01
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
456
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands CSYNthesis Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
*RST:
-20
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
See " Level " on page 300
:CSYNthesis:OFFSet:STATe <State>
Activates a DC offset.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
Manual operation: See " DC Offset State " on page 300
:CSYNthesis:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets the value of the DC offset.
Parameters: <Offset>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-5 to 5 0.001 0
Example:
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
Manual operation: See " DC Offset " on page 301
:CSYNthesis:VOLTage <Voltage>
Sets the voltage for the CMOS signal.
Parameters: <Voltage>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.8 to 2.7 0.001 1.8
Example:
CSYNthesis:OTYPe CMOS CSYNthesis:VOLTage 1.8 CSYNthesis:FREQuency 100000000 CSYNthesis:STATe 1
Manual operation: See "Voltage" on page 301
:CSYNthesis:PHASe <Phase> Shifts the phase of the generated clock signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
457
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands CSYNthesis Subsystem
Parameters: <Phase>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-36000 to 36000 0.1 0
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
See "Delta Phase" on page 301
:CSYNthesis:PHASe:REFerence
Resets the delta phase value.
Example:
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
Usage:
Event
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE <Mode> :CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE <Mode>
Defines the type of step size to vary the frequency and level at discrete steps.
Parameters: <Mode>
DECimal | USER
DECimal Increases or decreases the level in steps of 10.
USER Increases or decreases the value in increments, set with the command: :CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP :CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]
*RST:
DECimal
Example:
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
Manual operation: See "Variation Active" on page 301
:CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] <Increment>
Sets the step width of the rotary knob and, in user-defined step mode, increases or decreases the level.
Parameters: <Increment>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 35 0.01 1
Example:
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
Manual operation: See "Variation Step" on page 301
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
458
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands DIAGnostic Subsystem
:CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP <Step>
Sets the step width of the rotary knob and, in user-defined step mode, increases or decreases the frequency.
Parameters: <Step>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 14999E5 0.001 1E6
Example:
See Chapter 14.7, "CSYNthesis Subsystem", on page 454.
Manual operation: See "Variation Step" on page 301
14.8 DIAGnostic Subsystem
The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands used for instrument diagnosis and servicing. SCPI does not define any DIAGnostic commands; the commands listed here are all device-specific. All DIAGnostic commands are query commands which are not affected by *RST.
The test functions are intended for services purposes.
They are thus password-protected functions. Unlock the corresponding protection level to access them, see :SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe]
For more information, see R&S SMA100B Service Manual.
Common suffixes The following common suffixes are used in remote commands:
Suffix DIAGnostic<hw>
Value range [1]
Description Optional suffix
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
459
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands DIAGnostic Subsystem
Example: Programming example The example lists the commands required to query assemblies and test points for diagnosis purposes.
// Query the modules available in the instrument // and variant and revision state of a certain assembly DIAGnostic1:BGINfo:CATalog? // FRONT_AF,PSU300,IFB.BV,MB2_AF,... DIAGnostic1:BGINfo? "PSU300" // PSU300 2118.2067.02 01.00 100000
// Query the test points available in the instrument // and trigger the measurement in a selected test point DIAGnostic1:POINt:CATalog? // ATT6HP_AF_DET_N,ATT6HP_AF_DET_P,ATT6HP_AF_DET_TEMP... DIAGnostic1:MEASure:POINt? "ATT6HP_AF_DET_N" // 0.000000V
// Query the operating hours and number of power-on so far. DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe? // 112 h DIAGnostic:INFO:POCount? // 14
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo:CATalog?................................................................................. 460 :DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo?..............................................................................................460 :DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe?..............................................................................................461 :DIAGnostic:INFO:POCount?.......................................................................................... 461 :DIAGnostic<hw>:POINt:CATalog?...................................................................................462 :DIAGnostic<hw>[:MEASure]:POINt?............................................................................... 462
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo:CATalog?
Queries the names of the assemblies available in the instrument.
Return values: <Catalog>
string
List of all assemblies; the values are separated by commas The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument equipment configuration.
Example:
See Example "Programming example" on page 460.
Usage:
Query only
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo? [<Board>]
Queries information on the modules available in the instrument, using the variant and revision state.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
460
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands DIAGnostic Subsystem
Query parameters: <Board>
string
Module name, as queried with the command : DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo:CATalog?. To retrieve a complete list of all modules, omit the parameter. The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument equipment configuration.
Return values: <BgInfo>
<Module name> <Module stock number incl. variant> <Module revision> <Module serial number>
List of comma-separated entries, one entry per module. Each entry for one module consists of four parts that are separated by space characters.
Example:
See Example "Programming example" on page 460.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Assembly" on page 731
:DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe?
Queries the operating hours of the instrument so far.
Return values: <OperationTime>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to INT_MAX 0
Example:
See Example "Programming example" on page 460.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Operation Time / h" on page 731
:DIAGnostic:INFO:POCount?
Queris how often the instrument has been turned on so far.
Return values: <PowerOnCount>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to INT_MAX 0
Example:
See Example "Programming example" on page 460.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Power On Count" on page 732
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
461
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands DISPlay Subsystem
:DIAGnostic<hw>:POINt:CATalog?
Queries the test points available in the instrument.
For more information, see R&S SMA100B Service Manual.
Return values: <Catalog>
string List of comma-separated values, each representing a test point
Example:
See Example "Programming example" on page 460.
Usage:
Query only
:DIAGnostic<hw>[:MEASure]:POINt? <Name>
Triggers the voltage measurement at the specified test point and returns the measured voltage.
For more information, see R&S SMA100B Service Manual.
Query parameters: <Name>
<test point identifier>
Test point name, as queried with the command : DIAGnostic<hw>:POINt:CATalog?
Return values: <Value>
<value><unit>
Example:
See Example "Programming example" on page 460.
Usage:
Query only
14.9 DISPlay Subsystem
The DISPlay system contains the commands to set the power-save mode of the instrument.
Programming Examples
Example: Activating screen saver mode and display update Use the following commands to switch on the screen saver of your instrument or to automatic display. These settings are particularly useful when you control the instrument remotely.
// Set the wait time interval and activate the screen saver :DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff 10 :DISPlay:PSAVe:STATe ON
// Disable the display of the current frequency and level values in remote control :DISPlay:ANNotation:ALL ON
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
462
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands DISPlay Subsystem
// :DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON // :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude ON
// Enable automatic update of the display at defined time intervals :DISPlay:UPDate ON
Example: Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dialogs Use the following commands to query the dialog IDs of all currently open dialogs. The dialog ID is a prerequisite for opening and closing dialogs via the remote control.
The dialog ID is also required to define user key actions. See Chapter 12.2.4, "How to Assign Actions to the [ (User)] Key", on page 348.
// Query the dialog IDs of all open dialogs :DISPlay:DIALog:ID? // CEUtraDLGenSetDlg,_,$A DlgKeyRf_Rosc
// Open and close dialogs via remote control :DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN "CEUtraDLGenSetDlg,_,$A" :DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN "DlgKeyRf_Rosc" :DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe "DlgKeyRf_Rosc" :DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe:ALL
:DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff............................................................................................... 463 :DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe].................................................................................................464 :DISPlay:BRIGhtness..................................................................................................... 464 :DISPlay:BUTTon:BRIGhtness.........................................................................................464 :DISPlay:UPDate........................................................................................................... 464 :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude..................................................................................... 465 :DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency....................................................................................465 :DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL]..............................................................................................465 :DISPlay:DIALog:ID?...................................................................................................... 465 :DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN.................................................................................................. 466 :DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe................................................................................................ 466 :DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe:ALL..........................................................................................467
:DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff <HoldoffTimeMin>
Sets the wait time for the screen saver mode of the display.
Parameters: <HoldoffTimeMin>
integer
Range: 1 to 60
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 10)
Default unit: minute
Example:
see Example "Activating screen saver mode and display update" on page 462
Manual operation: See "Wait Time" on page 339
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
463
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands DISPlay Subsystem
:DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] <State>
Activates the screen saver mode of the display.
We recommend that you use this mode to protect the display, if you operate the instrument in remote control.
To define the wait time, use the command :DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
See Example "Activating screen saver mode and display update" on page 462
Manual operation: See "Screen Saver" on page 339
:DISPlay:BRIGhtness <BRIGhtness>
Sets the brightness of the dispaly.
Parameters: <BRIGhtness>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1.0 to 20.0 1.0 14.0
Example:
DISPlay:BRIGhtness 14
Manual operation: See "Display" on page 339
:DISPlay:BUTTon:BRIGhtness <ButtonBrightnes>
Sets the brightness of the [RF on/off] key.
Parameters: <ButtonBrightnes>
integer
Range: *RST:
1 to 20 n.a. (no preset. default: 14)
Example:
DISPlay:BUTTon:BRIGhtness 15
Manual operation: See "RF Hardkey" on page 339
:DISPlay:UPDate <Update>
Activates the refresh mode of the display.
Parameters: <Update>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
464
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands DISPlay Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
See Example "Activating screen saver mode and display update" on page 462
See "Display Update is" on page 340
:DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude <State>
Indicates asterisks instead of the level values in the status bar.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
Example:
See Example "Activating screen saver mode and display update" on page 462
Manual operation: See "Annotation Amplitude" on page 359
:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency <State>
Indicates asterisks instead of the frequency values in the status bar.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
Example:
See Example "Activating screen saver mode and display update" on page 462
Manual operation: See "Annotation Frequency" on page 359
:DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL] <State>
Displays asterisks instead of the level and frequency values in the status bar of the instrument.
We recommend that you use this mode if you operate the instrument in remote control.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Activating screen saver mode and display update" on page 462
:DISPlay:DIALog:ID?
Returns the dialog identifiers of the open dialogs in a string separated by blanks.
Return values: <DialogIdList>
<DialogID#1>< ><DialogID#2>< > ... < ><DialogID#n>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
465
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands DISPlay Subsystem
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
Dialog identifiers are string without blanks. Blanks are represented as $$. Dialog identifiers <DialogID> are composed of two main parts: <DialogName>[<OptionalParts>]
<DialogName> Meaningful information, mandatory input parameter for the commands: :DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN on page 466 :DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe on page 466
<Optional parts> String of $<X> values, where <X> is a character, interpreted as follows: $q<DialogQualifier>: optional dialog qualifier, usually the letter A or B, as displayed in the dialog title. $i<Instances>: comma-separated list of instance indexes, given in the order h,c,s,d,g,u,0. Default is zero; the terminating ",0" can be omitted. $t<TabIds>: comma-separated indexes or tab names; required, if a dialog is composed of several tabs. $x<Left>$y<Top>$h<Left>$w<Top>: position and size; superfluous information.
See Example "Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dialogs" on page 463
Query only
See "SCPI" on page 347
:DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN <DialogId>
Opens the specified dialog.
Setting parameters:
<DialogId>
string
To find out the dialog identifier, use the query :DISPlay: DIALog:ID?. The <DialogName> part of the query result is mandatory.
Example:
See Example "Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dialogs" on page 463
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "SCPI" on page 347
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe <DialogId> Closes the specified dialog.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
466
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands FORMat Subsystem
Setting parameters:
<DialogId>
string
To find out the dialog identifier, use the query :DISPlay: DIALog:ID?. The <DialogName> part of the query result is sufficient.
Example:
See Example "Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dialogs" on page 463
Usage:
Setting only
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe:ALL
Closes all open dialogs.
Example:
See Example "Querying the dialog IDs, opening and closing dialogs" on page 463
Usage:
Event
14.10 FORMat Subsystem
The commands in the FORMat subsystem determine the format of data returned by the R&S SMA100B to the controller. This affects all query commands that return a list of numerical data or block data, noted in the descriptions of the commands. The set data format applies to both paths.
:FORMat:BORDer.......................................................................................................... 467 :FORMat:SREGister....................................................................................................... 468 :FORMat[:DATA]............................................................................................................ 468
:FORMat:BORDer <Border>
Determines the sequence of bytes within a binary block. This only affects blocks which use the IEEE754 format internally.
Parameters: <Border>
NORMal | SWAPped
NORMal Expects/sends the least significant byte of each IEEE754 floating-point number first and the most significant byte last.
SWAPped Expects/sends the most significant byte of each IEEE754 floating-point number first and the least significant byte last.
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
FORM:BORD SWAP transfers the data with the most significant bit first.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
467
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands HCOPy Subsystem
:FORMat:SREGister <Format>
Determines the numeric format for responses of the status register.
Parameters: <Format>
ASCii | BINary | HEXadecimal | OCTal
ASCii Returns the register content as a decimal number.
BINary|HEXadecimal|OCTal Returns the register content either as a binary, hexadecimal or octal number. According to the selected format, the number starts with #B (binary), #H (hexadecimal) or #O (octal).
*RST:
ASCii
Example:
FORM:SREG HEX returns the register content as a hexadecimal number.
:FORMat[:DATA] <Data>
Determines the data format the instrument uses to return data via the IEC/IEEE bus.
The instrument automatically detects the data format used by the controller, and assigns it accordingly. Data format determined by this SCPI command is in this case irrelevant.
Parameters: <Data>
ASCii | PACKed
ASCii Transfers numerical data as plain text separated by commas.
PACKed Transfers numerical data as binary block data. The format within the binary data depends on the command. The various binary data formats are explained in the description of the parameter types.
*RST:
ASCii
Example:
FORM ASC transfers the data as ASCII data.
14.11 HCOPy Subsystem
The HCOPy subsystem contains the commands to generate and save a hard copy of the display.
To access a stored hard copy file, use the commands of the MEMM subsystem.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
468
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands HCOPy Subsystem
Example: Store a hard copy of the display The following example lists commands to configure and execute a hard copy to an automatic named file.
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage PNG :HCOPy:FILE:NAME:AUTO:STATe 1 // defines the output format // sets the instrument to automatically create output file names
// ****************************************************************** // Configure hard copy options, set automatic naming rules // An automatically generated file name consists of: // <Prefix><YYYY><MM><DD><Number>.<Format> // ****************************************************************** :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage BMP // defines output format *.bmp :HCOPy:REGion DIALog // selects the region to be copied :HCOPy:FILE:AUTO:DIR "/usb/HCopy" // sets destination directory of automatic named file :HCOPy:FILE:NAME:AUTO:FILE:PREFix:STATe 1 :HCOPy:FILE:NAME:AUTO:FILE:PREFix:"hardcopy" :HCOPy:FILE:NAME:AUTO:FILE:YEAR:STATe 1 :HCOPy:FILE:NAME:AUTO:FILE:MONTh:STATe 1 // uses automatic naming prefix // sets automatic naming prefix to "hardcopy" // uses automatic naming date parameters year and month
// ****************************************************************** // Execute and transfer the hard copy // ****************************************************************** :HCOPy:EXECute :HCOPy:DATA // generates a hard copy // transfers the hard copy to the remote client :HCOPy:FILE:AUTO:FILE? // queries the automatic file name // "hardcopy1607001.bmp" :HCOPy:FILE:AUTO:NUMBer? // queries the number in the automatic file name // "001" :HCOPy:FILE:AUTO? // queries the path and file name of the automatically generated file // "/usb/HCopy/hardcopy1607001.bmp"
14.11.1 Hard Copy Settings
With the following commands, you can configure the settings of a hard copy.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
469
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands HCOPy Subsystem
:HCOPy:DATA?..............................................................................................................470 :HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat................................................................................................ 470 :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage............................................................................................ 470 :HCOPy:REGion............................................................................................................ 470 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME].....................................................................................................470 :HCOPy[:EXECute]........................................................................................................ 471
:HCOPy:DATA?
Transfers the hard copy data directly as a NByte stream to the remote client.
Return values: <Data>
block data
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
Usage:
Query only
:HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat <Format> :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage <Language>
Selects the graphic format for the hard copy. You can use both commands alternatively.
Parameters: <Language>
BMP | JPG | XPM | PNG
*RST:
PNG
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
Manual operation: See "Format" on page 332
:HCOPy:REGion <Region>
Selects the area to be copied.
You can create a snapshot of the screen or an active dialog.
Parameters: <Region>
ALL | DIALog
*RST:
ALL
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
Manual operation: See "Region" on page 333
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME] <Name>
Determines the file name and path to save the hard copy, provided automatic naming is disabled.
Note: If you have enabled automatic naming, the instrument automatically generates the file name and directory, see Chapter 14.11.2, "Automatic Naming", on page 471.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
470
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands HCOPy Subsystem
Parameters: <Name>
Example:
Manual operation:
string See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469 See "File..." on page 332
:HCOPy[:EXECute]
Generates a hard copy of the current display. The output destination is a file.
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Save" on page 332
14.11.2 Automatic Naming
Use the following commands to automatically assign a file name.
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO?......................................................................................... 471 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory........................................................................... 471 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar................................................................. 472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE?................................................................................. 472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe.................................................................................472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe................................................................ 472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe........................................................... 472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe............................................................. 472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer?.................................................................. 473 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix..................................................................... 473 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe........................................................... 473
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO?
Queries path and file name of the hardcopy file, if you have enabled Automatic Naming.
Return values: <Auto>
string
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
Usage:
Query only
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory <Directory>
Determines the path to save the hard copy, if you have enabled Automatic Naming.
If the directory does not yet exist, the instrument automatically creates a new directory, using the instrument name and /var/user/ by default.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
471
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands HCOPy Subsystem
Parameters: <Directory>
Example: Manual operation:
string *RST:
/var/user/
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
See "Path..." on page 334
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar
Deletes all files with extensions *.bmp, *.jpg, *.png and *.xpm in the directory set for automatic naming.
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Clear Path" on page 334
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE?
Queries the name of the automatically named hard copy file.
An automatically generated file name consists of:
<Prefix><YYYY><MM><DD><Number>.<Format>.
You can activate each component separately, to individually design the file name.
Return values: <File>
string
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469.
Usage:
Query only
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe <State>
Activates automatic naming of the hard copy files.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
Manual operation: See "Automatic Naming" on page 333
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe <State> :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe <State> :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe <State>
Uses the date parameters (year, month or day) for the automatic naming. You can activate each of the date parameters separately.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
472
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands KBOard Subsystem
Parameters: <State>
Example: Manual operation:
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day" on page 334
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer?
Queries the number that is used as part of the file name for the next hard copy in automatic mode.
At the beginning, the count starts at 0. The R&S SMA100B searches the specified output directory for the highest number in the stored files. It increases this number by one to achieve a unique name for the new file.
The resulting auto number is appended to the resulting file name with at least three digits.
Return values: <Number>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to 999999 0
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Current Auto Number" on page 334
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix <Prefix> :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe <State>
Uses the prefix for the automatic generation of the file name, provided PREF:STAT is activated.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Store a hard copy of the display" on page 469
Manual operation: See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day" on page 334
14.12 KBOard Subsystem
The KBOard subsystem contains the commands to set a connected keyboard. :KBOard:LAYout............................................................................................................. 474
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
473
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands OUTPut Subsystem
:KBOard:LAYout <Layout>
Selects the language for an external keyboard and assigns the keys acccordingly.
Parameters: <Layout>
CHINese | DANish | DUTCh | DUTBe | ENGLish | ENGUK | FINNish | FRENch | FREBe | FRECa | GERMan | ITALian | JAPanese | KORean | NORWegian | PORTuguese | RUSSian | SPANish | SWEDish | ENGUS
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: ENGLish)
Example:
:KBOard:LAYout US // activates American keyboard
Manual operation: See "USB Keyboard > Layout" on page 339
14.13 OUTPut Subsystem
In the OUTPut subsystem, you can configure the output signals.
The LF output signal is defined with the commands of the Chapter 14.16.6, "SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 632 system.
Common suffixes The following common suffixes are used in remote commands:
Suffix OUTPut<hw>
Value range [1]
Description Optional suffix
:OUTPut:ALL[:STATe]..................................................................................................... 474 :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]....................................................................................................475 :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON............................................................................................ 475 :OUTPut<hw>:AMODe................................................................................................... 475 :OUTPut<hw>:FILTer:MODE........................................................................................... 476 :OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance?.............................................................................................476 :OUTPut:FPRoportional:SCALe....................................................................................... 476 :OUTPut:USER:MARKer.................................................................................................477 :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer?........................................................................... 477 :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer?............................................................................477 :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:CLEar................................................................................... 477 :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped?.............................................................................. 478
:OUTPut:ALL[:STATe] <State>
Activates the RF output signal of the instrument.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
474
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands OUTPut Subsystem
Example:
OUTPut:ALL:STATe 0
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] <State>
Activates the RF output signal.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
OUTP ON Activates the RF output.
Manual operation: See "RF State/RF ON" on page 67
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON <Pon>
Defines the state of the RF output signal when the instrument is switched on.
Parameters: <Pon>
OFF | UNCHanged
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: UNCHanged)
Example:
OUTP:PON OFF The RF output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on.
Manual operation: See " Power-On State " on page 340
:OUTPut<hw>:AMODe <AMode>
Sets the step attenuator mode at the RF output.
Parameters: <AMode>
AUTO | FIXed
AUTO The step attenuator adjusts the level settings automatically, within the full variation range.
FIXed The step attenuator and amplifier stages are fixed at the current position, providing level settings with constant output VSWR. The resulting variation range is calculated according to the position.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SOURce:POWer:ALC:STATe 1 OUTPut:AMODe FIXed
Manual operation: See " Mode " on page 213
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
475
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands OUTPut Subsystem
:OUTPut<hw>:FILTer:MODE <Mode>
Activates low harmonic filter or enables its automatic switching.
Parameters: <Mode>
ON | AUTO | 1
ON|1 Ensures best low harmonics performance but decreases the level range
AUTO Applies an automatically selected harmonic filter that fits to the current level setting.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
OUTPut:FILTer:MODE AUTO
Manual operation: See " Harmonic Filter " on page 77
:OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance?
Queries the impedance of the RF outputs.
Return values: <Impedance>
G1K | G50 | G10K
*RST:
G50
Example:
OUTP:IMP? queries the impedance of RF output. Response: 50 the impedance is 50 ohms
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "RF output impedance" on page 67
:OUTPut:FPRoportional:SCALe <OutpSelScale>
Selects the mode the voltage is supplied depending on the frequency.
The R&S SMA100B supplies the signal at the V/GHz X-Axis connector.
Parameters: <OutpSelScale>
S0V25 | S0V5 | S1V0 | XAXis
S0V25|S0V5|S1V0 Supplies the voltage proportional to the set frequency, derived from the selected setting.
XAXis Supplies a voltage range from 0 V to 10 V proportional to the frequency sweep range, set with[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency: STARt and [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP.
*RST:
S0V25
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
476
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands OUTPut Subsystem
Options:
R&S SMAB-B28
Manual operation: See " V/GHz / X-Axis " on page 196
:OUTPut:USER:MARKer <SelUserMarker>
Selects the signal for output at the Marker User1 connector.
Parameters: <SelUserMarker>
MARK | USER
MARK Assigns a marker signal to the output.
USER Intended for future use.
*RST:
MARK
Options:
R&S SMAB-B28
Manual operation: See " Marker / User " on page 197
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer? :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer?
Queries the settable minimum/maximum value in mode :OUTPut:AMODe FIXed, i.e. when the attenuator is not being adjusted.
See :OUTPut<hw>:AMODe on page 475
Return values: <Upper>
float
Increment: 0.01 Default unit: dBm
Example:
OUTPut1:AMODe FIXed OUTPut1:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer? // -27 OUTPut1:AFIXed:RANGe:LOW? // -50
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Level Range " on page 213
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:CLEar
Resets the protective circuit after it has been tripped.
To define the output state, use the command :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe].
Example:
OUTP:PROT:CLE Resets the protective circuit of the RF output.
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
477
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Manual operation: See "Overload" on page 214
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped?
Queries the state of the protective circuit.
Return values: <Tripped>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
OUTP:PROT:TRIP queries the state of the protective circuit of the RF output. Response: 0 the protective circuit has not tripped.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Overload" on page 214
14.14 Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
The power sensor measurement uses several subsystems: The CALCulate subsystem is used to configure the time gated measurements in
power analysis. The DISPlay subsystem is used to configure the diagram appearance. The INITiate command switches the local state of the continuous power mea-
surement on and off. The READ system is used to start and to retrieve the measurement result of the
power viewer measurement. The SENSe subsystem contains the commands for configuring the power viewer
and power analysis measurements with power sensors connected to the generator. Up to four sensors can be connected to the signal generator. The TRACe subsystem is used to configure the traces in power analysis and to retrieve the measurement results.
Power Viewer
The power viewer measurement is started with the READ command, this command also retrieves the measurement results.
The sensors are distinguished by the suffix under SENSe: Power sensor connected to the SENSOR port = SENSe[1] First Power sensor connected to the USB interface = SENSe2 Second Power sensor connected to the USB interface = SENSe3 Third Power sensor connected to the USB interface = SENSe4
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
478
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Power and Pulse Data Analysis, Gated Measurements (option R&S SMA100BK28)
The power analysis measurement commands are subsumed under the SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:... commands. Three measurement modes are available: Frequency, Power and Time.
The power analysis measurement is started with the SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:INITiate command and the measurement result retrieved with the TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:... commands.
The four sensors are distinguished by the suffix at the second key word SENSe.
The time gate settings are performed using the CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:... commands.
The measurement diagram and results can be stored in a hardcopy with the SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:... commands.
General parameter and measurement settings are valid for all connected sensors, therefore, no suffix is used in these commands.
14.14.1 CALCulate Subsystem
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:MATH<ch>:STATe............................................. 479 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:MATH<ch>:SUBTract........................................ 480 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:MATH<ch>:STATe.................................................... 480 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:MATH<ch>:SUBTract............................................... 480 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:AVERage?.................................................481 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:FEED........................................................481 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:MAXimum?................................................481 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STARt....................................................... 482 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STOP........................................................482 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STATe....................................................... 482 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:MATH<ch>:STATe.......................................................483 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:MATH<ch>:SUBTract.................................................. 483
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:MATH<ch>:STATe <State>
Activates the trace mathematics mode for "Frequency" measurement. This feature enables you to calculate the difference between the measurement values of two traces. For further calculation, a math result can also be assigned to a trace.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:POW:SWE:FREQ:MATH2:STATe Switches on math mode in trace 2.
Options:
R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Mathematics - Trace Power Analysis " on page 248
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
479
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:MATH<ch>:SUBTract <Subtract>
Subtracts the operands 1 and 2 and assigns the result to the selected trace in "Frequency" measurement mode.
Parameters: <Subtract>
T1T1 | T1T2 | T1T3 | T1T4 | T1REf | T2T1 | T2T2 | T2T3 | T2T4 | T2REf | T3T1 | T3T2 | T3T3 | T3T4 | T3REf | T4T1 | T4T2 | T4T3 | T4T4 | T4REf
Example:
CALC:POW:SWE:FREQ:MATH4:SUBT T2REF Subtracts the Reference and Trace 2, and assigns the result to Trace 4. The resulting curve is shown in the diagram.
Options:
R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Mathematics - Trace Power Analysis " on page 248
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:MATH<ch>:STATe <State>
Activates the trace mathematics mode for "Power" measurement. This feature enables you to calculate the difference between the measurement values of two traces. For further calculation, a math result can also be assigned to a trace.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:POW:SWE:POW:MATH2:STATe Switches on math mode in trace 2.
Options:
R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Mathematics - Trace Power Analysis " on page 248
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:MATH<ch>:SUBTract <Subtract>
Subtracts the operands 1 and 2 and assigns the result to the selected trace in "Power" measurement mode.
Parameters: <Subtract>
T1T1 | T1T2 | T1T3 | T1T4 | T1REf | T2T1 | T2T2 | T2T3 | T2T4 | T2REf | T3T1 | T3T2 | T3T3 | T3T4 | T3REf | T4T1 | T4T2 | T4T3 | T4T4 | T4REf
Example:
CALC:POW:SWE:POW:MATH4:SUBT T2REF Subtracts the Reference and Trace 2, and assigns the result to Trace 4. The resulting curve is shown in the diagram.
Options:
R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Mathematics - Trace Power Analysis " on page 248
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
480
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:AVERage?
Queries the average power value of the time gated measurement.
Return values: <Average>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-1000 to 1000 1E-12 0
Example:
SENS:SWE:MODE TIME Activates time mode for power analysis. CALC:SWE:TIME:GATE:STAT ON Activates time gated measurement. SENS:SWE:INIT Activates a single power analysis measurement. CALC:SWE:TIME:GATE2:AVER? Queries the average power in time gate 2 for trace 1 (=default).
Usage:
Query only
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " State - Gate " on page 270
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:FEED <Feed>
Selects the trace for time gated measurement. Both gates are assigned to the same trace.
Parameters: <Feed>
TRAC1 | TRAC2 | TRAC3 | TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3 | TRAC4 | TRACe4
*RST:
TRAC1
Example:
CALC:SWE:TIME:GATE:FEED TRAC2 Assigns the gates to trace 2.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Trace - Gate " on page 269
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:MAXimum?
Queries the average power value of the time gated measurement.
Return values: <Maximum>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-1000 to 1000 1E-12 0
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
481
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example:
Usage: Options: Manual operation:
SENS:SWE:MODE TIME Activates time mode for power analysis. CALC:SWE:TIME:GATE:STAT ON Activates time gated measurement. SENS:SWE:INIT Activates a single power analysis measurement. CALC:SWE:TIME:GATE2:MAX? Queries the peak power in time gate 2 for trace 1 (=default).
Query only
Option R&S SMAB-K28
See " State - Gate " on page 270
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STARt <Start> :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STOP <Stop>
Sets the start time of the selected gate. Insert value and unit.
Parameters: <Stop>
float
Increment: 1E-12
*RST:
Start/Stop: 5/15 (Gate1), 25/35 (Gate2)
Example:
CALC:SWE:TIME:GATE2:STAR 20us Sets a start time of 20 us for gate 2. CALC:SWE:TIME:GATE2:STOP 30us Sets a stop time of 30us for gate 2.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Start / Stop - Gate " on page 270
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STATe <State>
Activates the gate settings for the selected trace. The measurement is started with command SENS:POW:INIT. Both gates are active at one time.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:SWE:TIME:GATE:STAT ON Enables time gated measurement.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " State - Gate " on page 270
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
482
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:MATH<ch>:STATe <State>
Activates the trace mathematics mode for "Time" measurement. This feature enables you to calculate the difference between the measurement values of two traces. For further calculation, a math result can also be assigned to a trace.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
CALC:POW:SWE:TIME:MATH1:STATe Switches on math mode.
Options:
R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Mathematics - Trace Power Analysis " on page 248
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:MATH<ch>:SUBTract <Subtract>
Subtracts the operands 1 and 2 and assigns the result to the selected trace in "Time" measurement mode.
Parameters: <Subtract>
T1T1 | T1T2 | T1T3 | T1T4 | T1REf | T2T1 | T2T2 | T2T3 | T2T4 | T2REf | T3T1 | T3T2 | T3T3 | T3T4 | T3REf | T4T1 | T4T2 | T4T3 | T4T4 | T4REf
Example:
CALC:POW:SWE:TIME:MATH4:SUBT T2REF Subtracts the Reference and Trace 2, and assigns the result to Trace 4. The resulting curve is shown in the diagram.
Options:
R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Mathematics - Trace Power Analysis " on page 248
14.14.2 DISPlay Subsystem
:DISPlay[:WINDow][:POWer]:SWEep:BACKground:COLor................................................. 483 :DISPlay[:WINDow][:POWer]:SWEep:GRID:STATe............................................................ 484
:DISPlay[:WINDow][:POWer]:SWEep:BACKground:COLor <Color>
Defines the background color of the measurement diagram. The selected color applies also to the hardcopy of the diagram.
Parameters: <Color>
BLACk | WHITe
*RST:
BLACk
Example:
DISP:SWE:BACK:COL WHIT The measurement is indicated with a white background.
Manual operation: See " Background Color - Power Analysis " on page 258
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
483
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:DISPlay[:WINDow][:POWer]:SWEep:GRID:STATe <State>
Indicates a grid in the diagram.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
DISP:SWE:GRID:STAT OFF Deactivates the indication of a grid in the diagram area.
Manual operation: See " Show Grid - Power Analysis " on page 258
14.14.3 INITiate Command
:INITiate<hw>[:POWer]:CONTinuous <Continuous>
Switches the local state of the continuous power measurement by R&S NRP power sensors on and off. Switching off local state enhances the measurement performance during remote control.
The remote measurement is triggered with :READ<ch>[:POWer]?). This command also returns the measurement results. The local state is not affected, measurement results can be retrieved with local state on or off.
Parameters: <Continuous>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
INIT1:CONT ON Switches local state of continuous power measurement on.
Manual operation: See " State " on page 237
14.14.4 SENSe SWEep Subsystem
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:OFFSet........................................... 486 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe................................. 487 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge:STARt................................487 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge:STOP................................ 487 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge[:STATe].............................. 488 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:OFFSet.................................................. 488 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe........................................ 489 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:SFRequency........................................... 489 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:SFRequency:STATe................................. 489 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet..................................................... 490 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe........................................... 490 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:STATe............................................ 490 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:BASE............................491
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
484
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:HREFerence...... 491 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:LREFerence.......491 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:REFerence........ 492 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:SFRequency..............................................492 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:SFRequency:STATe....................................492 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:AUTO.......................................... 493 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:DTIMe......................................... 493 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:HYSTeresis.................................. 493 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:LEVel...........................................494 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:SLOPe.........................................494 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:SOURce...................................... 494 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO.......................................................................................... 494 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:ABORt.....................................................................................495 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:COPY.........................................495 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:POINts?......................................495 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:XVALues.....................................495 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:YVALues.....................................496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:RMODe................................................................ 496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing[:MODE]................................................... 496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STARt................................................................... 496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STEPs.................................................................. 497 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STOP................................................................... 497 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:TIMing[:MODE]...................................................... 497 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:AUTO....................................................... 498 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:AUTO:RESet............................................. 498 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:MAXimum................................................. 498 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:MINimum.................................................. 499 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DATA?......................................................................... 499 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice........................................................................ 500 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage....................................................... 501 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:DPOint.................................... 501 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:HEADer................................... 501 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:ORIentation..............................502 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV[:COLumn]:SEParator................ 502 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:SIZE................................................................ 502 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]................................................................ 503 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory....................................... 503 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar.............................503 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE?.............................................504 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe............................................ 504 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY?................................... 504 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe........................... 505 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh?.............................. 505 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe...................... 505 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer?............................. 506 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix.................................506 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe.......................506 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR?................................. 506 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe.........................507 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy[:EXECute]....................................................................507
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
485
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:INITiate................................................................................... 507 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:MODE..................................................................................... 507 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:COPY................................................508 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:POINts?.............................................508 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:XVALues............................................508 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:YVALues............................................508 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:RMODe........................................................................509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing[:MODE].......................................................... 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STARt.......................................................................... 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STEPs......................................................................... 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STOP.......................................................................... 510 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:TIMing[:MODE]............................................................. 510 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:AUTO.............................................................. 510 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:AUTO:RESet.................................................... 511 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:MAXimum.........................................................511 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:MINimum......................................................... 512 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:RMODe................................................................................... 512 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:AVERage[:COUNt]........................................................... 512 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:COPY...................................................513 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:POINts?............................................... 513 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:XVALues.............................................. 513 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:YVALues.............................................. 513 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:RMODe.......................................................................... 514 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:SPACing[:MODE].............................................................514 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STARt.............................................................................514 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STEPs............................................................................ 514 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STOP............................................................................. 515 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:TEVents.......................................................................... 515 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:AUTO................................................................. 515 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:AUTO:RESet....................................................... 516 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:MAXimum........................................................... 516 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:MINimum............................................................ 517
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:OFFSet <Offset>
Defines the level offset at the sensor input in dB. Activate the offset with the command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe on page 487.
Parameters: <Offset>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-100 to 100 0.01 0
Example:
SENS2:SWE:FREQ:OFFS -3dB Defines a level offset of -3 dB. SENS2:SWE:FREQ:OFFS:STAT ON Activates the specified level offset.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
486
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Manual operation: See " Level Offset - Power Analysis " on page 255
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe <State>
Activates a level offset at the sensor input. Define the appropriate value with the command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:OFFSet on page 486.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS2:SWE:FREQ:OFFS:STAT ON Activates the specified level offset.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Level Offset State- Power Analysis " on page 255
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge:STARt <Start>
Sets the start frequency for the frequency power analysis with separate frequencies.
Parameters: <Start>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to 1E12 1E6
Example:
SENS2:SWE:FREQ:SENS:SRAN:STAT ON Activates use of a separate frequency range for frequency versus power measurement for sensor 2. SENS2:SWE:FREQ:SENS:STAR 2.0GHZ Sets a sweep start at 2 GHz irrespective of the current signal generator frequency settings.
Manual operation: See " Min Frequency - Power Analysis " on page 256
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge:STOP <Stop>
Sets the stop frequency for the frequency power analysis with separate frequencies.
Parameters: <Stop>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to 1E12 10E6
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
487
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example: Manual operation:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:SENS2:SRAN:STAT ON Activates use of a separate frequency range for frequency versus power measurement. SENS:SWE:FREQ:SENS2:STAR 2.0GHZ Sets a sweep start at 2 GHz irrespective of the current signal generator frequency settings. SENS:SWE:FREQ:SENS2:STOP 2.9GHZ Sets a sweep stop at 2.9 GHz irrespective of the current signal generator frequency settings.
See " Max Frequency - Power Analysis " on page 256
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge[:STATe] <State>
Activates the use of a frequency range for the power measurement that is different to the set signal generator frequency range. The separate frequency range is entered with commands :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge: STARt on page 487 and :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]: SRANge:STOP on page 487.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS2:SWE:FREQ:SENS:SRAN ON Activates use of a separate frequency range for frequency versus power measurement for sensor 2. SENS2:SWE:FREQ:SENS:STAR 2.0GHZ Sets a sweep start at 2 GHz irrespective of the current signal generator frequency settings. SENS2:SWE:FREQ:SENS:STOP 2.9GHZ Sets a sweep stop at 2.9 GHz irrespective of the current signal generator frequency settings.
Manual operation: See " Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis " on page 255
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:OFFSet <Offset>
Defines the level offset at the sensor input in dB. Activate the offset with the command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe on page 489.
Parameters: <Offset>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-100 to 100 0.01 0
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
488
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example:
Options: Manual operation:
SENS2:SWE:POW:OFFS -5dB Defines a level offset of -5 dB. SENS2:SWE:POW:OFFS:STAT ON Activates that the specified level offset is considered.
Option R&S SMAB-K28
See " Level Offset - Power Analysis " on page 255
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe <State>
Activates a level offset at the sensor input. Define the appropriate value with the command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:OFFSet on page 488.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS2:SWE:POW:OFFS:STAT ON Activates the specified level offset.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:SFRequency <SFRequency>
Defines the separate frequency used for power vs. power measurement.
Parameters: <SFRequency>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 1E12 1 1E6
Example:
SENS1:SWE:POW:SENS:SFR 2GHz The measurement is performed at 2 GHz
Manual operation: See " Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis " on page 255
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:SFRequency:STATe <State>
Activates the use of a different frequency for the power measurement.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS1:SWE:POW:SENS:SFR:STAT ON Activates the use of a separate frequency than the generator frequency for power analysis
Manual operation: See " Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis " on page 255
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
489
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet <Offset>
Defines the level offset at the sensor input in dB. Activate the offset with the command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe on page 490.
Parameters: <Offset>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-100 to 100 0.01 0
Example:
SENS2:SWE:TIME:OFFS -7dB Defines a level offset of -7 dB. SENS2:SWE:TIME:OFFS:STAT ON The specified level offset is considered.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Level Offset - Power Analysis " on page 255
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe <State>
Activates a level offset at the sensor input. Define the appropriate value with the command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet on page 490.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS2:SWE:POW:TIME:STAT ON Activates the specified level offset.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Level Offset State- Power Analysis " on page 255
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:STATe <State>
Enables pulse data analysis. The measurement is started with command INITiate.
Note: The command is only available in time measurement mode and with R&S NRPZ81 power sensors.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS1:SWE:TIM:PULS:STAT ON Enables pulse data analysis.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Pulse Analysis " on page 260
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
490
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:BASE <Base>
Selects how the threshold parameters for pulse analysis are calculated.
Note: The command is only available in time measurement mode and with R&S NRPZ81 power sensors.
Parameters: <Base>
VOLTage | POWer
*RST:
VOLTage
Example:
SENS1:SWE:TIME:PULS:THR:BASE POW Activates threshold calculation related to power.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Base " on page 260
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer: HREFerence <HReference>
Sets the upper reference level in terms of percentage of the overall pulse level (power or voltage). The distal power defines the end of the rising edge and the start of the falling edge of the pulse.
Note: The command is only available in time measurement mode and with R&S NRPZ81 power sensors.
Parameters: <HReference>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.01 90
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Distal " on page 261
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer: LREFerence <LReference>
Sets the lower reference level in terms of percentage of the overall pulse level. The proximal power defines the start of the rising edge and the end of the falling edge of the pulse.
Note: This parameter is only available in time measurement mode and R&S NRP-Z81 power sensors.
Parameters: <LReference>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.0 to 100.0 0.01 10.0
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
491
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example:
Options: Manual operation:
SENS:SWE:TIM:PULS:THR:LREF 10 Sets the lower reference level to 10%.
Option R&S SMAB-K28
See " Proximal " on page 261
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer: REFerence <Reference>
Sets the medial reference level in terms of percentage of the overall pulse level (power or voltage related). This level is used to define pulse width and pulse period.
Note: The command is only available in time measurement mode and with R&S NRPZ81 power sensors.
Parameters: <Reference>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.0 to 100.0 0.01 50.0
Example:
SENS1:SWE:TIM:PULS:THR:REF 40 Sets the medial reference level to 40% of the overall pulse level.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Mesial " on page 261
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:SFRequency <SFrequency>
Defines the separate frequency used for power vs. time measurement.
Parameters: <SFrequency>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 1E12 1 1E6
Example:
SENS1:SWE:TIME:SENS:SFR 2GHz The measurement is performed at 2 GHz
Manual operation: See " Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis " on page 255
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:SFRequency:STATe <State>
Activates the use of a different frequency for the power measurement.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
492
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example: Manual operation:
SENS1:SWE:TIME:SENS:SFR:STAT ON Activates the use of a separate frequency than the generator frequency for power analysis
See " Use Separate Frequency- Power Analysis " on page 255
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:AUTO <Auto>
Sets the trigger level, the hysteresis and the dropout time to default values.
Parameters: <Auto>
ONCE
*RST:
---
Example:
SENS1:SWE:TIME:SENS:TRIG:AUTO ONCE The trigger level is automatically determined
Manual operation: See " Auto Set - Power Analysis " on page 268
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:DTIMe <DTime>
Determines the minimum time for which the signal must be below (above) the power level defined by level and hysteresis before triggering can occur again.
Parameters: <DTime>
float
Range: *RST:
0 to 10 200E-9
Example:
SENS1:SWE:TIME:SENS:TRIG:DTIM 10 us The drop out time is 10 us
Manual operation: See " Drop out Time - Power Analysis " on page 267
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:HYSTeresis <Hysteresis>
Sets the hysteresis of the internal trigger threshold. Hysteresis is the magnitude (in dB) the trigger signal level must drop below the trigger threshold (positive trigger slope) before triggering can occur again.
Parameters: <Hysteresis>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 10 0.001 0.5
Example:
SENS1:SWE:TIME:SENS:TRIG:HYST 0.5 dB The hysteresis is 0.5 dB
Manual operation: See " Hysteresis - Power Analysis " on page 267
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
493
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:LEVel <Level>
Sets the trigger threshold.
Parameters: <Level>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-200 to 100 0.001 1
Example:
SENS1:SWE:TIME:SENS:TRIG:LEV -20 dBm Sets the trigger level to -20 dBm.
Manual operation: See " Level - Power Analysis " on page 267
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:SLOPe <TriggerSlope>
Sets the polarity of the active slope for the trigger signals.
Parameters: <TriggerSlope>
POSitive | NEGative
*RST:
POSitive
Example:
SENS1:SWE:TIME:TRIG:SLOP POS The positive edge of a trigger signal is active.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Slope - Power Analysis " on page 267
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:SOURce <Source>
Selects if the measurement is free running (FREE) or starts only after a trigger event. The trigger can be applied internally or externally.
Parameters: <Source>
FREE | AUTO | INTernal | EXTernal
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SENS1:SWE:TIME:SENS:TRIG:SOUR FREE The power versus time measurement is performed free running
Manual operation: See " Mode - Power Analysis " on page 266
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO
The command activates the autozero function. Zeroing is required in regular interval (at least once a day) and if the temperature has varied more than about 5 °C, if the sensor has been replaced or if measurements of signals with very low power are to be performed. The RF power source must be switched off or disconnected from the sensor before starting the autozero function.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
494
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example: Usage:
SENS:ZERO activates autozero function.
Event
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:ABORt
Aborts the power analysis with NRP power sensors.
Example:
SENS:SWE:ABOR;*OPC? Aborts the current power measurement.
Usage:
Setting only
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:COPY
Generates a reference curve for "Frequency" measurement.
Example:
SENS:POW:SWE:FREQ:REF:DATA:COPY Generates a reference curve in frequency mode.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Save To Ref" on page 248
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:POINts?
Queries the number of points from the reference curve in "Frequency" measurement.
Return values: <Points>
integer Range:
10 to 1000
Example:
SENS:POW:SWE:FREQ:REF:DATA:POIN? Queries the number of points from the reference curve in frequency mode.
Usage:
Query only
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:XVALues <XValues>
Sets or queries the x values of the two reference points, i.e. "Frequency X (Point A)" and "Frequency X (Point B)" in "Frequency" measurement.
Parameters: <XValues>
string
Example:
SENSe:POW:SWE:FREQ:REF:DATA:XVAL 100MHZ,22GHZ Sets the x value of reference "Point A" to 10 MHz, and the value of "Point B" to 10 GHz.
Manual operation: See "Freq (X) / Pow (Y)" on page 247
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
495
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:YVALues <YValues>
Sets or queries the y values of the two reference points, i.e."Pow Y (Point A)" and "Power Y (Point B)" in "Frequency" measurement.
Parameters: <YValues>
string
Example:
SENSe:POW:SWE:FREQ:REF:DATA:YVAL -10,25 Sets the y value of reference "Point A" to -10 dBm, and the value of "Point B" to -25 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Freq (X) / Pow (Y)" on page 247
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:RMODe <RMode>
Selects single or continuous mode for measurement mode frequency in power analysis.
Parameters: <RMode>
SINGle | CONTinuous
*RST:
CONTinuous
Example:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:RMOD SING Selects single measurement
Manual operation: See " Execution - Power Analysis " on page 253
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing[:MODE] <Mode>
Selects the spacing for the frequency power analysis.
Parameters: <Mode>
LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST:
LINear
Example:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:SPAC:MODE LIN Sets linear spacing of the sweep
Manual operation: See " Spacing - Power Analysis " on page 252
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STARt <Start>
Sets the start frequency for the frequency mode.
Parameters: <Start>
float
Range: *RST:
0 to 1E12 1E6
Example:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:STAR 2.0GHZ Sets a sweep start at 2 GHz.
Manual operation: See "Min - Power Analysis" on page 251
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
496
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STEPs <Steps>
Sets the number of measurement steps for the frequency mode.
Parameters: <Steps>
integer
Range: *RST:
10 to 1000 200
Example:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:STEP 500 Sets 500 steps
Manual operation: See " Steps - Power Analysis " on page 252
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STOP <Stop>
Sets the stop frequency for the frequency mode.
Parameters: <Stop>
float
Range: *RST:
0 to 1E12 22GHZ
Example:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:STOP 20.0GHZ Sets the sweep stop to 20 GHz
Manual operation: See "Max - Power Analysis" on page 251
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:TIMing[:MODE] <Mode>
Selects the mode in terms of speed and precision of the response of a measurement.
Parameters: <Mode>
FAST | NORMal | HPRecision | FAST | NORMal
FAST Selection FAST leads to a fast measurement with a short integration time for each measurement step.
NORMal NORMal leads to a longer but more precise measurement due to a higher integration time for each step.
*RST:
FAST
Example:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:TIM:MODE FAST The fast measurement mode is selected.
Manual operation: See " Timing - Power Analysis " on page 252
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
497
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:AUTO <Auto>
Activates autoscaling of the Y axis of the diagram.
Parameters: <Auto>
OFF | CEXPanding | FEXPanding | CFLoating | FFLoating
OFF Auto scaling is deactivated. If switching from activated to deactivated Auto scaling, the scaling is maintained.
CEXPanding | FEXPanding Auto scale is activated. The scaling of the Y-axis is selected in such a way, that the trace is always visible. To this end, the range is expanded if the minimum or maximum values of the trace move outside the current scale. The step width is 5 dB for selection course and variable in the range of 0.2 db to 5 dB for selection fine.
CFLoating | FFLoating Auto scale is activated. The scaling of the Y-axis is selected in such a way, that the trace is always visible. To this end, the range is either expanded if the minimum or maximum values of the trace move outside the current scale or scaled down if the trace fits into a reduced scale. The step width is 5 dB for selection course and variable in the range of 0.2 db to 5 dB for selection fine.
*RST:
CEXPanding
Example:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:YSC:AUTO OFF Deactivates auto scale
Manual operation: See " Auto Scale - Power Analysis " on page 258
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:AUTO:RESet
Resets the Y scale to suitable values after the use of auto scaling in the expanding mode. For this mode, the scale might get expanded because of temporarily high-power values. The reset function resets the diagram in such a way that it matches smaller power values again.
Example:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:YSC:AUTO:RES Resets auto scale
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Reset Auto Scale - Power Analysis " on page 258
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:MAXimum <Maximum> Sets the maximum value for the y axis of the measurement diagram.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
498
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Parameters: <Maximum>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-200 to 100 0.01 40
SENS:SWE:FREQ:YSC:MAX 10DBM Sets 10 dBm as the upper limit of the measurement diagram.
See " Min - Max Level - Power Analysis " on page 257
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:MINimum <Minimum>
Sets the minimum value for the y axis of the measurement diagram.
Parameters: <Minimum>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-200 to 100 0.01 -40
Example:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:YSC:MIN -10DB Sets -10 dBm as the lower limit of the measurement diagram.
Manual operation: See " Min - Max Level - Power Analysis " on page 257
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DATA?
Queries the measurement data directly. The data is transferred to the remote client as data stream.
Readable ASCII data is available for hardcopy language CSV. The representation of the values depends on the selected orientation for the CSV format.
Return values: <Data>
block data
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
499
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example: Example: Usage:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG CSV selects output format *.csv. SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG:CSV:ORI HOR selects horizontal orientation SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG:CSV:SEP SEM selects ";" as the separator between the values SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG:CSV:DPO DOT selects "." as decimal point SENS:SWE:HCOP:DATA? queries the measurement data of the current traces Response: #2651009500000;1019000000;1028500000;1038000000 -9.5;-9.7;-6.3;-2.5 The hash symbol # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example, the 2 following digit indicates the length to be 65 characters. Because horizontal representation is selected, a row with all the x-values of the active trace (frequency) follows. The second row contains all the y-values of the active trace (power). The rows end with a new line (each counts as one character). Note: if more than one trace is active, the third row contains the x values of the second active trace, and so on.
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG:CSV:ORI VERT selects horizontal orientation SENS:SWE:HCOP:DATA? queries the measurement data of the current traces Response: #2681009500000;-9.5; 1019000000;-9.7; 1028500000;-6.3; 1038000000;-2.5; for vertical representation the length of the data block is 68 the first power value, the second row contains the second frequency value of the active trace followed by the second power value, and so on. The rows end with a new line (each counts as one character). Note: if more than one trace is active, the first row also contains the value pairs of the second active trace, and so on.
Query only
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice <Device>
Defines the output device. The setting is fixed to FILE, i.e. the hardcopy is stored in a file.
Parameters: <Device>
FILE | PRINter
*RST:
FILE
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
500
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV FIL Selects output device file.
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage <Language>
Selects the bitmap graphic format for the screenshot of the power analysis trace.
In addition, ASCII file format *.csv is offered. If file format *.csv is selected, the trace data is saved as an ASCII file with comma separated values. It is also possible to directly retrieve the data using command :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DATA? on page 499
Parameters: <Language>
BMP | JPG | XPM | PNG | CSV
*RST:
BMP
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP Selects output format *.bmp.
Manual operation: See " Format - Power Analysis " on page 275
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:DPOint <DPoint>
Defines which character is used as the decimal point of the values, either dot or comma.
Parameters: <DPoint>
DOT | COMMa
*RST:
DOT
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG CSV Selects output format *.csv. SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG:CSV:DPO DOT Selects character dot for being used as decimal point.
Manual operation: See "Decimal Point" on page 279
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:HEADer <Header>
Defines whether each row (or column depending on the orientation) should be preceded by a header containing information about the trace (see also :SENSe[:POWer]: SWEep:HCOPy:DATA? on page 499).
Parameters: <Header>
OFF | STANdard
*RST:
OFF
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG CSV Selects output format *.csv. SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG:CSV:HEAD STAN Selects the standard header for the *.csv file.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
501
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Manual operation: See "Row Header" on page 279
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:ORIentation <Orientation>
Defines the orientation of the X/Y value pairs.
Parameters: <Orientation>
HORizontal | VERTical
*RST:
VERTical
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG CSV Selects output format *.csv. SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG:CSV:ORI VERT Selects vertical orientation, the value pairs are written in a column like structure (separated by the selected separator, e.g. tab)
Manual operation: See "Orientation" on page 278
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV[:COLumn]:SEParator <Separator>
Defines which character is to separate the values, either tabulator, semicolon, comma or blank.
Parameters: <Separator>
TABulator | SEMicolon | COMMa | BLANk
*RST:
COMMa
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG CSV Selects output format *.csv. SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG:CSV:SEP TAB A tab separates the values.
Manual operation: See "Separator" on page 279
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:SIZE <Size>
Sets the size of the hardcopy in number of pixels. The first value of the size setting defines the width, the second value the height of the image.
Parameters: <Size>
320,240 | 640,480 | 800,600 | 1024,768
*RST:
320,240
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP Selects output format *.bmp. SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:SIZE 320,240 The size of the bitmap is 320 pixels by 240 pixels.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
502
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME] <Name>
Creates of selects a file for storing the hardcopy after the :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep: HCOPy[:EXECute] on page 507 command is sent. The directory is either defined with the command MMEMory:CDIR or the path is specified together with the file name. Access to the file via remote control is possible using the commands of the MMEMSubsystem. In contrast, command :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DATA? on page 499 transfers the hardcopy contents directly to the remote client where they can be further processed.
Parameters: <Name>
string
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP Selects output format *,bmp. SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:STAT OFF Switches off automatic naming. SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE 'var/trace/nrp_trace1' creates the file nrp_trace1.bmp in the trace directory. SENS:SWE:HCOP:EXEC Triggers the generation of a hardcopy of the current trace. The hardcopy is stored in the file nrp_trace1.bmp.
Manual operation: See " File name - Power Analysis " on page 274
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory <Directory>
Defines the directory into which the hardcopy files are stored if auto naming is activated (SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:STAT ON).
Parameters: <Directory>
string
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DIR 'var/nrp' Hardcopy file are stored in directory var/nrp if automatic naming is activated.
Manual operation: See "Path" on page 276
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar
Deletes all files with extensions bmp , img, png, xpm and csv in the directory set for automatic naming.
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DIR 'var/nrp' Hardcopy filse are stored in directory var/nrp if automatic naming is activated. SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILEAUTO:DIR:CLE Deletes all hardcopy file that are stored in the directory var/ nrp.
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
503
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Manual operation: See "Clear Parth" on page 276
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE?
Queries the file name generated with the automatic naming settings.
Note: As default the automatically generated file name is composed of: >PAth>/ <Prefix><YYYY><MM><DD><Number>.<Format>. Each component can be deactivated/ activated separately to individually design the file name.
Return values: <File>
string
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP Selects output format *.bmp. SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DIR 'var/nrp' Hardcopy files are stored in directory var/nrp if automatic naming is activated. SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF 'sens1' The file name starts with the prefix sens1. The usage of automatic naming with prefix and date in the file name is preset (...:STAT ON). SENS:SWE:HCOP Triggers the generation of a hardcopy of the current trace. SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:FILE? Queries the file name
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " File name - Power Analysis " on page 274
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe <State>
Activates/deactivates automatic naming of the hardcopy files.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:STAT OFF Deactivates automatic naming of the hardcopy files. The file name and directory is now defined with command. SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:NAME <psth>
Manual operation: See " File name - Power Analysis " on page 274
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY? Queries the day of the date part in the automatic file name.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
504
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Return values: <Day>
Example: Usage: Manual operation:
integer
Range: *RST:
1 to 31 1
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DAY? Queries the day of the date part in the automatic file name.
Query only
See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day, Instrument Name" on page 277
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe <State>
Activates the usage of the day in the automatic file name.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DAY:STAT OFF Deactivates the usage of the day in the automatic file name.
Manual operation: See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day, Instrument Name" on page 277
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh?
Queries the day of the date part in the automatic file name.
Return values: <Month>
integer
Range: *RST:
1 to 12 1
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:MONT? Queries the month of the date part in the automatic file name.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day, Instrument Name" on page 277
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe <State>
Activates the usage of the month in the automatic file name.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:MONT:STAT OFF Deactivates the usage of the month in the automatic file name.
Manual operation: See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day, Instrument Name" on page 277
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
505
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer?
Queries the generated number in the automatic file name.
Return values: <Number>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to 999999 0
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:NUMB? Queries the number in the automatic file name.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Current Auto Number" on page 277
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix <Prefix>
Sets the prefix part in the automatic file name.
Parameters: <Prefix>
string
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF 'sensor' The prefix sensor is used in the automatically generated file name of the hardcopy file.
Manual operation: See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day, Instrument Name" on page 277
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe <State>
Activates the usage of the prefix in the automatic file name.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF:STAT OFF Deactivates the usage of the prefix in the automatic file name.
Manual operation: See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day, Instrument Name" on page 277
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR?
Queries the year of the date part in the automatic file name.
Return values: <Year>
integer
Range: *RST:
1784 to 8000 0
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:YEAR? Queries the year of the date part in the automatic file name.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
506
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day, Instrument Name" on page 277
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe <State>
Activates the usage of the year in the automatic file name.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:YEAR:STAT OFF Deactivates the usage of the year in the automatic file name.
Manual operation: See "Prefix, Year, Month, Day, Instrument Name" on page 277
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy[:EXECute]
Triggers the generation of a hardcopy of the current measurement diagram. The data is written into the file selected/created with the :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy: FILE[:NAME] on page 503 command.
Example:
SENS:SWE:HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP Selects output format *.bmp. SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE:AUTO:STAT OFF Switches off automatic file naming. SENS:SWE:HCOP:FILE 'var/nrp_trace1' Creates the file nrp_trace1.bmp in the set path. SENS:SWE:HCOP Triggers the generation of a hardcopy of the current measurement diagram. The hardcopy is stored in the file nrp_trace1.bmp.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " File name - Power Analysis " on page 274
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:INITiate
Starts the power analysis with NRP power sensor.
Example:
SENS:SWE:INIT Start the power measurement.
Usage:
Setting only
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:MODE <Mode>
Selects power versus frequency measurement (frequency response), power vs power measurement (power sweep, AM/AM) or power vs. time measurement.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
507
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Parameters: <Mode>
Example:
Manual operation:
FREQuency | POWer | TIME
*RST:
FREQuency
SENS:SWE:MODE FREQ Selects frequency mode.
See " Mode - Power Analysis " on page 251
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:COPY
Generates a reference curve for "Power" measurement.
Example:
SENS:POW:SWE:POW:REF:DATA:COPY Generates a reference curve in power mode.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Save To Ref" on page 248
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:POINts?
Queries the number of points from the reference curve in "Power" measurement.
Return values: <Points>
integer Range:
10 to 1000
Example:
SENS:POW:SWE:POW:REF:DATA:POIN? Queries the number of points from the reference curve in power mode.
Usage:
Query only
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:XVALues <XValues>
Sets or queries the x values of the two reference points, i.e. "Power X (Point A)" and "Power X (Point B)" in "Power" measurement.
Parameters: <XValues>
string
Example:
SENSe:POW:SWE:POW:REF:DATA:XVAL -15DBM,20DBM Sets the x value of reference "Point A" to -15 dBm, and the value of "Point B" to 20 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Pow (X) / Pow (Y)" on page 248
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:YVALues <YValues>
Sets or queries the y values of the two reference points, i.e. "Power Y (Point A)" and "Power Y (Point B)" in "Power" measurement.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
508
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Parameters: <YValues> Example:
Manual operation:
string
SENSe:POW:SWE:TIME:REF:DATA:YVAL -30,10 Sets the y value of reference "Point A" to -30 dBm, and the value of "Point B" to 10 dBm.
See "Pow (X) / Pow (Y)" on page 248
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:RMODe <RMode>
Selects single or continuous mode for measurement mode power in power analysis.
Parameters: <RMode>
SINGle | CONTinuous
*RST:
CONTinuous
Example:
SENS:SWE:POW:RMOD SING Selects single measurement.
Manual operation: See " Execution - Power Analysis " on page 253
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing[:MODE] <Mode>
Selects the spacing for the frequency power analysis.
Parameters: <Mode>
LINear *RST:
LINear
Example:
SENS:SWE:FREQ:SPAC:MODE LIN Sets linear spacing of the sweep.
Manual operation: See " Spacing - Power Analysis " on page 252
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STARt <Start>
Sets the start level for the power versus power measurement.
Parameters: <Start>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-145 to 20 0.01 1MHZ
Example:
SENS:SWE:POW:STAR -20DBM Sets the start level to -20 dBm
Manual operation: See "Min - Power Analysis" on page 251
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STEPs <Steps> Sets the number of measurement steps for the power versus power measurement.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
509
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Parameters: <Steps>
Example: Manual operation:
integer
Range: *RST:
10 to 1000 500
SENS:SWE:POW:STEP 500 Sets the 500 measurement steps.
See " Steps - Power Analysis " on page 252
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STOP <Stop>
Sets the stop level for the power versus power measurement.
Parameters: <Stop>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-145 to 20 0.01 40
Example:
SENS:SWE:POW:STOP 20.0DBM Sets the stop level to 20 dBm.
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:TIMing[:MODE] <Mode>
Selects the timing mode of the measurement.
Parameters: <Mode>
FAST | NORMal | HPRecision | FAST | NORMal
FAST Selection FAST leads to a fast measurement with a short integration times for each measurement step.
NORMal NORMal leads to a longer but more precise measurement due to a higher integration time for each step.
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
SENS:SWE:POW:TIM:MODE FAST Selects fast mode.
Manual operation: See " Timing - Power Analysis " on page 252
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:AUTO <Auto>
Activates autoscaling of the Y axis of the diagram.
Parameters: <Auto>
OFF | CEXPanding | FEXPanding | CFLoating | FFLoating
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
510
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example: Manual operation:
OFF Auto scaling is deactivated. When switching from activated to deactivated Auto scaling, the scaling is maintained. When switching from deactivated to activated Auto scaling, the scaling is reset to min = max = 0.
CEXPanding | FEXPanding Auto scale is activated. The scaling of the Y-axis is selected in such a way, that the trace is always visible. To this end, the range is expanded if the minimum or maximum values of the trace move outside the current scale. The step width is 5 dB for selection course and variable in the range of 0.2 db to 5 dB for selection fine.
CFLoating | FFLoating Auto scale is activated. The scaling of the Y-axis is selected in such a way, that the trace is always visible. To this end, the range is either expanded if the minimum or maximum values of the trace move outside the current scale or scaled down if the trace fits into a reduced scale. The step width is 5 dB for selection course and variable in the range of 0.2 db to 5 dB for selection fine.
*RST:
CEXPanding
SENS:SWE:POW:YSC:AUTO OFF Deactivates auto scale.
See " Auto Scale - Power Analysis " on page 258
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:AUTO:RESet
Resets the Y scale to suitable values after the use of auto scaling in the expanding mode. For this mode, the scale might get expanded because of temporarily high power values. The reset function allows resetting the diagram to match smaller power values again.
Example:
SENS:SWE:POW:YSC:AUTO:RES Resets auto scale.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Reset Auto Scale - Power Analysis " on page 258
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:MAXimum <Maximum>
Sets the maximum value for the y axis of the measurement diagram.
Parameters: <Maximum>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-200 to 100 0.01 30
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
511
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example: Manual operation:
SENS:SWE:POW:YSC:MAX 10DBM Sets 10 dBm as the upper limit of the measurement diagram.
See " Min - Max Level - Power Analysis " on page 257
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:MINimum <Minimum>
Sets the minimum value for the y axis of the measurement diagram.
Parameters: <Minimum>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-200 to 100 0.01 -40
Example:
SENS:SWE:POW:YSC:MIN -10DBM Sets -10 dBm as the lower limit of the measurement diagram.
Manual operation: See " Min - Max Level - Power Analysis " on page 257
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:RMODe <RMode>
Selects single or continuous mode for power analysis (all measurement modes).
Parameters: <RMode>
SINGle | CONTinuous
*RST:
SINGle
Example:
SENS:SWE:RMOD SING Selects single measurement.
Manual operation: See " Execution - Power Analysis " on page 253
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:AVERage[:COUNt] <Count>
Selects the averaging factor in time mode. The count number determines how many measurement cycles are used to form a measurement result. Higher averaging counts reduce noise but increase the measurement time. Averaging requires a stable trigger event so that the measurement cycles have the same timing.
Parameters: <Count>
1 | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128 | 256 | 512 | 1024
*RST:
1
Example:
SENS:SWE:MODE TIME Selects time mode. SENS:SWE:TIME:AVER 128 Selects averaging factor 128.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " Average - Power Analysis " on page 252
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
512
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:COPY
Generates a reference curve for "Time" measurement.
Example:
SENS:POW:SWE:TIME:REF:DATA:COPY Generates a reference curve in time mode.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Save To Ref" on page 248
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:POINts?
Queries the number of points from the reference curve in "Time" measurement.
Return values: <Points>
integer
Range: *RST:
10 to 1000 0
Example:
SENS:POW:SWE:TIME:REF:DATA:POIN? Queries the number of points from the reference curve in time mode.
Usage:
Query only
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:XVALues <XValues>
Sets or queries the x values of the two reference points, i.e. "Time X (Point A)" and "Time X (Point B) "in "Time" measurement.
Parameters: <XValues>
string
Example:
SENSe:POW:SWE:TIME:REF:DATA:XVAL 5,45 Sets the x value of reference "Point A" to 5 s, and the value of "Point B" to 45 s.
Manual operation: See "Time (X) / Pow (Y)" on page 248
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:YVALues <YValues>
Sets or queries the y values of the two reference points, i.e. "Power Y (Point A)" and "Power Y (Point B)" in "Time" measurement.
Parameters: <YValues>
string
Example:
SENSe:POW:SWE:TIME:REF:DATA:YVAL -30,10 sets the y value of reference "Point A" to -30 dBm, and the value of "Point B" to 10 dBm.
Manual operation: See "Time (X) / Pow (Y)" on page 248
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
513
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:RMODe <RMode>
Selects single or continuous mode for measurement mode time in power analysis.
Parameters: <RMode>
SINGle | CONTinuous
*RST:
CONTinuous
Example:
SENS:SWE:TIME:RMOD SING Selects single measurement.
Manual operation: See " Execution - Power Analysis " on page 253
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:SPACing[:MODE] <Mode>
Queries the sweep spacing for the power versus time measurement. The spacing is fixed to linear.
Parameters: <Mode>
LINear *RST:
LINear
Example:
SENS:SWE:TIME:SPAC? Queries the sweep spacing.
Manual operation: See " Spacing - Power Analysis " on page 252
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STARt <Start>
Sets the start time for the power versus time measurement. Value 0 defines the trigger point. By choosing a negative time value, the trace can be shifted in the diagram. It is possible, that the measurement cannot be performed over the complete time range because of limitations due to sensor settings. In this case, an error message is output.
Parameters: <Start>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-1 to 1 1E-12 -5E-6
Example:
SENS:SWE:TIME:STAR 0s Sets the start time to 0 s.
Manual operation: See "Min - Power Analysis" on page 251
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STEPs <Steps>
Sets the number of measurement steps for the power versus time measurement. Value 0 defines the trigger point.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
514
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Parameters: <Steps>
Example: Manual operation:
integer
Range: *RST:
10 to 1000 500
SENS:SWE:TIME:STEP 500 Sets the 500 measurement steps.
See " Steps - Power Analysis " on page 252
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STOP <Stop>
Sets the stop time for the power versus time measurement.
Parameters: <Stop>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 2 1E-12 1E-3
Example:
SENS:SWE:TIME:STOP 1ms Sets the stop time to 1 ms.
Manual operation: See "Max - Power Analysis" on page 251
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:TEVents <TriggerTEvents>
Determines, whether the measurement data processing starts with a trigger event in one of the sensors (Logical OR), or whether all channels have to be triggered (logical AND). Each sensor evaluates a trigger event according to its setting independently. This function supports the internal or external trigger modes with multi-channel time measurements.
Parameters: <TriggerTEvents>
AND | OR
*RST:
AND
Example:
SENS:POW:SWE:TIME:TEV AND The measurement data processing starts when all channels are triggered.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " All Trigger Events - Power Analysis " on page 253
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:AUTO <Auto>
Activates autoscaling of the Y axis in the diagram.
Parameters: <Auto>
OFF | CEXPanding | FEXPanding | CFLoating | FFLoating
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
515
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example: Manual operation:
OFF Auto scaling is deactivated. When switching from activated to deactivated Auto scaling, the scaling is maintained. When switching from deactivated to activated Auto scaling, the scaling is reset to min = max = 0.
CEXPanding | FEXPanding Auto scale is activated. The scaling of the Y-axis is selected in such a way, that the trace is always visible. To this end, the range is expanded if the minimum or maximum values of the trace move outside the current scale. The step width is 5 dB for selection course and variable in the range of 0.2 db to 5 dB for selection fine.
CFLoating | FFLoating Auto scale is activated. The scaling of the Y-axis is selected in such a way, that the trace is always visible. To this end, the range is either expanded if the minimum or maximum values of the trace move outside the current scale or scaled down if the trace fits into a reduced scale. The step width is 5 dB for selection course and variable in the range of 0.2 db to 5 dB for selection fine.
*RST:
CEXPanding
SENS:SWE:TIME:YSC:AUTO OFF Deactivates auto scale
See " Auto Scale - Power Analysis " on page 258
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:AUTO:RESet
Resets the Y scale to suitable values after the use of auto scaling in the expanding mode. For this mode, the scale might get expanded because of temporarily high power values. The reset function allows resetting the diagram to match smaller power values again.
Example:
SENS:SWE:TIME:YSC:AUTO:RES Resets auto scale.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Reset Auto Scale - Power Analysis " on page 258
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:MAXimum <Maximum>
Sets the maximum value for the y axis of the measurement diagram.
Parameters: <Maximum>
float
Range: -200 to 100
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
30.0
Default unit: dBm
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
516
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example: Manual operation:
SENS:SWE:TIME:YSC:MAX 10DBM Sets 10 dBm as the upper limit of the measurement diagram.
See " Min - Max Level - Power Analysis " on page 257
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:MINimum <Minimum>
Sets the minimum value for the y axis of the measurement diagram.
Parameters: <Minimum>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-200 to 100 0.01 dBm
Example:
SENS:SWE:TIME:YSC:MIN -10DBM Sets -10 dBm as the lower limit of the measurement diagram.
Manual operation: See " Min - Max Level - Power Analysis " on page 257
14.14.5 TRACe Subsystem
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:COLor.............................................................................. 518 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:COPY.............................................................................. 519 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:POINts?.................................................................. 519 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:XVALues?............................................................... 519 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:YSValue?................................................................ 520 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:YVALues?............................................................... 520 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FEED............................................................................... 520 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:AVERage?...................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:HREFerence?..................................521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:LREFerence?.................................. 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MAXimum?..................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MINimum?...................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:BASE?................................ 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:TOP?.................................. 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:REFerence?.................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DCYCle?......................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DURation?.......................................521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:PERiod?..........................................521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:SEParation?.................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:STATe?........................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:DURation?..................521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OCCurrence?............. 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OVERshoot?...............521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:DURation?................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OCCurrence?............... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OVERshoot?................ 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DCYCle:DISPlay:ANNotation[:
STATe]................................................................................................................ 522
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
517
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DURation:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe]................................................................................................................ 522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:PERiod:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe]................................................................................................................ 522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:AVERage:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe]................................................................................................................ 522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:BASE:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe]..............................................................................................522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:HREFerence:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe]..............................................................................................522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:LREFerence:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe]..............................................................................................522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MAXimum:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe]................................................................................................................ 522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MINimum:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe]................................................................................................................ 522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:REFerence:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe]................................................................................................................ 522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:TOP:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe]..............................................................................................522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:SEParation:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe]................................................................................................................ 522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:DURation:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe]..............................................................................................522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OCCurrence: DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]................................................................................. 522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OVERshoot: DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]................................................................................. 522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:DURation:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe]..............................................................................................522
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OCCurrence: DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]................................................................................. 523
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OVERshoot: DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]................................................................................. 523
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:ALL:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe].......523 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:BASE?................................................. 523 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:HREFerence............................. 524 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:LREFerence..............................524 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:REFerence............................... 524 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:STATe.............................................................................. 525 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:FULLscreen:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]............. 525 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:GATE:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]...................... 526 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:MARKer:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe].................. 526 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe].................... 526 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:STANdard:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]................ 527
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:COLor <Color>
Defines the color of a trace.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
518
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Parameters: <Color>
Example: Manual operation:
INVers | GRAY | YELLow | BLUE | GREen | RED | MAGenta
*RST:
trace 1 = YELLow, trace 2 = GREen, trace 3 = RED.
TRAC2:SWE:COL GRAY Trace2 is indicated in gray color.
See " Color - Trace Power Analysis " on page 247
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:COPY <Copy>
Stores the selected trace data as reference trace.
Setting parameters:
<Copy>
REFerence
Example:
TRAC2:SWE:COPY REF Stores the current trace2 as reference trace' TRAC1:SWE:FEED REF Assigns the reference trace to trace 1.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See " Indication - Trace Power Analysis" on page 247
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:POINts?
Queries the number of measurement points of the selected trace of the current power analysis.
Return values: <Points>
integer
Range: *RST:
10 to 1000 0
Example:
TRAC1:SWE:DATA:POIN? Response: 624 Measurement trace 1 contains 624 measurement points
Usage:
Query only
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:XVALues?
Queries the x-axis values - frequency, power or time values - of the selected trace of the current power analysis.
Return values: <XValues>
string
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
519
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example: Usage:
SENS:SWE:MODE FREQ Sets measurement mode frequency versus power. SENS:SWE:RMOD SING Selects single measurement. SENS:SWE:INIT Starts the measurement. *OPC? Waits until measurement is performed. TRAC1:SWE:DATA:XVAL? Queries the x-axis values of trace 1. TRAC1:SWE:DATA:YVAL? Queries the y-axis values of trace 1
Query only
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:YSValue? <XValue>
For a given x-axis value, queries the measurement (y-axis) value of the selected trace of the current power analysis.
Query parameters:
<XValue>
float
Return values: <YSValue>
float Increment: 1E-9
Example:
TRACe1:SWE:DATA:YSValue? 2.3
Example:
Queries the y-axis values of trace 1 at x-axis value of 2.3. See :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:XVALues? on page 519.
Usage:
Query only
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:YVALues?
Queries the measurement (y-axis) values of the selected trace of the current power analysis.
Return values: <YValues>
string
Example:
SENS:SWE:TRAC2:DATA:YVAL? Queries the power values of trace 2. See :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:XVALues? on page 519.
Usage:
Query only
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FEED <Feed> Selects the source for the trace data.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
520
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Parameters: <Feed>
Example:
Manual operation:
SENS1 | SENS2 | SENS3 | REFerence | NONE | SENSor1 | SENSor2 | SENSor3 | SENS4 | SENSor4
*RST:
The preset value for each trace is evaluated during runtime as follows: If a sensor is plugged into the generator whose number corresponds to the trace number, this sensor is used to feed the trace and the state of the trace is ON; If no sensor is found with number corresponding to the trace number, the preset value of the trace is "Off".
TRAC2:SWE:COPY REF Stores trace2 as reference trace. TRAC1:SWE:FEED REF Assigns the reference trace to trace 1. TRAC1:SWE:STAT ON Assigns the reference trace to trace 1. SENS:SWE:RMOD SING Selects single measurement SENS:SWE:INIT Starts the measurement
See " Indication - Trace Power Analysis" on page 247
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:AVERage? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:HREFerence? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:LREFerence? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MAXimum? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MINimum? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:BASE? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:TOP? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:REFerence? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DCYCle? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DURation? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:PERiod? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:SEParation? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:STATe? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:DURation? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:
OCCurrence? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OVERshoot? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:DURation? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OCCurrence? :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OVERshoot?
The above listed commands query the measured pulse parameter values.
Note: These commands are only available in time measurement mode and with R&S NRP-Z81 power sensors.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
521
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Return values: <Overshoot>
Example:
Usage: Options: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.01 0
TRAC1:SWE:MEAS:POW:HREF? Queries the measured mesial threshold level of trace 1. TRAC3:SWE:MEAS:POW:MAX? Queries the measured peak power of trace 3.
Query only
Option R&S SMAB-K28
See "Overshoot (Rising Edge / Falling Edge)" on page 264
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DCYCle:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DURation:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:PERiod:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:AVERage:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:BASE:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:HREFerence:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:LREFerence:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MAXimum:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MINimum:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:REFerence:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:TOP:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:SEParation:DISPlay: ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:DURation: DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OCCurrence: DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OVERshoot: DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:DURation: DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
522
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OCCurrence: DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OVERshoot: DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
The above listed commands select the pulse parameters which are indicated in the display and hardcopy file. Only six parameters can be indicated at a time.
Note: These commands are only available in time measurement mode and with R&S NRP-Z81 power sensors.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
TRAC:SWE:MEAS:TRAC2:PULS:PER:DISP:ANN ON Selects the pulse period to be indicated in the display. TRAC:SWE:MEAS:PULS:DISP:ANN ON Activates indication of the selected pulse data in the display.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See "Overshoot (Rising Edge / Falling Edge)" on page 264
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:ALL:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe] <State>
Deactivates the indication of all pulse data of the selected trace. The parameters to be indicated can be selected with the TRAC:SWE:MEAS:.... commands. Only six parameters are indicated at a time.
Note: This command is only available in time measurement mode and with R&S NRPZ81 power sensors.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
TRAC:SWE:MEAS:PULS:ALL:DISP:ANN OFF Switches the indication of all pulse data off.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:BASE?
Queries how the threshold parameters are calculated.
Note: This parameter is only avalaible in time measurement mode and R&S NRP-Z81 power sensors.
Return values: <Base>
VOLTage | POWer
*RST:
VOLTage
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
523
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
TRAC1:SWE:PULS:THR:BAS? Queries the threshold base of pulse data calculation.
Query only
See " Base " on page 260
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:HREFerence <HReference>
Queries the upper threshold level of the overall pulse level. The distal power defines the end of the rising edge and the start of the falling edge of the pulse.
Note: This parameter is only avalaible in time measurement mode and R&S NRP-Z81 power sensors.
Parameters: <HReference>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.0 to 100.0 0.01 90.0
Example:
TRAC2:SWE:PULS:THR:POW:HREF? Queries the upper reference level of trace 2.
Manual operation: See " Distal " on page 261
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:LREFerence <LReference>
Queries the lower medial threshold level of the overall pulse level. The proximal power defines the start of the rising edge and the end of the falling edge of the pulse.
Note: This parameter is only avalaible in time measurement mode and R&S NRP-Z81 power sensors.
Parameters: <LReference>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.0 to 100.0 0.01 10.0
Example:
TRAC:SWE:PULS:THR:POW:LREF? Queries the medial threshold level of trace 1.
Manual operation: See " Proximal " on page 261
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:REFerence <Reference>
Queries the medial threshold level of the overall pulse level. This level is used to define the pulse width and pulse period.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
524
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Note: This parameter is only avalaible in time measurement mode and R&S NRP-Z81 power sensors.
Parameters: <Reference>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.0 to 100.0 0.01 50.0
Example:
TRAC3:SWE:PULS:THR:POW:REF? Queries the medial threshold level of trace 3.
Manual operation: See " Mesial " on page 261
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:STATe <State>
Activates the selected trace.
Parameters: <State>
OFF | ON | HOLD
*RST:
The preset value for each trace is evaluated during runtime as follows: If a sensor is plugged into the generator whose number corresponds to the trace number, this sensor is used to feed the trace and the state of the trace is ON; If no sensor is found with a number corresponding to the trace number, the preset value of the trace is "Off".
Example:
TRAC2:SWE:COPY REF Stores trace2 as reference trace. TRAC1:SWE:FEED REF Assigns the reference trace to trace 1. TRAC1:SWE:STAT ON Assigns the reference trace to trace 1. SENS:SWE:RMOD SING Selects single measurement. SENS:SWE:INIT Starts the measurement.
Manual operation: See " Indication - Trace Power Analysis" on page 247
:TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:FULLscreen:DISPlay:ANNotation[: STATe] <State>
Selects fullscreen display of the measurement diagram on the display and in the hardcopy file.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
525
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands Power Sensor Measurement Subsystems
Example:
Options: Manual operation:
TRAC:SWE:MEAS:FULL:DISP:ANN ON The display only shows the diagram.
Option R&S SMAB-K28
See "Full Screen" on page 273
:TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:GATE:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
Activates th eindication of the time gate borders and values in the measurement diagram and in the hardcopy file. The gate settings are performed with the CALC:POW:SWE:TIME:GATE:... commands.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
TRAC:SWE:MEAS:GATE:DISP:ANN ON The diagram also shows the gate information.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See " State - Gate " on page 270
:TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:MARKer:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
Activates the indication of the markers and the marker list in the measurement diagram and in the hardcopy file.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
TRAC:SWE:MEAS:MARK:DISP:ANN ON The diagram also shows the marker information.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See "Marker View" on page 271
:TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
Activates the indication of the pulse data below the measurement diagram and storing the data in the hardcopy file. The parameters to be indicated can be selected with the following TRAC:SWE:MEAS:.... commands. Only six parameters are indicated at one time.
Note: This command is only avalaible in time measurement mode and with R&S NRPZ81 power sensors.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
526
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Parameters: <State>
Example:
Options: Manual operation:
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
TRAC:SWE:MEAS:PULS:DISP:ANN ON Activates indication of the selected pulse data.
Option R&S SMAB-K28
See "Pulse Data View" on page 272
:TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:STANdard:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe] <State>
Selects the standard view, i.e. diagram and buttons but no lists are displayed and also stored in the hardcopy file.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
TRAC:SWE:MEAS:STAN:DISP:ANN ON Activates indication of the selected pulse data.
Options:
Option R&S SMAB-K28
Manual operation: See "Standard View" on page 271
14.15 SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
These subsystems contain the commands for configuring the power measurements with R&S NRP power sensor connected to the R&S SMA100B.
The local state is set with the INIT command. Switching off the local state enhances the measurement performance. Measurements results can be retrieved in local state on or off. Sensor parameters are set with the SENSe commands. To start the measurement and retrieve the result, use the :READ<ch>[:POWer]? command.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
527
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Suffix SENSe<ch>
READ<ch> INIate<hw> ELEMent<ch>
Value range [1] to 4
[1] to 4 [1] to 4 [1] to 25
Description
Indicates the sensor Sensor mapping: SENSe[1] - default mapping for sensors connected to the
[Sensor] connector SENSe2 - sensor connected to a [USB] connector SENSe3|4 - further connected sensors to [USB] connectors,
in the connection order Use the :SLISt commands to change the sensor mapping
Sensor assignment
Sensor assignment
Sensor mapping list
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
528
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Programming examples
Example: Detecting and assigning a power sensor
SLISt:LIST? // Response: "NRP33SN-V-900007-USB Legacy","NRP-Z211-900001-USB Legacy" // list of automatically detected sensors
SLISt:SCAN:STATe 1 // searches for sensors connected in the LAN or via the USBTMC protocol
:SLISt:SCAN:LSENsor 'NRQ6',101624 //sensor name, serial number :SLISt:SCAN:LSENsor 'NRQ6',11.123.1.123, 101624 //IP address, serial number // add sensor connected in the LAN to the list
:SLISt:SCAN:USENsor 'NRQ6',101624 //sensor name, serial number :SLISt:SCAN:USENsor #H15b,101624 //device ID (hexadecimal), serial number :SLISt:SCAN:USENsor 347,101624 //device ID (decimal), serial number // add sensor connected at the USB interface to the list
SLISt:LIST? // Response: // "NRP33SN-V-900007-USB Legacy","NRP-Z211-900001-USB Legacy", // "NRP33SN-V-900005-USBTMC","NRP33SN-V-900011-LAN" // list of automatically detected sensors // the list can contain more entries
SLISt:ELEMent3:MAPPing SENS1 // maps the third sensor from the list to the first sensor channel
SLISt:SENSor:MAP "NRPS18S-100654-USB Legacy", SENS3 // maps the sensor directly to channel 3
:SLISt:CLEar[ALL] // remove all sensors from the list :SLISt:CLEar:LAN // remove sensors connected in the LAN from the list :SLISt:CLEar:USB // remove sensors connected over USB from the list // remove all sensors from the list
Example: Performing a simple power measurement Prerequisite: The sensor is connected to the instrument and mapped to the first sensor channel.
:INITiate1:CONTinuous ON //Switches the continous power measurement on
:READ1? // Triggers the measurement and displays the results
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
529
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Example: Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter Prerequisite: The sensor is connected to the instrument and mapped to the first sensor channel.
SENSe1:SOURce RF //Sensor measures the power of the RF signal
SENSe1:FILTer:TYPE NSRatio //Selects fixed noise filter mode
SENSe1:FILTer:NSRatio 0.02 DB //Sets the maximum noise component in the result to 0.02 DB
SENSe1:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe 10 //Limits the settling time to 10 seconds.
:SENSe1:APERture:DEFault:STATe 0 // Deactivates the default aperture time of the sensor
:SENSe1:APERture:TIMe 10e-6 // Sets the aperture time to 10 us
SENSe1:UNIT DBM //Selects unit dBm for the measured value
:INITiate:CONTinuous ON //Switches the continous power measurement on
:READ? //Triggers the measurement and displays the results
:SLISt[:LIST]?................................................................................................................ 531 :SLISt:SCAN[:STATe]......................................................................................................531 :SLISt:SCAN:LSENsor....................................................................................................531 :SLISt:SCAN:USENsor................................................................................................... 532 :SLISt:CLEar:LAN.......................................................................................................... 532 :SLISt:CLEar:USB..........................................................................................................532 :SLISt:CLEar[:ALL]......................................................................................................... 532 :SLISt:ELEMent<ch>:MAPPing........................................................................................533 :SLISt:SENSor:MAP....................................................................................................... 533 :INITiate<hw>[:POWer]:CONTinuous............................................................................... 533 :READ<ch>[:POWer]?.................................................................................................... 534 :SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer]............................................................................................ 534 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:DEFault:STATe.............................................................. 535 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:TIMe.............................................................................535 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:SELect.......................................................535 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe........................................................ 536 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:LIST?.........................................................536 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority......................................................... 536 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe........................................................... 536
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
530
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO?.................................................................. 537 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER].................................................................. 537 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio............................................................................. 538 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe.................................................................. 538 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe.............................................................................. 538 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE................................................................................. 539 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency..................................................................................539 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:LOGGing:STATe............................................................................540 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet........................................................................................ 540 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe.............................................................................. 540 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber?................................................................................... 540 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce.......................................................................................541 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice]?......................................................................... 541 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion?................................................................................... 541 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE?......................................................................................... 542 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO.......................................................................................... 542
:SLISt[:LIST]?
Returns a list of all detected sensors in a comma-separated string.
Return values: <SensorList>
String of comma-separated entries
Each entry contains information on the sensor type, serial number and interface. The order of the entries does not correspond to the order the sensors are displayed in the "NRP Sensor Mapping" dialog.
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 529.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Sensor Mapping List " on page 231
:SLISt:SCAN[:STATe] <State>
Starts the search for R&S NRP power sensors, connected in the LAN or via the USBTMC protocol.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 529.
Manual operation: See " Scan " on page 232
:SLISt:SCAN:LSENsor <IP> Scans for R&S NRP power sensors connected in the LAN.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
531
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Setting parameters:
<IP>
string
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 529.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See " Add LAN Sensor settings" on page 232
:SLISt:SCAN:USENsor <DeviceID>, <Serial>
Scans for R&S NRP power sensors connected over a USB interface.
Parameters: <Serial>
integer Range:
0 to 999999
Setting parameters:
<DeviceID>
String or Integer
Range: *RST:
0 to 999999 0
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 529.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See " Add USB Sensor settings " on page 232
:SLISt:CLEar:LAN
Removes all R&S NRP power sensors connected in the LAN from the list.
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 529.
Usage:
Event
:SLISt:CLEar:USB
Removes all R&S NRP power sensors connected over USB from the list.
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 529.
Usage:
Event
:SLISt:CLEar[:ALL] Removes all R&S NRP power sensors from the list.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
532
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Example: Usage:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 529.
Event
:SLISt:ELEMent<ch>:MAPPing <Mapping>
Assigns an entry from the :SLISt[:LIST]? to one of the four sensor channels.
Parameters: <Mapping>
SENS1 | SENSor1 | SENS2 | SENSor2 | SENS3 | SENSor3 | SENS4 | SENSor4 | UNMapped
Sensor channel.
*RST:
UNMapped
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 529.
Manual operation: See " Sensor Mapping List " on page 231
:SLISt:SENSor:MAP <SensorId>, <Mapping>
Assigns a sensor directly to one of the sensor channels, using the sensor name and serial number.
To find out the the sensor name and ID, you can get it from the label of the R&S NRP, or using the command :SLISt:SCAN[:STATe]. This command detects all R&S NRP power sensors connected in the LAN or via 'USBTMC protocol.
Setting parameters:
<SensorId>
string
<Mapping>
enum
Example:
See Example "Detecting and assigning a power sensor" on page 529.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See " Sensor Mapping List " on page 231
:INITiate<hw>[:POWer]:CONTinuous <Continuous>
Switches the local state of the continuous power measurement by R&S NRP power sensors on and off. Switching off local state enhances the measurement performance during remote control.
The remote measurement is triggered with :READ<ch>[:POWer]?). This command also returns the measurement results. The local state is not affected, measurement results can be retrieved with local state on or off.
Parameters: <Continuous>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
533
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Example: Manual operation:
INIT1:CONT ON Switches local state of continuous power measurement on.
See " State " on page 237
:READ<ch>[:POWer]?
Triggers power measurement and displays the results.
Note: This command does not affect the local state, i.e. you can get results with local state on or off. For long measurement times, we recommend that you use an SRQ for command synchronization (MAV bit).
Suffix: <ch>
. 1 to 3
Return values: <Power>
float or float,float
The sensor returns the result in the unit set with command : SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer] Certain power sensors, such as the R&S NRP-Z81, return two values, first the value of the average level and - separated by a comma - the peak value.
Example:
SENS1:UNIT DBM Selects unit dBm for presentation of measurement result. READ1? Queries the measurement result of the sensor. -45.6246576745440230 -45.6 dBm were measured at the given frequency.
Example:
R&S NRP-Z81 READ1? -55.62403263352178,-22.419472478812476 -55.6 dBm is the measured average level, -22. 4 dBm is the measured peak level at the given frequency.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Level (Peak) / Level (Average) " on page 236
:SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer] <Power>
Selects the unit (Watt, dBm or dBV) of measurement result display, queried with : READ<ch>[:POWer]?.
Parameters: <Power>
DBM | DBUV | WATT
*RST:
DBM
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
534
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Example: Manual operation:
SENS2:UNIT DBM Selects dBm as unit for the measured value returned by command READ. READ2? Response: 7.34 7.34 dBm are measured by sensor 2.
See " Level (Peak) / Level (Average) " on page 236
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:DEFault:STATe <UseDefAp>
Deactivates the default aperture time of the respective sensor.
To specify a user-defined value, use the command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]: APERture:TIMe on page 535.
Parameters: <UseDefAp>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 530.
Manual operation: See "Default Aperture Time" on page 239
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:TIMe <ApTime>
Defines the aperture time (size of the acquisition interval) for the corresponding sensor.
Parameters: <ApTime>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
depends on connected power sensor 1E-9 depends on connected power sensor
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 530.
Manual operation: See "Aperture Time" on page 239
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:SELect <Select>
Several S-parameter tables can be stored in a sensor. The command selects a loaded data set for S-parameter correction for the corresponding sensor.
Parameters: <Select>
float
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See " S-Parameter " on page 240
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
535
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe <State>
Activates the use of the S-parameter correction data.
Note: If you use power sensors with attenuator, the instrument automatically activates the use of S-parameter data.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENSe1:POWer:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe 1 Activates the use of the S-parameters correction data.
Manual operation: See " S-Parameter " on page 240
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:LIST?
Queries the list of the S-parameter data sets that have been loaded to the power sensor.
Return values: <List>
string list
*RST:
0
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " S-Parameter " on page 240
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority <Priority>
Selects average or peak power for permanent display.
Parameters: <Priority>
AVERage | PEAK
*RST:
AVERage
Example:
SENS1:DISP:PERM:STAT ON Turns on the permanent view. SENS1:DISP:PERM:PRI AVER Sets the average power for display.
Manual operation: See " Display " on page 237
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe <State>
Activates the permanent display of the measured power level results. The instrument also indicates the sensor type, the connection, the measurement source and the offset if set.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
536
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Example: Manual operation:
SENS1:POW:DISP:PERM:STAT ON Turns on the permanent view.
See " Permanent " on page 237
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO?
Queries the current filter length in filter mode AUTO (:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]: FILTer:TYPE)
Return values: <Auto>
float Range:
1 to 65536
Example:
SENS1:FILT:TYPE AUTO Selects auto filter. SENS1:FILT:LENG:AUTO? Queries the automatically set filter length. Response: 1024
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Filter Length" on page 239
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER] <User>
Selects the filter length for SENS:POW:FILT:TYPE USER. As the filter length works as a multiplier for the time window, a constant filter length results in a constant measurement time (see also "About the measuring principle, averaging filter, filter length, and achieving stable results" on page 233).
The R&S NRP power sensors provide different resolutions for setting the filter length, depending on the used sensor type:
Resolution = 1 for R&S NRPxx power sensors
Resolution = 2n for sensors of the R&S NRP-Zxx family, with n = 1 to 16
Parameters: <User>
float
Range: *RST:
1 to 65536 1
Example:
SENS1:FILT:TYPE USER Selects user filter mode. SENS1:FILT:LENG 16 Sets a filter length of 16. E.g. using a sensor with 20 ms time window, the resulting measurement time is 640 ms (2x16x20 ms)
Manual operation: See "Filter Length" on page 239
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
537
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio <NSRatio>
Sets an upper limit for the relative noise content in fixed noise filter mode (: SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE). This value determines the proportion of intrinsic noise in the measurement results.
Parameters: <NSRatio>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.001 to 1 0.001 0.01
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 530.
Manual operation: See "Noise/Signal Ratio" on page 239
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe <MTime>
Sets an upper limit for the settling time of the auto-averaging filter in the NSRatio mode and thus limits the length of the filter. The filter type is set with command : SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE.
Parameters: <MTime>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1 to 999.99 0.01 4
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 530.
Manual operation: See "Timeout" on page 239
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe
Starts searching the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions. You can check the result with command :SENS1:POW:FILT:LENG:USER? in filter mode USER (:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE).
Example:
SENS1:FILT:TYPE USER Selects user filter mode. SENS1:FILT:SONC Activates the search for the optimum filter length. SENS1:FILT:LENG? Returns the found optimum filter length. Response: 128
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Auto Once" on page 239
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
538
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE <Type>
Selects the filter mode. The filter length is the multiplier for the time window and thus directly affects the measurement time.
Parameters: <Type>
AUTO | USER | NSRatio
AUTO Automatically selects the filter length, depending on the measured value. The higher the power, the shorter the filter length, and vice versa.
USER Allows you to set the filter length manually. As the filter-length takes effect as a multiplier of the measurement time, you can achieve constant measurement times.
NSRatio Selects the filter length (averaging factor) according to the criterion that the intrinsic noise of the sensor (2 standard deviations) does not exceed the specified noise content. You can define the noise content with command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer: NSRatio. Note: To avoid long settling times when the power is low, you can limit the averaging factor limited with the "timeout" parameter (:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe).
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 530.
Manual operation: See " Filter" on page 238
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the RF frequency of the signal, if signal source "USER" is selected (: SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce).
Parameters: <Frequency>
float *RST:
1 GHz
Example:
SENS1:SOUR USER Selects user-defined source. SENS1:FREQ 2.44GHz Sets the RF frequency of the source which is 2.44 GHz.
Manual operation: See " Frequency " on page 238
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
539
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:LOGGing:STATe <State>
Activates the recording of the power values, measured by a connected R&S NRP power sensor.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS:LOGG:STAT ON Activates recording of the power measurement of the first sensor.
Manual operation: See "Enable Logging" on page 240
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets a level offset which is added to the measured level value after activation with command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe. The level offset allows, e.g. to consider an attenuator in the signal path.
Parameters: <Offset>
float
Range: -100.0 to 100.0
*RST:
0
Default unit: dB
Example:
SENS1:POW:OFFS 10.0 Sets a level offset of 10 dB
Manual operation: See " Level Offset State,Level Offset" on page 238
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe <State>
Activates the addition of the level offset to the measured value. The level offset value is set with command :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS1:POW:OFFS 0.4dB Sets a level offset of 0.4 dB SENS1:POW:OFFS:STAT ON A level offset of 0.4 dB is added to the measured value.
Manual operation: See " Level Offset State,Level Offset" on page 238
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber? Queries the serial number of the sensor.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
540
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SENSe, READ, INITiate and SLISt Subsystems
Return values: <SNumber> Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
string
SENS1:SNUM? Queries the serial number.
Query only
See "Sensor type and serial number" on page 236
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce <Source>
Determines the signal to be measured.
Note: When measuring the RF signal, the sensor considers the corresponding correction factor at that frequency, and uses the level setting of the instrument as reference level.
Parameters: <Source>
A | USER | RF
*RST:
A
Example:
See Example "Performing a power measurement with a fixed filter" on page 530.
Manual operation: See " Use Frequency Of" on page 237
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice]?
Queries if a sensor is connected to the instrument.
Return values: <Status>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SENS1:STAT? Response: 1 A sensor is connected.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " State " on page 237
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion?
Queries the software version of the connected R&S NRP power sensor.
Return values: <SVersion>
string
Example:
SENS1:POW:SVER? Queries the software version of the power sensor.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
541
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE?
Queries the sensor type. The type is automatically detected.
Return values: <Type>
string
Example:
SENS1:TYPE? Queries the type of sensor. Response: NRP-Z21 The R&S NRP-Z21 sensor is used.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Sensor type and serial number" on page 236
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO
Performs zeroing of the sensor.
Zeroing is required after warm-up, i.e. after connecting the sensor.
Note: Switch off or disconnect the RF power source from the sensor before zeroing.
We recommend that you zero in regular intervals (at least once a day), if: The temperature has varied more than about 5 °C. The sensor has been replaced. You want to measure very low power.
Example:
SENS1:ZERO Executes zeroing.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Zero " on page 237
14.16 SOURce Subsystem
The SOURce subsystem contains the commands for configuring the digital and analog signals.
Common suffixes The following common suffixes are used in remote commands:
Suffix SOURce<hw>
Value range [1]
Description
SOURce[1] = RF output (optional keyword)
LF output = SOURce:LFOutput (SOURce is optional keyword)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
542
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Analog Modulation Subsystems............................................................................543 Avionic Standards Subsystems.............................................................................574 SOURce:CORRection Subsystem........................................................................ 616 SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem.........................................................................624 SOURce:INPut Subsystem................................................................................... 631 SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem............................................................................. 632 SOURce:LIST Subsystem.....................................................................................645 SOURce:NOISe Subsystem................................................................................. 657 SOURce:PGEN Subsystem.................................................................................. 659 SOURce:PHASe Subsystem................................................................................ 661 SOURce:POWer Subsystem................................................................................ 662 SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem......................................................................... 671 SOURce:SWEep Subsystem................................................................................ 676
14.16.1 Analog Modulation Subsystems
Option: see Chapter 5.1, "Required Options", on page 80.
The subsystems in this section describe all commands for analog modulation of the RF signal. Divided in separate sections, you can configure amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM) , phase modulation (PhiM) and pulse modulation (PULM).
You can perform each of the modulations either with an internally generated modulation signal or with an externally applied signal.
To configure the internal signal, use the commands listed in Chapter 14.16.6, "SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 632.
For more information:
See Chapter 5, "Analog Modulations", on page 80.
14.16.1.1 SOURce:MODulation Subsystem
The command in this subsytem allows you to disable all active modulations at once, and, vice versa, to restore the last active ones.
[:SOURce<hw>]:MODulation[:ALL][:STATe] <State>
Activates all modulations that were active before the last switching off.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
543
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh 30 SOURce1:AM1:SOURce LF1 SOURce1:AM1:STATe 1 SOURce1:FM1:DEViation 1000 SOURce1:FM1:STATe 1 // disable both modulation SOURce1:MODulation:ALL:STATe 0 SOURce1:AM1:STATe? // 0 SOURce1:FM1:STATe? // 0 // enable both modulation SOURce1:MODulation:ALL:STATe 1 SOURce1:AM1:STATe? // 1 SOURce1:FM1:STATe? // 1
See "[Mod on/off]" on page 82
14.16.1.2 SOURce:AM Subsystem
Option: R&S SMAB-K720 The AM subsystem contains the commands for setting the amplitude modulation and also the broadband amplitude modulation. The following examples show some variants for generating AM signals.
Example: Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal Using the internal LF generator, the following command sequence configures an amplitude modulated signal.
// Reset the instrument to start from a defined state *RST
// Set RF frequency and amplitude SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 6000000000 SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the modulation signal SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe SINE SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency 20000
// Configure the amplitude modulation settings and switch AM on SOURce1:AM1:SOURce LF1 SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh 30 SOURce1:AM:RATio 40 SOURce1:AM1:DEViation:MODe UNC SOURce1:AM1:STATe 1
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
544
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Using combined LF signals Using the internal LF generators of both paths, the following command sequences configure an amplitude modulated signal with determined deviations depths.
// Configure the AM modulation settings with combined LF signal sources SOURce1:AM1:SOURce LF1 SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh:LINear 32 // Select the modulation signal source for the second path SOURce1:AM2:SOURce LF2 // Combine the signals of both paths with fixed total deviation depth SOURce1:AM1:DEViation:MODe TOT SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh:SUM 60
// Query the deviation depth of modulation signal in the second path SOURce1:AM2:DEPTh:LINear? // Response: 28
// Combine the signals of both paths with fixed ratio SOURce1:AM1:DEViation:MODe RAT SOURce1:AM1:RATio 100 SOURce1:AM2:DEPTh:LINear 25
// Query the deviation depth of modulation signal in the first path SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh:LINear? // Response: 25
SOURce1:AM1:STATe 1 SOURce1:AM2:STATe 1
Example: Using an external signal source Using an external signal source, you can additionally determine whether you want to use only the AC component of the external modulation signal.
// Reset the instrument to start from a defined state *RST
// Set frequency and amplitude SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 6000000000 SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the amplitude modulation settings and turn on AM SOURce1:AM1:SOURce EXT1 SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh 40
// Query the input sensitivity at the external modulation input SOURCe1:AM1:SENSitivity? // Response: 40 // Since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V, // the resulting sensitivity is precisely 50%/V.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
545
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
// This value is assigned to the voltage value for full // modulation of the input.
// Select the coupling mode AC for external amplitude modulation SOURce1:INPut:MODext:COUPling1 AC
// For external AM signal input, adjust the sensitivity SOURce1:AM1:TYPE EXP SOURce1:AM1:SOURce EXT1 SOURce1:AM1:SENSitivity 25 SOURce1:AM1:SENSitivity? Response: 25
// Alternatively use the scan mode for the level behavior of rotating antennas // SCAN automatically sets the modulation type to exponential SOURce1:AM1:MODE SCAN SOURce1:AM1:SOURce EXT2 SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh:EXPonential 12 SOURce1:AM1:DEPTh:EXPonential? Response: 12
// Activating the external exponential AM changes the coupling // in this example for EXT2 INPut:MODext:COUPling2 DC
// Configure the modulation settings
// Switch on AM and RF signal output SOURce1:AM1:STATe 1 OUTPut1:STATe 1
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:STATe......................................................................................546 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SOURce.................................................................................. 547 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>[:DEPTh]...................................................................................547 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:DEPTh:LINear.......................................................................... 547 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:DEPTh:EXPonential.................................................................. 548 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:MODE............................................................................................ 548 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:DEPTh:SUM....................................................................................548 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:DEViation:MODE............................................................................. 549 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:RATio..............................................................................................549 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SENSitivity:EXPonential............................................................ 549 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SENSitivity[:LINear]...................................................................550 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:TYPE..............................................................................................550
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:STATe <State>
Activates amplitude modulation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
546
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <State>
Example:
Manual operation:
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
See Example "Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal" on page 544.
See "State" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SOURce <Source>
Selects the modulation source for amplitude modulation.
Parameters: <Source>
LF1 | LF2 | NOISe | EXT1 | EXT2 | EXTernal | INTernal
LF1|LF2 Uses an internally generated LF signal.
EXT1|EXT2 Uses an externally supplied LF signal.
NOISe Uses the internally generated noise signal.
INTernal Uses the internally generated signal of LF1.
EXTernal Uses an external LF signal (EXT1).
*RST:
LF1 <AM1>; LF2 <AM2>
Example:
See Example "Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal" on page 544.
Manual operation: See "Source" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>[:DEPTh] <Depth>
Sets the depth of the amplitude modulation in percent.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1..2 Modulation signal channel
Parameters: <Depth>
float Range:
0 to 100
Example:
See Example "Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal" on page 544.
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:DEPTh:LINear <DepthLin> Sets the depth of the linear amplitude modulation in percent / volt.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
547
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <DepthLin>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 30
See Example "Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal" on page 544. Similar to DEPTh.
See "Depth" on page 91
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:DEPTh:EXPonential <DepthExp>
Sets the depth of the exponential amplitude modulation in dB/volt.
Parameters: <DepthExp>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.01 10
Example:
See Example "Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal" on page 544. Similar to DEPTh.
Manual operation: See "Depth" on page 91
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:MODE <AmMode>
Selects the mode of the amplitude modulation.
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:MODE > SCAN sets [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:TYPE > EXPonen tial.
For active external exponential AM, automatically sets [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut: MODext:COUPling<ch> > DC.
Parameters: <AmMode>
SCAN | NORMal
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
See Example "Using an external signal source" on page 545.
Options:
R&S SMAB-K721
Manual operation: See "Mode" on page 90
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:DEPTh:SUM <AmDepthSum>
Sets the total depth of the LF signal when using combined signal sources in amplitude modulation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
548
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <AmDepthSum>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 30
See Example "Using combined LF signals" on page 545.
See "Total Depth" on page 91
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:DEViation:MODE <AmDevMode>
Selects the coupling mode. The coupling mode parameter also determines the mode for fixing the total depth.
Parameters: <AmDevMode>
UNCoupled | TOTal | RATio
UNCoupled Does not couple the LF signals. The deviation depth values of both paths are independent.
TOTal Couples the deviation depth of both paths.
RATio Couples the deviation depth ratio of both paths
*RST:
UNCoupled
Example:
See Example "Using combined LF signals" on page 545.
Manual operation: See "Deviation Mode" on page 91
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:RATio <Ratio>
Sets the deviation ratio (path#2 to path#1) in percent.
Parameters: <Ratio>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 100
Example:
See Example "Creating an amplitude modulated RF signal" on page 544.
Manual operation: See "Ratio Path2/Path1" on page 92
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SENSitivity:EXPonential <Sensitivity>
For [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:TYPEEXP, sets the sensitivity of the external signal source for amplitude modulation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
549
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Sensitivity>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.01 10
See Example "Using an external signal source" on page 545.
See "Sensitivity" on page 91
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SENSitivity[:LINear] <Sensitivity>
For [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:TYPE LIN, sets the sensitivity of the external signal source for amplitude modulation.
Parameters: <Sensitivity>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 30
Example:
See Example "Using an external signal source" on page 545.
Manual operation: See "Sensitivity" on page 91
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:TYPE <AmType>
Selects the type of amplitude modulation.
For [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:MODE SCAN, only EXPonential is available.
For active external exponential AM, automatically sets [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut: MODext:COUPling<ch>DC.
Parameters: <AmType>
LINear | EXPonential
*RST:
LINear
Example:
See Example "Using an external signal source" on page 545.
Options:
R&S SMAB-K721
Manual operation: See "Type" on page 90
14.16.1.3 SOURce:CHIRp Subsystem
Option: see Chapter 5.1, "Required Options", on page 80. With the commands described in this section, you can configure the settings for chirp modulation, select the trigger mode and determine the parameters for an external pulse / trigger signal. The following examples show some variants for generating the modulation chirp.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
550
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Perform chirp modulation Using the internal pulse generator, the following command sequence configures a chirp modulated RF signal.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state *RST; *CLS
// Set the RF signal frequency and level SOURce:FREQuency:CW 4000000000 SOURce:POWer:POWer: -25
// Configure the chirp modulation settings // set the pulse parameters and the trigger mode // query the commpression ratio // activat RF signal output
// Trigger a continuous chirp modulated signal SOURce:CHIRp:TRIGger:MODE AUTO SOURce:CHIRp:DIRection UP SOURce:CHIRp:PULSe:PERiod 0.00001 SOURce:CHIRp:PULSE:WIDTh 0.000008 SOURce:CHIRp:BANDwidth 2000 SOURce:CHIRp:COMPression:RATio? // Response: 0.01 SOURce:CHIRp:STATe 1 OUTPut1:STATe 1
// Trigger a single chirp modulation signal SOURce:CHIRp:TRIGger:MODE SING SOURce:CHIRp:DIRection DOWN SOURce:CHIRp:PULSe:PERiod 0.00002 SOURce:CHIRp:PULSE:WIDTh 0.000002 SOURce:CHIRp:BANDwidth 5000 SOURce:CHIRp:STATe 1 SOURce:CHIRp:TRIGger:IMMediate
// Alternatively configure the chirp modulation settings // using an external pulse signal. // Select the trigger mode, set the polarity of the external signal, // select the impedance of the external pulse signal input SOURce:CHIRp:TRIGger:MODE EXT SOURce:CHIRp:TRIGger:EXTernal:POLarity NORMal SOURce:CHIRp:TRIGger:EXTernal:IMPEDance G10K SOURce:CHIRp:STATe 1
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:BANDwidth.................................................................................552 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:COMPression:RATio?.................................................................. 552 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:DIRection................................................................................... 552 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:PULSe:PERiod........................................................................... 552 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:PULSe:WIDTh............................................................................ 553
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
551
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:STATe........................................................................................ 553 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:TRIGger:IMMediate..................................................................... 553 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:TRIGger:MODE.......................................................................... 553
[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:BANDwidth <Bandwidth>
Sets the modulation bandwidth of the chirp modulated signal.
Parameters: <Bandwidth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to Depends on hardware variant 0.01 1E3
Example:
See Example "Perform chirp modulation" on page 551.
Manual operation: See " Bandwidth" on page 95
[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:COMPression:RATio?
Queries the pulse compression ratio (= product of pulse width (s) and bandwidth (Hz)).
Return values: <Ratio>
float
Range: 0 to 80E6 Increment: 0.01
Example:
See Example "Perform chirp modulation" on page 551.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Compression Ratio" on page 96
[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:DIRection <Direction>
Selects the direction of the chirp modulation.
Parameters: <Direction>
DOWN | UP
*RST:
UP
Example:
See Example "Perform chirp modulation" on page 551.
Manual operation: See " Direction" on page 95
[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:PULSe:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the generated modulation chirp. The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
552
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Period>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
5E-6 (2E-7 with K23) to 100 1E-6 10E-6
See Example "Perform chirp modulation" on page 551.
See " Pulse Period" on page 95
[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:PULSe:WIDTh <Width>
Sets the width of the generated pulse. The pulse width must be at least 1us less than the set pulse period.
Parameters: <Width>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
2E-6 (1E-7 with K23) to 100 1E-6 2E-6
Example:
See Example "Perform chirp modulation" on page 551.
Manual operation: See " Pulse Width" on page 96
[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:STATe <State>
Activates the generation of a chirp modulation signal.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Perform chirp modulation" on page 551.
Manual operation: See " State" on page 94
[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:TRIGger:IMMediate
Immediately starts the chirp signal generation.
Example:
See Example "Perform chirp modulation" on page 551.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Execute Single Trigger" on page 96
[:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:TRIGger:MODE <Mode> Selects the trigger mode for the chirp modulation signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
553
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Mode>
Example: Manual operation:
AUTO | EXTernal | EGATe | SINGle | ESINgle
*RST:
AUTO
See Example "Perform chirp modulation" on page 551.
See " Trigger Mode" on page 96
14.16.1.4 SOURce:FM Subsystem
Option: R&S SMAB-K720 The FM subsystem contains the commands for setting the frequency modulation.
Example: Creating a frequency modulated RF signal Using the internal LF generator, the following command sequence configures a frequency modulated signal.
// Reset the instrument to start from a defined state *RST
// Set RF frequency and amplitude SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 6000000000 SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the modulation signal SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe SINE SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency 20000
// Configure the frequency modulation settings and switch FM on SOURce1:FM1:SOURce LF1 SOURce1:FM1:DEViation 1000 SOURce1:FM:RATio 40 SOURce1:FM:MODe LNOise SOURce1:FM1:STATe 1
// Switch on LF and RF signal output SOURce1:LFOutput1:STATe 1 OUTPut1:STATe 1
Example: Using combined LF signals Using the internal LF generators of both paths, the following command sequences configure a frequency modulated signal with determined deviations.
// Configure the FM modulation settings with combined LF signal sources SOURce1:FM1:SOURce LF1 SOURce1:FM1:DEViation 1000 // Select the modulation signal source for the second path SOURce1:FM2:SOURce LF2 // Combine the signals of both paths with fixed total deviation depth
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
554
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
SOURce1:FM1:DEViation:MODe TOT SOURce1:FM1:DEViation:SUM 5000
// Query the deviation depth of modulation signal in the second path SOURce1:FM2:DEViation? // Response: 4000
// Combine the signals of both paths with fixed ratio SOURce1:FM1:DEViation:MODe RAT SOURce1:FM1:RATio 100 SOURce1:FM2:DEVIation 10000
// Query the deviation depth of modulation signal in the first path SOURce1:AM1:DEViation? // Response: 1000
SOURce1:FM1:STATe 1 SOURce1:FM2:STATe 1
Example: Using an external signal source Alternatively configure the frequency modulation settings with an external modulation signal.
// Reset the instrument to start from a defined state *RST
// Set RF frequency and amplitude SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 6000000000 SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the frequency modulation settings and switch FM on SOURce1:FM1:SOURce EXT1 SOURce1:FM1:DEViation 5000
// Query the input sensitivity at the external modulation input :SOURCe1:FM1:SENSitivity? // Response: 1000 // since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V, // the resulting sensitivity is precisely 5000 Hz/V.
// Switch on FM and RF signal output SOURce1:FM1:STATe 1 OUTPut1:STATe 1
The following commands are available: [:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:STATe...................................................................................... 556 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>[:DEViation]............................................................................... 556 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:SOURce.................................................................................. 556 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:DEViation:MODE............................................................................. 557 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:DEViation:SUM................................................................................ 557
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
555
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:RATio..............................................................................................558 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:MODE.............................................................................................558 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:SENSitivity?.....................................................................................558
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:STATe <State>
Activates frequency modulation.
Suffix: FM<ch>
. 1..2 determines the modulation signal channel.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Creating a frequency modulated RF signal" on page 554.
Manual operation: See "State" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>[:DEViation] <Deviation>
Sets the modulation deviation of the frequency modulation in Hz.
Suffix: FM<ch>
. 1|2 Modulation signal channel
Parameters: <Deviation>
float
The maximum deviation depends on the RF frequency and the selected modulation mode (see data sheet).
Range: 0 to max
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
1E3
Example:
See Example "Creating a frequency modulated RF signal" on page 554.
Manual operation: See "Deviation" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:SOURce <Source>
Selects the modulation source for frequency modulation.
Suffix: FM<ch>
. 1|2 Modulation signal channel.
Parameters: <Source>
LF1 | LF2 | NOISe | EXT1 | INTernal | EXTernal | EXT2
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
556
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
LF1|LF2 Uses an internally generated LF signal.
INTernal = LF1 Works like LF1
EXTernal Works like EXT1
EXT1|EXT2 Uses an externally supplied LF signal.
NOISe Uses the internally generated noise signal.
*RST:
LF1 <FM1>; LF2 <FM2>
See Example "Creating a frequency modulated RF signal" on page 554.
See "Source" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:DEViation:MODE <FmDevMode>
Selects the coupling mode. The coupling mode parameter also determines the mode for fixing the total deviation.
Parameters: <FmDevMode>
UNCoupled | TOTal | RATio
UNCoupled Does not couple the LF signals. The deviation values of both paths are independent.
TOTal Couples the deviation of both paths.
RATio Couples the deviation ratio of both paths
*RST:
UNCoupled
Example:
See Example "Using combined LF signals" on page 554.
Manual operation: See "Deviation Mode" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:DEViation:SUM <FmDevSum>
Sets the total deviation of the LF signal when using combined signal sources in frequency modulation.
Parameters: <FmDevSum>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 40E6 0.01 1E3
Example:
See Example "Using combined LF signals" on page 554.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
557
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation: See "Total Deviation" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:RATio <Ratio>
Sets the deviation ratio (path2 to path1) in percent.
Parameters: <Ratio>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 100
Example:
See Example "Creating a frequency modulated RF signal" on page 554.
Manual operation: See "Ratio Path2/Path1" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:MODE <Mode>
Selects the mode for the frequency modulation.
Parameters: <Mode>
HBANdwidth | LNOise
HBANdwidth Selects maximum range for modulation bandwidth.
LNOise Selects optimized phase noise and spurious characteristics with reduced modulation bandwidth and FM deviation.
*RST:
HBANdwidth
Example:
See Example "Creating a frequency modulated RF signal" on page 554.
Manual operation: See "Mode" on page 87
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:SENSitivity?
Queries the sensitivity of the externally supplied signal for frequency modulation. The sensitivity depends on the set modulation deviation.
Return values: <Sensitivity>
float
Sensitivity in Hz/V. It is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input.
Range: 0 to max Increment: 0.01
Example:
See Example "Using an external signal source" on page 555.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
558
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
14.16.1.5 SOURce:PM Subsystem
Option: R&S SMAB-K720 The PM subsystem contains the commands for setting the phase modulation. You can configure the internal modulation source (LF generator) with the commands listed in Chapter 14.16.6, "SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 632 .
Example: Performing phase modulation The following example shows a command sequence to perform phase modulation.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state *RST; *CLS
// Set the RF signal frequency and level SOURce:FREQuency:CW 4000000000 SOURce:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Configure the phase modulation settings SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe SINE SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency 1000
// Select the LF signal generated by the internal modulation generator // or the internally generated noise signal SOURce1:PM1:DEViation 1 SOURce1:PM1:SOURce LF1 // SOURce1:PM1:SOURce INTernal // SOURce1:PM1:SOURce NOISe SOURce1:PM1:RATio 40 SOURce1:PM1:MODE HBAN
// Alternatively configure the phase modulation settings for an // external modulation source and query the input sensitivity. SOURce1:PM1:SOURce EXT1 // SOURce1:PM1:SOURce EXTernal SOURce1:PM1:DEViation 1 SOURce1:PM1:SENSitivity? // Response: 1 // since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V, // the resulting sensitivity is precisely 1RAD/V.
// Activate the signal output SOURce1:PM1:STATe 1 OUTPut1:STATe 1
Example: Using combined LF signals Using the internal LF generators of both paths, the following command sequences configure an phase modulated signal with determined deviations.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
559
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
// Configure the Phase modulation settings with combined LF signal sources SOURce1:PM1:SOURce LF1 SOURce1:PM1:DEViation 1.5 // Select the modulation signal source for the second path SOURce1:PM2:SOURce LF2 // Combine the signals of both paths with fixed total deviation depth SOURce1:PM1:DEViation:MODe TOT SOURce1:PM1:DEViation:SUM 2
// Query the deviation depth of the modulation signal in the second path SOURce1:PM2:DEViation? // Response: 0.5
// Combine the signals of both paths with fixed ratio SOURce1:PM1:DEViation:MODe RAT SOURce1:PM1:RATio 80 SOURce1:PM2:DEViation? // Response: 1.2
// Query the deviation depth of modulation signal in the first path SOURce1:PM1:DEViation? // Response: 1.5
SOURce1:FM1:STATe 1 SOURce1:FM2:STATe 1
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:STATe......................................................................................560 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:SOURce.................................................................................. 561 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:MODE............................................................................................ 561 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:DEViation:MODE............................................................................. 562 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:DEViation:SUM................................................................................562 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:RATio..............................................................................................562 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:SENSitivity?.................................................................................... 562 [:SOURce]:PM<ch>[:DEViation].......................................................................................563
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:STATe <State>
Activates phase modulation.
Activation of phase modulation deactivates frequency modulation.
Suffix: PM<ch>
. 1|2 Sets the modulation signal channel.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 559.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
560
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation: See "State" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:SOURce <Source>
Selects the modulation source for phase modulation signal.
Suffix: PM<ch>
. 1|2 Sets the modulation signal channel.
Parameters: <Source>
LF1 | LF2 | NOISe | EXT1 | EXT2 | INTernal | EXTernal
LF1|LF2 Uses an internally generated LF signal.
EXT1|EXT2 Uses an externally supplied LF signal.
NOISe Uses the internally generated noise signal.
INTernal Uses the internally generated signal of LF1.
EXTernal Uses an external LF signal (EXT1).
*RST:
LF1 <PM1>; LF2 <PM2>
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 559.
Manual operation: See "Source" on page 86
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:MODE <Mode>
Selects the mode for the phase modulation.
Parameters: <Mode>
HBANdwidth | HDEViation | LNOise
HBANdwidth Sets the maximum available bandwidth.
HDEViation Sets the maximum range for M deviation.
LNOise Selects a phase modulation mode with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode.
*RST:
HBANdwidth
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 559.
Manual operation: See "Mode" on page 89
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
561
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:DEViation:MODE <PmDevMode>
Selects the coupling mode. The coupling mode parameter also determines the mode for fixing the total deviation.
Parameters: <PmDevMode>
UNCoupled | TOTal | RATio
UNCoupled Does not couple the LF signals. The deviation values of both paths are independent.
TOTal Couples the deviation of both paths.
RATio Couples the deviation ratio of both paths
*RST:
UNCoupled
Example:
See Example "Using combined LF signals" on page 559
Manual operation: See "Deviation Mode" on page 88
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:DEViation:SUM <PmDevSum>
Sets the total deviation of the LF signal when using combined signal sources in phase modulation.
Parameters: <PmDevSum>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 20 1E-6 1
Example:
See Example "Using combined LF signals" on page 559
Manual operation: See "Total Deviation" on page 88
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:RATio <Ratio>
Sets the deviation ratio (path2 to path1) in percent.
Parameters: <Ratio>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.01 100
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 559.
Manual operation: See "Ratio Path2/Path1" on page 89
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:SENSitivity? Queries the sensitivity of the externally applied signal for phase modulation.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
562
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
The returned value reports the sensitivity in RAD/V. It is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input.
Return values:
<Sensitivity>
float
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 559.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce]:PM<ch>[:DEViation] <Deviation>
Sets the modulation deviation of the phase modulation in RAD.
Parameters: <Deviation>
float
The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency and the selected modulation mode (see data sheet).
Range: 0 to max
Increment: 1
*RST:
1
Default unit: RAD
Example:
See Example "Performing phase modulation" on page 559.
Manual operation: See "Deviation" on page 88
14.16.1.6 SOURce:PULM Subsystem
Option: see Chapter 5.1, "Required Options", on page 80. The PULM subsystem contains the commands for setting the pulse modulation. Pulse Modulation Settings.....................................................................................563 Pulse Train Settings.............................................................................................. 569 Pulse Train Data Exchange.................................................................................. 571
Pulse Modulation Settings With the commands described in this section, you can configure the settings for pulse modulation, select the trigger mode and determine delay times for the pulse modulation signal.
Example: Perform pulse modulation The example shows a command sequence to perform pulse modulation.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state *RST; *CLS
// Set the RF signal frequency and level SOURce:FREQuency:CW 4000000000 SOURce:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
563
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
// Configure the pulse modulation settings // Select the internal modulation generator, // set trigger mode, select pulse mode, transition type
// Trigger a single pulse
SOURce:PULM:SOURce INT SOURce:PULM:TRIGger:MODE SING SOURce:PULM:MODE DOUB SOURce:PULM:TTYPe SMO
SOURce:PULM:TRIG:IMM
// Alternatively configure the pulse modulation settings for // external modulation source // Select the source, set the polarity of the external signal, // select the impedance for the external pulse modulation input/ // for the external pulse modulation trigger input SOURce:PULM:SOURce EXT SOURce:PULM:POLarity NORMal SOURce:PULM:IMPedance G1K
// Configure the pulse generator settings // Set pulse period, width, and delay SOURce:PULM:PERiod 10 us SOURce:PULM:WIDth 8 us SOURce:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh 0.0000012 SOURce:PULM:DOUBle:DELay 0.0000045
// Activate the signal output SOURce:PGENerator:OUTPut:STATe 1 SOURce:PULM:STATe 1 OUTPut1:STATe 1
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:MODE........................................................................................ 565 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:MODE........................................................................... 565 [:SOURce]:PULM[:INTernal][:TRAin]:TRIGger:IMMediate................................................... 565 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:PERiod....................................................................................... 565 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:WIDTh........................................................................................ 566 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DELay........................................................................................ 566 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:DELay............................................................................566 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh........................................................................... 567 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:STATe............................................................................ 567 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:STATe......................................................................................... 567 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:SOURce..................................................................................... 567 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TTYPe........................................................................................ 567 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:POLarity..................................................................................... 568 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:IMPedance..................................................................................568 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:THReshold.................................................................................. 568
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
564
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:MODE <Mode>
Selects the mode for the pulse modulation.
Parameters: <Mode>
SINGle | DOUBle | PTRain
SINGle Generates a single pulse.
DOUBle Generates two pulses within one pulse period.
PTRain Generates a user-defined pulse train. Specify the pulse sequence with the commands: [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition
*RST:
SINGle
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Options:
PTRain requires R&S SMAB-K27
Manual operation: See "Pulse Mode" on page 99
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:MODE <Mode>
Selects a trigger mode - auto, single, external, external single or external gated - for generating the modulation signal.
Parameters: <Mode>
AUTO | EXTernal | EGATe | SINGle | ESINgle
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Manual operation: See "Trigger Mode" on page 100
[:SOURce]:PULM[:INTernal][:TRAin]:TRIGger:IMMediate
If [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:MODESINGle, triggers the pulse generator.
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Manual operation: See "Execute Single Trigger" on page 103
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the generated pulse, that means the repetition frequency of the internally generated modulation signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
565
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Period>
Example: Manual operation:
float
The minimum value depends on the installed options R&S SMAB-K22 or R&S SMAB-K23
Range: 20E-9 to 100
Increment: 5E-9
*RST:
10E-6
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
See "Pulse Period" on page 102
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:WIDTh <Width>
Sets the width of the generated pulse, that means the pulse length. It must be at least 20ns less than the set pulse period.
Parameters: <Width>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
20E-9 to 100 10E-9 2E-6
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Manual operation: See "Pulse Width" on page 102
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DELay <Delay>
Sets the pulse delay.
Parameters: <Delay>
float
*RST:
1ms
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Manual operation: See "Pulse Delay" on page 103
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:DELay <Delay>
Sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second pulse.
Parameters: <Delay>
float *RST:
1E-6
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Manual operation: See "Double Pulse Delay" on page 103
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
566
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh <Width>
Sets the width of the second pulse.
Parameters: <Width>
float Increment: 5E-9
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Manual operation: See "Double Pulse Width" on page 103
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:STATe <State>
Provided for backward compatibility with former Rohde & Schwarz signal generators.
Works like the command [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:MODEDOUBle.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:STATe <State>
Activates pulse modulation.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Manual operation: See "State" on page 84
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:SOURce <Source>
Selects between the internal (pulse generator) or an external pulse signal for the modulation.
Parameters: <Source>
INTernal | EXTernal
*RST:
INTernal
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Manual operation: See "Source" on page 84
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TTYPe <Source>
Sets the transition mode for the pulse signal.
Parameters: <Source>
SMOothed | FAST
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
567
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
SMOothed flattens the slew rate, resulting in longer rise/fall times.
FAST enables fast transitions with shortest rise and fall times.
*RST:
FAST
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
See "Transition Type" on page 84
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity of the externally applied modulation signal.
Parameters: <Polarity>
NORMal | INVerted
NORMal Suppresses the RF signal during the pulse pause.
INVerted Suppresses the RF signal during the pulse.
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Manual operation: See "Polarity" on page 111
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:IMPedance <Impedance>
Sets the impedance for the external pulse trigger and pulse modulation input.
Parameters: <Impedance>
G50 | G10K
*RST:
G50
Example:
See Example "Perform pulse modulation" on page 563.
Manual operation: See "Impedance" on page 111
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:THReshold <Threshold>
Sets the threshold for the input signal at the [Pulse Ext] connector.
Parameters: <Threshold>
float
Range: 0 to 2
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
1
Default unit: V
Example:
SOURce:PULM:THReshold 1
Manual operation: See "Threshold" on page 111
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
568
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Pulse Train Settings
Option: R&S SMAB-K27
This section describes the commands for the pulse train modulation and the associated file handling. For background information, see Chapter 5.4.4.2, "Pulse Generator > Pulse Train Settings", on page 103.
Example: Generating a pulse train signal The following settings are required to perform pulse train modulation.
Always create and select pulse train data list first before you activate the pulse train mode. Otherwise, an error is displayed
*RST; *CLS
// Set the RF signal frequency and level SOURce:FREQuency:CW 4000000000 SOURce:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude -25
// Create a pulse train data list // Select the directory MMEM:CDIR '/var/user/' SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:CATalog? // my_pt // Create and7or select the pulse train data file SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:SELect "/var/user/pt" // Enter the pulse train data SOURCe:PULM:TRAin:ONTime 0.0001,0.00025,0.0001 SOURCe:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime 500us,500us,300us SOURCe:PULM:TRAin:REPetition 2,0,3 // the second pulse is ignored
// Select pulse train mode // Select the internal modulation generator and the pulse mode SOURce1:PULM:SOURce INT SOURce1:PULM:MODE PTR SOURce1:PULM:TRIGger:MODE EXT SOURce1:PGENerator:OUTPut:STATe 1 SOURce1:PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity NORM SOURce:PGENerator:OUTPut:STATe 1 SOURce:PULM:STATe 1 OUTPut1:STATe 1
// SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:CATalog? // my_pt, pt // SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEL "/var/user/my_pt"
The following commands are available:
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
569
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:CATalog?.......................................................................... 570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DELete............................................................................. 570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime............................................................................ 570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime...........................................................................570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition:POINts?............................................................571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime:POINts?............................................................... 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime:POINts?............................................................. 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition......................................................................... 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect..............................................................................571
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:CATalog?
Queries the available pulse train files in the specified directory.
Return values: <Catalog>
string List of list filenames, separated by commas
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 569.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Pulse Train Data" on page 105
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DELete <Filename>
Deletes the specified pulse train file.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension is optional.
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 569.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "Pulse Train Data" on page 105
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime <OnTime> [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime <OffTime>
Enters the pulse on/off times values in the selected list.
Parameters: <OffTime>
Offtime#1{, Offtime#2, ...} | binary block data
List of comma-separated numeric values or binary block data, where: The list of numbers can be of any length. In binary block format, 8 (4) bytes are always interpreted as a floating-point number with double accuracy. See :FORMat[:DATA] on page 468 for details. The maximum length is 2047 values.
Range: 0 ns to 5 ms
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
570
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 569.
Manual operation: See "Edit Pulse Train Data" on page 106
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition:POINts? [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime:POINts? [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime:POINts?
Queries the number of on and off time entries and repetitions in the selected list.
Return values: <Points>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to INT_MAX 0
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 569.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition <Repetition>
Sets the number of repetitions for each pulse on/off time value pair.
Parameters: <Repetition>
Repetition#1{, Repetition#2, ...}
0 = ignore value pair Set "Repetition = 0" to skip a particular pulse without deleting the pulse on/off time value pair
Range: 0 to 65535
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 569.
Manual operation: See "Edit Pulse Train Data" on page 106
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect <Filename>
Selects or creates a data list in pulse train mode.
If the list with the selected name does not exist, a new list is created.
Parameters: <Filename>
string Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "Generating a pulse train signal" on page 569.
Manual operation: See "Pulse Train Data" on page 105
Pulse Train Data Exchange
Option: R&S SMAB-K27
With the following commands, you can configure pulse trains in ASCII format and export or import them accordingly.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
571
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
SOURce1:PULM:SOURce INT SOURce1:PULM:MODE PTR SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:SELect "/var/user/pt" SOURce1:PULM:STATe 1
SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE EXP SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension TXT SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal DOT SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn SEM SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn COMM SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect "/var/user/pt.pulstrn" SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect "/var/user/pt_script.txt" SOURce1:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute
The following commands are available:
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE............................................................572 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension............................................ 572 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal............................... 573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn............................... 573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?.............................................. 573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect................................................. 573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect........................................................... 574 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute........................................................ 574
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE <Mode>
Determines the import or export of a list.
Specify the source or destination file with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM: TRAin:DEXChange:SELect.
Parameters: <Mode>
IMPort | EXPort
*RST:
IMPort
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 571.
Manual operation: See " Mode " on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension <Extension>
Determines the extension of the ASCII file for import or export, or to query existing files.
Parameters: <Extension>
TXT | CSV
*RST:
TXT
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 571.
Manual operation: See "ASCII File Settings" on page 108
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
572
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal <Decimal>
Sets "." (decimal point) or "," (comma) as the decimal separator used in the ASCII data with floating-point numerals.
Parameters: <Decimal>
DOT | COMMa
*RST:
DOT
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 571.
Manual operation: See "ASCII File Settings" on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn <Column>
Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table.
Parameters: <Column>
TABulator | SEMicolon | COMMa | SPACe
*RST:
COMMa
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 571.
Manual operation: See "ASCII File Settings" on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
Queries the available ASCII files in the current or specified directory.
Return values: <Catalog>
string List of ASCII files *.txt or *.csv, separated by commas.
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 571.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Parameters: <Filename>
string Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 571.
Manual operation: See "Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination" on page 109
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
573
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file for import or export, containing a pulse train list.
Parameters: <Filename>
string Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See "Pulse Train Data Exchange" on page 571.
Manual operation: See "Select Source/Select ASCII Destination" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Import / Export" on page 109
Executes the import or export of the selected list file, according to the transfer direction set with command [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE.
14.16.2 Avionic Standards Subsystems
Option: see Chapter 6.1, "Required Options", on page 126.
The following subsections describe all commands for avionic standard modulation of the RF signal. Divided into separate avionic subsystem command sections, you can configure ADF, ILS and VOR modulation.
Programming examples are given for general configuration and avionic standard-specific configuration tasks.
Placeholder <Subsystem>
To simplify the description of the remote control commands, the placeholder <Subsystem> is introduced. Depending on the avionic standard used as an entry standard, replace this placeholder <Subsystem> with for example SOURce:ADF for ADF.
The replacement of the place holder <Subsystem> is mandatory, i.e. remote control commands containing this placeholder are not recognized and accepted by the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
574
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: SCPI command <subsystem>:STATe: Entry Standard = ADF
SOURce:ADF:STATe Entry Standard = ILS
SOURce:ILS:STATe Entry Standard = VOR
SOURce:VOR:STATe Invalid command
<Subsystem>:STAT
Contents
Programming Examples........................................................................................575 General Commands.............................................................................................. 579 SOURce:ADF Subsystem..................................................................................... 582 SOURce:ILS Subsystem.......................................................................................585 SOURce:VOR Subsystem.................................................................................... 607
14.16.2.1 Programming Examples
Example: Save/Recall a configuration This example shows how to query and load settings files, stored with the save/recall function for the ADF standard. For other avionic standards, replace ADF by ILS or VOR.
SOURce1:ADF:PRESet // Go to the "settings" directory. MMEM:CDIR "/var/user/settings" // List all files in the directory with extension *.adf. SOURce1:ADF:SETTing:CATalog? // adf_general, adf_comid
// Store the ADF configuration in the file "adf_general_latest.adf". SOURce1:ADF:SETTing:STORe "/var/user/settings/adf_general_latest" // Delete the file "adf_general.adf". SOURce1:ADF:SETTing:DELete "/var/user/settings/adf_general" SOURce1:ADF:SETTing:CATalog? // adf_general_latest, adf_comid
// Load the file "adf_general_latest.adf". SOURce1:ADF:SETTing:LOAD "/var/user/settings/adf_general_latest"
SOURce1:ADF:STATe 1
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
575
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Configure and generate a ADF signal
SOURce1:ADF:PRESet
// Configure ADF COM/ID settings. SOURce1:ADF:COMid:PERiod 9 SOURce1:ADF:COMid:FREQuency 1020 SOURce1:ADF:COMid:DEPTh 11 SOURce1:ADF:COMid:TSCHema USER SOURce1:ADF:COMid:DOT 0.11 SOURce1:ADF:COMid:DASH 0.29 SOURce1:ADF:COMid:SYMBol 0.11 SOURce1:ADF:COMid:LETTer 0.29 SOURce1:ADF:COMid:STATe 1
SOURce1:ADF:STATe 1
Example: Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal
SOURce1:BB:ILS:PRESet
// Configure ILS localizer general settings. SOURce1:ILS:TYPE GS SOURce1:ILS:GS:FREQuency:MODE USER SOURce1:ILS:GS:FREQuency 334700000 SOURce1:ILS:GS:FREQuency:MODE ICAO SOURce1:ILS:GS:ICAO:CHANnel? // CH18X SOURce1:ILS:GS:FREQuency:SYNChronize 1 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:ICAO:CHANnel? // CH18X SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency? // 108100000 SOURce1:ILS:GSLope:SOURce? // INT
// Configure ILS glide slope signal settings. SOURce1:ILS:GS:MODE NORM SOURce1:ILS:GS:DDM:POLarity P90_150 SOURce1:ILS:GS:ULOBe:FREQuency 90 SOURce1:ILS:GS:LLOBe:FREQuency 150 SOURce1:ILS:GS:PHASe 0
// Configure ILS glide slope amplitude settings. SOURce1:ILS:GS:DDM:DIRection UP SOURce1:ILS:GS:SDM 80 SOURce1:ILS:GS:DDM:COUPling FIX SOURce1:ILS:GS:DDM:STEP DEC SOURce1:ILS:GS:DDM:CURRent 0 SOURce1:ILS:GS:DDM:DEPTh 0 SOURce1:ILS:GS:DDM:LOGarithmic 0 SOURce1:ILS:GS:DDM:PCT 0
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
576
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
SOURce1:ILS:STATe 1
Example: Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal
SOURce1:ILS:PRESet
// Configure ILS localizer general settings. SOURce1:ILS:TYPE LOC SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:MODE USER SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency 108100000 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:SYNChronize 1 SOURce1:ILS:GS:FREQuency? // 108100000 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:MODE ICAO SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:ICAO:CHANnel CH26Y SOURce1:ILS:GS:ICAO:CHANnel? // CH26Y SOURce1:ILS:GS:FREQuency? // 108950000 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:SOURce? // INT
// Configure ILS localizer signal settings. SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:MODE NORM SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:POLarity P90_150 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:LLOBe:FREQuency 90 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:RLOBe:FREQuency 150 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:PHASe 0
// Configure ILS localizer amplitude settings. SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:DIRection LEFT SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:SDM 40 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:COUPling FIX SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:STEP DEC SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:CURRent 0 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:DEPTh 0 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:LOGarithmic 0 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:PCT 0
// Configure ILS localizer COM/ID settings. SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:CODE "MUC" SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:PERiod 9 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:FREQuency 1020 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DEPTh 10 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:TSCHema USER SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DOT 0.11 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DASH 0.29 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:SYMBol 0.11 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:LETTer 0.29 SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:STATe 1
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
577
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
SOURce1:ILS:STATe 1
Example: Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal
SOURce:ILS:PRESet
// Configure ILS marker beacons general settings. SOURce1:ILS:TYPE MBE SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:FREQuency:MODE USER SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:FREQuency 75000000 SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:MARKer:FREQuency 400 SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:MARKer:DEPTh 95 SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:MARKer:PULSed? // 0
// Configure ILS marker beacons COM/ID settings. SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:COMid:CODE "MUC" SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:COMid:PERiod 9 SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:COMid:FREQuency 1020 SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:COMid:DEPTh 5 SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:COMid:TSCHema USER SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:COMid:DOT 0.11 SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:COMid:DASH 0.29 SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:COMid:SYMBol 0.11 SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:COMid:LETTer 0.29 SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:COMid:STATe 1
SOURce1:BB:ILS:STATe 1
Example: Configure and generate a VOR signal
SOURce1:VOR:PRESet
// Configure VOR general settings. SOURce1:VOR:FREQuency:MODE USER SOURce1:VOR:FREQuency 108000000 SOURce1:VOR:FREQuency:MODE ICAO SOURce1:VOR:ICAO:CHANnel? // CH17X SOURce1:VOR:SOURce? // INT
// Configure VOR signal settings. SOURce1:VOR:MODE NORM SOURce1:VOR:VAR:FREQuency 30 SOURce1:VOR:VAR:DEPTh 30 SOURce1:VOR:SUBCarrier:FREQuency 9960 SOURce1:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh 30 SOURce1:VOR:REFerence:DEViation 480
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
578
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
// Configure VOR position settings. SOURce1:VOR:BANGle 1 SOURce1:VOR:BANGle:DIRection FROM
// Configure VOR COM/ID settings. SOURce1:VOR:COMid:PERiod 9 SOURce1:VOR:COMid:FREQuency 1020 SOURce1:VOR:COMid:DEPTh 11 SOURce1:VOR:COMid:TSCHema USER SOURce1:VOR:COMid:DOT 0.11 SOURce1:VOR:COMid:DASH 0.29 SOURce1:VOR:COMid:SYMBol 0.11 SOURce1:VOR:COMid:LETTer 0.29 SOURce1:VOR:COMid:STATe 1
SOURce1:VOR:STATe 1
14.16.2.2 General Commands
<subsystem>:PRESet.....................................................................................................579 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:PRESet......................................................................................... 579 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:PRESet...........................................................................................580 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:PRESet.........................................................................................580 <subsystem>:SETTing:CATalog.......................................................................................580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:CATalog........................................................................... 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:CATalog?........................................................................... 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:CATalog?......................................................................... 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:DELete........................................................................................ 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:DELete............................................................................ 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:DELete.............................................................................. 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:DELete............................................................................ 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:LOAD.......................................................................................... 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:LOAD.............................................................................. 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:LOAD................................................................................ 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:LOAD.............................................................................. 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:STORe........................................................................................ 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:STORe............................................................................ 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:STORe.............................................................................. 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:STORe............................................................................ 581 <subsystem>:STATe....................................................................................................... 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:STATe........................................................................................... 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:STATe............................................................................................. 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:STATe...........................................................................................581 <subsystem>:FREQuency:SYNChronize:STATe................................................................581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe]................................ 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe]..................................... 581
<subsystem>:PRESet [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:PRESet
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
579
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:PRESet [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:PRESet
Sets the parameters of the digital standard to their default values (*RST values specified for the commands).
Not affected is the state set with the command SOURce<hw>:VOR:STATe.
Example:
See Example "Save/Recall a configuration" on page 575.
<subsystem>:SETTing:CATalog [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:CATalog [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:CATalog? [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:CATalog?
Queries the files with settings in the default directory. Listed are files with the file extension *.adf/*.ils/*.vor.
Return values: <FileNames>
<filename1>,<filename2>,... Returns a string of filenames separated by commas.
Example:
See Example "Save/Recall a configuration" on page 575.
Usage:
Query only
<subsystem>:SETTing:DELete [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:DELete <Filename> [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:DELete <Filename> [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:DELete <Filename>
Deletes the selected file from the default or the specified directory. Deleted are files with extension *.adf/*.ils/*.vor.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
"<filename>"
Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted
Example:
See Example "Save/Recall a configuration" on page 575.
Usage:
Setting only
<subsystem>:SETTing:LOAD [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:LOAD <Filename> [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:LOAD <Filename> [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:LOAD <Filename>
Loads the selected file from the default or the specified directory. Loaded are files with extension *.adf/*.ils/*.vor.
Parameters: <Filename>
"<filename>" Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
580
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Usage:
See Example "Save/Recall a configuration" on page 575. Setting only
<subsystem>:SETTing:STORe [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:STORe <Filename> [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:STORe <Filename> [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:STORe <Filename>
Saves the current settings into the selected file; the file extension (*.adf/*.ils/*.vor) is assigned automatically.
Parameters: <Filename>
"<filename>" Filename or complete file path
Example:
See Example "Save/Recall a configuration" on page 575.
Usage:
Setting only
<subsystem>:STATe [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:STATe <State> [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:STATe <State> [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:STATe <State>
Activates/deactivates the VOR modulation.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Save/Recall a configuration" on page 575.
<subsystem>:FREQuency:SYNChronize:STATe [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe] <Mode> [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe] <Mode>
Activates synchronization of the ILS localizer ICAO channel with the ILS glide slope ICAO channel.
The ILS glide slope/localizer frequency of the ICAO channel (Table 6-2) is set automatically.
Parameters: <Mode>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
581
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
14.16.2.3 SOURce:ADF Subsystem
Option: R&S SMAB-K25
The SOURce:ADF subsystem contains all commands for configuring the ADF signal.
Characteristics which are valid for all modulations and the LF output are configured in the SOURce:LFOutput subsystem. The signal is output at the LF connector.
Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:CODE................................................................................ 582 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DASH.................................................................................582 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DEPTh............................................................................... 583 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DOT...................................................................................583 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:FREQuency........................................................................ 583 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:LETTer............................................................................... 583 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:PERiod...............................................................................584 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:SYMBol.............................................................................. 584 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:TSCHema.......................................................................... 584 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid[:STATe]...............................................................................585
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:CODE <Code>
Sets the coding of the COM/ID signal by the international short name of the airport (e.g. MUC for the Munich airport).
The COM/ID tone is sent according to the selected code, see Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781.
If no coding is set, the COM/ID tone is sent uncoded (key down).
Parameters: <Code>
string
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a ADF signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Code" on page 166
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DASH <Dash>
Sets the length of a Morse code dash.
Parameters: <Dash>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
50E-3 to 1 1E-4 300E-3
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a ADF signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See " Dash Length " on page 167
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
582
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DEPTh <Depth>
Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Depth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 95
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a ADF signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Depth" on page 167
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DOT <Dot>
Sets the length of a Morse code dot.
Parameters: <Dot>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
50E-3 to 1 1E-4 100E-3
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a ADF signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Dot Length" on page 167
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.1 to 20E3 0.01 1020
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a ADF signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Frequency" on page 167
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:LETTer <Letter> Sets the length of a Morse code letter space.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
583
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Letter>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
50E-3 to 1 1E-4 300E-3
See Example "Configure and generate a ADF signal" on page 576.
See " Letter Space " on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Period>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 120 1E-3 9
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a ADF signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Period" on page 167
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:SYMBol <Symbol>
Sets the length of the Morse code symbol space.
Parameters: <Symbol>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
50E-3 to 1 1E-4 100E-3
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a ADF signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See " Symbol Space " on page 167
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:TSCHema <TSCHema>
Sets the time schema of the Morse code for the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <TSCHema>
STD | USER
*RST:
STD
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a ADF signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Time Schema" on page 167
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
584
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid[:STATe] <State>
Enables/disables the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a ADF signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "COM/ID State" on page 166
14.16.2.4 SOURce:ILS Subsystem
Option: R&S SMAB-K25
The SOURce:BB:ILS subsystem contains all commands for configuring the ILS signal.
Characteristics which are valid for all modulations and the LF output are configured in the SOURce:LFOutput subsystem. The signal is output at the LF connector.
Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:TYPE..............................................................................................586 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:COUPling........................................................... 587 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:CURRent............................................................ 587 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:DIRection............................................................587 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:LOGarithmic........................................................588 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:PCT................................................................... 588 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:POLarity............................................................. 588 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:STEP................................................................. 589 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM[:DEPTh]..............................................................589 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency................................................................ 589 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency:MODE...................................................... 590 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe]................................ 590 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ICAO:CHANnel............................................................590 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:LLOBe[:FREQuency]....................................................591 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:MODE........................................................................ 591 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:PHASe....................................................................... 591 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:GS|GSLope:PRESet........................................................................ 592 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SDM........................................................................... 592 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SOURce..................................................................... 592 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ULOBe[:FREQuency]................................................... 593 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:CODE...................................................................593 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DASH................................................................... 593 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DEPTh................................................................. 594 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DOT..................................................................... 594 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:FREQuency.......................................................... 594 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:LETTer................................................................. 595 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:PERiod................................................................. 595 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:SYMBol................................................................ 595
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
585
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:TSCHema............................................................. 595 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid[:STATe]................................................................. 596 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:COUPling................................................................ 596 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:CURRent.................................................................596 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:DIRection................................................................ 597 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:LOGarithmic............................................................ 597 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:PCT........................................................................ 598 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:POLarity.................................................................. 598 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:STEP...................................................................... 598 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM[:DEPTh].................................................................. 599 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency..................................................................... 599 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:MODE...........................................................599 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe]..................................... 600 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:ICAO:CHANnel.................................................................600 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:LLOBe[:FREQuency]........................................................ 600 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:MODE............................................................................. 601 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:PHASe............................................................................ 601 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:PRESet........................................................................... 601 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:RLOBe[:FREQuency]........................................................ 602 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:SDM................................................................................602 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:SOURce.......................................................................... 602 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:CODE................................................................. 603 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DASH................................................................. 603 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DEPTh................................................................ 603 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DOT....................................................................604 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:FREQuency......................................................... 604 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:LETTer................................................................ 604 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:PERiod............................................................... 605 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:SYMBol...............................................................605 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:TSCHema........................................................... 605 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid[:STATe]............................................................... 606 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:FREQuency.................................................................... 606 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:FREQuency:MODE......................................................... 606 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:MARKer:FREQuency.......................................................606 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:DEPTh............................................................ 607 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:PRESet.......................................................................... 607 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:PULSed.......................................................... 607
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:TYPE <Type>
Selects the ILS modulation type.
Parameters: <Type>
GS | LOCalize | GSLope | MBEacon
*RST:
GS
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "ILS Component" on page 142
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
586
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:COUPling <Coupling>
Selects if the DDM value is fixed or is changed with a change of sum of modulation depths (SDM, see [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SDM on page 592).
Parameters: <Coupling>
FIXed | SDM
*RST:
FIXed
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "DDM - SDM Coupling" on page 149
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:CURRent <Current>
Sets the DDM value alternatively as a current by means of the ILS indicating instrument. The instrument current is calculated according to:
DDM Current µA = DDM Depth [%] × 857,125 µA
A variation of the instrument current automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the DDM value in dB.
Parameters: <Current>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-8.57125E-4 to 8.57125E-4 1E-7 0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "DDM Current" on page 148
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:DIRection <Direction>
Sets the simulation mode for the ILS glide slope modulation signal. A change of the setting automatically changes the sign of the DDM value.
Parameters: <Direction>
UP | DOWN
UP The 150-Hz modulation signal is predominant, the DDM value is negative (the airplane is too low, it must climb).
DOWN The 90-Hz modulation signal is predominant, the DDM value is positive (the airplane is too high, it must descend).
*RST:
UP
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
587
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation: See "FlyMode" on page 148
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:LOGarithmic <Logarithmic>
Sets the depth of modulation value for ILS glide slope modulation in dB.
See also [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM[:DEPTh] on page 589.
Parameters: <Logarithmic>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-999.9 to 999.9 1E-4 0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "DDM Logarithmic" on page 148
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:PCT <Pct>
Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the signal of the upper lobe (90 Hz) and the lower lobe (150 Hz). The maximum value equals the sum of the modulation depths of the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz tone.
See also [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM[:DEPTh] on page 589.
Parameters: <Pct>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-80.0 to 80.0 0.01 0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "DDM Percent" on page 149
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity for DDM calculation (see [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]: DDM[:DEPTh] on page 589).
The DDM depth calculation depends on the selected polarity:
Polarity 90 Hz - 150 Hz (default setting): DDM = [ AM(90 Hz) - AM (150 Hz) ] / 100%
Polarity 150 Hz - 90 Hz: DDM = [ AM(150 Hz) - AM (90 Hz) ] / 100%
Parameters: <Polarity>
P90_150 | P150_90
*RST:
P90_150
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
588
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
See "DDM Polarity" on page 146
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:STEP <DdmStep>
Sets the variation of the difference in depth of modulation via the rotary knob.
Parameters: <DdmStep>
DECimal | PREDefined
*RST:
DECimal
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "DDM Step" on page 148
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM[:DEPTh] <Depth>
Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the signal of the upper/left lobe (90 Hz) and the lower/right lobe (150 Hz). The maximum value equals the sum of the modulation depths of the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz tone. The following is true:
ILS:GS|GSL:DDM:DEPTh = (AM(90Hz) - AM(150Hz))/100%
A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value in dB and the value of the instrument current.
Parameters: <Depth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-0.8 to 0.8 1E-4 0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "DDM Depth" on page 148
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency <CarrierFreq>
Sets the carrier frequency of the signal.
Parameters: <CarrierFreq>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
100E3 to 6E9 0.01 334.7E6
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Carrier Frequency" on page 144
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
589
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal.
Parameters: <Mode>
USER | ICAO
DECimal Activates user-defined variation of the carrier frequency.
ICAO Activates variation in predefined steps according to standard ILS transmitting frequencies (see Table 6-2).
*RST:
DECimal
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Carrier Frequency Mode" on page 144
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe] <Mode>
Activates synchronization of the ILS glide slope ICAO channel with the ILS localizer ICAO channel.
The ILS glide slope/localizer frequency of the ICAO channel (Table 6-2) is set automatically.
Parameters: <Mode>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ICAO:CHANnel <Channel>
Sets the ICAO channel and the corresponding transmitting frequency.
If avionic standard modulation is activated and you change the "RF Frequency", the frequency value of the closest ICAO channel is applied automatically. The "ICAO Channel" is also updated.
The ICAO channel settings for ILS glide slope/localizer components are coupled. For an overview of the ILS ICAO channel frequencies, see Table 6-2.
Parameters: <Channel>
CH18X | CH18Y | CH20X | CH20Y | CH22X | CH22Y | CH24X | CH24Y | CH26X | CH26Y | CH28X | CH28Y | CH30X | CH30Y | CH32X | CH32Y | CH34X | CH34Y | CH36X | CH36Y | CH38X | CH38Y | CH40X | CH40Y | CH42X | CH42Y | CH44X | CH44Y | CH46X | CH46Y | CH48X | CH48Y | CH50X | CH50Y | CH52X | CH52Y | CH54X | CH54Y | CH56X | CH56Y
*RST:
CH18X
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
590
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
See "ICAO Channel" on page 144
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:LLOBe[:FREQuency] <Frequency>
Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the bottom viewed from the air plane for the ILS glide slope modulation signal.
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
100 to 200 0.05 150
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Down Frequency" on page 146
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:MODE <Mode>
Sets the operating mode for the ILS glide slope modulation signal.
Parameters: <Mode>
NORM | ULOBe | LLOBe
NORM ILS glide slope modulation is active.
ULOBe Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the upper lobe (90Hz) signal component of the ILS glide slope signal is active.
LLOBe Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the lower lobe (150Hz) signal component of the ILS glide slope signal is active.
*RST:
NORM
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Operating Mode" on page 145
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:PHASe <Phase>
Sets the phase between the modulation signals of the upper and lower antenna lobe of the ILS glide slope signal.
Zero crossing of the lower lobe (150Hz) signal serves as a reference. The angle refers to the period of the signal of the right antenna lobe.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
591
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Phase>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-60 to 120 0.01 0.0
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
See "Up/Down Phase" on page 146
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:GS|GSLope:PRESet
Sets the parameters of the ILS glide slope component to their default values (*RST values specified for the commands).
For other ILS preset commands, see [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:PRESet on page 580.
Example:
SOURce1:ILS:GS:PRESet
Usage:
Event
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SDM <Sdm>
Sets the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of the upper lobe (90 Hz) and lower lobe (150 Hz) for the ILS glide slope signal contents.
The RMS modulation depth of the sum signal depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones.
Parameters: <Sdm>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 80
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Sum of Depth" on page 147
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SOURce <IlsGsSource>
Sets the modulation source for the avionic standard modulation.
If external modulation source is set, the external signal is added to the internal signal. Switching off the internal modulation source is not possible.
Parameters: <IlsGsSource>
INT | INT,EXT | EXT
INT Internal modulation source is used.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
592
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
EXT|INT,EXT An external modulation source is used, additional to the internal modulation source. The external signal is input at the Ext connector.
*RST:
INT
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
See "EXT AM" on page 144
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ULOBe[:FREQuency] <Frequency>
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
60 to 120 0.03 90
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS glide slope signal" on page 576.
Manual operation: See "Up Frequency" on page 146
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:CODE <Code>
Sets the coding of the COM/ID signal by the international short name of the airport (e.g. MUC for the Munich airport).
The COM/ID tone is sent according to the selected code, see Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781.
If no coding is set, the COM/ID tone is sent uncoded (key down).
Parameters: <Code>
string
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "Code" on page 157
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DASH <Dash>
Sets the length of a Morse code dash.
Parameters: <Dash>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.3
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
593
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
See " Dash Length " on page 158
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DEPTh <Depth>
Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Depth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 10
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "Depth" on page 157
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DOT <Dot>
Sets the length of a Morse code dot.
Parameters: <Dot>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.1
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "Dot Length" on page 158
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.1 to 20E3 0.01 1020
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "Frequency" on page 157
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
594
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:LETTer <Letter>
Sets the length of a Morse code letter space.
Parameters: <Letter>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.3
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See " Letter Space " on page 158
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Period>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 120 1E-3 9
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "Period" on page 157
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:SYMBol <Symbol>
Sets the length of the Morse code symbol space.
Parameters: <Symbol>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.1
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See " Symbol Space " on page 158
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:TSCHema <TSchema>
Sets the time schema of the Morse code for the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <TSchema>
STD | USER
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
595
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
STD Activates the standard time schema of the Morse code. The set dot length determines the dash length, which is 3 times the dot length.
USER Activates the user-defined time schema of the Morse code. Dot and dash length, as well as symbol and letter space can be set separately.
*RST:
STD
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
See "Time Schema" on page 158
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid[:STATe] <State>
Enables/disables the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "COM/ID State" on page 157
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:COUPling <Coupling>
Selects if the DDM value is fixed or is changed with a change of sum of modulation depths (SDM, see [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:SDM on page 602).
Parameters: <Coupling>
FIXed | SDM
*RST:
FIXed
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "DDM - SDM Coupling" on page 155
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:CURRent <Current>
Sets the DDM value alternatively as a current by means of the ILS indicating instrument. The instrument current is calculated according to:
DDM µA = DDM × 857,1 µA
A variation of the instrument current automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the DDM value in dB.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
596
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Current>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-9.6775E-4 to 9.6775E-4 1E-7 0
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
See "DDM Current" on page 155
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:DIRection <Direction>
Sets the simulation mode for the ILS-LOC modulation signal. A change of the setting automatically changes the sign of the DDM value.
Parameters: <Direction>
LEFT | RIGHt
LEFT The 150 Hz modulation signal is predominant, the DDM value is negative (the airplane is too far to the right, it must turn to the left).
RIGHT The 90 Hz modulation signal is predominant, the DDM value is positive (the airplane is too far to the left, it must turn to the right).
*RST:
LEFT
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "FlyMode" on page 154
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:LOGarithmic <Logarithmic>
Sets the modulation depth in dB for ILS localizer modulation.
See also [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM[:DEPTh] on page 599.
Parameters: <Logarithmic>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-999.9 to 999.9 1E-4 0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "DDM Logarithmic" on page 156
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
597
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:PCT <Pct>
Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the signal of the left lobe (90 Hz) and the right lobe (150 Hz). The maximum value equals the sum of the modulation depths of the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz tone.
See also [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM[:DEPTh] on page 599.
Parameters: <Pct>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-80.0 to 80.0 0.01 0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "DDM Percent" on page 156
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity for DDM calculation (see [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM[: DEPTh]).
The DDM depth calculation depends on the selected polarity:
Polarity 90 Hz - 150 Hz (default setting): DDM = [ AM (90 Hz) - AM (150 Hz) ] / 100%
Polarity 150 Hz - 90 Hz: DDM = [ AM (150 Hz) - AM (90 Hz) ] / 100%
Parameters: <Polarity>
P90_150 | P150_90
*RST:
P90_150
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "DDM polarity" on page 153
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:STEP <DdmStep>
Sets the variation step of the DDM values.
Parameters: <DdmStep>
DECimal | PREDefined
*RST:
DECimal
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "DDM Step" on page 155
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
598
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM[:DEPTh] <Depth>
Sets the difference in depth of modulation between the signal of the upper/left lobe (90 Hz) and the lower/right lobe (150 Hz). The maximum value equals the sum of the modulation depths of the 90 Hz and the 150 Hz tone.The following is true:
ILS:LOC:DDM:DEPTh = (AM(90Hz) - AM(150Hz))/100%
A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value in dB and the value of the instrument current.
Parameters: <Depth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-0.4 to 0.4 1E-4 0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "DDM Depth" on page 155
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency <CarrierFreq>
Sets the carrier frequency of the signal.
Parameters: <CarrierFreq>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
100E3 to 6E9 0.01 108.1E6
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "Carrier Frequency" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:MODE <IlsLocFreqMode>
Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal.
Parameters: <Mode>
DECimal | ICAO
DECimal Activates user-defined variation of the carrier frequency.
ICAO Activates variation in predefined steps according to standard ILS transmitting frequencies (see Table 6-2).
*RST:
DECimal
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
599
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation: See "Carrier Frequency Mode" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe] <Mode>
Activates synchronization of the ILS localizer ICAO channel with the ILS glide slope ICAO channel.
The ILS glide slope/localizer frequency of the ICAO channel (Table 6-2) is set automatically.
Parameters: <Mode>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:ICAO:CHANnel <SelIcaoChan>
Sets the ICAO channel and the corresponding transmitting frequency.
If avionic standard modulation is activated and you change the "RF Frequency", the frequency value of the closest ICAO channel is applied automatically. The "ICAO Channel" is also updated.
The ICAO channel settings for ILS glide slope/localizer components are coupled. For an overview of the ILS ICAO channel frequencies, see Table 6-2.
Parameters: <SelIcaoChan>
CH18X | CH18Y | CH20X | CH20Y | CH22X | CH22Y | CH24X | CH24Y | CH26X | CH26Y | CH28X | CH28Y | CH30X | CH30Y | CH32X | CH32Y | CH34X | CH34Y | CH36X | CH36Y | CH38X | CH38Y | CH40X | CH40Y | CH42X | CH42Y | CH44X | CH44Y | CH46X | CH46Y | CH48X | CH48Y | CH50X | CH50Y | CH52X | CH52Y | CH54X | CH54Y | CH56X | CH56Y
*RST:
CH18X
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "ICAO Channel" on page 151
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:LLOBe[:FREQuency] <Frequency>
Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the bottom viewed from the air plane for the ILS localizer modulation signal.
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
60 to 120 0.03 90
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
600
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
See "Left Frequency" on page 153
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:MODE <Mode>
Sets the operating mode for the ILS localizer modulation signal.
Parameters: <Mode>
NORM | LLOBe | RLOBe
NORM ILS localizer modulation is active.
LLOBe Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the left lobe (90Hz) signal component of the ILS localizer signal is active.
RLOBe Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the right lobe (150Hz) signal component of the ILS localizer signal is active.
*RST:
NORM
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "Operating Mode" on page 152
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:PHASe <Phase>
Sets the phase between the modulation signals of the left and right antenna lobe of the ILS localizer signal.
The zero crossing of the right lobe (150Hz) signal serves as a reference. The angle refers to the period of the signal of the right antenna lobe.
Parameters: <Phase>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-60 to 120 0.01 0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "Left/Right Phase" on page 153
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:PRESet
Sets the parameters of the ILS localizer component to their default values (*RST values specified for the commands).
For other ILS preset commands, see [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:PRESet on page 580.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
601
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Usage:
SOURce1:ILS:LOCalizer:PRESet Event
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:RLOBe[:FREQuency] <Frequency>
Sets the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at the right viewed from the air plane.
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
100 to 200 0.05 150
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "Right Frequency" on page 153
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:SDM <Sdm>
Sets the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of the left lobe (90 Hz) and right lobe (150 Hz) for the ILS localizer signal contents.
The RMS modulation depth of the sum signal depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones.
Parameters: <Sdm>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 40
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
Manual operation: See "Sum of Depth" on page 154
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:SOURce <IlsLocSource>
Sets the modulation source for the avionic standard modulation.
If external modulation source is set, the external signal is added to the internal signal. Switching off the internal modulation source is not possible.
Parameters: <IlsLocSource>
INT | INT,EXT | EXT
INT Internal modulation source is used.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
602
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
EXT|INT,EXT An external modulation source is used, additional to the internal modulation source. The external signal is input at the Ext connector.
*RST:
INT
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS localizer signal" on page 577.
See "EXT AM" on page 151
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:CODE <Code>
Sets the coding of the COM/ID signal by the international short name of the airport (e.g. MUC for the Munich airport).
The COM/ID tone is sent according to the selected code, see Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781.
If no coding is set, the COM/ID tone is sent uncoded (key down).
Parameters: <Code>
string
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Code" on page 162
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DASH <Dash>
Sets the length of a Morse code dash.
Parameters: <Dash>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.3
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Dash Length" on page 163
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DEPTh <Depth>
Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Depth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 5
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
603
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
See "Depth" on page 162
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DOT <Dot>
Sets the length of a Morse code dot.
Parameters: <Dot>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.1
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Dot Length" on page 163
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.1 to 20E3 0.01 1020
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Frequency" on page 162
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:LETTer <Letter>
Sets the length of a Morse code letter space.
Parameters: <Letter>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.3
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See " Letter Space" on page 163
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
604
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Period>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 120 1E-3 9
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Period" on page 162
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:SYMBol <Symbol>
Sets the length of the Morse code symbol space.
Parameters: <Symbol>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.1
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See " Symbol Space" on page 163
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:TSCHema <Tschema>
Sets the time schema of the Morse code for the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Tschema>
STD | USER
STD Activates the standard time schema of the Morse code. The set dot length determines the dash length, which is 3 times the dot length.
USER Activates the user-defined time schema of the Morse code. Dot and dash length, as well as symbol and letter space can be set separately.
*RST:
STD
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Time Schema" on page 162
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
605
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid[:STATe] <State>
Enables/disables the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "COM/ID State" on page 162
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:FREQuency <CarrierFreq>
Sets the carrier frequency for the ILS marker beacon signal.
Parameters: <CarrierFreq>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
100E3 to 6E9 0.01 75E6
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Carrier Frequency" on page 159
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
Sets the carrier frequency mode of the ILS marker beacon signal.
Parameters: <Mode>
USER | PREDefined
*RST:
USER
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Carrier Frequency Mode" on page 159
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:MARKer:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the modulation frequency of the marker signal for the ILS marker beacon modulation signal.
Parameters: <Frequency>
400 | 1300 | 3000
*RST:
400
Default unit: Hz
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
606
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation: See "Marker Frequency" on page 160
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:DEPTh <Depth>
Sets the modulation depth of the marker signal for the ILS marker beacon signal.
Parameters: <Depth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 95
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Marker Depth" on page 160
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:PRESet
Sets the parameters of the ILS marker beacons component to their default values (*RST values specified for the commands).
For other ILS preset commands, see [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:PRESet on page 580.
Example:
SOURce1:ILS:MBEacon:PRESet
Usage:
Event
[:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:PULSed <Pulsed>
Activates the modulation of a pulsed marker signal (morse coding).
Parameters: <Pulsed>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate an ILS marker beacons signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Pulsed Marker" on page 160
14.16.2.5 SOURce:VOR Subsystem
Option: R&S SMAB-K25 The SOURce:VOR subsystem contains all commands for configuring the VOR signal. Characteristics which are valid for all modulations and the LF output are configured in the SOURce:LFOutput subsystem. The signal is output at the LF connector.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
607
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SOURce....................................................................................... 608 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR[:BANGle].......................................................................................608 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR[:BANGle]:DIRection....................................................................... 609 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:CODE................................................................................609 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DASH................................................................................ 610 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DEPTh...............................................................................610 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DOT.................................................................................. 610 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:FREQuency....................................................................... 610 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:LETTer............................................................................... 611 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:PERiod.............................................................................. 611 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:SYMBol..............................................................................611 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:TSCHema.......................................................................... 612 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid[:STATe].............................................................................. 612 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:FREQuency.................................................................................. 612 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:FREQuency:MODE........................................................................613 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:ICAO:CHANnel..............................................................................613 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:MODE.......................................................................................... 614 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:REFerence[:DEViation]...................................................................615 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh........................................................................ 615 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SUBCarrier[:FREQuency]............................................................... 615 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:VAR:FREQuency........................................................................... 616 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:VAR[:DEPTh]................................................................................ 616
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SOURce <VorSourceSel>
Sets the modulation source for the avionic standard modulation.
If external modulation source is set, the external signal is added to the internal signal. Switching off the internal modulation source is not possible.
Parameters: <VorSourceSel>
INT | INT,EXT | EXT
INT Internal modulation source is used.
EXT|INT,EXT An external modulation source is used, additional to the internal modulation source. The external signal is input at the Ext connector.
*RST:
INT
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "EXT AM" on page 135
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR[:BANGle] <BAngle> Sets the bearing angle between the VAR signal and the reference signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
608
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
The orientation of the angle can be set with [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR[:BANGle]: DIRection.
Parameters: <BAngle>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 360 0.01 0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Bearing Angle" on page 137
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR[:BANGle]:DIRection <Direction>
Sets the reference position of the phase information.
Parameters: <Direction>
FROM | TO
FROM The bearing angle is measured between the geographic north and the connection line from beacon to airplane.
TO The bearing angle is measured between the geographic north and the connection line from airplane to beacon.
*RST:
FROM
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Direction" on page 137
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:CODE <Code>
Sets the coding of the COM/ID signal by the international short name of the airport (e.g. MUC for the Munich airport).
The COM/ID tone is sent according to the selected code, see Chapter C, "Morse Code Settings", on page 781.
If no coding is set, the COM/ID tone is sent uncoded (key down).
Parameters: <Code>
string
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Code" on page 139
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
609
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DASH <Dash>
Sets the length of a Morse code dash.
Parameters: <Dash>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.3
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Dash Length" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DEPTh <Depth>
Sets the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Depth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 10
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Depth" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DOT <Dot>
Sets the length of a Morse code dot.
If the time schema is set to standard, the dash length (= 3 times dot length), symbol space (= dot length) and letter space (= 3 times dot length) is also determined by this entry.
Parameters: <Dot>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.1
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Dot Length" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:FREQuency <Frequency> Sets the frequency of the COM/ID signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
610
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Frequency>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.1 to 20E3 0.01 1020
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
See "Frequency" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:LETTer <Letter>
Sets the length of a Morse code letter space.
Parameters: <Letter>
float
Range: 0.05 to 1
Increment: 1E-4
*RST:
0.3
Default unit: s
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See " Letter Space " on page 140
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Period>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 120 1E-3 9
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Period" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:SYMBol <Symbol>
Sets the length of the Morse code symbol space.
Parameters: <Symbol>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.05 to 1 1E-4 0.1
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
611
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
See " Symbol Space " on page 140
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:TSCHema <Tschema>
Sets the time schema of the Morse code for the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <Tschema>
STD | USER
STD Activates the standard time schema of the Morse code. The set dot length determines the dash length, which is 3 times the dot length.
USER Activates the user-defined time schema of the Morse code. Dot and dash length, as well as symbol and letter space can be set separately.
*RST:
STD
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Time Schema" on page 139
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid[:STATe] <State>
Enables/disables the COM/ID signal.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "COM/ID State" on page 138
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:FREQuency <CarrierFreq>
Sets the carrier frequency of the signal.
Parameters: <CarrierFreq>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
100E3 to 6E9 0.01 108E6
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
612
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation: See "Carrier Frequency" on page 134
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
Sets the mode for the carrier frequency of the signal.
Parameters: <Mode>
DECimal | ICAO
DECimal Activates user-defined variation of the carrier frequency.
ICAO Activates variation in predefined steps according to standard VOR transmitting frequencies (see Table 6-1).
*RST:
DECimal
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "Carrier Frequency Mode" on page 134
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:ICAO:CHANnel <Channel>
Sets the ICAO channel and the corresponding transmitting frequency.
If avionic standard modulation is activated and you change the "RF Frequency", the frequency value of the closest ICAO channel is applied automatically. The "ICAO Channel" is also updated.
The carrier frequency is set automatically to the value of the ICAO channel. For an overview of the VOR ICAO channel frequencies, see Table 6-1.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
613
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Channel>
Example: Manual operation:
CH17X | CH17Y | CH19X | CH19Y | CH21X | CH21Y | CH23X | CH23Y | CH25X | CH25Y | CH27X | CH27Y | CH29X | CH29Y | CH31X | CH31Y | CH33X | CH33Y | CH35X | CH35Y | CH37X | CH37Y | CH39X | CH39Y | CH41X | CH41Y | CH43X | CH43Y | CH45X | CH45Y | CH47X | CH47Y | CH49X | CH49Y | CH51X | CH51Y | CH53X | CH53Y | CH55X | CH55Y | CH57X | CH57Y | CH58X | CH58Y | CH59X | CH59Y | CH70X | CH70Y | CH71X | CH71Y | CH72X | CH72Y | CH73X | CH73Y | CH74X | CH74Y | CH75X | CH75Y | CH76X | CH76Y | CH77X | CH77Y | CH78X | CH78Y | CH79X | CH79Y | CH80X | CH80Y | CH81X | CH81Y | CH82X | CH82Y | CH83X | CH83Y | CH84X | CH84Y | CH85X | CH85Y | CH86X | CH86Y | CH87X | CH87Y | CH88X | CH88Y | CH89X | CH89Y | CH90X | CH90Y | CH91X | CH91Y | CH92X | CH92Y | CH93X | CH93Y | CH94X | CH94Y | CH95X | CH95Y | CH96X | CH96Y | CH97X | CH97Y | CH98X | CH98Y | CH99X | CH99Y | CH100X | CH100Y | CH101X | CH101Y | CH102X | CH102Y | CH103X | CH103Y | CH104X | CH104Y | CH105X | CH105Y | CH106X | CH106Y | CH107X | CH107Y | CH108X | CH108Y | CH109X | CH109Y | CH110X | CH110Y | CH111X | CH111Y | CH112X | CH112Y | CH113X | CH113Y | CH114X | CH114Y | CH115X | CH115Y | CH116X | CH116Y | CH117X | CH117Y | CH118X | CH118Y | CH119X | CH119Y | CH120X | CH120Y | CH121X | CH121Y | CH122X | CH122Y | CH123X | CH123Y | CH124X | CH124Y | CH125X | CH125Y | CH126X | CH126Y
*RST:
CH17X
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
See "ICAO Channel" on page 134
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:MODE <Mode>
Sets the operating mode for the VOR modulation signal.
Parameters: <Mode>
NORM | VAR | SUBCarrier | FMSubcarrier
NORM VOR modulation is active.
VAR Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the variable signal component (30Hz signal content) of the VOR signal. The modulation depth of the 30 Hz signal can be set with [: SOURce<hw>]:VOR:VAR[:DEPTh].
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
614
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
SUBCarrier Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the unmodulated FM carrier (9960Hz) of the VOR signal. The modulation depth of the 30 Hz signal can be set with [: SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh.
FMSubcarrier Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the frequency modulated FM carrier (9960Hz) of the VOR signal. The modulation depth of the 30 Hz signal can be set with [: SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh. The frequency deviation can be set with [:SOURce<hw>]: VOR:REFerence[:DEViation].
*RST:
NORM
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
See "Mode" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:REFerence[:DEViation] <Deviation>
Sets the frequency deviation of the reference signal on the FM carrier.
Parameters: <Deviation>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to 960 480
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "REF Deviation" on page 137
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh <Depth>
Sets the AM modulation depth of the FM carrier.
Parameters: <Depth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 30
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See " Subcarrier Depth " on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SUBCarrier[:FREQuency] <Frequency> Sets the frequency of the FM carrier.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
615
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Frequency>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
5E3 to 15E3 0.01 9.96E3
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
See "Subcarrier Frequency" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:VAR:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the variable and the reference signal. As the two signals must have the same frequency, the setting is valid for both signals.
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
10 to 60 0.01 30
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "VAR/REF Frequency" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:VAR[:DEPTh] <Depth>
Sets the AM modulation depth of the 30Hz variable signal.
Parameters: <Depth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 100 0.1 30
Example:
See Example "Configure and generate a VOR signal" on page 578.
Manual operation: See "VAR Depth" on page 136
14.16.3 SOURce:CORRection Subsystem
The SOURce:CORRection subsystem contains the commands for defining correction values for external test assemblies.
You can acquire the correction values any time, regardless of the modulation settings of the generator. The correction is performed by adding the correction values to the output level of the respective RF frequency.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
616
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Determine the correction values in one of the following ways: Measure the RF output level at several frequency points and enter the value pairs
manually in a table Connect an R&S NRP to the generator output signal and send the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe to fill the table automatically.
Correction values can be stored in files with the predefined file extension *.uco.
Refer to Chapter 14.5.2, "Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory", on page 443 for general information on file handling in the default and in a specific directory.
Programming example
The examples in this section assume that: The files are stored in the default directory. *RST does not affect data lists.
Example: Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level The following example shows a command sequence to create and activate a list for assigning level correction values to arbitrary RF frequencies. Further hardware settings are not considered.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state // Query the available user correction list files in the default directory // Select a file or create a new one // ****************************************************************** *RST; *CLS SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? // Response: shows the name of available user correction files (if applicable) // Select a file SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:SELect "/var/user/ucor1" // Create a new file (if not existing) SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:SELect "/var/user/ucor2"
// Enter the frequency/level value pairs in the table; // existing data is overwritten // Query the number of frequency/power entries in the selected list SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency 100MHz,110MHz,120MHz,130MHz,140MHz,150MHz SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer -10,-7.5,-5.0,-2.5,0,2.5 SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency:POINts? // 6 SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:POINTs? // 6
// Enable user correction mode and RF output SOURce1:CORRection:STATe 1 OUTPut1:STATe ON
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
617
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
// Query the currently used correction value SOURce1:CORRection:VALue? // -2.5
// Delete a user correction file SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DELEte "/var/user/ucor1.uco"
Example: Fill user correction data with sensor The following example shows a command sequence to fill a user correction list automatically supported by a connected R&S NRP.
// Fill a user correction list with the level values // measured by an R&S NRP, // store the data in a file and enable user correction.
*RST; *CLS
SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:SELect "/var/user/Ucor1_AutoFill.uco" SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency 100MHz,110MHz,120MHz,130MHz,140MHz,150MHz SOURce1:CORRection:ZERoing:STATe 1 SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:SENSor1:POWer:SONCe // Query the number of automatically filled correction level values SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:POINTs? // 6 SOURce1:CORRection:STATe 1
// Query the correction value at a certain frequency FREQ 120000000 SOURce1:CORRection:VALue? // -52.13
Example: User correction data exchange The following example shows a command sequence to export a user correction list (here the list created with the example before) into an ASCII file. Further hardware settings are not considered.
// Select a user correction file for exporting to file in ASCII format // Set ASCII data parameters // Set the ASCII file extension, the decimal separator // and the column separator for the ASCII data SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? // my_ucor SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? // ucor1,Ucor1_AutoFill SOURce1:CORRection:CSET:SELect "/var/user/Ucor1_AutoFill.uco" SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension CSV SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal DOT SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn COMMa
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
618
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
// Select source and destination SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect "/var/user/ucor2ASCII"
// Export the user correction data into the ASCII file SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE EXPort SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute
// Query the available ASCII files with extension .csv SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog? // ucor2ASCII,my_ucor
// Import a user correction ASCII file SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE IMPort SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILE:SELect "/var/user/my_ucor" SOURce1:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute
Correction Settings................................................................................................619 Correction Data Exchange.................................................................................... 622
14.16.3.1 Correction Settings
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency <Frequency>
Enters the frequency value in the table selected with [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection: CSET[:SELect].
Parameters: <Frequency>
Frequency#1[, Frequency#2, ...] String of values with default unit Hz.
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level" on page 617 .
Manual operation: See "Edit List Mode Data" on page 207
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer <Power>
Enters the level values to the table selected with [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection: CSET[:SELect].
Parameters: <Power>
Power#1[, Power#2, ...]
String of values with default unit dB. *RST: 0
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level" on page 617 .
Manual operation: See "Edit List Mode Data" on page 207
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
619
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency:POINts? [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:POINts?
Queries the number of frequency/level values in the selected table.
Return values: <Points>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to 10000 0
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level" on page 617 .
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe
Fills the selected user correction table with the level values measured by the power sensor for the given frequencies.
To select the used power sensor set the suffix in key word SENSe.
Example:
See Example "Fill user correction data with sensor" on page 618.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Fill User Correction Data with Sensor" on page 225
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] <Filename>
Selects or creates a file for the user correction data.
If the file with the selected name does not exist, a new file is created.
Parameters: <Filename>
string Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level" on page 617 .
Manual operation: See "UCOR Data" on page 220
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:VALue?
Queries the current value for user correction.
Return values: <Value>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-100 to 100 0.01 0
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
620
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level" on page 617 .
Query only
See "User Correction" on page 220
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:ZERoing:STATe <State>
Activates the zeroing procedure before filling the user correction data acquired by a sensor.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
See Example "Fill user correction data with sensor" on page 618.
Manual operation: See " Fill User Correction Data with Sensor" on page 225
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe
Fills the selected user correction list with the level values measured by the power sensor for the given frequencies.
Suffix: SENSor<ch>
. Defines the used power sensor, i.e. the sensor whose values are used.
Example:
See Example "Fill user correction data with sensor" on page 618.
Usage:
Event
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection[:STATe] <State>
Activates user correction with the currently selected table.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level" on page 617 .
Manual operation: See "State" on page 220
[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? Queries a list of available user correction tables.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
621
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Return values: <Catalog>
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
string List of list filenames, separated by commas
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level" on page 617 .
Query only
See "UCOR Data" on page 220
[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete <Filename>
Deletes the specified user correction list file.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension is optional.
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level" on page 617 .
Usage:
Setting only
Manual operation: See "UCOR Data" on page 220
14.16.3.2 Correction Data Exchange
With the following commands, you can configure user correction lists and export or import them accordingly.
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
Queries the available ASCII files for export or import of user correction data in the current or specified directory.
Return values: <Catalog>
string List of ASCII files *.txt or *.csv, separated by commas.
Example:
See Example "Create a table with user-defined correction values for the RF level" on page 617 .
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension <Extension>
Determines the extension of the ASCII files for file import or export, or to query existing files.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
622
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Extension>
Example: Manual operation:
TXT | CSV
*RST:
TXT
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 618 .
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Parameters: <Filename>
string Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 618 .
Manual operation: See "Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn <Column>
Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table.
Parameters: <Column>
TABulator | SEMicolon | COMMa | SPACe
*RST:
COMMa
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 618 .
Manual operation: See "ASCII File Settings" on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal <Decimal>
Sets the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) with floating-point numerals.
Parameters: <Decimal>
DOT | COMMa
*RST:
DOT
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 618 .
Manual operation: See "ASCII File Settings" on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute
Executes the import or export of the selected correction list, according to the previously set transfer direction with command [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange: MODE.
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 618 .
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
623
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Import / Export" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE <Mode>
Determines import or export of a user correction list.
Specify the source or destination file with the command [:SOURce<hw>]: CORRection:DEXChange:SELect.
Parameters: <Mode>
IMPort | EXPort
*RST:
IMPort
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 618 .
Manual operation: See " Mode " on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file for import or export, containing a user correction list.
Parameters: <Filename>
string Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "User correction data exchange" on page 618 .
Manual operation: See "Select Source/Select ASCII Destination" on page 109
14.16.4 SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem
The SOURce:FREQuency subsystem contains the commands used to define the frequency settings for the RF sources and sweeps.
Example: Frequency configuration
SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE CW SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 6000000000 SOURce1:FREQuency:OFFSet 2000000000 SOURce1:FREQuency:MULTiplier 1.5 SOURce1:FREQuency:CW? // 11000000000
// SOURce1:FREQuency:STEP:MODE USER // SOURce1:FREQuency:STEP:INCRement 1000000 // SOURce1:FREQuency:CW UP
SOURce1:PHASe 2 SOURce1:PHASe:REFerence
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
624
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Setting a phase continuous frequency range
SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 502000000 SOURce1:FREQuency:PHASE:MODE NARR SOURce1:FREQuency:PHASe:CONTinuous:STATe 1 ****************************************** // Query the frequency range SOURce1:FREQuency:PHASe:CONTinuous:LOW? // Response: 494062500 SOURce1:FREQuency:PHASe:CONTinuous:HIGh? // Response: 503750000 ****************************************** // Vary the frequency. Within the specified range the signal is phase continuous. SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 49900000 SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 50000000 SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 501000000 SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 503000000
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE................................................................................625 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed].........................................................................626 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]:RCL................................................................. 627 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual.............................................................................. 627 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MULTiplier.......................................................................... 628 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:OFFSet.............................................................................. 628 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer.............................................................................. 629 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN................................................................................. 629 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt................................................................................ 629 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP.................................................................................630 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE...................................................................... 630 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]............................................................. 630 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PLL:MODE......................................................................... 631
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
Sets the frequency mode for generating the RF output signal. The selected mode determines the parameters to be used for further frequency settings.
Parameters: <Mode>
CW | FIXed | SWEep | LIST | COMBined
CW|FIXed Sets the fixed frequency mode. CW and FIXed are synonyms. The instrument operates at a defined frequency, set with command [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed].
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
625
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
SWEep Sets sweep mode. The instrument processes frequency (and level) settings in defined sweep steps. Set the range and current frequency with the commands: [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt on page 629 and [: SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP on page 630, [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer on page 629, [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN on page 629, [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual on page 627
LIST Sets list mode. The instrument processes frequency and level settings by means of values loaded from a list. To configure list mode settings, use the commands of the Chapter 14.16.7, "SOURce:LIST Subsystem", on page 645.
COMBined Sets the combined RF frequency / level sweep mode. The instrument processes frequency and level settings in defined sweep steps. Set the range and current frequency with the commands:
[:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:FREQuency:STARt on page 685 and [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:FREQuency: STOP on page 685, [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:POWer:STARt on page 685 and [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:POWer:STOP on page 686
*RST:
CW
See Example "Frequency configuration" on page 624, and Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676
See "State (RF frequency sweep)" on page 186
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed] <Fixed>
Sets the frequency of the RF output signal in the selected path.
The effect depends on the selected mode:
In CW mode (FREQ:MODE CW | FIXed), the instrument operates at a fixed frequency.
In sweep mode (FREQ:MODE SWE), the value applies to the sweep frequency. The instrument processes the frequency settings in defined sweep steps.
In user mode (FREQ:STEP:MODE USER), you can vary the current frequency step by step.
Parameters:
<Fixed>
float
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
626
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Example:
Options:
Manual operation:
The following settings influence the value range: An offset set with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency: OFFSet
Numerical value Sets the frequency in CW and sweep mode
UP|DOWN Varies the frequency step by step in user mode. The frequency is increased or decreased by the value set with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[: INCRement].
Range: *RST:
(RFmin + OFFSet) to (RFmax + OFFSet) 100 MHz
See Example "Frequency configuration" on page 624
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676
RFmax depends on the installed options, for example 3 GHz with R&S SMAB-B103
See "Frequency" on page 72
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]:RCL <Rcl>
Set whether the RF frequency value is retained or taken from a loaded instrument configuration, when you recall instrument settings with command *RCL.
Parameters: <Rcl>
INCLude | EXCLude
INCLude Takes the frequency value of the loaded settings.
EXCLude Retains the current frequency when an instrument configuration is loaded.
*RST:
INCLude
Example:
SOURce1:FREQuency:CW:RCL INCLude
Manual operation: See "Exclude Frequency" on page 313
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual <Manual>
Sets the frequency and triggers a sweep step manually if SWEep:MODE MAN.
Parameters: <Manual>
float
You can select any frequency within the setting range, where: STARt is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt STOP is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP OFFSet is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:OFFSet
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
627
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
Range: (STARt + OFFSet) to (STOP + OFFSet)
Increment: 0.01Hz
*RST:
100 MHz
Default unit: Hz
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676
See " Current Frequency" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MULTiplier <Multiplier>
Sets the multiplication factor NFREQ:MULT of a subsequent downstream instrument.
The parameters offset fFREQ:OFFSer and multiplier NFREQ:MULT affect the frequency value set with the command FREQ.
The query FREQ? returns the value corresponding to the formula:
fFREQ = fRFout * NFREQ:MULT + fFREQ:OFFSer
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 68.
Parameters: <Multiplier>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-10000 to 10000 0.001 1
Example:
See Example "Frequency configuration" on page 624
Manual operation: See "Multiplier" on page 73
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets the frequency offset fFREQ:OFFSet of a downstream instrument.
The parameters offset fFREQ:OFFSer and multiplier NFREQ:MULT affect the frequency value set with the command FREQ.
The query FREQ? returns the value corresponding to the formula:
fFREQ = fRFout * NFREQ:MULT + fFREQ:OFFSer
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 68.
Note: The offset also affects RF frequency sweep.
Parameters: <Offset>
float
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Frequency configuration" on page 624
Manual operation: See "Offset" on page 73
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
628
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer <Center>
Sets the center frequency of the sweep.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Parameters: <Center>
float
Range: 300 kHz to RFmax
Increment: 0.01 Hz
*RST:
300E6
Default unit: Hz
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676
Manual operation: See " Center Frequency " on page 192
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN <Span>
Sets the sapn of the frequency sweep range.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Parameters: <Span>
float
Full freqeuncy range
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
400E6
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676
Manual operation: See "Span" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt <Start>
Sets the start frequency for the RF sweep.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Parameters: <Start>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
300kHz to RFmax 0.01Hz 100 MHz
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676
Manual operation: See " Start Frequency/Stop Frequency " on page 192
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
629
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP <Stop>
Sets the stop frequency range for the RF sweep.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Parameters: <Stop>
float
Range: 300kHz to RFmax
Increment: 0.01Hz
*RST:
500 MHz
Default unit: Hz
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676
Manual operation: See " Start Frequency/Stop Frequency " on page 192
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE <Mode>
Defines the type of step size to vary the RF frequency at discrete steps with the commands FREQ UP or FREQ DOWN.
Parameters: <Mode>
DECimal | USER
DECimal Increases or decreases the level in steps of ten.
USER Increases or decreases the level in increments, set with the command FREQ:STEP[:INCR].
*RST:
DECimal
Example:
// increasing the RF frequency with a step size of 50 KHz SOURce1:FREQuency:STEP 50E3 SOURce1:FREQuency:STEP:MODE USER SOURce1:FREQuency:CW UP
Manual operation: See "Variation Active" on page 73
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement] <Increment>
Sets the step width.
You can use this value to vary the RF frequency with command FREQ UP or FREQ DOWN, if you have activated FREQ:STEP:MODE USER.
Note: This value also applies to the step width of the rotary knob on the instrument and, in user-defined step mode, increases or decreases the frequency.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
630
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Increment>
Example: Manual operation:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 Hz to RFmax - 100 kHz 0.01 Hz 1E6
See Example "Frequency configuration" on page 624
See "Variation Step" on page 73
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PLL:MODE <Mode>
Selects the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) bandwidth of the main synthesizer.
Parameters: <Mode>
NORMal | NARRow
NORMal Maximum modulation bandwidth and FM/PhiM deviation.
NARRow Narrow PLL bandwidth
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
SOURce:FREQuency:PLL:MODE NORMal
Manual operation: See "Main PLL Bandwidth" on page 73
14.16.5 SOURce:INPut Subsystem
The SOURce:INPut subsystem contains the commands for configuring the inputs for external modulation signals. The instrument trigger setting influences all sweeps and is effective in the List mode (Instrument Trigger).
[:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:COUPling<ch>.................................................................631 [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance<ch>...............................................................632 [:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe................................................................................... 632
[:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:COUPling<ch> <Coupling>
Selects the coupling mode for an externally applied modulation signal.
Parameters: <Coupling>
AC | DC
AC Passes the AC signal component of the modulation signal.
DC Passes the modulation signal with both components, AC and DC. For active external exponential AM, automatically sets [: SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:COUPling<ch>DC.
*RST:
AC
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
631
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
INP:MOD:COUP AC Selects the coupling mode AC for an externally applied modulation signal.
See "Coupling (AC/DC)" on page 117
[:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance<ch> <Impedance>
Sets the impedance for the externally supplied modulation signal.
Parameters: <Impedance>
G50 | G600 | HIGH
G50 = 50 Ohm to ground G600 = 600 Ohm to ground HIGH = 100 kOhm to ground
*RST:
HIGH
Example:
See [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:COUPling<ch> on page 631.
Manual operation: See "Impedance" on page 117
[:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe <Slope>
Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.
Parameters: <Slope>
NEGative | POSitive
*RST:
POSitive
Example:
INP:TRIG:SLOP NEG Activates the falling slope of the external trigger signal at the trigger input.
Manual operation: See "Trigger Slope" on page 191
14.16.6 SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem
The SOURce:LFOutput subsystem contains the commands for setting the LF signal source in CW and Sweep mode and for analog modulation.
Example: Setup an LF sweep The following example shows a command sequence to set up an LF sweep.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state *RST; *CLS
// Set the trigger mode, the sweep mode and the sweep range TRIGger1:LFFSweep:SOURce SINGle SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
632
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:STARt 1 kHz SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:STOP 7 kHz
// Select linear spacing // Select the waveform shape for the frequency sweep cycle // Set the step width and the dwell time. SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing LINear SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:SHAPe SAWtooth SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LINear 100 Hz SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:DWELl 150 ms // Alternatively to the step width set the number of steps SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts 61
// Activate change to start frequency while waiting for next trigger // Prerequisites: sweep mode single and sweep waveform sawtooth SOURce1:LFOutput:SWEep:FREQuency:RETRace 1
// Activate the LF frequency sweep SOURce1:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE SWE
// Trigger the sweep(depending on the set mode) and query the status // Perform a one-off LF sweep SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:EXECute SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:RUNNing? // 1 // the sweep is running
// *************************************************** // For manual step LF sweep use the following commands *RST; *CLS SOURce1:LFOutput:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE MANual // Activate the LF frequency sweep SOURce1:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE SWEep // Activate LF Output1. SOURce1:LFOutput1:STATe 1 // Input the frequency manually for each step SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:MANual 2 kHz SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:MANual 2.1 kHz // Alternatively use UP or DOWN parameter with set step width. SOURce1:LFOutput1:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LINear 500 Hz SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:MANual UP
Example: Configuring the LF generator The following is a simple example on how to configure the LF generator and output the generated signal.
// configure the signal of the LF1 generator SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe SQU SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod 0.001 SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe:PULSe:WIDTh 0.0005
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
633
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SHAPe:PULSe:DCYCle 0.5 // configure the signal of the LF1 generator SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe SINE SOURce1:LFOutput2:FREQuency 1000000 SOURce1:LFOutput2:PERiod? // 0.000001
// changing the LF signal shape // SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe TRAP // SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod 0.2 // SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:TRAPeze:RISE 0.0001 // SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL 0.001 // SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL 0.0001 // SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:TRAPeze:HIGH 0.0005 // SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe TRI // SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod 0.1 // SOURce1:LFOutput2:SHAPe:TRIangle:RISE 0.0001
// activate the LF output and select the LF1 as signal source // configure the LF output signal SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency:MODE CW SOURce1:LFOutput1:STATe 1 SOURce1:LFOutput1:SOURce LF1 SOURce1:LFOutput1:INTernal:VOLTage 1 SOURce1:LFOutput1:OFFSet 0.001
LF Generator Settings...........................................................................................634 LF Sweep Settings................................................................................................ 641
14.16.6.1 LF Generator Settings
With the commands described in this section, you can configure the LF signal source.
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:BANDwidth?............................................................................ 635 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:FREQuency.............................................................................635 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:PERiod?..........................................................................635 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual............................................................... 636 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE................................................................. 636 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP.................................................................. 637 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt..................................................................637 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>[:STATe]................................................................................... 637 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:INTernal:VOLTage.................................................................... 637 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:OFFSet.......................................................................................... 638 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:SOURce................................................................................. 638 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:SOURce:PATH........................................................................ 638 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:VOLTage........................................................................................ 638 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe............................................................................639 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:DCYCle.................................................... 639 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod.....................................................639 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:WIDTh......................................................640
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
634
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL.................................................... 640 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:HIGH.................................................... 640 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:PERiod................................................. 640 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:RISE.................................................... 641 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:PERiod.................................................. 641 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:RISE..................................................... 641
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:BANDwidth?
Queries the bandwidth of the external LF signal.
Return values: <Bandwidth>
BW0M2 | BW10m
*RST:
BW10m
Example:
LFO:BAND? // BW10m // the bandwidth of the externally supplied LF signal is 10 MHz
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Bandwidth" on page 117
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the LF signal in [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency: MODE CW|FIXed mode.
Note
If signal source "Internal" is set, the instrument performs the analog modulations (AM/FM/PhiM/PM) with this frequency.
In sweep mode ([:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE SWE), the frequency is coupled with the sweep frequency.
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Range: depends on the installed options
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
1000
Default unit: Hz
Example:
SOURce1:LFOutput1:FREQuency 5 kHz // sets the LF frequency
Manual operation: See "Frequency" on page 115
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:PERiod? Queries the repetition frequency of the sine signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
635
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Return values: <LfSinePeriod>
Example: Usage:
float
Range: 1E-6 to 100
Increment: 10E-9
*RST:
0.001
Default unit: s
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual <Manual>
Sets the frequency of the subsequent sweep step if LFO:SWE:MODE MAN.
Use a separate command for each sweep step.
Parameters: <Manual>
float
You can select any value within the setting range, where: STARt is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency: STARt STOP is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency: STOP
Range: STARt to STOP
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
1000
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
Manual operation: See " Current Frequency" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
Sets the mode for the output of the LF generator frequency, and determines the commands to be used for frequency settings.
Parameters: <Mode>
CW | FIXed | SWEep
CW|FIXed Sets the fixed-frequency mode. CW and FIXed are synonyms. To set the output frequency, use command [:SOURce]:
LFOutput<ch>:FREQuency
SWEep Sets sweep mode. To set the frequency, use the commands: [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt and [:
SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP Or [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual
*RST:
CW
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
636
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
Manual operation: See "State (LF frequency sweep)" on page 113
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP <Stop> [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt <Start>
Sets the start/stop frequency for [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE SWEep.
Parameters: <Start>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.1 Hz to 1 MHz 0.1 1 KHz
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
Manual operation: See " Start Frequency/Stop Frequency " on page 192
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>[:STATe] <State>
Activates LF signal output.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "State" on page 119
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:INTernal:VOLTage <Voltage>
Sets the output voltage for the LF generators.
The sum of both values must not exceed the overall output voltage, set with command [:SOURce]:LFOutput:VOLTage.
Suffix: <ch>
. [1]|2 LF1 and LF2
Parameters: <Voltage>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0 to 4 0.001 1
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Output Voltage" on page 120
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
637
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets a DC offset at the LF Output.
Parameters: <Offset>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
depends on lfo voltage 0.001 0
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "DC-Offset" on page 120
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:SOURce <Source>
Determines the LF signal to be synchronized, when monitoring is enabled.
Parameters: <Source>
LF1 | LF2 | NOISe | AM | FMPM | EXT1 | | EXT2
LF1|LF2 Selects an internally generated LF signal.
NOISe Selects an internally generated noise signal.
EXT1|EXT2 Selects an externally supplied LF signal
AM Selects the AM signal.
FMPM Selects the signal also used by the frequency or phase modulations.
*RST:
LF1
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Source" on page 120
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:SOURce:PATH <SourPath>
Determines the path of the LF output source.
Parameters: <SourPath>
A | B
*RST:
A
Example:
LFO:SOUR:PATH? Queries the currently set path for the LF output signal source.
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:VOLTage <Voltage> Sets the voltage of the LF output.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
638
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Voltage>
Example:
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
dynamic (see data sheet) 0.001 1
SOURce:LFOutput:VOLTage 1.5
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe <Shape>
Selects the waveform shape of the LF signal.
Parameters: <Shape>
SINE | SQUare | PULSe | TRIangle | TRAPeze
*RST:
SINE
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Options:
TRIangle|TRAPeze require R&S SMAB-K24
Manual operation: See "Shape" on page 113
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:DCYCle <DCycle>
Sets the duty cycle for the shape pulse.
Parameters: <DCycle>
float
Range: 1E-6 to 100
Increment: 1E-6
*RST:
50
Default unit: PCT
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Pulse Duty Cycle" on page 115
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the generated pulse. The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal.
Parameters: <Period>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1E-6 to 100 1E-8 1E-3
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Period" on page 115
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
639
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:WIDTh <Width>
Sets the pulse width of the generated pulse.
Parameters: <Width>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1E-6 to 100 1E-8 5E-4
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Pulse Width" on page 115
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL <Fall>
Selects the fall time for the trapezoid shape of the LF generator.
Parameters: <Fall>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1E-6 to 100 10E-9 250E-6
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Trapezoid Rise / Fall" on page 116
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:HIGH <High>
Sets the high time for the trapezoid signal of the LF generator.
Parameters: <High>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1E-6 to 100 10E-9 250E-6
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Trapezoid High" on page 116
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the generated trapezoid shape. The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal.
Parameters: <Period>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1E-6 to 100 1E-8 1E-3
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
640
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Period" on page 115
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:RISE <Rise>
Selects the rise time for the trapezoid shape of the LF generator.
Parameters: <Rise>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1E-6 to 100 10E-9 250E-6
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Trapezoid Rise / Fall" on page 116
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:PERiod <Period>
Sets the period of the generated pulse. The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal.
Parameters: <Period>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1E-6 to 100 10E-9 0.001
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Period" on page 115
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:RISE <Rise>
Selects the rise time for the triangle single of the LF generator.
Parameters: <Rise>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1E-6 to 100 10E-9 0.5E-3
Example:
See Example "Configuring the LF generator" on page 633.
Manual operation: See "Triangle Rise" on page 116
14.16.6.2 LF Sweep Settings
With the commands described in this section, you can configure the sweep of the LF signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
641
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl................................................... 642 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute................................................ 642 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE....................................................642 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts................................................... 643 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace............................................... 643 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RUNNing?.............................................. 643 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe...................................................644 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing................................................ 644 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic.................................. 644 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear]........................................ 645
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl <Dwell>
Sets the dwell time for each frequency step of the sweep.
Parameters: <Dwell>
float
Range: 0.001 to 100
Increment: 100E-6
*RST:
0.01
Default unit: s
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
Manual operation: See " Dwell Time " on page 190
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute
Immediately starts an LF sweep.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE determines which sweep is executed, e.g. SOURce:LFOutput:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE STEP.
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Execute Single Sweep " on page 191
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE <Mode>
Sets the cycle mode of the LF sweep.
Parameters: <Mode>
AUTO | MANual | STEP
AUTO Performs a complete sweep cycle from the start to the end value when a trigger event occurs. The dwell time determines the time period until the signal switches to the next step.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
642
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
MANual Performs a single sweep step when a manual trigger event occurs. The trigger system is not active. To trigger each frequency step of the sweep individually, use the command [:SOURce<hw>]: LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual on page 636.
STEP Each trigger command triggers one sweep step only. The frequency increases by the value set with the coammnds:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[: LINear] (linear spacing) [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP: LOGarithmic(logarithmic spacing)
*RST:
AUTO
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
See "Mode" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts <Points>
Sets the number of steps in an LF sweep.
For information on how the value is calculated and the interdependency with other parameters, see Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179
Parameters: <Points>
integer
Range: *RST:
2 to POINts 50
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace <State>
Activates that the signal changes to the start frequency value while it is waiting for the next trigger event.
You can enable this feature, when you are working with sawtooth shapes in sweep mode "Single" or "External Single".
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Manual operation: See "Retrace" on page 188
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RUNNing? Queries the current status of the LF frequency sweep mode.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
643
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Return values: <State>
Example:
Usage:
0 | 1 | OFF | ON See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632. Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe <Shape>
Sets the cycle mode for a sweep sequence (shape).
Parameters: <Shape>
SAWTooth | TRIangle
*RST:
SAWTooth
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
Manual operation: See " Shape" on page 189
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing <Spacing>
Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing.
Parameters: <Spacing>
LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST:
LINear
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
Manual operation: See " Spacing" on page 190
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic <Logarithmic>
Sets the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps to calculate the frequencies of the steps.
For information on how the value is calculated and the interdependency with other parameters, see Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179
Parameters: <Logarithmic>
float
The unit is mandatory
Range: 0.01 to 100
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
1
Default unit: PCT
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
Manual operation: See " Step Linear/Step Logarithmic " on page 193
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
644
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] <Linear>
Sets the step width for the linear sweep.
For information on how the value is calculated and the interdependency with other parameters, see Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179
Parameters: <Linear>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.1 to STOP-STARt 0.1 1000
Example:
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632.
Manual operation: See " Step Linear/Step Logarithmic " on page 193
14.16.7 SOURce:LIST Subsystem
The SOURce:LIST subsystem contains all commands for defining lists and for handling of list files. List files have the predefined file extension *.lsw. Refer to Chapter 14.5.2, "Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory", on page 443 for general information on file handling in the default and in a specific directory.
*RST does not affect data lists. SCPI refers to the individual lists as segments.
Example: Create an RF list and activate the list mode The following example shows a command sequence to create an RF list and to activate the list mode. Further hardware settings are not considered.
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state // Query the available list files in the default // directory /var/user // Select the list file or create it (if not existing) *RST; *CLS SOUR1:LIST:CAT? // Response:- shows the name of available list files (if applicable) SOUR1:LIST:SEL "/var/user/list1.lsw"
// Write the frequency/level/dwell time values in the selected list file // existing data is overwritten // Query the number of frequency/power/dwell time entries in the selected list // Query the amount of free memory (in bytes) for list mode lists SOUR1:LIST:FREQ 58 MHz, 61 MHz, 73 MHz, 86 MHz, 91 MHz, 92 MHz, 98 MHz SOUR1:LIST:POW 13 dBm, 12 dBm, 5 dBm, 3 dBm, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 6 dBm
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
645
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
SOUR1:LIST:DWEL:LIST 10000, 100000, 200000, 19000, 10000, 150000, 220000 SOUR1:LIST:FREQ:POIN? // 7 SOUR1:LIST:POW:POINT? // 7 SOUR1:LIST:DWEL:LIST:POIN? // 7 SOUR1:LIST:FREE? // 2147483647 (bytes of free memory)
// Use dwell times from list // Configure the list mode parameters // Enable RF output SOUR1:LIST:MODE AUTO SOUR1:LIST:TRIG:SOUR AUTO SOUR1:LIST:DWEL:MODE "LIST"
OUTP1:STAT ON
// Use global dwell time // Set only a part of the list (value pairs 3 to 5) to be processed // Configure the list mode parameters using global dwell time // Enable RF output SOUR1:LIST:IND:START 2 SOUR1:LIST:IND:STOP 4 SOUR1:LIST:MODE AUTO SOUR1:LIST:TRIG:SOUR AUTO SOUR1:LIST:DWEL:LIST 500 ms OUTP1:STAT ON
// Enable the list mode // Trigger the list (depending on the mode, not needed with trigger // mode AUTO); query the current index // Reset the list to the starting point SOUR1:FREQ:MODE LIST SOUR1:LIST:TRIG:EXEC SOUR1:LIST:RUNN? SOUR1:LIST:IND? // 3 // value changes when the value is queried again SOUR1:LIST:RES
// For list mode STEP use the following commands *RST; *CLS // Change list mode to STEP SOUR1:LIST:MODE STEP // Activate RF Output1 OUTP1:STAT 1 // Activate the list mode SOUR1:FREQ:MODE LIST // For each step: select frequency/powerlevel pair as index from the list
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
646
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
SOUR1:LIST:IND 2 SOUR1:LIST:IND 3 SOUR1:LIST:IND 4
// Use the selected list for path B (with List Mode B default settings) SOUR2:LIST:SEL "/var/user/list1.lsw" OUTP2:STAT ON SOUR2:FREQ:MODE LIST SOUR2:LIST:IND? // 2 // value canges when the value is queried again
// Deactivate the list mode SOUR1:FREQ:MODE CW
Example: List mode data exchange The following example shows a command sequence to export a list (here the RF list created with the example before) into an ASCII file. Further hardware settings are not considered.
*RST; *CLS LIST:DEXC:MODE EXP
// Set ASCII data parameters // Set the ASCII file extension, the decimal separator // and the column separator for the ASCII data SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:EXT CSV SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:DEC DOT SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:COL COMM
// Select source and destination path/directory // Query available listfiles in default directory "/var/user" SOUR1:LIST:CAT? // list1 SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEL "/var/user/list1ASCII" SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:SEL "/var/user/list1"
// Export the list file data into the ASCII file SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:EXEC
// Query the available ASCII files with extension .csv SOUR1:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:CAT? // Response: "list1ASCII"
// Deactivate the list mode SOUR1:FREQ:MODE CW
List Mode Settings.................................................................................................648 List Mode File Operation....................................................................................... 653 List Mode Data Exchange..................................................................................... 655
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
647
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
14.16.7.1 List Mode Settings
With the following commands, you can create list mode data, select the trigger mode and determine the dwell time.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl.......................................................................................... 648 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:MODE................................................................................ 648 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST...................................................................................649 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST:POINts?...................................................................... 649 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency................................................................................... 649 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?......................................................................650 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex............................................................................................650 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STARt................................................................................. 650 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STOP.................................................................................. 650 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE........................................................................................... 651 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer.......................................................................................... 651 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer:POINts?............................................................................. 651 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:EXECute.......................................................................... 652 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce.......................................................................... 652 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RUNNing?..................................................................................... 653
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl <Dwell>
Sets the global dwell time. The instrument generates the signal with the frequency / power value pairs of each list entry for that particular period.
See also Significant Parameters and Functions.
Parameters: <Dwell>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
1E-3 to 100 1E-6 0.01
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Manual operation: See "Global Dwell Time" on page 201
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:MODE <DwelMode>
Selects the dwell time mode.
Parameters: <DwelMode>
LIST | GLOBal
LIST Uses the dwell time, specified in the data table for each value pair individually.
GLOBal Uses a constant dwell time, set with command [: SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
648
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
*RST:
GLOBal
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
See "Dwell Time Mode" on page 201
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST <Dwell>
Enters the dwell time values in the selected list in µs.
Parameters: <Dwell>
<Dwell#1>{, <Dwell#2>, ...} | block data
You can either enter the data as a list of numbers, or as binary block data. The list of numbers can be of any length, with the list entries separated by commas. In binary block format, 8 (4) bytes are always interpreted as a floating-point number with double accuracy. See also : FORMat[:DATA] on page 468 for more details.
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Manual operation: See "Edit List Mode Data" on page 207
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST:POINts?
Queries the number (points) of dwell time entries in the selected list.
Return values: <Points>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to INT_MAX 0
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency <Frequency>
Enters the frequency values in the selected list.
Parameters: <Frequency>
<Frequency#1>{, <Frequency#2>, ...} | block data
You can either enter the data as a list of numbers, or as binary block data. The list of numbers can be of any length, with the list entries separated by commas. In binary block format, 8 (4) bytes are always interpreted as a floating-point number with double accuracy. See also :FORMat[:DATA].
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
649
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
Range:
300 kHz to RFmax (depends on the installed options)
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
See "Edit List Mode Data" on page 207
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?
Queries the number (points) of frequency entries in the seleced list.
Return values: <Points>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to INT_MAX 0
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex <Index>
Sets the list index in LIST:MODE STEP.
After the trigger signal, the instrument processes the frequency and level settings of the selected index.
Parameters: <Index>
integer
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Manual operation: See " Current Index " on page 200
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STARt <Start> [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STOP <Stop>
Sets the start and stop index of the index range which defines a subgroup of frequency/level value pairs in the current list.
Parameters: <Stop>
integer
Index range Only values inside this range are processed in list mode
Range: *RST:
0 to list length 0
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
650
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation: See " List Range from/to " on page 203
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE <Mode>
Sets the list mode.
The instrument processes the list according to the selected mode and trigger source. See LIST:TRIG:SOUR AUTO, SING or EXT for the description of the trigger source settings.
Parameters: <Mode>
AUTO | STEP
AUTO Each trigger event triggers a complete list cycle.
STEP Each trigger event triggers only one step in the list processing cycle. The list is processed in ascending order.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Manual operation: See "Mode" on page 201
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer <Power>
Enters the level values in the selected list. The number of level values must correspond to the number of frequency values. Existing data is overwritten.
Parameters: <Power>
<Power#1>{, <Power#2>, ...} | block data
You can either enter the data as a list of numbers, or as binary block data. The list of numbers can be of any length, with the list entries separated by commas. In binary block format, 8 (4) bytes are always interpreted as a floating-point number with double accuracy. See also :FORMat[:DATA].
Range: depends on the installed options Default unit: dBm
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Manual operation: See "Edit List Mode Data" on page 207
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer:POINts? Queries the number (points) of level entries in the selected list.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
651
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Return values: <Points>
Example: Usage:
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to INT_MAX 0
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:EXECute
Starts the processing of a list in list mode.
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Execute Single" on page 202
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce <Source>
Selects the trigger source for processing lists.
The designation of the parameters correspond to those in sweep mode. SCPI standard uses other designations for the parameters, which are also accepted by the instrument. The SCPI designation should be used if compatibility is an important consideration. For an overview, see the following table:
Rohde & Schwarz parameter AUTO SINGle
SCPI parameter IMMediate BUS
EXTernal
EXTernal
Applies to the list mode parameters:
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE AUTO [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE AUTO or [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE STEP [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE AUTO or [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE STEP
Parameters: <Source>
AUTO | IMMediate | SINGle | BUS | EXTernal
AUTO|IMMediate The trigger is free-running, i.e. the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously. The selected list is restarted as soon as it is finished.
SINGle|BUS The list is triggered by the command [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST: TRIGger:EXECute. The list is executed once.
EXTernal The list is triggered externally and executed once.
*RST:
AUTO
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
652
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
See "Mode" on page 201
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RUNNing?
Queries the current state of the list mode.
Return values: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
1 Signal generation based on the list mode is active.
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Usage:
Query only
14.16.7.2 List Mode File Operation
The following section covers basic commands to file handling in list mode.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:CATalog?.......................................................................................653 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete..........................................................................................653 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL................................................................................... 654 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREE?.......................................................................................... 654 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RESet........................................................................................... 654 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect.......................................................................................... 655
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:CATalog?
Queries the available list files in the specified directory.
Return values: <Catalog>
string List of list filenames, separated by commas
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " List Mode Data " on page 202
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete <Filename>
Deletes the specified list.
Setting parameters:
<Filename>
string
Filename or complete file path; file extension is optional.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
653
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Usage: Manual operation:
See [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL on page 654. Setting only See " List Mode Data " on page 202
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL
Deletes all lists in the set directory.
This command can only be executed, if: No list file is selected. List mode is disabled.
Example:
SOUR1:LIST:CAT? // list,my_list SOUR1:LIST:DEL "/var/user/list1" SOUR1:LIST:CAT? // my_list SOUR1:FREQ:MODE? // LIST SOUR1:LIST:SEL? // /var/user/my_list.lsw //deactivate list mode SOUR1:FREQ:MODE CW SOUR1:LIST:DELete:ALL SOUR1:LIST:CAT? // // all list files are deleted
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " List Mode Data " on page 202
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREE?
Queries the amount of free memory (in bytes) for list mode lists.
Return values: <Free>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to INT_MAX 0
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RESet Jumps to the beginning of the list.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
654
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Event
See " Reset " on page 202
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect <Filename>
Selects or creates a data list in list mode.
If the list with the selected name does not exist, a new list is created.
Parameters: <Filename>
string Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "Create an RF list and activate the list mode" on page 645.
Manual operation: See " List Mode Data " on page 202
14.16.7.3 List Mode Data Exchange
With the following commands, you can configure lists in ASCII format and export or import them accordingly.
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?.......................................................... 655 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute.................................................................... 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension.........................................................656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect..............................................................656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn........................................... 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal........................................... 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE........................................................................ 657 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect....................................................................... 657
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
Queries the available ASCII files for export or import of list mode data in the current or specified directory.
Return values: <Catalog>
string List of ASCII files *.txt or *.csv, separated by commas.
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 647.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination" on page 109
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
655
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute
Executes the import or export of the selected list file, according to the previously set transfer direction with command [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 647.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Import / Export" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension <Extension>
Determines the extension of the ASCII file for import or export, or to query existing files.
Parameters: <Extension>
TXT | CSV
*RST:
TXT
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 647.
Manual operation: See "ASCII File Settings" on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Parameters: <Filename>
string Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 647.
Manual operation: See "Select (ASCII) Source/Select (ASCII) Destination" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn <Column>
Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table.
Parameters: <Column>
TABulator | SEMicolon | COMMa | SPACe
*RST:
COMMa
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 647.
Manual operation: See "ASCII File Settings" on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal <Decimal>
Sets "." (decimal point) or "," (comma) as the decimal separator used in the ASCII data with floating-point numerals.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
656
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Decimal>
Example: Manual operation:
DOT | COMMa
*RST:
DOT
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 647.
See "ASCII File Settings" on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE <Mode>
Determines the import or export of a list.
Specify the source or destination file with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST: DEXChange:SELect.
Parameters: <Mode>
IMPort | EXPort
*RST:
IMPort
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 647.
Manual operation: See " Mode " on page 108
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect <Filename>
Selects the ASCII file for import or export, containing a list.
Parameters: <Filename>
string Filename or complete file path; file extension can be omitted.
Example:
See Example "List mode data exchange" on page 647.
Manual operation: See "Select Source/Select ASCII Destination" on page 109
14.16.8 SOURce:NOISe Subsystem
The SOURce:NOISe subsystem contains the commands for: Setting the noise modulation signal. The noise generator is optional.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
657
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Configuring the noise generator
SOURce1:NOISe:DISTribution GAUSs SOURce1:NOISe:BANDwidth 10000000 SOURce1:NOISe:BANDwidth:STATe 1
SOURce1:LFOutput1:SOURce NOIS SOURce1:LFOutput1:STATe 1
SOURce1:NOISe:LEVel:RELative? // -83.86 SOURce1:NOISe:LEVel:ABSolute? // -13.86
Noise Generator....................................................................................................658
14.16.8.1 Noise Generator
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BANDwidth|BWIDth.....................................................................658 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BWIDth:STATe............................................................................ 658 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:DISTribution............................................................................... 659 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel:RELative?......................................................................... 659 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel[:ABSolute]?....................................................................... 659
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BANDwidth|BWIDth <BWidth>
Sets the noise level in the system bandwidth when bandwidth limitation is enabled.
Parameters: <BWidth>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
100E3 to 10E6 100E3 100E3
Example:
See Example "Configuring the noise generator" on page 658.
Manual operation: See "Bandwidth" on page 118
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BWIDth:STATe <State>
Activates noise bandwidth limitation.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Configuring the noise generator" on page 658.
Manual operation: See "Bandwidth" on page 118
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
658
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:DISTribution <Distribution>
Sets the distribution of the noise power density.
Parameters: <Distribution>
GAUSs | EQUal
*RST:
GAUSs
Example:
See Example "Configuring the noise generator" on page 658.
Manual operation: See "Distribution" on page 118
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel:RELative?
Queries the level of the noise signal per Hz in the total bandwidth.
Return values: <Relative>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-149.18 to -52.67 0.1 -69.84
Example:
See Example "Configuring the noise generator" on page 658.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Noise Density" on page 121
[:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel[:ABSolute]?
Queries the level of the noise signal in the system bandwidth within the enabled bandwidth limitation.
Return values: <Absolute>
float
Noise level within the bandwidth limitation
*RST:
3.84 MHz
Example:
See Example "Configuring the noise generator" on page 658.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Noise Level" on page 121
14.16.9 SOURce:PGEN Subsystem
The PGEN subsystem contains the commands for setting output of the pulse modulation signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
659
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Using pulse generator as source for pulse modulation
// select pulse generator as source for pulse modulation // enable pulse modulation SOURce1:PULM:SOURce INT SOURce1:PULM:STATe 1 // pulse generator and signal output are also activated SOURce1:PGENerator:STATe? // 1 SOURce1:PGENerator:OUTPut:STATe? // 1 PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity NORMal // to disable pulse generator SOURce1:PGENerator:STATe 0 // activate the pulse modulation of the RF carrier SOURce1:PULM:STATe 1
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity................................................................ 660 [:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut[:STATe]..................................................................660 [:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:STATe................................................................................ 661
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the polarity of the pulse output signal.
Parameters: <Polarity>
NORMal | INVerted
NORMal Outputs the pulse signal during the pulse width, that means during the high state.
INVerted Inverts the pulse output signal polarity. The pulse output signal is suppressed during the pulse width, but provided during the low state.
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
See Example "Using pulse generator as source for pulse modulation" on page 660.
Manual operation: See "Pulse Output Polarity" on page 103
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut[:STATe] <State>
Activates the output of the pulse modulation signal.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Using pulse generator as source for pulse modulation" on page 660.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
660
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation: See "Pulse Output State" on page 103
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:STATe <State>
Enables the output of the video/sync signal.
If the pulse generator is the current modulation source, activating the pulse modulation automatically activates the signal output and the pulse generator.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Using pulse generator as source for pulse modulation" on page 660.
14.16.10 SOURce:PHASe Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for adjusting the phase of the RF output signal relative to a reference signal of the same frequency.
Example: Programming Example
// change the phase relative to the current phase SOURce1:PHASe 2 DEG // adopt the setting as the current phase SOURce1:PHASe:REFerence
The following commands are available: [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe................................................................................................. 661 [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe:REFerence................................................................................ 661
[:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe <Phase>
Sets the phase variation relative to the current phase.
Parameters: <Phase>
float
Range: -36000 to 36000
Increment: 0.001
*RST:
0
Default unit: DEG
Example:
See Example "Programming Example" on page 661.
Manual operation: See "Delta Phase" on page 79
[:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe:REFerence
Assigns the value set with command [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe as the reference phase.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
661
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Usage: Manual operation:
See Example "Programming Example" on page 661. Event See "Reset Delta Phase Display" on page 79
14.16.11 SOURce:POWer Subsystem
The SOURce:POWer subsystem contains the commands for setting the output level, level control and level correction of the RF signal.
The default units are dBm. To change the units, perform on of the following:
Enter the unit after the numerical value Example: :POW 0.5V
Set the unit with the command :UNIT:POWer.
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:MODE?..............................................................................662 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe].............................................................................. 663 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:DSENsitivity....................................................................... 663 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SONCe.............................................................................. 664 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:PATTenuator........................................................... 664 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:RFOFf:MODE......................................................... 664 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:EMF:STATe................................................................................664 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LBEHaviour............................................................................... 665 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude]....................................................................... 665 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual..................................................................................... 665 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MODE.......................................................................................666 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:POWer...................................................................................... 666 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt....................................................................................... 667 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP........................................................................................667 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE............................................................................. 667 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement].................................................................... 668 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet........................................................ 668 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:RCL............................................................. 669 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude].................................................. 669 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:LOWer?........................................................................ 670 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:UPPer?......................................................................... 670 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:MIN?.............................................................................670 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:MAX?............................................................................670 [:SOURce]:POWer:WIGNore........................................................................................... 670
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:MODE?
Queries the currently set ALC mode.
See [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] on page 663.
Return values: <PowAlcMode>
0 | AUTO | 1 | PRESet | OFFTable | ON | OFF | ONSample | ONTable
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
662
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Usage:
POW:ALC:MODE? Response: ONTable "Table and On" is set automatically.
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] <State>
Parameters: <State>
0 | OFF | AUTO | 1 | ON | ONTable | PRESet | OFFTable
AUTO Adjusts the output level to the operating conditions automatically.
1|ON Activates internal level control permanently.
OFFTable Controls the level using attenuation values of the internal ALC table.
0|OFF Provided only for backward compatibility with other Rohde & Schwarz signal generators. The R&S SMA100B accepts these values and maps them automatically as follows: 0|OFF = OFFTable
ONTable Starts with the attenuation setting from the table and continues with automatic level control.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
POW:ALC ON Activates internal level control.
Manual operation: See "State" on page 216
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:DSENsitivity <Sensitivity>
Sets the sensitivity of the ALC detector.
Parameters: <Sensitivity>
AUTO | FIXed
AUTO Selects the optimum sensitivity automatically.
FIXed Fixes the internal level detector.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
POW:ALC:DSEN FIX
Manual operation: See "Detector Sensitivity" on page 216
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
663
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SONCe
Activates level control for correction purposes temporarily.
Example:
POW:ALC OFF Deactivates automatic level control at the RF output. POW:ALC:SONC Executes level control (once).
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Readjust" on page 78
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:PATTenuator <StepAttSel>
Selects the type of step attenuator used below 20 GHz.
Parameters: <StepAttSel>
MECHanical | ELECtronic
MECHanical Uses the mechanical step attenuator at all frequencies.
ELECtronic Uses the electronic step attenuator up to 20 GHz.
Options:
R&S SMAB-B35/-B37/-B39
Manual operation: See " Step Attenuator below 20 GHz" on page 213
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:RFOFf:MODE <Mode>
Selects the state the attenuator is to assume if the RF signal is switched off.
Parameters: <Mode>
UNCHanged | FATTenuation
FATTenuation The step attenuator switches to maximum attenuation
UNCHanged Retains the current setting and keeps the output impedance constant during RF off.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: FATTenuation)
Example:
SOURce1:POWer:ATTenuation:RFOFf:MODE FATTenuation uses maximum attenuation when the RF output is turned off.
Manual operation: See " RF OFF Mode " on page 213
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:EMF:STATe <State>
Displays the signal level as voltage of the EMF. The displayed value represents the voltage over a 50 Ohm load.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
664
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <State>
Example:
Manual operation:
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
POW:EMF:STAT 1 Activates voltage level display.
See " Display Level as Voltage of EMF " on page 340
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LBEHaviour <Behaviour>
Parameters: <Behaviour>
AUTO | UNINterrupted | MONotone | CVSWr | HDUN
UNINterrupted|MONotone Uninterrupted level settings and strictly monotone modes.
CVSWr Constant VSWR
HDUN High dynamic uninterrupted level settings.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SOURce1:POWer:LBEHaviour AUTO
Options:
R&S SMAB-K724
Manual operation: See " Setting Characteristics " on page 76
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude] <Amplitude>
Limits the maximum RF output level in CW and sweep mode.
It does not influence the "Level" display or the response to the query [: SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude].
Parameters: <Amplitude>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
depends on the installed options 0.01 n.a. (factory preset: 30)
Example:
SOURce1:POWer:LIMit:AMPLitude 10
Manual operation: See " Limit " on page 76
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual <Manual>
Sets the level for the subsequent sweep step if SWE:POW:MODE MAN.
Use a separate command for each sweep step.
Parameters:
<Manual>
float
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
665
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
You can select any level within the setting range, where: STARt is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt STOP is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP OFFSet is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][: IMMediate]:OFFSet
Range: (STARt + OFFSet) to (STOP + OFFSet) Increment: 0.01 Default unit: dBm
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676
See " Current Level" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MODE <Mode>
Selects the operating mode of the instrument to set the output level.
Parameters: <Mode>
CW | FIXed | SWEep
CW|FIXed Operates at a constant level. CW and FIXed are synonyms. To set the output level value, use the command [:
SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][: AMPLitude].
SWEep Sets sweep mode. Set the range and current level with the commands: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt and [:SOURce<hw>]: POWer:STOP, [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual.
*RST:
CW
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676
Manual operation: See "State (RF level sweep)" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:POWer <Power> Sets the level at the RF output connector. This value does not consider a specified offset. The command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] sets the level of the "Level" display, that means the level containing offset. See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 68.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
666
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Parameters: <Power>
Example: Manual operation:
float Level at the RF output, without level offset Range: See data sheet Increment: 0.01 Default unit: dBm
SOURce1:POWer:POWer 15 Sets the level at RF output
See "Amplitude" on page 75
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt <Start> [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP <Stop>
Sets the RF start/stop level in sweep mode.
Parameters: <Stop>
float
Sets the setting range calculated as follows: (Level_min + OFFSet) to (Level_max + OFFSet) Where the values are set with the commands: [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP
Range: Minimum level to maximum level
*RST:
-30 (Start)/ -10 (Stop)
Default unit: dBm
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676
Manual operation: See " Start Level / Stop Level " on page 194
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE <Mode>
Defines the type of step width to vary the RF output power step-by-step with the commands POW UP or POW DOWN.
Parameters: <Mode>
DECimal | USER
DECimal Increases or decreases the level in steps of ten.
USER Increases or decreases the level in increments, determined with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement].
*RST:
DECimal
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
667
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
SOURce1:POWer:STEP:INCRement 2 SOURce1:POWer:STEP:MODE USER SOURce1:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:AMPLitude UP Increasing the RF level with a step size of 2 dB
See "Variation Active" on page 73
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] <Increment>
Specifies the step width in the appropriate path for POW:STEP:MODE USER.
To adjust the level step-by-step with this increment value, use the command POW UP, or POW DOWN.
Note: The command also sets "Variation Step" in the manual control, that means the user-defined step width for setting the level with the rotary knob or the [Up/Down] arrow keys.
Parameters: <Increment>
float
Range: 0 to 200
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
1
Default unit: dB
Example:
See [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE on page 667.
Manual operation: See "Variation Step" on page 73
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet <Offset>
Sets the level offset of a downstream instrument.
The level at the RF output is not changed.
To query the resulting level, as it is at the output of the downstream instrument, use the command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude].
See "RF frequency and level display with a downstream instrument" on page 68.
Note: The level offset also affects the RF level sweep.
Parameters: <Offset>
float
Range: -100 to 100
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
0
Default unit: dB
Level offset is always expreced in dB; linear units (V, W, etc.) are
not supported
Example:
POWer:OFFSet 10 Sets the RF level offset to 10 dB
Manual operation: See " Offset " on page 76
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
668
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:RCL <Rcl>
Determines whether the current level is retained or if the stored level setting is adopted when an instrument configuration is loaded.
Parameters: <Rcl>
INCLude | EXCLude
INCLude Takes the current level when an instrument configuration is loaded.
EXCLude Retains the current level when an instrument configuration is loaded.
*RST:
INCLude
Example:
POW:RCL INCL Takes the level value from an instrument configuration loaded with command *RCL.
Manual operation: See "Exclude Level" on page 314
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <Amplitude>
Sets the RF level applied to the DUT.
To activate the RF output use command :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] ("RF On"/"RF Off").
The following applies POWer = RF output level + OFFSet, where: POWer is the values set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:
IMMediate][:AMPLitude] RF output level is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:POWer OFFSet is set with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
Parameters: <Amplitude>
float
The following settings influence the value range: OFFSet set with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[: LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet
Numerical value Sets the level
UP|DOWN Varies the level step by step. The level is increased or decreased by the value set with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement].
Range: (Level_min + OFFSet) to (Level_max + OFFStet)
*RST:
-30
Default unit: dBm
Example:
POWer -30 Sets the RF level
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
669
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See also [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE on page 667.
Manual operation: See "Amplitude" on page 75
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:LOWer? [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:UPPer?
Queries the current interruption-free range of the level.
Return values: <Upper>
float
Increment: 0.01 Default unit: dBm
Example:
SOURce1:POWer:RANGe:UPPer? // -15 SOURce1:POWer:RANGe:LOW? // -50
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Level Range " on page 77
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:MIN? [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:MAX?
Queries the current power range of the level sweep.
Return values: <PowRangeMax>
float
Range: depends on settings
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
-10
Default unit: dBm
Example:
SOURce1:POWer:RANGe:MIN? // -90 SOURce1:POWer:RANGe:MAX? // 8
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See " Sweep Level Range " on page 196
[:SOURce]:POWer:WIGNore <State>
Ignores level range warnings.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
SOURce:POWer:WIGNore 1
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
670
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
14.16.12 SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem
The SOURce:ROSCillator subsystem contains the commands for setting the external and internal reference frequency.
The commands of this subsystem are not affected by an instrument reset (*RST on page 438).
Example: Configuring the reference oscillator
// Using 100 MHz external reference source SOURce:ROSCillator:PRESet SOURce:ROSCillator:SOURce EXT SOURce:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf:STATe 1 SOURce:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 100MHZ SOURce:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth WIDE // 100 MHz (loop through) and 1 GHz output SOURce:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE LOOP SOURce:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE DER1G SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:STATe 0
// Variable external reference frequency // SOURce:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency VAR // SOURce:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency:VARiable 100000000
// Using the internal reference frequency SOURce:ROSCillator:SOURce INT SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:STATe 1 SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:SLOPe LOW // 10 MHz and 1 GHz output SOURce:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE DER10M SOURce:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE DER1G
// Query calibration value CALibration:ROSCillator? // 32767 // Set an internal source // Activate user-defined adjustment value of 1000 SOURce:ROSCillator:SOURce INT SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:STATe 1 SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:VALue 1000
// to resume calibrated state SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:VALue 0 SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:STATe 0 // or // SYSTem:FPRest
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:PRESet...................................................................................... 672 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce..................................................................................... 672 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing[:STATe].............................................................. 672
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
671
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:SLOPe...............................................................672 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf[:STATe].............................................................. 673 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency.................................................................. 673 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency:VARiable.................................................... 673 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth..................................................................673 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:MLRange?.................................................................... 674 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:NSBandwidth?.............................................................. 674 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE......................................................... 674 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE..........................................675 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue.............................................................. 675 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe].............................................................676
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:PRESet
Resets the reference oscillator settings.
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Set to Default" on page 290
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce <Source>
Selects between internal or external reference frequency.
Parameters: <Source>
INTernal | EXTernal
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: INTernal)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
Manual operation: See "Source" on page 290
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing[:STATe] <State>
Activates the EFC (external frequency control).
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
Manual operation: See "External Tuning Active" on page 292
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:SLOPe <State>
Sets the sensitivity of the external tuning volatge.
Parameters: <State>
LOW | HIGH
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: LOW)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
672
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
Manual operation: See "External Tuning Slope" on page 292
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf[:STATe] <State>
Determines that the RF output is turned off when the external reference signal is selected, but missing.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
Manual operation: See "Deactivate RF Output (if external reference is missing)" on page 290
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the external reference.
Parameters: <Frequency>
100MHZ | 1GHZ | VARiable | 10MHZ
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 10MHZ)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
Options:
VARiable requires R&S SMAB-K704 100MHZ|1GHZ require R&S SMAB-K703
Manual operation: See "External Reference Frequency" on page 290
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency:VARiable <Frequency>
Specifies the user-defined external reference frequency.
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Range: 1E6 to 100E6
Increment: 0.1
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1E7)
Default unit: Hz
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
Options:
R&S SMAB-K704
Manual operation: See "Variable Reference Frequency" on page 291
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth <SBandwidth> Selects the synchronization bandwidth for the external reference signal.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
673
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Depending on the RF hardware version, and the installed options, the synchronizsation bandwidth varies.
For more information, see data sheet.
Parameters: <SBandwidth>
WIDE | NARRow
NARRow The synchronization bandwidth is a few Hz.
WIDE Uses the widest possible synchronization bandwidth.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
Manual operation: See "Synchronization Bandwidth" on page 291
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:MLRange?
Queries the minimum locking range for the selected external reference frequency.
Depending on the RF hardware version, and the installed options, the minimum locking range vaies.
For more information, see data sheet.
Return values: <MinLockRange>
string
Example:
SOUR:ROSC:EXT:MLR?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Minimum Locking Range" on page 291
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:NSBandwidth?
Queries the nominal synchronization bandwidth for the selected external reference frequency and synchronization bandwidth.
Return values: <NomBandwidth>
string
Example:
SOUR:ROSC:EXT:NSB?
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Nominal Synchronization Bandwidth" on page 291
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE <OutpFreqMode>
Sets the output reference frequency.
Parameters: <OutpFreqMode>
DER10M | DER100M | OFF | LOOPthrough
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
674
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
OFF Disables the output.
DER10M|DER100M Sets the output reference frequency to 10 MHz or 100 MHz. The reference frequency is derived from the internal reference frequency.
LOOPthrough This option is unavailable for ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 1GHZ. Forwards the input reference frequency to the reference frequency output.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: DER10M)
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
See "Reference Output/1 GHz Reference Output" on page 292
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE <OutpFreqMode>
Sets the output reference frequency.
Parameters: <OutpFreqMode>
LOOPthrough | DER1G | OFF
OFF Disables the output.
DER1G Sets the output reference frequency to 1 GHz. The reference frequency is derived from the internal reference frequency.
LOOPthrough If [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency1GHZ, forwards the input reference frequency to the reference frequency output.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: OFF)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
Manual operation: See "Reference Output/1 GHz Reference Output" on page 292
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue <Value>
Specifies the frequency correction value (adjustment value).
Parameters: <Value>
integer
*RST:
0
Example:
See [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[: STATe] on page 676
Manual operation: See "Adjustment Value" on page 294
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
675
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe] <State>
Determines whether the calibrated (off) or a user-defined (on) adjustment value is used for fine adjustment of the frequency.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
0 Fine adjustment with the calibrated frequency value
1 User-defined adjustment value. The instrument is no longer in the calibrated state. The calibration value is, however, not changed. The instrument resumes the calibrated state if you send SOURce:ROSCillator:INTernal:ADJust:STATe 0.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
See Example "Configuring the reference oscillator" on page 671.
Manual operation: See "Adjustment Active" on page 293
14.16.13 SOURce:SWEep Subsystem
The SOURce:SWEep subsystem contains the commands for configuring RF sweep signals.
The keyword [:FREQuency] can be omitted, then the commands are SCPI-compliant.
To activate an RF sweep mode, use the following commands: RF frequency sweep: SOURce:FREQuency:MODE SWEep (SOURce:FREQuency:MODE CW (off)) RF level sweep:SOURce:POWer:MODE SWEep (SOURce:POWer:MODE CW (off)) RF combined sweep: SOURce:FREQuency:MODE SWEep (SOURce:FREQuency:MODE CW (off)
All sweeps, including the LF sweep, can be set independently of each other. All sweeps can be set independently of each other.
See Chapter 7.1, "Signal Generation and Triggering in the Sweep and List Modes", on page 171.
Example: Setup an RF frequency or power sweep The following example shows a command sequence to set up an RF frequency sweep, triggered by the execute command. For an RF power sweep, replace FREQuency in the SWEep commands with POWer. Exceptions are the power spacing (defined with LINear only) and the power step width (defined with LOGarithmic only).
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
676
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
// Reset the instrument to start from an initial state // Switch off display update to improve performance // (especially with short dwell times) // Set the sweep mode (first two commands) and the sweep range // Select linear spacing // Select the waveform shape for the frequency sweep *RST; *CLS SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF TRIGger1:FSWeep:SOURce SINGle SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO SOURce1:FREQuency:SPAN 300 MHz SOURce1:FREQuency:CENTer 200 MHz // Alternatively use // SOURce1:FREQuency:STARt 50 MHz // SOURce1:FREQuency:STOP 350 MHz SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing LINear SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:SHAPe SAWTooth
// Activate change to start frequency while waiting for next trigger // Prerequisites: sweep mode single and sweep waveform sawtooth SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:RETRace 1 // Alternatively reset all sweeps to their initial value SOURce1:SWEep:RESet:ALL
// Set the step width and dwell time SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LINear 1 MHz // Alternatively set the number of steps, then the sweep step width is // set automatically SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:POINts 301 SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:DWELl 500 ms // With logarithmic spacing select the step width as follows // (steps of 10 percent of the previous frequency in each instance) SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing LOG SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LOGarithmic 10PCT
// Activate the sweep // Trigger the sweep (depending on the set mode) and query the status SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE SWEep // Perform a one-off RF frequency sweep SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:EXECute SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:RUNNing? // 1 // the frequency sweep is running
// For manual step RF sweep use the following commands *RST; *CLS // Activate manual step RF sweep SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE MANual // Activate the RF frequency sweep. SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE SWEep
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
677
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
// Activate RF Output1. Output1:STATe 1 // Input the frequency manually for each step SOURce1:FREQuency:MANual 200 MHz SOURce1:FREQuency:MANual 201 MHz // Alternatively use the UP or DOWN commands with the set step width. SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LINear 1 MHz SOURce1:FREQuency:MANual UP
// Activate combined RF frequency / level sweep *RST; *CLS *RST; *CLS SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF TRIGger1:FSWeep:SOURce SINGle SOURce1:SWEep:COMBined:MODE AUTO SOURce1:SWEep:COMBined:COUNt 200 SOURce1:FREQuency:STARt 1000000000 Hz SOURce1:FREQuency:STOP 5000000000 Hz SOURce1:POWer:STARt -30 dBm SOURce1:POWer:STOP -10 dBm SOURce1:SWEep:COMBined:RETRace 1 SOURce1:SWEep:COMBined:SHAPe SAWT SOURce1:SWEep:COMBined:DWELl 0.01 // Activate combined RF frequency/level sweep SOURce1:FREQuency:MODe COMB // Activate RF Output1. Output1:STATe 1 // Execute combined frequency / level sweep SOURce1:SWEep:COMBined:EXECute
:SWEep:TYPE............................................................................................................... 679 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl...........................................................................679 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:GENeration............................................................................... 679 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODE........................................................................... 680 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:POINts.......................................................................... 680 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing:MODE?........................................................... 680 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic]....................................................... 681 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl..................................................................681 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE.................................................................. 681 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts................................................................. 682 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing............................................................... 682 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SHAPe.......................................................................... 683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe................................................................. 683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:EXECute....................................................................... 683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute.............................................................. 683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RETRace.......................................................................683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace..............................................................683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RUNNing?..................................................................... 684 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RUNNing?............................................................ 684 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic................................................ 684 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear]....................................................... 684
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
678
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:FREQuency:STARt............................................................... 685 [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:FREQuency:STOP................................................................ 685 [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:POWer:STARt...................................................................... 685 [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:POWer:STOP....................................................................... 686 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:COUNt..................................................................... 686 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:DWELl..................................................................... 686 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:EXECute.................................................................. 686 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:MODE......................................................................687 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:RETRace................................................................. 687 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:SHAPe.....................................................................688 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:RESet[:ALL].............................................................................. 688 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:TIME.................................................................... 688 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:MARKer:OUTPut:POLarity..........................................................688 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer:ACTive.................................................... 689 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>:FREQuency......................................689 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>:FSTate............................................. 689
:SWEep:TYPE <SweepType>
Provided for compatibility between SCPI and Rohde & Schwarz commands.
Parameters: <SweepType>
ADVanced | STANdard
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: STANdard)
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl <Dwell>
Sets the dwell time for a level sweep step.
Parameters: <Dwell>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.001 to 100 100E-6 0.01
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Dwell Time " on page 190
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:GENeration <SweepType>
Selects frequency sweep type.
Parameters: <SweepType>
STEPped | ANALog
STEPped Performs a frequency sweep.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
679
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation:
ANALog Performs a continuous analog frequency sweep (ramp), synchronized with the sweep time [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[: FREQuency]:TIME.
*RST:
STEPped
See " Sweep Type " on page 186
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODE <Mode>
Sets the cycle mode for the level sweep.
Parameters: <Mode>
AUTO | MANual | STEP
AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep.
MANual The trigger system is not active. You can trigger every step individually with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual. The level value increases at each step by the value that you define with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]. Values directly entered with the command [:SOURce<hw>]: POWer:MANual are not taken into account.
STEP Each trigger triggers one sweep step only. The level increases by the value entered with [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[: INCRement].
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See "Mode" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:POINts <Points>
Sets the number of steps within the RF level sweep range.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Parameters: <Points>
integer Range:
2 to Max
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing:MODE? Queries the level sweep spacing. The sweep spacing for level sweeps is always linear.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
680
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Return values: <Mode> Example:
Usage:
LINear *RST:
LINear
SWE:POW:SPAC:MODE? queries the sweep spacing for a level sweep at RF output. Result: "LIN" linear spacing
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic] <Logarithmic>
Sets a logarithmically determined step size for the RF level sweep. The level is increased by a logarithmically calculated fraction of the current level.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Parameters: <Logarithmic>
float
The unit dB is mandatory.
Range: 0.01 to 139 dB
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
1
Default unit: dB
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Step " on page 195
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl <Dwell>
Sets the dwell time for a frequency sweep step.
Parameters: <Dwell>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.001 to 100 100E-6 0.01
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Dwell Time " on page 190
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE <Mode>
Sets the cycle mode for the frequency sweep.
Parameters: <Mode>
AUTO | MANual | STEP
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
681
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
AUTO Each trigger event triggers exactly one complete sweep.
MANual The trigger system is not active. You can trigger every step individually by input of the frequencies with the command [: SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual.
STEP Each trigger event triggers one sweep step. The frequency increases by the value entered with [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[: FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] (linear spacing) or [:
SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic (logarithmic spacing).
*RST:
AUTO
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
See "Mode" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts <Points>
Sets the number of steps within the RF frequency sweep range.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Two separate POINts values are used for linear or logarithmic sweep spacing ([: SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LIN | LOG). The command always affects the currently set sweep spacing.
Parameters: <Points>
integer Range:
2 to Max
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing <Spacing>
Selects the mode for the calculation of the frequency intervals, with which the current frequency at each step is increased or decreased.
The keyword [:FREQuency] can be omitted; then the command is SCPI-compliant.
Parameters: <Spacing>
LINear | LOGarithmic
LINear Sets a fixed frequency value as step width and adds it to the current frequency. The linear step width is entered in Hz, see [:SOURce<hw>]: SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear].
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
682
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
LOGarithmic Sets a constant fraction of the current frequency as step width and adds it to the current frequency. The logarithmic step width is entered in %, see [: SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic.
*RST:
LINear
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
See " Spacing" on page 190
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SHAPe <Shape> [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe <Shape>
Determines the waveform shape for a frequency sweep sequence.
Parameters: <Shape>
SAWTooth | TRIangle
*RST:
SAWTooth
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Shape" on page 189
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:EXECute [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute
Executes an RF frequency sweep.
The command performs a single sweep and is therefore only effective in manual sweep mode.
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Execute Single Sweep " on page 191
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RETRace <State> [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace <State>
Activates that the signal changes to the start frequency value while it is waiting for the next trigger event.
You can enable this feature, when you are working with sawtooth shapes in sweep mode "Single" or "External Single".
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
683
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
See "Retrace" on page 188
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RUNNing? [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RUNNing?
Queries the current sweep state.
Return values: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic <Logarithmic>
Sets a logarithmically determined step width for the RF frequency sweep. The value is added at each sweep step to the current frequency.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Parameters: <Logarithmic>
float
The unit is mandatory.
Range: 0.01 to 100
Increment: 1E-3
*RST:
1
Default unit: PCT
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Step Linear/Step Logarithmic " on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] <Linear>
Sets the step width for linear sweeps.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Omit the optional keywords so that the command is SCPI-compliant.
Parameters: <Linear>
float
Range: 0.001 Hz to (STOP - STARt) Increment: 0.01
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
684
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Manual operation: See " Step Linear/Step Logarithmic " on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:FREQuency:STARt <CombFreqStart>
Sets the start frequency of the combined RF frequency / level sweep.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Parameters: <CombFreqStart>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-59999E5 to 12E9 0.01 100E6
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Start Frequency/Stop Frequency " on page 192
[:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:FREQuency:STOP <CombFreqStop>
Sets the end frequency of the combined RF frequency / level sweep.
Parameters: <CombFreqStop>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-59999E5 to 12E9 0.01 500E6
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Start Frequency/Stop Frequency " on page 192
[:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:POWer:STARt <CombPowStart>
Sets the start level value of the combined RF frequency / level sweep.
See Chapter 7.2.1, "Correlating Parameters in Sweep Mode", on page 179.
Parameters: <CombPowStart>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-245 to 120 0.01 -30
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Start Level / Stop Level " on page 194
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
685
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:POWer:STOP <CombPowStop>
Sets the stop level value of the combined RF frequency / level sweep.
Parameters: <CombPowStop>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
-245 to 120 0.01 -10
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Start Level / Stop Level " on page 194
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:COUNt <StepCount>
Defines the number of sweeps you want to execute.
This parameter applies to [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:MODE > SINGle. To start the sweep signal generation, use the command [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep: COMBined:EXECute on page 686.
Parameters: <StepCount>
integer
Range: *RST:
1 to SeMAX_INT_STEP-1 501
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See "Step Count" on page 195
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:DWELl <Dwell>
Sets the dwell time for the combined frequency / level sweep.
Parameters: <Dwell>
float
Range: Increment: *RST:
0.01 to 100 100E-6 0.01
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Dwell Time " on page 190
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:EXECute Executes an RF frequency / level sweep cycle.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
686
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
The command triggers one single sweep manually. Therefore, you can use it in manual sweep mode, selected with the command [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:MODE > MANual.
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Execute Single Sweep " on page 191
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:MODE <SweepCombMode>
Sets the cycle mode for the combined frequency / level sweep.
Parameters: <SweepCombMode> AUTO | MANual | STEP
AUTO Each trigger event triggers exactly one complete sweep.
MANual The trigger system is not active. You can trigger every step individually by input of the frequencies with the commands [: SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual and [:SOURce<hw>]: POWer:MANual.
STEP Each trigger event triggers one sweep step.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See "Mode" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:RETRace <RetraceState>
Activates that the signal changes to the start level value while it is waiting for the next trigger event.
You can enable this feature, when you are working with sawtooth shapes in sweep mode "Single" or "External Single".
Parameters: <RetraceState>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See "Retrace" on page 188
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
687
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:SHAPe <Shape>
Selects the waveform shape for the combined frequency / level sweep sequence.
Parameters: <Shape>
SAWTooth | TRIangle
*RST:
SAWTooth
Example:
See Example "Setup an RF frequency or power sweep" on page 676.
Manual operation: See " Shape" on page 189
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:RESet[:ALL]
Resets all active sweeps to the starting point.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Reset Sweep " on page 191
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:TIME <Time>
Sets the duration of a frequency ramp sweep step.
Parameters: <Time>
float
Range: 0.01 to 100
Increment: 1E-4
*RST:
0.015
Default unit: s
Example:
SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing RAMP SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:TIME 0.020
Options:
R&S SMAB-B28
Manual operation: See " Sweep Time " on page 190
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:MARKer:OUTPut:POLarity <Polarity>
Selects the polarity of the marker signal.
Parameters: <Polarity>
NORMal | INVerted
NORMal Marker level is high when after reaching the mark.
INVerted Marker level is low after reaching the mark.
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
See [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>: FREQuency on page 689.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
688
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SOURce Subsystem
Options:
R&S SMAB-B28
Manual operation: See "Marker Polarity" on page 199
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer:ACTive <Active>
Defines the marker signal to be output with a higher voltage than all other markers.
Parameters: <Active>
NONE | M01 | M02 | M03 | M04 | M05 | M06 | M07 | M08 | M09 | M10
*RST:
NONE
Example:
See [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>: FREQuency on page 689.
Options:
R&S SMAB-B28
Manual operation: See " Active Marker " on page 199
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the selected marker.
Suffix: <ch>
. 1 to 10 Marker
Parameters: <Frequency>
float
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
100 + n* 100
Example:
SOURce1:SWEep:MARKer:OUTPut:POLarity NORMal three markers at 1 GHz, 2 GHz and 3 GHz SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MARKer1:FREQuency 1000000000 SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MARKer2:FREQuency 2000000000 SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MARKer3:FREQuency 3000000000 SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MARKer1:FSTate 1 SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MARKer2:FSTate 1 SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MARKer3:FSTate 1 SOURce1:SWEep:FREQuency:MARKer:ACTive M03
Options:
R&S SMAB-B28
Manual operation: See " Frequency x " on page 198
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>:FSTate <FState> Activates the selected marker.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
689
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Suffix: <ch>
Parameters: <FState>
Example:
Options: Manual operation:
. 1 to 10 Marker
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
See [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>: FREQuency on page 689.
R&S SMAB-B28
See " State " on page 198
14.17 SYSTem Subsystem
The SYSTem subsystem contains a series of commands for general functions which do not directly affect signal generation.
Example: Retrieving information on network-related settings
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:STATus? // 1 SYSTem:PROTection1:STATe 0,123456
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE STAT SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress "10.113.0.104" SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:DNS "10.0.2.166" SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:COMMon:HOSTname? // "SMA100B-102030" SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:COMMon:WORKgroup "instrument" SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:COMMon:DOMain "rsint.net" SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:GATeway "10.113.0.1" SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:SUBNet:MASK "255.255.252.0" SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:MACaddress "08 00 27 a3 a1 70" SYSTem:PROTection1:STATe 1
Example: Finding out the used VISA ressource strings
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource? // "TCPIP::10.113.0.104::inst0::INSTR"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:HISLip:RESource? // "TCPIP::10.113.0.104::hislip0::INSTR"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource? // "TCPIP::10.113.0.104::5025::SOCKET" SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:RESource? // "USB::0x0AAD::0x01DD::100001::INSTR"
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
690
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource? // "GPIB::28::INSTR" SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:SELF:ADDRess? // 28 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator? // STAN
SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RESource? // "ASRL1::INSTR" SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs? // 1 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD? // 115200 SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity? // NONE
Example: Querying the error queue
SYSTem:ERRor:STATic? // -221,"Settings conflict", 153,"Input voltage out of range", ... // returns all static errors that are collected in the error queue
SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory:ClEar // deletes the history entries
:SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?....................................................................................................693 :SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?......................................................................................... 693 :SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?.....................................................................................694 :SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt?............................................................................................... 694 :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?............................................................................................... 694 :SYSTem:ERRor:GNEXt?............................................................................................... 695 :SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory:CLEar......................................................................................695 :SYSTem:ERRor:STATic?............................................................................................... 695 :SYSTem:DLOCk........................................................................................................... 696 :SYSTem:KLOCk........................................................................................................... 696 :SYSTem:NINFormation?................................................................................................ 696 :SYSTem:ULOCk........................................................................................................... 696 :SYSTem:LOCK:OWNer?................................................................................................697 :SYSTem:LOCK:RELease:ALL........................................................................................ 697 :SYSTem:LOCK:REQuest[:EXCLusive]?.......................................................................... 697 :SYSTem:SAV................................................................................................................698 :SYSTem:RCL............................................................................................................... 698 :SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe]......................................................................................698 :SYSTem:SECurity:VOLMode[:STATe]..............................................................................699 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator.....................................................................699 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource?....................................................................... 700 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess...............................................................700 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:HISLip:RESource?..................................................................... 700 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress.................................................................. 700 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE........................................................701 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:MACaddress...............................................................701
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
691
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource?................................................................. 701 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESTart..................................................................... 702 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:STATus?.................................................................... 702 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:DOMain..................................................... 702 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:HOSTname................................................702 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:WORKgroup.............................................. 703 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:DNS.........................................................703 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:GATeway.................................................. 703 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:SUBNet:MASK..........................................703 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD............................................................................ 703 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity............................................................................704 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RESource?..................................................................... 704 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs............................................................................. 704 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource?................................................................... 704 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:RESource?........................................................................ 705 :SYSTem:HELP:EXPort.................................................................................................. 705 :SYSTem:IDENtification.................................................................................................. 705 :SYSTem:IDENtification:PRESet...................................................................................... 706 :SYSTem:IRESponse..................................................................................................... 706 :SYSTem:ORESponse.................................................................................................... 706 :SYSTem:LANGuage...................................................................................................... 707 :SYSTem:INFormation:SCPI............................................................................................707 :SYSTem:SECurity:SANitize[:STATe]................................................................................ 707 :SYSTem:SECurity:SUPolicy........................................................................................... 707 :SYSTem:SPECification?................................................................................................ 707 :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion.................................................................................... 708 :SYSTem:SPECification:IDENtification:CATalog?............................................................... 709 :SYSTem:SPECification:PARameter?............................................................................... 709 :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:CATalog?..................................................................... 709 :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:FACTory?..................................................................... 710 :SYSTem:SRData?.........................................................................................................710 :SYSTem:STARtup:COMPlete?....................................................................................... 710 :SYSTem:DATE............................................................................................................. 710 :SYSTem:NTP:HOSTname..............................................................................................711 :SYSTem:NTP:STATe..................................................................................................... 711 :SYSTem:TIME.............................................................................................................. 711 :SYSTem:TIME:ZONE.................................................................................................... 712 :SYSTem:TIME:ZONE:CATalog?......................................................................................712 :SYSTem:UPTime?........................................................................................................ 712 :SYSTem:BIOS:VERSion?.............................................................................................. 712 :SYSTem:VERSion?....................................................................................................... 713 :SYSTem:OSYStem?......................................................................................................713 :SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER?.................................................................................. 713 :SYSTem:DFPR?........................................................................................................... 713 :SYSTem:REBoot...........................................................................................................714 :SYSTem:RESTart..........................................................................................................714 :SYSTem:SHUTdown..................................................................................................... 714 :SYSTem:WAIT.............................................................................................................. 714 :SYSTem:FILes:TEMPorary:DELete.................................................................................714
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
692
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?
Queries the error/event queue for all unread items and removes them from the queue.
Return values: <All>
string
Error/event_number,"Error/event_description>[;Device-dependent info]" A comma separated list of error number and a short description of the error in FIFO order. If the queue is empty, the response is 0,"No error" Positive error numbers are instrument-dependent. Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard. Volatile errors are reported once, at the time they appear. Identical errors are reported repeatedly only if the original error has already been retrieved from (and hence not any more present in) the error queue.
Example:
SYST:ERR:ALL? Queries all entries in the error queue. Response: 0, 'no error' No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Clear History" on page 729
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?
Queries the error numbers of all entries in the error queue and then deletes them.
Return values: <All>
string
Returns the error numbers. To retrieve the entire error text, send the command :SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?.
0 "No error", i.e. the error queue is empty
Positive value Positive error numbers denote device-specific errors
Negative value Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI.
Example:
SYST:ERR:CODE:ALL Queries all entries in the error queue. Response: 0 No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
693
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?
Queries the error number of the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it.
Return values: <Next>
string
Returns the error number. To retrieve the entire error text, send the command :SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?.
0 "No error", i.e. the error queue is empty
Positive value Positive error numbers denote device-specific errors
Negative value Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI.
Example:
SYST:ERR:CODE Queries the oldest entry in the error queue. Response: 0 No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt?
Queries the number of entries in the error queue.
Return values: <Count>
integer
0 The error queue is empty.
Example:
SYST:ERR:COUN Queries the number of entries in the error queue. Response: 1 One error has occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
Queries the error/event queue for the oldest item and removes it from the queue.
Return values: <Next>
string
Error/event_number,"Error/event_description>[;Device-dependent info]" Error number and a short description of the error. If the queue is empty, the response is 0,"No error" Positive error numbers are instrument-dependent. Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
694
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
Usage: Manual operation:
Volatile errors are reported once, at the time they appear. Identical errors are reported repeatedly only if the original error has already been retrieved from (and hence not any more present in) the error queue.
SYST:ERR? Queries the oldest entry in the error queue. Response: 0, 'no error' No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Query only
See "Static Errors/Error History" on page 728
:SYSTem:ERRor:GNEXt?
Similar to :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?, but queries the next entry from the global persistant error/event queue.
Return values: <NextGlobalError>
string
Error/event number, "Error/event description> [;Device dependent info]" An error number and a short description of the error. Positive error numbers are instrument-dependent. Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard.
Example:
SYST:ERR:GNEX? Returns the next error message from the global error queue.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory:CLEar
Clears the error history.
Example:
See Example "Querying the error queue" on page 691
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Clear History" on page 729
:SYSTem:ERRor:STATic?
Returns a list of all errors existing at the time when the query is started. This list corresponds to the display on the info page under manual control.
Return values: <StaticErrors>
string
Example:
See Example "Querying the error queue" on page 691
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Static Errors/Error History" on page 728
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
695
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:DLOCk <DispLockStat>
Disables the manual operation via the display, including the front panel keyboard of the instrument and the Local key.
Parameters: <DispLockStat>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
SYST:DLOC ON Activates the display lock. The instrument cannot be operated via the display until it has been enabled with SYST:DLOC OFF.
Manual operation: See "User Interface" on page 359
:SYSTem:KLOCk <State>
Disables the front panel keyboard of the instrument including the Local key.
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
SYST:KLOC ON Locks the front panel and external controls. To enable the controls, send SYST:KLOC OFF.
Manual operation: See "User Interface" on page 359
:SYSTem:NINFormation?
Queries the oldest information message ("Error History > Level > Info") in the error/ event queue.
Return values: <NextInfo>
string
Example:
:SYSTem:NINFormation? Queries the oldest entry in the info message queue. Response: 90,"Info;=== Instrument startup... ===" Information message containing error number 90, that states, that the instrument startup is complete.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:ULOCk <Mode>
Locks or unlocks the user interface of the instrument.
Parameters: <Mode>
ENABled | DONLy | DISabled | TOFF | VNConly
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
696
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
ENABled Unlocks the display, the touchscreen and all controls for the manual operation.
DONLy Locks the touchscreen and controls for the manual operation of the instrument. The display shows the current settings.
VNConly Locks the touchscreen and controls for the manual operation, and enables remote operation over VNC. The display shows the current settings.
TOFF Locks the touchscreen for the manual operation of the instrument. The display shows the current settings.
DISabled Locks the display, the touchscreen and all controls for the manual operation.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: ENABled)
:SYST:ULOC DIS Activates the user interface lock, including display and controls.
See "User Interface" on page 359
:SYSTem:LOCK:OWNer?
Queries the sessions that have locked the instrument currently.
If an exclusive lock is set, the query returns the owner of this exclusive lock, otherwise it returns NONE.
Return values: <Owner>
string
Example:
SYST:LOCK:OWN? Returns the owner of locking. Response: NONE The instrument is not locked.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:LOCK:RELease:ALL
Revokes the exclusive access to the instrument.
Usage:
Setting only
:SYSTem:LOCK:REQuest[:EXCLusive]?
Queries whether a lock for exclusive access to the instrument via ethernet exists. If successful, the query returns a 1, otherwise 0.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
697
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Return values: <Success> Example:
Usage:
integer
SYST:LOCK:REQ? Queries the state of exclusive locking. Response: 1 The exclusive locking is active.
Query only
:SYSTem:SAV <Pathname>
Saves the current R&S SMA100B settings into a file with defined filename and into a specified directory. The file extension (*.savrcltxt) is assigned automatically.
Setting parameters:
<Pathname>
string
Example:
SYSTem:SAV "/var/user/temp/Test" Saves the file Test.savrcltxt into the directory /var/user/temp/.
Usage:
Setting only
:SYSTem:RCL <Pathname>
Loads a file with previously saved R&S SMA100B settings.
Loads the selected file with previously saved R&S SMA100B settings from the default or the specified directory. Loaded are files with extension *.savrcltxt.
Setting parameters:
<Pathname>
string
Example:
SYSTem:RCL "/var/user/temp/Test" Loads the file Test.savrcltxt from the directory /var/user/temp/.
Usage:
Setting only
:SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe] <State>[, <Key>]
Activates and deactivates the specified protection level.
Suffix: <ch>
. Indicates the protection level. See also "Protection" on page 353
Parameters: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
698
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Setting parameters:
<Key>
integer
The respective functions are disabled when the protection level is activated. No password is required for activation of a level. A password must be entered to deactivate the protection level. The default password for the first level is 123456. This protection level is required to unlock internal adjustments for example.
Example:
To activate protection level: SYSTem:PROTect1:STATe 1 Internal adjustments or hostname cannot be changed. To unlock protection level 1: SYSTem:PROTect1:STATe 0,123456 Internal adjustments are accessible.
Manual operation: See "Protection Level/Password" on page 355
:SYSTem:SECurity:VOLMode[:STATe] <SecPassWord>, <MmemProtState>
Activates volatile mode, so that no user data can be written to the internal memory permanently.
To enable volatile mode, reboot the instrument. Otherwise the change has no effect.
Parameters: <MmemProtState>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Setting parameters: <SecPassWord> string
Current security password The default password is 123456.
Example:
SYSTem:SECurity:VOLMode:STATe "123456", 1 SYSTem:REBoot
Manual operation: See "Volatile Mode" on page 358
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator <LTerminator>
Sets the terminator recognition for remote control via GPIB interface.
Parameters: <LTerminator>
STANdard | EOI
EOI Recognizes an LF (Line Feed) as the terminator only when it is sent with the line message EOI (End of Line). This setting is recommended particularly for binary block transmissions, as binary blocks may coincidentally contain a characater with value LF (Line Feed), although it is not determined as a terminator.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
699
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
STANdard Recognizes an LF (Line Feed) as the terminator regardless of whether it is sent with or without EOI.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: STANdard)
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource?
Queries the visa resource string for remote control via the GPIB interface.
To change the GPIB address, use the command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[: SELF]:ADDRess.
Return values: <Resource>
string
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <Address>
Sets the GPIB address.
Parameters: <Address>
integer
Range: *RST:
0 to 30 28
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:HISLip:RESource?
Queries the VISA resource string. This string is used for remote control of the instrument with HiSLIP protocol.
Return values: <Resource>
string
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress <IpAddress> Sets the IP address.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
700
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Parameters: <IpAddress>
Example:
Manual operation:
string Range:
0.0.0.0. to ff.ff.ff.ff
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 690.
See "IP Address" on page 384
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE <Mode>
Selects manual or automatic setting of the IP address.
Parameters: <Mode>
AUTO | STATic
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: AUTO)
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 690.
Example:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE STATic SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress "10.113.0.105"
Manual operation: See "Address Mode" on page 384
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:MACaddress <MacAddress>
Queries the MAC address of the network adapter.
This is a password-protected function. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it.
Parameters: <MacAddress>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 690.
Manual operation: See "MAC Address" on page 385
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource?
Queries the visa resource string for Ethernet instruments.
Return values: <Resource>
string
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
701
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESTart
Restarts the network.
Example:
SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESTart // Terminates the network connection and sets it up again
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Restart Network" on page 383
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:STATus?
Queries the network configuration state.
Return values: <State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 690.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Network Status" on page 383
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:DOMain <Domain>
Determines the primary suffix of the network domain.
Parameters: <Domain>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 690.
Manual operation: See "DNS Suffix" on page 385
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:HOSTname <Hostname>
Sets an individual hostname for the Signal Generator.
Note:We recommend that you do not change the hostname to avoid problems with the network connection. If you change the hostname, be sure to use a unique name.
This is a password-protected function. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it.
Parameters: <Hostname>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 690.
Manual operation: See "Hostname" on page 384
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
702
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:WORKgroup <Workgroup>
Sets an individual workgroup name for the instrument.
Parameters: <Workgroup>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 690.
Manual operation: See "Workgroup" on page 384
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:DNS <DNS>
Determines or queries the network DNS server to resolve the name.
Parameters: <DNS>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 690.
Manual operation: See "DNS Server" on page 385
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:GATeway <Gateway>
Sets the IP address of the default gateway.
Parameters: <Gateway>
string Range:
0.0.0.0 to ff.ff.ff.ff
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 690.
Manual operation: See "Default Gateway" on page 385
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:SUBNet:MASK <Mask>
Sets the subnet mask.
Parameters: <Mask>
string
Example:
See Example "Retrieving information on network-related settings" on page 690.
Manual operation: See "Subnet Mask" on page 385
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD <Baud> Defines the baudrate for the serial remote control interface.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
703
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Parameters: <Baud>
Example:
Manual operation:
2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 115200)
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
See "Baud Rate" on page 387
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity <Parity>
Enters the parity for the serial remote control interface.
Parameters: <Parity>
NONE | ODD | EVEN
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: NONE)
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
Manual operation: See "Parity" on page 387
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RESource?
Queries the visa resource string for the serial remote control interface. This string is used for remote control of the instrument.
Return values: <Resource>
string
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs <SBits>
Defines the number of stop bits for the serial remote control interface.
Parameters: <SBits>
1 | 2 *RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 1)
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
Manual operation: See "Stop Bits" on page 387
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource?
Queries the visa resource string for remote control via LAN interface, using TCP/IP socket protocol.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
704
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Return values: <Resource> Example:
Usage:
string
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
Query only
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:RESource?
Queries the visa resource string for remote control via the USB interface.
Return values: <Resource>
string
Example:
See Example "Finding out the used VISA ressource strings" on page 690.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:HELP:EXPort
Saves the online help as zip archive in the user directory.
Example:
:SYSTem:HELP:EXPort MMEM:CDIR? // "/var/user" MMEM:CAT? // ..,"Log,DIR,4096","help.tgz,BIN,69836600" // confirms that help zip archive is saved.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:: "Setup > Help > Export Help to User Path"
:SYSTem:IDENtification <Identification>
Selects the mode to determine the "IDN String" and the "OPT String" for the instrument, selected with command :SYSTem:LANGuage.
Note: While working in an emulation mode, the R&S SMA100B specific command set is disabled, that is, the SCPI command SYST:IDEN is discarded.
Parameters: <Identification>
AUTO | USER
AUTO Automatically determines the strings.
USER User-defined strings can be selected.
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: AUTO)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
705
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
SYST:IDEN AUTO Automatically assigns the OPT and IDN strings according to the selected instrument language.
See "Mode" on page 388
:SYSTem:IDENtification:PRESet
Sets the *IDN and *OPT strings in user defined mode to default values.
Example:
SYST:IDEN USER SYST:IDEN:PRES
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Set to Default" on page 388
:SYSTem:IRESponse <IdnResponse>
Defines the user defined identification string for *IDN.
Note: While working in an emulation mode, the instrument's specific command set is disabled, i.e. the SCPI command SYST:IRES is discarded.
Parameters: <IdnResponse>
string
Example:
SYST:IDEN USER // Selects a user-defined identification SYST:IRES "Test Device" // Defines identification string 'test device' *IDN? // Response: 'test device'
Manual operation: See "IDN String" on page 389
:SYSTem:ORESponse <OResponse>
Defines the user defined response string for *OPT.
Note: While working in an emulation mode, the instrument's specific command set is disabled, i.e. the SCPI command SYST:ORES is discarded.
Parameters: <OResponse>
string
Example:
SYST:IDEN USER // Selects a user-defined identification SYST:ORES "Test Option" // Defines the OPT string 'test option' *OPT? // Response: 'test option'
Manual operation: See "OPT String" on page 389
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
706
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:LANGuage <Language>
Sets the remote control command set.
Parameters: <Language>
string
Example:
SYSTem:LANGuage "SCPI" // selects SCPI command set
Manual operation: See "Language" on page 388
:SYSTem:INFormation:SCPI <InfoString>
Inserts system information in recorded SCPI command lists, for example information on a missing command.
Parameters: <InfoString>
string
Example:
SYST:INF:SCPI "missing command" enters the information into a recorded SCPI command list.
:SYSTem:SECurity:SANitize[:STATe] <SecPassWord>, <MmemProtState>
Sanitizes the internal memory.
Parameters: <MmemProtState>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Setting parameters: <SecPassWord> string
Example:
SYSTem:SECurity:SANitize[:STATe] 1
Manual operation: See "Sanitize" on page 358
:SYSTem:SECurity:SUPolicy <SecPassWord>, <UpdatePolicy>
Configures the automatic signature verification for firmware installation.
Parameters: <UpdatePolicy>
STRict | CONFirm | IGNore
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: CONFirm)
Setting parameters: <SecPassWord> string
Manual operation: See "Secure Update Policy" on page 356
:SYSTem:SPECification? <Id> Retrieves data sheet information for a specific parameter.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
707
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Setting parameters:
<Id>
string
Identifies the name of the entry in the data sheet, as quieried with the command :SYSTem:SPECification: IDENtification:CATalog? on page 709
Return values: <ValList>
float
Comma-separated list with the specified and, if available, the typical value of the parameter, as specified in the data sheet. See also "Data Sheet" on page 399.
Example:
Retrieving instruments specification Note: The following values are merely an example. Query the data sheet versions stored in the instrument: :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:CATalog? "04.03,04.02,04.01,04.00,03.04,03.03,03.02, 03.01,03.00,02.96,02.95,02.94,02.02,02.01, 02.00,01.03,01.02,01.01,01.00" Query the data sheet version with that the instrument was delivered: :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:FACTory? "04.00" Select a data sheet version: :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion? "04.00" :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion "04.01" Selects one particular data sheet version. Queries regarding data sheet parameters (IDs) and their values Rrefer to this particular data sheet Query the IDs of all parameters listed in the selected data sheet version: :SYSTem:SPECification:IDENtification:CATalog? "ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_ALC_ON_MS, ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_MS,..." Query the data sheet information on a specific parameter, defined by its ID :SYSTem:SPECification? "ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_ALC_ON_MS" Rreturned is the specified and, if available, the typical value of the parameter
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion <Version>
Selects a data sheet version from the data sheets saved on the instrument.
Further queries regarding the data sheet parameters (<Id>) and their values refer to the selected data sheet.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
708
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
To query the list of data sheet versions, use the command :SYSTem: SPECification:VERSion:CATalog? on page 709.
Parameters: <Version>
string
Example:
See :SYSTem:SPECification? on page 707.
:SYSTem:SPECification:IDENtification:CATalog?
Queries the parameter identifiers (<Id>) available in the data sheet.
Return values: <IdList>
string Comma-separated string of the parameter identifiers (<Id>)
Example:
See :SYSTem:SPECification? on page 707.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:SPECification:PARameter? <Id>[, <Parameter>]
Retrieves data sheet information for a specific parameter.
Setting parameters:
<Id>
string
Identifies the name of the entry in the data sheet. Query the data sheet parameters with the command :SYSTem: SPECification:IDENtification:CATalog?.
<Parameter>
float An additional value the result (ValList) depends on.
Return values: <ValList>
float
Comma-separated list with the specified and, if available, the typical value of the parameter, as specified in the data sheet.
Example:
Note: The following values are merely an example. Your instrument may not support the same parameters. SYST:SPEC:PAR? "ID_RF_FREQ_SETTING_TIME_MS",0.1 SYST:SPEC:PAR? "ID_RF_LEVEL_MAX_GENERAL_DBM", 0.1
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:CATalog?
Queries all data sheet versions stored in the instrument.
Return values: <VersCatalog>
string
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
709
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Example: Usage:
See :SYSTem:SPECification? on page 707. Query only
:SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:FACTory?
Queries the data sheet version of the factory setting.
Return values: <Version>
string
Example:
See :SYSTem:SPECification? on page 707.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Versions" on page 733
:SYSTem:SRData?
Queris the SCPI recording data from the internal file.
This feature enables you to transfer an instrument configuration to other test environments, as e.g. laboratory virtual instruments.
Return values: <FileData>
block data
Example:
SYSTem:SRData? // #3118:SOURce1:ROSCillator:SOURce EXT // :SOURce1:FREQuency:CW 4000000000 // :SOURce1:FREQuency:OFFSet 1000000 // :SOURce1:AM1:STATe 1 // :OUTPut1:STATe 1
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:STARtup:COMPlete?
Queries if the startup of the instrument is completed.
Return values: <Complete>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SYST:STAR:COMP? Response: 1 the startup of the instrument is completed.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:DATE <Year>, <Month>, <Day> Queries or sets the date for the instrument-internal calendar.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
710
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
This is a password-protected function. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it.
Parameters: <Year>
integer
<Month>
integer Range:
1 to 12
<Day>
integer Range:
1 to 31
Example:
:SYSTem:DATE? // 2016,05,01
Manual operation: See "Date" on page 740
:SYSTem:NTP:HOSTname <NTPName>
Sets the address of the NTP server. You can enter the IP address, or the hostname of the time server, or even set up an own vendor zone. See the Internet for more information on NTP.
Parameters: <NTPName>
string
Manual operation: See "NTP Address" on page 741
:SYSTem:NTP:STATe <UseNtpState>
Activates clock synchronization via NTP.
Parameters: <UseNtpState>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
n.a. (factory preset: 0)
Example:
SYSTem:NTP:STATe 1
Manual operation: See "Use Time from NTP Server" on page 741
:SYSTem:TIME <Hour>, <Minute>, <Second>
Queries or sets the time for the instrument-internal clock.
This is a password-protected function. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it.
Parameters: <Hour>
integer Range:
0 to 23
<Minute>
integer Range:
0 to 59
<Second>
integer Range:
0 to 59
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
711
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
Example: Manual operation:
SYSTem:TIME? // 10,27,14
See "Time" on page 740
:SYSTem:TIME:ZONE <TimeZone>
Sets the timezone. You can query the list of the available timezones with :SYSTem: TIME:ZONE:CATalog?.
Parameters: <TimeZone>
string
Manual operation: See "Timezone" on page 741
:SYSTem:TIME:ZONE:CATalog?
Querys the list of available timezones.
Return values: <Catalog>
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation: See "Timezone" on page 741
:SYSTem:UPTime?
Queries the up time of the operating system.
Return values: <UpTime>
"<ddd.hh:mm:ss>"
Example:
SYSTem:UPTime? Response: "0.08:11:00"
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:BIOS:VERSion?
Queries the BIOS version of the instrument.
Return values: <Version>
string
Example:
SYST:BIOS:VERS? queries the BIOS version. Response: 123456
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
712
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:VERSion?
Queries the SCPI version the instrument's command set complies with.
Return values: <Version>
string
Example:
SYST:VERS queries the SCPI version. Response: "1996" The instrument complies with the SCPI version from 1996.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:OSYStem?
Queries the operating system of the instrument.
Return values: <OperSystem>
string
Example:
SYSTem:OSYStem? Response: "Linux"
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER?
Queries the user directory, that means the directory the R&S SMA100B stores user files on.
Return values: <PathUser>
string
Example:
SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER? Response: "'/var/user/"
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:DFPR?
Queries the device footprint of the instrument. The retrieved information is in machinereadable form suitable for automatic further processing.
Return values: <DeviceFootprint>
string
Information on the instrument type, device identification and details on the installed FW version, hardware and software options.
Example:
:SYSTem:DFPR?
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
713
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:REBoot
Reboots the instrument including the operating system.
Usage:
Event
:SYSTem:RESTart
Restarts the instrument without restarting the operating system.
Usage:
Event
:SYSTem:SHUTdown
Shuts down the instrument.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See "Shut down" on page 749
:SYSTem:WAIT <TimeMs>
Delays the execution of the subsequent remote command by the specified time.
This function is useful, for example to execute an SCPI sequence automatically but with a defined time delay between some commands.
See Chapter 12.2.4, "How to Assign Actions to the [ (User)] Key", on page 348.
Setting parameters:
<TimeMs>
integer
Wait time in ms
Range: *RST:
0 to 10000 0
Example:
:SYSTem:WAIT 10000 // waits 10s before resetting the instrument *RST
Usage:
Setting only
:SYSTem:FILes:TEMPorary:DELete
Deletes the temporary files from the internal memory or, if installed, from the SD card slot.
Example:
:SYSTem:FILes:TEMPorary:DELete // temporary files are removed
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
714
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands STATus Subsystem
14.18 STATus Subsystem
This system contains the commands for the status reporting system. See also Chapter A.1.5, "Status Reporting System", on page 763 for detailed information.
*RST on page 438 has no effect on the status registers.
Value ranges
Queries return the current value of the respective register, which permits a check of the device status. Return values: A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 (=215-1)
The configuration commands set the respective register thus determining which status changes of the R&S SMA100B cause the status registers to be changed. Setting values: A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 (=215-1)
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?..................................................................................... 715 :STATus:OPERation:ENABle........................................................................................... 715 :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]...........................................................................................716 :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition.................................................................................... 716 :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition.....................................................................................716 :STATus:PRESet............................................................................................................ 716 :STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition.................................................................................. 717 :STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle.......................................................................................717 :STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]...................................................................................... 717 :STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition................................................................................ 717 :STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition................................................................................ 718 :STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?................................................................................................718
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
Quieries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus:OPERation register.
This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument. The content is not deleted after being read out because it indicates the current hardware status.
Return values: <Condition>
string
Example:
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
Usage:
Query only
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle <Enable>
Sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus:OPERation register. This setting determines which events of the Status-Event part are forwarded to the sum bit in the status byte. These events can be used for a service request.
Parameters: <Enable>
string
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
715
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands STATus Subsystem
Example:
:STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767 all events are forwarded to the sum bit of the status byte.
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt] <Event>
Queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus:OPERation register. This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout. The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out.
Parameters: <Event>
string
Example:
:STAT:OPER:EVEN? queries the STATus:OPERation:EVENt register.
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <Ntransition>
Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus:OPERation register. If a bit is set, a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register. The disappearance of an event in the hardware is thus registered, for example the end of an adjustment.
Parameters: <Ntransition>
string
Example:
:STAT:OPER:NTR 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status:Operation register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part.
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <Ptransition>
Sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus:OPERation register. If a bit is set, a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register. A new event in the hardware is thus registered, for example the start of an adjustment.
Parameters: <Ptransition>
string
Example:
:STAT:OPER:PTR 32767 all transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the Status:Operation register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part.
:STATus:PRESet <Preset>
Resets the status registers. All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh (32767), i.e. all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected. All NTRansition parts are set to 0, i.e. a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle parts of STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable are set to 0, i.e. all events in these registers are not passed on.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
716
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands STATus Subsystem
Parameters: <Preset>
Example:
string
STAT:PRES resets the status registers.
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition <Condition>
Queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument. The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hardware status.
Parameters: <Condition>
string
Example:
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? queries the Status:Questionable:Condition register.
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <Enable>
Sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. The enable part determines which events of the STATus:EVENt part are enabled for the summary bit in the status byte. These events can be used for a service request.
If a bit in the ENABle part is 1, and the correesponding EVENt bit is true, a positive transition occurs in the summary bit. This transition is reportet to the next higher level.
Parameters: <Enable>
string
Example:
STAT:QUES:ENAB 1 Problems when performing an adjustment cause an entry to be made in the sum bit.
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt] <Event>
Queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout. The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out.
Parameters: <Event>
string
Example:
STAT:QUES:EVEN? queries the Status:Questionable:Event register.
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <Ntransition>
Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. If a bit is set, a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
717
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands TEST Subsystem
Parameters: <Ntransition>
Example:
string
STAT:QUES:NTR 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <PTransition>
Sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. If a bit is set, a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register.
Parameters: <PTransition>
string
Example:
STAT:QUES:PTR 32767 all transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part
:STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?
Queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it. Positive error numbers denote device-specific errors, and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, 0 ("No error") is returned.
The command is identical to :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? on page 694.
Return values: <Next>
string
Example:
:STATus:QUEue? queries the oldest entry in the error queue. Response: 0, 'no error' no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out
Usage:
Query only
14.19 TEST Subsystem
The TEST subsystem contains the commands for performing test routines directly at the hardware assemblies.
The selftetst responses with a 0 if the test is performed successfully, otherwise a value other than 0 is returned. None of the commands of this system has a *RST value.
:TEST<hw>:ALL:STARt.................................................................................................. 719 :TEST<hw>:ALL:RESult?................................................................................................719
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
718
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands TRIGger Subsystem
:TEST<hw>:ALL:STARt
Usage:
Event
Starts the selftest. Use the command :TEST<hw>:ALL:RESult? to query the result.
:TEST<hw>:ALL:RESult?
Queries the result of the performed selftest. Start the selftest with :TEST<hw>:ALL: STARt.
Return values: <Result>
0 | 1 | RUNning | STOPped
*RST:
STOPped
Usage:
Query only
14.20 TRIGger Subsystem
The TRIGger system contains the commands for selecting the trigger source for the RF and LF sweep.
You can work with an internal or with an externally applied trigger signal. In this case, use the commands in the SOURce:INPut subsystem to configure the signal.
The trigger system of the R&S SMA100B is a simplified implementation of the SCPI trigger system. The TRIGger system differs from the SCPI system as follows:
No INITiate command; the instrument behaves as if INITiate:CONTinuous ON were set.
Under TRIGger several sweep subsystems exist.
The trigger source names correspond directly to the various settings of manual control. SCPI uses different names which are also accepted by the instrument. The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration.
In addition to these commands, see more trigger-related commands in the modulation and RF signal subsystems.
Table 14-1: Cross-reference between the manual and remote control
R&S proprietary value name
SCPI conform value name Parameter in manual control
AUTO
IMMediate
"Auto" mode
SINGle
BUS
"Single" mode.
EXTernal
EXTernal
"Ext Single" and "Ext Step" mode.
Use command LFO:SWEep:MODE to select between the two sweep modes.
EAUTo
-
"Ext Start/Stop" mode.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
719
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands TRIGger Subsystem
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce.................................................................................... 720 :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce.................................................................................720 :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce....................................................................................720 :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep]:SOURce....................................................................................720 :TRIGger<hw>:FPSWeep:SOURce..................................................................................721 :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:IMMediate]................................................................................722 :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:IMMediate.............................................................................. 722 :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep[:IMMediate]................................................................................722 :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate]................................................................................722 :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep.............................................................................................. 722
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce <Source> :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce <Source> :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce <Source> :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep]:SOURce <Source>
Selects the trigger source for the corresponding sweeps:
FSWeep - RF frequency
LFFSweep - LF frequency
PSWeep - RF level
SWEep - all sweeps
The source names of the parameters correspond to the values provided in manual control of the instrument. They differ from the SCPI-compliant names, but the instrument accepts both variants.
Use the SCPI name, if compatibility is an important issue. Find the corresponding SCPI-compliant commands in Cross-reference between the manual and remote control .
Setting parameters:
<Source>
AUTO | IMMediate | SINGle | BUS | EXTernal | EAUTo
AUTO [IMMediate] Executes a sweep automatically. In this free-running mode, the trigger condition is met continuously. I.e. when a sweep is completed, the next one starts immediately.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
720
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands TRIGger Subsystem
Example: Usage:
SINGle [BUS] Executes one complete sweep cycle. The following commands initiate a trigger event: *TRG on page 439 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:EXECute [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate], :TRIGger<hw>: PSWeep[:IMMediate] and :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[: IMMediate]. Set the sweep mode with the commands:
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODEAUTO|STEP [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODEAUTO|STEP [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE AUTO|STEP In step mode (STEP), the instrument executes only one step.
EXTernal An external signal triggers the sweep.
EAUTo An external signal triggers the sweep. When one sweep is finished, the next sweep starts. A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency, a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency, and so on.
*RST:
AUTO
See Example "Setup an LF sweep" on page 632
Setting only
:TRIGger<hw>:FPSWeep:SOURce <FpTrigSource>
Selects the trigger source for the combined RF frequency / level sweep.
The parameter names correspond to the manual control. If needed, see table Table 14-1 for selecting the trigger source with SCPI compliant parameter names.
Parameters: <FpTrigSource>
AUTO | IMMediate | SINGle | BUS | EXTernal | EAUTo
AUTO|IMMediate Executes the combined RF sweep automatically. In this free-running mode, the trigger condition is met continuously. I.e. as soon as a sweep is completed, the next one starts immediately.
SINGle|BUS Executes one complete sweep cycle triggered by the GPIB commands [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:EXECute or *TRG. The mode has to be set to [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep: COMBined:MODE > AUTO.
EXTernal An external signal triggers the sweep.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
721
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands TRIGger Subsystem
Manual operation:
EAUTo An external signal triggers the sweep. As soon as one sweep is finished, the next sweep starts. A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency and level value pairs, a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start values, and so on.
*RST:
No enum range assigned!
See "Mode" on page 187
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:IMMediate] :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:IMMediate :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep[:IMMediate] :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate]
Performs a single sweep and immediately starts the activated, corresponding sweep:
FSWeep - RF frequency
PSWeep - RF level
LFFSweep - LF frequency
SWEep - all sweeps
Effective in the following configuration: TRIG:FSW|LFFS|PSW|[:SWE]:SOUR SING SOUR:SWE:FREQ|POW:MODE AUTO or SOUR:LFO:SWE:[FREQ:]MODE AUTO
Alternatively, you can use the IMMediate command instead of the respective SWEep: [FREQ:]|POW:EXECute command.
Example:
TRIG Starts all active sweeps.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation: See " Execute Single Sweep " on page 191
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep
Executes an LF frequency sweep in the following configuration: TRIG:LFFS:SOUR SING LFO:SWE:MODE AUTO
Example:
LFO:SWE:MODE AUTO TRIG:LFFS:SOUR SING TRIG:LFFSweep
Usage:
Event
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
722
R&S®SMA100B
Remote Control Commands UNIT Subsystem
14.21 UNIT Subsystem
The UNIT subsystem is used to set default units for parameters if no unit is indicated in a command. These settings are valid for the entire instrument.
Example: Setting default units for remote control
UNIT:POW V UNIT:ANGL DEG
Sets V (volts) as unit of all power parameters, DEG (degrees) for the phase modulation angle and KMH for the speed.
:UNIT:ANGLe.................................................................................................................723 :UNIT:POWer.................................................................................................................723
:UNIT:ANGLe <Angle>
Sets the default unit for phase modulation angle. The command affects no other parameters, such as RF phase, or the manual control or display.
Parameters: <Angle>
DEGree | DEGRee | RADian
*RST:
RADian
:UNIT:POWer <Power>
Sets the default unit for all power parameters. This setting affects the GUI, as well as all remote control commands that determine power values.
Parameters: <Power>
V | DBUV | DBM
*RST:
DBM
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
723
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Error Messages
15 Troubleshooting and Error Messages
The R&S SMA100B distinguishes between various messages such as status messages, error messages, warnings, or information that are displayed in the "Info" line on the screen, and also entered in the error/event queue of the status reporting system.
This section describes the types of error messages and warnings. The status reporting system is described in detail in Chapter A.1.5, "Status Reporting System", on page 763.
You can also access an Info window with detailed information about all messages in a history list. For details, see Chapter 15.4, "Querying Error Messages", on page 727
15.1 Error Messages
Error messages indicate errors in the instrument. They are displayed in different colors depending on their importance and display duration. Errors (e.g. no calibration data) are displayed in red, information (e.g. file not found) and warnings in black. Warnings indicate less significant errors (e.g. the instrument operates outside specified data). Some error messages require that the error must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured. To access the "Info" dialog with a list of current messages and a detailed description of each message, select "Info". In the remote control mode, error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the status reporting system and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?. If the error queue is empty, 0 ("No error") is returned.
15.1.1 Volatile Messages
Volatile messages report automatic settings in the instrument (e.g. switching off incompatible types of modulation) or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the instrument (e.g. range violations). They are displayed in the info line on a yellow background. They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages. Volatile messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically after a brief period of time. They are stored in the history, however. Remote command: :SYSTem:ERRor:ALL? or
:SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?
15.1.2 Permanent Messages
Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument operation, e.g. a hardware fault. The error signaled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be continued.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
724
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Device-Specific Error Messages
The message is displayed until the error is eliminated. It covers the status display in the info line. After error elimination, the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history.
Remote command:
:SYSTem:ERRor:STATic?
15.2 SCPI-Error Messages
The SCPI error messages are the same in all SCPI instruments. Detailed information and an overview of all error messages as defined in SCPI standard can be found in the corresponding documentation.
SCPI errors have negative codes (numbers). The error text being entered into the error/event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face on the left together with the error code. Below the error text, there is an explanation as to the respective error.
15.3 Device-Specific Error Messages
Start-up error If device-specific errors occur during operation, the R&S SMA100B issues corresponding error messages, as listed under Errors during operation. However, problems can also occur during start-up.
If your instrument prompts this error message when starting up, some information during initialization is missing. This error can occur when the power supply was interrupted during the last boot-up, e.g. due to power failure.
Remedy
Select "Reset this error".
If the operating system and the firmware boot successfully, the functionality is restored.
If the error message reappears, a hardware error has occurred. We recommend that you contact the Rohde & Schwarz customer support (http://www.customersupport.rohdeschwarz.com), or ship your R&S SMA100B directly to the service center experts for troubleshooting (http:// www.services.rohdeschwarz.com).
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
725
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Device-Specific Error Messages
Errors during operation The following table contains all error messages specific for the instrument in alphabetical order, as well as an explanation of the error situation. The positive error codes mark the errors specific to the instrument. The device-specific error messages set bit 3 in the ESR register.
The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes.
Error Error Code
50
Extern reference out of
range or disconnected
140 This modulation forces other modulations off
180 Adjustment failed
182 Adjustment data missing
183 Adjustment data invalid
200 Cannot access hardware
201 Hardware revision out of date
202 Cannot access the EEPROM
203 Invalid EEPROM data
204 Driver initialization failed
241 No current list
242 Unknown list type specified
460 Cannot open the file
Description
Remedy
External reference is selected but no external sig- Check the selected reference signal
nal is applied or the signal is out of range.
source (internal or external) in the
"Setup > Reference Oscillator" dia-
log.
Change setting to 'internal' if no
appropriate external source is avail-
able.
A modulation has been switched on which cannot be used at the same time as an already active modulation. The previous modulation has been switched off.
Adjustment could not be executed
Generate the adjustment data and load it into the device
Adjustment data is missing.
Generate the adjustment data and load it into the device
Adjustment data is invalid and must be restored.
Generate the adjustment data and load it into the device
The data transmission to a module was unsuccessful.
The module is not installed, not properly installed or missing.
A later version of certain parts of the instrument is The driver does not support the installed
necessary to execute the function selected.
version of a module.
An error occurs when writing or reading a EEPROM.
The EEPROM is possibly defect. Replace it.
Reading a EEPROM is possible, however the data are inconsistent.
Initialization of a driver fails when booting the instrument firmware.
The driver is not compatible with the hardware or software configuration of the instrument.
There is no list selected. To execute the required operation, a list has to be selected in the related dialog. If no list is available, a new list must be created.
The list type selected is not valid for the required operation.
Check the selected list type.
The selected file cannot be opened.
Check the path and file name.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
726
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Querying Error Messages
Error Error Code
461 Cannot write file
Description The file cannot be written.
Remedy Check if the file is read-only.
462 Cannot read file
The file cannot be read.
Check if the file contents are compatible with the file type.
463 Filename missing
The required operation cannot be executed because the file name is not specified.
Enter file name when creating list.
464 Invalid filename extension The file extension is not valid for the required operation.
Check the file extension.
465 File contains invalid data The selected file contains data that is not valid for Check the file extension. the file type.
The file extension determines the data that is valid for this file type. If the file extension is changed, the lists are no longer recognized and the data is therefore invalid.
15.4 Querying Error Messages
The R&S SMA100B monitors the functions performed and automatically detects errors and irregularities. The instrument displays the messages in the "Info" line and records them in the background with a detailed description. Find details to the system messages in Chapter 15, "Troubleshooting and Error Messages", on page 724.
To display information on static errors and error history 1. In the taskbar, select the "Info" icon. 2. For some messages, the information line appears briefly on the home screen.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
727
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Querying Error Messages
To open the dialog, in the "Info" line select the "Info" button.
The "Static Errors" dialog lists the last monitored messages chronologically and displays additional information on the highlighted message.
The "Error History" dialog lists the accumulated messages with a short description. Volatile errors are reported once, at the time they appear. If identical errors occur subsequently, they are not reported repeatedly. In the "Info" line, identical errors are displayed repeatedly only if the original error has already disappeared from the display. If queried by SCPI command, identical errors are only reported if the original error has already been retrieved from (and hence not any more present in) the error queue.
Indication and handling of permanent messages
If any critical error occurs, the R&S SMA100B automatically shows the icon in the taskbar. Select the icon to obtain information on the error and the number of occurrences.
The icon is assigned to permanent messages. The message and icon are displayed until the error is eliminated.
Static Errors/Error History Toggles between "Static" and "History" view of the info dialog.
Remote command: :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? on page 694 Each time a SYST:ERR:NEXT? query is sent, the eldest entry in the error queue is returned and at the same time cleared in the list. :SYSTem:ERRor:STATic? on page 695 Queries the list of all errors.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
728
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Resolving Network Connection Failures
Clear History Clears all messages in the "History" view.
Remote command: :SYSTem:ERRor:ALL? on page 693 Each time a SYST:ERR:ALL? query is sent, the error queue is returned and at the same time cleared. :SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory:CLEar on page 695 Clears the messages in the "History" view.
15.5 Resolving Network Connection Failures
Several issues may cause failures in the network connection to the instrument. This section lists the most likely reasons and the recommended solutions.
Common reasons for network connection failures
Network connecting cables and cable connectors of poor quality Incompatibility between the network interface of the R&S SMA100B and certain
switches or routers available on the market An invalid IP address assigned to the instrument
Possible solutions to network connection failures
1. NOTICE! Connecting to the network can cause network failure. Errors can affect the entire network. Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks: Connecting the instrument to the network Configuring the network Changing IP addresses
2. Try out the following to resolve network connection failures:
Check the network infrastructure. Exchange connecting cables, if obvious damage is visible. See also "Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI)" on page 30.
Observe the link status LED on the R&S SMA100B or the connected network device. The link status LED is located next to the LAN connector. If a link failure is detected, connect the instrument to a different device port or to a different network device.
Check whether the LAN interface and the required LAN services are enabled. See Chapter 12.4.3, "Configuring LAN Services", on page 361.
If the IP address is set manually (no DHCP) or obtained via the Zeroconf (APIPA) protocol: Check whether the IP address of the instrument is within the network's address range. Check whether the IP address is valid.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
729
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Requesting Instrument Configuration and Specifications
See also "IP Address" on page 384.
15.6 Measuring USB cable quality
To check the quality of the USB cable, see the service manual of the R&S SMA100B.
15.7 Requesting Instrument Configuration and Specifications
The R&S SMA100B is equipped with various hardware and software components. To get an overview of what your instrument is equipped with, you can request the assemblies, hardware and software options, and the firmware version. The components are structured according to the hardware configuration, software options, including the license management, and externally used Rohde & Schwarz equipment, like R&S NRP power sensors.
Software options purchased at a later stage can be activated with a keycode. The activation code is supplied with the software option. How to install options is described in chapter 4 of the R&S SMA100B service manual. The installation of hardware options purchased at a later stage is also described in chapter 4 of the service manual. Most of the hardware options have to be installed at an authorized Rohde & Schwarz service center.
15.7.1 Hardware Configuration Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Hardware Config".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
730
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Requesting Instrument Configuration and Specifications
The "Hardware Config" dialog lists all installed assemblies and externally connected instruments with information on their part and serial numbers, and revision states. The BIOS version is also listed; firmware updates do not update the BIOS version. The dialog is divided in tabs, according to the hardware components of the signal domains. The "Counter" tab provides information on the operation time and number of times the instrument was powered on.
The remote commands required to query the hardware configuration are described in Chapter 14.8, "DIAGnostic Subsystem", on page 459.
Assembly The tables in the tabs show characteristics of the installed assemblies.
"Assembly"
Assembly designation.
"Part Number" Part number of the assembly.
"Serial Number" Serial number of the assembly.
"Revision"
Revision state of the assembly.
"Slot"
Indicates whether the assembly is connected to the serial bus or PCI bus.
Remote command: :DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo? on page 460
Counter Displays information on the operation times of the R&S SMA100B.
Operation Time / h Counter Displays the operation time in hours so far.
Remote command: :DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe? on page 461
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
731
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Requesting Instrument Configuration and Specifications
Power On Count Counter Displays the number the instrument has been turned on. Remote command: :DIAGnostic:INFO:POCount? on page 461
Last Factory Calibration Counter Displays the date of the last factory calibration. Remote command: :CALibration:DATA:FACTory:DATE? on page 454
15.7.2 Versions/Options Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Versions / Options".
The "Versions/Options" dialog shows the version of the installed instrument firmware, the hardware and software options, the data sheet and the software components of the firmware. The BIOS version is also listed; firmware updates do not update the BIOS version.
The remote commands required to query the hardware configuration are described in Chapter 14.8, "DIAGnostic Subsystem", on page 459.
Firmware Shows the firmware version and the version of the software platform. Note: Your instrument is delivered with the latest firmware version available. You can download firmware updates and the "Release Notes" that describe the modifications and the firmware update procedure. See www.rohde-schwarz.com/firmware/sma100b Remote command: n.a.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
732
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Requesting Instrument Configuration and Specifications
Downgrade Info Shows downgrade information, like factory firmware version and minimum firmware version to that the instrument can be downgraded.
Remote command: n.a.
Show Open Source Acknowledgments Accesses the list of the used open-source software packages and the corresponding verbatim license texts.
Hardware Options/Software Options The tables in the "Hardware" and "Software" tabs list the installed hardware and software options.
"Option"
Short name of option
"Designation" Name of option
"Expiration Date" For regular options, "Permanent" is indicated in this column. Some options are available as trial versions. This column shows their expiration date. After this date, the option is no longer available on the instrument.
Remote command: *OPT? on page 437 *IDN? on page 436
Versions The "Versions" tab shows the versions of the technical specification of the R&S SMA100B and of the software components that comprise the firmware.
"Package"
Name of the component.
"Version"
Current issue of the component. E.g. the data sheet covers the technical data of the hardware components of the factory settings. See also "Data Sheet" on page 399.
Remote command: :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:FACTory? on page 710
15.7.3 How to Query Instrument Configuration
To get information on the components and installed options of the R&S SMA100B, proceed as described in the following examples.
Checking the installed hardware options To find out the installed options: 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Versions/Options".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
733
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Requesting Instrument Configuration and Specifications
2. Select "Hardware Options".
The dialog lists all hardware options that are installed on the R&S SMA100B.
Proceed the same way to get information for instance on the firmware, or the installed software options in the corresponding tab.
Checking the RF hardware assembly To find out the installed RF hardware: 1. Select "System Config > Setup > Instrument Assembly > Hardware Config". 2. Select "RF Assembly".
The dialog lists the RF hardware components that are installed on the R&S SMA100B.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
734
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Collecting Information for Technical Support
Proceed the same way to get information for instance on general or baseband hardware modules, or on the operating times of the R&S SMA100B in the corresponding tab.
15.7.4 How to Request the Data Sheet
You can access data sheet related information vie the LXI web browser, see "Data Sheet" on page 399.
15.8 Collecting Information for Technical Support
If you encounter problems that you cannot solve yourself, contact your Rohde & Schwarz support center as listed at http://www.customersupport.rohdeschwarz.com. Our support center staff is optimally trained to assist you in solving problems.
The support center finds solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide them with information on the instrument and an error description. The following dialog boxes in the "Setup > Instrument Assembly" menu provide
useful information: Hardware Configuration: hardware assemblies Software and Options: the status of all software and hardware options instal-
led on your instrument System Messages: displayed in the "Info" line and provide information on any
errors that have occurred Support file: a special file (*.tar.gz file) with important support information that
can be created automatically. The support *.tar.gz file has a user definable name and contains the following files and information: SgErrors.txt: chronological record of errors SystemRestaurationSMAB.savrcltxt: instrument settings at the last cor-
rect shutdown of the instrument UndoHistSuppInfo.xml: list of the last user interactions DeviceFootprint_<SerialNumber>_<Date>_<Time>.xml: service-rela-
ted information on the instrument's configuration. crashlog.txt, coredump: Postmortem debug info Several files with information on the last performed adjustment and self-test.
See also the description of error messages Chapter 15.1, "Error Messages", on page 724.
To collect error information in a support file
1. Connect a USB device to the R&S SMA100B.
2. Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Create R&S Support Information".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
735
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Contacting Customer Support
3. In the "Create R&S Support Information" dialog, navigate to the /usb directory. Enter the support filename, for example RSSupport_DeviceInfo.
The error information and further required data is collected automatically. The support file RSSupport_DeviceInfo.tar.gz is created and stored in the / usb directory. Collect the error information and attach it to an email in which you describe the problem. Send the email to the customer support address for your region as listed on the Internet (http://www.customersupport.rohde-schwarz.com).
To remove sensitive data For information on how to handle or remove the sensitive data from your instru-
ment, refer to the description "Resolving Security Issues when working with R&S SMA100B".
Packing and transporting the instrument If the instrument has to be transported or shipped, see Chapter 16, "Transporting",
on page 738.
15.9 Contacting Customer Support
Technical support where and when you need it For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz product, contact our customer support center. A team of highly qualified engineers provides support and works with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz products.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
736
R&S®SMA100B
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Contacting Customer Support
Contact information
Contact our customer support center at www.rohde-schwarz.com/support, or follow this QR code:
Figure 15-1: QR code to the Rohde & Schwarz support page
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
737
R&S®SMA100B
Transporting
16 Transporting
Lifting and carrying See: "Lifting and carrying the product" on page 23 Chapter 3.1.1, "Lifting and Carrying", on page 27.
Packing Use the original packaging material. It consists of antistatic wrap for electrostatic protection and packing material designed for the product. If you do not have the original packaging, use similar materials that provide the same level of protection.
Securing When moving the R&S SMA100B in a vehicle or using transporting equipment, make sure that the R&S SMA100B is properly secured. Only use items intended for securing objects.
Transport altitude Unless otherwise specified in the data sheet, the maximum transport altitude without pressure compensation is 4500 m above sea level.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
738
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Performing Maintenance Tasks
17 Maintenance, Storage and Disposal
The product does not require regular maintenance. It only requires occasional cleaning. It is however advisable to check the nominal data from time to time.
17.1 Cleaning
How to clean the product is described in "Cleaning the product" on page 25. Do not use any liquids for cleaning. Cleaning agents, solvents (thinners, acetone), acids and bases can damage the front panel labeling, plastic parts and display.
17.2 Storage
Protect the product against dust. Ensure that the environmental conditions, e.g. temperature range and climatic load, meet the values specified in the data sheet.
17.3 Performing Maintenance Tasks
The R&S SMA100B is accurate due to integrated adjustment procedures. Internal adjustments are integrated self-calibration routines, which you can execute directly on the instrument. Self-calibration routines that require additional equipment are performed at an authorized Rohde & Schwarz service center. For description, see R&S SMA100B service manual.
When to start internal adjustments? We recommend that you perform internal adjustments in the following cases: Before starting any application, that requires a maximum of level accuracy When a long period of time has passed since the last adjustments If the ambient temperature of the instrument significantly differs from the one of the
last adjustments. How to: See Chapter 17.3.3.2, "How to Use the Internal Adjustments", on page 746.
17.3.1 Date and Time
The R&S SMA100B uses an internal real-time clock to determine the date and time. It adjusts the time and date to the timezone of your location automatically, by providing a selection list of continents and cities.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
739
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Performing Maintenance Tasks
The instrument records the time whenever you create or modify files on your instrument or you use timed licenses. By default, the instrument is set to the UTC timezone, but you can select the timezone according to your location. Moreover, the instrument supports NTP protocol for synchronizing all connected instruments and computer systems to minimize time delays in the network.
17.3.1.1 Data and Time Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Date / Time".
The "Date / Time" dialog contains the time and data settings of the operating system. This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it.
The required remote commands are described in Chapter 14.17, "SYSTem Subsystem", on page 690.
Settings:
Date.............................................................................................................................740 Time............................................................................................................................ 740 Timezone.....................................................................................................................741 NTP Address...............................................................................................................741 Use Time from NTP Server......................................................................................... 741
Date Displays the date set in the operating system in the format [dd.mm.yyyy]. Remote command: :SYSTem:DATE on page 710
Time Displays the time set in the operating system in the format [hh.mm.ss]. The time setting corresponds to the selected Use Time from NTP Server.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
740
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Performing Maintenance Tasks
Remote command: :SYSTem:TIME on page 711
Timezone Selects the timezone. You can select the timezone according to the major cities on the respective continents. Note: By typing the first letter, you can quickly navigate through the lists to find the desired destination. Remote command: :SYSTem:TIME:ZONE on page 712 :SYSTem:TIME:ZONE:CATalog? on page 712
NTP Address Sets the IP address or host name of the NTP server. NTP is a network time protocol used for synchronizing all participating devices in a data network. You can select a high-precision time server to reduce the impact of varying network delays. Remote command: :SYSTem:NTP:HOSTname on page 711
Use Time from NTP Server Activates clock synchronization of the network via the NTP protocol. Remote command: :SYSTem:NTP:STATe on page 711
17.3.1.2 How To Set Data and Time
To select the timezone 1. Press the [Setup] key. 2. Select "Maintenance > Date /Time > Timezone". 3. Select continent and city of your location.
Tip: By typing the first letter, you can quickly navigate through the lists to find the desired destination. 4. Close the dialogs. The instrument adjusts the time according to the selected location.
To set the date and time 1. Press the [Setup] key. 2. Select "Security > Protection". 3. Enable the "Protection Level 1".
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
741
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Performing Maintenance Tasks
The default password is 123456. 4. Select "Setup > Maintenance > Date / Time". 5. Adjust the settings. 6. Close the dialogs.
The instrument adopts the new date and time.
17.3.2 Check Front Panel
Within this dialog, you can verify the functionality of the control keys. How To: See Chapter 17.3.2.2, "How to Test the Front Panel", on page 742
17.3.2.1 Check Front Panel Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > Check Front Panel".
Reflecting the front panel, the "Check Front Panel" dialog contains all functions to test the operating elements of the instrument.
17.3.2.2 How to Test the Front Panel
See: "Testing the key panel" on page 743
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
742
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Performing Maintenance Tasks
"Testing the touchscreen" on page 743 "Terminating the test" on page 744 "Debuging" on page 744
Testing the key panel
To perform the key panel test, you operate the keys at the front panel, and check the response of the instrument in the "Check Front Panel" dialog. To perform this test properly, check each key of the front panel. The test is only completed, when you have verified all keys. During the test, the actual functions of the keys are disabled.
1. Press the [Setup] key.
2. Select "Maintenance > Check Front Panel" The "Check Front Panel" dialog opens.
3. Press a key on the front panel. Check if the corresponding key in the "Check Front Panel" dialog turns green.
4. Press the same key a second time. Check that the key in the dialog turns red. Note: Pressing the same key again has no further effect, except for the [Esc] key. Pressing this key a third time, terminates the test procedure.
5. Continue with the next key on the front panel and repeat step 3 to step 5 until all keys are tested.
The test is completed, when each key is verified successfully, confirmed by a "Test passed" message.
Testing the touchscreen
1. Press the [Setup] key.
2. Select "Maintenance > Check Touch Panel" The "Finger Paint" test window opens.
3. Drag with your finger one or more lines, for example diagonally across the screen.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
743
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Performing Maintenance Tasks
The test traces the movements of your finger on the screen.
The following results are expected: If the lines are uninterrupted, the touchscreen works properly.
If there are any gaps, the touch-sensitive functionality is damaged.
To return to the "Check Front Panel" dialog, press [Esc].
Terminating the test Press the [Esc] key.
Exits the "Check Front Panel" dialog.
Debuging 1. If you detect a malfunction, for example, you press the front panel key the first
time, and the color of the button in the dialog turns red (instead of green), the front panel key may be stuck. 2. Contact the Rohde & Schwarz customer support, see Chapter 15.8, "Collecting Information for Technical Support", on page 735.
17.3.3 Internal Adjustments
Internal adjustments are integrated adjustment procedures, which you can execute directly on the instrument.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
744
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Performing Maintenance Tasks
17.3.3.1 Internal Adjustments Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > General > Internal Adjustments".
In this dialog, you can perform internal calibration routines and get information on the last performed calibration. The "Temperature Offset" indicates the deviation of the current temperature of the instrument, compared to the temperature of the last adjustment.
The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chapter 14.6, "CALibration Subsystem", on page 452.
How to: See Chapter 17.3.3.2, "How to Use the Internal Adjustments", on page 746.
Adjust All Performs all available internal calibration routines of the instrument. How to: See Chapter 17.3.3.2, "How to Use the Internal Adjustments", on page 746. Remote command: :CALibration:ALL[:MEASure]? on page 452
Last Full Adjustment Displays the date of the last fully performed adjustment. Remote command: :CALibration<hw>:ALL:DATE? on page 452
Time Displays the elapsed time since the last full adjustment. Remote command: :CALibration<hw>:ALL:TIME? on page 453
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
745
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Performing Maintenance Tasks
Temperature Offset Displays the temperature difference, comparing the temperature of the last adjustment to the current instrument temperature. A green checkmark indícates that the offset is within the permitted range. If the temperature deviates more than ±5 K, the instrument indicates a warning icon. Remote command: :CALibration<hw>:ALL:TEMP? on page 453
Information Displays information to the current adjustment state. Remote command: :CALibration<hw>:ALL:INFormation? on page 453
Continue Adjustment on Error Continues the calibration even though an error was detected. By default adjustments are aborted on error. This function is password-protected. Unlock the protection level 1 to access it. Remote command: :CALibration<hw>:CONTinueonerror on page 454
17.3.3.2 How to Use the Internal Adjustments
Deciding whether to run internal adjustments
1. Select "System Config > Setup > Internal Adjustment".
2. Observe the status and color indication in the section "Since Last Full Adjustment". Green: Internal adjustments are not required. Red: Internal adjustments are required. Observe also the indication in the "Information" field.
3. We recommend that you run internal adjustments in the following cases: Before starting any application, that requires a maximum of level accuracy When a long period of time has passed since the last adjustments If the ambient temperature of the instrument significantly differs from the one of the last adjustments.
4. Proceed as described in "Running internal adjustments" on page 746.
Running internal adjustments
1. NOTICE! Adjustments can be invalid if performed when the instrument is not warmed-up. Wait until the instrument has reached its operating temperature before you start the adjustment procedure. The warm-up time is up to 30 minutes.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
746
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Performing Maintenance Tasks
2. NOTICE! High power at the RF output applied during internal adjustment can destroy a connected DUT (device under test). Disconnect the DUT.
3. Replace the DUT by a terminating resistor with adequate power rating. The required power of the resistor varies depending on whether the instrument is equipped with a high-power option.
4. Select "System Config > Setup > Internal Adjustment > Adjust All". A warning message prompts you to make sure that you have terminated the RF output.
5. Confirm with "Ok". If the termination resistor is missing, a second warning message appears.
The adjustment process starts.
6. Do not interrupt the adjustment process. The extent of the adjustments depends on the installed options.
A progress indicator shows the status of the adjustment process. If any error occurs, the process aborts and an error message appears in the "Info" line. If there is an error: Select "Info".
Observe the error message. Continue the process.
See "Continuing the adjustment process if error appears" on page 747.
Continuing the adjustment process if error appears
Per default, if any error occurs during the adjustment process, the process aborts. An error message appears in the "Info" line.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
747
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Performing Maintenance Tasks
If you prefer to finish the adjustments also if there is an error, proceed as follows:
1. Select "System Config > Setup > Security > Protection" an unlock the protection level 1. See "Protection Level/Password" on page 355.
2. Select "System Config > Setup > Internal Adjustment > Configuration > Continue Adjustment on Error > On".
3. Proceed as described in "Running internal adjustments" on page 746.
17.3.4 FPGA/uC Update Settings
Access: Select "System Config > Setup > Maintenance > FPGA/µC Update".
This dialog enables you to check for internal assembly updates and perform updates.
Settings:
Check For Updates..................................................................................................... 749 Assembly.....................................................................................................................749 Install........................................................................................................................... 749 Shut down................................................................................................................... 749 Update External Devices.............................................................................................749
Check For Updates....................................................................................... 749
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
748
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Disposal
Check For Updates Check for updates of the FPGA/µC.
Remote command: n.a.
Assembly The table shows the installed assemblies and their states.
"Assembly"
Assembly designation.
"State"
Indicates the current state of installed assemblies.
Install Install all available updates for the FPGA/µC.
Remote command: n.a.
Shut down For at least one assembly "State = Done" and no pending assemblies, shuts the instrument down to applies installed updates.
Remote command: :SYSTem:SHUTdown on page 714
Update External Devices This dialog shows the update options of external devices connected to the instrument.
Check For Updates Update External Devices Check for updates of external devices.
Remote command: n.a.
17.3.5 Exchanging the RF Adapter Port
It is important, that you take care that the RF connectors applied to the port are clean, mechanically compatible and not damaged. Although the 1.85 mm adapter is designed to withstand several hundred mating cycles, it can reach the end of life or be damaged. Therefore, the adapter port is exchangeable, which you can replace. Refer to the R&S SMA100B Service Manual for the corresponding instructions.
17.4 Disposal
Rohde & Schwarz is committed to making careful, ecologically sound use of natural resources and minimizing the environmental footprint of our products. Help us by disposing of waste in a way that causes minimum environmental impact.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
749
R&S®SMA100B
Maintenance, Storage and Disposal Disposal
Electrical and electronic equipment
A product that is labeled as follows cannot be disposed of in normal household waste after it has come to the end of its service life. Even disposal via the municipal collection points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted.
Figure 17-1: Labeling in line with EN 50419
Rohde & Schwarz has developed a disposal concept for the eco-friendly disposal or recycling of waste material. As a manufacturer, Rohde & Schwarz completely fulfills its obligation to take back and dispose of electrical and electronic waste. Contact your local service representative to dispose of the product.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
750
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Annex A Reference Information for Remote Control
A.1 Additional Basics on Remote Control
This section provides basic information using the remote control.
A.1.1 Messages
The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories:
Interface messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the attention line being active (LOW). They are used to communicate between the controller and the instrument. Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that have GPIB bus functionality. For details see the sections for the required interface.
Instrument messages Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces, if not indicated otherwise in the description. Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described in Chapter A.1.3, "SCPI Command Structure", on page 752. A detailed description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the chapter "Remote Control Commands". There are different types of instrument messages, depending on the direction they are sent: Commands Instrument responses
Commands
Commands (program messages) are messages the controller sends to the instrument. They operate the instrument functions and request information. The commands are subdivided according to two criteria: According to the effect they have on the instrument:
Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the frequency.
Queries cause data to be provided for remote control, e.g. for identification of the instrument or polling a parameter value. Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the command header.
According to their definition in standards: Common commands: their function and syntax are precisely defined in standard IEEE 488.2. They are employed identically on all instruments (if implemented). They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers, reset and self-test.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
751
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency settings. Many of these commands have also been standardized by the SCPI committee. These commands are marked as "SCPI confirmed" in the command reference chapters. Commands without this SCPI label are device-specific; however, their syntax follows SCPI rules as permitted by the standard.
Instrument responses
Instrument responses (response messages and service requests) are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can contain measurement results, instrument settings and information on the instrument status.
A.1.2 LAN Interface Messages
In the LAN connection, the interface messages are called lowlevel control messages. These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the GPIB bus.
Command &ABO &DCL
Long term Abort Device Clear
>L
Go to Local
>R
Go to Remote
&GET
Group Execute Trigger
&LLO &NREN
Local Lockout Not Remote Enable
&POL
Serial Poll
Effect on the instrument
Aborts processing of the commands just received.
Aborts processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state. Does not change the instrument setting.
Transition to the "local" state (manual control). (The instrument automatically returns to remote state when a remote command is sent UNLESS &NREN was sent before.)
Enables automatic transition from local state to remote state by a subsequent remote command (after &NREN was sent).
Triggers a previously active instrument function (e.g. a sweep). The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input.
Disables transition from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys.
Disables automatic transition from local state to remote state by a subsequent remote command. (To re-activate automatic transition use >R.)
Starts a serial poll.
A.1.3 SCPI Command Structure
SCPI commands consist of a header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. The header and the parameters are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The headers may consist of several mnemonics (keywords). Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
752
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
The commands can be either device-specific or device-independent (common commands). Common and device-specific commands differ in their syntax.
A.1.3.1 Syntax for Common Commands
Common (= device-independent) commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk (*), and possibly one or more parameters.
Table A-1: Examples of common commands
*RST
RESET
Resets the instrument.
*ESE
EVENT STATUS ENABLE
Sets the bits of the event status enable registers.
*ESR?
EVENT STATUS QUERY
Queries the contents of the event status register.
*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY
Queries the instrument identification string.
A.1.3.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands
Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument. For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for this section: DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean> FORMat:READings:DATA <type>[,<length>] HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <Boolean> HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue> HCOPy[:IMMediate] HCOPy:ITEM:ALL HCOPy:ITEM:LABel <string> HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>] HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe <numeric value> MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination> SENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value> SENSe:FREQuency:STOP <numeric value> SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
Long and short form..............................................................................................753 Numeric Suffixes................................................................................................... 754 Optional Mnemonics............................................................................................. 754
Long and short form
The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form. The short form is marked by upper case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Either the short form or the long form can be entered; other abbreviations are not permitted.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
753
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Example: HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP:DEV:COL ON.
Case-insensitivity Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual, the instrument itself is case-insensitive.
Numeric Suffixes If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object, e.g. specific channels or sources, the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command. Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets (<1...4>, <n>, <i>) and are replaced by a single value in the command. Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1.
Example: Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>] Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2.
Different numbering in remote control For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selection used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1. Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified. Some standards define a fixed numbering, starting with 0. If the numbering differs in manual operation and remote control, it is indicated for the corresponding command.
Optional Mnemonics Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or omitted. These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description. The instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard. Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics.
Example: Definition: HCOPy[:IMMediate] Command: HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
754
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command. Example: Definition:DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean> Command: DISP:MAX ON refers to window 1. In order to refer to a window other than 1, you must include the optional WINDow parameter with the suffix for the required window. DISP:WIND2:MAX ON refers to window 2.
A.1.3.3 SCPI Parameters
Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank).
The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are specified in the command description.
Allowed parameters are:
Numeric Values..................................................................................................... 755 Special Numeric Values........................................................................................ 756 Boolean Parameters............................................................................................. 756 Text Parameters.................................................................................................... 757 Character Strings.................................................................................................. 757 Block Data.............................................................................................................757
Numeric Values
Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value range -32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed.
Example: SENS:FREQ:STOP 1500000 = SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5E6
Units
For physical quantities, the unit can be entered. If the unit is missing, the basic unit is used. Allowed unit prefixes are: G (giga) MA (mega), MOHM, MHZ K (kilo) M (milli) U (micro)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
755
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
N (nano)
Example: SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent. According to SCPI, this unit is represented by the PCT string.
Example: HCOP:PAGE:SCAL 90PCT
Special Numeric Values
The following mnemonics are special numeric values. In the response to a query, the numeric value is provided.
MIN and MAX: denote the minimum and maximum value. DEF: denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This value
conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command. UP and DOWN: increases or reduces the numeric value by one step. The step
width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP and DOWN. INF and NINF: INFinity and negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses. NAN: Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a instrument response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of zero by zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values.
Example: Setting command: SENSe:LIST:FREQ MAXimum Query: SENS:LIST:FREQ? Response: 3.5E9
Queries for special numeric values The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding mnemonic after the quotation mark. Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQ? MAXimum Returns the maximum numeric value as a result.
Boolean Parameters
Boolean parameters represent two states. The "ON" state (logically true) is represented by "ON" or a numeric value 1. The "OFF" state (logically untrue) is represented by "OFF" or the numeric value 0. The numeric values are provided as the response for a query.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
756
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Example: Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL? Response: 1
Text Parameters
Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics, i.e. they can be entered using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the header by a white space. In the response to a query, the short form of the text is provided.
Example: Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI? Response: LAND
Character Strings
Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (' or ").
Example: HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1'
Block Data
Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. For example, a command using a block data parameter has the following structure: FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted. #0 specifies a data block of indefinite length. The use of the indefinite format requires a NL^END message to terminate the data block. This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length.
A.1.3.4 Overview of Syntax Elements
The following tables provide an overview of the syntax elements and special characters.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
757
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Table A-2: Syntax elements
:
The colon separates the mnemonics of a command.
;
The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
,
The comma separates several parameters of a command.
?
The question mark forms a query.
*
The asterisk marks a common command.
' '
Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it (both single and double quotation marks are
"
possible).
#
The hash symbol introduces binary, octal, hexadecimal and block data.
Binary: #B10110
Octal: #O7612
Hexa: #HF3A7
Block: #21312
A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates the header from the parameters.
Table A-3: Special characters
| Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used. Example: Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation Mnemonics A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands. These mnemonics are indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these mnemonics needs to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of which of the mnemonics is used. Example: DefinitionSENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value> The two following commands with identical meaning can be created: SENS:BAND:RES 1 SENS:BWID:RES 1
[ ] Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted. Example: HCOPy[:IMMediate] HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
{ } Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times, or omitted. Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>} The following are valid commands: SENS:LIST:FREQ 10 SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20 SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20,30,40
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
758
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
A.1.3.5 Structure of a Command Line
A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by one of the following: <New Line> <New Line> with EOI EOI together with the last data byte
Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";".
Example:
MMEM:COPY "Test1","MeasurementXY";:HCOP:ITEM ALL
This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the MMEM system, the second command belongs to the HCOP system. If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM
This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP command system, i.e. they have one level in common. If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the command line can be abbreviated. When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level below HCOP. The colon after the semicolon is omitted. The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;IMM
Example: HCOP:ITEM ALL HCOP:IMM A new command line always begins with the complete path.
A.1.3.6 Responses to Queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488.2.
The requested parameter is transmitted without a header. Example: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?, Response: LAND
Maximum values, minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values. Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX, Response: 3.5E9
Numeric values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command. The response 3.5E9 in the previous example stands for 3.5 GHz.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
759
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Truth values (Boolean values) are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON). Example: Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL? Response: 1
Text (character data) is returned in a short form. Example: Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI? Response: LAND
Invalid numerical results In some cases, particularly when a result consists of multiple numeric values, invalid values are returned as 9.91E37 (not a number).
A.1.4 Command Sequence and Synchronization
IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands:
A sequential command always completes executing before the next command starts. Commands that are processed quickly are defined as sequential commands. They are not implemented in the instrument. However, the execution time of most of the commands is so short that they act as sequential commands, if they are sent in separate command lines.
An overlapping command is still running when the next command starts. Usually, an overlapping command takes a certain time to process its task, and thus allows the program to execute other tasks, while it is still running. If overlapping commands have to follow a specific order, for example to avoid incorrect measurement readings, they must be executed in sequence. This is called synchronization between the controller and the instrument.
Several setting commands within a command line are not necessarily processed in the order they are received. Even if they are implemented as sequential commands. To follow a particular sequence, send each command in a separate line.
As a rule, send commands and queries in different program messages.
A.1.4.1 Preventing Overlapping Execution
To prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI can be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set. The controller can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
760
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Table A-4: Synchronization using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI
Command
Action
Programming the controller
*OPC
Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR after all previous commands have been executed.
Setting bit 0 in the ESE Setting bit 5 in the SRE Waiting for service request (SRQ)
*OPC?
Stops command processing until 1 is
Send *OPC? directly after the command
returned. This occurs when all pending opera- whose processing must be terminated before
tions are completed.
other commands can be executed.
*WAI
Stops further command processing until all commands sent before *WAI have been executed.
Send *WAI directly after the command whose processing must be terminated before other commands are executed.
Command synchronization using *WAI or *OPC? is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process. The two synchronization commands simply block overlapped execution of the command. Append the synchronization command to the overlapping command, for example: SINGle; *OPC? For time consuming overlapped commands, you can allow the controller or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use one of the following methods:
*OPC with a service request 1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1 2. Set bit no. 5 in the SRE: *SRE 32 to enable ESB service request. 3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC . 4. Wait for a service request.
The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
*OPC? with a service request 1. Set bit no. 4 in the SRE: *SRE 16 to enable MAV service request. 2. Send the overlapped command with *OPC?. 3. Wait for a service request.
The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
Event status register (ESE) 1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1 2. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
761
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
3. Poll the operation complete state periodically (with a timer) using the sequence: *OPC; *ESR?
A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
A.1.4.2 Examples to Command Sequence and Synchronization
See the following examples to command sequences and synchronization. Some examples given illustrate possible constellations for overlapping tasks.
Example: Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable. The following commands always return the specified result: :FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR? Result: 1000000000 (1 GHz) Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI: :FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000 The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received. The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands as they are received.
Example: Overlapping command with *OPC The instrument implements *RST as an overlapped command. Assuming that *RST takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending the following command sequence results in initiating a reset and, after some time, setting the OPC bit in the ESR: *RST; *OPC Sending the following commands still initiates a reset: *RST; *OPC; *CLS However, since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes *CLS, forcing it into the "Operation Complete Command Idle" State (OCIS), *OPC is effectively skipped. The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes another *OPC command.
Example: Overlapped command followed by non-conflicting commands Suppose that the instrument is switched on to provide a real time test signal that requires some calculation time. At the same time, some settings for the configuration of a different signal are made which do not interact with the generated signal (for example the signal may be used later on). The signal generation and the signal configuration are independent from each other, so there is no need to synchronize the following overlapped commands: SOUR:BB:3GPP:STAT ON SOUR:BB:GSM:FORM FSK2
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
762
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Example: Overlapped command followed by conflicting commands
Suppose that the generator is switched on to provide a real time test signal that requires some calculation time. This signal is to be added to a waveform from the second baseband generator. In this case, the application program has to make sure that the real signal is available in the added signal before further action is started. This involves an appropriate synchronization technique for the first command (the following sequence assumes an appropriate routing):
SOUR:BB:3GPP:STAT ON
The instrument waits until command has finished.
SOUR2:BB:GSM:STAT ON
Depending on the selected synchronization techniques, non-conflicting commands can be executed while waiting until the synchronized overlapped command has finished.
Example: Polling the progress of the zeroing process
Suppose that you start the zeroing for a connected power sensor via the remote control command SENS1:ZERO. This process blocks the processing of further tasks during execution. The query for completeness is performed with the *OPC? command. It returns a 1 in the output buffer when the process is completed.
SENS:ZERO;*OPC?
Instead of waiting via *OPC?, you can perform alternative tasks while the zeroing is running, as for example updating the GUI or adjusting other instruments. Synchronize the commands by querying the progress of the zeroing process periodically via the event status register *ESR?:
*SRE 32
Sets the service request enable. The bit is set when an event in the event status register occurs.
*ESE 1
Configures the mask of the event status register to "Operation Complete".
SENS:ZERO;*OPC
Sets the evaluation via the status byte query. It uses *OPC? as the reference.
*CLS
Clears all status registers.
Even if the instrument is busy, you can perform this procedure, since the query is executed in a subchannel.
A.1.5 Status Reporting System
The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue.
You can query both with the commands of the STATus Subsystem.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
763
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
A.1.5.1 Hierarchy of the Status Registers
The Figure A-1 shows the hierarchical structure of information in the status registers (ascending from left to right).
Figure A-1: Graphical overview of the status registers hierarchy
OPER = Operation Status Summary Bit
RQS/MSS = Service Request Generation
ESB
= Standard Event Status Summary Bit
MAV
= Message Available in Output Queue
QUES = Questionable Status Summary Bit
2
= Error- /Event-Queue
1, 0
= not used
Note: This legend explains the abbreviations to the Status Byte Register.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
764
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
The R&S SMA100B uses the following status registers:
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable (SRE), see Chapter A.1.5.3, "Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)", on page 767.
Standard Event Status, i.e. the Event status Register (ESR) and the Event Status Enable (ESE), see Chapter A.1.5.4, "Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)", on page 768.
Questionable Status and Operation Status, the (SCPI status registers, see Chapter A.1.5.2, "Structure of a SCPI Status Register", on page 765, Chapter A. 1.5.5, "Questionable Status Register (STATus:QUEStionable)", on page 769 and Chapter A.1.5.6, "Operation Status Register (STATus:OPERation)", on page 769.
Output-Queue The output queue contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview.
Error- /Event-Queue The error-/event-queue contains all errors and events that have occurred in the past. When reading the queue, the instrument starts with the first occurred error/ event.
All status registers have the same internal structure.
SRE, ESE
The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR.
A.1.5.2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register
Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts. Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions. The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts. Bit 15 (the most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integers.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
765
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Figure A-2: The status-register model
Description of the five status register parts
The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions:
CONDition The CONDition part is written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register. Its contents reflect the current instrument status. This register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affected by reading.
PTRansition / NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part. The Positive-TRansition part acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by reading. The Negative-TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
NTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
NTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by reading.
EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading, it is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
766
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
read by the user. Reading the register clears it. This part is often equated with the entire register.
ENABle The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit (see below). Each bit of the EVENt part is "ANDed" with the associated ENABle bit (symbol '&'). The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an "OR" function (symbol '+'). ENABle bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENABle bit = 1: if the associated EVENt bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as well. This part can be written into and read by the user as required. Its contents are not affected by reading.
Sum bit
The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy.
A.1.5.3 Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
The STatus Byte (STB) is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte.
The STB is read using the command *STB? or a serial poll.
The STatus Byte (STB) is linked to the Service Request Enable (SRE) register. Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a service request (SRQ) is generated. The SRE can be set using the command *SRE and read using the command *SRE?.
Table A-5: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte
Bit No. Meaning
0...1
Not used
2
Error Queue not empty
The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a service request. Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error message. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with remote control.
3
QUEStionable status register summary bit
The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be specified in greater detail by querying the STATus:QUEStionable status register.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
767
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Bit No. 4 5
6 7
Meaning
MAV bit (message available) The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read. This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller.
ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register. Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register.
MSS bit (master status summary bit) The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.
STATus:OPERation status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1. A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The type of action can be determined by querying the STATus:OPERation status register.
A.1.5.4 Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)
The ESR is defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI register. The event status register can be read out using command *ESR?.
The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part of a SCPI register. If a bit is set in the ESE and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1, the ESB bit in the STB is set. The ESE register can be set using the command *ESE and read using the command *ESE?.
Table A-6: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register
Bit No. Meaning
0
Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.
1
Not used
2
Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead. The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.
3
Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between -300 and -399 or a positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
4
Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons. An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
768
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
Bit No. 5
6 7
Meaning
Command Error This bit is set if a command is received, which is undefined or syntactically incorrect. An error message with a number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control.
Power On (supply voltage on) This bit is set on switching on the instrument.
A.1.5.5 Questionable Status Register (STATus:QUEStionable)
This register contains information on questionable instrument states. Such states may occur when the instrument is not operated in compliance with its specifications.
To read the register, use the query commands STAT:QUEST:COND? or STAT:QUEST[:EVEN]?.
Table A-7: Meaning of the bits used in the questionable status register
Bit No. Meaning
015
Not used
A.1.5.6 Operation Status Register (STATus:OPERation)
This condition part contains information on the actions currently being performed by the instrument, while the event part contains information on the actions performed by the instrument since the last readout of the register.
To read the register, use the query commands STAT:OPER:COND? or STAT:OPER[:EVEN]?.
Table A-8: Meaning of the bits used in the operation status register
Bit No. Meaning
0
Calibrating
The bit is set during the calibration phase.
12
Not used
3
Sweeping
This bit is set during a sweep in automatic or single mode.
415
Not used
A.1.5.7 Application of the Status Reporting System
The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several devices in a measuring system. To do this and react appropriately, the controller must
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
769
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
receive and evaluate the information of all devices. The following standard methods are used:
Service request (SRQ) initiated by the instrument Serial poll of all devices in the bus system, initiated by the controller to find out
who sent an SRQ and why Query of a specific instrument status by commands Query of the error queue
Service Request
Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which the control program can react appropriately. An SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2, 4 or 5 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information of the error queue or the output buffer. To use the possibilities of the service request effectively, all bits should be set to "1" in the enable registers SRE and ESE.
Example: Use command *OPC to generate an SRQ . *ESE 1 - set bit 0 of ESE (Operation Complete) *SRE 32 - set bit 5 of SRE (ESB). After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.
The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
Serial Poll
In a serial poll, just as with command *STB, the status byte of an instrument is queried. However, the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster.
The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte. The method also works for instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.
The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the controller.
Query of an instrument status
Each part of any status register can be read using queries. There are two types of commands:
The common commands *ESR?, *IDN?, *IST?, *STB? query the higher-level registers.
The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers (STATus:QUEStionable...)
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
770
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Additional Basics on Remote Control
The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register. This number is evaluated by the controller program.
Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ.
Error Queue
Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?. Each call of SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? provides one entry from the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument responds with 0, "No error".
The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well.
A.1.5.8 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System
The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except of *RST and SYSTem:PRESet affect the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does not change the instrument settings.
Table A-9: Resetting the status reporting system
Event Effect
Switching on supply voltage
Power-On-StatusClear
0
1
DCL, SDC
(Device Clear, Selected Device Clear)
*RST or SYSTem: PRESet
STATus: PRESet
*CLS
Clear STB, ESR
-
Yes
-
-
-
Yes
Clear SRE, ESE
-
Yes
-
-
-
-
Clear PPE
-
Yes
-
-
-
-
Clear error queue
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
Yes
Clear output buffer
Yes
Yes
Yes
1)
1)
1)
Clear command processing
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
and input buffer
1) The first command in a command line that immediately follows a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR> clears the output buffer.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
771
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Telnet program examples
A.1.6 General Programming Recommendations
Initial instrument status before changing settings
Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience. In contrast, the priority of remote control is the "predictability" of the instrument status. Thus, when a command attempts to define incompatible settings, the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged, i.e. other settings are not automatically adapted. Therefore, control programs should always define an initial instrument status (e.g. using the *RST command) and then implement the required settings.
Command sequence
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages. Otherwise, the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first (see also Preventing Overlapping Execution).
Reacting to malfunctions
The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
Error queues
The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well.
A.2 Telnet program examples
The following program example shows a simple TcpClient class that is intended to explain on how to get started with programming of sockets.
The example sets up a socket communication to R&S SMA100B and opens a simple user interface, very similar to the telnet, which allows input of commands. To enable real automation, further development of the program is required.
TcpClient.h
#include <string>
//defines structs for socket handling
#include <netinet/in.h>
using namespace std;
typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct;
typedef struct hostent
HostInfoStruct;
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
772
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Telnet program examples
class TcpClient
{
public:
TcpClient();
~TcpClient();
void connectToServer( string &hostname, int port );
void disconnect( );
void transmit( string &txString );
void receive( string &rxString );
string getCurrentHostName( ) const;
int getCurrentPort( ) const;
private:
string
currentHostName;
int
currentPort;
int
currentSocketDescr;
SockAddrStruct serverAddress;
HostInfoStruct * currentHostInfo;
bool
clientIsConnected;
int
receiveBufferSize;
};
TcpClient.cpp
#include <string>
//defines structs for socket handling
#include <netinet/in.h>
using namespace std;
typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct;
typedef struct hostent
HostInfoStruct;
class TcpClient
{
public:
TcpClient();
~TcpClient();
void connectToServer( string &hostname, int port );
void disconnect( );
void transmit( string &txString );
void receive( string &rxString );
string getCurrentHostName( ) const;
int getCurrentPort( ) const;
private:
string
currentHostName;
int
currentPort;
int
currentSocketDescr;
SockAddrStruct serverAddress;
HostInfoStruct * currentHostInfo;
bool
clientIsConnected;
int
receiveBufferSize;
};
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
773
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Telnet program examples
#include <netdb.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <unistd.h> #include "TcpClient.h" TcpClient::TcpClient() : currentHostName( "" ) , currentPort( 0 ) , currentSocketDescr( 0 ) , serverAddress ( ) , currentHostInfo( NULL ) , clientIsConnected( false ) , receiveBufferSize( 1024 ) { } TcpClient::~TcpClient() {
currentHostInfo = NULL; }
void TcpClient::connectToServer( string &hostname, int port )
{
currentHostInfo = gethostbyname( hostname.c_str( ) );
if( currentHostInfo == NULL )
{
currentHostName = "";
currentPort
= 0;
currentHostInfo = NULL;
clientIsConnected = false;
printf("error connecting host\n" );
}
currentHostName = hostname;
currentPort
= port;
currentSocketDescr = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
if( currentSocketDescr == 0 )
{
currentHostName = "";
currentPort
= 0;
currentHostInfo = NULL;
clientIsConnected = false;
printf("can't create socket\n" );
}
serverAddress.sin_family = currentHostInfo->h_addrtype;
serverAddress.sin_port = htons( currentPort );
memcpy( (char *) &serverAddress.sin_addr.s_addr,
currentHostInfo->h_addr_list[0], currentHostInfo->h_length );
if( connect( currentSocketDescr, ( struct sockaddr *) &serverAddress,
sizeof( serverAddress ) ) < 0 )
{
throw string("can't connect server\n" );
}
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
774
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Telnet program examples
clientIsConnected = true;
}
void TcpClient::disconnect( )
{
if( clientIsConnected )
{
close( currentSocketDescr );
}
currentSocketDescr = 0;
currentHostName = "";
currentPort
= 0;
currentHostInfo = NULL;
clientIsConnected = false;
}
void TcpClient::transmit( string &txString )
{
if( !clientIsConnected )
{
throw string("connection must be established before any data can be sent\n");
}
char * transmitBuffer = new char[txString.length() +1];
memcpy( transmitBuffer, txString.c_str(), txString.length() );
transmitBuffer[txString.length()] = '\n'; //newline is needed!
if( send( currentSocketDescr, transmitBuffer, txString.length() + 1, 0 ) < 0 )
{
throw string("can't transmit data\n");
}
delete [] transmitBuffer;
}
void TcpClient::receive( string &rxString )
{
if( !clientIsConnected )
{
throw string("connection must be established before any data can be received\n");
}
char * receiveBuffer = new char[receiveBufferSize];
memset( receiveBuffer, 0, receiveBufferSize );
bool receiving = true;
while( receiving )
{
int receivedByteCount = recv( currentSocketDescr,
receiveBuffer, receiveBufferSize, 0 );
if( receivedByteCount < 0 )
{
throw string("error while receiving data\n");
}
rxString += string( receiveBuffer );
receiving = ( receivedByteCount == receiveBufferSize );
}
delete [] receiveBuffer;
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
775
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Telnet program examples
} string TcpClient::getCurrentHostName( ) const {
return currentHostName; } int TcpClient::getCurrentPort( ) const {
return currentPort; }
TelnetClient.cpp
#include <iostream>
#include "TcpClient.h"
void printUsage()
{
cout<<"usage: EthernetRawCommand <server-ip> [scpi-command]"<<endl;
}
int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
{
int errorCode
= 0; //no error
bool useSingleCommand = false;
string singleCommand = "";
string hostname
= "";
int port
= 5025;
string input
= "";
TcpClient client;
switch( argc )
{
case 3:
useSingleCommand = true;
singleCommand = argv[2];
case 2:
hostname
= argv[1];
break;
default:
printUsage();
return(-1);
}
try
{
client.connectToServer( hostname, port );
bool terminate = false;
while( !terminate )
{
char buffer[1024];
if( useSingleCommand )
{
input = singleCommand; //send string
}
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
776
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Extensions for User Files
else {
cin.getline( buffer, 1024 ); input = buffer; if( input == "end" ) {
terminate = true; } } if( !terminate) { client.transmit( input ); //send string int qPos = input.find( "?", 0 ); //receive string only when needed if( qPos > 0 ) {
string rcStr = ""; client.receive( rcStr ); cout << rcStr << endl; } } if( useSingleCommand ) { terminate = true; } } }catch( const string errorString ) { cout<<errorString<<endl; } client.disconnect( ); return errorCode; }
A.3 Extensions for User Files
The Table A-10 lists all available file extensions for user files. The currently available files on the instrument depend on the installed options.
Table A-10: List of the automatically assigned file extensions in the instrument
Function
List type
Contents
File suffix
Instrument State
Settings
Instrument settings
*.savrcltxt
User Menu
Settings
User-defined favorite settings
*.user_menu
License Key
License Key
*.xml
"User Correction" List
User-defined level correction values
*.uco
"List Mode"
List
User-defined frequency/level value pairs
*.lsw
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
777
R&S®SMA100B
Reference Information for Remote Control Extensions for User Files
Function
List type
Settings
"Pulse Train"
Settings
"NRP Settings"
Settings
SCPI command list List
SCPI command script
R&S Support Info Archive
Support File
Tutorials
Tutorial files
Contents Response file Pulse train data R&S NRP Settings Export file containing list of SCPIs SCPI script file formats: Plain SCPI, MATLAB, NICVI, Python3 Automatically collected support information
Lists containing SCPIs and explanations
File suffix *.txt *.pulstrn *.nrp, *.rsu *.iec *.txt , *.m, *.c, *.py *.tar.gz
*.tut
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
778
R&S®SMA100B
Hardware Interfaces GPIB-Bus Interface
B Hardware Interfaces
This section covers hardware-related topics, like pin assignment of the IEC 625/IEEE 488 interface. The remote control interfaces are described in details in Chapter 13, "Network Operation and Remote Control", on page 371. All other interfaces are described in Chapter 3.2, "Instrument Tour", on page 36. For specifications, refer to the data sheet.
B.1 GPIB-Bus Interface
Option: R&S SMAB-B86. Pin assignment
Figure B-1: Pin assignment of GPIB-bus (IEEE 488) interface
Bus lines
Data bus with 8 lines D0 to D7: The transmission is bit-parallel and byte-serial in the ASCII/ISO code. D0 is the least significant bit, D7 the most significant bit.
Control bus with five lines: IFC (Interface Clear): active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting. ATN (Attention): active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages, inactive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
779
R&S®SMA100B
Hardware Interfaces GPIB-Bus Interface
SRQ (Service Request): active LOW enables the connected device to send a service request to the controller. REN (Remote Enable): active LOW permits switchover to remote control. EOI (End or Identify): has two functions in connection with ATN:
ATN=HIGH active LOW marks the end of data transmission.
ATN=LOW active LOW triggers a parallel poll.
Handshake bus with three lines: DAV (Data Valid): active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus. NRFD (Not Ready For Data): active LOW signals that one of the connected devices is not ready for data transfer. NDAC (Not Data Accepted): active LOW signals that the instrument connected is accepting the data on the data bus.
Interface functions
Instruments which can be controlled via GPIB-bus interface can be equipped with different interface functions. Table B-1 lists the interface functions for the R&S SMA100B.
Table B-1: GPIB-bus interface functions
Control character
Interface function
SH1
Handshake source function (source handshake), full capability
AH1
Handshake sink function (acceptor handshake), full capability
L4
Listener function, full capability, de-addressed by MTA.
T6
Talker function, full capability, ability to respond to serial poll, deaddressed
by MLA
SR1
Service request function (Service Request), full capability
PP1
Parallel poll function, full capability
RL1
Remote/Local switch over function, full capability
DC1
Reset function (Device Clear), full capability
DT1
Trigger function (Device Trigger), full capability
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
780
R&S®SMA100B
Morse Code Settings
C Morse Code Settings
The COM/ID tone is sent according to the selected code (see Table C-1). The length of the Morse code can be varied. For selected standard time scheme, the selected dot length determines the setting of all other length parameters of the Morse code (dash length, symbol space and letter space) . For selected user time scheme, all length parameters of the code can be set independently. If no coding is entered, the COM/ID tone is sent uncoded (key down).
The following values are default values: A dot (.) has a tone duration of 100 ms A dash (-) has a tone duration of 300ms The time between two tones is 100ms The time between two letters is 300ms
After each word, a word space is entered. The word repetition rate is 7 words per minute. Since the word length can vary between 900 ms and 4500 ms, the word space between the words varies accordingly.
Example:
ID code = MUC
The word length = (300+100+300)+300+(100+100+100+100+300)+300+(300+100+100+100+300+100+1 00) = 3100 ms
Table C-1: Morse code Letter A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Morse code . - . . . - . - . - . . . . . - . - - . . . . . . . . - - - . . - . . - -
Letter N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Morse code - . - - . - - . - - . . - . . . . . . . . . . - - . . - . - - - . .
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
781
R&S®SMA100B
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations
Symbols
1MA193: 1MA193_0e Application Note, "Aeronautical radio navigation measurement solutions"
A
Absolute file path: Complete file path
B
Base unit: This term describes a R&S SMA100B equipped with the option R&S SMAB-B103.
C
Clock: A mandatory internal or an external reference clock signal for generating the timing pulse in the instrument.
Complete file path: The complete file path specifies the root directory and all subdirectories that contain a file or folder. See also Chapter 14.5.2, "Accessing Files in the Default or in a Specified Directory", on page 443.
Computer name: An unambiguous indication of the instrument in a LAN that uses a DNS server. The default computer name follows the syntax SMAB-<serial number>, e.g. SMA100B-102030. Synonym: Hostname See Serial number.
D
daisy chain: A connection scheme in which instruments are connected together in sequence, i.e. an output of the first one is connected to an input of the second one, etc.
DHCP: Dynamic host configuration protocol
DNS: Domain name system server
E
e.g.: For example
External mass memory: External memory, connected to the instrument via USB connector (Type A female). It can hold stored files with user data. See also System drive and SD card
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
782
R&S®SMA100B
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations
F
File transfer: The transmission of files from or to the instrument by a remote client. The instrument supports the standard methods FTP and file sharing according to SAMBA/SMB.
FTP: File transfer protocol
Full file path: Complete file path
G
Glossary: List of the often used terms and abbreviations
GUI: Graphical user interface
H
HDD: Hard disk drive, see System drive
Hostname: Computer name
I
i.e.: That is
L
LF: Low frequency
LSB: Least significant bit
M
MIMO: Multiple input multiple output
MSB: Most significant bit
P
PC: Personal computer
Power: A term describing the signal level of the RF signal
product page: A designation of the R&S SMA100B product page http://www.rohdeschwarz.com/product/SMA100B.html
R
Remote access: Remote operation
Remote control: The operation of the R&S SMA100B by remote control commands or programs to perform automated tests.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
783
R&S®SMA100B
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations
The instrument is connected to a system controller via LAN/VXI-11, GPIB or USB using VISA. The instrument is controlled directly or supported by instrument drivers.
Remote device: External device controls the R&S SMA100B in remote operation mode, see Remote operation. Synonyms: External controller, client device
Remote operation: Allows you to operate the R&S SMA100B from a remote device via VNC. Both the R&S SMA100B and the remote device are connected in a LAN. Synonym: Remote access
Removable memory: General term describing mass memory that can be unmounted from the instrument. See also SD card
RF: Radio frequency
S
SAMBA/SMB: Server message protocol
SD card: Secure digital card is a type of removable memory storage, that can hold files with user data. Support of this memory type is optional and requires option R&S SMAB-B85. Throughout this description, the SD card is referred as a removable memory. See also System drive.
Serial number: Unique instrument identification, provided on the rear panel of the instrument and required to build the Computer name. The serial number are the last 6 digits in the string <stock no.>-<serial number>, e.g. SMA100B-102030
Smart device: A mobile, cordless device, such as a smartphone or tablet, capable of Internet browsing. Synonyms: Smartphone, tablet
System drive: The system drive is a built-in internal memory that holds the operating system, the firmware, and the stored user data. Throughout this description, the system drive is referred as an internal memory. See also SD card and Removable memory
T
Trigger: Internally generated or externally supplied signal which starts signal generation at a particular point in time
Trigger event: A trigger event is caused by the received trigger signal or executed manual trigger.
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
784
R&S®SMA100B
Glossary: List of the Often Used Terms and Abbreviations
U
UE: User equipment
USBTMC: (USB test & measurement class) A protocol built on top of USB for communication with USB devices. Using VISA library, it supports service request, triggers, and other specific operations, similar to GPIB.
User directory: Describes the default file storage location for user data. Depending on the installed options, the user directory is physically located on the System drive or on the Removable memory In the file system, user directory is always indicated as /var/user
V
VISA: Virtual instrument software architecture
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
785
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
List of Commands
:CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:MATH<ch>:STATe...................................................................... 479 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:MATH<ch>:SUBTract.................................................................480 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:MATH<ch>:STATe..............................................................................480 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:MATH<ch>:SUBTract........................................................................ 480 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:AVERage?.......................................................................... 481 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:FEED.................................................................................. 481 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:MAXimum?......................................................................... 481 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STARt................................................................................. 482 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STATe................................................................................. 482 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:GATE<ch>:STOP..................................................................................482 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:MATH<ch>:STATe.................................................................................483 :CALCulate[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:MATH<ch>:SUBTract............................................................................483 :CALibration:ALL[:MEASure]?....................................................................................................................... 452 :CALibration:DATA:FACTory:DATE?.............................................................................................................. 454 :CALibration<hw>:ALL:DATE?.......................................................................................................................452 :CALibration<hw>:ALL:INFormation?............................................................................................................ 453 :CALibration<hw>:ALL:TEMP?...................................................................................................................... 453 :CALibration<hw>:ALL:TIME?....................................................................................................................... 453 :CALibration<hw>:CONTinueonerror............................................................................................................. 454 :CSYNthesis:FREQuency.............................................................................................................................. 456 :CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP....................................................................................................................459 :CSYNthesis:FREQuency:STEP:MODE........................................................................................................458 :CSYNthesis:OFFSet..................................................................................................................................... 457 :CSYNthesis:OFFSet:STATe..........................................................................................................................457 :CSYNthesis:OTYPe......................................................................................................................................456 :CSYNthesis:PHASe......................................................................................................................................457 :CSYNthesis:PHASe:REFerence...................................................................................................................458 :CSYNthesis:POWer......................................................................................................................................456 :CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP:MODE................................................................................................................458 :CSYNthesis:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]......................................................................................................458 :CSYNthesis:STATe....................................................................................................................................... 455 :CSYNthesis:VOLTage...................................................................................................................................457 :DEVice:PRESet............................................................................................................................................ 440 :DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe?............................................................................................................................ 461 :DIAGnostic:INFO:POCount?........................................................................................................................ 461 :DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo:CATalog?..............................................................................................................460 :DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo?............................................................................................................................ 460 :DIAGnostic<hw>:POINt:CATalog?................................................................................................................462 :DIAGnostic<hw>[:MEASure]:POINt?............................................................................................................462 :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude................................................................................................................... 465 :DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency................................................................................................................. 465 :DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL]............................................................................................................................ 465 :DISPlay:BRIGhtness.....................................................................................................................................464 :DISPlay:BUTTon:BRIGhtness.......................................................................................................................464 :DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe............................................................................................................................... 466 :DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe:ALL........................................................................................................................467 :DISPlay:DIALog:ID?..................................................................................................................................... 465
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
786
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
:DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN.................................................................................................................................466 :DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff.............................................................................................................................. 463 :DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe]................................................................................................................................464 :DISPlay:UPDate........................................................................................................................................... 464 :DISPlay[:WINDow][:POWer]:SWEep:BACKground:COLor.......................................................................... 483 :DISPlay[:WINDow][:POWer]:SWEep:GRID:STATe.......................................................................................484 :FORMat:BORDer..........................................................................................................................................467 :FORMat:SREGister...................................................................................................................................... 468 :FORMat[:DATA]............................................................................................................................................ 468 :HCOPy:DATA?..............................................................................................................................................470 :HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.......................................................................................................................... 470 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]....................................................................................................................................470 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory........................................................................................................471 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar.............................................................................................472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE?.............................................................................................................. 472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe..............................................................................................................472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO?.......................................................................................................................471 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe........................................................................................... 472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe..................................................................................... 472 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer?............................................................................................. 473 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix................................................................................................. 473 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe......................................................................................473 :HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe........................................................................................ 472 :HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat............................................................................................................................... 470 :HCOPy:REGion............................................................................................................................................ 470 :HCOPy[:EXECute]........................................................................................................................................ 471 :INITiate<hw>[:POWer]:CONTinuous............................................................................................................ 484 :INITiate<hw>[:POWer]:CONTinuous............................................................................................................ 533 :KBOard:LAYout............................................................................................................................................. 474 :MEMory:HFRee?.......................................................................................................................................... 451 :MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth?....................................................................................................................... 447 :MMEMory:CATalog?..................................................................................................................................... 446 :MMEMory:CDIRectory.................................................................................................................................. 447 :MMEMory:COPY.......................................................................................................................................... 447 :MMEMory:DATA........................................................................................................................................... 448 :MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth?.....................................................................................................................449 :MMEMory:DCATalog?...................................................................................................................................449 :MMEMory:DELete.........................................................................................................................................449 :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe............................................................................................................................... 449 :MMEMory:MDIRectory..................................................................................................................................450 :MMEMory:MOVE.......................................................................................................................................... 450 :MMEMory:MSIS............................................................................................................................................450 :MMEMory:RDIRectory.................................................................................................................................. 451 :MMEMory:STORe:STATe............................................................................................................................. 451 :OUTPut:ALL[:STATe].................................................................................................................................... 474 :OUTPut:FPRoportional:SCALe.....................................................................................................................476 :OUTPut:USER:MARKer............................................................................................................................... 477 :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer?....................................................................................................... 477 :OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer?........................................................................................................ 477 :OUTPut<hw>:AMODe.................................................................................................................................. 475
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
787
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
:OUTPut<hw>:FILTer:MODE......................................................................................................................... 476 :OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance?........................................................................................................................... 476 :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:CLEar.................................................................................................................477 :OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped?...........................................................................................................478 :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]................................................................................................................................... 475 :OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON.......................................................................................................................... 475 :READ<ch>[:POWer]?................................................................................................................................... 534 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:ABORt.................................................................................................................. 495 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:COPY................................................................. 495 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:POINts?..............................................................495 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:XVALues.............................................................495 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:REFerence:DATA:YVALues.............................................................496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:RMODe............................................................................................496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:SPACing[:MODE]............................................................................ 496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STARt.............................................................................................. 496 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STEPs............................................................................................. 497 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:STOP............................................................................................... 497 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:TIMing[:MODE]................................................................................ 497 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:AUTO................................................................................. 498 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:AUTO:RESet...................................................................... 498 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:MAXimum........................................................................... 498 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency:YSCale:MINimum............................................................................ 499 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DATA?..................................................................................................... 499 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice.................................................................................................... 500 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage................................................................................. 501 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:DPOint............................................................ 501 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:HEADer........................................................... 501 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV:ORIentation..................................................... 502 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage:CSV[:COLumn]:SEParator...................................... 502 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:DEVice:SIZE........................................................................................... 502 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]........................................................................................... 503 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory............................................................... 503 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar.................................................... 503 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE?..................................................................... 504 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe..................................................................... 504 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe.................................................. 505 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY?........................................................... 504 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe.............................................505 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh?...................................................... 505 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer?.....................................................506 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix........................................................ 506 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe............................................. 506 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe............................................... 507 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR?.........................................................506 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:HCOPy[:EXECute]............................................................................................... 507 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:INITiate.................................................................................................................507 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:MODE.................................................................................................................. 507 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:COPY......................................................................... 508 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:POINts?......................................................................508 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:XVALues.................................................................... 508
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
788
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
:SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:REFerence:DATA:YVALues.................................................................... 508 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:RMODe................................................................................................... 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing[:MODE].................................................................................... 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STARt...................................................................................................... 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STEPs..................................................................................................... 509 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:STOP.......................................................................................................510 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:TIMing[:MODE]........................................................................................510 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:AUTO......................................................................................... 510 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:AUTO:RESet.............................................................................. 511 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:MAXimum................................................................................... 511 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer:YSCale:MINimum.................................................................................... 512 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:RMODe................................................................................................................ 512 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:AVERage[:COUNt]..................................................................................... 512 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:COPY............................................................................ 513 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:POINts?.........................................................................513 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:XVALues........................................................................513 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:REFerence:DATA:YVALues........................................................................513 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:RMODe.......................................................................................................514 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:SPACing[:MODE]....................................................................................... 514 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STARt......................................................................................................... 514 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STEPs........................................................................................................ 514 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:STOP.......................................................................................................... 515 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:TEVents...................................................................................................... 515 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:AUTO............................................................................................ 515 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:AUTO:RESet................................................................................. 516 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:MAXimum...................................................................................... 516 :SENSe[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME:YSCale:MINimum....................................................................................... 517 :SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer].......................................................................................................................... 534 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:DEFault:STATe......................................................................................... 535 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:APERture:TIMe......................................................................................................... 535 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:LIST?...................................................................................536 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:SELect.................................................................................535 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe.................................................................................. 536 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority................................................................................... 536 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe......................................................................................536 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO?..............................................................................................537 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER]..............................................................................................537 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio.......................................................................................................... 538 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe.............................................................................................. 538 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe........................................................................................................... 538 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE.............................................................................................................. 539 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency...............................................................................................................539 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:LOGGing:STATe........................................................................................................ 540 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet......................................................................................................................540 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe...........................................................................................................540 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber?.................................................................................................................540 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce.................................................................................................................... 541 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice]?..................................................................................................... 541 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion?................................................................................................................ 541 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:OFFSet.................................................................... 486
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
789
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
:SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe.........................................................487 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge:STARt....................................................... 487 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge:STOP........................................................ 487 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FREQuency[:SENSor]:SRANge[:STATe]..................................................... 488 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:OFFSet............................................................................ 488 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe.................................................................489 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:SFRequency....................................................................489 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:POWer[:SENSor]:SFRequency:STATe........................................................ 489 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet............................................................................... 490 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:OFFSet:STATe....................................................................490 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:STATe..................................................................... 490 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:BASE...................................................491 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:HREFerence...........................491 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:LREFerence........................... 491 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:REFerence............................. 492 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:SFRequency.......................................................................492 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:SFRequency:STATe............................................................492 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:AUTO................................................................... 493 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:DTIMe.................................................................. 493 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:HYSTeresis.......................................................... 493 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:LEVel................................................................... 494 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:SLOPe................................................................. 494 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSor]:TRIGger:SOURce...............................................................494 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE?....................................................................................................................... 542 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO........................................................................................................................ 494 :SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO........................................................................................................................ 542 :SLISt:CLEar:LAN.......................................................................................................................................... 532 :SLISt:CLEar:USB..........................................................................................................................................532 :SLISt:CLEar[:ALL].........................................................................................................................................532 :SLISt:ELEMent<ch>:MAPPing..................................................................................................................... 533 :SLISt:SCAN:LSENsor...................................................................................................................................531 :SLISt:SCAN:USENsor.................................................................................................................................. 532 :SLISt:SCAN[:STATe]..................................................................................................................................... 531 :SLISt:SENSor:MAP...................................................................................................................................... 533 :SLISt[:LIST]?.................................................................................................................................................531 :SOURce<hw>:PRESet................................................................................................................................. 440 :STATus:OPERation:CONDition?.................................................................................................................. 715 :STATus:OPERation:ENABle......................................................................................................................... 715 :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition..................................................................................................................716 :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition.................................................................................................................. 716 :STATus:OPERation[:EVENt].........................................................................................................................716 :STATus:PRESet............................................................................................................................................716 :STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition................................................................................................................717 :STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle.................................................................................................................... 717 :STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition............................................................................................................. 717 :STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition............................................................................................................. 718 :STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt].................................................................................................................... 717 :STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?.............................................................................................................................. 718 :SWEep:TYPE............................................................................................................................................... 679 :SYSTem:BIOS:VERSion?.............................................................................................................................712
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
790
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator................................................................................................ 699 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource?................................................................................................... 700 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess..........................................................................................700 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:HISLip:RESource?.................................................................................................700 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress............................................................................................. 700 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE..................................................................................701 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:MACaddress..........................................................................................701 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource?............................................................................................ 701 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESTart................................................................................................. 702 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:STATus?................................................................................................ 702 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:DOMain............................................................................... 702 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:HOSTname......................................................................... 702 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:WORKgroup........................................................................703 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:DNS................................................................................... 703 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:GATeway........................................................................... 703 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:SUBNet:MASK.................................................................. 703 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD......................................................................................................... 703 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity........................................................................................................ 704 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RESource?.................................................................................................704 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs..........................................................................................................704 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource?.............................................................................................. 704 :SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:RESource?.................................................................................................... 705 :SYSTem:DATE..............................................................................................................................................710 :SYSTem:DFPR?........................................................................................................................................... 713 :SYSTem:DLOCk........................................................................................................................................... 696 :SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?...................................................................................................................................693 :SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?....................................................................................................................... 693 :SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?.................................................................................................................. 694 :SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt?..............................................................................................................................694 :SYSTem:ERRor:GNEXt?.............................................................................................................................. 695 :SYSTem:ERRor:HISTory:CLEar................................................................................................................... 695 :SYSTem:ERRor:STATic?.............................................................................................................................. 695 :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?..............................................................................................................................694 :SYSTem:FILes:TEMPorary:DELete..............................................................................................................714 :SYSTem:FPReset......................................................................................................................................... 441 :SYSTem:HELP:EXPort................................................................................................................................. 705 :SYSTem:IDENtification................................................................................................................................. 705 :SYSTem:IDENtification:PRESet................................................................................................................... 706 :SYSTem:INFormation:SCPI..........................................................................................................................707 :SYSTem:IRESponse.....................................................................................................................................706 :SYSTem:KLOCk........................................................................................................................................... 696 :SYSTem:LANGuage..................................................................................................................................... 707 :SYSTem:LOCK:OWNer?.............................................................................................................................. 697 :SYSTem:LOCK:RELease:ALL...................................................................................................................... 697 :SYSTem:LOCK:REQuest[:EXCLusive]?.......................................................................................................697 :SYSTem:MMEMory:PATH:USER?............................................................................................................... 713 :SYSTem:NINFormation?...............................................................................................................................696 :SYSTem:NTP:HOSTname............................................................................................................................ 711 :SYSTem:NTP:STATe.....................................................................................................................................711 :SYSTem:ORESponse................................................................................................................................... 706
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
791
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
:SYSTem:OSYStem?..................................................................................................................................... 713 :SYSTem:PRESet.......................................................................................................................................... 441 :SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe]................................................................................................................... 698 :SYSTem:RCL................................................................................................................................................698 :SYSTem:REBoot...........................................................................................................................................714 :SYSTem:RESTart..........................................................................................................................................714 :SYSTem:SAV................................................................................................................................................ 698 :SYSTem:SECurity:SANitize[:STATe].............................................................................................................707 :SYSTem:SECurity:SUPolicy......................................................................................................................... 707 :SYSTem:SECurity:VOLMode[:STATe].......................................................................................................... 699 :SYSTem:SHUTdown.....................................................................................................................................714 :SYSTem:SPECification:IDENtification:CATalog?..........................................................................................709 :SYSTem:SPECification:PARameter?............................................................................................................709 :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion................................................................................................................. 708 :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:CATalog?................................................................................................. 709 :SYSTem:SPECification:VERSion:FACTory?.................................................................................................710 :SYSTem:SPECification?............................................................................................................................... 707 :SYSTem:SRData?........................................................................................................................................ 710 :SYSTem:STARtup:COMPlete?..................................................................................................................... 710 :SYSTem:TIME...............................................................................................................................................711 :SYSTem:TIME:ZONE................................................................................................................................... 712 :SYSTem:TIME:ZONE:CATalog?................................................................................................................... 712 :SYSTem:ULOCk........................................................................................................................................... 696 :SYSTem:UPTime?........................................................................................................................................ 712 :SYSTem:VERSion?...................................................................................................................................... 713 :SYSTem:WAIT.............................................................................................................................................. 714 :TEST<hw>:ALL:RESult?.............................................................................................................................. 719 :TEST<hw>:ALL:STARt................................................................................................................................. 719 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:FULLscreen:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]...................................525 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:GATE:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe].............................................526 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:MARKer:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe].........................................526 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]...........................................526 :TRACe[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:STANdard:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]......................................527 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:COLor...........................................................................................................518 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:COPY........................................................................................................... 519 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:POINts?..............................................................................................519 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:XVALues?.......................................................................................... 519 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:YSValue?........................................................................................... 520 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:DATA:YVALues?.......................................................................................... 520 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:FEED............................................................................................................520 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:AVERage:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe].................. 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:AVERage?...............................................................521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:HREFerence:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe].............522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:HREFerence?......................................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:LREFerence:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]............. 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:LREFerence?.......................................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MAXimum:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]................. 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MAXimum?............................................................. 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MINimum:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe].................. 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:MINimum?...............................................................521
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
792
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
:TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:BASE:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]........... 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:BASE?........................................................ 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:TOP:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]..............522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:PULSe:TOP?.......................................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:REFerence:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]............... 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:POWer:REFerence?............................................................ 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:ALL:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]........................... 523 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DCYCle:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe].....................522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DCYCle?................................................................. 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DURation:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe].................. 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:DURation?...............................................................521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:PERiod:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]......................522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:PERiod?.................................................................. 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:SEParation:DISPlay:ANNotation[:STATe]................522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:SEParation?............................................................ 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:PULSe:STATe?.................................................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:DURation:DISPlay:
ANNotation[:STATe]................................................................................................................................. 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:DURation?........................................521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OCCurrence:DISPlay:
ANNotation[:STATe]................................................................................................................................. 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OCCurrence?................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OVERshoot:DISPlay:
ANNotation[:STATe]................................................................................................................................. 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:NEGative:OVERshoot?.................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:DURation:DISPlay:
ANNotation[:STATe]................................................................................................................................. 522 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:DURation?......................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OCCurrence:DISPlay:
ANNotation[:STATe]................................................................................................................................. 523 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OCCurrence?.................................... 521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OVERshoot:DISPlay:
ANNotation[:STATe]................................................................................................................................. 523 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:MEASurement:TRANsition:POSitive:OVERshoot?......................................521 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:BASE?.......................................................................... 523 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:HREFerence.................................................... 524 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:LREFerence..................................................... 524 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:PULSe:THReshold:POWer:REFerence....................................................... 524 :TRACe<ch>[:POWer]:SWEep:STATe........................................................................................................... 525 :TRIGger<hw>:FPSWeep:SOURce...............................................................................................................721 :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce................................................................................................................. 720 :TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:IMMediate].............................................................................................................722 :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep............................................................................................................................. 722 :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:IMMediate........................................................................................................... 722 :TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce..............................................................................................................720 :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce................................................................................................................. 720 :TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep[:IMMediate]............................................................................................................ 722 :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep]:SOURce................................................................................................................. 720 :TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate]............................................................................................................ 722 :UNIT:ANGLe................................................................................................................................................. 723
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
793
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
:UNIT:POWer................................................................................................................................................. 723 [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog?...................................................................................................... 621 [:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete......................................................................................................... 622 [:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe................................................................................................................ 632 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:OFFSet........................................................................................................................ 638 [:SOURce]:LFOutput:VOLTage...................................................................................................................... 638 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:BANDwidth?........................................................................................................ 635 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:FREQuency......................................................................................................... 635 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:INTernal:VOLTage................................................................................................637 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:SOURce...............................................................................................................638 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:SOURce:PATH.................................................................................................... 638 [:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>[:STATe]................................................................................................................ 637 [:SOURce]:PM<ch>[:DEViation].................................................................................................................... 563 [:SOURce]:POWer:WIGNore......................................................................................................................... 670 [:SOURce]:PULM[:INTernal][:TRAin]:TRIGger:IMMediate.............................................................................565 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency..............................................................................................673 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency:VARiable..............................................................................673 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:MLRange?................................................................................................674 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:NSBandwidth?......................................................................................... 674 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf[:STATe]......................................................................................... 673 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth............................................................................................. 673 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing:SLOPe..........................................................................................672 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:INTernal:TUNing[:STATe]......................................................................................... 672 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:ALTernate:FREQuency:MODE.................................................................. 675 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:OUTPut:FREQuency:MODE................................................................................... 674 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:PRESet.................................................................................................................... 672 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce...................................................................................................................672 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue......................................................................................... 675 [:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe]....................................................................................... 676 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:CODE............................................................................................................. 582 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DASH..............................................................................................................582 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DEPTh............................................................................................................ 583 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:DOT................................................................................................................ 583 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:FREQuency.................................................................................................... 583 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:LETTer............................................................................................................ 583 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:PERiod........................................................................................................... 584 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:SYMBol...........................................................................................................584 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid:TSCHema.......................................................................................................584 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:COMid[:STATe]........................................................................................................... 585 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:PRESet....................................................................................................................... 579 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:CATalog........................................................................................................580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:DELete......................................................................................................... 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:LOAD........................................................................................................... 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:SETTing:STORe......................................................................................................... 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ADF:STATe......................................................................................................................... 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:DEPTh:SUM................................................................................................................. 548 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:DEViation:MODE..........................................................................................................549 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:MODE...........................................................................................................................548 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:RATio............................................................................................................................ 549 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM:TYPE............................................................................................................................ 550
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
794
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:DEPTh:EXPonential............................................................................................. 548 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:DEPTh:LINear...................................................................................................... 547 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SENSitivity:EXPonential....................................................................................... 549 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SENSitivity[:LINear].............................................................................................. 550 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:SOURce............................................................................................................... 547 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>:STATe................................................................................................................... 546 [:SOURce<hw>]:AM<ch>[:DEPTh]................................................................................................................ 547 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:BANDwidth..............................................................................................................552 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:COMPression:RATio?............................................................................................. 552 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:DIRection................................................................................................................ 552 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:PULSe:PERiod........................................................................................................552 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:PULSe:WIDTh.........................................................................................................553 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:STATe...................................................................................................................... 553 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:TRIGger:IMMediate.................................................................................................553 [:SOURce<hw>]:CHIRp:TRIGger:MODE.......................................................................................................553 [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:FREQuency:STARt.......................................................................................... 685 [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:FREQuency:STOP........................................................................................... 685 [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:POWer:STARt.................................................................................................. 685 [:SOURce<hw>]:COMBined:POWer:STOP................................................................................................... 686 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency............................................................................... 619 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency:POINts?................................................................ 620 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer.......................................................................................619 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:POINts?........................................................................ 620 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe............................................... 620 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe............................................... 621 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect]...............................................................................................620 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?........................................................................622 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension...................................................................... 622 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect............................................................................623 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn....................................................... 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal....................................................... 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute................................................................................... 623 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE....................................................................................... 624 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect...................................................................................... 624 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:VALue?.......................................................................................................... 620 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:ZERoing:STATe............................................................................................. 621 [:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection[:STATe].......................................................................................................... 621 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:DEViation:MODE.......................................................................................................... 557 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:DEViation:SUM.............................................................................................................557 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:MODE........................................................................................................................... 558 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:RATio............................................................................................................................ 558 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM:SENSitivity?.................................................................................................................. 558 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:SOURce................................................................................................................556 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>:STATe................................................................................................................... 556 [:SOURce<hw>]:FM<ch>[:DEViation]............................................................................................................556 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer...........................................................................................................629 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual...........................................................................................................627 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE.............................................................................................................625 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MULTiplier...................................................................................................... 628 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:OFFSet...........................................................................................................628
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
795
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:PLL:MODE..................................................................................................... 631 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN..............................................................................................................629 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt............................................................................................................. 629 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE.................................................................................................. 630 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]........................................................................................ 630 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP..............................................................................................................630 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed].....................................................................................................626 [:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|FIXed]:RCL.............................................................................................627 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:GS|GSLope:PRESet.................................................................................................... 592 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:CODE.............................................................................................. 593 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DASH.............................................................................................. 593 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DEPTh.............................................................................................594 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DOT.................................................................................................594 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:FREQuency.....................................................................................594 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:LETTer.............................................................................................595 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:PERiod............................................................................................ 595 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:SYMBol........................................................................................... 595 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:TSCHema........................................................................................595 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid[:STATe]............................................................................................ 596 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:COUPling........................................................................................... 596 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:CURRent............................................................................................ 596 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:DIRection............................................................................................597 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:LOGarithmic....................................................................................... 597 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:PCT.................................................................................................... 598 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:POLarity............................................................................................. 598 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:STEP.................................................................................................. 598 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM[:DEPTh]..............................................................................................599 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency................................................................................................. 599 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:MODE..................................................................................... 599 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe]............................................................. 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe]............................................................. 600 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:ICAO:CHANnel............................................................................................600 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:LLOBe[:FREQuency]...................................................................................600 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:MODE..........................................................................................................601 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:PHASe.........................................................................................................601 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:PRESet........................................................................................................601 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:RLOBe[:FREQuency].................................................................................. 602 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:SDM.............................................................................................................602 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:LOCalizer:SOURce...................................................................................................... 602 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:PRESet.........................................................................................................................580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:CATalog?....................................................................................................... 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:DELete...........................................................................................................580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:LOAD............................................................................................................. 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:SETTing:STORe...........................................................................................................581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:STATe........................................................................................................................... 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS:TYPE............................................................................................................................ 586 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:COUPling...................................................................................... 587 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:CURRent.......................................................................................587 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:DIRection...................................................................................... 587 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:LOGarithmic..................................................................................588
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
796
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:PCT...............................................................................................588 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:POLarity........................................................................................ 588 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:STEP.............................................................................................589 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM[:DEPTh]........................................................................................ 589 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency............................................................................................589 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency:MODE................................................................................590 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe]........................................................581 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:FREQuency:SYNChronize[:STATe]........................................................590 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ICAO:CHANnel...................................................................................... 590 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:LLOBe[:FREQuency]............................................................................. 591 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:MODE.................................................................................................... 591 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:PHASe................................................................................................... 591 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SDM....................................................................................................... 592 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SOURce................................................................................................. 592 [:SOURce<hw>]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ULOBe[:FREQuency].............................................................................593 [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:COUPling<ch>............................................................................................631 [:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance<ch>..........................................................................................632 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual...........................................................................................636 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE.............................................................................................636 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt............................................................................................. 637 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP..............................................................................................637 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl............................................................................. 642 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute......................................................................... 642 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE............................................................................. 642 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts.............................................................................643 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace.........................................................................643 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RUNNing?....................................................................... 643 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe............................................................................ 644 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing..........................................................................644 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic..........................................................644 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear]................................................................. 645 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:PERiod?......................................................................................................635 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe........................................................................................................ 639 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:DCYCle..............................................................................639 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:PERiod...............................................................................639 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:PULSe:WIDTh................................................................................640 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:FALL.............................................................................. 640 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:HIGH..............................................................................640 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:PERiod...........................................................................640 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRAPeze:RISE.............................................................................. 641 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:PERiod........................................................................... 641 [:SOURce<hw>]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe:TRIangle:RISE............................................................................... 641 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:CATalog?.................................................................................................................... 653 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete........................................................................................................................653 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL................................................................................................................ 654 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?.....................................................................................655 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension................................................................................... 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect.........................................................................................656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn.................................................................... 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal.................................................................... 656
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
797
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute................................................................................................ 656 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE.................................................................................................... 657 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect................................................................................................... 657 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl.........................................................................................................................648 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST................................................................................................................ 649 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:LIST:POINts?..................................................................................................649 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl:MODE.............................................................................................................648 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREE?........................................................................................................................ 654 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency................................................................................................................ 649 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?..................................................................................................650 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex..........................................................................................................................650 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STARt.............................................................................................................. 650 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STOP............................................................................................................... 650 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE......................................................................................................................... 651 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer........................................................................................................................ 651 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer:POINts?......................................................................................................... 651 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RESet......................................................................................................................... 654 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RUNNing?...................................................................................................................653 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect........................................................................................................................ 655 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:EXECute...................................................................................................... 652 [:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce.......................................................................................................652 [:SOURce<hw>]:MODulation[:ALL][:STATe].................................................................................................. 543 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BANDwidth|BWIDth................................................................................................ 658 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:BWIDth:STATe........................................................................................................ 658 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:DISTribution............................................................................................................ 659 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel:RELative?..................................................................................................... 659 [:SOURce<hw>]:NOISe:LEVel[:ABSolute]?...................................................................................................659 [:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut:POLarity........................................................................................... 660 [:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:OUTPut[:STATe]............................................................................................. 660 [:SOURce<hw>]:PGENerator:STATe............................................................................................................. 661 [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe................................................................................................................................ 661 [:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe:REFerence............................................................................................................. 661 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:DEViation:MODE..........................................................................................................562 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:DEViation:SUM.............................................................................................................562 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:MODE...........................................................................................................................561 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:RATio............................................................................................................................ 562 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM:SENSitivity?..................................................................................................................562 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:SOURce............................................................................................................... 561 [:SOURce<hw>]:PM<ch>:STATe................................................................................................................... 560 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:DSENsitivity................................................................................................... 663 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:MODE?.......................................................................................................... 662 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SONCe...........................................................................................................664 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe]........................................................................................................... 663 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:PATTenuator......................................................................................664 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:RFOFf:MODE....................................................................................664 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:EMF:STATe............................................................................................................ 664 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LBEHaviour............................................................................................................ 665 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude]...................................................................................................665 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual.................................................................................................................. 665 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MODE.................................................................................................................... 666
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
798
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:POWer................................................................................................................... 666 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:LOWer?.................................................................................................... 670 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:MAX?........................................................................................................ 670 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:MIN?......................................................................................................... 670 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:RANGe:UPPer?..................................................................................................... 670 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt..................................................................................................................... 667 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE.......................................................................................................... 667 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]................................................................................................ 668 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP..................................................................................................................... 667 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet.................................................................................. 668 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:RCL........................................................................................669 [:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]........................................................................... 669 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DELay...................................................................................................................... 566 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:DELay........................................................................................................ 566 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:STATe........................................................................................................ 567 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh........................................................................................................567 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:IMPedance...............................................................................................................568 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:MODE...................................................................................................................... 565 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:PERiod.....................................................................................................................565 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:POLarity................................................................................................................... 568 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:SOURce...................................................................................................................567 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:STATe.......................................................................................................................567 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:THReshold............................................................................................................... 568 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:CATalog?.......................................................................................................570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DELete.......................................................................................................... 570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?....................................................................... 573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension..................................................................... 572 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect...........................................................................573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn...................................................... 573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal.......................................................573 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute.................................................................................. 574 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE...................................................................................... 572 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect..................................................................................... 574 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime....................................................................................................... 570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime:POINts?........................................................................................ 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime.........................................................................................................570 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime:POINts?.......................................................................................... 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition..................................................................................................... 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition:POINts?...................................................................................... 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect.......................................................................................................... 571 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:MODE....................................................................................................... 565 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TTYPe......................................................................................................................567 [:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:WIDTh......................................................................................................................566 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:COUNt.................................................................................................686 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:DWELl................................................................................................. 686 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:EXECute............................................................................................. 686 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:MODE................................................................................................. 687 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:RETRace.............................................................................................687 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:COMBined:SHAPe................................................................................................ 688 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:GENeration............................................................................................................ 679
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
799
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:MARKer:OUTPut:POLarity.................................................................................... 688 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl.......................................................................................................679 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:EXECute................................................................................................... 683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODE....................................................................................................... 680 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:POINts...................................................................................................... 680 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RETRace.................................................................................................. 683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:RUNNing?.................................................................................................684 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SHAPe...................................................................................................... 683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing:MODE?...................................................................................... 680 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic]................................................................................. 681 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:RESet[:ALL]........................................................................................................... 688 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl............................................................................................. 681 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute......................................................................................... 683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer:ACTive.............................................................................. 689 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>:FREQuency.............................................................. 689 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MARKer<ch>:FSTate...................................................................... 689 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE............................................................................................. 681 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts.............................................................................................682 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RETRace.........................................................................................683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:RUNNing?....................................................................................... 684 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe............................................................................................ 683 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing..........................................................................................682 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic..........................................................................684 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear]................................................................................. 684 [:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:TIME................................................................................................688 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:CODE.............................................................................................................609 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DASH............................................................................................................. 610 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DEPTh........................................................................................................... 610 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:DOT............................................................................................................... 610 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:FREQuency................................................................................................... 610 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:LETTer............................................................................................................611 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:PERiod........................................................................................................... 611 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:SYMBol.......................................................................................................... 611 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid:TSCHema...................................................................................................... 612 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:COMid[:STATe]...........................................................................................................612 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:FREQuency................................................................................................................612 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:FREQuency:MODE....................................................................................................613 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:ICAO:CHANnel.......................................................................................................... 613 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:MODE........................................................................................................................ 614 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:PRESet...................................................................................................................... 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:REFerence[:DEViation].............................................................................................. 615 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:CATalog?..................................................................................................... 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:DELete........................................................................................................ 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:LOAD.......................................................................................................... 580 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SETTing:STORe........................................................................................................ 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SOURce..................................................................................................................... 608 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:STATe......................................................................................................................... 581 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh.................................................................................................... 615 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:SUBCarrier[:FREQuency].......................................................................................... 615 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:VAR:FREQuency....................................................................................................... 616
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
800
R&S®SMA100B
List of Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:VOR:VAR[:DEPTh]............................................................................................................. 616 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR[:BANGle].................................................................................................................... 608 [:SOURce<hw>]:VOR[:BANGle]:DIRection................................................................................................... 609 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:CODE............................................................................................ 603 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DASH.............................................................................................603 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DEPTh........................................................................................... 603 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:DOT............................................................................................... 604 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:FREQuency................................................................................... 604 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:LETTer........................................................................................... 604 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:PERiod...........................................................................................605 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:SYMBol..........................................................................................605 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid:TSCHema...................................................................................... 605 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:COMid[:STATe].......................................................................................... 606 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:FREQuency............................................................................................... 606 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:FREQuency:MODE....................................................................................606 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:MARKer:FREQuency.................................................................................606 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon:PRESet...................................................................................................... 607 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:DEPTh.......................................................................................607 [:SOURce<hw>][:ILS]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:PULSed..................................................................................... 607 *CLS...............................................................................................................................................................436 *ESE.............................................................................................................................................................. 436 *ESR?............................................................................................................................................................ 436 *IDN?............................................................................................................................................................. 436 *IST?.............................................................................................................................................................. 437 *OPC..............................................................................................................................................................437 *OPT?............................................................................................................................................................ 437 *PRE.............................................................................................................................................................. 437 *PSC.............................................................................................................................................................. 437 *RCL.............................................................................................................................................................. 438 *RST.............................................................................................................................................................. 438 *SAV...............................................................................................................................................................438 *SRE.............................................................................................................................................................. 439 *STB?.............................................................................................................................................................439 *TRG.............................................................................................................................................................. 439 *TST?.............................................................................................................................................................439 *WAI............................................................................................................................................................... 439 <subsystem>:FREQuency:SYNChronize:STATe........................................................................................... 581 <subsystem>:PRESet....................................................................................................................................579 <subsystem>:SETTing:CATalog.................................................................................................................... 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:DELete......................................................................................................................580 <subsystem>:SETTing:LOAD........................................................................................................................ 580 <subsystem>:SETTing:STORe......................................................................................................................581 <subsystem>:STATe...................................................................................................................................... 581
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
801
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Index
Symbols
*OPC ............................................................................... 761 *OPC? ............................................................................. 761 *RST ................................................................................ 772 *WAI ................................................................................ 761 /var/user directory ........................................................... 441 /var/volatile directory ....................................................... 441 >L ............................................................................... 413 &LLO ............................................................................... 413 &NREN ............................................................................ 413 9.91E37
Remote control ......................................................... 760 50 - Extern reference out of range or disconnected ........ 726 140 - This modulation forces other modulations off ........ 726 180 - Adjustment failed ................................................... 726 182 - Adjustment data missing ........................................ 726 183 - Adjustment data invalid .......................................... 726 200 - Cannot access hardware ....................................... 726 201 - Hardware revision out of date ................................ 726 202 - Cannot access the EEPROM ................................. 726 203 - Invalid EEPROM data ............................................ 726 204 - river initialization failed ........................................... 726 241 - No current list ......................................................... 726 242 - Unknown list type specified .................................... 726 460 - Cannot open the file ............................................... 726 461 - Cannot write file ..................................................... 727 462 - Cannot read file ...................................................... 727 463 - Filename missing ................................................... 727 464 - Invalid filename extension ...................................... 727 465 - File contains invalid data ........................................ 727
A
About Attenuator ..................................................................211 Internal adjustments ................................................. 739 Power-On/EMF ......................................................... 340 Reference oscillator .................................................. 288 Selftests .................................................................... 739 UCOR ............................................................... 216, 217
Accept Security settings ....................................................... 363
Active connections Remote access ......................................................... 389
Active elements ................................................................. 59 Add LAN sensor
NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 232 Add sensor
NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 232 Add USBTMC sensor
NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 232 Add, change, delete
User key action ......................................................... 347 Adjust
Display and keyboard ............................................... 338 Display settings ......................................................... 337 Keyboard settings ..................................................... 337 Adjustment frequency Reference oscillator .................................................. 294 Adjustments All .............................................................................. 745 Continue ................................................................... 746
Information ................................................................ 746 Last full adjustment ................................................... 745 Settings ..................................................................... 745 Advanced configuration LXI ............................................................................ 396 ALC Detector sensitivity .................................................... 216 Settings ..................................................................... 215 State ......................................................................... 216 All packages Secure update policy ................................................ 356 Alphanumeric parameters ................................................. 62 AM ..................................................................................... 80 Deviation mode ........................................................... 91 Overview ................................................................... 123 Ratio ........................................................................... 92 Subsystem ................................................................ 544 Total deviation ............................................................. 91 Amplitude ILS glide slope .......................................................... 147 ILS localizer .............................................................. 153 Amplitude modulation ........................................................ 89 Depth .......................................................................... 91 Deviation mode ........................................................... 91 Mode ........................................................................... 90 Ratio ........................................................................... 92 Sensitivity .................................................................... 91 Subsystem ................................................................ 544 Type ............................................................................ 90 Analog modulation Options ....................................................................... 80 Overview ................................................................... 121 Signal source .............................................................. 80 Annotation Disable amplitude display ......................................... 359 Disable frequency display ......................................... 359 Disable level ............................................................. 359 Aperture time Power sensors .......................................................... 239 Application cards ............................................................... 22 Application notes ............................................................... 22 ATN ................................................................................. 779 Attention .......................................................................... 779 Attenuator About ......................................................................... 211 RF signal ................................................................... 211 Settings ..................................................................... 212 Attenuator settings Level range ............................................................... 213 Mode ......................................................................... 213 RF OFF mode ........................................................... 213 Step Attenuator below 20 GHz ................................. 213 Auto once Power sensors .......................................................... 239 Power viewer ............................................................ 239 Automatic level control Detector sensitivity .................................................... 216 Readjust internal switch position ................................ 78 Settings ..................................................................... 215 State ......................................................................... 216 Automation ..................................................................... 371 Autonegotiation Failed ........................................................................ 729
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
802
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Avahi LAN services ............................................................. 362
Average Power analysis .......................................................... 252
Average level Power viewer ............................................................ 236
Avionics standards Overview ................................................................... 126
B
Bandwidth Chirp modulation ......................................................... 95 Modulation input ........................................................ 117 Noise generator .........................................................118
Basics Editor ........................................................ 106, 207, 223 Export list files ................................................... 107, 226 Fill with sensor list files ............................................. 224 Import list files ................................................... 107, 226
Baud rate RS232 interface ........................................................ 387
Bearing angle VOR .......................................................................... 137
Bench top, placing ............................................................. 28 Block data ....................................................................... 757 Boolean parameters ........................................................ 756 Brackets .......................................................................... 757 Brochures .......................................................................... 21 Browser settings
LXI ............................................................................ 394 Bytes order
Definition ................................................................... 467
C
CALibration subsystem ................................................... 452 Carrier frequency
ILS glide slope .......................................................... 144 ILS localizer .............................................................. 150 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 159 VOR .......................................................................... 134 Carrier frequency mode ILS glide slope .......................................................... 144 ILS localizer .............................................................. 150 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 159 VOR .......................................................................... 134 Carrying the instrument ..................................................... 27 Case-sensitivity SCPI ......................................................................... 753 Central storage Accessing ................................................................. 330 Change GPIB address .................................................... 404, 411 Change password Setup (security) ......................................................... 365 Change user password Setup (security) ......................................................... 365 Check front panel Key panel test ........................................................... 743 Performing ................................................................ 742 Settings ..................................................................... 742 Check touch panel Touchscreen test ....................................................... 743 Checking the instrument ................................................... 27 Chirp Modulation .................................................................. 94
CHIRp Subsystem ................................................................ 550
Chirp modulation ......................................................... 80, 92 Bandwidth ................................................................... 95 Compression ratio ....................................................... 96 Direction ...................................................................... 95 Gated signal ................................................................ 96 Pulse external settings ................................................ 97 Pulse period ................................................................ 95 Pulse width ................................................................. 96 Remoote control commands ..................................... 550 Settings ....................................................................... 94 Single trigger ............................................................... 96 State ........................................................................... 94 Subsystem ................................................................ 550 Trigger mode ...............................................................96 Trigger settings ........................................................... 97
Cleaning .......................................................................... 739 Clear
NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 232 RF output protection ................................................. 214 User menu ................................................................ 343 Clear history Undo/Redo ................................................................ 369 Clear status Remote ..................................................................... 436 Clk Syn connector ....................................................... 43, 46 Clock Amplitude .................................................................. 300 DC offset ................................................................... 301 Frequency ................................................................. 300 Phase, reset .............................................................. 301 Phase, set ................................................................. 301 Shape ....................................................................... 299 Clock synthesis ............................................................... 454 Clock synthesis inverted output ...................................... 298 Clock synthesis output .................................................... 298 Close Show SCPI command ............................................... 417 Colon ............................................................................... 757 Color Power analysis .......................................................... 247 COM/ID ILS localizer .............................................................. 156 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 161 VOR .......................................................................... 138 COM/ID code ADF ........................................................................... 166 ILS localizer .............................................................. 157 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 162 VOR .......................................................................... 139 COM/ID dash length ADF ........................................................................... 167 ILS localizer .............................................................. 158 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 163 VOR .......................................................................... 139 COM/ID depth ADF ........................................................................... 167 ILS localizer .............................................................. 157 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 162 VOR .......................................................................... 139 COM/ID dot length ADF ........................................................................... 167 ILS localizer .............................................................. 158 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 163 VOR .......................................................................... 139
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
803
R&S®SMA100B
Index
COM/ID frequency ADF ........................................................................... 167 ILS localizer .............................................................. 157 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 162 VOR .......................................................................... 139
COM/ID letter space ADF ........................................................................... 168 ILS localizer .............................................................. 158 VOR .......................................................................... 140
COM/ID letterspace ILS marker beacons .................................................. 163
COM/ID period ILS localizer ...................................................... 157, 167 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 162 VOR .......................................................................... 139
COM/ID settings ADF ........................................................................... 166
COM/ID state ADF ........................................................................... 166 ILS localizer .............................................................. 157 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 162 VOR .......................................................................... 138
COM/ID symbol space ADF ........................................................................... 167 ILS localizer .............................................................. 158 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 163 VOR .......................................................................... 140
COM/ID time schema ADF ........................................................................... 167 ILS localizer .............................................................. 158 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 162 VOR .......................................................................... 139
Combined RF frequency / level sweep Step count ................................................................. 195
Combined sweep Spacing ............................................................. 190, 193
Comma ............................................................................ 757 Command sequence
recommendation ....................................................... 772 Remote ..................................................................... 439 Commands ...................................................................... 751 Brackets .................................................................... 757 Colon ........................................................................ 757 Comma ..................................................................... 757 Command line structure ............................................ 759 Common ................................................................... 751 Double dagger .......................................................... 757 Instrument control ..................................................... 751 Overlapping .............................................................. 760 Question mark .......................................................... 757 Quotation mark ......................................................... 757 SCPI confirmed ......................................................... 751 Sequential ................................................................. 760 Syntax elements ....................................................... 757 Vertical stroke ........................................................... 757 White space .............................................................. 757 Commands of all settings SCPI list .................................................................... 313 Common commands Syntax ....................................................................... 753 Component ILS ............................................................................ 142 Compression ratio Chirp modulation ......................................................... 96
Computer name Changing .................................................................. 401 Syntax ....................................................................... 401 Use instead of IP address ......................................... 401
CONDition ....................................................................... 766 Configuration
Restoring .................................................................. 314 Restoring instrument settings ....................................311 Configure Power analysis .......................................................... 245 Configure diagram Power analysis .......................................................... 257 Configure gate mode Power analysis .......................................................... 268 Configure measurement Power analysis .......................................................... 250 Configure sensor Power analysis .......................................................... 254 Configure time mode Power analysis .......................................................... 259 Configuring LAN services ................................................ 361 Confirm unsigned Secure update policy ................................................ 356 Confirm user password Setup (security) ................................................. 364, 365 Connecting Keyboard .................................................................... 32 LAN ............................................................................. 31 Memory stick ............................................................... 32 Mouse ......................................................................... 32 Power .......................................................................... 31 To Ref In/Ref Out ........................................................ 34 To RF .......................................................................... 32 USB devices ............................................................... 32 Connection fault 169.254.*.* ................................................................ 729 Connector AC power supply ......................................................... 47 Clk Syn N .............................................................. 43, 46 EFC ............................................................................. 46 Ext ......................................................................... 43, 47 GPIB ........................................................................... 45 IEC/IEEE ..................................................................... 45 Inst Trig ....................................................................... 46 LAN ............................................................................. 45 LF .......................................................................... 43, 47 Marker User1 .............................................................. 46 Pulse Ext ............................................................... 43, 46 Pulse Sync ............................................................ 43, 47 Pulse Video ........................................................... 43, 46 Ref In .......................................................................... 46 Ref Out ....................................................................... 46 RF ......................................................................... 42, 47 Sensor ........................................................................ 42 Signal Valid ................................................................. 46 Stop ............................................................................ 46 USB ...................................................................... 41, 45 USB In ........................................................................ 45 V/GHz X-Axis .............................................................. 45 Z-Axis .......................................................................... 45 Connectors RF signal ..................................................................... 69 Context-sensitive menu ..................................................... 59 Continue Internal adjustments ................................................. 746 Control bus ...................................................................... 779
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
804
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Copy Instrument settings ................................................... 320 Several files .............................................. 318, 327, 328 Show SCPI command ............................................... 417
Counter ........................................................................... 731 Coupling mode
AM, FM, PhiM ........................................................... 117 External modulation input ..........................................117 Create New directory ............................................................ 320 Current frequency Sweep ....................................................................... 187 Current index List mode .................................................................. 200 Current level Sweep ....................................................................... 187 Customer support ............................................................ 736 Cut Instrument settings ................................................... 320 CW Frequency ................................................................... 72 CW mode Output level ................................................................. 75 CW signal Settings ....................................................................... 67
D
Data entry .......................................................................... 61 Data format
Definition ................................................................... 468 Data list
Access ...................................................................... 315 How to access .......................................................... 443 Select, edit, new ....................................................... 317 Data sheets ....................................................................... 21 Data valid ........................................................................ 779 Datasheet LXI ............................................................................ 399 Date .................................................................................740 DAV ................................................................................. 779 DDM - SDM coupling ILS glide slope .......................................................... 149 ILS localizer .............................................................. 155 DDM current ILS glide slope ......................................................... 148 ILS localizer .............................................................. 155 DDM depth ILS glide slope .......................................................... 148 ILS localizer .............................................................. 155 DDM logarithmic ILS glide slope .......................................................... 148 ILS localizer .............................................................. 156 DDM percent ILS glide slope .......................................................... 149 ILS localizer .............................................................. 156 DDM polarity ILS localizer .............................................................. 153 DDM step ILS glide slope .......................................................... 148 ILS localizer .............................................................. 155 Deactivate RF output ...................................................... 290 Deactivated licenses ....................................................... 351 Declassification ............................................................... 358 DEF ................................................................................. 756
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
Default directory Mass memory ........................................................... 441 User data .......................................................... 303, 442
Default settings ............................................... 133, 142, 165 Default values
Remote ..................................................................... 438 Define
User key action ......................................................... 347 Delay
Double pulse (PULM) ............................................... 103 PULM ........................................................................ 103 Delete Instrument settings ................................................... 320 List mode file ............................................................. 202 Delete instrument settings ............................................... 449 Delta phase RF frequency .............................................................. 79 Depth of modulation polarity ILS glide slope .......................................................... 146 Detector sensitivity Automatic level control .............................................. 216 Deviation Fixed total deviation .............................................. 87, 88 PhiM ............................................................................ 88 Deviation mode AM .............................................................................. 91 Amplitude modulation ................................................. 91 FM ............................................................................... 87 Frequency modulation ................................................ 87 Phase modulation ....................................................... 88 PhiM ............................................................................ 88 Device ID ................................................................. 350, 713 NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 232 Device reset .................................................................... 440 Device-specific commands ............................................. 751 Device-specific error messages ...................................... 725 DHCP .............................................................................. 400 Dialog boxes ..................................................................... 60 Direction Chirp modulation ......................................................... 95 VOR .......................................................................... 137 Directory Temporary data ......................................................... 441 User data .................................................................. 441 Disable Frequency display ..................................................... 359 Level display ............................................................. 359 Display Active elements .......................................................... 59 Brightness ................................................................. 339 Context-sensitive menu .............................................. 59 Info line ....................................................................... 59 Information .................................................................. 57 Keyboard layout ........................................................ 339 Lock .......................................................................... 359 On-screen keypad ...................................................... 59 Overview ..................................................................... 38 Power sensors .......................................................... 237 SCPI list .................................................................... 417 Screen saver ............................................................. 339 Settings ..................................................................... 338 Setup ........................................................................ 338 Status bar ................................................................... 57 Tab labels .................................................................... 59 Taskbar ....................................................................... 58 Tile diagram ................................................................ 57 Wait time (screen saver) .......................................... 339
805
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Display correction value UCOR ....................................................................... 220
DISPlay subsystem ......................................................... 462 Disposal .......................................................................... 739 Distribution
Noise generator .........................................................118 DNS server ...................................................................... 385 DNS suffix ....................................................................... 385 Documentation overview ................................................... 20 Double dagger .................................................................757 Double pulse delay
PULM ........................................................................ 103 Double pulse width
PULM ........................................................................ 103 DOWN ............................................................................. 756 Down frequency
ILS glide slope .......................................................... 146 Downgrade information ................................................... 733
Factory version ......................................................... 733 Min. version .............................................................. 733 Dwell time Sweep ....................................................................... 190 Dwell time mode List mode .................................................................. 201
E
Edit Editor ........................................................ 106, 208, 223 List mode data .......................................................... 203 UCOR data ............................................................... 221
Editor Basics ....................................................... 106, 207, 223 Edit ............................................................ 106, 208, 223 Fill with sensor .................................................. 208, 223 Goto .......................................................... 106, 207, 223 Save .......................................................... 106, 208, 223 Save as ..................................................... 106, 208, 223
EFC Activate ..................................................................... 292 Sensitivity .................................................................. 292
EMF display RF level ..................................................................... 340
Emulating front panel keys ................................................ 65 Emulation
IDN string .................................................................. 389 Language .................................................................. 388 Mode ......................................................................... 388 Set IDN and OPT to default ...................................... 388 Enable LAN interface ............................................................ 362 ENABle ............................................................................766 Enable registers Remote ..................................................................... 437 Enter license key ............................................................. 351 Enter password Setup (security) ......................................................... 363 EOI .................................................................................. 779 Error log .......................................................................... 735 Error messages ............................................................... 727 Adjustment data invalid (183) ................................... 726 Adjustment data missing (182) ................................. 726 Adjustment failed (180) ............................................. 726 Cannot access hardware (200) ................................. 726 Cannot access the EEPROM (202) .......................... 726 Cannot open file (460) .............................................. 726 Cannot read file (462) ............................................... 727
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
Cannot write file (461) ............................................... 727 Driver initialization failed (204) .................................. 726 Extern reference out of range or disconnected (50) . 726 File contains invalid data (465) ................................. 727 Filename missing (463) ............................................ 727 Hardware revision out of date (201) ......................... 726 Invalid EEPROM data (203) ..................................... 726 Invalid filename extension (464) ............................... 727 No current list (241) .................................................. 726 This modulation forces other modulations off (140) .. 726 Unknown list type specified (242) ............................. 726 Error Messages ............................................................... 724 device-specific .......................................................... 725 SCPI ......................................................................... 725 Error queue ..................................................................... 767 Error queue query ................................................... 693, 694 Error queues recommendations ..................................................... 772 ESE (event status enable register ) ................................ 768 ESR ................................................................................. 765 ESR (event status register) ............................................. 768 EVENt ............................................................................. 766 Event status enable register (ESE) ................................. 768 Remote ..................................................................... 436 Event status register (ESR) ............................................. 768 Remote ..................................................................... 436 Exchanging RF port ........................................................ 749 Exclude frequency ...........................................................313 Exclude level ................................................................... 314 Execute Single sweep ............................................................ 191 Trigger (list mode) ..................................................... 202 Expiration date of option ................................................. 733 Export Execute ..................................................... 109, 205, 228 SCPI ......................................................................... 317 SCPI export .............................................................. 419 SCPI list .................................................................... 418 SCPI settings ............................................................ 418 Export deactivation response .......................................... 351 Export license key ........................................................... 351 Export list files Basics ............................................................... 107, 226 Express level in Volts .......................................................................... 662 Ext AM ILS glide slope .......................................................... 144 ILS localizer .............................................................. 151 VOR .......................................................................... 135 External frequency Reference oscillator .................................................. 290
F
Factory Preset ....................................................................... 308
Factory preset Change GPIB address .............................................. 404 GPIB address ............................................................ 411
Factory version Firmware ................................................................... 733
File SCPI export .............................................................. 419
File catalog List mode .................................................................. 202
File handling .................................................................... 304 File list ............................................................................. 446
806
R&S®SMA100B
Index
File manager ................................................................... 318 File name ........................................................................ 332 File select
Dialog ........................................................................ 315 File server
Data exchange .......................................................... 330 File sharing ...................................................................... 325 File storage location ........................................................ 441 File system ...................................................................... 302
Accessing ................................................................. 325 File transfer ..................................................................... 304
From file server ......................................................... 330 FTP/SAMBA ............................................................. 371 How to ....................................................................... 325 File type selection ........................................................... 320 Filename Pulse graph ............................................................... 110 Files User data .................................................................. 302 Fill User correction data ................................. 106, 208, 223 Fill table Automatically ............................................ 106, 208, 223 UCOR ....................................................................... 221 Fill with sensor Basics ....................................................................... 224 Editor ................................................................ 208, 223 Filter Power sensors .......................................................... 238 Filter length Auto .......................................................................... 239 User-defiend ............................................................. 239 Finding out the default directory .............................. 303, 442 Firmware Factory version ......................................................... 733 Min. version .............................................................. 733 Version ...................................................................... 732 Fixed Frequency ................................................................... 72 Floating licenses ............................................................. 733 Fly ILS glide slope .......................................................... 148 ILS localizer .............................................................. 154 FM ..................................................................................... 80 Deviation ..................................................................... 86 Deviation mode ........................................................... 87 Ratio ........................................................................... 87 Subsystem ................................................................ 554 Total deviation ............................................................. 87 Format SCPI Export .............................................................. 418 FORMat subsystem ........................................................ 467 FPGA/µC Check for updates ..................................................... 749 Check for updates of external ................................... 749 Shut down after update internal ................................ 749 Update installation internal assembly ....................... 749 Update table ............................................................. 749 Frequency Annotation disable .................................................... 359 CW, fixed .................................................................... 72 LF generator ..............................................................115 LF sweep ...................................................................115 Multiplier ..................................................................... 73 Offset .......................................................................... 73 Power sensors .......................................................... 238
RF signal ..................................................................... 71 UCOR ....................................................................... 221 Frequency marker Activate ..................................................................... 198 Boost marker x .......................................................... 199 Duration .................................................................... 199 Polarity ...................................................................... 199 State ......................................................................... 198 Frequency modulation ....................................................... 86 Deviation mode ........................................................... 87 Ratio ........................................................................... 87 Subsystem ................................................................ 554 Frequency sweep Sweep type ....................................................... 186, 197 V/GHz ....................................................................... 196 X-Axis ....................................................................... 196 Frequency, internal AM ............................................................................. 115 FM ............................................................................. 115 Front panel Checking ................................................................... 742 Front panel test Performing ................................................................ 742 Front panel tour ................................................................. 37 ftp How to access the instrument ................................... 325 FTP LAN services ............................................................. 362 Function keys Overview ..................................................................... 39
G
Gated signal Chirp modulation ......................................................... 96
Gateway .......................................................................... 385 General
ILS glide slope .......................................................... 143 ILS localizer .............................................................. 150 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 159 VOR .......................................................................... 132 General configuration of instrument ................................ 337 General instrument functions User key .................................................................... 342 User menu ................................................................ 342 General instrument settings ............................................ 337 General settings ADF ........................................................................... 164 ILS ............................................................................ 140 Generating an unmodulated signal ................................... 67 Getting started ...................................................................21 Global dwell time List mode .................................................................. 201 Goto Editor ........................................................ 106, 207, 223 GPIB Bus address .............................................................. 386 Change address ................................................ 404, 411 Characteristics .......................................................... 377 Set up remote control ................................................ 411 GPIB address .................................................................. 386 Factory preset ........................................................... 411 GUI Setting ....................................................................... 341 GUI update Setup ........................................................................ 337
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
807
R&S®SMA100B
Index
H
Hard copy Create, how to .......................................................... 335 File format ......................................................... 332, 333 Print, how to .............................................................. 335
Hardcopy ......................................................................... 331 Options ..................................................................... 332
Help ............................................................................. 21, 63 HiSLIP
Protocol ..................................................................... 376 Resource string ......................................................... 374 History Undo/Redo ................................................................ 369 Host name NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 232 see computer name .................................................. 401 Hostname ........................................................................ 384 LXI ............................................................................ 393 see computer name .................................................. 401 How to Change the default directory ..................................... 443 Query hardware options ........................................... 733 Query RF assembly .................................................. 734 Use an absolute file path .......................................... 443 User key .................................................................... 348 User menu ................................................................ 344 HTTP LAN services ............................................................. 362
I
ICAO channel ILS ............................................................................ 144 ILS localizer .............................................................. 151 VOR .......................................................................... 134
Identification Emulation mode ........................................................ 388 Remote ..................................................................... 436
IDN string Emulation mode ........................................................ 389
IFC .................................................................................. 779 ILS
Glide Slope ............................................................... 143 Localizer ................................................................... 149 Marker beacons ........................................................ 158 ILS component ................................................................ 142 Impedance External modulation source .......................................117 Import Execute ..................................................... 109, 205, 228 SCPI ......................................................................... 317 Import license key ........................................................... 351 Import list files Basics ............................................................... 107, 226 Import/Export Lists .......................................................................... 203 Select file .................................. 109, 204, 205, 227, 228 Inactive licenses .............................................................. 351 Index List mode .................................................................. 200 INF .................................................................................. 756 Info line ......................................................................59, 727 Information Internal adjustments ................................................. 746
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
Input Impedance external modulations .............................. 117 Pulse Ext ..................................................................... 92 Pulse polarity ............................................................. 111 Pulse threshold ..........................................................111 Trigger impedance .....................................................111
Input connector ..................................................... 43, 46, 47 Input connectors
Stop ............................................................................ 46 Installed assembly ........................................................... 731 Instrument
Carrying ...................................................................... 27 Checking ..................................................................... 27 Lifting .......................................................................... 27 Operating site ....................................................... 27, 28 Unpacking ................................................................... 27 Instrument control ............................................................. 55 Instrument emulations ............................................. 382, 388 Instrument help ................................................................. 21 Instrument messages ...................................................... 751 Instrument security procedures ......................................... 21 Instrument settings Recall ................................................................ 438, 449 Save .................................................................. 438, 451 Instrument tour .................................................................. 36 Interface functions (GPIB bus) ................................................. 780 Interface clear ................................................................. 779 Interface messages ................................................. 751, 752 Interfaces GPIB ......................................................................... 377 USB .......................................................................... 377 Internal adjustments About ........................................................................ 739 Interrupt ........................................................................... 770 Invalid results Remote control ......................................................... 760 IP address ....................................................................... 374 Changing .................................................................. 400 Dynamic .................................................................... 384 LXI ............................................................................ 393 Not recognized .......................................................... 729 NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 232 Zeroconf .................................................................... 384 IP address Mode ............................................................. 384 IP configuration LXI ............................................................................ 395 IST ...................................................................................765 IST flag Remote ..................................................................... 437
K
Key (User) ...................................................................... 41 Access on a remote computer .................................... 65 Arrow .......................................................................... 40 Backspace .................................................................. 40 Down ........................................................................... 40 Emulation .................................................................... 65 Enter ........................................................................... 40 Esc .............................................................................. 40 Freq ............................................................................ 39 Help ............................................................................ 39 Home .......................................................................... 41 Left .............................................................................. 40 Level ........................................................................... 39
808
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Local ........................................................................... 39 Mod on/off ............................................................. 39, 82 Next window ............................................................... 41 On/Off ......................................................................... 41 On/Standby ................................................................. 39 Preset ......................................................................... 39 Resize window ............................................................ 41 RF on/off ..................................................................... 39 Right ........................................................................... 40 Setup .......................................................................... 39 Up ............................................................................... 40 Key panel test Check front panel ...................................................... 743 Keyboard On-screen ................................................................... 61 Setting ....................................................................... 341 Settings ..................................................................... 338 Setup ........................................................................ 338 Subsystem ................................................................ 473 Usage ......................................................................... 56 Keypad On-screen ................................................................... 61 Overview ..................................................................... 39 Keywords see Mnemonics ......................................................... 752
L
LAN Connecting .................................................................. 31 Interface .................................................................... 374 IP address ................................................................. 374 Main services ............................................................ 362 Reset ........................................................................ 393 Samba services ........................................................ 362 Services .................................................................... 361 VXI protocol .............................................................. 376
LAN configuration ............................................................ 399 LXI ............................................................................ 395
LAN interface Avahi ......................................................................... 362 Enable ....................................................................... 362 FTP ........................................................................... 362 HTTP ........................................................................ 362 LAN over SCPI ......................................................... 362 SMB (Samba) ........................................................... 362 SSH .......................................................................... 362 VNC .......................................................................... 362
LAN status LXI ............................................................................ 393
Landing systems Overview ................................................................... 126
Language Emulation .................................................................. 388
Last factory calibration .................................................... 732 Last full adjustment
Internal adjustments ................................................. 745 Layout
Keyboard .................................................................. 339 Left frequency
ILS localizer .............................................................. 153 Left/Right phase
ILS localizer .............................................................. 153 Level
Annotation disable .................................................... 359 Behavior (RF) ..................................................... 76, 195 Noise generator ........................................................ 121
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
Level default unit Change ..................................................................... 662
Level in SCPI in V ........................................................... 662 Level limit .......................................................................... 76 Level offset
Power sensors .......................................................... 238 RF level ....................................................................... 76 State (power sensors) ............................................... 238 Level range Attenuator settings .................................................... 213 Level settings On start-up ................................................................ 340 LF frequency sweep State .................................................................. 113, 187 LF generator Shape ........................................................................ 113 LF Out Overview ................................................................... 122 LF output ......................................................................... 119 Load impedance ....................................................... 120 Offset ........................................................................ 120 Period ........................................................................ 115 Pulse duty cycle ........................................................ 115 Pulse width ................................................................ 115 Shape ........................................................................ 113 Source .............................................................. 120, 123 Sweep reset .............................................................. 191 Trapezoid high .......................................................... 116 Trapezoid rise, fall ..................................................... 116 Triangle rise .............................................................. 116 Voltage ...................................................................... 120 LF sweep Frequency ................................................................. 115 License for software option ............................................. 733 Infos .......................................................................... 733 Lifting the instrument ......................................................... 27 Limit RF level ....................................................................... 76 List Define ....................................................................... 203 Range ....................................................................... 203 State ......................................................................... 200 Values, defining .................................................207, 222 List file Catalog ..................................................................... 202 List mode Create list automatically ............................ 106, 208, 223 Current index ............................................................ 200 Dwell time mode ....................................................... 201 Edit ............................................................................ 203 Execute trigger .......................................................... 202 Export user data ....................................... 109, 205, 228 File settings, import/export ........................ 108, 204, 227 Global dwell time ...................................................... 201 Import/export ..................................... 108, 203, 204, 227 Load from file ............................................ 109, 204, 227 Load user data .......................................................... 203 Reset ........................................................................ 202 Select file .................................................................. 202 Settings ..................................................................... 199 State ......................................................................... 200 Trigger execute ......................................................... 202 Trigger source ........................................................... 201 Load Impedance ................................................................ 120 See recall .................................................................. 311 Load instrument settings ......................................... 438, 449
809
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Loading Trying out .................................................................... 53
Local to remote switch over ............................................ 413 Lock
Display ...................................................................... 359 LSB/MSB order
Definition ................................................................... 467 LXI
Advanced configuration ............................................ 396 Browser settings ....................................................... 394 Configuration ............................................................ 430 Datasheet ................................................................. 399 Hostname ................................................................. 393 IP address ................................................................. 393 IP configuration ......................................................... 395 LAN configuration ..................................................... 395 LAN status ................................................................ 393 MAC address ............................................................ 393 Ping ........................................................................... 397 Remote trace (SCPI) ................................................ 397 Reset (LCI) ............................................................... 393 Status settings .......................................................... 392 Traicing ..................................................................... 413 LXI settings ..................................................................... 392
M
Mac address .................................................................... 385 MAC address
LXI ............................................................................ 393 Maintenance ....................................................................739 Malfunctions
reacting ..................................................................... 772 Manual interaction ............................................................. 56 Map network share
Settings ..................................................................... 320 Mapping network drives/folders
How to ....................................................................... 322 Mark frequency
Sweep ....................................................................... 198 Marker
Power analysis .......................................................... 245 Marker depth
ILS marker beacons .................................................. 160 Marker frequency
ILS marker beacons .................................................. 160 Marker User1 .................................................................... 46 Mass storage location ..................................................... 441 Max
RF level sweep ......................................................... 196 MAX ................................................................................ 756 Maximal deviation
Frequency modulation ................................................ 86 PhiM ............................................................................ 88 Measurement window Power analysis .......................................................... 244 Messages Commands ............................................................... 751 Instrument ................................................................. 751 Instrument responses ............................................... 752 Interface .................................................................... 751 Min RF level sweep ......................................................... 196 MIN .................................................................................. 756 Min. version Firmware ................................................................... 733
Min/max Y scale Power analysis .......................................................... 257
Minimum locking range ................................................... 291 Mnemonics ...................................................................... 752
Optional .................................................................... 754 Mode
AM .............................................................................. 90 Attenuator settings .................................................... 213 Emulation .................................................................. 388 Frequency modulation ................................................ 87 IP address ................................................................. 384 List ............................................................................ 201 PhiM ............................................................................ 89 PULM .......................................................................... 99 Pulse modulation ........................................................ 99 Sweep ....................................................................... 187 User variation ........................................................ 73, 78 VOR .......................................................................... 136 Modulation AM .............................................................................. 83 Analog ......................................................................... 80 Bandwidth, external input .......................................... 117 Chirp modulation ................................................... 92, 94 Chirp modulation settings ..................................... 94, 97 External coupling .......................................................117 FM ............................................................................... 83 Input impedance ........................................................117 Overview ................................................................... 121 Phase .......................................................................... 83 PhiM ............................................................................ 83 PM .............................................................................. 83 Pulse ........................................................................... 83 Source ........................................................................ 86 State ........................................................................... 86 Modulation depth AM .............................................................................. 91 Modulation sensitivity AM .............................................................................. 91 Modulations state Toggle ......................................................................... 82 Mount network drive How to ....................................................................... 322 Mounting, in a rack ............................................................ 29 Mouse Usage ......................................................................... 56 Multiple files Copy ......................................................... 318, 327, 328 Multiplier Frequency ................................................................... 73
N
Naming conventions Allowed file names .................................................... 302
NAN .................................................................................756 NAN (not a number)
Remote control ......................................................... 760 Navigation
Keys ............................................................................ 40 Navigation controls
Overview ..................................................................... 40 NDAC .............................................................................. 779 Network
Connection fails ........................................................ 729 Settings ..................................................................... 383
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
810
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Network share Mapping .................................................................... 320 Mapping, how to ....................................................... 322
Network status ................................................................ 383 New password
Setup (security) ......................................................... 365 New user password
Setup (security) ......................................................... 364 NINF ................................................................................ 756 Noise
Distribution ................................................................ 118 Noise bandwidth limitation
System bandwidth ..................................................... 118 Noise generator
Bandwidth ................................................................. 118 Noise level
Absolute system bandwidth ...................................... 121 Relative system bandwidth ....................................... 121 Noise ratio Power sensors .......................................................... 239 NRFD .............................................................................. 779 NRP see Power analysis ................................................... 240 NRP power viewer Settings ..................................................................... 235 Use S-Parameter ...................................................... 240 NRP sensor mapping ...................................................... 230 Add LAN sensor ........................................................ 232 Add sensor ................................................................ 232 Add USBTMC sensor ............................................... 232 Clear ......................................................................... 232 Connector ................................................................. 231 Device ID .................................................................. 232 Host name ................................................................ 232 IP address ................................................................. 232 Protocol ..................................................................... 231 Scan .......................................................................... 232 Sensor name .................................................... 231, 232 Serial number ........................................................... 232 Settings ..................................................................... 231 NTP Address ..................................................................... 741 NTRansition .................................................................... 766 Number of licenses ......................................................... 733 Numeric data entry ............................................................ 61 Numeric parameters .................................................. 62, 755 Numeric values Special ...................................................................... 756
O
Offset Frequency ................................................................... 73
Old password Setup (security) ......................................................... 365
Old user password Setup ........................................................................ 364
On-screen keyboard .......................................................... 62 On-screen keypad ............................................................. 59 Open source acknowledgment (OSA) ............................... 22 Open-source acknowledgments ...................................... 733 Operating mode
ILS glide slope .......................................................... 145 ILS localizer .............................................................. 152 Operating site Choosing ..................................................................... 27 Setting up the instrument ............................................ 28
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
Operation Manual ........................................................................ 56
Operation complete Remote ..................................................................... 437
Operation hours .............................................................. 731 Operation mode ............................................................... 311 Option
Expiration date .......................................................... 733 Option: expiration date .................................................... 733 Options
Analog modulation ...................................................... 80 Identification (remote) ............................................... 437 Oscillator Reference ................................................................. 288 Output Clk Syn ..................................................................... 298 LF .............................................................................. 120 SCPI list (select file) .................................................. 419 Source (LF output) .................................................... 123 OUTPut Subsystem ................................................................ 474 Output connector ......................................................... 43, 46 Output connectors Clk Syn ................................................................. 43, 46 Marker User1 .............................................................. 46 Pulse Sync ............................................................ 43, 47 RF ......................................................................... 42, 47 Stop ............................................................................ 46 V/GHz X-Axis .............................................................. 45 Z-Axis .......................................................................... 45 Output queue .................................................................. 765 Output, LF Offset ........................................................................ 120 Voltage ...................................................................... 120 Overlapping commands .................................................. 760 Preventing ................................................................. 761 Overview AM ............................................................................ 123 LF Out ....................................................................... 122
P
Parallel poll register enable Remote ..................................................................... 437
Parameters Block data ................................................................. 757 Boolean ..................................................................... 756 Entering ...................................................................... 62 Numeric values ......................................................... 755 SCPI ......................................................................... 755 Special numeric values ............................................. 756 String ........................................................................ 757 Text ........................................................................... 757
Parity RS232 interface ........................................................ 387
Password Change (security password) ..................................... 365 Change (user password (security)) ........................... 365 Confirm (security password) ..................................... 365 Confirm (user password (security)) ........................... 364 Enter (security password) ......................................... 363 New (security password) .......................................... 365 New (user password (security) ................................. 364 Old (security password) ............................................ 365 Old user password .................................................... 364 Protection level ......................................................... 355
811
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Password management Security ..................................................................... 363
Paste Instrument settings ................................................... 320
PCI bus ........................................................................... 731 Phase
Subsystem ................................................................ 661 Phase modulation ............................................................. 88
Deviation ..................................................................... 88 Deviation mode ........................................................... 88 Mode ........................................................................... 89 Ratio ........................................................................... 89 Subsystem ................................................................ 559 Phase reference ................................................................ 79 PhiM Deviation mode ........................................................... 88 Mode ........................................................................... 89 Ratio ........................................................................... 89 Settings ....................................................................... 88 Total deviation ............................................................. 88 Ping LXI ............................................................................ 397 Placing, on a bench top ..................................................... 28 PLL bandwidth .................................................................. 73 PM ..................................................................................... 80 Subsystem ................................................................ 559 Polarity Pulse generator output ............................................. 103 Pulse modulation ....................................................... 111 Position VOR .......................................................................... 137 Power Connecting the instrument .......................................... 31 UCOR ....................................................................... 221 Power analysis ................................................................ 240 Access ...................................................................... 243 Example .................................................................... 245 Options ..................................................................... 240 Trace settings ........................................................... 245 Power Analysis Diagram Power analysis .......................................................... 244 Power On .......................................................................... 39 Power sensors Activation .................................................................. 237 Aperture time ............................................................ 239 Auto once .................................................................. 239 Filter .......................................................................... 238 Filter length ............................................................... 239 Frequency ................................................................. 238 Level (average) ......................................................... 236 Level (peak) .............................................................. 236 Level offset ................................................................238 Noise ratio ................................................................. 239 Serial number ........................................................... 236 Source ...................................................................... 237 State ......................................................................... 237 State (level offset) ..................................................... 238 Timeout ..................................................................... 239 Unit ........................................................................... 236 Update ...................................................................... 234 Use default aperture time ......................................... 239 Zero .......................................................................... 237 Power Sensors Display ...................................................................... 237 Power supply Connector ................................................................... 47
Power viewer Auto once .................................................................. 239
Power-On Settings ..................................................................... 340
Power-On count .............................................................. 732 Power-On state
RF level ..................................................................... 340 Power-On/EMF
About ........................................................................ 340 RF signal ................................................................... 340 PPE ................................................................................. 765 Prefix, year, month, Day .................................................. 334 Preparing for use ............................................................... 27 Preset Factory preset ........................................................... 308 Print Hard copy ................................................................. 335 Protection Settings ..................................................................... 354 Setup ........................................................................ 353 Protection level 1 ................................................................................ 353 2 ................................................................................ 354 3, 4, 5 ........................................................................ 354 Adjustments .............................................................. 353 Calibration ................................................................. 354 Factory only .............................................................. 354 Protection level ......................................................... 355 Service department ................................................... 354 Protocol VXI ............................................................................ 376 PTRansition ..................................................................... 766 PULM Delay ......................................................................... 103 Double pulse delay ................................................... 103 Double pulse width ................................................... 103 Impedance (trigger input) .......................................... 111 Mode ........................................................................... 99 Period ....................................................................... 102 Pulse polarity (input) ..................................................111 Repetition frequency ................................................. 103 see PM ........................................................................ 83 Source ........................................................................ 84 State ........................................................................... 84 Subsystem ................................................................ 563 Threshold (pulse input) ..............................................111 Transition type ............................................................ 84 Width ......................................................................... 102 Pulse Duty cycle ..................................................................115 Length (PULM) ......................................................... 102 Period ........................................................................ 115 Width ......................................................................... 115 Width (PULM) ........................................................... 102 Pulse generator Delay ......................................................................... 103 Output polarity .......................................................... 103 Output state .............................................................. 103 Single Trigger ............................................................103 Subsystem ................................................................ 659 Width ......................................................................... 102 Pulse graph Filename ................................................................... 110 Zoom In/Out .............................................................. 110 Zoom position ............................................................110 Zooming .................................................................... 110
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
812
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Pulse modulation ............................................................... 83 Double pulse delay ................................................... 103 Double pulse width ................................................... 103 Mode ........................................................................... 99 Period ....................................................................... 102 Pulse input threshold ................................................. 111 Pulse polarity (input) ..................................................111 Repetition frequency ......................................... 102, 103 see PM ........................................................................ 83 Select pulse train file ................................................. 105 Source ........................................................................ 84 State ........................................................................... 84 Subsystem ................................................................ 563 Trigger input impedance ............................................ 111 Trigger mode .............................................................100
Pulse period Chirp modulation ......................................................... 95
Pulse Sync connector ................................................. 43, 47 Pulse train
File catalog ............................................................... 105 Import/export ............................................. 108, 204, 227 On/off time ................................................................ 106 Repetition .................................................................. 106 Select ........................................................................ 105 Pulse width Chirp modulation ......................................................... 96 Pulsed marker ILS marker beacons .................................................. 160
Q
QR code .......................................................................... 391 Queries ....................................................................751, 759
Status ........................................................................ 770 Question mark ......................................................... 757, 759 Questionable status register ........................................... 769 Quotation mark ................................................................ 757
R
R&S signed packages Secure update policy ................................................ 356
Rack installation ................................................................ 47 Rack, mounting ................................................................. 29 Radar systems
Overview ................................................................... 126 Radio navigation systems
Overview ................................................................... 126 Ratio
AM .............................................................................. 92 Amplitude modulation ................................................. 92 FM ............................................................................... 87 Frequency modulation ................................................ 87 Phase modulation ....................................................... 89 PhiM ............................................................................ 89 Readjust Automatic level control ................................................ 78 Recall Instrument settings ................................................... 314 User menu ................................................................ 343 Recall instrument settings ....................................... 438, 449 Recall intermediate ................................................. 314, 438 Recommendations remote control programming ..................................... 772 Recorded SCPI commands SCPI list .................................................................... 418
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
Redo ................................................................................368 Clear history .............................................................. 369 History ....................................................................... 369 Settings ..................................................................... 369 State ......................................................................... 369
REF deviation VOR .......................................................................... 137
Reference frequency output 1 GHz ........................................................................ 292 10 MHz, 100 MHz ..................................................... 292 Loop through ............................................................. 292
Reference oscillator ........................................................ 288 Adjustment ................................................................ 293 Adjustment frequency ............................................... 294 External frequency .................................................... 290 Output frequency ...................................................... 292 Preset ....................................................................... 290 Reference frequency, variable .................................. 291 RF off state ............................................................... 290 Source ...................................................................... 290 Synchronization bandwidth ....................................... 291 Use external tuning ................................................... 292
Registers ......................................................................... 765 Release notes ................................................................... 22 Reload
SCPI list .................................................................... 419 Remote access ............................................................... 371
Active connections .................................................... 389 DNS server ............................................................... 385 DNS suffix ................................................................. 385 GPIB address ........................................................... 386 GPIB resource (VISA resource string) ...................... 385 HISLIP resource (VISA resource string) ................... 385 Identification .............................................................. 388 IDN string .................................................................. 389 Instrument emulations .............................................. 388 IP address mode ....................................................... 384 Language .................................................................. 388 Network gateway ...................................................... 385 Network hostname .................................................... 384 Network IP address .................................................. 384 Network Mac address ............................................... 385 Network resource (Ethernet resource string) ............ 385 Network settings ....................................................... 383 Network status .......................................................... 383 OPT string ................................................................. 389 QR code .................................................................... 391 RS232 ....................................................................... 387 see Remote operation from a computer ..................... 56 Serial ......................................................................... 385 Set IDN and OPT to default ...................................... 388 Settings ..................................................................... 382 Socket resource (VISA resource string) ................... 385 Subnet mask ............................................................. 385 USB VISA resource string ........................................ 385 Visa resource strings ................................................ 385 Workgroup name ...................................................... 384 Remote control .................................................................. 64 Basics ....................................................................... 751 GPIB ..........................................................................411 Programming examples ............................................ 435 SCPI ......................................................................... 371 Source subsystem .................................................... 542 Remote operation ..............................................................65 VNC .......................................................................... 371 Remote trace LXI ............................................................................ 397
813
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Removing sensitive data ................................................. 735 REN ................................................................................. 779 Rename
File ............................................................................ 450 Instrument settings ................................................... 320 Repetition frequency Pulse modulation ...................................................... 103 Reset List mode .................................................................. 202 RF frequency (delta phase) ........................................ 79 Sweep ....................................................................... 191 Reset device parameters ................................................ 440 Reset values Remote ..................................................................... 438 Resource string VISA .......................................................................... 374 Restoring configuration ................................................... 307 Resulting file name .......................................................... 334 Retrace Sweep ....................................................................... 188 RF adapter port ............................................................... 749 RF combined sweep State ......................................................................... 187 RF connector ............................................................... 42, 47 RF frequency Configuring ................................................................. 67 RF frequency sweep State ......................................................................... 186 RF level Configuring ................................................................. 67 EMF display .............................................................. 340 Offset .......................................................................... 76 Power-On state ......................................................... 340 Setting characteristics ......................................... 76, 195 Settings ....................................................................... 74 RF level sweep State ......................................................................... 187 RF OFF mode Attenuator settings .................................................... 213 RF off state Reference oscillator .................................................. 290 RF ON, RF OFF, RF ON/OFF ........................................... 67 RF output Amplitude .................................................................... 75 Harmonic filter ............................................................. 77 Impedance .................................................................. 67 Protection .................................................................. 214 State ........................................................................... 67 RF Output Level range ................................................................. 77 RF output signal Phase .......................................................................... 79 Phase reference ......................................................... 79 RF phase Configuring ................................................................. 67 RF signal Analog modulation ...................................................... 80 Attenuator ..................................................................211 Connectors ................................................................. 69 Frequency ................................................................... 71 Power-On/EMF ......................................................... 340 User correction ......................................................... 216 Right frequency ILS localizer .............................................................. 153 Rotary knob ....................................................................... 40 User step .................................................................. 301 User variation ........................................................ 73, 78
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
RS232 Baud rate .................................................................. 387 Parity ......................................................................... 387 Remote access ......................................................... 387 Stop bits .................................................................... 387
S
S-Parameter Activate corrections .................................................. 240
Safety instructions ............................................................. 21 Samba services
SMB client ................................................................. 363 SMB server ............................................................... 363 SAMBA/SMB How to access the instrument ................................... 325 Sanitize ........................................................................... 358 Save Editor ........................................................ 106, 208, 223 Instrument settings ................................................... 313 Power analysis .......................................................... 274 User menu ................................................................ 343 Save and load ..................................................................311 Save as Editor ........................................................ 106, 208, 223 Save hard copy as bmp, jpg, png .................................................... 332, 333 Save immediate .............................................................. 313 Save instrument settings ......................................... 438, 451 Save intermediate ........................................................... 438 Save to Ref Power analysis .......................................................... 247 Save/Recall ..................................................................... 311 ADF ........................................................... 134, 142, 165 Dialog ........................................................................ 311 How to ....................................................................... 314 ILS ............................................................ 134, 142, 165 SCPI-Export .............................................................. 420 VOR .......................................................... 134, 142, 165 Saving ............................................................................... 52 Scan NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 232 SCPI Error messages ........................................................ 725 Export ....................................................................... 317 Export settings .......................................................... 418 Import ........................................................................ 317 LAN services ............................................................. 362 Output file ................................................................. 419 Parameters ............................................................... 755 Syntax ....................................................................... 753 Version ...................................................................... 374 SCPI confirmed commands ............................................ 751 SCPI export ..................................................................... 419 Select file .................................................................. 419 Show file content ...................................................... 419 SCPI Export Format ...................................................................... 418 SCPI list Commands of all settings ......................................... 313 Display ...................................................................... 417 Export ....................................................................... 418 Recorded SCPI commands ...................................... 418 Show all commands .................................................. 313 SCPI remote trace LXI ............................................................................ 397
814
R&S®SMA100B
Index
SCPI script Select ........................................................................ 347
SCPI-Export Save/Recall ............................................................... 420
Screen saver Activate ..................................................................... 341 State ......................................................................... 339 Wait time ................................................................... 339
SD card slot ....................................................................... 41 Secure update policy
All packages ............................................................. 356 Confirm unsigned ...................................................... 356 R&S signed packages .............................................. 356 Security Accept settings ......................................................... 363 Change password (setup) ......................................... 365 Change user password (setup) ................................. 365 Confirm password (setup) ......................................... 365 Confirm user password (setup) ................................. 364 Display lock ............................................................... 359 Enter password (setup) ............................................. 363 New password (setup) .............................................. 365 New user password (setup) ...................................... 364 Old password (setup) ................................................ 365 Old user password .................................................... 364 Password management ............................................ 363 Sanitize ..................................................................... 358 Secure update policy ................................................ 356 Security password .................................................... 365 Settings ..................................................................... 355 Setup ........................................................................ 353 USB storage (setup) ................................................. 357 User name (setup) .................................................... 364 User password .......................................................... 364 Volatile memory ........................................................ 358 Security password Security ..................................................................... 365 Setup ........................................................................ 365 Security procedures .......................................................... 21 Security settings .............................................................. 353 Select List mode data file ..................................................... 202 Setup file ................................................................... 347 User correction data file ............................................ 220 Select file ......................................................................... 317 Self-test Remote ..................................................................... 439 Selftests About ........................................................................ 739 Sensitive information Protecting .......................................................... 303, 310 Sensor name NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 232 Sequential commands ..................................................... 760 Serial bus ........................................................................ 731 Serial number .................................................................. 402 NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 232 Power sensors .......................................................... 236 Service manual ................................................................. 21 Service request (SRQ) ............................................ 767, 770 Service request enable register (SRE) ............................ 767 Remote ..................................................................... 439 Services LAN ........................................................................... 361 Set IDN and OPT to default Emulation mode ........................................................ 388 Set to default ................................................... 133, 142, 165
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
Set up remote control GPIB ..........................................................................411
Setting commands .......................................................... 751 Settings
Active connections .................................................... 389 ALC ........................................................................... 215 AM .............................................................................. 89 Attenuator ................................................................. 212 Automatic level control .............................................. 215 Check front panel ...................................................... 742 Display ...................................................................... 338 Instrument emulations .............................................. 388 Internal adjustments ................................................. 745 Keyboard .................................................................. 338 List mode .................................................................. 199 Managing .................................................................. 302 NRP power viewer .................................................... 235 NRP sensor mapping ................................................ 231 On power-on ............................................................. 340 Protection .................................................................. 354 Remote access ......................................................... 382 RF level ....................................................................... 74 SCPI export .............................................................. 418 Security ..................................................................... 355 UCOR ....................................................................... 219 Undo/Redo ................................................................ 369 User key .................................................................... 346 Setup Accept security settings ............................................ 363 Adjusting display ....................................................... 337 Adjusting keyboard ................................................... 337 Annotation frequency ................................................ 359 Annotation level ........................................................ 359 Change password ..................................................... 365 Change password (security) ..................................... 365 Confirm password ..................................................... 364 Confirm password (security) ..................................... 365 Display lock ............................................................... 359 Enter password (security) ......................................... 363 GUI update ............................................................... 337 Keyboard settings ..................................................... 338 Layout (keyboard) ..................................................... 339 New password .......................................................... 364 New password (security) .......................................... 365 Old password (security) ............................................ 365 Password (protection) ............................................... 355 Performing the front panel test ................................. 742 Protection level ......................................................... 355 Screen saver ............................................................. 339 Secure update policy ................................................ 356 Security password .................................................... 365 USB storage (security) .............................................. 357 User name (security) ................................................ 364 User password .......................................................... 364 Wait time ................................................................... 339 Setup files Data exchange .......................................................... 330 Setup key ........................................................................ 337 Shape LF generator ..............................................................113 LF output ................................................................... 113 Period ........................................................................ 115 Pulse duty cycle ........................................................ 115 Pulse width ................................................................ 115 Sweep ....................................................................... 189 Trapeze high ............................................................. 116
815
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Trapezoid rise, fall ..................................................... 116 Triangle rise .............................................................. 116 Shortcut to a network drives How to ....................................................................... 322 Show SCPI list .................................................................... 313 Show file content SCPI export .............................................................. 419 Show SCPI command ..................................................... 417 Close ......................................................................... 417 Copy ......................................................................... 417 Signal ILS glide slope .......................................................... 145 ILS localizer .............................................................. 152 ILS marker beacons .................................................. 160 VOR .......................................................................... 135 Signal output LF .............................................................................. 119 Signal source Analog modulation ...................................................... 80 Single Execute (list mode) ................................................... 202 Single trigger Chirp modulation ......................................................... 96 SMB (Samba) LAN services ............................................................. 362 Softkey bar see Taskbar ................................................................ 58 Source AM, FM, M ............................................................... 86 Analog modulation ...................................................... 80 LF output ........................................................... 120, 123 Power sensors .......................................................... 237 Pulse modulation ........................................................ 84 Reference oscillator .................................................. 290 Sweep trigger ............................................................ 187 Source subsystem Remote control commands ....................................... 542 Spacing Frequency sweep ............................................. 190, 193 RF frequency / level sweep .............................. 190, 193 RF level sweep ......................................................... 195 Span Frequency sweep ..................................................... 193 SRE ................................................................................. 765 SRE (service request enable register) ............................ 767 SRQ ................................................................................ 779 SRQ (service request) ............................................. 767, 770 SSH LAN services ............................................................. 362 Standard settings ............................................ 133, 142, 165 Standby ............................................................................. 39 Start Frequency sweep ..................................................... 192 Power analysis .......................................................... 245 RF level sweep ......................................................... 194 State ADF ........................................................... 133, 142, 165 Adjustment (reference oscillator) .............................. 293 AM, FM, PhiM ............................................................. 86 Automatic level control .............................................. 216 Chirp modulation ......................................................... 94 Clock synthesis ......................................................... 299 DC offset ................................................................... 300 ILS ............................................................ 133, 142, 165 LF frequency sweep .......................................... 113, 187 List mode .................................................................. 200
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
Power sensors .......................................................... 237 Pulse generator output ............................................. 103 Pulse modulation ........................................................ 84 RF frequency / level sweep ...................................... 187 RF frequency sweep ................................................. 186 RF level sweep ......................................................... 187 RF output .................................................................... 67 RF output protection ................................................. 214 Screen saver ............................................................. 339 UCOR ....................................................................... 220 Undo/Redo ................................................................ 369 VOR .......................................................... 133, 142, 165 Status Queries ..................................................................... 770 Status bar Display ........................................................................ 57 Status byte Remote ............................................................. 436, 439 Status byte (STB) ............................................................ 767 Status information ........................................................... 351 Status register Response format deinition ........................................ 468 Status registers ............................................................... 765 CONDition ................................................................. 766 ENABle ..................................................................... 766 EVENt ....................................................................... 766 model ........................................................................ 766 NTRansition .............................................................. 766 parts .......................................................................... 766 PTRansition .............................................................. 766 Status reporting system .................................................. 763 Application ................................................................ 770 Common commands ................................................. 435 Status settings LXI ............................................................................ 392 STB ................................................................................. 765 Step Frequency sweep ..................................................... 193 Linear (frequency sweep) ......................................... 193 Logarithmic (frequency sweep) ................................. 193 RF level sweep ......................................................... 195 Step Attenuator below 20 GHz Attenuator settings .................................................... 213 Step count Combined RF frequency / level sweep ..................... 195 Step width User variation ................................................ 73, 78, 301 Stop Frequency sweep ..................................................... 192 Power analysis .......................................................... 245 RF level sweep ......................................................... 194 Stop bits RS232 interface ........................................................ 387 Stop connector .................................................................. 46 Storage ............................................................................739 Storage location /usb/ .......................................................................... 302 /var/user .................................................................... 302 /var/volatile ................................................................ 302 Mass memory ........................................................... 441 Store Save .......................................................................... 311 Storing files ..................................................................... 443 String in remote commands ............................................ 757 Subcarrier depth VOR .......................................................................... 136
816
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Subcarrier frequency VOR .......................................................................... 136
Subnet mask ................................................................... 385 Subsystem
AM ............................................................................ 544 CHIRp ....................................................................... 550 FM ............................................................................. 554 Keyboard .................................................................. 473 Phase ........................................................................ 661 PM ............................................................................ 559 Power ........................................................................ 662 PULM ........................................................................ 563 Pulse generator ........................................................ 659 Suffixes ............................................................................754 Sum of depth ILS glide slope .......................................................... 147 ILS localizer .............................................................. 154 Support ............................................................................735 Sweep Center frequency ...................................................... 192 Current frequency ..................................................... 187 Current level ............................................................. 187 Dwell time ................................................................. 190 Execute single .......................................................... 191 Frequency span ........................................................ 193 Level range ............................................................... 196 Mode ......................................................................... 187 Reset ........................................................................ 191 Retrace ..................................................................... 188 Shape ....................................................................... 189 Spacing ..................................................... 190, 193, 195 Start/stop frequency .................................................. 192 Start/stop level .......................................................... 194 State (LF frequency) ......................................... 113, 187 State (RF combined) ................................................. 187 State (RF frequency) ................................................ 186 State (RF level) ......................................................... 187 Step .................................................................. 193, 195 Trigger manually ....................................................... 191 Sweep time RF sweep .................................................................. 190 Sweep type Frequency sweep ............................................. 186, 197 Switching On or off ...................................................................... 35 Sync with glide slope ILS .................................................................... 144, 151 Sync with localizer ILS .................................................................... 144, 151 Synchronization bandwidth Reference oscillator .................................................. 291 Syntax elements SCPI ......................................................................... 757 Synthesizer PLL bandwidth ............................................................ 73 System Factory preset ........................................................... 308 System bandwidth Noise level (absolute) ............................................... 121 Noise level (relative) ................................................. 121
T
Tab labels .......................................................................... 59 Temperature offset
Internal adjustments ................................................. 746 Temporary files ........................................................ 303, 310
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
Test Check front panel ...................................................... 742
Text entry ...........................................................................61 Text paramters in remote commands .............................. 757 Threshold
Pulse modulation ....................................................... 111 Tile diagram
Display ........................................................................ 57 Time
UTC .......................................................................... 740 Timeout
Filter (power sensors) ............................................... 239 Tooltips
Show ........................................................................... 63 Touchscreen ...................................................................... 38
Compared with mouse ................................................ 56 Usage ......................................................................... 56 Touchscreen test Perform ..................................................................... 743 Trace Power analysis .......................................................... 245 Trace indication Power analysis .......................................................... 247 Trace settings Power analysis .......................................................... 259 Traces Power analysis .......................................................... 245 Traicing Messages ................................................................. 413 SCPI commands ....................................................... 413 Transition PULM .......................................................................... 84 Pulse modulation ........................................................ 84 Trapezoid High (LF generator) ................................................... 116 Rise, fall .................................................................... 116 Triangle Rise ........................................................................... 116 Trigger Event (remote) .......................................................... 439 Execute (list mode) ................................................... 202 Power Sensors ......................................................... 266 Sweep, manually ...................................................... 191 Trigger mode Chirp modulation ......................................................... 96 Trigger source List mode .................................................................. 201 Sweep ....................................................................... 187 Tripped RF output protection ................................................. 214 Type AM .............................................................................. 90
U
UCOR About ........................................................................ 217 Data .......................................................................... 220 Display correction value ............................................ 220 Edit data .................................................................... 221 Export user data ....................................... 109, 205, 228 File catalog ............................................................... 220 File settings, import/export ........................ 108, 204, 227 Fill with sensor .......................................................... 225 Import/export ..................................... 108, 203, 204, 227 Load from file ............................................ 109, 204, 227 RF signal ................................................................... 216
817
R&S®SMA100B
Index
Select file .................................................................. 220 Settings ..................................................................... 219 State ......................................................................... 220 Values, defining .................................................207, 222 Undo ................................................................................368 Clear history .............................................................. 369 History ....................................................................... 369 Settings ..................................................................... 369 State ......................................................................... 369 Unpacking the instrument ................................................. 27 UP ................................................................................... 756 Up frequency ILS glide slope .......................................................... 146 Up/Down phase ILS glide slope .......................................................... 146 USB Interfaces .................................................................. 377 Storage (security) ..................................................... 357 Use default aperture time Power sensors .......................................................... 239 User correction see UCOR ................................................................ 216 User data Access ...................................................................... 315 Load from a specific directory ................................... 443 User files ......................................................................... 302 User interface Lock .......................................................................... 359 User key .......................................................................... 342 Action name .............................................................. 346 Add, change, delete action ....................................... 347 Assign actions ........................................................... 348 Define action ..................................................... 346, 347 SCPI command ......................................................... 347 Select dialog ID ......................................................... 347 Settings ..................................................................... 346 Toggle between define and execute mode ............... 347 User manual ...................................................................... 21 User menu ....................................................................... 342 Access ...................................................................... 344 Clear ......................................................................... 343 Create ....................................................................... 344 Recall ........................................................................ 343 Save .......................................................................... 343 Settings ..................................................................... 343 User name Setup (security) ......................................................... 364 User password Security ..................................................................... 364 Setup ........................................................................ 364 User preset ...................................................................... 307 User variation Activating ...................................................... 73, 78, 301 Clock synthesis ......................................................... 301 Level ..................................................................... 73, 78 RF ......................................................................... 73, 78 User-definable preset Recall ........................................................................ 343 Utility keys Overview ..................................................................... 38
V
V/GHz Frequency sweep ..................................................... 196
V/GHz X-Axis connector ................................................... 45
VAR depth VOR .......................................................................... 136
VAR/REF frequency VOR .......................................................................... 136
Variable reference frequency .......................................... 291 Varying
RF frequency and level ......................................... 73, 78 Version
Firmware ................................................................... 732 Vertical stroke .................................................................. 757 VISA ................................................................................ 374
Libraries .................................................................... 379 Resource string ......................................................... 374 Visa resource string Ethernet .................................................................... 385 GPIB ......................................................................... 385 HISLIP ...................................................................... 385 Serial ......................................................................... 385 Socket ....................................................................... 385 USB .......................................................................... 385 Visa resource strings ....................................................... 385 VNC LAN services ............................................................. 362 Using in a LAN ............................................................ 65 Volatile memory ....................................................... 303, 310 Volatile mode Activate ..................................................................... 358 VXI protocol .....................................................................376
W
Wait Remote ..................................................................... 439
Wait time Screen saver ............................................................. 339
Warnings ................................................................. 724, 727 White papers ..................................................................... 22 White space .................................................................... 757 Wi-Fi
WLAN ....................................................................... 427 Width
Double pulse (PULM) ............................................... 103 PULM ........................................................................ 102 Pulse modulation ...................................................... 102 Workgroup name ............................................................. 384
X
X-Axis Frequency sweep ..................................................... 196
Y
y-axis Power analysis .......................................................... 257
Z
Z-Axis connector ............................................................... 45 Zero
Power Sensors ......................................................... 237 Zero - Power Sensors ..................................................... 494 Zeroconf
IP address ................................................................. 729 Zeroconf (APIPA) protocol ...............................................400 Zoom In/Out
Pulse graph ............................................................... 110
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
818
R&S®SMA100B
Zoom position Pulse graph ............................................................... 110
Zooming Pulse graph ............................................................... 110
Index
User Manual 1178.3834.02 07
819
AH XSL Formatter V6.2 MR13 for Windows (x64) : 6.2.15.22885 (2015/12/14 12:50JST) Antenna House PDF Output Library 6.2.735 (Windows (x64))